JP2023073366A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A slot machine 10 may set an advantageous section including an attack mode or the like capable of reporting pressing order of a pressing order bell or a pressing order replay, may hold a shift lottery to the advantageous section on the basis of a lottery result of each game. After shifting to the advantageous section, display of a section indicator is started and display of a section indicator is completed when the advantageous section is completed, and the section indicator may indicate that the advantageous section is underway. When a bonus lottery or an attack mode lottery is not won in the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section may be extended.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal game state and a specific game state which is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
In the normal game state, a transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the specific game state;
A specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state;
Based on the game state transitions to the specific game state, or the game state transitions to the specific game state, start notification by the specific notification means based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the specific game a specific game state notification means for terminating the notification by the specific notification means based on the termination of the state;
Advantageous determination means for determining whether or not to cause an advantageous event advantageous to the player in the specific game state;
with
The specific game state notification means continues the notification by the specific notification means at least until the advantageous event occurs when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a corresponding result that causes the advantageous event. and
The game machine is characterized by comprising extension means for performing extension processing of the specific game state when the result of the advantageous determination is a non-corresponding result that the advantageous event does not occur.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control; 4 is a flowchart showing RT state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first special winning combination process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second special combination process; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a third special combination process; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a portent game number table; It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode change alerting|reporting. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flow chart which shows pushing process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number management processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing end determination processing; 4 is a flow chart showing processing for a specialized zone; 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a betting effect setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a figure which shows an example of an alerting|reporting timing table. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between an alerting|reporting timing and an additional effect. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. 10 is a flowchart showing a bonus effect setting process; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a special combination notification process; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous production|presentation setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of continuous production. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the transition lottery probability of a display mode, and a setting difference. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start mode table of a section indicator. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous section and the display of the section indicator; FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the type of advantageous section and the display mode of the section indicator; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the display start mode table of the section indicator in Modification 1; In Modified Example 2, (a) is a flowchart showing part of the lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the specific state process. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start mode table of the area indicator for specific states. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a display start mode table of a section indicator in modification 3; It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. (a) is a flow chart showing a part of the reel control process, and (b) is a flow chart showing a section display third process. 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the type of advantageous section and the display start timing of the section indicator; FIG. 16 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the type of advantageous section and the display start timing of the section indicator in modification 4; FIG. FIG. 14 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the type of advantageous section and the display start timing of the section indicator in Modified Example 5. FIG. FIG. 21 is a front view of a slot machine in Modification 6; It is a figure for demonstrating the display start mode table of a section indicator. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining a display start mode table of a section indicator in Modification 7; In Modified Example 8, (a) is a diagram showing part of the lottery table for the normal game state and the first RT state, and (b) is a flow chart showing the start waiting process. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. FIG. 4 is a timing chart for explaining display start timing of a section indicator; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a section display first process in modification 9; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the display end mode table of a section indicator. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. 9 is a flowchart showing reel control processing in the second embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing special RT state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT states. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; 4 is a flowchart showing RT state processing; It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 4th processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between a special RT state, an instruction|indication monitor, and an area indicator. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the winning modes of various replay results for the special RT state and the main stop outcomes. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; It is a flow chart which shows pushing process. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting|reporting process for special RT. (a) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the notification content and the instruction monitor during the special replay, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop result and the type of the advantageous section during the special replay. is. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a special RT state lottery table in modification 1; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT states. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the notification contents and the spot pressing points when a special combination is won; It is a flowchart which shows the alerting|reporting process for special RT. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of notification and the points to be highlighted at the time of special replay winning; 14 is a flow chart showing a special combination notification process in Modification 2. FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a notification cancellation process, and (b) is a diagram for explaining an example of a cancellation table. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting|reporting process for special RT. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the special combination in the special RT and the content of notification during the special replay; FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the winning combination and the RT state of the transition destination in Modification 3; 4 is a flowchart showing special RT state processing; FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the winning combination and the RT state of the transition destination in Modification 4; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given in Modified Example 5; 4 is a flowchart showing RT state processing; 4 is a flowchart showing special RT state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT states in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the winning modes of various replay results for the special RT state and the main stop outcomes. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; 4 is a flowchart showing special RT command reception processing by the display control device; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a notification scenario table; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting|reporting process for special RT. It is a flow chart which shows processing by a display control device at the time of special replay winning a prize. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a first special combination process in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the number of games of an advantageous area. It is a flowchart which shows game number addition lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a number-of-additions-games lottery process; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a lottery table of the number of additional games. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing game number addition processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a 1st special information lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special information setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; (a), (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary|assistant display part, (c) is a figure which shows an example of a 1st special information kind table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of games in the advantageous section and the special notification; 10 is a flowchart showing various mode lottery processing in modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd special information lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special information setting processing. (a), (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary|assistant display part, (c) is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd special information kind table. In Modified Example 2, (a) is a flowchart showing the game number addition lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the game number addition lottery process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing game number addition processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for setting an add-on command; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a third special notification lottery table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a third special notification type table. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for setting an add-on command in Modified Example 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a 3rd special information lottery table. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing second section display processing in Modification 4. FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing second section display processing in Modification 5. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a 4th special information lottery table. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting processing of an attack mode end effect; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a fourth special notification lottery table in Modification 6, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a fourth special notification lottery table in Modification 7. FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a fourth special notification type table 1 and a fourth special notification type table 2 in modified example 8; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing second section display processing in Modification 9. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating various areas in RAM of a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing data initialization processing; It is a flow chart which shows special section setting processing. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special section table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a push order notification lottery table when winning a special replay. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. (a) is a flow chart showing a game number management process, and (b) is a flow chart showing a push-up process. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting|reporting process for special replays. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a number-of-predictive-games table in modification 10; FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing game number addition processing in modification 11. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a third special notification setting process in modified example 12; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the actual number of remaining games in the advantageous section and the displayed number of remaining games in Modification 13; It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flow chart which shows post-adding effect setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special information setting processing. 29 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-additional game number lottery process in Modification 14. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a table for the number of pseudo-additional games for setting value suggestion, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of pseudo-additional games and content of suggestion. 15 is a flow chart showing second special combination processing in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flow chart showing a third special combination process; It is a figure which shows an example of the table for special zone transfer lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode change alerting|reporting. It is a flow chart which shows pushing process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by a lottery result and an auxiliary|assistant display part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is a flowchart which shows the addition processing for special zones. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition alerting|reporting timing table. It is a flow chart which shows the setting processing of the special zone end effect. 10 is a flowchart showing a process of adding lottery to be added in the zone in Modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition alerting|reporting timing table for special. FIG. 10A is a flowchart showing a process of adding a lottery to the middle of a zone in Modification 2, and FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a various addition alerting|reporting timing table. 16 is a flow chart showing a process of adding lottery to be added in the zone in Modification 3. FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of an additional notification timing table in modified examples 3 to 5; 16 is a flow chart showing setting processing of an additional effect in Modified Example 6. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting processing of an attack mode end effect; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing processing for a portable terminal in modification 7; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 29 is a flow chart showing a setting process of an attack mode ending effect in Modification 8. FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display unit in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process at the time of 1st stop ON. It is a flow chart which shows processing for addition information at the time of all stop. It is a flow chart which shows the setting processing of the post-adding effect. 10 is a flowchart showing a first stop ON effect setting process in Modification 1. FIG. In Modified Example 2, (a) is a flowchart showing effect setting processing during normal replay, and (b) is a flowchart showing processing for a selected counter. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process at the time of 1st stop ON. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing processing for notifying that the vehicle is in full stop state in Modified Example 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a process for correction. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 14 is a timing chart for explaining conditions for ending an advantageous section in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining conditions for ending an advantageous section; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the winning probability of each combination by state; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the expected net increase in the number of sheets by state; It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining number management processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing game number addition processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a 5th special information lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a 5th special information kind table. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that a 1st excess flag is set. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that a 2nd excess flag is set. It is a timing chart for explaining the relation between each excess flag and the 5th special information. In modification 1, (a) is a flowchart showing part of the remaining game number management process, (b) is a flowchart showing part of the remaining game number management process, and (c) and (b) are the fifth It is a figure which shows an example of a special information kind table. In Modified Example 2, (a) is a flowchart showing part of the remaining game number management process, (b) is a flowchart showing part of the remaining number management process, and (c) is a fifth special notification type table. It is a figure which shows an example. 14 is a flowchart showing second section display processing in modification 3. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for the 6th special information. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a sixth special notification lottery table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a sixth special notification type table. 16 is a flowchart showing a sixth special notification process in Modification 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of each 6th special information lottery table. (a) is a diagram showing a part of the sixth special notification process in Modification 5, (b) is a diagram showing a part of the sixth special notification process in Modification 6, (c) and (d) is a diagram for explaining an example of notification that an excess flag has been set. 19 is a flowchart showing part of the sixth special notification process in Modification 7. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing special section setting processing in Modification 8. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a special area table. 4 is a flowchart showing part of the number-of-games management process; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting processing of an attack mode end effect; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining a state in which the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous sections is smaller than expected in Modified Example 9; It is a flow chart which shows redistribution processing. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing game number addition processing in Modification 10. FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a process for moving the number of eliminated games, and (b) is a diagram for explaining various counter areas in the RAM of the main controller. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a sixth special notification process in modified example 11; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing CB pressing order notification processing in Modification 12. FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining a state in which the number of increased/decreased number of sheets in an advantageous section is larger than expected in Modified Example 13; It is a flow chart which shows the processing for the 7th special information. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a seventh special notification lottery table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a seventh special notification type table. 29 is a flowchart showing special section setting processing in Modification 14. FIG. (a) is a flow chart showing a part of the number-of-games management process, and (b) is a flow chart showing a part of the push-up process. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order notification table at the time of special replay winning. 15A is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number management process, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by the auxiliary display unit in Modification 15. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a 7th special information lottery table. 29 is a flowchart showing remaining number management processing in Modification 16. FIG. In Modified Example 17, (a) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for the first RT state, and (b) is a diagram showing how medals increase or decrease. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing processing for setting an add-on command in modification 18; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing first adjustment processing; 9 is a flowchart showing second adjustment processing; 10 is a flowchart showing third adjustment processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining how the predicted number of sheets is corrected; 29 is a flowchart showing remaining number management processing in Modification 19. FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining a state in which a bonus is won near the end of the advantageous section in Modification 20; 10 is a flow chart showing a sign setting process when winning a bonus. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining how the number of adjustment games is added to the number of precursor games; FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining a state in which a bonus win is won near the end of the challenge mode in Modification 21; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a sign setting process when a duplicate target combination is won in a CM; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating a mode that extension processing of challenge mode is performed. 29 is a flow chart showing a precursor setting process when a duplicate target role is won in a CM in Modification 22. FIG. (a) is a diagram for explaining how the second challenge mode is extended, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the difference in advantage between the first challenge mode and the second challenge mode. . FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the lighting start timing and the forced termination condition when the lighting start condition of the section indicator is changed in Modified Example 23; It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the state of a preliminary area and a target area. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the previous interval and the upper limit increase number in modification 24; (a) is a flow chart showing a section display second process, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the difference in advantage between the first challenge mode and the second challenge mode.

<First embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are individually driven by the stepping motor to rotate independently. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “red bell” symbol (for example, the 7th on the left reel 32L), a “white bell” symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), and a “first replay” symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L). 3rd), “second replay” symbol (e.g., 6th on left reel 32L), “red 7” symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), “watermelon” symbol (e.g., 8th on left reel 32L) , “Cherry” symbol (eg, 4th on left reel 32L), “Black BAR” symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), “White BAR” symbol (eg, 17th on left reel 32L), “LUCKY There are 11 types of symbols (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L) and "young man" symbols (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on the bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by the number of bets of medals and a line that is not activated are set. When a prize is established, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is given, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not awarded.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8(a), only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 8(b), two lower lines L3 and lower right line L4 There is a case where the combined line is the valid line and a case where only the bend line L6 is the valid line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when three medals are betted and the game is started, only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and when two medals are betted and the game is started, the lower line is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as effective lines. Also, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. The three combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward right line L5 are never regarded as effective lines. In the following, a game started with 3 medals bet is a 3-bet game, a game started with 2 medals bet is a 2-bet game, and a game started with 1 medal is bet. Also known as a one-bet game.

9 to 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

The "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. When it stops, it becomes the 1st minor winning combination. When the first minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd minor winning prize to the 26th minor winning prize have different winning symbol combinations. "White BAR" pattern, "Red 7" pattern, "Cherry" pattern, "White Bell" pattern or "LUCKY" pattern, right reel 32R "White BAR" pattern, "Youth" pattern, "White Bell" pattern, A "red 7" symbol or a "second replay" symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper stage, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the lower stage. If you do, you will win the 8th minor role. As shown in FIG. 6, the middle reel 32M has a "cherry" symbol (No. 11) and a "red bell" symbol at a position adjacent to the upstream side (No. 12), and the right reel 32R has: A "red bell" design is arranged at a position (20th) separated by one design upstream from the "white BAR" design (18th). Therefore, when the eighth minor win is established on the right-downward line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R is stopped on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th minor combination is a combination in which whether or not a prize is won is determined by the stop symbol on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, "Cherry" on the left reel 32L. The 27th minor winning prize is established when the symbol stops at the upper stage or the lower stage. In this case, the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L is up or stopped. By stopping, the 27th minor winning combination is established. When the 27th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbols on the left reel 32L stop at the upper or lower stage, and the "cherry" symbols stop together on the lower right line L4. More specifically, "cherry" symbols or "second replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols, "white bell" symbols or "cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "cherry" symbols on the right reel 32R, When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops, the 28th minor winning combination is won. When the 29th minor winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As a supplementary explanation of the relationship between the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination, when the "cherry" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, Although the 27th minor winning combination is established, the 28th minor winning combination may be established instead of the 27th minor winning combination depending on the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. That is, although the winning mode of winning the 27th minor role includes the winning mode of winning the 28th minor role, the 27th minor role winning and the 28th minor role winning are clearly distinguished and determined. is done.

The 29th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which a "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line. In other words, when the downward-sloping line L4 is the effective line, the 29th minor winning combination is established by stopping all the "watermelon" symbols downward-sloping. When the 29th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 30th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the left reel 32L "watermelon" symbol, the middle reel 32M "watermelon" symbol, and the right reel 32R "watermelon" symbol stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the 30th small Awarded for the role. When the 30th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Black BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the "bell" symbol and stop on the active line, the 31st minor winning combination is won. When the 31st minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 32nd to 35th minor wins, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 36th minor winning prize is obtained when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. , the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the activated line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the activated line. When the 36th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

A "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "black BAR" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol, or a "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "bell" symbol and the "young man" symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small winning combination is won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol (No. 7) and a "second replay" symbol are arranged at a downstream adjacent position (No. 6). "Bell" symbols (3rd, 12th, 15th, 20th) and "1st Replay" symbols are arranged at adjacent positions (2nd, 11th, 14th, 19th) on the downstream side. On the right reel 32R, the main "red bell" symbols (2nd, 5th, 12th, 20th) and adjacent positions (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) on the upstream side are "1st A "replay" pattern or a "second replay" pattern is arranged, and a "first replay" pattern is arranged at a position (11th) adjacent to the "white bell" pattern (10th) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 37th minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4, mainly the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay" symbol are tense on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M is displayed. "Bell" symbols and "Replay" symbols do not stop, which is a so-called double-tenpai-out stop result. When the 37th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"White BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R, When the "watermelon" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol stop on the activated line, the 38th small winning combination is won. In the 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper and lower stages, and the 38th minor winning combination is established, the left A "red bell" symbol on the reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the middle line L2. When the 38th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “black BAR” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 39th minor role. Although the details will be described later, the 39th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. When the 39th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 40th minor role. Although the details will be described later, the 40th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. When the 40th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 41st small Awarded for the role. When the 41st minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are provided include first to eighth replaying winnings. Further, when the second re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game. When the winning or the fifth replay winning is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state. The 1st re-game winning to the 8th re-game winning are winning modes that are established only in the 3-bet game.

State transition winnings in which only game state transition is performed include 1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning and CB winning.

When the "red 7" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, the first BB wins, and when the "white BAR" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line. , it will be the 2nd BB prize. When these BB prizes are established, the game state shifts to the BB state. Also, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" or "white bell" pattern, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" pattern, the right reel 32R has a "watermelon" pattern, a "first replay" pattern, and a "black BAR". When the symbols and stop on the active line, the CB prize is won. When the CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although it is different from winning, there is a stop outcome in which the game state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the left reel 32L has a “red bell” or “white bell” pattern, and the middle reel 32M has a “white BAR”, “LUCKY”, “red 7”, “white bell”, and “white bell” patterns. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, and the "first replay" symbol stop on the active line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Also, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" or "white bell" design, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" design, and the right reel 32R has a "white BAR" design, a "youth" design, and a "white bell" design. , “red 7” symbols, and “second replay” symbols stop on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combinations of the above symbols are referred to as transitional numbers.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 , and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56 . The second credit insert switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insert switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at once. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, an effect switch 66 is provided which is operated when the effect is generated. That is, a first credit input switch 56 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided to the left of the effect switch 66, and a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the effect switch 66. there is

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. An instruction monitor 68 having an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination, is provided. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that a setting key has been inserted and turned on are connected. It's becoming

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized driving voltage of 12 volts DC output from the power supply unit 91a in this example, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the driving voltage drops below 10 volts. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are provided via an input/output port 104. connected.

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is performed when the power is turned off by power failure processing (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected to the output side. there is Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66). The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 14 to 41. FIG.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed in the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62 is performed. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting process to each of the display units 60 to 62 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting three virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 1-bet game, one virtual medal is inserted. Perform processing for automatically inserting medals. By the way, in the present embodiment, the replay win is not established in the 2-bet game, but if the transformation is such that the replay win is established even in the 2-bet game, two coins are used in the automatic insertion process. should be set so that the virtual medals can be automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, if any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings has been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number in the CB state, and game states other than the CB state (specifically, normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB state), "1" and "3" are set as the prescribed numbers. That is, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "2", and in other than the CB state, the bet number is "1" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the CB state, if no medals have been betted, or if the number of bets is "2" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such shift notification processing will be described later in detail.

After the processing of step S206 is performed, a bet command including information on the processing result of step S206 and information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described later in detail.

After executing the processing of step S207, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S208. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, a valid line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as a valid line is performed. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the active line, and in the 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as the active lines. Also, in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as the valid line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. Thereafter, lottery processing in step S211, reel control processing in step S212, medal payout processing in step S213, RT state processing in step S214, and bonus state processing in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is acquired. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. The slot machine 10 has six types of game states, namely, a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. It is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is selected. . For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is displayed. select. In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. Then, when the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, the set value at that time is set as the current set value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for normal game state selected in the normal game state of "setting 3". Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether or not any of the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether an affirmative determination is made in step S305 with an index value IV (IV=32 to 48) including any one of the first BB, second BB, and CB. When an affirmative determination is made in step S306, a process of setting corresponding bonus winning flags (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) in the winning flag storage area 106a is performed in step S307. If a negative determination is made in step S306 or after the processing of step S307 is performed, in step S308, the winning flag of each minor combination corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 is stored in the winning flag storage area. 106a is set. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=32, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th minor winning flag, 33rd minor winning flag, 35 Set a minor winning flag. When the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=15, a winning flag indicating that the 30th and 41st minor wins have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

It should be noted that in steps S306 to S308 in a state in which the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than the 1BB, 2BB and CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, If a winning combination other than the second BB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=32, the 1st BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor combination winning flag is not set. , the 33rd minor winning combination winning flag and the 35th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=33, the 2nd BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor winning flag and the 33rd winning flag are not set. A small win flag and a 35th minor win win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, it is preferable to set each index value IV and point value PV so as not to win the first BB, second BB, and CB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S309, and in the subsequent step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV. By the way, when judging the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning the lottery (the probability of winning when IV = 13) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning the low cherry (the probability of winning when IV = 14) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 218. 1. The probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV=17) is about 1/252, and the probability of winning Chance B (probability of winning when IV=18) is about 252. 1/1. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 1/32,800, and the probability of winning the no-question bell (probability of winning when IV = 20) is about 65,500. 1. The odds of winning forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, and sandwich push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 21 to 24) are about 1/43.7, middle push bell The probability of winning 1, middle-pressed bell 2, right-pressed bell 1, and right-pressed bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=25 to 28) is about 1/21.8, respectively. The probability of winning the strong cherry stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1/1770, and the probability of winning the strong cherry stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is Approximately 1 in 4680, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is about 1 in 3280, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 2 (when IV = 35) The probability of winning is about 1 in 6550. The probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 1/3280, and the probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is About 1/6550. The probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1/13100, the probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is About 1/6550. The probability of winning chance A overlap 1, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 1, and chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=40 to 43) is about 1/3280. The probability of winning middle bell overlap 1 and middle bell overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=44, 45) is about 1/2620, respectively. The probability of winning the first BB and the second BB alone (probability of winning when IV=46, 47) is about 1/65500, respectively. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=48) is about 1/19.9. Also, the probability of not winning any role is about 1/1.96.

In addition, 0 is set for the point value PV of IV=2 to 12, 29 to 31, and 49 to 52 in the normal game state lottery table. Therefore, in the normal game state, winning is not possible with these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S312, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S311, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, stop information setting processing is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the win flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when a strong cherry is won (winning when IV=13) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the symbols corresponding to the 28th minor winning combination, the 32nd minor winning combination to the 35th minor winning combination are displayed on each reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R are set to stop symbol information. In addition, when strong cherry overlap 1 is won (winning when IV=32) and the strong cherry winning flag and the 1st BB winning flag are set, the 28th minor winning combination, the 33rd minor winning combination, the 35th minor winning combination and the 1st minor winning combination are set. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1BB winning can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In subsequent step S315, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S314, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. The order of priority is set so that when a minor winning combination and a bonus are won, the winning of the minor winning combination is preferentially established, and the winning of the bonus winning is established when the winning of the minor winning combination cannot be established. When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, when the strong cherry overlap 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th small combination, the 33rd small combination, the 35th small combination and the 1BB winning is set, the 28th is selected rather than the 1BB winning. The order of priority is set so that the small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, and the 35th small winning combination are preferentially established. Further, for example, in a situation where the 1BB win is carried over, if the normal replay is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1BB win and the 1st replay win is set, then the 1BB win is more likely than the 1BB win. The order of priority is set so that 1 re-game winning is preferentially established.

After executing the process of step S315, after executing the section display first process in step S316, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In step S402, rotation start processing for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the prescribed number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when winning is achieved when IV=24 to 31, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, sandwich push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When winning the push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bell") (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command are selected. A stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the order of operations.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the 2nd minor winning prize, the 7th minor winning prize or the 9th minor winning prize is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated first. Then, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the stop information is set so that the 1st small winning combination is established, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the 2nd small winning combination and the 7th small winning combination are set. The stop information is set so that the winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state in the normal game mode, after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slid by a maximum of 4 symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, can be stopped, and only the lower right line L4 is set as a valid line. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination.

The second minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. In addition, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also function as the seventh minor symbol and also function as the ninth minor symbol. On the left reel 32L, the second minor combination symbols (between the seventh minor combination symbols, between the ninth minor combination symbols) are arranged so that the interval is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle row, number 7 "red bell" is displayed as shown in FIG. 20(a). The pattern stops at the upper row. As a result, there remains room for establishing the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination, or the ninth minor winning combination on the right downward line L4.

The second minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. The "white BAR" pattern is arranged only at the 18th position on the middle reel 32M. Also, the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. The ninth minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. A "cherry" symbol is arranged only at the 11th position on the middle reel 32M. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol or the ninth minor winning symbol may stop on the active line, or the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the None of the ninth minor winning symbols stop on the active line.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 13th "first replay" pattern to the 17th "first replay" pattern reaches the lower stage, the second small winning combination The symbol "white BAR" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the establishment of the second minor winning combination on the right downward line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 9th "second replay" symbol to the 13th "first replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. , the seventh minor winning symbol "red 7" is stopped in the middle stage. As a result, there remains room for the 7th minor winning combination to be established on the lower right line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "white bell" pattern to the 10th "young man" pattern reaches the lower row, the 9th minor winning pattern "cherry" pattern is in the middle row. to stop. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after being slid by four symbols, the second, seventh and ninth minor symbol symbols are displayed. Cannot be stopped in the middle. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the second "LUCKY" symbol or the sixth "white bell" symbol stops in the middle stage.

When the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the seventh minor combination winning can be established.

The seventh minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" pattern is arranged only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "first replay" symbol to the 10th "white bell" symbol has reached the lower stage, FIG. As shown in , the seventh minor winning symbol "white bell" is stopped at the lower stage. As a result, the seventh minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the "second replay" symbol No. 3 reaches the lower stage, the "watermelon" symbol No. 4 is displayed as shown in FIG. Stop downstairs. The combination of the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the ninth minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the ninth minor combination winning can be established.

The ninth minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "youth" symbol. A "young man" symbol is arranged at the 15th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 11th "first replay" symbol to the 15th "youth" symbol reaches the lower row, the ninth minor winning symbol is obtained. The "young man" design stops at the bottom. As a result, the ninth minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the second minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second minor combination winning can be established.

The second minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. A "white BAR" symbol is arranged at the 18th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "white BAR" symbol reaches the lower row, the second minor winning symbol " White BAR” pattern stops at the bottom. As a result, the second minor winning combination is established on the lower right line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), the "white BAR" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the ninth minor winning symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop at the middle stage, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage. In this case, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of "white bell" pattern ("red bell" pattern), "LUCKY" pattern ("white bell" pattern), and "watermelon" pattern ("first replay" pattern) shifts as shown in FIG. It is a result.

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 2nd minor winning combination and the 7th minor winning combination are established. It is one of a case where a prize is established, a case where a ninth minor winning combination is established, and a case where the transition rolls are stopped.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the first minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the first minor combination symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

A "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol, which are first minor bonus symbols, are arranged on the right reel 32R such that an interval between the first minor bonus symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the first minor win is established regardless of the operation timing.

In the case of winning the pressing order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operating sequences, the first minor winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another order of operation, depending on the timing of the operation, a small winning combination will be established or the transitional number will stop on the effective line. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 38th minor winning prize is established regardless of the operation order and timing, and if the no-question bell is won, regardless of the operation order and timing. 1 small role winning is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S415. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S416, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game winning to the eighth re-game winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins are established, the medal payout processing is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins are established, the re-game setting processing is performed to change the game state to the re-game state. , to end the medal payout process. In the above-described start waiting process (step S204), the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the RT state processing of step S214 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the activated line. When the transition roll has stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state. When the current game state is the normal game state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S501 that the transitional number has not stopped on the activated line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second replay winning combination is determined based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether or not it is established. When the second replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process is terminated. In addition, when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line under a game state other than the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the process proceeds to step S503. , the first RT setting flag is set, and this processing ends.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the "setting 3" first RT state. When compared with the lottery table for the normal game state (see FIG. 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 5, and the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=6 to 52 is equal to each winning probability in the normal game state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/67.0, and the probability of winning when IV=2 to 5 is about 1/32.8. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22 , when IV=1 is won, normal replay is won, and when IV=2 is won, first promotion replay 1 is won, and IV If it is won at IV = 3, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 2, if it is won at IV = 4, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 3, and it will be won at IV = 5 If so, the first promotion replay 4 will be won. The probability of winning at any of IV=1-5 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning the normal replay under the normal game state is also about 1/7.30. That is, when the game state shifts to the 1st RT state, each type of small win, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the normal game state, and a prize-winning mode in which the benefit of replay is given. changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first re-game winning that does not transition to the game state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning, the third re-game winning that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated when winning the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 in addition to winning the pressing order bell described above. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that are turned on.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When winning the first promotion replay 1 to 4 The third replay win is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one operation order among the six operation orders, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation orders. attached.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th to 8th replays are not associated with any of the above 6 types of operation orders. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth replays, even if the first promoted replays 2 to 4 are won, no prizes are won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.例文帳に追加

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is divided into the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, in the first promotion replay 3, the 7th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and in the first promotion replay 4 Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, in any of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replays are the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations in which the third replay win is established. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation order corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally established. This is because it may be possible to Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other overlapping roles.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second regame winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third replay win has been established. When the third replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and the process ends. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the game state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see FIG. 22), the lottery table for the second RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 10, and has the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=11 to 52 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/13.2, the probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is about 1/10.5, and IV = 9 , 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1 in 7.00. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150. That is, in the case of shifting to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning that does not change the game state, the second re-game winning that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth re-game winning that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth re-game winning Winning a prize is established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the above-described first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and second promotion replay 1 Even when the 2 promotion replay 2 is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command.

FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When fall replay 1 to fall replay 3 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay win or the second replay win is established without fail. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first regame winning, the fourth replay winning, and the fifth replay winning is established without fail. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, the first re-game winning or the fourth re-game winning is established without fail.

Incidentally, the number attached to the fourth replay in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth replay win is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination of loose stitches, and "2" corresponds to a symbol combination of red 7, red 7, and black BAR middle stop (see FIG. 11). For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that becomes a loose eye stops and the fourth replay win is established, or the red 7・The red 7 and black BAR middle stop symbol combination is stopped, and the 4th replay win is established.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize has been established. If the fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-game winning have not been established, the processing is terminated as it is. When the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. and terminate this process.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the game state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the 3RT state based on the fact that the 3RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the 3RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a lottery table for the 3rd RT state selected in the 3rd RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the 2nd RT state (see FIG. 24), the lottery table for the 3rd RT state has different point values PV for IV=9 to 12, and the same point values PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=1-8, 13-52 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, IV=9, 10 , and the probability of winning at IV=11 and 12 is about 1/7.00. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 3rd RT state, each role type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the 2nd RT state, and a prize-winning mode in which the privilege of replay is given. changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 2nd re-game winning that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 6th re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 6th re-game winning that does not shift the game state The 7 re-game winning, the 8th re-game winning, and the 3 re-game winning to shift to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), even when BAR replay 1 and BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Set stop information as much as possible.

FIG. 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the BAR replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the seventh replay winning prize, or the third replay winning prize. is always established. When the BAR replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the eighth replay winning prize, and the third replay winning prize. is always established.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the BB state or the CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, in step S602, it is determined whether or not any one of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag and CB winning flag is set. If any winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not CB winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. When CB winning is established, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 and S605, the game state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly described.

"Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "Watermelon" symbols, "First Replay" symbols or "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R. , stops on the active line, it is a CB prize. The CB symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R such that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The main controller 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached "2" instead of "3". is set as a valid line.

At step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 48, and "16384" is set as the point value for IV=49 to 52. is set (see FIG. 17, etc. for the correspondence between the IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning the CB small and medium hand 1 (probability of winning when IV = 49) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning the CB small and medium hand 2 (IV = 50 The probability of winning when IV = 51) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small and medium role 3 (probability of winning when IV = 51) is about 1/4.00, CB The probability of winning the small and medium combination 4 (the probability of winning when IV=52) is about 1/4.00. No outlier events occur.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, even if any of the CB small and medium winning combination 1 to CB small and medium winning combination 4 is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, some kind of small winning combination will be won. It will definitely come true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, 15 medals will be awarded when the 1st minor winning combination, 27th minor winning combination, 31st minor winning combination, 36th minor winning combination to 38th minor winning combination are established. When the payout is performed and the 2nd minor role winning ~ 26th minor role winning, the 28th minor role winning ~ 30th minor role winning, and the 32nd minor role winning ~ 35th minor role winning are established, 14 sheets Medals are paid out. In other words, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out when the state is shifted to the CB state.

In place of or in addition to the CB as the winning hand and the CB state as the gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that enables the execution of one game (JAC game) as the winning hand, and the winning of the single bonus (winning a prize) ), there may be an SB state to transition to based on.

Returning to the description of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether or not the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize has been established.

When any BB prize is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. flag is set. Thereafter, in step S612, 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and 216 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61. FIG. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the game state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected. .

FIG. 28 is a lottery table for the BB state selected in the BB state transitioning to the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1-28 and 32-52, and "21845" is set as the point value for IV=29-31. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the BB small hand 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1/3.00, and the probability of winning the BB small hand 2 (IV = 33 ) is about 1/3.00, and the probability of winning the BB medium/small combination 3 (probability of winning when IV=34) is about 1/3.00. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 65500.

FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. As described above, the first minor winning combination is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, even if any of the BB small win 1, the BB small win 2, and the BB small win 3 is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first small win win, Either the 39th minor winning prize or the 40th minor winning prize is established without fail. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, nine medals are paid out when the 1st minor winning combination, the 39th minor winning combination, and the 40th minor winning combination are established. Since the probability of being out in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a game state in which 9 medals are paid out with a very high probability.

If a negative determination is made in step S609 and any BB prize is established, a carryover command is set in step S613. The carry-over command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to let the player know that the bonus winning has not been established in the bonus winning game, resulting in a so-called carry-over state, and the carry-over command is a timer interrupt process. is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110).

Here, in the present embodiment, winning other bonuses is restricted in the game played in the carryover state. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal game state (Fig. 17), if a winning combination with a bonus (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) of IV = 32 to 48 is won, the corresponding bonus is determined. Winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, when a winning combination with a small winning combination of IV=32 to 45 is won, the winning flag for each of these small winning combinations is set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is not set. Only prizes are valid. In other words, the carry-over state can also be said to be a state in which bonus lottery is restricted.

When the gaming state has shifted to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and end determination processing is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts has become 0, and when it has become 0, the process of clearing the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is performed. Also, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, the end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game is set. Note that the end determination processing will be described later in detail.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state is returned to the game state when the CB winning was established. For example, when the CB winning is established under the normal game state, the normal gaming state is restored after the CB state is ended, and when the CB winning is established under the 3RT state, the 3RT state is established after the CB state is ended. return to On the other hand, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether the corresponding BB prize is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB prize is established under the second RT state, the normal game state is entered. By the way, when shifting to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When transitioning to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of approximately 144 (=9×24-3×24) medals until the BB state ends.

If none of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, and CB winning flag are set (NO in step S602), and none of the first BB winning prize, second BB winning prize, and CB winning prize are established, carry over. When a command is set (when the processing of step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout number counter in steps S605 and S612, when end determination processing is performed in step S614, , the process advances to step S606 to set the status command. Here, the state command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game). Set the status command corresponding to the set flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

<Outline of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the game state transition will be described with reference to FIG. Illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the game state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state shifts to the first RT state by stopping the shift roll on the effective line, and the game state shifts to the BB state when the BB prize is established. The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state and the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the normal game state does not shift to the second RT state and the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the game state is the first RT state, the game state shifts to the second RT state when the third regame winning is established. The third replay win is established when one of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operation (see FIG. 23(a)). . In the lottery process using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the shift to the 3rd RT state are not won, so the state does not shift from the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state.

Further, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state. The first RT state does not transition to the third RT state.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning prize and the fifth replay winning prize are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (Fig. 23 (b) )reference). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the game state is the 3rd RT state, the game state shifts to the 2nd RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay win is established when BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(c)). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

In the slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages six types of game states, namely, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the BB state, and the CB state. , attack mode (including additional special zone), VB mode (including special additional zone), and BB mode.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing transition of each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

When the normal mode or the challenge mode is shifted to the BB mode, a lottery for transition to the challenge mode and a lottery for transition to the attack mode are performed in the BB mode. When the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the attack mode after the BB mode is ended, and when the lottery for the shift to the challenge mode is won, the mode is shifted to the challenge mode after the BB mode is ended. When neither transition lottery is won, the game shifts to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the attack mode is shifted to the BB mode, the attack mode is restored after the BB mode ends. When the VB mode is shifted to the BB mode, the VB mode is restored after the BB mode is terminated.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "pressing order replay"). This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for transition to the challenge mode and a lottery for transition to the attack mode are performed. When the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to the challenge mode, and when the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to the attack mode. The normal mode does not shift to the VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state and CB state. However, in the normal mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins, so it is rare to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state. It almost corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the second RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The challenge mode is a display mode in which the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins, as in the normal mode. In challenge mode, a lottery for transition to attack mode is held. However, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode in the normal mode. In other words, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which the operation order is not notified as in the normal mode, but the transition to the attack mode is facilitated. Transition to attack mode When the lottery is won, the challenge mode is transitioned to the attack mode. When the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) without winning the transition lottery, the challenge mode is shifted to the normal mode. Challenge mode does not switch to VB mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the challenge mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when winning the replay of the pressing order, so the transition to the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state is rare, and corresponds to the normal game state or the 1st RT state. It will be done. In the challenge mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the second RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. The attack mode consists of 4 attack modes, 1st attack mode to 4th attack mode, which have different transition probabilities to VB mode. are more likely to migrate. When the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is won, the attack mode is shifted to the VB mode. Shift to VB mode When the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the attack mode shifts to the normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set so that the probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode are different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode is set to be the highest in the fourth attack mode and the lowest in the first attack mode. , 3rd attack mode, and 4th attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode increases in this order.

The attack mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, and CB state. However, in the attack mode, since the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins, the player operates the stop switches 42 in the notified order of operation. When ∼44 is operated, it almost corresponds to the second RT state. In the attack mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the second RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the attack mode.

The VB mode, like the attack mode, is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. The difference between the VB mode and the attack mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, in the attack mode, the operation order for establishing the first replay winning prize is notified. , in the VB mode, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is announced (see FIG. 23(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell is won and when the pressing order replay is won, and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won. If so, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is notified. Therefore, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order, the VB mode substantially corresponds to the third RT state. In the VB mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 every time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the VB mode continues at least 25 games after the game state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

Regarding the transition of the display mode when the number of medals possessed by the player increases, the general flow is to shift from the normal mode to the challenge mode, shift from the challenge mode to the attack mode, and return from the attack mode to the normal mode. . In the attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is performed. Therefore, when a loop occurs in which the attack mode shifts to the VB mode and returns from the VB mode to the attack mode, the player expects to increase the number of owned medals. can.

As described above, when the normal mode and the challenge mode are compared, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode is higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone in which a transition to the attack mode is expected.

In addition, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set in the attack mode, and the winning probability of the transition lottery to the VB mode differs in each attack mode. And when it transfers to attack mode from normal mode or challenge mode, it transfers to 1st attack mode fundamentally. In the first attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode and a lottery for transition to the second attack mode are held. If the lottery for transition to the second attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the second attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for transition to the VB mode is increased. In the second attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode and a lottery for transition to the third attack mode are held. When the lottery for transition to the third attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the third attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for transition to the VB mode is increased. Then, in the third attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode and a lottery for transition to the fourth attack mode are performed. When the lottery for shifting to the fourth attack mode is won, the mode shifts to the fourth attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases.

Therefore, when transitioning to the attack mode, the attack mode is promoted from the first attack mode to the second attack mode to the third attack mode to the fourth attack mode, thereby increasing the probability of transition to the VB mode. A loop between the mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of owned medals in each display mode of the attack mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state are alternated by winning a prize in each replay or by stopping a transitional result. As described above, depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped. In addition, in the attack mode and VB mode, when the bell is won in the order of pressing, the operation order that enables the establishment of the first minor winning combination is announced, and an increase in owned medals can be expected.

The configuration related to the display mode will be described below.

The configuration related to the display mode can be roughly divided into (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) processing based on the winning result. and (4) processing related to notification effects on the sub side. The steps will be described in order below.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
(1) Display mode transition lottery processing is performed in the lottery result correspondence processing (step S312) of the lottery processing (FIG. 16) by the main controller 101. FIG. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31 .

In step S701, as the lottery results of this time, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chances A, B and middle bell, strong cherry duplicates 1 and 2, weak cherry duplicates 1 and 2, strong watermelon duplicates 1 and 2. , weak watermelon overlap 1, 2, chance A overlap 1, 2, chance B overlap 1, 2, middle bell overlap 1, 2 (for example, see FIG. 17, IV = 13 to 19, 32 to 45, below, these roles collectively referred to as a “special role”). If the result of the lottery is a specific combination, it is determined in step S702 whether or not the bonus winning flag of either the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag has already been set.

In the process of step S702, if the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag has already been set, it means that it is in the carryover state, and does not include the games winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. That is, if it is determined that the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag has not already been set in step S702, the 1BB or the 1BB or the 1BB or It also includes the case of winning a special role that is duplicate winning with the second BB. In other words, in the carry-over state, if a specific combination that is duplicate winning with the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, an affirmative determination is made in step S702.

If a negative determination is made in step S702, processing for switching the display mode based on the specific combination in steps S703 to S709 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined at step S701 that the special winning combination is not won or if the bonus winning flag is set at step S702, then at steps S710 to S713, processing for transitioning to the display mode, etc. is performed.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S701 that the winning of the special combination is determined and in step S702 it is determined that the bonus winning flag is not set, in step S703 the current gaming state is changed. It is determined whether it is in the normal game state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined in step S704 whether or not an attack mode win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the attack mode transition lottery and is cleared when shifting to the attack mode. When a negative determination is made in step S704, the first special combination process is executed in step S705.

<1st Special Win Process>
The first special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the first special combination process is performed means the normal game state or the first RT state and the attack mode is not won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first special winning process, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether the display mode should be shifted to the challenge mode, and a transition lottery to determine whether the display mode should be shifted to the attack mode. Further, in the first special combination process, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, the process for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is performed.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. When the challenge mode is not in progress means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal table is obtained as a table for attack mode lottery from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 in step S802. On the other hand, if the determination in step S801 is affirmative, in step S803, a challenge mode table is acquired from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 as a table for attack mode lottery. In the normal-time table and the challenge-mode table, the probability of transition to the attack mode is set according to the type of special hand. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the attack mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In addition, the probability of transition to attack mode is different between the normal table and the challenge mode table, and the probability of transition to attack mode is higher in the challenge mode table than in the normal table. is set to

After acquiring the attack mode transition lottery table in step S802 or step S803, attack mode lottery processing is executed in step S804. In this process, the lottery counters are obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table obtained in step S802 or step S803 to perform a lottery for transition to the attack mode.

In step S805, based on the processing result of step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for switching to the attack mode has been won. If the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, it is determined in step S806 whether or not the attack mode won this time is the super attack mode. The super attack mode is an attack mode that starts after passing through a special zone. For example, if the initial number of games in the normal attack mode is 50, in the super attack mode, the attack mode is started with the number of games added to the initial number of games of 50 plus the number of games added in the special zone. be. Therefore, the degree of advantage for the player differs between the normal attack mode and the super attack mode, and the super attack mode is more advantageous for the player than the attack mode. The super attack mode is set so that a portion (for example, 1%) of winning the attack mode in the attack mode lottery process of step S804 wins.

It should be noted that the odds of winning the super attack mode may differ between when the normal table is obtained (step S802) and when the challenge mode table is obtained (step S803). If the winning probability of the super attack mode is higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode, the superiority of the challenge mode is guaranteed. In addition, although the probability of winning the attack mode is lower than that of the challenge mode in the normal state, it may be set so that the ratio of the super attack mode at the time of winning is increased. Furthermore, the probability of winning the super attack mode or the ratio of the super attack mode when the attack mode is won may be varied according to the type of the specific combination.

If it is determined in step S806 that the super attack mode has been won, then in step S807 a process of setting a special zone winning flag is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S806, or after the processing of step S807 is executed, processing of setting an attack mode winning flag is performed in step S808. That is, when the attack mode wins, the attack mode win flag is set, and part of them (when the super attack mode wins) sets the specialized zone win flag.

After performing the process of step S808, the process for setting the portent mode is performed in steps S809 to S812. Omen mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that suggests winning in attack mode, challenge mode, etc. is likely to occur. will be announced. The Omen Mode lasts from 0 to 32 games, and the number of games that the Omen Mode continues to play varies depending on the type of attack mode, challenge mode, etc. won and whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. ing. In addition, if attack mode, challenge mode, etc. are won at the same time as the bonus, the winning notification of the bonus will be performed after the omen mode, and after the bonus state ends, the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. will be won. A notification will be made of what happened. Further, when the number of portent games is set to 0 games, winning notification is performed without going through the portent mode.

Specifically, in step S809, first, a process of acquiring the precursor game number table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. As shown in FIG. 35, in the predictive game number table, the number of predictive games to be selected is set differently depending on the current display mode (normal mode or challenge mode) and whether or not a bonus is simultaneously won. . Specifically, when the current display mode is the normal mode and when the attack mode is won, if the bonus is not simultaneously won, 1 game to 5 games are selected at 80%, and 6 games are selected. Games ~ 10 games are selected at 20%. On the other hand, even if the current display mode is the normal mode, if the attack mode and the bonus are simultaneously won, the 1st to 5th games are selected at 10%, and the 6th to 10th games are selected at 20%. 11-20 games are selected at 50% and 21-32 games are selected at 20%. That is, when the display mode is the normal mode, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number when the bonus is won at the same time than when the bonus is not won at the same time. In other words, if the bonus is not won at the same time, the winning of the attack mode will be announced in a relatively short number of games from the attack mode winning game. On the other hand, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 games is selected as the number of precursor games regardless of whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. In other words, in this case, the premonition mode is not set, and the winning notification of the attack mode is performed in the next game of the winning game.

In addition, when winning the super attack mode, which is an attack mode with an additional specialized zone, if the bonus is not simultaneously won, the 1st to 5th games are selected at 70%, and the 6th to 10th games are selected at 30%. Selected in %. On the other hand, if the bonus is simultaneously won at the time of winning the attack mode, the 1st to 5th games are not selected, the 6th to 10th games are selected at 20%, and the 11th to 20th games are selected at 30%. 21st to 32nd games are selected at 50%. That is, even when the super attack mode is won, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number when the bonus is simultaneously won than when the bonus is not simultaneously won, and when the bonus is not simultaneously won. Then, the winning of the super attack mode is reported in a relatively short number of games from the winning game of the super attack mode. Even when the super attack mode is won, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 games is selected as the precursor game number regardless of whether the bonus is simultaneously won. That is, in this case, the premonition mode is not set, and the winning notification of the super attack mode is performed in the next game of the winning game.

In step S810, a lottery process for the number of games in the current portent mode is performed based on the portent game number table acquired in step S809 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. Then, in step S811, a process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the omen counter reaches 0, the omen mode ends, and winning notification of the winning of the transition lottery for the attack mode or the like is performed.

In step S812, a process of setting the portent command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device, is executed. The portent command includes the result of the lottery that triggered the portent mode (the display mode to be shifted after the portent mode, BB mode and attack mode in the case of step S812) and information on the number of portent games. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the portent command will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S812, the first special combination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S805 that the attack mode transition lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, a challenge mode lottery process is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, a table for challenge mode lottery is acquired from various table storage area 105 a of ROM 105 , and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106 e of RAM 106 . In the table for the challenge mode lottery, the probability of shifting to the challenge mode is set according to the type of the special combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the challenge mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries.

The case where step S813 is executed includes the case where the display mode is the challenge mode. In this case also, the challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S813, and the table for the lottery is common to the normal mode and the challenge mode. with a table. As in steps S801 to S803, the lottery table may be changed depending on whether the challenge mode is on or not.

In step S814, it is determined whether or not the player wins the challenge mode based on the result of the process in step S813. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If the game mode is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, in step S816, a process of setting a challenge mode win flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is executed.

After the processing of step S816 is performed, setting processing for the precursor mode is performed in steps S817 to S820 in the same manner as in steps S809 to S812. That is, in step S817, a precursor game number table is obtained, in step S818, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed, in step S819, the number of precursor games is set, in step S820, a precursor command is set, End the first special combination process.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the predictive game number table obtained in step S817, when the challenge mode alone is won, games 1 to 5 are selected at 90%, and games 6 to 10 are selected at 10%. Selected in %. On the other hand, if the challenge mode is won at the same time as the bonus, games 1 to 5 are selected at 20%, games 6 to 10 are selected at 30%, and games 11 to 20 are selected at 50%. be done. That is, even when the challenge mode is won, if the bonus is won at the same time, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number than if the bonus is not won at the same time, and if the bonus is not won at the same time, , the winning of the challenge mode is reported in a relatively short number of games from the winning game of the challenge mode.

In addition to the number of omen games, regardless of whether the bonus is won at the same time, the number of omen games that are longer in attack mode than in challenge mode is likely to be selected, and the omen game that is longer in super attack mode than in attack mode. The number is easily selected, and if a display mode advantageous to the player is won, a long predictive game number is likely to be selected. In addition, when the bonus is not won at the same time, the number of omen games of 10 games or less is selected, and if the omen mode continues for 11 games or more, it is confirmed that the bonus and the bonus are won at the same time. do. Also, even if the bonus is won at the same time, the number of premonition games of 20 games or less is selected in the challenge mode and the bonus at the same time. In simultaneous winning, the number of precursor games of 21 games or more is also selected, and when the precursor mode continues for 21 games or more, bonus+attack mode or super attack mode is determined. In this way, the enjoyment of predicting the winning content in relation to the number of precursor games is added.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when winning a special combination, if the attack mode, challenge mode, or the like is not won, the game may shift to the pseudo-prediction mode. Although such processing will be described later, the number of games set as the pseudo precursor mode is any one of 1 game to 20 games. Therefore, the win suggesting effect is generated frequently over 21 games or more, so that the portent mode or the pseudo portent mode shifted with the specific role opportunity is determined to be the portent mode.

If it is determined in step S815 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, then in steps S821 to S825, processing for adding the continuation game of the challenge mode is performed. That is, in step S821, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S822, and lottery processing for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is executed.

Here, the addition means adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode or the attack mode, and the added number of games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of continuous games. In step S822, a value to be added to the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for the lottery for the number of added games in the challenge mode is obtained from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is obtained from the counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The table for the lottery for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is set so that the number of additional games increases according to the type of the specific role. For example, in Strong Cherry, 30 games are added to the challenge mode with a probability of 80%, and 50 games are added with a probability of 20%. Also, in weak cherries, 5 games are added with a probability of 80%, and 20 games are added with a probability of 20%.

In step S823, a process for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is performed. In this process, a counter for managing the number of continuous games in the challenge mode (more specifically, a challenge mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) is set to a value corresponding to the number of additional games selected in step S822. Perform addition processing. Then, in step S824, after performing the process of setting the additional command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the first special combination process is terminated. The add-on command includes information that the add-on has occurred, the number of add-on games, and the target (challenge mode or attack mode) of the add-on. The processing on the side of the display control device 81 that receives the add command will be described in detail later, but in the display control device 81, based on the reception of the add command, the add command as notification of the information included in these add commands is displayed. Notification (additional production) is performed.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S821, the process proceeds to step S825. In step S825, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first special combination process is terminated. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the conditions for adding the number of games in the challenge mode are satisfied. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode is added when the bonus ends. That is, it is set so that the game to which the additional notification is performed differs depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if a negative determination is made in step S703, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S704, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second RT state. If it is in the second RT state, it is determined in step S707 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the VB mode transition lottery and is cleared when shifting to the VB mode. If a negative determination is made in step S707, a second special combination process is executed in step S708. If a negative determination is made in step S706, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the third special combination process is executed in step S709.

<Second Special Win Process>
The second special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the second special win process is performed means that the player is in the second RT state and the VB mode is not won. The attack mode corresponds to the display mode in this case. In the second special winning process, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether the display mode should be transitioned to the VB mode. In addition, in the second special combination process, a lottery for promotion of the rank of the attack mode is performed, and a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S901, processing for grasping the rank of the attack mode is performed. As already explained, in the present embodiment, four attack mode ranks of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are provided, and each rank has a different probability of transition to the VB mode. Therefore, in step S901, it is determined which of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode the rank of the current attack mode is.

At step S902, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the attack mode rank grasped at step S901 is obtained from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of special combination. For example, between strong cherry 1 and weak cherry, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherry 1 than for weak cherry. In the VB mode lottery table of each rank, the probability of transition to VB mode is different as a whole, and the probability of transition to VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. , so that the probability of transition to VB mode is higher in the third attack mode than in the second attack mode, so that the fourth attack mode is more likely to enter the VB mode than the third attack mode. is set so that the transition probability of

In step S903, the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 are used to perform a VB mode transition lottery. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S903 corresponds to VB mode winning.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, a process of setting a VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S905. After that, in steps S906 to S909, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, the number of precursor games table is acquired in step S906, the number of precursor games is drawn in step S907, the number of precursor games is set in step S908, and the precursor command is set in step S909. End the role process. However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, the number of premonitory games is set to 0 for all VB mode wins in the attack mode. Therefore, if the player wins the VB mode during the attack mode, the winning is announced in the next game.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processing for increasing the rank of the attack mode.

In step S910, attack mode promotion lottery processing is performed. In this process, a promotion lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105 a of the ROM 105 and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106 . A plurality of tables for promotion lottery are provided according to the rank of the attack mode. Specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, a table for the third attack mode, and a total Three (the promotion lottery is not performed in the situation staying in the 4th attack mode) is provided. In each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In addition, in the table for each attack mode, the table for the second attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the first attack mode. The table for attack mode is set so that the promotion probability is lower, and as the rank of attack mode is promoted, it is set so that it becomes difficult to be promoted to the next rank.

In step S911, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S910 was promotion winning. If the player wins promotion, the attack mode promotion process is performed in step S912. In this process, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten to a rank flag one level higher than the rank flag corresponding to the current attack mode rank. Thereafter, in step S913, a process of setting the promotion command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. The elevate command contains information about the attack mode to elevate to. Upon receiving the promotion command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so as to perform an effect for the attack mode of the rank of the promotion destination. As the effect for the attack mode in the auxiliary display section 65, for example, a different background color effect is set according to the rank of the attack mode. In addition to notifying that the rank has been promoted, control is performed so that an effect for the attack mode is performed with a background color corresponding to the rank of the destination of the promotion.

If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the processing of step S913 is executed, processing for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed in steps S915 to S920.

That is, in step S914, lottery processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In the additional lottery process, tables for attack mode additional lottery are acquired from various table storage area 105 a of ROM 105 , and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106 e of RAM 106 . The attack mode additional lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery differs depending on the type of specific combination. For example, strong cherries win the additional lottery with a probability of 80%, and weak cherries win the additional lottery with a probability of 20%. Note that the winning probability may be varied according to the rank of the attack mode. Then, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. When it is determined that the additional lottery is not won, the process of the second special combination is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S917, and lottery processing for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for lottery for the number of added games in attack mode is acquired from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. FIG. The attack mode additional game number lottery table is set so that the additional game number differs according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in the strong cherry, 20 games are added to the attack mode with a probability of 90%, and 80 games are added with a probability of 10%. Also, in weak cherries, 5 games are added with a probability of 95%, and 100 games are added with a probability of 5%.

In step S918, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S917 is added to a counter that manages the number of consecutive games in the attack mode (more specifically, attack mode continuation counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Perform addition processing. Then, in step S919, after performing the process of setting the additional command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the process of the second special combination ends.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S920. In step S920, the attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second special combination process is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the condition for adding the number of games in the attack mode is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, when the bonus ends in a situation where the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode is added at the end of the bonus. That is, like the game number addition notification in the challenge mode, the game for which the addition notification is performed is set to differ depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

<Third Special Win Process>
Next, the third special combination process executed in step S709 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The case where the third special winning process is performed means the state of the third RT or the state of the second RT and winning the VB mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to attack mode or VB mode. In the third special combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S1001, lottery processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S914. Note that the odds of winning the additional lottery may differ between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1001 was an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1004 to perform lottery processing for the number of additional games in the attack mode. Then, in step S1005, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed, and in step S1006, processing for setting an additional command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the third special combination processing is terminated. The processing of steps S1003 to S1006 is the same as the processing of steps S916 to S919. The number of additional games may differ between the lottery process of step S916 and the lottery process of step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the third special combination processing is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S1007, and then the third special combination processing is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is as described above.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), when it is determined that the result of the lottery process this time is not winning the special role at step S701, or even if winning the special role, the bonus winning flag is set at step S702. If it is determined that it is set, in step S710, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process this time was a push order replay or a push order bell (hereinafter collectively referred to as a "push order role"). judge. In the case of winning the first prize, the first prize process is executed in step S711. The pushing process will be described later in detail.

After executing any one of steps S705, S708, S709 and S711, or after making a negative determination in step S710, the process proceeds to step S712. In step S712, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The specialized zone flag is a flag that is set based on the establishment of the seventh replay winning prize. Indicates a condition that occurs with probability. If the specialized zone flag is set in step S712, the specialized zone processing is executed in step S713. Such specialized zone flags, specialized zones, and specialized zone processing will be described later in detail. When a negative determination is made in step S712, or after the process of step S713 is executed, this lottery result corresponding process is terminated.

As described above, in the lottery result handling process, when it is determined that a special role has been won, on the condition that it is not in the carry-over state, the lottery for the transition to the challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode, or the challenge mode or attack mode Processing for adding the number of games to be continued in the mode, etc. is performed. In other words, even if a specific combination is won, during the carry-over state, the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode, processing for adding the number of continuous games in challenge mode or attack mode, etc. are not performed. its implementation is restricted. When the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode is won, the fact that the lottery for transition is won is notified after the premonitory game is played. Therefore, the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Processing for Transitioning Game State Based on Display Mode Transition Lottery Results>
(2) In the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the processing for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for shifting the game state are performed. A process for performing is performed. Therefore, first, a description will be given of the processing related to the notification that the transfer lottery has been won.

<Mode transition notification processing>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode change notification process is a process that is executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is the specified number). The mode change notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. The number of precursory games is counted in the winning result handling process described later, and the number of precursory games is decremented by one each time one game is completed. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

If the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning a bonus. If the bonus winning flag is set, the bonus winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1103, and then this mode transition notification processing is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the bonus winning notification command notifies that the bonus has been won by, for example, displaying "Bonus confirmed!!" It should be noted that the type of the winning bonus (either the first BB or the second BB) may be notified together.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when a bonus, an attack mode, a challenge mode, and the like are won at the same time, the attack mode and the like are announced at the end of the bonus announced in step S1103. Processing related to such winning notification will be described in detail later, but when winning notification such as attack mode is performed in conjunction with bonus winning notification, winning notification such as attack mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1103. A configuration in which a command is set is preferable.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the challenge mode. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1105. Then, in step S1106, a challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S<b>1107 , a challenge mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the challenge mode is started. Such notification will be described later in detail.

After that, in step S1108, the count of the number of continuous challenge modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is set in the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1108, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1104 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1109 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1110. Then, in step S1111, an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The notification flag for attack is a flag for shifting the game state to the second RT state in accordance with winning the attack mode transition lottery. After that, in step S1112, an attack mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the attack mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1112, this mode shift notification process is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of notification of winning in super attack mode is different from the mode of notification of winning in attack mode. Therefore, in step S1112, it is preferable to set the attack mode winning notification command so as to include information as to whether or not it is the super attack mode. The mode of notification of winning in the attack mode and the mode of notification of winning in the super attack mode may be different as long as the player can distinguish between them. It is preferable that the aspect is more flashy than the aspect of winning notification in the attack mode.

It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the form of notification of winning in these attack mode and super attack mode is made common. By doing so, it is possible to make it look as if the content of the winning has been promoted from the attack mode to the super attack mode from the attack mode winning notification game to the start notification game, and the attack mode winning can be shown. It is possible to eliminate delays due to the difference between the notification game and the start notification game.

If it is determined in step S1109 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1113 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1114. Then, in step S1115, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the 3rd RT state when the lottery for transition to the VB mode is won. After that, in step S1116, the VB mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the VB mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1116, this mode shift notification process is terminated. If it is determined in step S1113 that the VB mode winning flag has not been set, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

That is, among the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the VB mode, which shift after the precursor mode, the challenge mode is started based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0. On the other hand, in the attack mode and the VB mode, based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0, only notification of winning the attack mode transition lottery or the VB mode transition lottery is performed. Even if the number of games reaches 0, the attack mode and VB mode are not started. This is because the challenge mode as a display mode does not involve the transition of the game state, while the attack mode and the VB mode involve the transition of the game state. This is due to the difference that VB mode is initiated by transitioning to the third RT state.

As already explained, the 2nd RT state is entered when the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, and the 3rd RT state is entered into the second promoted replays 1 and 2. , and when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established. Then, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, This is the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third replay win or the like. Therefore, when a lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the VB mode is won, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is reported in the game in which the player wins the winning combination to shift the game state, It is configured to allow the game state to be shifted. It should be noted that from the notification of winning the attack mode or VB mode transition lottery to the start of the attack mode or VB mode (until the game state transitions), notification as a preparation state (for example, " In preparation") is performed.

<Description on transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the game state is performed in the pushing process (step S711) in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to the description of the pushing process, the outline of the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG.

<Outline of push order notification effect>
Notification of the order of operations at the time of winning the winning order (push order notification, push order notification effect, order notification) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the instruction monitor 68 . Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example a case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left. Notification of the pressing order on the instruction monitor 68 will be described later in detail.

As shown in FIG. 37(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, of the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

<Pushing down process>
Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 38, the pushing process executed in step S711 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31) will be described.

In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1-4. The affirmative determination in step S1201 means that the first replay or the third replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1202 to determine whether or not an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM . As already explained, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the attack mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 36). be.

When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1203, processing for notifying the pressing order of the third re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the third replay, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(a)). After that, in step S1204, a process of setting a push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is performed, and then the main push order process is ended. The pressing order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the pressing order notification command will be described later in detail.

In step S1203, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning is announced basically means that the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, and the winning announcement of the attack mode is performed via the sign mode. It is assumed that it will be after the attack mode has been completed and before the transition to attack mode. That is, in the lottery table in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won only in the 1st RT state. However, even in the attack mode, the game state may fall from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state due to an erroneous operation, etc. Even in such a case, the first promotion replay 1 to 4 will be won. By doing so, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the lottery result of this time is one of fall replays 1-3. The affirmative determination in step S1205 means that the first replay or the second replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1206, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1207, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the first re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, the operation order corresponding to the first replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1208, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

In this way, if the player wins the first promotion replays 1 to 4 in a state in which the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is notified, thereby changing the game state to the third. It is possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, there are cases where the first replay win is established and cases where the third replay win is established. , there is.

In addition, when falling replays 1 to 3 are won in a situation where the notification flag for attack is set, the game state is shifted to the first RT state by notifying the operation order corresponding to the first replay winning prize. It is possible to prevent it from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends, the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay winning may be established by winning replays 1 to 3, and the RT state. will transition from the second RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the 1st RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the 3rd replay win, and the 3rd replay win is established. Even in the case of (even in the case of shifting to the second RT state), the second replay winning prize can be established by winning fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the attack mode is not won and the game moves to the second RT state by chance, the game will quickly move to the first RT state after that.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. A positive determination in step S1209 means that the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1211 whether or not the VB notification flag is set in the flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the VB mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 36). be.

If the VB notification flag is set, a process for notifying the pressing order of the fourth re-game or the fifth re-game is executed in step S1212. Specifically, of the first replay, the fourth replay, and the fifth regame, the operation sequence corresponding to the fourth regame winning or the fifth replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1213, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1211, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed in step S1207, and the processing for setting the pressing order notification command is performed in step S1208. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, in the case of winning the second promotion replay 1, 2 without winning the VB mode, if the attack mode is on, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning prize is performed, and if the attack mode is not on. The pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1214 whether or not the current lottery result is one of BAR replays 1 and 2. Affirmative determination in step S1214 means that any one of the first re-game, third re-game, and sixth to eighth re-games wins depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1216 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, in step S1217, a process for notifying the pressing order of the sixth to eighth re-games is executed. Specifically, among the first regame, third regame, and sixth regame to eighth regame, the operation sequence corresponding to the sixth to eighth regame wins is notified (FIG. 23 ( c) see). After that, in step S1218, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1215, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, then in step S1207 a process for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed, and in step S1208 a process for setting a pressing order notification command is performed. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, in the case of winning BAR replays 1 and 2 without winning the VB mode, if the attack mode is on, the press order notification effect corresponding to the first replay win is performed, and if the attack mode is not on, the push order notification effect is performed. No forward notification effect is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1214, it is determined in step S1219 whether or not the result of the current lottery is winning of the pressing order bell. If the pressing order bell is won, it is determined in step S1220 whether the current display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode. If it is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, in step S1221, a process for notifying the pressing order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is executed (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1222, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1219 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1220, the main pushing order process is terminated without performing the process for informing the pushing order.

<Processing for switching the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, as a result of performing the notification for shifting the game state as described above, the processing when the winning combination corresponding to the shift of the game state is won will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result handling process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). The winning result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1301, game number management processing is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode, the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted.

In the subsequent step S1302, it is determined whether or not the result of this stop is the third replay winning. As described above, when the third regame winning has been established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), the processing for shifting the game state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. The case where the attack notification flag is not set means the case where the third replay win is established without the condition for shifting to the attack mode being established. The winning result handling process is terminated as it is. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1304 whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. In addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided as flags for specifying the display mode. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, additional specialized zone) corresponding to the RT state higher than the attack mode, the attack mode flag is the flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1304, when it is determined that the attack mode flag is set, in addition to the attack mode, the VB mode and the special zone are included. .

At step S1304, if the attack mode flag is set, the display mode is already the attack mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, processing for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

That is, in step S1305, an attack mode flag is set. In the subsequent step S1306, the attack mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After that, in step S1307, counting of the attack mode continuation number is started. Specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is set to an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuation games in the attack mode.

After performing the process of step S1307, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag is set in step S1308. A positive determination in step S1308 means that the attack mode won this time is the super attack mode. In this case, after clearing the special zone winning flag in step S1309, the additional special zone starts. (Steps S1318 to S1320). Processing for starting the additional specialized zone will be described later. If a negative determination is made in step S1308, the winning result handling process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1302 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1310. In step S1310, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth replay wins have been established as a result of this stop. As described above, when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, the RT state processing (FIG. 21) performs processing for shifting the game state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1311, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, it means that the fourth and fifth re-game wins are established without winning the VB mode transition lottery. , the winning result handling process is terminated. If the VB notification flag has been set, it is determined in step S1312 whether or not the VB mode flag has been set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1313 to S1315.

That is, in step S1313, processing for setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode that transitions through the attack mode, and the transition to the attack mode is always made after the VB mode ends.

After that, in step S1314, the VB mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1315, counting of the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 60) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in a VB mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1315, the main winning result handling process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1310 that the fourth and fifth replay winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1316. In step S1316, it is determined whether or not the seventh regame winning has been established as a result of this stop. In this embodiment, when the seventh replay winning has been established, that is, the middle stage of the left reel 32L has a "black BAR" symbol, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M has a "black BAR" symbol, and the middle stage of the right reel 32R has a "black BAR" symbol. When the "black BAR" pattern stops and the "black BAR" pattern stops on the middle combination line, it is configured to shift to the special addition zone. In the addition specialized zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is increased not only for the specific combination but also for all winable combinations (advance order combination, specific combination and bonus). It should be noted that the case where the seventh re-game winning has been established means that the BAR replay 1 has been won and the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated in the operation order corresponding to the seventh re-game winning (Fig. 23). (c)), furthermore, when the 7th replay out of the 1st, 6th, and 7th replays wins the lottery, for example, when winning the BAR replay 1, 20 minutes A lottery for winning the seventh replay is won with a probability of 1.例文帳に追加

If the seventh replay win has been established, it is determined in step S1317 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is set, processing for starting the specialized zone is performed in steps S1318 to S1320. As already described, when the super attack mode is started, even if the affirmative determination is made in step S1308 and the process of step S1309 is performed, the process of step S1318 to step S1320 is performed.

Specifically, in step S1318, a process of setting a specialized zone flag in various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 is performed. The specialized zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the above-mentioned additional specialized zone, and when the specialized zone flag is set, the counting of the number of continued games in the VB mode is stopped. . In this case, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialized zone flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d.

After that, in step S 1319 , the specialized zone start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The display control device 81 that has received the special zone start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the special zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1320, counting of the number of continuous specialized zones is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the special zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1320, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. Also, if a negative determination is made in step S1316 or step S1317, the winning result handling process is terminated.

As described above, processing for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state processing (FIG. 21) based on the winning of the combination (3rd to 5th replays) corresponding to shifting the game state. conduct. This is to avoid the attack mode or the like from being started based on the winning of a winning combination corresponding to changing the game state by chance, even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. is.

In addition, when the display mode is shifted, among those accompanied by the shift of the game state, the shift to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, or when shifting from the attack mode to the VB mode, Alternatively, when shifting from the VB mode to the specialized zone, the shift is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of transition to a lower mode, the display mode transition is not performed when the game state transitions due to, for example, a second regame win as a fall replay or a stop of the transition result. When shifting to a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games played. Therefore, when shifting to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the game state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Number of games management process>
The number-of-games management process executed in step S1301 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continued games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted. Then, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the number-of-games management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, each game can be executed with the number of bets from 1 to 3, and in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 as the specific number. If the bet is not 3 bet, the game number management process is terminated. That is, in games with 1 bet or 2 bets, the number of games in the sign mode or the number of continuous games in the challenge mode or the like is not counted.

If the game to end this time is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set or the game is in a bonus state. If the determination in step S1402 is affirmative, in step S1403 the display mode flags of the challenge mode flag, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialized zone flag are cleared, and then the number of games management process ends. do. In other words, when the bonus winning flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games in the attack mode or the like is not counted. Note that if each flag is not set in step S1403, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1403, while the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag are cleared, the attack notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, after going through a preparation state such as an attack mode, these flags are used to notify the order of pressing for shifting the game state, so that the game state before the bonus can be restored. On the other hand, if a bonus is won during the challenge mode or the special zone, the bonus win ends the challenge mode or the special zone.

If the determination in step S1402 is negative, it is determined in step S1404 whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. If not 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1405. If the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1404 (not in precursor mode), or after the process of step S1405 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1406 to S1428. .

That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is the challenge mode, the process advances to step S1407 to perform processing for subtracting 1 from the challenge mode continuation counter, thereby decrementing the number of continuation games in the challenge mode. Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and a challenge mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1410. Upon receiving the challenge mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the challenge mode will end in the current game. After performing the process of step S1410, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1406 that the mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. If it is in attack mode, the process advances to step S1412 to determine whether it is a specialized zone in attack mode. That is, in the case of transitioning to the specialized zone at the start of the attack mode like in the super attack mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1412. If it is in the special zone, the game number management process for the special zone is performed in steps S1425 to S1428. These processes will be described later.

If it is determined in step S1412 that the zone is not a specialized zone, in step S1413, the attack mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby decrementing the attack mode continuation game count. Then, in step S1414, it is determined whether or not the attack mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1415, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1416. After that, in step S1417, an attack mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Upon receiving the attack mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1417, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the attack mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S1418. In step S1418, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. If it is the VB mode, the process advances to step S1419 to determine whether or not it is an additional specialized zone. If the zone is not the special zone for addition, the VB mode continuation game count is decremented by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the VB mode continuation counter in step S1420. Then, in step S1421, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1422, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1423. After that, in step S1424, the VB mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Upon receiving the VB mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1424, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1419 that the zone is an additional special zone, the process proceeds to step S1425. As already explained, even if it is determined in step S1412 that the zone is a specialized zone in the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1425. In step S1425, the special zone continuation game count is decremented by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1426, it is determined whether or not the special zone continuation counter is zero. If it is 0, the special zone flag is cleared in step S1427, and the special zone end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1428. In the display control device 81 that has received the special zone end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the special zone ends in the current game. As such notification, for example, the number of games successfully added in total in the special zone this time is notified. After performing the process of step S1428, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1418 or step S1426, the game number management process is terminated.

<End determination processing>
Next, as the processing at the end of the bonus, the end determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the termination determination process, it is determined whether or not the bonus termination condition is met, and when the bonus is to be terminated, processing for notification of winning such as an attack mode in which bonuses and duplicate winnings are performed, and an attack mode in which bonuses and duplicate winnings are performed. For example, processing for adding the number of games is performed.

That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a minor winning combination has been established. As already explained, during the bonus, the first small win (BB medium and small win 1) is established with a high probability (FIG. 28). Further, when the BB medium and small combination 2 (IV=30) is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 39th small combination winning (FIG. 27(b)), and furthermore, the first The 39th minor winning combination is established when the 39th minor winning combination among the 39th minor winning combination and the 39th minor winning combination wins the lottery. In the present embodiment, for example, when winning the BB medium and small combination 2, the probability of winning the 39th small combination is 1/100. When the BB medium and small winning combination 3 (IV=31) is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the winning of the 40th small winning combination (FIG. 27(b)), and further the 1st small winning combination And when the lottery for winning the 40th minor winning combination among the 40th minor winning combinations is won, the 40th minor winning combination is established. In this embodiment, for example, in the case of winning the combination of BAR in BB, the probability of winning the 40th small combination is 1/200, and the lottery is won. By adjusting the odds of winning the BB small winning combination 2 and the BB small winning combination 3, the probability of winning the 39th small winning combination and the 40th small winning combination may be adjusted. More specifically, the point value PV is allocated so that the BB small and medium winning combination 2 is won with a probability of about 1/100 of the above configuration, and the BB small and medium winning combination 3 is won with a probability of about 1/200 of the above configuration. Allocate the point value PV. When the BB medium and small winning combination 2 and BB small and medium winning combination 3 are won, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the corresponding small winning combination (the 39th small winning combination and the 40th small winning combination), the corresponding small winning combination can be established. may be configured.

If it is determined in step S1501 that a minor win has been established, then in step S1502 processing is performed to subtract the current game payout number from the remaining payout number. When a negative determination is made in step S1501, or after the processing of step S1502 is executed, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of payouts has become 0 in step S1503. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after the bonus end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1504, in steps S1505 to S1518, processing for notification of winning such as attack mode, attack mode, etc. Processing for adding the number of continuous games is performed.

That is, in step S1505, it is determined whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S1506, the number of precursor games is set in step S1507, and the precursor command is set in step S1508. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the lottery process for the number of precursor games in step S1506, a lottery is performed in which the number of precursor games is 0 with a probability of 100%. That is, in step S1507, the number of premonitory games of 0 game is always set, and winning notification of the attack mode or the like is performed in the next game after the bonus ending game. After executing the process of step S1508, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1505, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode win flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1506 to S1508 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1509, it is determined whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in step S1510. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1506 to S1508 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. That is, when the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode and the VB mode are also won, after the bonus ends, the premonition game is performed, and then the challenge mode and the VB mode winning notification is performed.

In addition, if the bonus ends when the attack mode winning flag or challenge mode winning flag is set, it means that the bonus is won at the same time as the attack mode, challenge mode, etc., or the winning announcement of the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. This is the case when the bonus is won during the omen mode of. On the other hand, when the bonus is terminated while the VB mode winning flag is set, the VB mode and the bonus are simultaneously won during the attack mode, or during the premonitory mode of the VB mode winning notification (in this case, This is a case where the bonus is won in the next game after winning the VB mode, because the premonition mode of the 0 game is selected.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1510, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, it is determined whether or not the attack mode addition flag is set. If the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1512, the attack mode game number addition process is performed in step S1513, and an addition command is set in step S1514. . The processes of steps S1512 to S1514 are the same as the processes of steps S917 to S919. After executing the process of step S1514, the end determination process ends.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1511, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode addition flag is set in step S1515. If the challenge mode add-on flag is set, a challenge mode add-on game number lottery process is performed in step S1516, a challenge mode game add-on process is performed in step S1517, and an add-on command is set in step S1518. . The processes of steps S1516 to S1518 are the same as the processes of steps S822 to S824. If a negative determination is made in step S1515 or after the process of step S1518 is executed, the end determination process is terminated.

<Processing for specialized zone>
Next, the specialized zone processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The specialized zone processing is processing executed in step S713 in the lottery result handling processing (FIG. 31). As already explained, the player moves to the specialized zone during the VB mode, and during the specialized zone, the number of consecutive games in the attack mode is increased every game.

That is, in the special zone processing, first, in step S1601, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In the subsequent step S1602, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the subsequent step S1603, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1604, after setting the add-on command, the specialized zone processing ends. The processing of steps S1602 to S1604 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S919. However, the number of games to be selected is larger in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in step S1602 than in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in step S917.

<Processing related to notification effects on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to notification effect on the sub side, processing for various notifications performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described. As processing for various notifications, effect setting processing that is executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1702. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the processing of step S1702 has been executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. The betting time command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed. In addition to the betting command set in step S207 of the normal processing, the mode transition notification processing (see 36), an attack mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, a bonus winning notification command, and the like. In the case of these bet time commands, a bet time effect setting process is executed in step S1704.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or if the process of step S1704 has been executed, then in step S1705 it is determined whether or not the newly received command was the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, the first to There are precursor commands and additional commands set in the third special combination process (FIGS. 32 to 34), push order notification commands set in the push order process (FIG. 38), and the like. In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S1706.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or if the process of step S1706 has been executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S1708, effect setting processing at each stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or if the processing of step S1708 has been executed, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to commands, attack mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, special There is a zone end command and so on. In the case of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S1710.

When a negative determination is made in step S1709, or after the process of step S1710 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1711, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S1711, setting effects based on commands from the main control unit 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connecting without going through the main control unit 101 Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), the setting of the effect, the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

Below, the effect setting process at the time of betting, the effect setting process at the time of start, the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation, and the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described. It should be noted that each effect setting process will be described with reference to schematic diagrams of display effects in FIGS.

<Production setting processing at the time of betting>
The effect setting process at the time of betting will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode start command is included in the betting time command received this time. When the challenge mode start command is included, in step S1802, a process of setting a challenge mode start effect is performed. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the characters "Challenge mode start" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the display mode to be changed is likely to win the attack mode shift lottery. A display (for example, a predetermined character display) that suggests the chance mode is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Grab the attack mode!" in a thick male voice) is emitted.

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1801, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the attack mode win notification command is included as the betting time command received this time. When the attack mode winning notification command is included, in step S1804, processing for setting the attack mode winning notification effect is performed. In the attack mode win notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Attack mode confirmed". In addition, in the attack mode winning notification presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack number one!" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1803, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the VB mode winning notification command is included, in step S1806, processing for setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed. In the VB mode winning notification presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. In addition, in the VB mode winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory!" in male and female voices) is emitted.

If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S1805, it is determined in step S1807 whether or not the bonus winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the bonus winning notification command is included, in step S1808, the process of setting the bonus winning notification effect is performed. In the bonus winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the text "You did it! Bonus confirmed". In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "I did it!") is emitted.

After executing any of the processes of steps S1802, S1804, S1806 and S1808, or when a negative determination is made in step S1807, in step S1809, after setting other effects at the time of betting, this Terminate the effect setting process. In the process of step S1809, for example, in response to the reception of the bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 corresponding to the bet number are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Alternatively, for example, processing for returning from the demo mode in which one condition is that no game has been played for a predetermined time, or lighting a lamp around the start lever 41 to inform that the operation is valid. processing, etc.

<Start effect setting processing>
Next, the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1901, display mode setting processing is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is the normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, and in the corresponding display mode , the display effect of the auxiliary display section 65 is set. Specifically, a challenge mode flag, an attack mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag are also set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side as flags for grasping the display mode. Areas are provided in which a corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode and cleared at the end of each mode. For example, in the process of setting the challenge mode start effect in step S1802, a challenge mode flag is set. In step S1901, by grasping these various mode flags, the current display mode is identified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In the subsequent step S1902, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the first prize. In the case of the winning of the pushing order, in step S1903, processing for notification of pushing order is performed. Here, the pressing order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the pressing order notification command is included in the start time command received this time. If the pressing order notification command is not included, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the pressing order notification command is included, the process advances to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the current lottery results are the first promotion replays 1-4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2003, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the third replay win is established, and then the pressing order notification processing is performed. exit.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current lottery result is drop replays 1 to 3. In the case of fall replays 1 to 3, the process advances to step S2005 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like to perform push order notification that the first replay win is established, and then end the push order notification process. do.

If it is determined in step S2004 that the replays are not fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the current lottery results are the second promotion replays 1 and 2. In the case of the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S1806, a notified flag indicating that VB winning has been notified is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. FIG. The alerted flag is cleared upon transition to the VB mode. Then, in step S2007, the presence or absence of the notified flag may be determined. If it has already been announced that the VB mode has been won, in step S2008, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform notification of the pressing order in which the fourth and fifth regame winnings are established. end the processing. If the VB mode winning notification has not been completed, the process advances to step S2005 to perform the pressing order notification for the first regame winning prize, and then terminate the pressing order notification processing.

If it is determined in step S2006 that it is not the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replays 1 and 2. If it is BAR replay 1 or 2, it is checked in step S2010 whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode by checking the mode correspondence flag. If it is in the VB mode, in step S2011, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the 6th to 8th regame winnings are established, and then the pressing order reporting process is terminated. do. If it is not in the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S2005, and after notification of the pressing order for the first regame winning prize is performed, the pressing order notification processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2009 that it is not BAR replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not the current lottery result is Bell. If the bell is won, in step S2013, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the bell wins as the first minor combination, and then the pressing order notification processing is terminated. . If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the pressing order notification processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start (FIG. 45), if it is determined in step S1902 that the first hand is not won, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not the special combination is won. If the special combination is won, a special combination notification process is performed in step S1905. The special combination notification process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S1904, or if the processing in step S1903 or step S1905 has been executed, the process advances to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. When the add-on command is received, in step S1907, the process of setting the add-on effect in advance is performed so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(b), a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed as "+10" on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted.

Details of the processing for setting the additional effect in step S1907 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2101, a process of grasping the number of additional games is performed based on the additional command received this time. In subsequent step S2102, a notification timing lottery process is executed. In the notification timing lottery process, it is assumed that an additional effect will be performed in the current game, and it is a process of drawing lots at which timing in the game the additional effect will be performed.

The additional effect is set so that the execution timing differs according to the number of additional games. Specifically, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. 48, as the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order of the stop operation, the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel. Then, the stop operation of the first reel, the stop operation of the second reel, and the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, among the stop operations of each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation is performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, the timing when the stop OFF operation is performed when the pressing operation is completed, is set.

Here, a supplementary description will be given of how the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from an initial position on the front side to an operating position on the back side. In the state of being arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and by operating from the initial position to the operation position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are lowered. The LOW signal is switched to the HI signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that the stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been pressed, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

Also, the stop switches 42 to 44 are biased toward their initial positions by springs or the like. Therefore, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are released and the operation force (pressing force) pushed toward the operation position is not applied, the stop switches 42 to 44 are moved to the initial position by the urging force of the spring or the like. return to In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from HI signals to LOW signals. Based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop OFF operation has been performed, ie, the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has ended.

The additional effect is set so that it can occur both when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop ON and when the stop is OFF. That is, in a game in which an additional effect is generated, the additional effect can be generated not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation ends.

In the execution timing table of the additional effect, when the number of games with a relatively small number of additional games, for example, 5 games to 10 games, is generated, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%. , the timing of the stop OFF operation of the first reel is 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 15%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 20%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 20%, The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is 30%, and each is selected. In this case, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation of each reel, and the operation on the rear side is more likely to be selected.

On the other hand, when the number of games with a relatively large number of games to be added is, for example, 100 games or more, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected. is performed 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 30%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the third reel ( When all reels are stopped) is 45%, and each is selected. In this case as well, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation, and the operation on the rear side is relatively more likely to be selected.

In other words, in the present embodiment, it is set so that the additional effect is more likely to occur during the stop OFF operation than during the stop ON operation of each reel. Further, when comparing the first to third reels, the stop operation (ON operation, OFF operation) of the third reel is most likely to be selected, the stop operation of the second reel is second most likely to be selected, and the first reel is stopped. It is set so that it is most likely to be selected during operation.

Returning to the description of the setting processing of the additional effect, after the notification timing lottery processing is performed in step S2102, it is checked in step S2103 whether or not the lottery result of step S2102 was when any reel was stopped. judge. If it is the stop ON time, in step S2104, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the setting is made so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is operated to stop ON. Specifically, a process of setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of occurrence of the additional effect. Further, in step S2104, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games generated at the time of the stop ON operation is read out from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 grasps that the additional performance is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area so that the additional performance is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the first reel or the second reel is in the stop OFF operation. If it is the time of the stop OFF operation of these reels, in step S2106, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the setting is made so that the additional effect is generated at the time of the stop OFF operation of the target reel. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to comprehend the timing of generating the additional effect. Also in step S2106, processing is performed to read effect data of an additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games from the effect data storage area 182b and temporarily store the data in a predetermined effect data setting area.

When a negative determination is made in step S2105, in step S2107, setting is made so that this additional effect is generated when all the reels are stopped (when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF). Specifically, a process of setting a third reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. Also, in step S2107, temporary storage processing of effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the processing of step S2104, step S2106 or step S2107, the setting processing of the additional effect is ended.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start, if the addition command is not received in step S1906, or after the process of step S1907 is executed, the effect setting process during the bonus is executed in step S1908, and the process proceeds to step S1909. Then, in step S1910, after setting other start effects, the start effect setting process is terminated. The during-bonus effect setting process and the continuous effect setting process will be described later in detail. In the process of step S1910, for example, an effect indicating the lottery result is set corresponding to the start of the game, or the lamp around the start lever 41 is extinguished to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Production setting processing at each stop operation>
Next, the effect setting processing at the time of stop operation performed in step S1708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2201, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed during the stop operation of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process advances to step S2202 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and ON is set as the effect of the current game. If not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop ON operation effect. If it is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is the stop ON operation of the target reel, in step S2204, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop ON operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. An additional performance will occur at . Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

Further, for example, if the current game is a winning push order and a push order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel stops based on each stop ON operation, so that the push order notification effect is the next operation target. It changes to the production that shows the reel that becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, a display is made in which the first reel shown in FIG. 37(a) is to be operated. . Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 37(b) is displayed. change in performance. Further, if two reels are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, a display is made to indicate that the second reel is to be stopped as shown in FIG. Based on the stop of the reel, the display changes to the display indicating that the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 37(c)).

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process advances to step S2205 to determine whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations of the reels is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process advances to step S2206 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned OFF is set as the effect of the current game. If not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2207 whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop OFF operation. If it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop OFF operation of the target reel, in step S2208, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional performance is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the effect setting process is terminated.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the challenge mode end command is included, in step S2302, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the challenge mode end effect is performed. In the challenge mode end presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "challenge mode end". In addition, in the challenge mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "More diligence!" in a loud male voice).

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2301, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the attack mode start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the attack mode start command is included, in step S2304, processing for setting the attack mode start effect is performed. In the attack mode start rendering, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Attack Mode!! Ver.1". In addition, in the attack mode start rendering, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack mode start!" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

Incidentally, the display of "Ver. 1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. That is, the display indicates that the attack mode to be started this time is the first attack mode. Then, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when the promotion command is received), the character display of "Attack mode!! Ver. In addition, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the third attack mode, the characters "Attack mode!! Ver.3" are displayed, and when the rank is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the characters "Attack mode!! Ver.4" are displayed. display is performed.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2303, it is determined in step S2305 whether or not the attack mode end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the attack mode end command is included, in step S2306, processing for setting the attack mode end effect is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 57(b), in the attack mode ending effect, the characters "Attack mode END" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the current attack mode (VB mode, including the special zone) is displayed. ), and the total number of payouts for this attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the attack mode ending effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you later" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2305, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. When the VB mode start command is included, in step S2308, processing for setting the VB mode start effect is performed. In the VB mode start presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "777 VICTORY!!". In addition, in the VB mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory bonus start" in male and female voices) is emitted.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2307, it is determined in step S2311 whether or not the VB mode end command is included in the currently received stop command. If the VB mode end command is included, a process of setting a VB mode end effect is performed in step S2312. In the VB mode ending effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the characters "VICTORY BONUS END" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the number of continuous games in the attack mode at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. The number of continuous games (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed, and the total payout number of attack mode (including VB mode, special zone and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "It's still going on") is emitted.

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2311, it is determined in step S2313 whether or not the special zone start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the special zone start command is included, in step S2314, processing for setting the special zone start effect is performed. In the specialized zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Additional Challenge!!" A character is displayed to indicate that In addition, in the special zone start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "let's go" in a boy's voice) is emitted.

If the special zone start command is not included in step S2313, it is determined in step S2315 whether or not the special zone end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the special zone end command is included, in step S2316, processing for setting the special zone end effect is performed. In the special zone end presentation, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of games added in the special zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted. It is preferable to change the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 according to the total number of additional games.

If the special zone end command is not included in step S2315, it is determined in step S2317 whether or not the bonus end command is included in the currently received stop command. When the bonus end command is included, in step S2318, processing for setting the bonus end effect is performed. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts obtained during the bonus, and if the bonus is shifted to the attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, the attack mode ( Display the total number of payouts for VB mode, special zone, and bonus). In addition, in the bonus end effect, a character or the like suggesting these contents is performed according to the suitability of the attack mode, the suitability of the challenge mode, and the number of additional games.

After executing any one of steps S2302, S2304, S2306, S2308, S2312, S2314, S2316 and S2318, or after making a negative determination in S2317, the process proceeds to steps S2309 and S2319. move on. In steps S2309 and S2319, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S1907 in the process of setting the effect at the start. Specifically, in the setting process of the additional effect (FIG. 47), when the timing of occurrence of the additional effect of this time is set at the time of full stop, as shown in FIG. , 32R are stopped, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display portion 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

After that, in steps S2310 and S2320, after setting other effects at the time of stop, the present effect setting process is terminated. In steps S2310 and S2320, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, or the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination. , and control so that the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to an automatic bet during a replay.

As described above, based on various commands from the main controller 101, the display control device 81 performs various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notification of the transition of the display mode, processing for effects during various games is performed.

<Production processing during various games>
In this embodiment, a continuous effect and a bonus effect are provided as effects during various games. A continuous effect is a effect that makes the player expect an advantageous result (winning a bonus, attack mode, challenge mode, VB mode, etc.), and the game is played a plurality of times (four times in this embodiment). This is an effect that can be continued over a period of time, and is an effect in which it is notified whether or not the advantageous result was obtained in the final game. The effect during the bonus is a effect performed in each game during the bonus state that is shifted based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB.

The outline of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. 60(a), at the start of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, a display indicating the number of times the continuous effect is continued is displayed (in the figure, four stages are displayed corresponding to the continuous effect of four games). It shows the daruma dropping performance). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect that the first daruma drop is successful, It indicates that the continuous production will continue). If the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify that the continuous effect will end in the middle (for example, an effect that the daruma drop in the first step fails). ). The effects regarding whether or not to continue the continuous effects are the same in each game in the continuous effects.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), at the start of the second game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining three daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect that the second daruma drop is successful, indicating that the continuous effect is continued). ).

As shown in FIG. 60(c), at the start of the third game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining two daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued. ).

As shown in FIG. 60(d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous effect, a display indicating that it is the final game of the continuous effect is performed (in the figure, one-stage daruma dropping effect). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is given as to whether or not the result was advantageous to the player (the figure shows the effect that the daruma drop in the final stage was successful).

As described above, in the continuous effect, the effect of the previous game is inherited and the effect of the next game is set, and the effect of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize what game the current game is from the start of the continuous effect (how many games are there until the end of the continuous effect).

Here, in each game of the continuous effect, whether or not the continuous effect continues to the next game is set so that the continuation rate increases as the game of the continuous effect progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous effect, there is the highest possibility that the discontinuation of the continuous effect will be reported, and the more the game progresses, the lower the possibility that the discontinuation will be reported. Therefore, in the continuous effect, the player's level of interest greatly differs depending on what game the current game is in the continuous effect, and as the game progresses from the start game to the end game, the player's interest becomes high. .

Hereinafter, as the processing related to the continuous effect and the during-bonus effect, the during-bonus effect setting process (step S1908), the specific combination notification process (step S1905), and the continuous effect setting process (step S1909) in the starting effect setting process (FIG. 45) ) will be explained respectively.

<Production process during bonus>
First, the during-bonus effect processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the bonus effect setting process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game from the game after winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB to the end of the bonus. The affirmative determination in step S2401 means that the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning has been established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2402, the number of bonus effect games is set in the effect counter during bonus of various counter areas 183b in RAM183. The effect counter during bonus is a counter for executing an effect set for each game according to the progress of the bonus game, and the effect corresponding to the counter is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the like.

As already explained, in the present embodiment, in the first BB and second BB bonus games, winning is won in a combination in which 9 medals are paid out in each game, and the bonus ends when 216 medals are paid out. That is, the 1st BB and 2nd BB bonus games end after 24 games. The effect in the bonus game is set to be executed over 24 games, and the effect counter during the bonus is a counter for grasping which game of the 24 games the effect should be performed. is. Then, in step S2402, 24 is set in the bonus effect counter as the number of bonus effect games. After the processing of step S2402 is performed, in step S2403, the during-bonus effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The during-bonus effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the during-bonus effect is being executed. When a negative determination is made in step S2401, or after the processing of step S2403 is executed, this effect setting processing during bonus is ended.

<Special role notification process>
Next, the specific winning notification process executed in step S1905 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not a portent command is included as the command at the start of this time. If no portent command is included, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not an additional command is included as the command at the start of this time. If the add-on command is not included, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus has not been won, that is, if the lottery result is a special combination, and the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode, or the lottery for adding the number of continuous games has not been won, Moreover, if the bonus has not been won, in step S2504, lottery processing in the pseudo-prediction mode is executed. The pseudo precursor mode is visually difficult to distinguish from the precursor mode. The pseudo precursor mode is a mode that ends without informing the player of an advantageous result based on the completion of the number of pseudo precursor games.

In step S2504, a table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery is obtained from the table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery counter is obtained from the counter area 183b, and a lottery is performed to determine whether the pseudo-prediction mode is to be executed. conduct. In the pseudo sign mode lottery table, the probability of winning the pseudo sign mode lottery is set differently depending on the type of the winning specific hand. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in omen mode is high.

In step S2505, based on the processing result of step S2504, it is determined whether or not the lottery for the pseudo precursor mode has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S2506, lottery processing for the number of games in the pseudo-prediction mode is performed. This processing corresponds to step S810 and the like on the main controller 101 side, and randomly determines the pseudo precursor game number of 1 out of 1 to 32 by lottery. In the following step S2507, the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2506 is set in the continuous effect counters provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by one for each game. For example, in a configuration in which 4 games are continuously produced, the continuous production is started in the game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and the result is notified in the game in which the continuous production counter is 0. In the present embodiment, when an omen mode or a pseudo omen mode is set, the omen mode or the pseudo omen mode is terminated after a continuous effect. By inputting the number of pseudo precursor games to the continuous production counter in step S2507, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous production (remaining four games), the continuous production is started. It will happen.

In step S2508, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating the pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. In the following step S2509, a continuous effect flag is set. After that, the special winning notification process is terminated. Also, if the determination is affirmative in any one of steps S2501 to S2503, or if the determination is negative in step S2505, the special winning notification process is terminated.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S1909 of the start time effect setting process (FIG. 45) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included in the start command currently received. When the precursor command is included, in step S2602, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode included in the precursor command is input to the continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the omen mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (remaining four games), the continuous effect is started. In step S2602, when the number of precursor games of the 1st to 3rd games is input to the continuous effect counter, the continuous effect is started from the middle. For example, when 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2602, the continuous effect is started from the current game, and is performed from the third game of the continuous effect shown in FIG. 60(c). Further, when 0 is input to the continuous effect counter, that is, when winning notification of the attack mode or the like is performed without going through the portent mode, the continuous effect is not executed. After performing the process of step S2602, a continuous effect flag is set in step S2603.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or if the process of step S2603 has been executed, the process advances to step S2604. In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S2605. Then, in step S2606, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the continuous effect counter is the number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined whether or not the pseudo flag is set in step S2607. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S2608 to acquire the present prognostic effect table from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2609, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for the indication and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is performed. Perform processing to set as The effect data of the continuous effect specified from the present indication effect table is effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, and the continuous effect counter is If it is 0, it is effect data indicating that the current continuous effect ends with success.

If it is determined in step S2607 that the pseudo flag is set, the process advances to step S2610. In step S2610, a pseudo-prediction effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2611, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for the pseudo precursor and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is performed. Perform processing to set as If the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect table for the pseudo precursor is effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue until the next game or effect data indicating that the continuous effect will not continue. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the current continuous effect ends in failure.

Incidentally, the effect data specified from the pseudo-prediction effect table when the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3 includes data for which no continuous effect is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game in FIG. When the effect data of the first game of effect is set and the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data of the second game of continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect is not continued to the next game in FIG. 60(b) is set. By doing so, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted in the game in which the number of pseudo-prediction games in the pseudo-prediction mode is 0.

After performing the processing of step S2609 or step S2611, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0 in step S2612. When the continuous effect counter is 0, a process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S2613. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S2606 or step S2612, or after performing the process of step S2613, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

When it determines with the continuous production|presentation flag not being set in step S2604, it progresses to step S2614. In step S2614, it is determined whether or not the effect flag during bonus is set. When it is set, in step S2615, subtraction processing of the during-bonus effect counter is performed. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from the effect counter during bonus is performed. In the following step S2616, a bonus effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2617, the effect data of the corresponding during-bonus effect is specified from the effect table for bonus and the during-bonus effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b, and the present during-bonus effect is obtained. Perform processing to set as In step S2618, it is determined whether or not the effect counter during bonus is zero. When the during-bonus effect counter is 0, a process of clearing the during-bonus effect flag is performed in step S2619. After that, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, lottery processing is performed on the side of the main controller 101 based on the insertion of medals as game media and the start operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are activated. When the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are started to rotate and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop, and the combination of symbols stopped on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the corresponding combination is selected. A plurality of RT states with different probabilities of being replayed as a result of lottery processing are provided in a configuration in which a privilege is given, and the RT state shifts when a corresponding promotion replay or falling replay is won. Whether or not the corresponding replay wins a prize is determined by the result of the lottery and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the notification of the order of operation is performed according to the result of the lottery process, and the transition of the display mode. It is done by winning the lottery. A pressing order bell is provided as a result of the lottery process, and depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to win a prize for the pressing order bell and obtain medals. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as a game state in which the replay probability is improved, and by shifting to the display mode in which the operation order is notified, in the RT state, the replay probability is improved. It is possible to achieve the winning of the order bell, and to acquire a large amount of medals.

The execution of the lottery to increase the number of continuous games such as the display mode transition lottery and the attack mode that triggers the acquisition of a large number of medals, and the trigger events as winning the bonus lottery are: strong cherry, weak cherry, strong Occurs when winning a specific role such as watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, B, middle bell. That is, as a special role, a small role (single role) or a double role of IV = 13 to 19, 32 to 45 is set, and when these special roles are won, a display mode transition lottery or An additional lottery will be held, or you will win a bonus lottery. A special role is a role that is won with a relatively low probability compared to bells, replays, and the like, and is also called a rare role. Therefore, the player plays each game while anticipating the occurrence of such a trigger event with a relatively low probability.

Here, the display mode transition lottery based on the specific combination and the bonus win/loss lottery will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the relationship between the lottery table for the normal game state, the display mode transition lottery, and the set values.

As already explained, as a specific combination, a single combination such as a strong cherry with an IV of 13 to 19 and a double combination with a bonus of an IV of 32 to 45 are set.

The 1st BB and 2nd BB bonuses are the winning flags (No. 1BB win flag, 2BB win flag) are set. On the other hand, in the case of winning a single role with IV=13 to 19, the bonus is not duplicated. That is, when it is determined in step S305 of the lottery process of FIG. flag, weak cherry winning flag, strong watermelon winning flag, weak watermelon winning flag, chance A winning flag, chance B winning flag, middle bell winning flag) are set. 2BB winning flag) is not set. In other words, the bonus winning trigger event occurs in the game in which the player wins at IV=32-45, and does not occur in the game in which the player wins at IV=13-19.

The probability of occurrence of the trigger event as bonus winning may differ depending on the set value that causes a change in the payout rate. That is, among IV = 32 to 45, the winning probability is the same regardless of the setting value for the overlapping role with the 1st BB, and the probability of occurrence is the same, while the overlapping role with the 2nd BB differs depending on the setting value. It is a winning probability and the occurrence probability is different. More specifically, strong cherry overlap 1 (IV=32), weak cherry overlap 1 (IV=34), strong watermelon overlap 1 (IV=36), weak watermelon overlap 1 (IV=38), chance A overlap 1 (IV = 40), chance B overlap 1 (IV=42), middle bell overlap 1 (IV=44) are set to be the same probability regardless of the set value, while strong cherry overlap 2 (IV=33), weak cherry overlap 2 (IV=35), strong watermelon overlap 2 (IV=37), weak watermelon overlap 2 (IV=39), chance A overlap 2 (IV=41), chance B overlap 2 (IV=43), the probability of winning middle bell overlap 2 (IV=45) is set differently depending on the set value. The probability of winning the first BB and the second BB alone is set to be the same winning probability regardless of the set value. Therefore, the first BB is set to have the same occurrence probability regardless of the setting value, while the second BB is set to have different occurrence probability depending on the setting value.

The lottery for switching the display mode is carried out when a duplicate combination set to have the same probability of occurrence is won among single combinations of IV = 13 to 19 and overlapping combinations of IV = 32 to 45. On the other hand, if you win a duplicate role that is set to have a different probability of occurrence depending on the setting value among the overlapping roles of IV = 32 to 45, it will not be implemented (or, although it will be implemented, the winning probability will be 0 ). In other words, irrespective of whether or not there is overlap with the bonus, when winning a combination with different winning probabilities depending on the set value, the display mode transition lottery is not performed, while winning a combination with the same winning probability set according to the set value. Sometimes a display mode transition lottery is performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, unlike the trigger event for winning a bonus, the trigger event related to the display mode is determined so that the probability of occurrence does not differ depending on the set value. Regarding the trigger event related to the display mode, regardless of the display mode transition lottery, the performance of the winning probability of the additional lottery for the number of continuous games in attack mode and challenge mode and the number of additional games at the time of winning will differ depending on the setting value. It is determined not to

In other words, in the present embodiment, the first advantageous state as a bonus state in which the player is in an advantageous state by changing the odds of winning or failing a small win lottery (lottery table), and the notification of the operation order of the winning combination. When compared with the second advantageous state such as the attack mode, which becomes advantageous to the player by being performed, the winning probability (probability of transition) differs depending on the set value for the first advantageous state, and the second advantageous state is determined so that the winning probability (transition probability) does not differ depending on the setting value.

The real pleasure of playing a so-called slot machine is that a winning lottery is performed in each game, and each reel is stopped according to the result. There is also the notion that the second advantage you are trying to get is a secondary game. From that point of view, even if it is permissible that the winning probability of the first advantageous state differs depending on the setting value, it is not preferable that the winning probability of the second advantageous state of the secondary game differs. Conceivable. If even the above-mentioned secondary games have different winning probabilities depending on the set value, the difference in the winning probability of each role, which is the main game, will become smaller, and as a result the master-slave of the game will be reversed. This is because there is a possibility that the

Therefore, by adjusting the ball payout rate according to the first advantageous state as described above and treating the second advantageous state as a secondary game to the last, the original game characteristics of the slot machine can be It is possible to realize playability by cooperation between the state and the second advantageous state.

Regarding such a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state, both advantageous states are implemented separately and are set so as not to overlap the two states. That is, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and the state shifts to the bonus state (BB state), the bonus state is maintained until the specified number of payouts is performed, and the state such as the RT state is maintained. No migration occurs. The display mode also shifts to the BB mode, and the BB mode is maintained until the bonus state ends (shift to the attack mode or the like does not occur). Then, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won during the attack mode, the display mode shifts to the BB mode, and after the BB mode ends, the attack mode is resumed (FIG. 40).

On the other hand, it is configured such that a triggering event of one advantageous state can occur while the other is in an advantageous state. More specifically, during the first advantageous state, which is the main game, it is a secondary game and trigger events (attack mode transition lottery, additional lottery, etc.) related to the second advantageous state do not occur, but during the second advantageous state A trigger event (bonus winning) relating to the first advantageous state can occur. Specifically, in each small combination (IV=29 to 31) in the bonus state as the first advantageous state, the attack mode transition lottery, the additional lottery, etc. are not performed, and the trigger event related to the second advantageous state does not occur. . On the other hand, during the attack mode or VB mode as the second advantageous state, it is possible to win duplicate hands of IV=32 to 45, so a trigger event relating to the first advantageous state can occur. In this way, while restricting the overlapping execution of both advantageous states, the other trigger event is allowed to occur, so that a chain of both advantageous states is likely to occur, and the interest is improved.

Here, when the operation order of the pushing order is to be notified in the second advantageous state, in addition to the pushing order reporting effect by the auxiliary display section 65 of FIG. The instruction monitor 68 connected to the main controller 101 also informs of the pressing order. The configuration of such instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 62(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and arrangement as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player to achieve a winning mode. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is used when the player wins a lottery to switch to the attack mode, the super attack mode, or the challenge mode when the display mode is the normal mode, or when the player wins the attack mode, the super attack mode, or the challenge mode at the same time. Lights up when the bonus to be obtained (1st BB) is won. Also, when the attack mode, super attack mode, challenge mode, or first BB ends and shifts to the normal mode (except when transitioning to the attack mode again after going through the precursor mode), the lights are turned off.

In other words, the navigation state (attack mode, super attack mode, high frequency mode) in which the operation order of the push order bell and the push order replay can be easily reported to the player in an advantageous manner to facilitate the winning of prizes. Chance state (challenge mode, 1st BB, high probability mode) that makes it easier to win the transition lottery, or transition to the navigation state or chance state. The section including the state (winning mode) is regarded as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is lit during the advantageous section and turned off during the normal section, which is not the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means) for clearly indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section.

The eighth display segment N8 is a game that starts a game in which a game result (such as a special hand such as a strong cherry) that triggered an advantageous section such as the navigation state, the chance state, and the winning state is won and the game result is established. Then, at a timing before the game operation by the player is permitted in the game subsequent to the start game, lighting is started as a notification that the advantageous section will be reached. More specifically, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game result that triggered the advantageous interval is established, that is, regardless of whether or not there is a dropout, the game in which the game result is won is played. As the start game, the eighth display segment N8 is lit at a timing before the bet operation is permitted as a game operation by the player in the next game. In other words, the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 starts before the start of the game following the game in which the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display displays the payout number on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who progresses the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display unit (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display unit). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

The section display first process and the section display second process will be described below as processes related to turning on/off the eighth display segment N8.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, when the eighth display segment N8 is lit, it means that the player has won a lottery for transition to the attack mode, super attack mode, or challenge mode as an advantageous section, or is in any of these modes. A case is shown. If a negative determination is made in step S2701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S2702.

In step S2702, it is determined whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. When the eighth display segment N8 is turned off and either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, in the current lottery process, the lottery for transition to the challenge mode or the attack mode Or when you win the lottery for transition to super attack mode. As already explained, in the first special combination process (FIG. 32), when the lottery for transition to the challenge mode is won, the challenge mode winning flag is set, and the lottery for transition to the attack mode or super attack mode is won. If so, the attack mode win flag is set. In step S2702, if none of the flags is set, the section display first processing ends.

If either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, the process advances to step S2703 to execute display start mode lottery processing. In the display start mode lottery process, the display start mode table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and the lighting mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery when shifting to the advantageous section. In the display start mode table in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is set differently depending on the content of the advantageous section.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is when the start lever 41 is operated, when the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed, when the stop OFF operation of the first reel is performed, and when the second reel is operated. A reel stop ON operation, a second reel stop OFF operation, a third reel stop ON operation, a third reel stop OFF operation, and a medal payout completion time based on winning are set respectively. In this case, the section display first process is one of the lottery processes that are performed based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the operation of the start lever 41 of the lighting start timing is the lottery process. indicates the time when the start lever 41 is operated, which is the trigger for . The first reel, the second reel, and the third reel are the reel that is stopped first among the three stop switches 42 to 44, and the reel that is stopped next is the first reel. The second reel is the second reel, and the last reel to be stopped is the third reel. The stop ON operation and the stop OFF operation are as described above. An operation to return the operation position to the initial position by, for example, releasing the switches 42 to 44 is the stop OFF operation. Also, at the completion of payout of medals, lighting is started without intervening the payout process if winning is not established due to a failure to take medals or the like.

When shifting to the challenge mode (when the challenge mode winning flag is set), 5% when the start lever 41 is operated, 10% when the first reel stop ON operation, and the first reel stop OFF operation Time is 55%, stop ON operation of the 2nd reel is 5%, stop OFF operation of the 2nd reel is 15%, stop ON operation of the 3rd reel is 3%, stop OFF operation of the 3rd reel is 6% is selected, and 1% is selected when medals are paid out. In addition, when shifting to the attack mode (when the attack mode winning flag is set), the operation of the start lever 41 is 3%, the stop ON operation of the first reel is 3%, and the first reel is stopped. 6% at the time of OFF operation, 10% at the time of stop ON operation of the 2nd reel, 55% at the time of stop OFF operation of the 2nd reel, 5% at the time of stop ON operation of the 3rd reel, stop OFF operation of the 3rd reel Time is selected at a rate of 15%, and medal payout completion time is selected at a rate of 3%. Then, when shifting to the super attack mode (when the attack mode winning flag is set and the special zone flag is set), the operation time of the start lever 41 is 1% and the first reel is stopped. 2% at the time of ON operation, 4% at the time of stop OFF operation of the first reel, 8% at the time of stop ON operation of the second reel, 20% at the time of stop OFF operation of the second reel, stop ON operation of the third reel 8% for the hour, 50% for the stop/OFF operation of the third reel, and 7% for the completion of medal payout.

That is, in the present embodiment, when shifting to an advantageous section, when shifting to challenge mode, when shifting to attack mode, and when shifting to super attack mode, the section indicator (8th The display start timing of the display segment N8) is set to be different, and in the challenge mode, the first reel stop OFF operation is most likely to be selected, and in the attack mode, the second reel stop OFF operation is the most selected. In the super attack mode, the stop OFF operation of the third reel is most likely to be selected. The challenge mode is a so-called chance zone in which it is easy to shift to the attack mode, the attack mode is a navigation state in which the pressing order is easily notified, and the super attack mode is a navigation state in which the transition to the attack mode occurs after passing through a specialized zone. , the attack mode is more advantageous for the player than the challenge mode, and the super attack mode is more advantageous for the player than the attack mode. In other words, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up and the game shifts to the advantageous section, the advantage to the player greatly varies depending on the content of the advantageous section. Since the display start mode is such that the content and degree of advantage of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment surface, and N8 are associated with each other, in the game in which the lottery for transition to these modes is won, the eighth display segment N8 is displayed. It is possible to draw a great deal of attention to the timing of starting lighting.

Further, in the present embodiment, the later the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is, the easier it is for the player to shift to the advantageous section of the mode that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is devised so that the throbbing feeling of whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is turned on can be obtained step by step.

Moreover, while the selectivity of the display start timing is superior or inferior in each mode, any display start timing can be selected when any mode is won. That is, for example, when the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started when the start lever 41 is operated, there is the highest possibility that the lottery for transition to the challenge mode has been won, and there is a possibility that the lottery for transition to the super attack mode has been won. Although it is set to be the lowest possibility, the possibility is not zero regarding the super attack mode which is the lowest possibility. By doing so, even if the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started at a timing different from the timing desired by the player, it is possible to prevent the player from giving up until the winning of the mode is notified. can.

Here, as already described, notification of winning the challenge mode (challenge mode start effect, step S1802) and notification of winning the attack mode (attack mode winning notification effect, step S1804) This is performed at the time of the betting operation for the next game after which the number of precursor games has become 0. On the other hand, the eighth display segment N8 as a section display device assumes that the game in which the game result that triggered the transition lottery such as the challenge mode is established is the starting game, and the betting operation of the next game is allowed. Lighting is started at a timing before the In other words, even if the sign mode is set to 0 games, when comparing the win notification effect of each mode transition and the notification of the advantageous interval by the interval indicator, the indication of the advantageous interval by the interval indicator is performed first. In such a relationship, when the section indicator starts lighting, it is configured so that it is not possible to completely identify which mode has been won, so each mode transitions after the section indicator starts lighting It is also possible to provide a thrilling feeling during the period when the winning notification effect is performed.

In addition, in terms of the stop operation of each reel, the stop OFF operation is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation. Therefore, in a situation where there is no confirmation as to whether or not the eighth display segment N8 lights up, it is considered that the stop OFF operation is performed while having a sense of anticipation that it will light up, rather than the stop ON operation. . In this case, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are stopped ON, the corresponding reels are stopped, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are stopped OFF, there is a high possibility that the corresponding reels are stopped. Therefore, in the situation where the corresponding reel is stopped rather than in the situation before the corresponding reel stops, the stop switch 42 is held with a high expectation that the eighth display segment N8 will light up. 44 are considered to be performed.

For example, when the 27th minor combination wins a weak cherry and the 28th minor combination wins a strong cherry, when the 27th minor combination wins and when the 28th minor combination wins, the respective reels 32L and 32M are compared. , 32R, the stop numbers of the left reel 32L are the same, and the "cherry" symbol stops at the upper or lower stage of the left reel 32L. . In this case, by stopping the middle reel 32M, it is determined whether the 27th minor winning combination or the 28th minor winning combination has been won. In this embodiment, both the 27th minor winning combination and the 28th minor winning combination have the possibility of winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section. In other words, if the eighth display segment N8 is not lit when the left reel 32L is stopped, (1) the game result of the current game is a weak cherry win and the eighth display segment N8 is still displayed. (2) The game result of the current game is a light cherry win, and neither of the lotteries for transition to the advantageous section has been won. (3) The game of the current game. A case where the result is a strong cherry win and the lighting timing of the eighth display segment N8 has not yet reached, (4) the game result of the current game is a strong cherry win and transition to any advantageous section It is conceivable that the lottery was also unsuccessful. Then, by stopping the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R as the second reel, it is determined whether the case (1) or (2) or the case (3) or (4). In addition, since it is easier to win the lottery to move to the advantageous section when a strong cherry is won than when a weak cherry is won, as a player, rather than in the case of (1) or (2), ( It is considered that the stopping operation of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R is performed while expecting the case of 3) or (4). In other words, when the "cherry" symbol stops at a predetermined position on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R as well, it is determined that the case (3) or (4) occurs, so the "cherry" symbol stops. It is thought that the stopping operation is performed while hoping that Then, the stop OFF operation in that situation can be said to be an operation for determining whether it is the above case (3) or case (4). You can entertain whether or not. In other words, when the stop ON operation is performed while hoping that the "cherry" symbol will stop, the eighth display segment N8 is less likely to light up. A game that stops the symbols can be enjoyed. In this way, by dividing the parts that are likely to attract the attention of the player in stages so that they are unlikely to be duplicated, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the player's attention is distracted and the game is rather unenjoyable. becomes possible.

Returning to the description of the first section display process, after the display start mode lottery process is executed in step S2703, the process of setting the display start mode based on the lottery result of step S2703 is performed in step S2704. In this case, a process of setting a flag corresponding to the timing determined by lottery is performed. Then, in the display start processing (not shown) that is individually started as the display start processing of the section indicator (eighth display segment N8), processing for determining whether or not it is the timing corresponding to these flags is performed. If it is the corresponding timing, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the timing is set, and if it is set, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is started. . For example, if it is determined in step S2703 that the time for the first stop OFF operation is determined, a flag corresponding to the first stop OFF operation is set. In the processing for starting the display, each determination processing such as whether it is the operation timing of the start lever 41, whether it is the first stop ON operation timing, and whether it is the first stop OFF operation timing is performed. , the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started on the condition that it is determined that it is the first stop OFF operation timing and that the flag corresponding to the first stop OFF operation is set as described above (lights out). state to lit state). Note that the processing for starting the display is configured as periodic processing that is activated at predetermined intervals (for example, 1.49 msec intervals), and is activated as one processing of timer interrupt processing, for example.

In addition, in the main controller 101, when starting to display the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator in the lighting state, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound "Gago!") is emitted from the speaker 64. A command for sound output is output to the display control device 81 so that sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so as to emit the predetermined sound effect based on the sound output command. Incidentally, when the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started, an effect may be generated in the auxiliary display section 65 or another display section. The configuration may be such that the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so that the corresponding effect is performed.

After executing the process of step S2704, in step S2705, after executing the process of starting the counting of the number of continuous games in the advantageous section, the first section display process ends. The number of continuous games in the advantageous interval is determined by measuring the number of games in the advantageous interval AG provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S2705, the number of games in the advantageous interval is set to 0, which is the initial value. I do. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG is incremented by 1 for each game in the advantageous interval.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S2706 processing is performed to continue display during the advantageous section, and then this section display first processing is performed. exit. Specifically, in step S2706, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process that is executed in step S415 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step S2801, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being lit. If it is turned off (non-lighting, non-display), the second section display process is terminated. If it is during lighting display, the process proceeds to step S2802. In step S2802, a process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of games in the advantageous interval, and counts the number of games played while the eighth display segment N8 is lit.

After executing the process of step S2802, it is determined in step S2803 whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section AG has reached the upper limit value of "1500". If it reaches "1500", in step S2804, the number of games in the advantageous section AG is cleared to 0, and in step S2805, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished as processing for ending the display of the section display. process to cause Then, after performing data initialization processing in step S2806, the second section display processing ends.

The data initialization process is a process of returning the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the current advantageous interval and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous interval to their initial values. For example, if a challenge mode winning flag or an attack mode winning flag is set at the time of transition to an advantageous section, or if a VB mode winning flag is set during the attack mode, and the flag remains set until this initialization processing. clears these winning flags. Also, in the initialization processing, if an attack notification flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, special zone flag, etc. are set, these flags are also cleared. Furthermore, if the omen counter, the counter for the number of continued games such as the attack mode, etc. are greater than zero, these counters are all reset to zero. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and clears the RAM for such variables and parameters. This is the process of performing

If it is determined in step S2803 that the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has not reached the upper limit, the process advances to step S2807 to determine whether or not the advantageous interval has ended. That is, in step S2807, it is determined whether or not neither the challenge mode winning flag nor the attack mode winning flag is set, and in step S2808, neither the challenge mode flag nor the attack mode flag is set. state or not. Affirmative determination in both steps S2807 and S2808 means that the advantageous interval has ended before reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval. In addition to clearing to 0, in step S2810 processing for ending the display of the section indicator is performed, and then the second section display processing is ended. If a negative determination is made in either step S2807 or step S2808, it is determined that the current section is still in an advantageous section, and the second section display processing is terminated. In this case, the lighting display of the section indicator (the eighth display segment N8) continues.

<Regarding the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 66, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is extinguished (not lit) in the normal section which is not the advantageous section. In this normal section, the pressing order notification effect is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have such an instruction function as opposed to the advantageous section that has an instruction function such as notification of the pressing order. A situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if a weak watermelon role is won in a lottery to transition to an advantageous section such as challenge mode or attack mode, the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established is set as the starting game. At the timing before the betting operation by the player is allowed in the next game, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is lit, and the notification of the advantageous section is started.

In this case, the game in which the weak watermelon combination is won as described above is the state before transition to the advantageous section, and the game is included in the normal section. Then, with respect to the eighth display segment N8 as the interval indicator indicating the advantageous interval, the notification of the advantageous interval is the timing at which the betting operation for the game following the start game in which the weak watermelon role was won is permitted. In other words, if the game in which the advantageous section starts is considered to be played at the timing when the game becomes playable, as described above, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on in the weak watermelon role winning game (starting game). The notification can be said to be prior notification performed prior to the notification of the advantageous section (in-state notification, in-mode notification). Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the content or degree of advantage of the advantageous section is suggested when the fact that it is an advantageous section is notified by such prior notification.

After that, in the situation where the advantageous section is being notified, the pressing order information using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is generated. In this case, as described above, the pressing order information (“1” to “6”) is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. You can understand the order. In the push order notification, the display of the push order information starts when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If this game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the pushing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is terminated when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, and the eighth display is displayed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the pushing order is won again in the next game and thereafter, the pushing order information corresponding to the pushing order is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit and the final game of the advantageous interval is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also extinguished, and the notification of the advantageous interval ends. The number of games in the advantageous section is counted in games in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. Up to the game is the number of games in the advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the payout of medals is finished in the final game of the advantageous section (by the second section display process which is the process after the payout determination process). If medals are not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game was the last game in the advantageous section.

In this manner, the eighth display segment N8 is lit during the advantageous interval, and the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished when the advantageous interval ends. The eighth display segment N8 not only starts to light up when the mode shifts to the challenge mode, the attack mode, etc., but also based on winning the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode, the attack mode, etc. Lighting starts. In other words, even if no notification is given in the game in which the lottery for transition to these modes has been won, whether or not the lottery for transition to these modes has been won can be determined by checking whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated. can be clearly understood. By doing so, there is an advantage between players who end the game without knowing it even though they have won the lottery for transition to these modes, and the succeeding players who sit after that. It can be made so that there is no difference in degree.

In addition, the slot machine 10 is configured so that there is no difference in the advantage due to the setting value in regard to the game property in which the advantage is changed by notification of the pressing order in the challenge mode, the attack mode, or the like. Therefore, by making the playability based on the push order notification uniform for each game table (set value) and each game (situation), the advantage/disadvantage between players is eliminated, and the privilege is aimed at the pattern. While fully enjoying the original game property of the slot machine 10 of obtaining .

On the other hand, in terms of the game characteristics based on the notification of the pressing order, the players are interested in whether or not they win the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, the attack mode, etc., and whether or not these modes continue. The lighting/non-lighting of the 8 display segment N8 may be obvious from the standpoint of securing equality between players, but it may be a disadvantage from the standpoint of game playability and presentation effects. . Therefore, in this embodiment, in the section display first process, the lighting start timing (display start mode) of the eighth display segment N8 is configured to vary depending on the contents of the advantageous section to which the segment N8 is lit.

FIG. 67 shows the relationship between the lighting timing of the eighth display segment N8 and the content of the advantageous section to be announced (shifted to) after winning when the weak watermelon combination is won as the specific combination in the normal section. ing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), when winning the weak watermelon combination, it is assumed that the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting when the first reel is operated to stop and turn OFF. As a player, the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started, so that it becomes possible for the player to understand that he or she has won the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, and the lighting is started when the first reel is operated to stop and turn off. Therefore, it is predicted that the current advantageous section is the challenge mode (see FIG. 64). Then, the player confirms that the current advantageous section was the challenge mode by generating a challenge mode start effect as an announcement game through the omen mode. It should be noted that, as already explained, the measurement of the advantageous section starts after the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started, that is, it is an advantageous section even during the portent mode.

FIG. 67(b) shows a case where the weak watermelon combination is won and the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started at the time of the stop OFF operation of the second reel. In this case, the player predicts that the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won and that the advantageous section this time is the attack mode (see FIG. 64). Then, through the omen mode, an attack mode confirmation effect occurs as an announcement game, thereby confirming that the advantageous section of this time was the attack mode.

FIG. 68(c) shows a case where the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting when the third reel is operated to stop and turn OFF when the weak watermelon combination is won. In this case, the player predicts that the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won and that the advantageous section this time is the super attack mode (see FIG. 64). Then, after the omen mode, an additional specialized zone finalization effect occurs as an announcement game, confirming that the advantageous section this time was a super attack mode with an additional specialized zone.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator lights up, it is clearly indicated that it is an advantageous section, and when the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, it is clearly indicated that it is not an advantageous section. By varying the lighting start mode of the display segment N8, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the section indicator (eighth display segment N8) while securing the function of informing whether or not it is an advantageous section.

By making the lighting start mode of the eighth display segment N8 different depending on the content of the advantageous section, the player can draw a lottery to shift to the advantageous section by starting lighting of the eighth display segment N8. It is possible not only to know that the player has won the lottery, but also to predict the content of the lottery.

In particular, since the lighting start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery according to the content of the advantageous section, the lighting start mode and the content of the advantageous section are not in a one-to-one relationship, and even if the player Even if the lighting is started in an unfavorable manner for the game, the game can be progressed while maintaining the expectation for the subsequent mode.

Moreover, on the assumption that the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started by the next game after the start game, the notification of the challenge mode or the attack mode to be shifted after the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started (challenge mode). Mode start notification effect, attack mode winning notification effect, etc.) are configured to occur several games after the omen mode. While making the eighth display segment N8 a so-called definite notification, it is possible to play a game of predicting the content even after the definite notification so as to entertain the excitement of whether or not.

Further, as described above, the eighth display segment N8 starts to be lit by the game following the start game, so the end of the lighting start timing is predetermined. In such an effect in which the end of generation is determined, the content of the advantageous interval when lighting starts before the end is performed in the eighth display segment N8, so that the content of the advantageous interval can be changed. It is possible to dramatically increase the degree of attention to the performance to be notified. That is, to begin with, for players who are interested in whether or not they have won the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, whether or not the display of the eighth display segment N8 will start is of great interest. Since the end of the display start timing is determined, it can be said that the timing at which the player should pay attention to the eighth display segment N8 is concentrated. Based on this premise, if the content of the advantageous section is notified in the eighth display segment N8, it is overwhelming compared to the content of the advantageous section performed at other timings or other display means. It is possible to make a notification that attracts significant attention.

Since the eighth display segment N8 is configured to be lit mainly when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, there is a sense of expectation that it will be lit in games where there is a possibility of it being lit (games when a special role is won). It is possible to perform a stop operation while holding the light, and the impression that the light is turned on by the player's own operation can be strengthened, compared to a configuration in which the light is turned on regardless of the player's operation.

In addition, since the stop switches 42 to 44 are configured to be lit based on the operation, it is possible to determine whether or not the reel is to be lit based on the relationship with the stop number of the operated reel. Specifically, for example, when a strong cherry is won or a weak cherry is won, while it is possible to win a lottery to transition to challenge mode, attack mode, etc., the winning probability of the transition lottery is different between the strong cherry and the weak cherry, has a higher winning probability than weak cherry. Therefore, it is thought that the player will operate the stop switches 42 to 44 while expecting that the lottery result of this game will be a strong cherry, not a weak cherry, and the eighth display segment N8. It is possible to perform the stop operation while predicting whether it will be a strong cherry or a weak cherry in relation to the lighting timing of .

<Modification 1>
In the above-described first embodiment, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery according to the contents of the advantageous section. Mode, attack mode, and super attack mode are possible, but the display start mode and the content of the advantageous section may be associated on a one-to-one basis. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which there are display start modes that are associated on a one-to-one basis and display start modes that are not associated (possibly any mode).

For example, FIG. 68(a) shows an example of a display start mode table in which the content of the advantageous section and the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 are associated on a one-to-one basis. That is, in this example, when the content of the current advantageous section is the challenge mode, the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting based on the stop operation of the first reel, and the current advantageous section starts. When the content is the attack mode, the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting based on the stop operation of the second reel, and when the content of the current advantageous section is the super attack mode, the third reel. is performed, the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting. By doing so, it is possible to clearly grasp the content of the current advantageous section based on the lighting start mode. In particular, the eighth display segment N8 is smaller than other notification units such as the auxiliary display unit 65, and is easily recognized only by the player who is playing the game. There is a high possibility that only the player who is playing the gaming machine can grasp the contents of the advantageous section. Then, for example, the player who has grasped that it is in the super attack mode by the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 will be immersed in a sense of superiority that he knows information that the other players do not know. It is also possible to wait for the attack mode winning notification effect.

Also in this example, the transition is made to an advantageous section in which the stop operation of the second reel is more advantageous than the stop operation of the first reel, and the stop operation of the third reel is more advantageous than the stop operation of the second reel. It is set to be more advantageous when the display is started at the time of the operation on the rear side, such as shifting to an advantageous section where is more advantageous. By doing so, the game enjoys the balance between the desire to start displaying early and confirm the shift to the advantageous section and the desire to start displaying later and shift to the advantageous section. can achieve For example, if the 1st reel or the 2nd reel is stopped and if it is predicted/understood that a role (for example, a middle bell role) that can be expected in the super attack mode will be won from the stop result, the 1st reel Or, you will operate while hoping that the display will not start when the second reel is stopped OFF, and even in the challenge mode with the first reel stopped, it is possible to win a role with a low probability of winning (for example, a weak cherry role). is expected/understood, it is considered that the operator will operate while hoping that the display will start when the stop OFF operation of the first reel is performed. That is, even in a configuration in which the display start mode and the content of the advantageous section are associated on a one-to-one basis, by setting the ratio of the selection rate between the stop ON operation and the stop OFF operation as described above, the stop It is possible to entertain whether or not the display is started in relation to the outcome.

FIG. 68(b) is a display start mode table in which the content of the advantageous section and the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 are associated on a one-to-one basis, and where there is no such correspondence. shows an example. In this example, in addition to the correspondence between the stop operation of each reel and the content of the advantageous section in the table of FIG. At the end of the payout, it can be selected regardless of the content of the advantageous section. By doing so, when the stop operation is completed up to the second reel, it is determined that either the super attack mode win or the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is lost (Fig. 68(a)). Compared to the example of , you can enjoy the excitement until the end.

<Modification 2>
In this embodiment, a specific state (specific situation) that affects the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is provided as the game state (game situation). In this modification, the specific state does not change between the normal game state and the lottery table like each RT state or bonus state, nor does it change the performance related to the push order notification like the challenge mode or attack mode. Although there is no difference in the degree of advantage for the player depending on whether it is in the specific state or not, the display start mode table in the case of winning the transfer lottery to the advantageous section differs depending on whether it is in the specific state.

FIG. 69(a) shows part of the lottery process (FIG. 16) in this modification. That is, in this modification, after the priority setting process is performed in step S315, the specific state process is performed in step S2901, and then the section display first process is performed in step S316.

In the specific state processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69B, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed (lighted). If it is being displayed (lighted), the specific state processing is terminated. If it is not being displayed (it is turned off), it is determined in step S3002 whether or not the game result of the current game is winning of a special role as a result of the lottery processing of this time. If the special combination is not won, the process for the specific state is terminated as it is. In the case of winning a special combination, the process proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, it is determined whether or not a specific state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. A specific state flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp whether or not a specific state exists. If the specific state flag is not set, the process advances to step S3004 to determine whether either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, in step S3004, it is determined whether or not the transfer lottery for the advantageous section has been won in the current game. If the player wins, the process for the specific state is terminated as it is. If the lottery has not been won, the process advances to step S3005 to execute a specific state lottery process. The specific state lottery process is a process of determining by lottery whether or not to shift to a specific state. Get a counter for In this case, the probability of winning the transition lottery may vary depending on the type of the specific hand. Alternatively, the odds of winning may be higher for weak cherries than for strong cherries. The opposite relationship with the ease of winning the lottery to transition to challenge mode etc. By establishing a relationship in which the harder the hand is, the easier it is to win the lottery for transition to the specific state), it is possible to draw the player's attention to the hand that is less likely to be won in the lottery for transition to the challenge mode or the like.

After performing the specific state lottery process in step S3005, it is determined in step S3006 whether or not the result of step S3005 was a winning result. If it is not won, the specific state processing is terminated as it is, and if it is won, the process proceeds to step S3007. In step S3007, a process of inputting "3" as a predetermined value to the state counter K provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The state counter K is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the continuation condition during the specific state, and is decremented by one each time the specific combination is won. In the subsequent step S3008, the specific state flag is set, and then the specific state processing is terminated. By setting the specific state flag in step S3008, it is possible to make an affirmative determination in step S3003.

If it is determined in step S3003 that the specific state flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3009. In step S3009, similarly to step S3004, it is determined whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, thereby determining whether or not the transition lottery for the advantageous section has been won in the current game. determine whether If the transfer lottery is not won, a process of subtracting 1 from the state counter K is performed in step S3010, and it is determined whether or not the state counter K has become 0 in step S3011. If the state counter K is not 0, the specific state processing is terminated as it is, and if the state counter K is 0, the specific state flag is cleared in step S3012 and the specific state processing is terminated. do. If it is determined in step S3009 that the transfer lottery for the advantageous section has been won, the state counter K is cleared to 0 in step S3013, and then the specific state flag is cleared in step S3012. end the processing.

As described above, in this modification, the specific state is shifted in a part of the game in which the special role is won in the normal section, and when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is not won, and then the specific role is won. The game is continued until three times as a predetermined number of times the game is won and not won in the lottery for transition to the advantageous section. In other words, the specific state is a state in which the transition is made based on the occurrence of a disadvantageous event for the player in terms of the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

In the first section display process in this modified example, in the display start mode lottery process (step S2703), different display start mode tables are acquired depending on whether or not the specific state is set. That is, if the state is not the specific state, the display start mode table shown in FIG. 64 or the like is acquired and the display start mode is selected by lottery. Then, the display start mode is selected by lottery. The display start mode table for the specific state is different from the display start mode table for the normal state (for states other than the specific state).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70, the selection rate of the display start mode varies depending not only on the content of the advantageous section, but also on the set value that changes the medal increase/decrease rate.

For example, when the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode is won, operation of the start lever 41, stop OFF operation of the first reel, stop OFF operation of the third reel, and end of payout are selected. However, the selectivity of each timing varies depending on the set value. Specifically, when the challenge mode is won, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started when the start lever 41 is operated is set 2, set 4, and set 6 rather than set 1, set 3, and set 5. is higher, and the even setting is more likely to be selected than the odd setting. That is, when the start lever 41 is operated, the eighth display segment N8 lights up, and after that, when the challenge mode is entered, the setting value of the game machine is more likely to be even number setting than odd number setting. Also, when the challenge mode is won, the probability that the display of the 8th display segment N8 will start at the end of the payout is higher at setting 5 than at setting 4, higher at setting 6 than at setting 5, and lower than setting 3. 0. Therefore, when the payout is completed, the eighth display segment N8 lights up, and after that, when the challenge mode is entered, it is confirmed that the setting is 4 or more. Further, when the challenge mode is won, the setting 1 does not select the stop OFF operation of the third reel. Therefore, when the 8th display segment N8 lights up at the time of the stop OFF operation of the 3rd reel, and then the challenge mode is entered, it is confirmed that the setting is 2 or higher.

On the other hand, when the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, operation of the start lever 41, stop OFF operation of the second reel, stop OFF operation of the third reel, and completion of payout are selected. , the selectivity of each timing varies depending on the set value. Specifically, when the attack mode is won, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started when the start lever 41 is operated is higher than setting 1, setting 3 and setting 5 than setting 2, setting 4 and setting 6. is higher, and the odd setting is more likely to be selected than the even setting. In other words, it is set so that the relationship is opposite to that in the case of the challenge mode, and when the start lever 41 is operated, the eighth display segment N8 lights up, and after that, when the attack mode shifts, the set value of the game machine is more likely to be odd number setting than even number setting, and when shifting to the challenge mode, the possibility that the setting value of the game machine is even number setting is higher than odd number setting. Also, when the attack mode is won, the setting 1 does not select the end of the payout. In other words, when the payout is completed, the eighth display segment N8 lights up, and after that, when the challenge mode is entered, it is confirmed that the setting is 4 or higher, but when the attack mode is entered, the setting is 2. It is determined that the above is the case. Therefore, on the premise that a high set value is preferable for the player, it is preferable for the player to shift to the challenge mode rather than the attack mode when the eighth display segment N8 lights up at the end of the payout. The degree of advantage of the content of the advantageous section and the preference for the player are reversed. Also, when the challenge mode is won, the stop OFF operation of the third reel is not selected at the setting of 3 or less. Therefore, when the 8th display segment N8 lights up when the 3rd reel is stopped and turned off, and then the challenge mode is entered, it is determined that the setting is 4 or higher. That is, when the 8th display segment N8 lights up at the time of the stop OFF operation of the 3rd reel, and then when the challenge mode is entered, as described above, although it is confirmed that the setting is 2 or more, the attack mode is entered. If so, it is determined that the setting is 4 or more. Therefore, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up at the time of the stop OFF operation of the third reel, it is preferable for the player to shift to the attack mode rather than the challenge mode. Matching preferences.

In the display start mode table for the specific state, when the lottery for switching to the super attack mode is won, the end of payout is selected regardless of the set value. That is, in the case where the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won in the specific state, if the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started at a timing before the end of the payout, some set value can be guessed, and the payout ends. Even if it is time, if the transition advantageous section is the challenge mode or the attack mode, the set value can be estimated, but if the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 starts at the time of the end of the payout and in the super attack mode , the set value cannot be guessed. By doing so, it is possible to make the game full of interest by utilizing the feeling of wanting to shift to the super attack mode from the advantage of the super attack mode and the feeling of wanting to guess the setting.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, as the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8, a plurality of display start modes with different elapsed times from the event that triggers the start are set.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the display start mode table according to the present modification, the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting after the stop ON operation of the third reel or at the end of payout regardless of the content of the advantageous section. . The elapsed time after the stop ON operation of the third reel is set to be different from that after the stop ON operation of the third reel. 5 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel, 10 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel, and 15 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel can be set. For example, when the challenge mode is won, 5 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel is most likely to be selected, and when the attack mode is won, 10 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel is most likely to be selected, and the super attack mode is won. Sometimes 15 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel is most likely to be selected. In other words, the later the lighting timing of the eighth display segment N8 from the stop ON operation of the third reel, the more advantageous the player moves to an advantageous section.

In the section display first process in this modified example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72, in steps S3101 to S3103, the same processes as those in steps S2701 to S2703 are performed. However, in the lottery process in step S3103, a lottery is made based on the display start mode table shown in FIG. In step S3104, a process of storing the display start timing according to the lottery result is performed based on the processing result of step S3103. In this case, for example, a flag or the like that can determine the determined display start timing (that is, how many seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel, or when the payout is completed) is set, and the display is started after the fact by such a flag. Timing can be determined. In step S3105, processing for setting a display start game flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The display start game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that display of the eighth display segment N8 is to be started in the current game.

After the processing of step S3105 is executed, the number of advantageous section games AG is started to be measured in step S3106, and then the first section display processing is terminated. The processing of step S3106 is the same as the processing of step S2705. If it is determined in step S3101 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, display continuation processing is performed in step S3107, and then the section display first processing ends. The processing in step S3107 is the same as the processing in step S2706.

In the reel control process (FIG. 18) in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 73A, after determining that all reels have stopped in step S411, the third section display process is performed in step S3201. After performing the processing of step S3201, payout determination processing is performed in step S413, winning result corresponding processing is performed in step S414, section display second processing is performed in step S415, and winning result command is performed in step S416. is set, and then the reel control process is terminated. The processing of steps S413 to S416 is as described above.

The section display third processing in step S3201 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73(b).

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the display start game flag is set. As already explained, the display start game flag is a flag set in the section display first process. If it is not set, the section display third process is terminated. If it is set, in step S3302, processing for clearing the display start game flag is performed. Then, freeze setting processing is performed in step S3303. The freeze setting process is a process for generating a so-called freeze effect that temporarily restricts the process based on the player's operation and the progress of the game when the eighth display segment N8 is lit in this modification.

Specifically, in step S3303, one of 1 sec, 6 sec, 11 sec, and 16 sec is set as the freeze period. Here, the timing at which the third section display process is performed is the timing at which all the reels are stopped, and the timing at which the stop ON operation of the third reel is performed. The freeze period set in step S3303 is a period obtained by adding 1 sec as a predetermined period to each period when the eighth display segment N8 is displayed after the stop ON operation of the third reel in this modification. 0 sec+1 sec after the stop ON operation of the 3rd reel, 5 sec+1 sec after the stop ON operation of the 3rd reel, 10 sec+1 sec after the stop ON operation of the 3rd reel, and 15 sec+1 sec after the stop ON operation of the 3rd reel. In step S3303, the current display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is grasped, and the freeze period is set according to the grasped start state. That is, if the start mode is 0 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the freeze period is set to 1 sec, if it is 5 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the freeze period is set to 6 sec, and 10 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel. If so, the freeze period is set to 11 seconds, and if it is 15 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the freeze period is set to 16 seconds. Also, if the current start mode is the end of the payout, 16 seconds, which is the longest freeze period in the case of the start mode after the stop operation of the third reel, is set as the current freeze period. The freeze period is set, for example, by inputting a value corresponding to the length of the freeze period to a timer counter that is updated (decremented) at a predetermined cycle, and starting updating the timer counter. The freeze state continues until the timer counter reaches the initial value (0), and the CPU 102 refers to the timer counter value to determine whether to proceed to the next process (payout determination process in step S413). That is, until the timer counter reaches the initial value, the section display third process is on standby.

After performing the process of step S3304, the process of setting the display start timing is performed in step S3305. That is, based on the information about the display start timing that can be determined after the fact in step S3104 of the first section display process, a process of synchronizing it with the information about the freeze period set in step S3305 is performed. Specifically, when 0 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel is set as the display start timing, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is set to start 0 sec after the start of freezing, and the display start timing is set to If 5 seconds after the stop ON operation is set, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is set to start 5 seconds after the start of the freeze, and if 10 seconds after the stop ON operation is set as the display start timing, freeze. The display of the eighth display segment N8 is set to start 10 seconds after the start, and if 15 seconds after the stop ON operation is set as the display start timing, the display of the eighth display segment N8 starts 15 seconds after the start of freezing. be set. Further, when the end of the payout is set as the display start timing, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is set to start at the end of the payout after the end of the current freeze period. In this case, for example, by setting a flag indicating that the display should start at the end of the payout, and determining whether or not the flag exists, it is determined whether the display should start during the freeze period, and whether the display should start at the end of the payout. It is good to have the structure which determines whether it is not.

After performing the process of step S3305, after outputting the display start command to the display control device 81, which is the sub-side control device, in step S3306, the section display third process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the display start command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the freeze effect (for example, blackout effect) corresponding to the freeze period is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the corresponding effect is displayed. A speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound (eg, a "push" sound as if a machine were to break). In this case, depending on the length of the freeze period, the freeze effect and its sound effect may differ.

In this modified example, the relationship between the timing at which the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started and the content of the advantageous section will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

FIG. 74(a) shows a case where 6 sec is set as the freeze period during which the operation by the player and the processing based on the operation are invalidated. When the third reel stops at the timing of ta1 and is in a frozen state over the period from there to the timing of ta3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of ta2 slightly earlier than the timing of ta3. . In this case, the period TB1 from the start of freezing in the freeze period to the eighth display segment N8 is 5 seconds, and the period from the start of display at timing ta2 to the release of freeze at timing ta3. is 1 sec. When the freeze is canceled at the timing ta3, medals are paid out and the medal payout process is performed over the period TA until the timing ta4. In this case, it is highly likely that the advantageous section to be started is the challenge mode. When the medal payout process is completed at the timing of ta4, the next game operation (betting operation) is allowed.

FIG. 74(b) shows the case where the freeze period is set to 11 sec. When the third reel stops at timing tb1 and is in a frozen state over the period from there to timing tb3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at timing tb2 slightly earlier than timing tb3. . In this case, the period TB2 from the start of freezing in the freeze period to the eighth display segment N8 is 10 seconds, which is longer than in the case of FIG. The period until the freeze is released at the timing of tb3 is 1 sec, which is the same length as in the case of FIG. 74(a). When the freeze is released at the timing tb3, medals are paid out and the medal payout process is performed over the period TA until the timing tb4. If the winning result of the game is the same as in the case of FIG. 74(a), the length of the medal payout process will be the same, and the period TA from tb3 to tb4 will be the same length as in the case of FIG. 74(a). . In this case, there is a high possibility that the advantageous section to be started is the attack mode. When the medal payout process is completed at the timing of tb4, the next game operation (betting operation) is allowed. That is, in the case of FIG. 74(b), the timing at which the next game operation is allowed is later than in the case of FIG. 74(a).

FIG. 74(c) shows the case where the freeze period is set as 16 seconds. When the third reel stops at the timing of tc1 and is in a frozen state over the period from there to the timing of tc3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of tc2 slightly earlier than the timing of tc3. . In this case, the period TB3 from the start of freezing in the freeze period to the eighth display segment N8 is 15 seconds, which is longer than in the case of FIG. 74(b). The period until the freeze is released at the timing of tc3 is 1 sec, which is the same length as in the case of FIGS. 74(a) and 74(b). When the freeze is canceled at the timing tc3, medals are paid out and the medal payout process is performed over the period TA until the timing tc4. If the winning result of the game is the same as in FIGS. 74(a) and 74(b), the length of the period TA is the same as in FIGS. 74(a) and 74(b). is. In this case, there is a high possibility that the advantageous section to be started is the super attack mode. When the medal payout process is completed at the timing of tc4, the next game operation (betting operation) is permitted. That is, in the case of FIG. 74(c), the timing at which the next game operation is allowed is later than in the cases of FIG. 74(a) and FIG. 74(b).

As described above, in the start game in which the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the interval indicator is started, by setting the freeze state (freeze period, invalid period) for restricting the progress of the game, the start timing can be changed. In the display start effect of the eighth display segment N8 whose end is determined, a period for performing the display start effect can be secured, and the display start effect can be diversified.

In addition, by associating the length of the period of the freeze state with the content of the advantageous section, it is possible not only to simply generate the freeze state, but also to make people interested in the length of the period. becomes.

In particular, by associating the period from the start of the freeze state to the display start timing of the eighth display segment N8 with the content of the advantageous section, interest in the eighth display segment N8 after the freeze state is increased. As a result, it is possible to expect a great effect even though it is a simple effect such as simply switching the eighth display segment N8 from the off state to the on state.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the freeze state occurs while the reels are rotating, rather than after all reels have stopped.

That is, for example, when 6 sec is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75(a), the period from the timing of ta5 when one of the reels is rotating to ta7 which is 6 sec later is in the freeze state. For example, even if the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 to stop the spinning reels, the stop drive control is not executed. The eighth display segment N8 is illuminated at a timing ta6 slightly earlier than ta7. In other words, the display of the section display is started after the period of TA1 (5 sec) has passed since the frozen state. All the reels are stopped at timing ta8, medal payout processing is performed at timing ta9 to ta10, and the operation of the next game is permitted at timing ta10.

When 11 sec is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75(b), the period from the timing tb5 when one of the reels is rotating to tb7 which is 11 sec later is in the freeze state. The eighth display segment N8 is illuminated at timing tb6, which is slightly earlier than tb7. In other words, the display of the section display is started after the period of TA2 (10 sec) has passed since the frozen state. All reels are stopped at timing tb8, medal payout processing is performed at timing tb9 to tb10, and the next game operation is permitted at timing tb10.

When 16 sec is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75(c), the period from tc5 when one of the reels is rotating to tc7 which is 16 sec later becomes the freeze state. is trying to stop the spinning reels by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, stop drive control is not executed. The eighth display segment N8 is illuminated at timing tc6, which is slightly earlier than tc7. In other words, the display of the section display is started after the period of TA3 (15 sec) has passed since the frozen state. All the reels are stopped at timing tc8, medal payout processing is performed at timing tc9 to tc10, and the operation of the next game is permitted at timing tc10.

As described above, the period during which the start game is frozen can be set at any timing as long as the timing at which the operation of the next game is permitted and the content of the advantageous interval are associated with each other.

In particular, by setting a configuration in which the player's operation (in the above example, the stop operation) is restricted by entering the freeze state, the player can recognize that the freeze state has occurred through the restriction of the operation. can be recognized. As a result, compared to the freeze state in which execution of processing such as payout processing that is unilaterally performed on the gaming machine side is restricted as in Modification 3, the start timing of the freeze state becomes difficult to understand. Therefore, since the start timing is difficult to understand, the length of the freeze state is also difficult to understand. It is possible to entertain the suggestion of the content of the advantageous section by starting the display on the display.

In addition, by creating a freeze state in which the player's operations are restricted as described above, it becomes difficult to know when the freeze state ends. That is, as described above, if a frozen state is generated while the reels are rotating, it is necessary to stop the reels during rotation by the player's operation after releasing the frozen state. From the viewpoint that the timing of the stop operation depends on the player, in the case of a configuration in which the freeze state occurs during reel rotation, the timing at which the operation of the next game is permitted is not limited to the length of the freeze state. The timing of the operator's operation also has an effect. By doing the above, it is possible to entertain the content of the advantageous section while making the expectation longer than the length of the set freeze state, and the end of the start timing of the display by the section indicator. It is also possible to bring about the merit of delaying.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started at a timing different from that during the freeze period. That is, in this modification, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started at the end of the payout, a freeze state is generated in the start game, and the length of the freeze period is associated with the content of the advantageous section. I'm trying

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76(a), when the challenge mode is won, a freeze state occurs over a period from ta11 to ta12 (6 sec, TC1). The reels are stopped at the timing of ta13, and medal payout processing is performed during a period (TA) from ta14 to ta15. When the payout of medals is completed at the timing of ta15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

As shown in FIG. 76(b), when the attack mode is won, a freeze state occurs over a period from tb11 to tb12 (11 sec, TC2). The reels are stopped at timing tb13, and medal payout processing is performed during a period (TA) from tb14 to tb15. When the payout of medals is completed at the timing of tb15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

As shown in FIG. 76(c), when the super attack mode is won, a freeze state occurs over a period from tc11 to tc12 (16 sec, TC3). The reels are stopped at timing tc13, and medal payout processing is performed during a period (TA) from tc14 to tc15. When the payout of medals is completed at the timing of tc15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

In this way, even if the display of the section indicator is not started during the freeze state, the length of the period of the freeze state should be associated with the content of the advantageous section, and the length of the freeze state is advantageous. It is also possible to play a game of predicting the content of the section. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of freedom of the timing for generating the freeze state.

<Modification 6>
In this modified example, the aspect of the section indicator is different. FIG. 77 is a front view of the slot machine 10 in this modified example.

In this modification, a ninth display portion N9 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine as a section display. Specifically, on the game panel 25 on the front side of the game machine, a ninth display portion N9 is provided laterally adjacent to the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R (to the left of the display window 26L when viewed from the front). The ninth display portion N9 is a light-emitting portion whose front panel is formed of a resin member having light transmission properties, and the front panel is integrally formed with the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. In the ninth display portion N9, an LED (not shown) is arranged behind the front panel. The LED is connected to the main controller 101, and the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 controls light emission of the LED. The LED can emit light in a plurality of colors, for example, in four colors of blue, green, red, and white. Although the eighth display segment N8 is provided in this modified example as well, the configuration may be such that the ninth display portion N9 is provided instead of the eighth display segment N8.

Incidentally, when the LED of the ninth display unit N9 is controlled to emit light, the brightness and the illuminance toward the front of the game machine are different from the brightness of the surrounding display units and the illuminance toward the front of the game machine (for example, the back of the game panel 25). It emits light so as to be higher than the brightness or illuminance of the light or the brightness or illuminance of the auxiliary display section 65). Therefore, when the light emission of the ninth display portion N9 is controlled, it becomes more conspicuous than the peripheral display portions, thereby preventing the player from overlooking it.

In addition, each color of light emitted from the ninth display portion N9 is set to a color that is conspicuous in relation to the other display portions (game panel 25, etc.). , The function as a section indicator that clearly indicates that it is an advantageous section is secured.

FIG. 78 shows a display start mode table in this modified example.

In this modification, among the display start modes of the ninth display portion N9 as the interval display, the display start timing is unified at the end of the payout in the start game. On the other hand, among the display start modes, the emission color of the LED of the ninth display portion N9 is made different according to the content of the advantageous section. Specifically, blue is more likely to be selected from among blue, green, and red if the challenge mode is won, green is more likely to be selected if the attack mode is won, and red is more likely to be selected if the super attack mode is won. easy to be Therefore, when the display of the ninth display portion N9 is started in the start game, the content of the advantageous section in which the luminescent colors are red, green, and blue in this order is likely to be advantageous. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the section indicator and improve the degree of attention to the section indicator.

The ninth display unit N9 as a section indicator emits light in red, green, or blue according to the content of the advantageous section at the start of display, but from the game following the start game, namely During the advantageous section, the emission color is unified to white. In other words, the game of predicting the contents of the advantageous section from the display color of the ninth display portion N9 is limited to the starting game, and the timings to be watched are centralized, so that the presentation effect is enhanced.

Further, as described above, any of the colors of light emitted at the start of display is set to a color that is more conspicuous than the white light emitted during the advantageous section. From this point of view as well, it is possible to make the display color of the ninth display portion N9 at the start of display more likely to attract a high degree of interest.

As described above, in suggesting the content of an advantageous section by changing the start mode of the section indicator, the difference in the start mode is not limited to the difference in the display start timing, and the section indicator at the start of display A configuration may be adopted in which the content of the advantageous section is suggested from the difference in the presentation content (color).

In particular, in each luminescent color, even if it emits light in any luminescent color, it is conspicuous (easy to recognize) in relation to other display parts, so that it becomes a lighting state during an advantageous section and normal Even with a section indicator that has relatively low performance elements, such as being turned off during a section, it is possible to expect performance elements while ensuring the function of clearly indicating advantageous sections.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, in the configuration in which the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display device is varied, the display start mode is varied according to the game result that triggered the lottery for transition to the advantageous section. FIG. 79 shows an example of a display start mode table in this modified example.

For example, FIG. 79(a) shows that the game result that triggered the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, that is, the game result in the game in which the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set is a strong cherry. 10 shows a display start mode table when there is That is, when the challenge mode is won based on the strong cherry winning, the stop OFF operation of the third reel is selected as the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8. When the attack mode is won based on the strong cherry winning, the second reel stop OFF operation is selected, and when the super attack mode is won, the first reel stop OFF operation is selected.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is a weak cherry, as shown in FIG. When the attack mode is won, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is selected, and when the super attack mode is won, the stop OFF operation of the third reel is selected.

For strong watermelon and weak watermelon, the display start mode is determined by a common display start mode table. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79(c), the stop ON operation of the third reel is selected in the challenge mode, the stop OFF operation of the third reel is selected in the attack mode, and the super attack mode is selected. If so, the end of payout is selected.

As for other special hands, the display start mode is determined by the display start mode table shown in FIG. 79(d). In this case, when the start lever 41 is operated is selected in the challenge mode, when the first reel is stopped and turned OFF is selected in the attack mode, and when the payout is completed is selected in the super attack mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to predict whether or not there will be a shift to an advantageous section, and the content of the advantageous section in the case of transition, based on the game result and the display start mode of the section display device. can be done. Specifically, for example, when the "cherry" symbol stops on the lower or upper stage of the left reel 32L, the current game result is strong cherry or weak cherry. In this case, if the left reel 32L is stopped first and the left reel 32L is the first reel, when the left reel 32L is stopped and the eighth display segment N8 lights up, the challenge mode or super attack is activated. Winning the mode transition lottery is determined. In other words, it is determined that it is not in attack mode. Whether it is a strong cherry or a weak cherry can be determined by stopping the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. If they do not stop together, it will be a weak cherry. For example, when the second reel or the third reel is stopped and it is determined that it is a weak cherry, the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated when the first reel is stopped and turned off. , it is determined that the content of the advantageous section this time is the super attack mode. On the other hand, when the second reel or the third reel is operated to stop and it is determined that it is a strong cherry, in this case, it is determined that the content of the advantageous section is the challenge mode. In other words, from the viewpoint of the probability of winning the challenge mode, attack mode, etc., it can be said that strong cherries are preferable to weak cherries for the player. It is preferable for , and the image for the game result is reversed.

Further, when the "cherry" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the eighth display segment N8 is not lit, a strong cherry win and challenge mode or attack mode win, a weak cherry win and attack mode or super attack mode are won. It will be either winning, strong cherry or weak cherry winning, and not winning the transfer lottery to the advantageous section. In this case, when the 8th display segment N8 lights up at the time of the stop OFF operation of the second reel, it is determined that the current advantageous section is the attack mode regardless of whether it is a strong cherry or a weak cherry. On the other hand, if the 8th display segment N8 does not light up when the second reel is stopped and turned off, a strong cherry win and challenge mode win, a weak cherry win and super attack mode win, a strong cherry or weak cherry win and an advantageous section are selected. It will be either not elected to the transfer lottery. In a case where strong cherries and weak cherries can be discriminated from the second reel's stop result, if it is discriminated that the cherries are strong cherries, it means that the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has not been won or the challenge mode has been won. Either However, in the case of a strong cherry, there is a high possibility of winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section in the first place, and in this case, the possibility of winning the challenge mode increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a weak cherry, it means that either the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has not been won or the super attack mode has been won. situation. However, in the case of weak cherries, the possibility of winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is low in the first place, and in this case, the possibility of not winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section increases.

In this way, by associating the game result, that is, the stop result, with the display start mode of the section indicator, it is possible to narrow down the winning combinations as the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. From the relationship with the 10 game characteristics, it is possible to play a game such as predicting the content of the advantageous section.

<Modification 8>
In this modification, in a predetermined replay of replays (results of replay), a lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, and super attack mode is performed. FIG. 80(a) shows part of the win/fail lottery table for the normal game state and the first RT state in this modified example.

In this modification, in the win/fail lottery table in the normal game state and the 1st RT state, as a kind of replay combination, winning is established by winning with the index value IV=53 and winning the 1st replay or the 7th replay. A winning replay role is set. The winning replay combination has the same winning probability regardless of the set value, and more specifically, the winning probability is about 1/32000. As described above, when the winning of the winning replay combination is established, the replay is granted, and the next game can be played without requiring the insertion of new medals.

In this modified example, the winning replay combination is treated as a specific combination in the same way as the strong cherry combination. Therefore, for example, in step S701 of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if the winning replay combination is won, affirmative determination is made that the special combination has been won, and the process proceeds to the first special combination process (step S705) and the like. In addition, in the first special combination process in the present modification, a lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, or super attack mode based on the winning replay combination is also performed.

The odds of winning the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, and super attack mode based on the winning replay are the same regardless of the set values. Specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the challenge mode is 0% regardless of the set value, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode is 50% regardless of the set value, and the super attack mode. The probability of winning the lottery for transition to is 50% regardless of the set value. That is, in the normal game state or the first RT state, if the winning replay is won while the display mode is the normal mode, the attack mode or the super attack mode is won, and the ratio is 1:1. In addition, in this modified example, when winning the winning replay during the challenge mode, the player wins the super attack mode with a probability of 100%.

As described above, when a winning replay combination is established, a replay is awarded in the same manner as other replay combinations. However, compared to other replay combinations, the configuration of the bet processing at the time of awarding the replay is different. FIG. 80(b) is a flow chart showing the start waiting process in this modified example. The start waiting process is a process started at step S204 in the normal process (FIG. 15), and is mainly a process for setting (betting) the number of bets for the game.

In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the previous game was any replay prize. In the case of replay winning, the processing of steps S3402 to S3404 for granting replay is performed. In this case, in this modification, in step S3402, it is determined whether or not the replay in which a prize was won in the previous game was a winning replay. If it is not a winning replay, automatic bet processing is performed in step S3403. The automatic betting process is a process of determining the number of bets in the previous game and setting the same number of bets as the number of bets. For example, if the previous game was a 3-bet, a process of setting 3-bet is performed in step S3403. If the previous game was 1 bet, 1 bet is set in step S3403. After executing the processing of step S3403, the start waiting processing ends.

If it is determined in step S3402 that the previous game was a winning replay combination, the operation bet flag is set in the flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S3404. The operation bet flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is a game in which a replay is granted and that the replay is not yet granted. In this modified example, when the operation bet flag is set, the number of bets on the previous game is temporarily stored in a register or the like. It is good also as a structure provided.

If a negative determination is made in step S3401, or if the process of step S3404 has been executed, the process advances to step S3405. In step S3405, it is determined whether or not a betting operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been operated. If it is not operated, it stands by, and if any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is operated, an affirmative determination is made in step S3405. It should be noted that when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 during the standby of step S3405, a bet process based on the medal insertion is performed, but the description of this configuration is omitted.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the process advances to step S3406 to determine whether or not the operation bet flag is set. When the operation bet flag is not set, in step S3407, the number of bets corresponding to the operated credit insertion switch (bet switch) is performed. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 3 bet is set, when the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated, 1 bet is set, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is operated. In that case, set 2 bets. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3406 that the operation bet flag is set, then in step S3408 the same number of bets as the number of bets in the previous game is set as a replay award. For example, if the previous game was a 3-bet, a 3-bet is set in step S3408, and if the previous game was a 1-bet, a 1-bet is set in the step S3408. After executing the process of step S3408, the operation bet flag is cleared in step S3409. Then, after executing the process of step S3407 or step S3409, the start waiting process ends.

As described above, the winning replay and other replays differ in the configuration of bet processing when a replay is awarded. For other replays, the same number of bets as the number of bets for the previous game is automatically set, and for winning replays, the number of bets for the previous game and the number of bets for the previous game are set with the operation of any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 as a trigger. An equal number of bets are placed. If the previous game did not win a replay, automatic betting processing is not performed, and the current game is advanced by operating any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58. From the point of view of presence/absence of the operations of 56 to 58, the operations for progressing the game are common to the case of game results other than replay.

FIG. 81 shows the first section display process in this modified example.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, the flow advances to step S3502 to determine whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. If none of the winning flags is set, the section display first process is terminated. If any winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3503.

At step S3503, the winning trigger of the winning flag for which the affirmative determination was made at step S3502 is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the specific combination that triggered the winning of the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is a winning replay. As described above, since the challenge mode is not won in the winning replay, the affirmative determination in step S3503 means that the attack mode winning flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S3503, in steps S3504 and S3505, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery, and processing for setting it is performed. The processes of steps S3504 and S3505 are the same as the processes of steps S2703 and S2704.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3503 that the winning opportunity is the winning replay, in step S3506, the current display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is set to bet operation of the next game.

After performing the processing of step S3505 or step S3506, in step S3507, after performing the measurement start processing of the number of games AG in the advantageous interval, the first interval display processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, processing for continuing section display is performed in step S3508, and then section display first processing ends. These steps S3507 and S3508 are the same as the steps S2705 and S2706.

The difference in the final timing at which the display of the section indicator is started due to the difference in the timing of winning the advantageous section will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 82 .

FIG. 82(a) shows a case where the winning opportunity of the advantageous section is a specific combination other than the winning replay. All the reels are stopped at timing ta16, and medals are paid out at timing ta17 to ta18. Then, when the payout of medals for the current game (starting game) ends at the timing ta18, and the betting operation for the next game becomes effective at the timing ta19, the timing ta19 is the timing for displaying the section indicator. Of these, the timing is the slowest.

In this way, the section indicator is displayed in the start game before the operation of the next game is allowed, so that the section indicator is displayed before it is determined whether or not to carry out the next game. In other words, when it is determined whether or not to end the game at the end of the start game, the display of the section display is started, and despite winning the advantageous section, Ending the game is suppressed. In addition, as already explained, in the display start mode table of the interval indicator, the display start mode with the latest timing among the set display start modes is the end of payout at ta18.

The betting operation becomes effective at the timing of ta19, and if the betting operation is performed by the timing of ta20, for example, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the start operation (operation of the start lever 41) at the timing of ta21. be done.

On the other hand, if the previous game is a winning replay, the latest timing for displaying the section indicator is different, as shown in FIG. 82(b). Specifically, when the reels are stopped at the timing of tb16, replay is provided instead of payout of medals. However, since this replay is a winning replay, the operation bet flag is set in the start waiting process (FIG. 80(b)) in the normal process, and the replay is given by the bet operation instead of the automatic bet. .

In this case, if a bet operation is performed at timing tb18, which is a period from when the betting operation becomes effective at timing tb17 to timing tb19, which is the valid period, a replay is given and the number of bets on the previous game is awarded. The same number of bets as , are set, and the interval indicator starts to display. Then, when the start operation is performed at the timing of tb20, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start to rotate.

In this way, when the display of the section indicator is started based on the winning replay, the display of the section indicator is started at the time of the betting operation after winning the winning replay. Here, the betting operation after winning the winning replay is an operation for obtaining a replay obtained in the starting game, and can be said to be an operation incidental to the starting game. That is, even with the above configuration, the effect of displaying the interval indicator in the start game is ensured.

Further, if the betting operation after winning the winning replay is an operation associated with the starting game in which the winning replay is won as described above, the game following the starting game is started by operating the start lever 41 . Then, when the display of the section indicator is started based on the winning replay, the latest display start timing is the timing of tb20, which is the start operation of the next game.

As described above, when a small winning combination other than a replay (specific winning combination, payout combination) is a chance to win an advantageous section, the section indicator will start to be displayed before the betting operation of the next game, and the predetermined replay (winning replay) will start. In the event of winning an advantageous section, the section display is configured to start displaying by the time the start lever 41 of the next game is operated. In this way, by varying the final timing of starting the display of the section indicators, it is possible to greatly diversify the display start modes of the section indicators.

Moreover, in the case of a winning replay, a bet operation is used as a trigger for granting a replay based on the winning replay. In other words, it is possible to extend the starting game by setting the state in which the game in which the winning replay is won continues until the player makes a bet operation.

Then, when the winning replay is the opportunity to win the advantageous section, the section indicator is displayed based on the betting operation that is the opportunity to give the replay. Assuming that the display of the section indicator starts before the betting operation is normally performed (if other small wins are the trigger for winning), it is possible to give replay based on the winning replay. Such a betting operation is considered to be a situation in which the display of the section indicator has already been given up, and if the display of the section indicator is started in such a situation, the player can be surprised and greatly appreciated. It is possible to exhibit a dramatic effect.

The winning replay stop roll may be as follows. Specifically, when the combination of symbols set as the winning mode of the winning replay stops on the active line, a small combination with another medal payout (especially a specific combination that triggers a lottery to move to an advantageous section, A combination of symbols set as a winning mode of "strong watermelon" is stopped on a line different from the effective line. By doing so, an effect can be expected that makes it appear that a small winning combination with the payout of the other medals has been established, and the interval indicator must not start displaying by the time of the bet operation. Through this, it is possible to increase the effect of making the player think that he/she has not won the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section based on the winning of a small combination that accompanies the payout of the other medals. As a result of the above, it becomes easier for the player to give up winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, and it is possible to further expect the effect of surprising the player.

<Modification 9>
In this modification, when the advantageous section ends after reaching the upper limit number of games, the mode of ending the display of the section indicator is changed. FIG. 83 shows the first section display processing in this modified example.

In step S3601, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, the same processing as in steps S2702 to S2705 is performed in steps S3602 to S3605. If the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, the process advances to step S3606 to add the number of games AG in the advantageous section. That is, in this modification, the number of games AG in the advantageous interval is managed by the interval display second process started at the end of the game (in the reel control process), but the interval displayed at the start of the game (in the lottery process). This is done in the first display process. In step S3607, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has reached the upper limit value of "1500". If it has not reached the upper limit, in step S3608, the process of continuing the display of the eighth display segment N8 is performed, and then the first section display process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3607 that the number of games AG in the advantageous interval has reached the upper limit value, that is, if it is determined that the forced end condition for ending the advantageous interval in the current game is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3609. In step S3609, the number of games in the advantageous section AG is reset to the initial value (0). Then, in step S3610, a process of setting a forced termination flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The forced termination flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the forced termination condition is satisfied.

In step S3611, display end mode lottery processing is performed. In this lottery process, a display end mode table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and the display end mode of the section display device when the advantageous section ends is determined by lottery. In the display end mode table, as shown in FIG. 84, the display end mode (display end timing) is set differently depending on the content of the advantageous section when the forced end condition is satisfied and the set value.

That is, in step S3611, the content of the display mode in the game in which the forced termination condition is satisfied (the game in which the processing of step S3611 is performed) is grasped, and if the display mode is challenge mode or attack mode, the section display As the display end mode of , the end of payout is set. On the other hand, when the display mode of the current game is the VB mode or the additional special zone, when the stop OFF operation of the first reel, the stop OFF operation of the second reel, the stop OFF operation of the third reel, and Either end of payout is determined from the set value.

Specifically, when the current game is the VB mode, the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected with setting 2 or higher, and is not selected with setting 1. At the time of the stop OFF operation of the third reel, it is selected with a setting of 4 or more, and is not selected with a setting of 3 or less. Also, when the second reel is stopped and turned off, setting 2, setting 4, and setting 6 are more likely to be selected than setting 1, setting 3, and setting 5.

If the current game is the special zone, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is selected with a setting of 4 or higher, and is not selected with a setting of 3 or lower. Only the setting 6 is selected at the time of the stop OFF operation of the third reel. Also, when the first reel is stopped and turned off, setting 1, setting 3, and setting 5 are more likely to be selected than setting 2, setting 4, and setting 6.

In other words, the display termination mode table is defined so that the setting value can be easily narrowed down to the extent that the situation (display mode) at the time when the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is satisfied is more advantageous to the player. In other words, if the situation is advantageous to the player, and if there is no upper limit to the number of continuous games in the advantageous section, the number of continuous games can be expected to increase further, and the forced termination condition is satisfied, set as an alternative. It is possible to make a game in which the value is guessed, and to compensate for the feeling of loss caused by the end of the advantageous section in a situation where there is still a long way to go.

After the display end mode lottery process is performed in step S3611, the display end mode corresponding to the lottery result is set as the end mode of the current section display device in step S3612, and then the first section display process is terminated. do. In this case, for example, if the stop OFF operation of the first reel is set, the CPU 102 controls to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 based on the stop OFF operation. Further, if the end of payout is set, the CPU 102 controls to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 based on the end of payout of medals.

In the second section display process in this modification, as shown in FIG. 85, it is determined in step S3701 whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, the second section display processing is terminated, and if it is being displayed, the process advances to step S3702. In step S3702, it is determined whether or not the forced termination flag is set. If it is set, data initialization processing is performed in step S3703, and then the second section display processing is terminated. Note that the display of the eighth display segment N8 ends in the end mode set by the processing in steps S3611 and S3612. Only initialize the data.

If it is determined in step S3702 that the forced termination flag is not set, the process advances to step S3704. The processing of steps S3704 to S3707 is the same as the processing of steps S2807 to S2810.

As described above, in the section display device in which the display is started when the display shifts to an advantageous section in which the state is advantageous to the player due to the improved performance related to the notification of the pressing order, and the display is finished when the advantageous section ends, By making the display end mode different depending on the situation at the end, the situation at the time of the end can be grasped from the section display, and the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the situation at the time of the end.

In particular, when the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is established in a situation advantageous to the player and the advantageous section ends, the set value can be estimated as a kind of information that can be beneficial to the player. . In this way, it is possible to reduce the feeling of loss at the time of forced termination. It is possible to achieve a well-balanced game performance between the feeling of loss at the time of forced termination and the ease of obtaining potentially useful information.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the chance of winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is a double role with a bonus, the content of the advantageous section is suggested in the game from the game in which the duplicate role is won to the bonus winning. Here, changes in the display mode of the section indicator in this embodiment will be described first.

As described above, the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is performed based on winning a specific role such as a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. Also, the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is also performed based on winning a double combination of a bonus and a strong cherry (especially a combination of the first BB). In this embodiment, the display start mode of the section indicator is varied depending on whether or not the chance of winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is a double hand with the first BB. Specifically, when the winning opportunity of the transition lottery is not a duplicate role with the first BB, the game in which the specific role winning, which is the winning opportunity, is the specific role, as in the first embodiment. A game in which is established is regarded as a start game, and the display of the interval indicator is started before allowing the operation of the next game.

On the other hand, if the winning opportunity of the transition lottery is a double role with the 1BB, the game in which the 1BB prize was established among the specific roles that are the winning opportunity is set as the start game as the game in which the specific role is established, Start displaying the interval indicator before allowing the next game operation.

As already explained, the 1BB win pattern is set to a combination of so-called missing symbols, and if no win is established in the win game, the 1BB win flag is carried over. Therefore, when a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section is won with the overlapping role with the 1BB as a trigger, the game in which the overlapping role is won may be different from the game which becomes the start game when the 1BB winning is established. Then, when a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is won with the overlapping role with the 1BB as a trigger, the display of the section indicator does not start in the game in which the overlapping role is won, and the 1BB winning is established. The display start of the interval indicator is carried over until .

In the present embodiment, the playability is realized using whether or not the display start of such a section indicator is carried over. Hereinafter, the processing configuration related to the playability will be described.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing reel control processing in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, in steps S3801 to S3816, the same processes as in steps S401 to S416 are performed. Then, in step S3817, special RT state processing is performed, and then the reel control processing is terminated. In this embodiment, when winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, it is configured to shift to a special RT state different from the 1st to 3rd RT states that are shifted by the promotion replay, fall replay, or the like. In the special RT state, the probability of winning a predetermined replay is different from that in the normal game state, specifically higher than in the normal game state. The special RT state that shifts based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB ends when the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB that triggers the transition is established. In addition, in this embodiment, there is also provided a special RT state that transitions regardless of whether the first BB or the second BB is won. The special RT state processing is processing for controlling such a special RT state.

In the special RT state process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, at step S3901, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal game state or the first RT state, it is determined in step S3902 whether or not the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the first BB or the second BB is won in the normal game state or the first RT state.

If any BB is won, it is determined in step S3903 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, it is determined in step S3904 whether or not the special zone winning flag is set. If the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is set, and the attack mode winning flag and the special zone winning flag are set, in step S3905, a special RT command with super attack mode is issued to the display control device. 81 is set as an output target. The special RT state command with super attack mode is for making the display control device 81 grasp that the state is shifted to the RT state based on the winning of the first BB or the second BB, and that the super attack mode has been won. is a command. More specifically, the special RT state command with super attack mode is to shift to the special RT state based on the 1st BB winning, win the lottery for transition to super attack mode, and before shifting to super attack mode. This is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives such a special RT command will be described later.

On the other hand, if the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is set, and if the attack mode winning flag is set but the special zone flag is not set, then in step S3906, an attack mode winning flag is set. A special RT command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The special RT command with attack mode is a command for allowing the display control device 81 to recognize that the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, and that the attack mode is won. . More specifically, the special RT state command with attack mode indicates that a transition to a special RT state is made based on the winning of the 1st BB, that the lottery for transition to attack mode has been won, and that the state is before transition to attack mode. This is a command for the control device 81 to grasp. Processing of the display control device 81 that receives such a special RT command will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3903 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3907. In step S3907, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. When the challenge mode winning flag is set, in step S3908, a process of setting a special RT state command with challenge mode as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. The special RT state command with challenge mode is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the state is shifted to the RT state based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB and that the challenge mode is won. be. More specifically, the special RT state command with challenge mode indicates that a transition to a special RT state is made based on the winning of the 1st BB, and that the lottery for the transition to the challenge mode has been won and that the transition to the challenge mode has not yet been made. This is a command for the control device 81 to grasp. Processing of the display control device 81 that receives such a special RT command will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3907 that the challenge mode winning flag has not been set, a special RT command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S3909. The special RT state command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the game will transition to the RT state based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. More specifically, the special RT state command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the transition to the special RT state is made based on the winning of the first BB, and that the transition lottery such as the attack mode has not been won. . The processing of the display control device 81 that receives such a special RT state command will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3902 that neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3910. In step S3910, it is determined whether or not a special role has been won in the current game. If it is determined that the specific role has been won, it is determined in step S3911 whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. If it is determined in step S3910 that the specific role has not been won, or if it is determined in step S3911 that any winning flag has been set even if the specific role has been won, The special RT state processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if a special role is won, and neither the challenge mode nor the attack mode is won, in step S3912, the special RT counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 shows the special RT state. A process of inputting "5" as the number of continuous games is executed. The special RT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of continuous games in a special RT state that transitions regardless of the winning of the first BB or the second BB. The number of games to be continued in the special RT state is arbitrary, and may be less than five or may be more than five. However, it is preferable to set the number of games to be continued in the special RT state in relation to the winning probability of the special replay, which will be described later.

In subsequent step S 3913 , the fake special RT state command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The fake special RT state command is a command for allowing the display control device 81 to grasp that the game will move to the RT state regardless of whether the first BB or the second BB is won. More specifically, the fake special RT state command makes the display control device 81 grasp that the transition to the special RT state is not based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, and that the transition lottery such as the attack mode is not won. is a command for The processing of the display control device 81 that receives such a special RT state command will be described later.

After executing any one of steps S3905, S3906, S3908, S3909 and S3913, the process advances to step S3914. In step S3914, a process of storing the current game state is executed. Specifically, the current gaming state (normal gaming state or first RT state) is grasped, and if it is in the first RT state, the RT setting flag (first RT setting flag) is stored in a predetermined storage area of RAM 106. I do. The RT setting flag stored in this storage area can be read later. For example, after the end of the first BB or the second BB or after the end of the special RT state, the RT setting flag read from the storage area It is possible to set the RT state based on.

Then, in step S3915, the stored RT setting flag is cleared, and in step S3916, the fourth RT setting flag is set, and then the special RT state processing ends. A fourth RT setting flag corresponds to a special RT state. By the processing of steps S3915 and S3916, the gaming state shifts to the fourth RT state as a special RT state.

Here, the winning/failing lottery table in the fourth RT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. FIG. 88 shows a lottery table for the 4th RT state that shifts based on the winning of the 1BB or 2BB, and FIG. 89 shows a lottery table for the 4RT state that shifts regardless of winning the 1BB or 2BB. is shown.

In any of the winning lottery tables for the 4th RT state, the winning probability of the specific hand with the index value IV = 13 to 20, 32 to 45 and the pressing order bell with the IV = 21 to 28 is the same as in the normal game state and the 1st RT state. It has the same odds of winning. However, in the 4th RT state that shifts based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, even if a specific combination with an index value of IV=32 to 45 is won, the 1st BB or the 2nd BB will not be won. That is, in a situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set, new winning of the first BB and second BB (double winning of bonuses) is avoided. For the same reason, in the 4th RT state based on winning the 1st BB and 2nd BB, various bonuses with index values IV=46 to 48 are not won. In that respect, in the 4th RT state that is not based on the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, if you win with the index value IV = 32 to 45, you will win the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, and the index value IV = 46 to 48. It is possible to win various bonuses.

In the fourth RT state, as replays, the winning probability of the normal replay with index value IV=1 and the winning probability of special replays with index values IV=53 and 54 are higher than those in the normal game state and the first RT state. More specifically, special replays with index values IV=53 and 54 are replays that are won only in the 4th RT state, and the winning probability in other game states is zero. It should be noted that even in other gaming states, some (with a low probability) may be elected. Also, in the fourth RT state, 0 is set for the point values PV of index values IV=2 to 12, and the pressing order replay corresponding to these index values is not won.

If the special replay 1 with the index value IV=53 is won, the 1st replay, the 9th replay, and the 11th to 15th replays are repeatedly won. Also, if the special replay 2 with the index value IV=54 is won, the 1st replay, the 11th replay to the 15th replay are repeatedly won.

In the fourth RT state, the probability of winning with index value IV=1 is about 1/5.3, and the probability of winning with index value IV=53 is about 1/43.7. =54, the probability of winning is about 1 in 43.7. Therefore, in the 4th RT state, the total replay probability is higher than in the normal game state and the 1st RT state, and the probability of losing results is lower.

Incidentally, the replay probability in the 4th RT state is lower than that in the 2nd and 3rd RT states, and the probability of a failure result is higher. Therefore, even in the case of performing reel control in which the replay winning is preferentially established over the BB winning, the BB winning can be established relatively smoothly.

Returning to the description of the special RT state processing, if it is determined in step S3901 that the state is not the normal game state or the first RT state, the process proceeds to step S3917. In step S3917, it is determined whether or not the game state is the special RT state by determining whether or not the fourth RT setting flag is set. If it is not in the special RT state, the special RT state processing is terminated as it is. If it is in the special RT state, the process proceeds to step S3918.

In step S3918, it is determined whether or not either the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. In other words, if the special RT state transitions based on the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning, or if it transitions without being based on the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning, but then wins the 1st BB or 2nd BB, End special RT state processing. If it is determined in step S3918 that none of the BB winning flags has been set, then in step S3919 the special RT counter is subtracted. That is, the special RT counter set in step S3912 is decremented by one each time the game is played.

In step S3920, it is determined whether or not the special RT counter has become "0" based on the processing result of step S3919. If it is determined not to be "0", it is determined in step S3921 whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. When the affirmative determination is made in step S3921, although the special RT state of this time is a special RT state that has transitioned without being based on the 1 BB or 2 BB, in the game of this time in the special RT state, the 1 BB or 2 BB It means that you have won the challenge mode or attack mode (super attack mode) triggered by a specific role that is not a duplicate role. As already explained, when the win is triggered by a specific combination that is not the same as the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, the section display starts displaying the game as the starting game.

If it is determined at step S3920 that the special RT counter is "0", or if at step S3921 the display of the section indicator is started with the current game as the start game, the process proceeds to step S3922, and the process proceeds to step S3914. Read processing of the RT setting flag stored in . In addition, in the case of the normal game state in step S3914, the RT setting flag is not stored, and in step S3914, the RT setting flag is not stored in the RT setting flag storage area. is determined to be in the normal game state. Then, in step S3923, based on the result of the reading process in step S3922, a process of returning to the game state before shifting to the special RT state is performed. After performing the processing of step S3923, the special RT state processing ends.

It should be noted that, when shifting to the special RT state, the configuration may be such that the game state before transition is not stored, and the game state is uniformly shifted to a game state (for example, normal game state) when the special RT state ends. In particular, the special RT state does not transition during the 2nd RT state to the 3rd RT state. It is considered that the loss suffered by the player is small.

Next, the bonus state processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S4001 whether or not the bonus state is set, and if not, in step S4002 it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the determination in step S4002 is affirmative, it is determined in step S4003 whether or not CB winning has been established. Let the number of payouts be "15". After that, a state command is set in step S4006, and an external signal setting process is performed in step S4007, after which the bonus state process ends. These steps S4001 to S4007 are the same as the steps S601 to S607.

If a negative determination is made in step S4003, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the 1st BB or the 2nd BB winning has been established. If any BB winning has been established, the process advances to step S4009 to perform processing for clearing the current RT setting flag. In step S4010, processing for clearing the BB winning flag is performed, and in step S4011, processing for setting the BB setting flag is performed. Then, in step S4012, the number of remaining payouts is set to "216". After that, in step S4013, the fourth section display processing is performed. The fourth section display processing is processing related to the display of the section indicator, and the details thereof will be described later.

If it is determined in step S4008 that the BB winning has not been established, a carryover command is set in step S4014. If it is determined in step S4001 that the game is in the bonus state, end determination processing is performed in step S4015. After executing the processing of step S4013, step S4014 or step S4015, the process advances to step S4006 in the same manner as after executing the processing of step S4005, and after performing the state command setting processing and the external signal setting processing, the bonus state End the process.

Next, RT state processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the fourth RT setting flag is set in step S4101. If the fourth RT setting flag is set, the RT state processing is terminated. If it is determined in step S4101 that the fourth RT setting flag is not set, the process advances to step S4102, and the same processes as those in steps S501 to S511 are performed in steps S4102 to S4112.

That is, the fourth RT setting flag is set, and during the special RT state, the transition to the RT state does not occur until the number of continuous games in the BB winning or special RT state becomes zero. Specifically, even if the transition roll is stopped, the game does not shift to the 1st RT state, and other promotion replays and fall replays (2nd to 5th regames) are not won. It should be noted that, when the transition result stops during the special RT state (fourth RT state), a configuration may be adopted in which processing for resetting to the fourth RT state is performed. In this case, the special RT counter may also be set to the initial value (5) again.

Next, the section display first processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 92 .

In step S4201, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not a standby period flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The standby period flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the start of the display of the section indicator is also carried over due to the carryover of the BB winning, although the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won. . If the standby period flag is set, the section display first process is terminated. That is, in a situation where the waiting period flag is set, the process for starting the display of the section indicator is not performed in the section display first process.

If a negative determination is made in step S4202, it is determined in step S4203 whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. If none of the winning flags is set, the section display first process is terminated. If any winning flag is set, the process advances to step S4204 to determine whether or not the first BB winning flag is set. Affirmative determination in step S4204 means that the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won in this game, and the winning opportunity is a double combination with the first BB.

In addition, as described above, since it is configured not to win the lottery for transition to the advantageous section in the overlapping role with the 2nd BB or the single role of the 2nd BB (IV = 47), in the above step S4204, only the presence or absence of the 1st BB winning flag judge. In the case of a structure in which even a double hand with the second BB or a single hand with the second BB can be won in the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, the presence or absence of the second BB winning flag may also be determined in step S4204.

If a negative determination is made in step S4204 and the winning opportunity is not a duplicate role, in steps S4205 to S4207, similarly to steps S2703 to S2705, the display start mode of the section display is set, and the advantageous section continues. After performing the process of starting the counting of the number of games, the section display first process ends.

If the result of determination in step S4204 is affirmative, and the winning opportunity is a duplicate combination, a waiting period flag is set in step S4208, and then the section display first processing is terminated. Through such processing, the determination in step S4202 is affirmative in the next game and thereafter.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, processing for continuing the display is performed in step S4209, and then the section display first processing ends. The processing in step S4209 is the same as the processing in step S2706.

Next, the fourth section display processing performed in step S4013 of the bonus state processing (FIG. 90) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S4301, it is determined whether or not the standby period flag is set. The case where the waiting period flag is not set is, for example, when the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won while the section indicator is displayed (during the advantageous section), or when the current bonus is the 2nd BB. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S4301, and the fourth section display processing ends. If the waiting period flag is set, the process advances to step S4302 to clear the waiting period flag.

Then, in step S4303, display of the section indicator is started. In other words, when the waiting period flag is set, the display of the section display is started in the fourth section display processing executed based on the first BB winning, and the section display is continued until the first BB winning is established. The display start of the vessel is carried over. In step S4304, AG measurement start processing for the number of games in the advantageous interval is performed. Such processing is similar to step S4207 and the like. That is, when the waiting period flag is set, the start of counting the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is carried over until the 1st BB win is established. After performing the process of step S4304, the fourth section display process ends.

The flow of the special RT state will be described with reference to FIG.

In the normal section, for example, when a stop roll that wins a weak watermelon role appears, (1) the current game is a specific role that does not overlap with the BB (1st BB or 2nd BB) and shifts to an advantageous section. (2) The case where the current game is a specific role that is not a duplicate role with the BB (1st BB or 2nd BB) and the case where the transfer lottery to the advantageous section has not been won (3) This time (4) The case where this game overlaps with BB (1st BB) and wins the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, (4) This game overlaps with BB (1st BB or 2nd BB) and A plurality of cases are conceivable, such as a case where the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is not won.

In the case of the above (1), the game in which the stop roll resulting in the winning of the weak watermelon combination appears is set as the start game, and the display of the interval display is started. On the other hand, in the above cases (2) to (4), the display of the section display is not started in the game in which the stop roll resulting in the weak watermelon winning combination appears. Then, in the cases (2) to (4), the state shifts to the special RT state. However, in the case of (3) and (4), it is a special RT state in which BB winning is the termination condition, and in the case of (2), the completion of the number of games with the continuous upper limit of 5 is the termination condition. It is a special RT state. In any case, during the special RT state, the display of the section display is not started, the replay winning probability becomes higher, and the expectation for BB winning or advantageous section winning is maintained.

In the lottery process of each game in the special RT state, if no win is made for any index value and the result is a loss, it is possible to establish the winning BB prize. In this case, when the display of the section indicator starts with the BB winning, it is determined that the above case (3) has occurred, and when the section indicator does not start displaying with the BB winning, the above case (4) It is determined that On the other hand, in case (2) above, the special RT state ends when the maximum number of games played in the special RT state is completed. In this case, the display of the section display is not started either.

When the special RT state occurs as described above, the replay probability increases. Most of the replays won during the special RT state are normal replays, and rarely special replay 1 or special replay 2 are won. As already explained, the special replay 1 is the first replay, the ninth replay, and the 11th replay to the 15th replay, and the special replay 2 is the first replay, the 10th replay to the 15th replay. This is a duplicate combination of the fifteenth replay.

As shown in FIG. 95, the ninth to fifteenth re-games all have re-games as benefits, but the stop numbers are different. It should be noted that, in the following description, the winning modes will be described on the assumption that the downward sloping line L4 is set as the valid line in the 3-bet game.

Specifically, the ninth replay includes “first replay” symbols or “second replay” symbols on the left reel 32L, “first replay” symbols or “second replay” symbols on the middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. A prize mode is set in which a prize is established when the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol of the symbol stops on the active line. The tenth replay includes the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “first replay” symbol or “second replay” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red bell” symbol on the right reel 32R or A prize mode is set in which a prize is established when the "white bell" symbol stops on the active line. In the eleventh replay, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol, the middle reel 32M has a "black BAR" symbol, and the right reel 32R has a "first replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol. A prize mode is set in which a prize is established by stopping on an active line. The twelfth replay is the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" on the right reel 32R. A prize mode is set in which a prize is established when the symbol stops on the activated line. In these 9th to 12th replays, even if a "black BAR" symbol is aimed at each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on any of the reels, or even if it stops, it is straight. This is a replay game in which a replay win is established when the "black BAR" symbols are aligned on the line and the game does not stop, and in general, a win is established when the black BAR is out of the tenpai.

More specifically, for example, in the ninth replay, when a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the 19th "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L is stopped at the upper stage. Then, the 18th "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row. Further, when the ninth "second replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the eighth "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the lower stage. When the sixth "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R is stopped at the lower stage, the seventh "black BAR" symbol is stopped at the middle stage. In this case, the "black BAR" symbols are stopped at the middle, lower, and middle stages from the left reel 32L, and the "black BAR" symbols appear on the middle line L2 between the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, and the middle reel 32M. In the tenpai line, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop and becomes a stop roll (left / right middle tenpai out).

Also, in the tenth replay, if a stopping operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, if the 19th "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L is stopped at the upper stage, the 18th symbol will be displayed. The "black BAR" pattern of is stopped in the middle row. Further, when the seventh "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the eighth "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the upper stage. When the fifth "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R is stopped at the lower stage, the seventh "black BAR" symbol is stopped at the upper stage. In this case, the "black BAR" symbols are stopped at the middle, upper, and upper stages from the left reel 32L, and the "black BAR" symbols are tended on the upper line L1 between the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, and the left reel 32L. In , the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the tenpai line, resulting in a stop roll (middle/right upper tenpai lost).

In the eleventh replay, when a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the 20th "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L is stopped at the upper row, and the 18th "black bar" symbol is stopped. BAR” symbol stops at the bottom. In addition, the middle reel 32M stops the eighth "black BAR" symbol in the middle row. When the sixth "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R is stopped at the lower stage, the seventh "black BAR" symbol is stopped at the middle stage. In this case, the "black BAR" symbols are stopped at the lower, middle, and middle stages from the left reel 32L, and the "black BAR" symbols appear on the middle line L2 between the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, and the left reel 32L. In , the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the tenpai line, resulting in a stop roll (middle/right middle tenpai off).

In the twelfth replay, when a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, when the 19th "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L is stopped at the upper stage, the 18th " Black BAR" pattern stops at the middle stage. Further, when the ninth "second replay" of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the eighth "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the lower stage. Then, on the right reel 32R, the seventh or ninth "black BAR" symbol stops at the lower stage. In this case, the "black BAR" symbols are stopped at the middle, lower, and lower (upper) stages from the left reel 32L, and the "black BAR" symbols appear on the lower line L3 between the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, and On the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the tenpai line, resulting in a tenpai failure (middle/right lower tenpai failure).

In the thirteenth replay, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line. A prize mode is set in which a prize is established in . In particular, in the winning mode of the 13th replay, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are aimed at the "black BAR" symbols and the stop operation is performed, the "black BAR" symbols stop on the upper and lower stages of the left reel 32L, and the middle Although the "black BAR" symbol stops on the middle stage of the reel 32M, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbol appears on the downward right line L4 and the upward right line L5. A winning mode is set for a stop roll that results in a black BAR double-tenpai failure.

The 14th replay wins when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. is established. In particular, in the winning mode of the 14th replay, when a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "black BAR" symbols stop on the upper and lower stages of the left reel 32L, and the middle The "black BAR" symbol stops on the middle stage of the reel 32M, the "black BAR" symbol stops on the upper stage of the right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the lower stage. ” is set as a prize mode.

The fifteenth replay has a prize mode in which a prize is established when the "black BAR" pattern on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" pattern on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. is set. In particular, in the winning mode of the fifteenth replay, when a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "black BAR" symbols stop on the upper and lower stages of the left reel 32L, and the middle A "black BAR" pattern stops at the middle stage of the reel 32M, a "black BAR" pattern also stops at the upper and lower stages of the right reel 32R, and a "black BAR" pattern is aligned on the right-down line L4 and the right-up line L5. The winning mode is set as a winning mode in which the black BAR is out of tenpai.

Incidentally, both the special replay 1 and the special replay 2 include the first replay as a winning combination. As already explained (as shown in FIG. 11), the first replay is the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, and the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M. A prize mode is set in which a prize is established when a symbol, a "red bell" symbol, a "white bell" symbol or a "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the active line. In this case, in the first replay, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are aimed at the "black BAR" symbol and the stop operation is performed, if the 20th "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L is stopped at the upper stage, 18 The second "black BAR" pattern stops at the bottom. Further, when the ninth "second replay" of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the eighth "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the lower stage. When the fifth "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R is stopped at the lower stage, the seventh "black BAR" symbol is stopped at the upper stage. In this case, the "black BAR" symbols are stopped from the left reel 32L to the lower, lower, and upper stages, and the "black BAR" symbols appear on the lower line L3 between the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. , the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the tenpai line (left/middle lower tenpai missing).

The special replay 1 and the special replay 2 are push-order roles in which the winning combination differs depending on the stop order. However, the privilege given to any winning combination is a replay, and the degree of advantage for the player is the same. In other words, although the stop number differs depending on the stop order, the profit obtained by the player does not increase or decrease.

FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established.

When the special replay 1 is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the first stop order of "left"→"middle"→"right", and the first replay prize is established. In this case, as for the stop result, the "replay" symbols are aligned on the right downward line L4 and the game is stopped. Also, even if the machines are stopped in the second stop order of "left"→"right"→"middle", the first replay win is established, and the "replay" symbols are aligned on the lower right line L4 and stopped. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are aimed at the "black BAR" pattern and the stop operation is performed, as described above, winning is established when the stop result is out of the left/middle lower tenpai.

On the other hand, if the game is stopped in the third stop order of "middle"→"left"→"right", a winning of any of the ninth replay, eleventh replay, and thirteenth replay is established. In this case, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are aimed at the "black BAR" pattern and the stop operation is performed, any one of the 9th replay, 11th replay, and 13th replay will be out of the black BAR tenpai (black Winning is established at the stop roll that becomes BAR double tenpai out). More specifically, when the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the middle reel 32M that is stopped first, the 11th re-game or the 13th re-game can be won, but the 9th re-game win is not established. In this case, when the "black BAR" symbol stops on the lower row of the left reel 32L, although the 11th regame winning prize can be established, the 13th regame winning prize is not established, and the "black BAR" symbol on the middle row of the right reel 32R. is stopped and the 11th replay win is established, the stop result is that the middle/right middle row is out of tenpai. When the "black BAR" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the 13th re-game winning can be established, but the 11th re-game winning is not established. When the "black BAR" pattern stops in the middle row of the right reel 32R and the 13th regame win is established, the black BAR double tenpie failure on the right downward line L4 (and right upward line L5) is stopped. In the middle reel 32M to be stopped first, if the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle stage and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the lower stage, the 9th re-game winning prize can be established, but the 11th re-game winning prize or The thirteenth replay win is no longer established. In this case, even if the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R are also aimed at the "black BAR" symbol and the stop operation is performed, the left and right middle tenpai will be out of the middle stage, resulting in a stop result. In other words, even if any of the replay winning prizes are established, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are aimed at the "black BAR" symbols and the stop operation is performed, the "black BAR" symbols do not stop on the straight line. . That is, in this case, by performing a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, it is possible to cause a stop dot to be missed in the black BAR double tense, and to It is possible to cause a stop roll that results in a loss, and if the eye-pushing operation is accurate, a replay win is established at the stop roll that results in a loss of the black BAR double tenpai.

In the special replay 1, if the game is stopped in the fourth stop order of "middle"→"right"→"left", winning of any of the 10th replay, 11th replay, and 14th replay is established. In this case, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are aimed at the "black BAR" symbols and are stopped, the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R all have the "black BAR" symbols on the upward right line L5 and stop. Then, as the 14th replay winning prize, black BAR singles will be stopped.

When the game is stopped in the fifth stop order of "right"→"left"→"middle", winning of any of the ninth replay, 12th replay, and 13th replay is established. Even in this case, similarly to the case of the third stop order, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the stop result is that the black BAR is out of balance. If the players are stopped in the sixth stop order of "right"→"middle"→"left", winning of any one of the 9th replay, the 12th replay, and the 15th replay is established. In this case, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are aimed at the "black BAR" pattern and the stop operation is performed, the 15th regame winning prize is a black BAR double combination stop result.

In the case of the special replay 2, the first replay win is achieved in both the first stop order and the second stop order, and the "replay" symbols are aligned on the lower right line L4 and stopped as in the special replay 1. Also in this case, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, winning is established when the black BAR tenpai is missed. In the case of the third stop order, unlike the special replay 1, any one of the 10th replay, the 11th replay, and the 14th replay is won, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has a black bar. If you aim at the symbol and perform a stop operation, the 14th replay winning prize will be a black BAR single stop result. In the case of the fourth stop order, unlike the special replay 1, any one of the tenth replay, the eleventh replay, and the thirteenth replay is won. However, in this case as well, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are aimed at the "black BAR" pattern and the stop operation is performed, the black BAR double tenpai out will result in a stop result.

In the case of the 5th stop order, unlike the special replay 1, any one of the 10th replay, the 12th replay, and the 15th replay is won, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has a black bar. If you aim at the symbol and perform a stop operation, the 15th replay winning prize will be a stop result of black BAR double. In the case of the 6th stop order, unlike the special replay 1, any one of the 10th replay, the 12th replay, and the 13th replay is won, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has a black bar. If you aim at the symbol and operate to stop, it will be a stop result of black BAR double tenpai out.

In the present embodiment, by utilizing the difference in the stop number due to the stop order of the special replays 1 and 2 that are won during such a special RT state, the content of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is suggested. FIG. 97 shows the pushing process in this embodiment. As already explained, the pushing process is a process (FIG. 37) executed in step S711 of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31) in main controller 101. FIG.

The pushing order processing in this embodiment is generally the same as the pushing order processing in the first embodiment, and the difference is that the pushing order in this time is special replay 1 or 2 winning. processing. That is, the processing of steps S4401 to S4422 is the same as the processing of steps S1201 to S1222 described above. It is determined whether or not to perform the pressing order notification, and if the pressing order notification is to be performed, the instruction monitor 68 performs the pressing order notification and outputs the pressing order notification command to the display control device 81 . It should be noted that the process of steps S4401 to S4422 is a process that can cause a change in the degree of advantage for the player due to the notification of the pressing order.

In the pushing order process in the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S4419 that it is not various promotion replays or the like and that it is not pushing order bell, the process proceeds to step S4423. In step S4423, it is determined whether or not special replays 1 and 2 are performed. If it is neither special replay 1 nor 2, the pushing process is terminated as it is. If it is one of the special replays 1 and 2, in step S4424 the push order notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the push order process is terminated.

In other words, the push order notification when special replays 1 and 2 are won is executed regardless of the relationship with the display mode (whether or not conditions for push order notification are established). The pressing order notification is not performed, and only the pressing order notification by the display control device 81 is performed.

FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the pressing order notification process in this embodiment. As already described, the pressing order notification process is a process (FIG. 45) that is executed in step S1903 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 44) in the display control device 81 on the sub side.

The pushing order notifying process is also substantially the same as the pushing order notifying process of the first embodiment, and the difference is the process when the current pushing order wins special replays 1 and 2. is. Specifically, in steps S4501 to S4513, similarly to steps S2001 to S2013, the relationship between the winning push order and the display mode (whether or not conditions for notification of the push order are met) determines the push order. It is determined whether or not to perform the order notification, and if the pressing order notification is to be performed, the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display section 65 is performed.

In the push order notification process of the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S4512 that there is neither a promotion replay or the like nor a push order bell, the process proceeds to step S4514. In step S4514, it is determined whether or not special replays 1 and 2 are performed. If it is neither special replay 1 nor 2, the process for notifying the pressing order is terminated. If it is either special replay 1 or 2, then in step S4515 special RT notification processing is executed, and then the push order notification processing is terminated.

The notification processing for special RT in step S4515 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S4601, it is determined whether or not a special RT command with super attack mode has been received. As already explained, in the display control device 81, when a new command is received in step S1701 of the effect setting process (FIG. 42), the received command is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 183 in step S1702. process. In step S4601, by checking the command storage area, it is possible to determine whether or not the special RT state command described above has been received. In the following processing, the command storage area is similarly confirmed in the processing for determining whether or not the predetermined command has been received.

As already explained, the special RT command with super attack mode is a command set for output in step S3905 in the special RT state processing (FIG. 87). Such a command is a command indicating that the game will transition to the special RT state based on the winning of the 1st BB, and that it has won the super attack mode and is in the state before the transition.

If it is determined in step S4601 that the above command has been received, in step S4602, a press order notification effect is performed in which the black BARs are double aligned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, if the current game result is special replay 1, the sixth stop order of "right"→"middle"→"left" is notified. Also, if the current game result is special replay 2, the fifth stop order of "right"→"left"→"middle" is notified. After performing the process of step S4602, the notification process for special RT ends.

In this case, as the pressing order notification effect, the stop operation is performed while aiming at the "black BAR" at each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. For example, as shown in FIG. 100(a), on the auxiliary display section 65, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is associated with the positional relationship of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and numbers are added. In addition, symbols to be aimed at are displayed on the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In FIG. 100(a), the number "3" and the character "black BAR" are displayed on the left side, the number "1" and the character "black BAR" are displayed in the middle, and the number "2" is displayed on the right side. and a character of "black BAR" is displayed, indicating that the stop operation should be performed in the order of "middle"→"right"→"left", and that "black BAR" is displayed on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. It shows that you should aim for the pattern. In addition, the number in the middle and the character of "black bar" are highlighted by the boy, so that it is possible to easily understand that the stop operation should be performed first.

Incidentally, in this case, although the pressing order notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display section 65, the pressing order notification by the instruction monitor 68 is not performed. This indicates that the current pressing order notification effect is not a pressing order notification effect for causing a change in the player's advantage. In other words, when the pressing order notification effect is to change the player's advantage, the instruction monitor 68 always generates the pressing order notification.

If it is determined in step S4601 that the special RT command with super attack mode has not been received, the process proceeds to step S4603. In step S4603, it is determined whether or not a special RT state command with attack mode has been received.

As already explained, the special RT command with attack mode is a command set to be output in step S3906 in the special RT state processing (FIG. 87). Such a command is a command indicating that the game will transition to the special RT state based on the winning of the 1st BB, and that it has won the attack mode and is in the state before the transition.

If it is determined at step S4603 that the above command has been received, then at step S4604, a press order notification effect is performed in which black BAR singles are aligned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, if the current game result is special replay 1, the fourth stop order of "middle"→"right"→"left" is notified. Also, if the current game result is special replay 2, the third stop order of "middle"→"left"→"right" is notified. After performing the process of step S4604, the notification process for special RT ends.

If it is determined in step S4603 that the special RT command with attack mode has not been received, the process advances to step S4605. In step S4605, it is determined whether or not a special RT state command with challenge mode has been received.

As already explained, the special RT command with challenge mode is a command set to be output at step S3908 in the special RT state processing (FIG. 87). Such a command is a command indicating that the game will transition to the special RT state based on the winning of the 1st BB, and that it has won the challenge mode and is in the state before the transition.

If it is determined in step S4605 that the above command has been received, in step S4606, notification lottery processing 1 is executed. The notification lottery process 1 is a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the push order notification effect when special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won, and the winning probability is set to the first probability (80%). is. In this case, the lottery table with the first probability is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and the lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 183b of the RAM 183 to perform the lottery process.

If it is determined in step S4605 that the special RT command with challenge mode has not been received, the process proceeds to step S4607. In step S4607, it is determined whether or not a special RT command has been received.

As already explained, the special RT command is a command whose output is set in step S3909 in the special RT state processing (FIG. 87). Such a command is a command indicating that a transition to a special RT state is made based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, and that the lottery for transition to the attack mode or the like has not been won.

If it is determined in step S4607 that the above command has been received, in step S4608, notification lottery processing 2 is executed. The notification lottery process 2 is a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the push order notification effect when special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won. ). In this case, the lottery table with the second probability is acquired from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and the lottery counter is acquired from the various counter area 183b of the RAM 183 to perform the lottery process.

The case where it is determined in step S4607 that the command has not been received means that the current special RT has shifted without being based on the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, and the fake special RT command has been received. When the fake special command is received, in step S4609, notification lottery process 3 is executed. The notification lottery process 3 is a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the push order notification effect when special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won. It is a process set to probability (5%). In this case, the lottery table with the third probability is acquired from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and the lottery counter is acquired from the various counter area 183b of the RAM 183 to perform the lottery process.

After any one of steps S4606, S4608, and S4609 is executed, it is determined in step S4610 whether or not the lottery has been won in each notification lottery process. If no winning is made in the notification lottery process, the notification process for special RT is terminated as it is. In this case, even if special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won, the pressing order notification effect is not performed, and for example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, the first replay winning is established. Then, even special replay 1 and special replay 2 cannot be distinguished from normal replay with index value IV=1.

If it is determined in step S4610 that the game has been won in each notification lottery process, then in step S4611, the black BAR double-tenpai out is performed as a push order notification effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, if the current game result is special replay 1, the third stop order of "middle"→"left"→"right" or "right"→"left" → Notify the 5th stop order of "medium". Also, if the current game result is special replay 2, the fourth stop order of "middle"→"right"→"left" or the sixth stop order of "right"→"middle"→"left" is selected. inform. After performing the process of step S4611, the notification process for special RT ends.

The relationship between the pressing order notification effect and the content of the advantageous section when special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won will be described with reference to FIG. 100(b).

As a result of performing a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" pattern on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R according to the pushing order notification effect, a replay prize is won at the stop result where the black BAR double is aligned (special replay 1 or special replay 2) If any win) is established, it is confirmed that the special RT state this time is a special RT state based on the 1BB, and that the transition to the super attack mode is made after the 1BB. As shown in FIG. 61, the overlapping combination with the 2nd BB is set so as not to win the lottery for transition to the advantageous section. This is the case where the overlapping combination with the 1st BB is the opportunity to win the lottery for transition to the advantageous section. Therefore, when the operation is performed in the stop order according to the push order notification effect and the black BAR double alignment is stopped, it is a special RT state based on the winning of the 1st BB between the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, and the super attack mode. It also shows that you have won the lottery to move to.

As a result of performing a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" pattern on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R according to the push order notification effect, a replay prize is won at the stop result where the black BAR single is aligned (special replay 1 or special replay 2) If any win is established, it is determined that the special RT state of this time is a special RT state based on the 1BB, and that the game will shift to the attack mode after the 1BB. In the same way as above, of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the overlapping hand with the 2nd BB does not win the lottery for transition to the attack mode. Therefore, the situation in which the special RT command with attack mode is set to be output in step S3906 is the case where the overlapping combination with the first BB is the opportunity to win the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

As a result of performing a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" pattern on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R according to the push order notification effect, the black BAR double tenpai is lost. If any of the wins) is established, the special RT state this time is (1) a special RT state based on the 1 BB and a transition to the challenge mode after the 1 BB, (2) a special RT based on the 1 BB (3) special RT state based on 2nd BB, (4) special RT state not based on 1st BB or 2nd BB winning, is either

However, due to the difference in the probability of winning in each notification lottery process, if a replay win is established in the stop result of the black BAR double tenpai out, the case where the pushing order notification effect is performed after the notification lottery process 1, that is, the above ( Case 1) is the most likely case, followed by the case where the pressing order notification effect is performed through the notification lottery process 2, that is, case (2) or (3).

Furthermore, it is possible to predict which case it is from the game stop result that triggered the transition to the special RT state. For example, if a stop roll that results in a middle-stage bell winning appears and the state shifts to a special RT state, the middle-stage bell with an index value of IV=19, the middle-stage bell overlap 1 or the middle-stage bell overlap 2 with an index value of IV=44, 45. Based on either of them, the transition to the special RT state is made. If the index value IV is 44 and the middle bell overlap is 1, then there is a 90% chance of winning the challenge mode, a 10% chance of winning the super attack mode, not winning the attack mode, and transitioning to any mode. The phenomenon of not being elected does not occur. In addition, in the case of middle stage bell duplication 2 with index value IV=45, no transition to any mode is won. Therefore, in the case where the stop result of the middle bell winning appears and the state shifts to the special RT state, the black BAR single pressing indicating the winning of the attack mode will not occur.

In addition, in the case where a stop roll that results in a middle bell prize appears and the state shifts to the special RT state, if the index value IV = 44, there is a 90% probability that the special RT command with the challenge mode will be received and the special RT will be received. No command is received. If the index value IV=44, only special RT commands are received. When the index value IV=19 and the state is shifted to the special RT state, the fake special RT command is received.

Then, in the case where a stop roll that results in a middle bell winning prize appears and the state shifts to a special RT state, if the "black BAR" symbol is aimed according to the push order notification effect, and the stop roll that is out of the black BAR tenpai is reached, ( 1) A case where the 1st BB and challenge mode are won with an index value of IV = 44, (2) A case where the 2nd BB is won with an index value of IV = 45, or (3) Neither is won. Either it is based on a fake special RT command, or it is the case. However, in these cases (1) to (3), the probability of winning the notification lottery is 80%, 20%, and 5%, respectively, and it can be predicted that case (1) is the most likely. can. Also, the case (3) is based on the premise that no transition to any of the modes that occur in 10% of the time when the middle bell wins is won. It will be 0.5% if you win 19, and the possibility is extremely low.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

During the carryover state of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the execution of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section such as the attack mode is restricted, and the game result that triggered the carryover state is used to move to the advantageous section. When the transfer lottery is won, the display start of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is delayed until the bonus prize is won. By doing so, in the configuration in which the transition lottery to the advantageous section is performed in the overlapping combination of the bonus and the minor winning combination, even if the display of the eighth display segment N8 is not started in the winning game, the transition lottery is performed. It is possible to maintain the expectation of being elected.

However, by doing so, there are more opportunities to limit the transition lottery to the advantageous section, for example, even if a special role is won during the carryover state, the transition lottery will not be performed, so the carryover state will be It can be considered that the expectation for the advantageous section is lowered, and it can be said that it is an unfavorable situation for the player. Therefore, in the above-described embodiment, the content of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section performed based on the game result that triggered the transition to the carry-over state is notified using the stop result of the special replay during the carry-over state. , with the suggested configuration. By doing so, even in the carryover state, it is possible to play the game while having a sense of anticipation for the advantageous section, and it is possible to improve the amusement.

Moreover, the carryover state is basically a state that transitions based on the bonus winning, and if you win the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section with a specific role that does not overlap with the bonus winning, it will be used as a section indicator in the game. is started to display the eighth display segment N8. Therefore, for example, in the event that a special winning combination such as a strong watermelon appears, if the display of the interval indicator does not start, it is a small winning combination that does not overlap with the bonus and is not won in the transfer lottery. , overlapped with the bonus and did not win the transfer lottery, or overlapped with the bonus and won the transfer lottery. In this way, there are bonus overlapping hands and bonus non-overlapping hands, and in both cases, a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is performed, and the display start timing of the section indicator is set as described above to determine whether or not bonus overlap is performed. If a configuration is adopted in which the winning combination is differentiated depending on whether or not the winning combination is displayed, the patterns of whether or not the display of the section indicator is started can be diversified, and it is possible to greatly improve the playability.

In particular, for example, the strong watermelon overlap 1, which is an overlapping role with a bonus, and the strong watermelon, which is a small role that is not an overlapping role with a bonus, have a common stop result. , it is difficult to determine which result is the winning game. As a result, it is possible to determine not only whether or not the carry-over state will occur, but also the result including the display start of the section indicator.

As a lottery for transition to the advantageous section, for example, when comparing strong watermelon and weak watermelon, regardless of whether or not there is overlap with the first BB, the winning probability of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is higher for the strong watermelon than for the weak watermelon. High (Fig. 61). Therefore, when comparing the case where the strong watermelon stop dot appears and the interval indicator does not start to be displayed, and the case where the weak watermelon stop dot appears and the interval indicator does not start to be displayed, the former case However, it can be determined that there is a high possibility of being in a carryover state.

Further, for example, regarding strong watermelon and weak watermelon, regarding the ratio of whether or not they overlap with 1BB, strong watermelon has a higher overlap ratio with 1BB than weak watermelon (FIG. 61). Specifically, when a strong watermelon stop roll appears, about a quarter overlaps with the 1st BB, whereas when a weak watermelon stop roll appears, about 30 minutes 1 is the overlap with the first BB. Therefore, even if the case where the strong watermelon appears and the section indicator does not start to be displayed and the case where the weak watermelon appears and the section indicator does not start to be displayed, the former It can be determined that the possibility of being in the carry-over state is higher in the case of .

During the carryover state, special replays 1 and 2 can be won, and the contents of the advantageous section are notified/suggested by the stop results of the special replays 1 and 2.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the special replays 1 and 2 are won, when the black BAR double-matching stop order press order notification effect is performed, it is notified that the lottery for transition to the super attack mode has been won. When the pressing order notification effect of the stopping order of the BAR single is performed, it is reported that the lottery for transition to the attack mode has been won, and the pressing order notification effect of the stopping order of the black BAR losing the tenpai is performed. , It is suggested that you have won the lottery to move to the challenge mode. In this manner, while the player is in the carry-over state in which the display of the section display is not started, the player is expected to enter the transition lottery to the advantageous section. If the content is performed by the push-order notification effect, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the push-order notification effect.

Even if these black BAR pressing order notification effects are generated, the corresponding stop numbers do not appear unless the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol. Therefore, when trying to grasp/predict the contents of the advantageous section from the relationship with the stop roll, it is necessary to challenge the "black BAR" symbol, which enhances the playability. In other words, it is precisely because the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are aimed at the "black BAR" symbol and stopped at the desired position that the "black BAR" symbol has been stopped that the lottery for transition to the attack mode or the like has been won. From this impression (the impression that if you do not aim, you will not win the transfer lottery), you can expect to actively participate in the game.

In the special replays 1 and 2, although the stop numbers differ depending on the stop order, the benefit obtained is a replay regardless of the stop order, and it can be said that the pushing order notification effect does not affect the player's profit. Therefore, consistency with performing the push order notification effect is ensured in the section where the execution of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section where the advantage is changed by the push order notification such as the push order bell is restricted.

Also, special replays 1 and 2 are replays that are not involved in the transition of the RT state like other promoted replays. Therefore, it can be said that not only the benefit of replaying that is granted, but also the advantage of the subsequent game state does not change. Guaranteed.

When performing special replays 1 and 2, the pressing order notification effect is not performed on the instruction monitor 68 on the main control unit 101 side, and only the effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like on the sub side. In other words, when performing the pressing order notification related to the player's profit, the pressing order notification is always performed on the instruction monitor 68 on the main controller 101 side. By doing so, it is clarified that, for example, if the manager of the game hall or the like wants to monitor the relationship between the stop order and the given benefits, he or she should monitor the instruction monitor 68. , the degree of freedom in performance of the pressing order notification performance performed on the side of the auxiliary display section 65 is overwhelmingly improved.

The special replays 1 and 2 in which the pressing order notification effect can occur are game results that do not trigger the lottery for transition to the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to purely enjoy the pressing order notification effect without giving a negative image that the transition lottery is restricted in the carryover state.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, the structure of the special replay that can be won during the special RT state is different. FIG. 101 is a win-or-fail lottery table for the special RT state that shifts based on the winning of the first BB or the second BB in this modification, and FIG. A lottery table.

In this modification, as special replays, the index value IV=53, the special replay 3 consisting of the first replay and the ninth to thirteenth replays, and the index value IV=54, the first replay, the Special replay 4 consisting of 9 replays to 12th replays and 14th replays, and special replays consisting of 1st replays, 9th replays to 12th replays and 15th replays with index value IV=55 5 is set.

The winning modes of the first replay and the ninth to fifteenth replays are as described above. In the game to the 12th regame, a prize is established when the black BAR tenpai is lost, and in the 13th regame, a prize is established when the black BAR double tenpai is lost. Winning is established when black BAR singles are aligned, and in the fifteenth replay, winning is established when black BARs are double aligned. Also, the odds of winning special replays 3 to 5 are each about 1/65.5.

As shown in FIG. 103, special replays 3 to 5 can be won in corresponding replays regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 . In other words, for example, if the special replay 5 is won, regardless of the stop order, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the black BAR will be double aligned. The 15th replay win is established on the result. Also, even in a situation where the special replay 5 is won, if the stop operation is performed without aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, regardless of the stop order, the right down replay is often performed. The first replay win is established at the stop roll.

Incidentally, since the 14th replay and the 15th replay are not associated with the special replay 3, even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the time of winning, the Regardless of the order of stopping, the 14th replay and the 15th replay do not win, and the stopping result of black BAR single matching or black BAR double matching does not appear. In addition, since the 13th replay and the 15th replay are not associated with the special replay 4, even if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the time of winning, Regardless of the order of stopping, the 13th replay and the 15th replay do not win, and no black BAR double-tenpai failure or black BAR double match does not occur. Similarly, since the 13th replay and the 14th replay are not associated with the special replay 5, even if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when winning the special replay 5, Regardless of the stop order, the 13th replay and the 14th replay do not win, and the black BAR double tenpai failure and the black BAR single match do not occur.

Here, in the slot machine 10, a game mode recommended for establishing a winning of each minor combination including a specific combination will be described.

Among the winable hands in each game, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon are set as the so-called small winning combinations that cannot be won depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. . In more detail, as already explained, the strong cherry and the double strong cherry 1, 2 are any of the 28th minor winning combination, the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination, and the left reel 32L. The 28th minor role symbol, the 32nd minor role symbol to the 35th minor role symbol are the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol to the twentieth "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 28th minor symbol, the 32nd to 35th minor symbols, ie, the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a strong cherry combination may be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a combination that can win any one of the 27th minor combination, the 32nd minor combination to the 35th minor combination, and the 27th minor combination symbol, the 32nd minor combination symbol to the 32nd minor combination symbol for the left reel 32L. The 35 small combination symbols are a "cherry" symbol and a "second replay" symbol. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol to the twentieth "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 27th minor symbol, 32nd minor symbol to 35th minor symbol, ie, "cherry" symbol and "second replay" symbol, can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a weak cherry combination may be missed.

The strong watermelon and the strong watermelon duplication 1 and 2 are wins that can be won by either the 30th or 41st minor combination, and the 30th or 41st minor combination symbol for the left reel 32L is It is a "watermelon" design. In this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the ninth “red 7” symbol to the third “white bell” symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the 30th The minor symbol and the 41st minor symbol "watermelon" cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong watermelon combination will be missed.

The weak watermelon is a winning combination that can win either the 29th minor winning combination or the 41st minor winning combination, and the 29th minor winning combination symbol and the 41st minor winning combination symbol for the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the ninth "red 7" symbol to the third "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, The 29th minor symbol and the 41st minor symbol "Watermelon" symbol cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak watermelon combination will be missed.

Then, when the left reel 32L is stopped while leaving the possibility of winning for any of these combinations that can be missed, the fourth "cherry" symbol to the sixth "second replay" symbol are displayed on the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform a stop operation when reaching the upper stage. In the following description, the operation mode of the left reel 32L is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a failure. It is also called a mode (second operation mode).

Furthermore, in each game, in a game in which there is a high possibility of winning a specific combination, a chance notification effect may occur as the effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104(a), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "Chance!" 32R, and displayed accordingly. In addition, in the chance notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "cue") is emitted.

In the chance notification effect, it is suggested that the winning combination of this time is one of the specific combinations, but it is set so that it is impossible or difficult to determine which combination it is. That is, when the chance notification effect is performed, it is highly possible that the winning character of this game is either a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, etc. It is not possible to determine whether the watermelon is present, whether it is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, and whether it is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. Therefore, as a player, as shown in FIG. 104(b), the left reel 32L should be drawn in the above-described specific operation mode so as not to cause any failure regardless of whether any of the specific roles is won. operation will be performed.

Here, the occurrence rate of the chance notification effect differs depending on whether or not the special RT state is in effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104(c), except during the special RT state, the chance notification effect is generated in 80% of the times when the special role is won. A chance notification effect is generated at 5% of the time when a role is won. This is for the following reasons. That is, in this embodiment, the special RT state is provided mainly for the purpose of prolonging the expectation of winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB, but the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning is carried over. During the carryover, double winning of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB does not occur, and furthermore, the execution of the transition lottery for the new advantageous section is also restricted. In other words, in a game in which the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is set, even if a new specific role is won, double winning with the 1BB or the 2BB will not occur, and the advantageous section Since there is no chance of winning the transition lottery, winning the specific role is basically not preferable for the player from the viewpoint of winning timing. Therefore, in the special RT state that makes people expect that it is being carried over, even if the special role is won, the occurrence rate of the chance notification effect is lower than the occurrence rate other than the special RT state. It is devised so as not to make it difficult for the player to notice, and not to dare to generate flashy effects, so as not to upset the player's feelings of losing the draw.

However, even if you win a special role during the carryover state, even if you can't expect to win a new bonus or move to an advantageous section, failing to win a special role itself is a loss of medals. is not desirable for the player. Therefore, it is considered that the player operates the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode so as not to cause any omissions, especially during the special RT state, regardless of whether it is a specific combination or not. .

As already explained, even if special replays 3 to 5 are won during the special RT state, the 13th to 15th regame winnings will not be established unless the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol. BAR Double Tenpai Missing, Black BAR Single Alignment, and Black BAR Double Aligning will not appear. In other words, if the left reel 32L would be operated in a specific operation mode, these stop rolls would not appear.

The notification processing for special RT in this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 105 . The special RT notification process is a process (FIG. 99) executed in step S4515 in the pressing order notification process (FIG. 98) by the display control device 81. FIG.

In this modification, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not special replay 5 has been won. If the player wins, it is determined in step S4702 whether or not the special RT command with super attack mode has been received by referring to the command storage area. When such a command has been received, in step S4703, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the black BAR pressing notification effect is performed.

In the black BAR pressing notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 106(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays an image in which a hub character and a mongoose character are fighting while entwining each other. In addition, along with the image of the battle between the hub and the mongoose, an instruction image for aiming at the "black bar" on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is also displayed. In addition, in the black BAR pressing notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Aim for it" in a male voice) is emitted. In this case, for example, when the player aims at the "black BAR" symbol and performs the stop operation from the left reel 32L, as shown in FIG. BAR" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol in the lower row stop, so expectations are fueled for the emergence of a stopping dot with a black BAR double match or a black BAR single match.

When the player stops the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming at the "black BAR" pattern based on the black BAR pressing notification effect in step S4703, in this case, the black BAR double match is achieved. The fifteenth replay win is established. On the other hand, if the special RT command with super attack mode is not received at step S4702, the special RT notification process is terminated without generating the black BAR pressing notification effect. In this case, it is considered that the player performs the stop operation in the specific operation mode as described above in order to prevent the player from missing the specific combination. As a result, even if the special replay 5 wins, it is difficult for the black BAR double combination to appear, and the winning of the first replay and the ninth to twelfth replays is likely to occur.

If it is determined in step S4701 that special replay 5 is not won, it is determined in step S4704 whether or not special replay 4 is won. If special replay 4 is won, it is determined in step S4705 whether or not a special RT command with attack mode has been received. If so, in step S4706, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to generate a black BAR pressing notification effect. In this case, when the player stops the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the 14th re-game winning is established at the stopping result of black BAR singles. On the other hand, if the special RT command with attack mode is not received at step S4705, the notification processing for special RT is terminated as it is without generating the black BAR pressing notification effect. In this case, it is considered that the player performs the stop operation in the specific operation mode as described above. As a result, even if the special replay 4 is won, it is difficult for the black BAR singles to appear, and the 1st replay and the 9th to 12th replays are likely to be won.

If it is determined in step S4704 that special replay 4 is not won, it is determined in step S4707 whether or not special replay 3 is won. If special replay 3 is won, it is determined in step S4708 whether or not a special RT command with challenge mode has been received. If so, notification lottery processing 1 is executed in step S4709. The notification lottery process 1 is substantially the same process as the above step S4608, and performs lottery to win the notification with the first probability (80%). If the special RT command with challenge mode has not been received, it is determined in step S4710 whether or not the special RT command has been received. If the special RT command has been received, notification lottery processing 2 is executed in step S4711, and if the special RT command has not been received, notification lottery processing 3 is executed in step S4712. These notification lottery processing 2 and notification lottery processing 3 are generally the same as the processing of step S4608 and step S4609, the notification lottery processing 2 is notified winning with a second probability (20%) lower than the first probability, and the notification lottery Process 3 is a lottery for notification winning with a third probability (5%) lower than the second probability.

After the processing of step S4709, step S4711 or step S4712 is executed, it is determined in step S4713 whether or not the lottery has been won in these notification lottery processing. When winning, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled in step S4714 so as to execute the black BAR pressing notification effect. In this case, when the player stops the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the 13th re-game winning is established at the stop result of the black BAR double-tenpai failure. On the other hand, in step S4713, when it is determined that the game has not been won in the notification lottery process, the special RT notification process is terminated as it is without generating the black BAR pushing notification effect. In this case, it is considered that the player performs the stop operation in the specific operation mode as described above. As a result, even if the special replay 3 is won, the stop result of the black BAR double tenpai is unlikely to appear, and the first replay and the ninth to twelfth replay wins are likely to be established.

If it is determined in step S4707 that special replay 3 has not been won, the special RT notification processing is terminated. In other words, when the normal replay is won or when another minor combination is won, the black BAR pressing notification effect does not occur.

By doing so, it is possible to change the stop outcome at the time of special replay winning while not using the pressing order notification effect. Therefore, with respect to the advantageous section where the advantage is changed by the notification of the pushing order such as the pushing order bell, while strictly ensuring the significance of restricting the lottery for transition to the advantageous section during the carryover state, the advantageous section during the carryover state It is possible to realize the game property of notifying about.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, when a special role is won in a special RT state, a predetermined notification cancellation lottery is performed, and when a special replay is won in a state where the notification cancellation lottery is won, a push order notification is given to align the "black BAR" symbols. produce a performance. In addition, in this modified example, a special RT state is set in which special replay 1 and special replay 2 in the above-described second embodiment can be won, and the stop number may differ depending on the stop order.

FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the special combination notification process in this modified example. As already explained, the specific combination notification process is a process (FIG. 52) that is executed in step S1905 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 44) in the display control device 81, and is a process that is executed when a specific combination is won. be.

In the special combination notification process in this modified example, the process for canceling notification is performed in step S4801 before the process of setting the pseudo precursor mode (steps S4802 to S4810) is performed in the same manner as in the processes of steps S2501 to S2509.

In the notification cancellation process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 108(a), first, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not the special RT state is in progress. If it is not in the special RT state, the notification cancellation processing is terminated as it is. If it is in the special RT state, it is determined in step S4902 whether or not the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. If none of the winning flags is set, the notification canceling process is terminated. If any winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S4903.

In step S4903, a release lottery table in which a release rate corresponding to a specific combination is set is acquired from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182. FIG. In the cancellation lottery table, as shown in FIG. 108(b), for example, strong cherries have a 40% probability of being canceled and winning, and weak cherries have a 5% probability, which is lower than that of strong cherries. Strong watermelon has a higher probability of 80% than strong cherry, and weak watermelon has a probability of 20%.

In step S4904, a cancellation lottery process is performed based on the cancellation lottery table acquired in step S4903. Then, in step S4905, it is determined whether or not the release lottery has been won. When the cancellation lottery is not won, the notification cancellation processing is terminated as it is. If the release lottery is won, in step S4906, the process of setting the release flag in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 is performed, and then the notification release process is terminated.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing special RT notification processing in this modification.

In this modification, in step S5001, it is determined whether or not the cancellation flag is set. If the release flag is not set, a process of acquiring a notification table for the non-release state from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182 is performed in step S5002. If the release flag is set, then in step S5003, processing is performed to acquire the release state notification table from the various table storage area 182a. These notification tables show winning probabilities of notification lotteries for determining whether or not to notify the stopping order of black BAR double matching, black BAR single matching, or black BAR double tenpai failure when special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won. is defined, and the winning probability of the notification lottery is higher in the notification table for the released state than in the notification table for the non-released state.

After performing the process of step S5002 or step S5003, it is determined in step S5004 whether or not the special RT command with super attack mode has been received. If it has been received, the process advances to step S5005 to execute notification lottery processing 1 . The notification lottery process 1 is a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the pressing order notification effect for the stop order in which the black BARs are double aligned. conduct. In this modification, in notification lottery processing 1 in the non-release state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 10%, and in notification lottery processing 1 in the cancellation state, the probability of winning the notification lottery is 80%, which is higher than in the non-release state. be elected.

In step S5006, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S5005, and if the notification lottery has not been won, the special RT notification processing is terminated as it is. If the notification lottery is won, in step S5007, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to generate a press order notification effect of the stop order in which the black BARs are double aligned, and the notification for the special RT is generated. End the process.

If a negative determination is made in step S5004, it is determined in step S5008 whether or not the special RT command with attack mode has been received. If it has been received, the process advances to step S5009 to execute notification lottery processing 2 . The notification lottery process 2 is a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the pressing order notification effect for the black BAR singles in the stop order, and the lottery process is executed based on the notification table obtained in step S5002 or step S5003. conduct. In this modification, in notification lottery processing 2 in the non-release state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 10%, and in notification lottery processing 2 in the cancellation state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 80%, which is higher than in the non-release state. be elected.

In step S5010, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S5009, and if the notification lottery has not been won, the special RT notification processing is terminated as it is. If the notification lottery is won, in step S5011, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to generate a press order notification effect of the stopping order of black BAR singles, and the special RT notification is performed. End the process.

If a negative determination is made in step S5008, it is determined in step S5012 whether or not the special RT command with challenge mode has been received. If so, the process advances to step S5013 to execute notification lottery process 3 . The notification lottery process 3 is a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the pressing order notification effect of the stop order in which the black BAR is out of double ten. I do. In this modification, in notification lottery processing 3 in the non-release state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 30%, and in notification lottery processing 3 in the cancellation state, the probability of winning the notification lottery is 80%, which is higher than in the non-release state. be elected.

If a negative determination is made in step S5012, it is determined in step S5014 whether or not the special RT command has been received. If so, the process advances to step S5015 to execute notification lottery process 4. FIG. Moreover, when not received, it progresses to step S5016 and the information lottery process 5 is performed. Notification lottery processing 4 and notification lottery processing 5 are also lottery processing for determining whether or not to execute the pressing order notification effect for the stop order in which the black BAR is out of double ten. Based on that, the lottery processing is performed. In this modification, in notification lottery processing 4 in the non-cancellation state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 10%, and in notification lottery processing 4 in the cancellation state, the notification lottery is won with the same probability of 10% as in the non-cancellation state. do. Also, in the notification lottery processing 5 in the non-cancellation state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 5%, and in the notification lottery processing 5 in the cancellation state, the notification lottery is won with the same probability of 5% as in the non-cancellation state.

After executing the process of step S5013, step S5015, or step S5016, the process proceeds to step S5017. In step S5017, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery is won based on the processing results of each of the notification lottery processes 3 to 5, and if the notification lottery is not won, the special RT notification process is terminated as it is. If the notification lottery is won, in step S5018, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to generate an effect for notifying the pressing order of the stop order in which the black BAR double tenpai is out of order. End the notification process.

With reference to FIG. 110, the situation when special replay is won in the special RT state of this modified example will be described.

For example, it is assumed that a stop roll that results in a weak watermelon winning combination appears and the state shifts to a special RT state. The example of FIG. 110 shows the case of shifting to a special RT state with a super attack mode. As already explained, in the special RT state, replay wins occur frequently.

In the special RT state, if a special combination such as a weak watermelon combination is won, the notification canceling process (FIG. 108) is performed. Then, when the cancellation lottery process of the notification cancellation process is performed, the notification table to be obtained when winning special replays 1 and 2 is different (steps S5002 and S5003), and the person who has won the cancellation lottery. becomes easier to win the notification lottery. Then, when the notification lottery (step S5005) at the time of winning the special replay 1, 2 is won, the pressing order notification effect of the stop order in which the black BARs are double aligned is generated. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the 15th re-game winning is established with the stop result of the black BAR double matching.

On the other hand, if you do not win a specific role such as a weak watermelon role in the special RT state, or if you do not win in the cancellation lottery process even if you win a specific role, you will be in the notification lottery when special replays 1 and 2 are won. less likely to be elected. As a result, when the special replays 1 and 2 are won, the first replay winning is established in the stop result of the downward-sloping replay.

By doing so, the game performance is improved when a special winning combination is won during the special RT state. As already explained, in the situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set, new bonus winning does not occur, and the transfer lottery to the advantageous section is not performed. Therefore, even though the special combination has been won with much effort, the benefits that can be obtained may be less than in the situation where the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag are not set. In that respect, as described above, if a notification release lottery is performed based on the winning of a special role, there is an advantage of performing a game that predicts the contents of the subsequent advantageous section, and a bonus lottery based on the winning of a special role and an advantageous It becomes possible to provide an alternative to the segment lottery.

In particular, by enabling the appearance of a stop dot that suggests the content of the advantageous section based on the winning of a special role during the special RT state, it is possible to make a lottery to transition to the advantageous section based on the winning of a special role during the special RT state. The player can be made to feel as if he or she has won the prize. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is not performed in a situation where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set.

Also, during the special RT state, even if you do not win the release lottery based on the special role winning, you can win the notification lottery, so the special role that triggered the transition to the special RT state is an advantageous section. , or whether it was won in an advantageous section triggered by the special role won after shifting to a special RT state, making it easier to make a vague judgment, and making the game to be predicted easier. It is possible to entertain.

As in the above modification, according to the configuration in which it is possible to notify the content of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section based on the winning of a special role during the carryover state (during the special RT state), based on the winning of the special role during the carryover state In this way, it is possible to realize a new playability of notifying the content of the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section that has already been executed. In other words, in the carry-over state, the execution of the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role is restricted, so it can be said that the winning of the special role is not preferable for the player. In that respect, according to the above configuration, since the content of the transition lottery that has already been executed is notified, it is possible to make it appear as if the transition lottery was performed based on the winning of the special role, and the transition to the carryover state is possible. It is also possible to prevent people from realizing that the lottery will be restricted.

As already explained, in the winning game of the game result that triggers the transition to the carryover state, the result of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is not necessarily notified, and the notification may be restricted. Specifically, even if you win an attack mode or the like, you will be notified that you won after going through the sign mode. is announced in the game after the game in which the transfer lottery was performed. Therefore, as described above, if a transition lottery to an advantageous section is performed in a double role with the bonus that triggered the carryover state, the content of the transition lottery remains unannounced in the carryover state. Very likely. With such a configuration, in the above-described configuration in which it is possible to report the unreported contents with the winning of a special combination as a trigger, it is less likely that there will be no unreported contents.

In addition, instead of notifying the above-mentioned unannounced contents in the specific role winning game in the carryover state, the unannounced contents are notified in the game after the special role winning game. It is possible to notify the contents of the notification in a wider variety of games.

In the game after the special role winning game, the content of the unreported information is notified in the game in which the special replay is won, thereby leaving room for not being notified unless the special replay is won. , even if the transfer lottery is not won, it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation.

On the other hand, the unannounced content is notified by the presence or absence of lighting of the section indicator when the carryover state ends, that is, when the bonus is won. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the unreported contents are not reported endlessly.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, a plurality of special RT states are set, and the type of special replay to be won differs depending on each special RT state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state are set as special RT states, and the types of special replays to be won are different in each RT state. In the 5th RT state, a normal replay consisting of the 1st replay, and a special replay 5 consisting of the 1st, 9th to 12th and 15th replays are set as replays that can be won. there is The odds of winning each replay are approximately 1 in 5.3 for the normal replay, 1 in 21.8 for the special replay 5, and approximately 1 in 4.3 for the total replay probability.

In the sixth RT state, a normal replay consisting of the first replay and a special replay 4 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the 12th replay and the 14th replay are set as replays that can be won. there is The odds of winning each replay are approximately 1 in 5.3 for the normal replay, 1 in 21.8 for the special replay 4, and approximately 1 in 4.3 for the total replay probability.

In the 7th RT state, the normal replay consisting of the 1st replay and the special replay 3 consisting of the 1st replay and the 9th to 13th replays are set as replays that can be won. The odds of winning each replay are about 1 in 5.3 for the normal replay, about 1 in 21.8 for the special replay 3, and about 1 in 4.3 for the total replay probability.

In the eighth RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay is set as a replay that can be won, and special replays 3 to 5 are not won. And since the normal replay is about 1/4.3, the total replay probability is also about 1/4.3.

In this modification, different RT states are set when transitioning to the special RT state. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing special RT state processing in this modified example.

In step S5101, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In the normal game state or the first RT state, it is determined whether or not the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set in step S5102. If any BB winning flag is set, it is determined in step S5103 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, it is determined in step S5104 whether or not the special zone winning flag is set.

If the special zone winning flag is set and the lottery for transition to the super attack mode is won, the process of setting the special RT command with the super attack mode as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S5105. conduct. Then, in step S5106, the current RT setting flag is stored in a predetermined storage area, and in step S5107, the current RT setting flag is cleared. Thereafter, in step S5108, after performing processing for setting the fifth RT setting flag, this special RT state processing ends. Although the processing in steps S5106 to S5108 differs in the type of RT setting flag to be set, it is basically the same as the processing in steps S3914 to S3916. omitted.

By the above processing, the game state shifts to the fifth RT state among the special RT states. That is, if the current special RT state is a special RT state based on the winning of the 1st BB and the lottery for transition to the super attack mode has been won, the state is shifted to the 5th RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, an RT state in which special replay 5 can be established is established, and if a stopping operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, a replay winning prize with double black BARs will be established.

If it is determined that the super attack mode winning flag is not set in step S5104, after setting the special RT command with attack mode as an output target in step S5109, to the sixth RT state in steps S5110 to S5112 After performing the processing for transition, the special RT state processing ends.

By the above processing, the game state shifts to the sixth RT state among the special RT states. That is, if the current special RT state is a special RT state based on the winning of the 1st BB, and the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the game moves to the 6th RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, an RT state in which a special replay 4 can be established is established, and if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, a replay winning prize with black BAR singles is established.

If it is determined in step S5103 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S5113 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. When the challenge mode winning flag is set, in step S5114, a special RT command with challenge mode is set as an output target. Thereafter, after performing processing for shifting to the seventh RT state in steps S5115 to S5117, the special RT state processing ends.

By the above processing, the game state shifts to the seventh RT state among the special RT states. In other words, if the current special RT state is a special RT state based on the winning of the 1st BB and the lottery for transition to the challenge mode has been won, the game moves to the 7th RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, an RT state in which special replay 3 can be established is established, and if a stop operation is performed while aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, a replay winning prize will be established without black BAR tenpai.

If it is determined in step S5113 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, a special RT command is set as an output target in step S5118. After that, after performing processing for shifting to the eighth RT state in steps S5119 to S5121, the special RT state processing ends.

Also, if it is determined in step S5102 that neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S5122. The processing of steps S5122 to S5125 is the same as the processing of steps S3910 to S3913. After setting the output of the fake special RT command in step S5125, the processing for shifting to the eighth RT state is performed in steps S5126 to S5128, and then the special RT state processing ends.

By the above processing, the game state shifts to the eighth RT state among the special RT states. In other words, if the current special RT state is a special RT state based on winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, and you have not won the super attack mode, attack mode, or challenge mode transition lottery, And when none of the attack mode and the like is won, the state is shifted to the eighth RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, normal replays are frequently established, and special replays 3 to 5 are not established. There is no replay prize for BAR singles and black BAR double tenpai.

If a negative determination is made in step S5101, the process advances to step S5129. Since the processing in steps S5129 to S5135 is the same as the processing in steps S3917 to S3923, description thereof is omitted.

Incidentally, in the special RT notification processing in this embodiment, regardless of the contents of the advantageous section, when the special replay is won, a black BAR pressing notification effect is generated. In other words, if the RT state is the 5th RT state, by operating in accordance with the black BAR pressing notification effect, the black BAR double-aligned stopping dots will appear, and if the RT state is the 6th RT state, the black BAR pressing notification effect will appear. By operating according to the above, a black BAR single-matching stop result appears, and if it is in the 7th RT state, by operating according to the black BAR pushing notification effect, a stop result that black BAR double tenpai is out appears. do. In the 8th RT state, no special replay win is made, so the black BAR pressing notification effect does not occur.

By doing so, the winning probability itself of special replays 3 to 5 differs in each RT state, so there is no need to conduct a lottery or the like regarding the notification of special replay winning, and the advantageous section from the stop result of various black BARs You can play a game to predict the contents of.

In addition, as in the above modification, in the configuration in which the RT state to be changed is changed according to the content of the advantageous interval, it is preferable to set the game result in association with the RT state and the content of the advantageous interval. Specifically, for example, although strong cherry duplication 1 (IV=32) can win the super attack mode, it is not won in the attack mode or challenge mode, and a special RT that shifts based on the strong cherry duplication 1 Let the state be the fifth RT state. In addition, although weak cherry overlap 1 (IV = 34) can be won in attack mode, it is prevented from winning in super attack mode or challenge mode, and a special RT state that transitions based on the weak cherry overlap 1 is set to the sixth RT. state. Although strong watermelon overlap 1 (IV=36) and weak watermelon overlap 1 (IV=38) can be won in the challenge mode, they are not allowed to win in the super attack mode and attack mode, and these strong watermelon overlap 1 and weak watermelon overlap A special RT state to which a transition is made based on 1 is referred to as a seventh RT state. In other overlapping roles (IV = 40 chance A overlapping 1, IV = 42 chance B overlapping 1, IV = 44 middle bell overlapping 1), so as not to win any of the super attack mode, attack mode and challenge mode and the special RT state to be shifted based on these overlapping hands is defined as the eighth RT state. By doing so, the game result that triggers the transition to each RT state is associated, and the transparency of the game is ensured.

Then, in each RT state, depending on whether or not you have won the lottery to transition to super attack mode, attack mode, or challenge mode, by changing the notification lottery probability at the time of special replay winning, the lottery to transition to each mode It is possible to secure the pleasure of predicting whether or not the prize has been won.

In the structure that associates the RT state with the game result as described above, it is also possible to increase the types of bonuses so as to change the content of the advantageous section in which the transition lottery can be won even with the same stop roll. For example, a third BB and a fourth BB are provided in addition to the first BB and the second BB. Then, in the strong cherry overlap A where the first BB and the strong cherry are overlapped, it is assumed that only the super attack mode can be won, and the RT state to be shifted to is the fifth RT state. On the other hand, in the strong cherry overlap B in which the third BB and the strong cherry are overlapped, it is assumed that only the attack mode can be won, and the RT state to be shifted to is the sixth RT state. In the strong cherry duplication C where the 4th BB and the strong cherry are double-won, it is assumed that only the challenge mode can be won, and the RT state to be shifted to is the 7th RT state. By doing so, it is not possible to grasp the contents of the advantageous section that can be shifted from the stop roll of the special combination that triggered the transition to the RT state (in the above example, the stop roll that results in a strong cherry prize). , and it is possible to make the game more enjoyable by predicting the contents of the advantageous section from the stop result at the time of winning the special replay after that.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, as in modified example 3, the special RT state to be shifted to is changed according to the contents of the advantageous section, and the winning probability of the predetermined special replay is changed in each special RT state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, in the fifth RT state, which is a special RT state in which the super attack mode is won, the normal replay consisting of the first replay, the first replay, the ninth replay, and so on. A special replay 5 consisting of the 12th replay and the 15th replay is set as a replay that can be won. The odds of winning each replay are about 1 in 5.3 for the normal replay, about 1 in 21.8 for the special replay 5, and about 1 in 4.3 for the total replay probability.

In the 6th RT state, a normal replay consisting of the 1st replay and a special replay 5 consisting of the 1st replay, the 9th replay to the 12th replay and the 15th replay are set as replays that can be won. , and the type of replay to be won is the same as in the fifth RT state. However, the winning probability of each replay is different, the normal replay is about 1/5.0, which is higher than that of the 5th RT state, and the special replay 5 is about 1/32.8. and a winning probability lower than that of the fifth RT state is set.

The 7th RT state is also set as a replay in which a normal replay consisting of the 1st replay and a special replay 5 consisting of the 1st replay, the 9th replay to the 12th replay and the 15th replay can be won. , and the type of replay to be won is the same as in the 5th RT state and the 6th RT state. However, each replay has a different winning probability, and the normal replay has a winning probability of about 1/4.6, which is higher than those of the 5th RT state and the 6th RT state, and the special replay 5 has a winning probability of about 65.6. A winning probability of 1/5, which is lower than that of the fifth RT state and the sixth RT state, is set.

In the eighth RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay is set as a replay that can be won, and each special replay 5 is not won. And since the normal replay is about 1/4.3, the total replay probability is also about 1/4.3.

Incidentally, in the special RT notification processing in this embodiment, regardless of the content of the advantageous section, when the special replay 5 is won, a black BAR pressing notification effect is generated. That is, irrespective of the type of RT state, a stop roll with double black BARs appears based on special replay 5 wins.

As described above, by varying the type of special RT state that transitions according to the content of the advantageous section, and by varying the winning probability of special replay 5 according to the type of special RT state, the winning probability of special replay 5 determines the advantageous section A game such as predicting the content of the game can be performed. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the winning probability of the lottery process for whether or not to generate the black BAR pushing notification performance when the special replay 5 is won, depending on the content of the advantageous section, and the configuration is simplified. In addition, if the above is done, even if the "black BAR" pattern is pressed in a situation where the black BAR pressing notification effect is not occurring, the black BAR double matching will not occur, so the effect will not occur. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the appearance of a stop dot such as a black BAR double match.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, a configuration example in which the transition to the special RT state is performed by replay winning will be described.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the award given in this modified example.

In this modification, replay is set as a privilege given when winning each role (27th small role to 38th small role) that is a specific role in each of the above embodiments and modifications, and the replay At the same time, it is configured to shift to a fourth RT state, that is, a special RT state. That is, for example, when a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, or the like is won and a winning combination is established, a replay is given and the state shifts to the fourth RT state. In addition, for overlapping roles (strong cherry overlapping 1, 2, strong watermelon overlapping 1, 2, etc.) of each of these roles and bonuses, when the overlapping role is won, the corresponding role winning is established and replay is granted. At the same time, it shifts to the fourth RT state.

It should be noted that, regarding the re-game in which winning is established by the stop result of the strong cherry or the like, it is preferable to have a configuration that does not cause any omissions by, for example, overlapping with the first re-game. In other words, when a stop roll such as a strong cherry cannot be stopped, a win is established with another stop roll, a replay is awarded, and the state is shifted to the fourth RT state.

In this modification, each combination to which the replay and the 4th RT state are granted is a specific combination (hereinafter also referred to as a specific replay), and the transition of the advantageous section based on the specific replay win. hold a lottery. More specifically, for example, in step S701 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if the specific replay is won, affirmative determination is made and the first to third special combination processes are performed. do.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing RT state processing in this modified example.

In step S5201, it is determined whether or not the transition output has stopped, and if it has stopped, in step S5202 it is determined whether or not either the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is set. do. That is, the processing of step S5202 mainly shows the case of shifting to the 4th RT state based on the result of double winning with the 1st BB or the 2nd BB among the results of giving the replay. ing. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the RT state processing is terminated. That is, in this case, even if the stop roll is stopped, the transition to the RT state is not performed.

When the negative determination is made in step S5202, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal game state in step S5203, and if it is in the normal game state, processing for setting the first RT state is performed in step S5204. In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S5205, it is determined whether or not the second regame winning is established in step S5205, and when established or when the negative determination is made in step S5103, step After clearing the RT setting flag in S5206, processing for setting the first RT state is performed in step S5204. The processes of steps S5204 to S5206 are the same as the processes of steps S503 to S505.

In step S5205, if the second re-game winning has not been established, in steps S5207 to S5212, the RT state corresponding to the winning re-game is set in the same manner as in steps S506 to S511. process.

When it is determined in step S5210 that the fourth regame winning prize or the fifth regame winning prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S5213. In step S5213, it is determined whether or not a specific re-game winning has been established. If no winning is established, the RT state processing is terminated as it is. When the winning is established, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S5214, the fourth RT setting flag is set in step S5215, the game state is shifted to the fourth RT state, and then this RT state processing is performed. exit. Also in this modified example, the RT state before transition may be stored when transitioning to the fourth RT state.

FIG. 116 shows special RT state processing in this modified example.

In the special RT state processing of this modification, as described above, the transition processing to the fourth RT state is performed in the RT state processing, so the transition processing to the fourth RT state is performed in the special RT state processing. do not have. Specifically, in steps S5301 to S5309, in the same manner as in steps S3901 to S3909, various special RT commands based on specific replay winnings that overlap with the first BB and second BB are set. After that, the special RT state processing is terminated as it is without performing the transition processing to the fourth RT state in steps S3914 to S3916.

Also, in step S5302, if it is determined that it is not duplicate winning with the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, in step S5310, it is determined whether or not the specific re-game winning is performed, and if it is the specific re-game winning, On the condition that the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. are not won (step S5311: NO), the process of setting the fake special RT command is performed in step S5312, and then the special RT state process ends.

Also, in this modification, if it is determined that it is not the normal gaming state or the first RT state in step S5301, the processing for ending the fourth RT state (step S3917 to step S3923) is performed without performing the special End RT state processing.

With the configuration as described above, the condition for shifting to the special RT state can be matched with the condition for when various re-game winnings are established, which is the condition for shifting to another RT state.

In addition, in the above configuration, the special RT state that has been shifted without going through the 1st BB or 2nd BB win is terminated on the condition that the transition rolls stop, so the number of games in which the special RT state continues is reduced. A game in which the degree of advantage (whether BB is won or not, whether or not it is won in an advantageous section) is guessed during the special RT state until diversification occurs (until transition rolls stop). can entertain.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the special replay during the special RT state is used to suggest that the first BB and the second BB are won as well as the advantageous section. In addition, in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, strong cherry overlapping 1, 2, Weak cherry duplication 1, 2, strong watermelon duplication 1, 2, weak watermelon duplication 1, 2, chance A duplication 1, 2, chance B duplication 1, 2, middle bell duplication 1, 2 can be replayed by winning a prize. The 4th RT state shall be given along with being given.

FIG. 117 shows part of the winning lottery table during the special RT state in this embodiment. As described above, during the special RT state, the winning probability of the replay changes without changing the winning probability of the minor combination. FIG. 117 shows winning combinations and winning probabilities only for replays in which the winning probabilities change. Also in this embodiment, during the special RT state, the normal replay with the index value IV=1 is mainly won, and special replays 6 to 11 are rarely won. The special replay 6 to special replay 11 are overlapping roles of any of the 16th replay to the 24th replay.

As shown in FIG. 118, in the 16th to 24th replays, although replays are given as benefits, the stop numbers are different. The number of BAR symbols that stop is different. In the following explanation, regarding the winning modes, it is assumed that the downward sloping line L4 is set as the active line in the 3-bet game.

In the 16th replay, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. A prize mode is set in which a prize is established by stopping on the activated line. In the 17th replay, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. A prize mode is set in which a prize is established when the game is stopped. In these 16th replay and 17th replay, even if each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is operated aiming at a "black BAR" symbol, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has a "black BAR" symbol in the middle row. is a winning mode that does not stop.

In the 18th replay, the left reel 32L has a "white BAR" symbol, the middle reel 32M has a "first replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol, and the right reel 32R has a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol. A prize mode is set in which a prize is established by stopping on the activated line. The 19th replay wins when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line. is established. In the twentieth replay, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line. A prize mode is set in which a prize is established in . In these 18th to 20th replays, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is operated aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, " This is a winning mode in which one black BAR symbol stops.

The 21st replay wins when the "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. is established. In the 22nd replay, the ``white BAR'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``first replay'' symbol or the ``second replay'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the ``red 7'' symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line. A prize mode is set in which a prize is established in . The 23rd replay has a winning mode in which a prize is established when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. is set. In these 21st to 23rd replays, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is operated aiming at a "black BAR" symbol, a " This is a winning mode in which two black BAR symbols stop.

The 24th replay has a winning mode in which a prize is established when the "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. is set. In the winning mode of the 24th replay, when a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the "black BAR" symbols are aligned in the middle stages of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and stopped. , and the number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol in the middle row is three.

Special Replay 6 to Special Replay 11 are push-order roles with different winning combinations depending on the stop order. However, the privilege given to any winning combination is a replay, and the degree of advantage for the player is the same. In other words, special replay 6 to special replay 11 are combinations in which the winning number differs depending on the order of stopping, but the advantage is not changed.

FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established.

The special replay 6 is a duplicate combination of the 16th replay and the 18th to 20th replays. When the special replay 6 is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the first stop order of "left"→"middle"→"right", then the 16th replay or the 18th replay. Winning is established, and in this case, when a stopping operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the 18th replay winning of the 16th replay and the 18th replay is established. , the "black BAR" symbol stops at the middle stage of the left reel 32L. When the machines are stopped in the second stop order of "left"→"right"→"middle", the 16th replay win is established. In this case, even if the stopping operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on the middle row of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the middle row of any of the reels. When stopped in the third stop order of "middle"→"left"→"right", the 16th regame or the 19th regame win is established. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the BAR symbol, the winning of the 19th re-game of the 16th re-game and the 19th re-game is established, and the ``black BAR'' symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. When the reels are stopped in the fourth stop order of "middle"→"right"→"left", the 16th replay win is established, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle row of any reel. When stopped in the fifth stop order of "right"→"left"→"middle", the 16th replay or the 20th replay win is established. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "BAR", the 20th regame win is established among the 16th regame and the 20th regame, and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 32R. When the reels are stopped in the sixth stop order of "right"→"middle"→"left", the 16th replay prize is established, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle row of any reel. Regarding the first stop order, the third stop order and the fifth stop order, even if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle row of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation will cause the "black BAR" symbol to appear in the middle row. ” If the timing is such that the symbols cannot be stopped, the 16th regame win is established.

The special replay 7 is a duplicate combination of the 17th replay to the 20th replay. Then, as in the case of the special replay 6, when the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the first stop order, the third stop order and the fifth stop order In either case, the 17th replay win is established, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle row of any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Also, in the second stop order, the 18th re-game win is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle stage of the left reel 32L. In the 4th stop order, the 19th replay win is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. Then, in the sixth stop order, the twentieth regame win is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle stage of the right reel 32R. Regarding the second stop order, the fourth stop order and the sixth stop order, even if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle row of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation will not cause the "black BAR" symbol to appear in the middle row. can not be stopped, the 17th regame win is established.

The special replay 8 is a duplicate combination of the 16th replay and the 18th to 22nd replays. Then, in the case where each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is aimed at the "black BAR" pattern and the stopping operation is performed, the 16th replay winning prize is obtained in any one of the second stopping order, the fourth stopping order and the sixth stopping order. This holds true, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle row of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, in the first stop order or the third stop order, the 21st replay win is established, and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. Then, in the fifth stop order, the 22nd replay winning prize is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R. Regarding the first stop order, the third stop order and the fifth stop order, even if a stop operation is performed aiming at a "black BAR" symbol in the middle row of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation will not result in a "black BAR" symbol in the middle row. can not be stopped, the 16th re-game win, the 18th re-game win to the 20th re-game win are established.

The special replay 9 is a duplicate combination of the 17th replay, the 18th replay to the 20th replay, the 22nd replay and the 23rd replay. In the case where each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is aimed at the "black BAR" pattern and the stopping operation is performed, the 17th replay winning prize is obtained in any one of the first stop order, the third stop order and the fifth stop order. This holds true, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle row of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, in the second stop order, the 22nd replay win is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R. Then, in the fourth stop order or the sixth stop order, the 23rd replay winning prize is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. Regarding the 12th stop order, the 4th stop order and the 6th stop order, even if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on the middle stage of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation will not cause the "black BAR" symbol to appear on the middle stage. can not be stopped, the 17th to 20th regame wins are established.

The special replay 10 is a duplicate combination of the 16th replay, the 18th replay to the 20th replay, and the 24th replay. Then, the 16th replay winning prize is established in any one of the second stop order, the fourth stop order and the sixth stop order, and the "black BAR" pattern is stopped in the middle row of any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. do not. In addition, the 24th replay win is established in any one of the first stop order, the third stop order and the fifth stop order, and the "black BAR" symbols are aligned and stopped in the middle stages of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. . Regarding the first stop order, the third stop order and the fifth stop order, even if a stop operation is performed aiming at a "black BAR" symbol in the middle row of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation will not result in a "black BAR" symbol in the middle row. can not be stopped, the 16th re-game winning prize, the 18th re-game winning prize to the 22nd re-game winning prize are established.

The special replay 11 is a duplicate combination of the 17th replay, the 18th replay to the 20th replay, and the 22nd replay to the 24th replay. Then, the 17th replay winning prize is established in any one of the first stop order, the third stop order and the fifth stop order, and the "black BAR" pattern is stopped in the middle row of any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. do not. In addition, the 24th replay win is established in any one of the second stop order, the fourth stop order and the sixth stop order, and the "black BAR" symbols are aligned and stopped in the middle stages of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. . Regarding the second stop order, the fourth stop order and the sixth stop order, even if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle row of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation will not cause the "black BAR" symbol to appear in the middle row. can not be stopped, the 17th to 20th re-game wins, the 22nd re-game wins and the 23rd re-game wins are established.

As described above, various special RT commands are output from the main controller 101 to the display control device 81 based on the winning of a specific combination (BB winning or BB non-winning). Further, as already described, when the display control device 81 receives a command from the main control device 101, it performs processing such as storing the received command in a predetermined area in the command storage processing.

Here, in this embodiment, the special RT command reception processing that is started when the various special RT commands are received will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 120 . In the special RT command reception process, a process for setting an effect pattern during the current special RT state is performed according to the type of command received.

Specifically, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a special RT command with super attack mode. If it is a special RT command with a super attack mode, in step S5402, the notification scenario table stored in the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182 is referred to, and the notification scenario A is selected as the effect pattern during this special RT state. After performing the setting process, the special RT command reception process ends.

As shown in FIG. 121, in the notification scenario table of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the pressing order notification effect lottery for stopping the black BAR is set differently depending on the type of notification scenario, depending on the value of the black BAR stop counter. ing. The black BAR stop counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of times the "black BAR" symbol has stopped in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R during the special RT state this time. It is provided in the counter area 183b. Also, the pressing order notification effect lottery for stopping the black BAR is executed when any special replay is won. For example, in the notification scenario A, if the black BAR stop counter is 0, there is a probability of 80% that you will win the push order notification effect lottery, and if the black BAR stop counter is 5, there is a 30% probability that you will be selected for the push order notification effect lottery. be elected.

If a negative determination is made in step S5401, it is determined in step S5403 whether or not the command received this time is a special RT command with attack mode. If it is a special RT command with an attack mode, in step S5404, from the above-described notification scenario table, processing is performed to set notification scenario B as an effect pattern during the current special RT state. After that, in step S5405, 5 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter in the current effect pattern, and then this special RT command reception process is terminated.

Here, as shown in FIG. 121, in each notification scenario, the upper limit value is set so that when the black BAR stop counter reaches or exceeds a predetermined value, winning in the push order notification effect lottery is not possible. For example, in the notification scenario B that is set when the special RT command with attack mode is received, if the value of the black BAR stop counter is 0 to 4, it is possible to win the pushing order notification effect lottery, but the value of the counter is 5. When it becomes, it will not be won in the pushing order notification effect lottery.

In this embodiment, in the special RT state, the number of "black BAR" symbols stopped in the middle stages of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R indicates the content of the subsequent game. For example, when the total number of “black BAR” symbols stopped during the special RT state reaches 3 or more, it is determined that the game will shift to the bonus state of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. Also, when the total number of "black BAR" symbols stopped during the special RT state reaches 4 or more, it is determined that the game will shift to the challenge mode after the bonus state of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. When the total number of black BAR stops is 5 or more, it is confirmed that the attack mode will be entered after the bonus state of the 1st BB or 2nd BB, and when the total number of stops is 6 or more, the bonus state Later, it is confirmed that it will shift to super attack mode.

That is, the more the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R during the special RT state, the easier it is for the player to transition to an advantageous state after the special RT state. Therefore, the player can guess the subsequent state from the number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol.

Also, during the special RT state, a state effect is performed in which the display on the auxiliary display section 65 corresponds to the special RT state. The state effect is set to change according to the number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol. Specifically, as the cumulative number of stoppages of the “black BAR” pattern increases from 0→1→2→3→4→5→6, the background color of the state effect changes from white→blue→yellow→green→red→ Change from gold to rainbow. That is, by stopping the "black BAR" pattern in the middle row of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the background color of the state effect indicating the special RT state changes, and after the special RT state, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state. grasped. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the state has shifted to an advantageous state precisely because the "black BAR" pattern is stopped in the middle stage during the special RT state. improves markedly.

Returning to the description of the special RT command reception processing (FIG. 120), if a negative determination is made in step S5403, it is determined in step S5406 whether or not the command received this time is a special RT command with challenge mode. If it is a special RT command with a challenge mode, in step S5407, processing is performed to set the notification scenario C as the effect pattern during the current special RT state from the notification scenario table. After that, in step S5408, 4 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter in the current effect pattern, and then this special RT command reception process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S5406, it is determined in step S5409 whether or not the command received this time is a special RT command. If it is a special RT command, in step S5410, a process of setting the notification scenario D as the effect pattern during the current special RT state from the notification scenario table is performed. After that, in step S5411, 3 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter in this production pattern, and then this special RT command reception process is terminated.

A negative determination in step S5409 means that the command received this time is a fake special RT command. As already explained, the fake special RT command is a case where a specific role that is not a duplicate role with the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, and the specific role is triggered by any of the challenge mode, attack mode and super attack mode. This is a command output from the main controller 101 when no transition has been won. Then, when the fake special RT command is output/received, a transition is made to a special RT state that continues until the transition rolls stop. It should be noted that when the transition rolls stop and the special RT state ends, the game returns to the normal game state or the first RT state as described in the second embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in step S5409, then in step S5412, notification scenario lottery processing is executed. In the notification scenario lottery process, it is determined by lottery which of the notification scenarios E to G is to be set as the effect pattern during the special RT state this time from the notification scenario table. Informing scenarios E to G are set so that the winning probability of the pressing order informing effect lottery differs depending on the value of the black BAR stop counter. For example, when the value of the black BAR stop counter is 0, the winning probability of the pressing order notification effect lottery is 80% in notification scenario E, 60% in notification scenario F, and 50% in notification scenario G. . Which one of the notification scenarios E to G is set depends on the type of the specific combination that triggered the fake special RT command, and the winning probability differs. For example, the notification scenario E has a high probability of winning when a fake special RT command is output/received triggered by a strong cherry or a strong watermelon as a specific role, and the notification scenario F is triggered by a weak cherry or a weak watermelon as a specific role. , the winning probability is high when the fake special RT command is output/received, and the notification scenario G has a high winning probability when the fake special RT command is output/received with another specific role as a trigger.

After performing lottery processing for the notification scenario in step S5412, processing for setting the notification scenario according to the lottery result is performed in step S5413. Then, in step S5414, 2 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter in the current effect pattern, and then this special RT command reception process ends.

Next, the special RT notification processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the special RT notification process is a process executed in step S4515 of the push order notification process (FIG. 97) in the display control device 81 when a special replay win is won.

In step S5501, a process of grasping the notification scenario set in the special RT command reception process is performed. Then, in step S5502, processing is performed to grasp the current value of the black BAR stop counter. In the following step S5503, a process of grasping the type of special replay of the current game is performed. That is, it is determined which one of special replays 6 to 11.

In step S5504, it is determined whether or not the black BAR stop counter has a vacancy, based on the relationship between the upper limit value set in the special RT command reception process and the current special replay. That is, for example, when the current value of the black BAR stop counter is 2 and the upper limit is set to 3 (when notification scenario D is set), the special replay of this time is displayed in the middle row. In the case of a special replay 6 or a special replay 7 in which only one "black BAR" symbol can be stopped, more specifically, in this game, if a "black BAR" is placed in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R If there is no contradiction in relation to the content of notification (the content of the state after the special RT state) even if the symbol stops, it is determined that there is a vacancy in the value of the black BAR stop counter. On the other hand, even if the current value of the black BAR stop counter is 2 and the upper limit is set to 3 (when notification scenario D is set), the special replay of this time will display "Black In the case of special replays 8 to 11 in which two or more BAR' symbols can be stopped, more specifically, in this game, if any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has a 'black BAR' symbol in the middle row, When the black BAR stops, it is determined that there is no vacancy in the black BAR stop counter if a contradiction may occur in relation to the content of the notification (the content of the state after the special RT state). Also, even if the current value of the black BAR stop counter is 2, if the upper limit is set to 2 (when notification scenarios E to G are set), special replays will not be performed. Regardless of the type, it is determined that there is no space in the black BAR stop counter.

If it is determined in step S5504 that there is a vacancy in the value of the black BAR stop counter, then in step S5505, notification lottery processing is executed. Specifically, the winning probability of the notification lottery is grasped from the current notification scenario and the black BAR stop counter, and the pushing order notification effect lottery is performed using the lottery counter or the like. Then, in step S5506, the result of the lottery process in step S5505 is determined, and if it is determined that the winning result is obtained, in step S5507, as the current pressing order notification effect, the pressing order for stopping the black BAR is displayed. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the notification effect is performed. Specifically, for example, if the current special replay is special replay 6, as shown in FIG. , the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled. Further, for example, if the special replay of this time is special replay 11, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like. It is preferable to randomly decide by a lottery or the like which push order is to be notified. Then, in step S5508, the notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and then the notification processing for special RT ends.

If it is determined in step S5504 that there is no vacancy in the black BAR stop counter, or if it is determined in step S5506 that there is vacancy but was not won in the notification lottery, in step S5509, the current push order As the notification effect, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the black BAR non-stop pressing order notification effect is performed. Specifically, for example, if the current special replay is special replay 6, as shown in FIG. , the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled. Further, for example, if the current special replay is special replay 11, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like. It is preferable to randomly decide by a lottery or the like which push order is to be notified. After that, the notification processing for special RT ends.

Next, the special replay winning process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 when the special replay wins will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the special replay winning process is executed as one process of the effect setting process (step S1710) at the time of all stop in the effect setting process (FIG. 42).

First, in step S5601, it is determined whether or not a "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle row of any one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from the stop numbers of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If stopped, it is determined in step S5602 whether or not the notification flag is set. When the "black BAR" pattern stops in the middle stage while the notification flag is set, the process advances to step S5603 to grasp the number of "black BAR" patterns stopped in the middle row. Then, in step S5604, processing is performed to add the number obtained in step S5603 to the black BAR stop counter. For example, if one "black BAR" pattern is stopped in the middle row, the black BAR stop counter is incremented by 1, and three "black BAR" patterns are stopped in the middle row. 3 is added to the black BAR stop counter.

In the following step S5605, the addition time notification effect is set. Specifically, a process of changing the background color of the state rendering for the special RT state so as to correspond to the value of the black BAR stop counter after addition is performed. Then, in subsequent step S5606, processing for clearing the notification flag is performed, and then the special replay winning process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5601 that the "black BAR" symbol is not stopped in the middle row of any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, or if the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in step S5602, the notification flag is set. If it is determined that it is not set, the process advances to step S5606 to perform processing for clearing the notification flag, and then the special replay winning processing ends. In step S5606, if the notification flag is not set, that state is maintained.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, it is configured to shift to the special RT state, and when the special replay wins in the special RT state, the suggestion of whether or not the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won is announced. It was configured to be performed by directing. By doing so, it is possible to change the stopping numbers by using one winning result (special replay) in the special RT state, and to realize the suggestion performance using the stopping numbers.

Here, by providing a plurality of stop numbers for one result and making a configuration in which which stop number appears depends on the stop order, the stop numbers do not become complicated. While it is possible to realize an effect using If a push order notification is provided for a game result whose advantage may differ depending on the stop order, such as a push order bell or a push order replay, it may be against the purport of restricting the execution of the transition lottery for the advantageous section. . In other words, if the pressing order notification is performed in such a carryover state, the pushing order notification may be performed without limitation due to the act of intentionally delaying the bonus prize winning. In this regard, according to the above-described embodiment, as a push order notification effect that does not cause a change in the player's advantage, the transition lottery is performed during the carryover state by performing the push order notification effect during the special replay. It is possible to realize an effect using the difference in the number of stop rolls within a range not contrary to the purpose of restricting the execution.

Suggestion performance using the stop result is performed by the cumulative stop count of the "black BAR" pattern. By doing so, it becomes difficult to judge the content of the suggestion from the suggestion of one game. becomes.

In this case, in various special replays, by setting the stop order in which no "black bar" pattern stops in the middle row, the cumulative number of stops has already reached the upper limit of the suggested content. It is possible to generate the pressing order notification effect (generate the pressing order notification effect of stopping 0 pieces) even if the pressing order is not performed, and it is possible to eliminate the racing feeling due to the absence of the effect.

In the special RT state, the notification effect at the time of special replay winning is executed according to the notification scenario set at the time of transition to the special RT state. , and can be easily implemented without using a configuration in which matching with previous suggested contents is performed when a special replay is won.

At the time of special replay winning, even if the stop order happens to coincide with the stop order corresponding to the black BAR stop in a situation where the push order notification effect is not generated, the addition process of the black BAR stop counter and the notification effect at the time of addition was configured so that Also, at the time of winning the special replay, even if the pushing order notification effect occurs, if the "black BAR" pattern fails to be pressed, the 16th replay or the 17th replay in which the black BAR pattern does not stop Game wins. Also in this case, the addition processing of the black BAR stop counter is not performed, the notification effect at the time of addition is not performed, and the background color is not changed. By doing so, in the special RT state, first of all, the expectation is generated for the occurrence of the pressing order notification effect, and when the pressing order notification effect occurs, the pressing corresponding to the black BAR stop is performed. The fact that it is a forward notification effect can make people expect. Moreover, in order to change the background color, it is not only necessary to match the pressing order, but it is also necessary to aim at the "black BAR" symbol and perform the stop operation. and the player's operation are closely related. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the degree of expectation after the special RT state is changed by his skill of the stop operation, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game operation.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, a detailed description will be given of the configuration regarding the addition of the number of continuous games in the advantageous section and the upper limit number of games (1500) in the advantageous section.

First, the first special combination processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As already explained, the first special combination process is performed when the lottery result of the game is a special combination when the display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode.

As a change in this embodiment, the challenge mode lottery process (step S813) is performed regardless of whether the challenge mode is in progress in each of the above embodiments, and if the challenge mode is won again during the challenge mode, the challenge mode The number of games is added to the number of games, but the mode transition lottery or the additional lottery is changed depending on whether the challenge mode is in progress or not.

In other words, the processes related to the lottery for transition to the attack mode in steps S6001 to S6012 are the same as those in steps S801 to S812. If a negative determination is made in step S6005 and it is determined that the attack mode is not won, the process proceeds to step S6013. In step S6013, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode is in progress. If the challenge mode is not in progress, a challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S6014. The process of step S6014 is a transition lottery to determine whether the display mode is to be shifted from the normal mode to the challenge mode, and is a transition lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section.

In step S6015, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S6014 has been won. If not won, the first special combination processing is terminated as it is. When winning, the process advances to step S6016 to set a challenge mode winning flag. The processing from step S6016 to step S6020 is the same as the processing from step S816 to step S820.

When it is determined in step S6013 that the game is in the challenge mode, as described above, in this embodiment, the challenge mode game number addition lottery process is executed in step S6021. In step S6022, it is determined whether or not the lottery process of step S6021 is won, that is, whether or not the number of games in the challenge mode is increased. It is determined whether or not it is a double role with a bonus. The processing of steps S6023 to S6027 is the same as the processing of steps S821 to S825. If it is determined in step S6022 that no additional winnings will occur, the first special combination processing is terminated.

Next, the section display second processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

As a change in this embodiment, after performing the addition processing of the number of games in the advantageous section AG, the processing for grasping and managing the number of remaining games that can be added in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section (remaining game number management Processing, step S6103) is performed.

That is, in step S6101, it is determined whether or not the section indicator is being displayed in the same manner as in step S2801. Addition processing is executed. Then, in step S6103, the number-of-remaining-games management process is executed. The processing of steps S6104 to S6111 is the same as the processing of steps S2803 to S2810.

A supplementary description of the data initialization process in step S6107 will be given.

As already explained, by performing the initialization process, various counters and various flags used during the advantageous section are cleared. For example, even if the number of continuations of challenge mode or the number of continuations of attack mode remains, it is forcibly set to 0. flag) is also cleared, the attack mode and the like are forcibly terminated.

In this case, since the number of continuations of the attack mode, etc. is forcibly set to 0 as described above, in the number-of-games management process (FIG. 40), for example, the number of continuations of the attack mode is set to 0 (step S1414). affirmative determination), an attack mode end command is output to the display control device 81 . In the case of forcible termination during the VB mode or special zone, the VB mode termination command is output based on the fact that the VB mode continuation count is forcibly set to 0, or the special zone continuation count is forcibly terminated. When it becomes 0, the specialized zone end command is output. However, if the display control device 81 receives these various end commands redundantly, it means that the attack mode end command has been received. The processing based on (processing to perform attack mode end effect) is preferentially performed. As a result, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to perform an attack mode end effect based on the reception of the attack mode end command (step S2306).

As described above, even if the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the display effect for the normal mode does not suddenly appear, and the display effect such as the end effect of the attack mode occurs, resulting in a malfunction of the game machine. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the user has done so. It should be noted that, at the time of forced termination, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect different from the normal attack mode end effect is set so that the forced termination can be more clearly recognized. Further, if the VB mode is in progress at the time of forcible termination, the main controller 101 may output only the attack mode termination command without outputting the VB mode termination command or the like.

<Remaining game number management processing>
The number-of-remaining-games management process will be described with reference to FIG. In the remaining game number management process, the number of remaining continuous games in various modes scheduled to be performed in the advantageous section is grasped, and the total number of remaining continuous games and the number of games already executed in the advantageous section can be added. The number of free games (number of remaining games) is calculated.

That is, in step S6201, the precursor game number G1 is grasped. The number of precursor games G1 represents the number of remaining precursor mode games, for example, when the current state is the precursor mode in the advantageous section, and is decremented by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). . In step S6202, the challenge mode continuation number G2 is grasped. The challenge mode continuation number G2 represents the number of remaining challenge mode games, for example, when the current situation is the challenge mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). . In step S6203, the attack mode continuation count G3 is grasped. The attack mode continuation number G3 represents the number of remaining attack mode games, for example, when the current state is the attack mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). . In step S6204, the VB mode continuation number G4 is grasped. The VB mode continuation number G4 represents the number of remaining VB mode games, for example, when the current state is the VB mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). . In step S6205, the specialized zone continuation number G5 is grasped. The specialized zone continuation number G5 represents the number of games remaining in the specialized zone, for example, when the current status is the specialized zone in the advantageous section, and is set by one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). subtracted. In step S6206, the number of remaining BB games G6 is grasped. The number of remaining BB games G6 represents the number of remaining BB mode games, for example, when the current state is the BB mode (bonus state) in the advantageous section, and is performed each time the game number management process (FIG. 40) is started. Then, it is decremented by 1 in a subtraction process (not shown) on condition that the BB mode is on.

Here, values of 0 or more may be input for these continuation numbers G1 to G6 even if the mode or zone does not correspond to the current situation. Specifically, for example, in a situation in which a lottery for transition to VB mode has been won, but the transition to VB mode has not yet been made, the current mode is attack mode, and VB mode continuation number G4 indicates continuation of VB mode. The initial value of the number of games "60" remains input. Also, in a situation where the player has won the lottery to move to the super attack mode during the challenge mode, but has not yet transitioned to the super attack mode, the current mode is the challenge mode and the special zone continuation number G5 is special. "5", which is the initial value of the number of games to be continued in the attack zone, is still input, and "50", which is the initial value of the number of games to be continued in the attack mode, is still input to the attack mode continuation number G3. becomes.

In step S6207, a process of calculating the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous section is performed by integrating G1 to G6 grasped in each process of steps S6201 to S6206. By performing such processing, it is possible to grasp how many games the advantageous section continues. In the following step S6208, a process of calculating the total number of games in the advantageous interval SG is performed by adding the number of games in the advantageous interval (the number of games in the advantageous interval AG) and the remaining number of games ZG. Then, in step S6209, the number of vacant games (the number of vacant games that can be added, the number of remaining games) FG is calculated by subtracting the total number of games SG in the advantageous interval from 1500G, which is the upper limit number of continuous games in the advantageous interval. process.

After the processing of step S6209 is performed, it is determined in step S6210 whether or not the number of idle games FG is greater than 0, that is, whether or not there is the number of idle games and can be added. If the free game number FG is greater than 0, the remaining game number management process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of free games FG is 0 or less, the process of setting an excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S6211, and then the remaining game number management process is terminated. The excess flag indicates a situation in which the number of continuous games in the advantageous section cannot be increased, more specifically, the CPU 102 grasps a situation in which even if an increase is made, the additional games are not executed due to forced termination at the time of the 1500th game. is a flag for

For example, as shown in FIG. 127(a), when the advantageous interval is started by setting the challenge mode win flag in the game of ta1, measurement of the number of advantageous interval games AG is started from the game. After that, ta1 to ta2 is challenge mode, ta2 to ta3 is attack mode, ta3 to ta4 is VB mode, ta4 to ta5 is attack mode, and even if the advantageous section continues while repeating the mode transition, from ta1 The number of games up to ta5 is grasped by the number of advantageous section games AG. Also, at ta5, the remaining number of continuations of the attack mode, etc. is grasped by the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG (integration of G1 to G6), and it is confirmed that the advantageous section will continue until ta6 at ta5. are doing. In FIG. 127(a), ta6 is a game before ta7, which is 1500 games from ta1, and ta6 to ta7 correspond to the number of empty games FG that can be added at the time of ta5. That is, in FIG. 127(a), the excess flag is not set.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 127(b), the advantageous section starting from tb1 passes through the challenge mode from tb1 to tb2, the attack mode from tb2 to tb3 and from tb4 to tb5, and the VB mode from tb3 to tb4 and from tb5 to tb6. , tb7. In this case, the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is the number of games from tb1 to tb7, and when the number of games in the advantageous interval remaining ZG at tb7 is added to the number of games in the advantageous interval AG, it exceeds 1500. That is, the advantageous interval is forcibly terminated at time tb8 without completely using up the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous interval at time tb7. In this case the over flag is set.

In the situation where the excess flag is set as described above, that is, in the game with the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous section from tb7 to tb8, even if a special role is won and an opportunity to add attack mode occurs, in the end Since the game is forcibly terminated at tb8, the game from tb7 to tb8 can be a so-called digest game, and there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game will be greatly reduced.

Also, FIG. 127(c) shows an example of a case where a large number of games are added in the specialized zone. For example, in the challenge mode started from tc1, it is assumed that the super attack mode is won, and the specialized zone is implemented from tc2 to tc3. In such a specialized zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is greatly increased, and even when the attack mode, which started from tc3, is completed until tc4, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is still large. and If the number of games remaining in the advantageous interval ZG at time tc4 exceeds 1500 when added to the number of games AG in the advantageous interval from tc1 to tc4, then the number of games remaining in the advantageous interval ZG remaining at time tc4 is large. Everything becomes a digestive game as described above. If so, not only will interest in the game drop significantly, but even though a large amount of extra money has been generated, it can be a factor that leads to a decrease in attention. There may also be concerns about a decline in interest in Moreover, the more advantageous sections that can be such a final game remain, the higher the possibility that an additional opportunity will occur in the final game, and the greater the number of times that an additional opportunity will occur. There is also a high possibility that the player will be discouraged by the occurrence of the meaningful additional opportunity.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in such a situation where the number of free games FG is 0 or less and even if the number of games is increased, it becomes meaningless. . In the following, regarding such a configuration, the processing when the number of empty games FG is greater than 0, that is, when the additional trigger is not meaningless, will be described first, and then the processing when the number of empty games FG is 0 or less will be described. explain.

<When the number of empty games FG is greater than 0>
FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing the game number addition lottery process in the challenge mode or the attack mode. For example, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is performed in step S6021 of the first special combination process (FIG. 124). Also, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is executed in step S914 (FIG. 33) in the second special combination process and step S1001 (FIG. 34) in the third special combination process. Since the process configuration is basically the same for the lottery process for adding the number of games in either case, the case where the lottery process is carried out during the challenge mode and the case where it is carried out during the attack mode will be collectively described below.

In step S6301, it is determined whether or not the above excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set and the number of vacant games FG is greater than 0, the flow advances to step S6302 to carry out processing for grasping the type of the current special combination. Then, in step S6303, after performing the process of acquiring the additional lottery table, in step S6304, after executing the additional lottery, the game number adding lottery process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 129, the add-on lottery table is set so that the add-on win rate differs depending on the type of the special win and the mode when the special win is won (the mode to be added).

In the lottery for adding the number of games in the challenge mode, for example, there is a probability of 15% for strong cherry, and a 5% probability for weak watermelon. It is possible to win an additional win even in the overlapping role with the 1st BB, and a strong cherry overlap 1 wins an additional win with a probability of 5%, and a weak watermelon overlap 1 wins an additional win with a probability of 15%. In other words, even with the same strong cherry or weak watermelon, the additional winning probability differs depending on whether or not there is overlap with the first BB, and there are cases where the overlapping win probability is higher and lower.

In the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode or VB mode, for example, there is a probability of 15% for strong cherry, and a 5% probability for weak watermelon. On the other hand, with a strong cherry overlap 1 and a weak watermelon overlap 1, there is a 100% chance that you will win an additional role, and if you have a double role with the 1st BB, there is a high probability (both with a 100% probability), the number of games in attack mode. It is set so that surcharge occurs.

In the lottery to increase the number of games in attack mode held in the specialized zone, regardless of the type of specific role, there is a high probability (with a probability of 100%) that you will win the extra game. It is set to win additional prizes by pushing order replay and various pushing order bells. Therefore, the flowchart of the special zone processing (FIG. 42) shows a processing configuration in which the number-of-games addition lottery processing is omitted.

128, affirmative determination is made in the determination processing (steps S6022, S915, and S1002) performed after the game number addition lottery processing, and the addition game number lottery processing (steps S6024, S1002) is made. Steps S917 and S1004) are performed. The number-of-addition-games lottery process may also be performed at the end of the bonus (FIG. 41, steps S1512, S1516) or in the special zone (FIG. 42, step S1602). It has a processing configuration. Therefore, the number-of-addition-games lottery process will be collectively described with reference to FIG.

In step S6401, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. Since the excess flag is not set in this case (in the case of extra winning), a negative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S6402. In step S6402, a process of grasping the type of special combination is performed. Then, in step S6403, after performing the process of acquiring the number-of-additional-games lottery table, the lottery for the number-of-games is executed in step S6404, and then the number-of-addition-games lottery process ends.

As shown in FIG. 131, the number-of-addition-games lottery table is set so that the number of additional games differs depending on the type of special combination and the mode when the special combination is won (mode to be added).

In the extra game number lottery in the challenge mode, for example, the extra game number of 2 to 20 games is generated for strong cherries, and the average value is 15 games. Also, in weak watermelon, the number of games added to any of 5 to 15 games occurs, and the average value is 6 games. Its width is also set to be different.

In the lottery for the number of additional games in the attack mode that occurs during the attack mode or VB mode, for example, in the strong cherry, the number of games to be added is any of 20 games to 200 games, and the average value is 30 games. , a higher number of game additions than in the challenge mode can occur. In addition, for weak watermelon, the number of games added to any of 50 games to 150 games occurred, and the average value was 60 games. Regarding the width, it is set so that the number of games can be larger than that in the challenge mode.

In the lottery for the number of extra games in the attack mode that occurs in the special zone, for example, in the strong cherry, the extra number of games from 20 games to 200 games occurs, which is equivalent to the case where it occurs during the attack mode. , but the average value is 50 games, and the number of games may be greater than that in the attack mode or the like. Also, for weak watermelon, the number of games added to the number of games from 50 games to 150 games occurs, and although it is the same range as when it occurs during attack mode etc., the average value is 70 games. It is set so that a larger number of games is likely to be selected in any particular combination than in the attack mode or the like.

After executing the game number addition lottery process, the game number addition process is performed in steps S6025, S918, S1005, S1513, S1517, S1603, and the like. Since the process configuration is the same for any of the game number addition processes, they will be collectively described below with reference to FIG. 132 .

In step S6501, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. Since the excess flag is not set this time, a negative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S6502. In step S6502, a process of grasping the number of additional games is performed based on the processing result of the above-mentioned number-of-addition lottery process. After that, in step S6503, a process of adding the number of games to be added to the number of continuous games to be processed is performed, and then the process of adding the number of games is finished.

As a result, the number of continuous games in challenge mode and attack mode is increased. As already explained, when the addition occurs, the addition effect by the auxiliary display section 65 is generated. Then, the player understands that it has become possible to carry out the advantageous section by adding the number of games notified by the additional effect.

<When the number of empty games FG is 0 or less>
Next, a description will be given of the processing when the number of idle games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set.

Since the excess flag is set, in the game number addition lottery process of FIG. 128, an affirmative determination is made in step S6301, and the process proceeds to step S6305 instead of the process for the addition lottery on the step S6302 side. In other words, even if a specific winning combination that triggers an extra win is won in a situation where the excess flag is set, the execution of the extra lottery process is restricted and the extra lottery process is not executed.

In step S6305, a process of grasping the type of the current special combination is performed. Then, in step S6306, after executing the process of acquiring the first special notification lottery table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, in step S6307, the first special notification lottery for determining whether or not to execute the first special notification Execute the process.

As shown in FIG. 133, the first special notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of executing the first special notification differs depending on the type of special combination and the mode when the special combination is won. That is, the first special notification lottery table corresponds to the additional lottery table, and the processing for determining whether or not there is an excess flag when winning a special combination is performed by combining the lottery tables to be referred to with the additional lottery table and the first special notification lottery table. It can also be said that it is a process of making the

In the present embodiment, the first special notification is a notification that presents information that may be beneficial to the player. It is That is, in a situation where the excess flag is set, instead of performing a lottery to add the number of games in the advantageous section when winning a special combination, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the first special notification as a suggestive effect of the set value. conduct.

Specifically, regarding the first special notification lottery table, in the first special notification lottery during the attack mode or VB mode and the first special notification lottery in the specialized zone, the special zone has a higher probability. Winning probability in each special combination is set so that one special notification lottery can be won. For example, for strong cherries that do not overlap with the 1st BB, there is a 15% chance of winning the first special notification lottery during attack mode or VB mode, while a 100% chance of winning the first special notification lottery in the specialized zone. 1 Win the special notification lottery. In addition, for weak watermelons that do not overlap with the 1st BB, there is a 5% probability that the first special notification lottery will be won in the attack mode or VB mode, while in the specialized zone there is a 100% probability that the first special notification lottery will be won. 1 Win the special notification lottery.

As already explained, it is easier to win the extra lottery in the special zone than in attack mode or VB mode, and it is easier to win the extra lottery in attack mode or VB mode than in the special zone If you win in the middle lottery, you can expect to add more games. In the first special notification lottery table, the odds of winning the first special notification lottery are set corresponding to the difference in winning probability of the additional lottery and the expected value of the number of additional games at the time of winning. The more the first special notification lottery is executed instead of the easier lottery, and the more the first special notification lottery is executed instead of the extra lottery that can be expected to increase the number of games, the more the first special notification is given to the player. It is easier to present information that can be useful, that is, to suggest a set value.

In the first special notification lottery process in the challenge mode, with a specific combination such as a strong cherry or a weak cherry that does not overlap with the first BB, there is a high probability (100% probability) that the first special notification lottery will be won. is set. Therefore, in the challenge mode, if the special combination is won in a situation where the excess flag is set, the suggestion of the set value occurs with a high probability (with a probability of 100%). On the other hand, in the strong cherry overlapping 1 and weak cherry overlapping 1, which are overlapping roles with the 1BB, it is set to win the first special notification lottery with a lower probability (with a probability of 30%) than in the case of non-overlapping. there is Therefore, in the situation where the excess flag is set in the challenge mode, if there is a stop roll that wins a strong cherry etc. An effect occurs, and if it overlaps with the 1st BB, a suggestive effect of the set value occurs with a lower probability than that.

In the first special notification lottery process during attack mode and VB mode, in specific hands such as strong cherries and weak cherries that do not overlap with 1BB, there is a high probability (with a probability of 100%) that the first special notification lottery set to win. Therefore, in these modes, if a special combination is won in a situation where the excess flag is set, the set value will be suggested with a high probability (100% probability). On the other hand, in the strong cherry overlapping 1 and weak cherry overlapping 1, which are overlapping roles with the 1BB, it is set to win the first special notification lottery with a lower probability (with a probability of 30%) than in the case of non-overlapping. there is Therefore, in the situation where the excess flag is set in these modes, if a stop roll that wins a strong cherry etc. A suggestive effect is generated, and if it overlaps with the first BB, a suggestive effect of the set value is generated with a lower probability than that.

Here, in the slot machine 10, once the challenge mode is shifted to the attack mode or the like, the challenge mode is not returned even after the attack mode ends (FIG. 30). Therefore, during the challenge mode when the excess flag is set, the upper limit of the advantageous section is The situation when the number of games is reached is considered, and it can be said that it is a situation that can hardly occur in reality. However, if such a situation occurs, it will be the case that the lottery for transition to attack mode etc. continues to be lost endlessly, so in order to follow up on that trouble, it is configured to generate the first special notification with a high probability. . The reason why the occurrence rate of the 1st special notification is lower when there is overlap with the 1st BB is that if the role overlaps with the 1st BB, at least the benefits of winning the 1st BB can be received. This is to ensure a balance between

When comparing with the additional lottery, if we focus on the presence or absence of overlap with the 1BB, for example, in the additional lottery, during the attack mode or during the VB mode, 10% of weak cherries that do not overlap with the 1BB Winning with a probability, winning with a probability of 100% in the weak cherry duplication 1 which is a duplicating role with the 1st BB, and winning an additional lottery with a probability of 10 times the duplicating role with the 1st BB. On the other hand, in the first special notification lottery, during the attack mode or VB mode, a weak cherry that does not overlap with the first BB wins with a probability of 10%, and a weak cherry overlap 1 that overlaps with the first BB. Winning with a probability of 30%, the winning probability of the first special notification lottery is higher for the overlapping role with the first BB, but the ratio is lower than the ratio in the case of the additional lottery.

In addition, in the extra lottery in the specialized zone, both the weak cherry that is not a double hand with the 1BB and the double weak cherry that is a double hand with the first BB are won with a probability of 100%. On the other hand, in the first special notification lottery in the specialized zone, a weak cherry that does not overlap with the 1BB has a 100% probability of winning, and a weak cherry overlapping 1 that overlaps with the 1BB has a 30% probability. , and the probability of winning is lower for the overlapping role with the 1st BB.

That is, in the additional lottery, the ratio of winning the additional lottery is high for those who overlap with the 1BB, and in the 1st special notification lottery, those who overlap with the 1BB win the 1st special notification lottery. The percentage is set to be lower than the percentage for the additional lottery. In other words, in the event that a stop roll that results in a special prize wins, if an additional lottery is held, it is expected that the person who overlaps with the 1st BB will win the additional lottery. When the additional lottery is not performed and the first special notification lottery is performed, even if it overlaps with the first BB, the winning of the notification lottery cannot be expected as much as the additional lottery.

Here, when the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games and the advantageous interval forced termination process (steps S6105 to S6107) is performed, various counters and various flags related to the display mode and push order notification are initialized. On the other hand, information about the gaming state (for example, RT setting flag and bonus winning flag) is held without being initialized. In other words, if the game for which forced termination processing is to be performed is in a bonus state or is in a carryover state in which the bonus win flag is set, the bonus state or carryover state is retained without being erased. . As already explained, in the bonus state, regardless of the presence or absence of the notification of the pushing order, bonus small and medium combination 1 to bonus small and medium combination 3 are won with a high probability, and an increase in medals can be expected. In other words, if forced termination processing is performed during the bonus state, the game does not return to the attack mode or the like after the bonus is terminated, but it does not affect the medal acquisition expected value during the bonus state.

Then, in the situation where the excess flag is set, if a double role with the 1BB is won, no extra lottery will be performed, but at least the benefits based on the 1BB win can be enjoyed. Therefore, it can be said that the result is more favorable to the player than the case of non-overlapping with the first BB. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the winning combination is the same as the first BB, the probability of winning the first special notification lottery is set low to ensure a balance with the benefits of winning the first BB.

After executing the first special notification lottery in step S6307, it is determined whether or not the first special notification lottery is won in step S6308. If the notification lottery has been won, the process of setting the first special notification execution command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S6309, and if the notification lottery has not been won, step In S6310, processing for setting the first special notification non-execution command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. The first special notification execution command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the first special notification lottery has been held and that the notification lottery has been won, and the first special notification non-execution command is , is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that the first special notification lottery has been held and that the notification lottery has not been won. After the processing of step S6309 or step S6310 is executed, the game number addition lottery processing ends.

Here, in the game number addition lottery process, when each process for the first special notification is performed because the excess flag is set, the subsequent determination process of whether or not the addition winning is performed (steps S6022, S915, Step S1002, etc.) is configured to make an affirmative determination. More specifically, in the process of determining whether or not the additional lottery has been won, affirmative determination is made when the additional lottery is won and when the excess flag is set.

If the excess flag is set, affirmative determination is made in step S6401 of the number-of-addition-games lottery process in FIG. Also in the game number addition processing of FIG. 132, an affirmative determination is made in step S6501, and the game number addition processing is terminated without performing the game number addition processing or the like. That is, when the empty game number FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set, the additional game number lottery process and the game number addition process are not performed substantially.

On the other hand, an add-on command setting process (step S6026, step S919, step S1006, step S1514, step S1518, step S1604) is executed after the add-on game number lottery process and the game number add-on process without performing these substantial processes. Then, regardless of the presence or absence of the excess flag, the process of setting the add-on command is performed. By doing so, even in a situation where the excess flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S1906 of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 45) on the display control device 81 side, and the additional effect setting process is activated. It will happen.

<Additional effect setting processing>
Next, the processing of the display control device 81 when receiving the first special notification execution command or the first special notification non-execution command will be described with reference to FIG. As already explained, the setting process of the additional effect is a process executed in step S1907 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 45).

In step S6601, it is determined whether or not either the first special notification execution command or the first special notification non-execution command has been received. A case in which neither command has been received is a case in which the main controller 101 has received only the add-on command without setting the excess flag. In this case, the process advances to step S6602 to perform processing for grasping the number of added games based on the received added command. The processing of steps S6602 to S6608 is the same as the processing of steps S2101 to S2107.

In this case, for example, if a specific role is won in the attack mode or the like, as shown in FIG. The operation prompts the establishment of such a game result winning. Then, as shown in FIG. 136(b), an additional notification effect corresponding to the number of games to be added this time is generated, and it is possible to grasp that the number of continuous games such as attack mode has been added.

If it is determined in step S6601 that any first special notification command has been received, the process proceeds to step S6609. In step S6609, a first special notification setting process is performed. After performing the first special notification setting process, the setting process of the additional effect is terminated.

In the first special notification setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 135, it is determined in step S6701 whether or not the first special notification command received this time is the first special notification execution command. If the command is not the first special notification execution command but the first special notification non-execution command, the first special notification setting process is terminated as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, the first special notification non-execution command indicates to the display control device 81 that an additional opportunity has occurred and that neither the additional effect nor the first special notification is performed even though the additional opportunity has occurred. It can also be said to be a command for

If it is determined in step S6701 that the command is the first special notification execution command, the flow advances to step S6702 to execute processing for grasping the current set value. When the winning probability setting process is performed in the main process of main controller 101 , a set value command including information on the corresponding set value is output from main controller 101 to display controller 81 . By storing such setting value commands in a predetermined area in the display control device 81, it is possible to grasp the current setting values.

In step S6703, a first special notification type lottery process is executed. The first special notification type lottery process is a process of drawing lots for the type of the first special notification, and either the first special notification A shown in FIG. It is a process of determining by lottery whether to execute the first special notification. In the first special notification A, for example, an image of a soldier who is the main character is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and more specifically, an image of the soldier holding a weapon is displayed. Further, in the first special notification A, an image of a character corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the type of game result of this time is displayed. Then, when the first special notification A is performed, the speaker 64 emits, for example, the line "I will win and survive!" from the loudspeaker 64 as the sound effect. In the first special notification B, the auxiliary display portion 65 displays, for example, an image of the main character roaring with a weapon in one hand. In addition, in the first special notification B, an image of the character corresponding to the winning combination is displayed. Then, when the first special notification B is performed, for example, a man's roar of "Whoa!" is emitted from the speaker 64 as the effect sound. That is, the player can clearly grasp the difference between the first special notification A and the first special notification B by the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effect from the speaker 64 .

The probability of selecting either the first special notification A or the first special notification B differs depending on the set value. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 137(c), if the set value is "1", the first special notification A is selected with a probability of 100% and the first special notification B is not selected. If the set value is "2", the first special notification A is selected with a probability of 75% and the first special notification B is selected with a probability of 25%. If the set value is "3", both the first special notification A and the first special notification B are selected with a probability of 50%. If the set value is "4", the first special notification A is selected with a probability of 25% and the first special notification B is selected with a probability of 75%. If the set value is "5" or "6", the first special notification B is selected with a probability of 100% and the first special notification A is not selected.

That is, in the first special notification type table of the above example, when the first special notification A is performed, there is a high possibility that the set value is low, and when the first special notification B is performed, there is a high possibility that the set value is high. Become. More specifically, when the first special notification B is performed, the set value is determined to be "2" or more, and when the first special notification A is performed, the set value is determined to be "4" or less. is determined.

In this way, it is possible to predict the current set value from the type of the first special notification that can be executed when a special combination is won. Also, if the setting value is "2" to "4", the ratio of the first special notification A and the first special notification B when the first special notification is generated multiple times is "2" to "4". It is also possible to narrow down to which one.

After performing the first special notification type lottery process in step S6703, in step S6704, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process was the first special notification A. If it is the first special notification A, After controlling the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to execute the first special notification A in step S6705, the first special notification setting process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step S6704 that it is not the first special notification A, then in step S6706 the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute the first special notification B, and then the first special notification setting is performed. End the process.

FIG. 138 shows the difference in notification contents when winning a special combination during the completion of the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous section in the example of FIG. 127 .

That is, as shown in FIG. 138(a), when the number of vacant games FG is greater than 0, and a special combination is won while the number of remaining games ZG is being consumed, an additional lottery is executed. Then, when the addition lottery is won, a lottery for the number of games to be added is performed, the corresponding number of games is added, and an addition notification effect for the corresponding number of games is generated.

Here, in a situation where the number of empty games FG is greater than 0, the lottery table for the additional lottery and the lottery table for the number of additional games are configured to use a common table regardless of the value of the number of empty games FG. . In other words, if the number of vacant games FG is greater than 0, for example, if the strong cherry overlap 1 is won as a special combination, the additional lottery will be won with a probability of 100% (FIG. 129). Then, regardless of the value of the number of free games FG, a lottery for the number of games to be added between 10G and 200G (average 30G) is performed, and an addition is generated according to the lottery result (FIG. 131). Therefore, it is possible to add the number of games larger than the number of free games FG. obtain.

By doing so, not only is it possible to simplify the configuration relating to the additional lottery, but also the following effects can be expected. That is, assuming that the upper limit of the advantageous section is defined, as the number of vacant games FG decreases, there is a possibility that interest in the number of additional games will decrease even if the player wins a specific role that triggers an additional lottery. expensive. On the other hand, assuming that useful information for the player can be presented by adding more than the upper limit of the advantageous interval, that is, by reducing the number of empty games FG to 0 or less, the number of empty games It can be said that FG being 0 or less is rather preferable in a situation where the number of free games FG is around 0. Moreover, if the player is given the impression that it is preferable for the player to exceed the upper limit of the advantageous interval as described above, it is more advantageous if the upper limit of the advantageous interval is greatly exceeded than if the upper limit is barely exceeded. It is thought that it is easy to expect that such an event will occur. Therefore, as described above, if the number of vacant games FG is greater than 0, the number of games to be added is determined regardless of its value. It is possible to realize a game property as if there is an effect on the advantage or disadvantage by utilizing the impression that the player can feel without letting the game play.

As shown in FIG. 138(b), in a situation where the number of free games FG is 0 or less, if a special combination is won while the number of remaining games ZG is being consumed, the first special notification can be executed. In this case, since it is possible to narrow down the setting value depending on the type of the first special notification, the winning of the specific role during the execution is made preferable without giving the impression of a so-called loss, which is advantageous. It is possible to motivate the player to continue the game after the end of the section, or to use it as a criterion for deciding whether or not to continue the game.

As shown in FIG. 138(c), if the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less early in the advantageous section due to the occurrence of a large amount of surcharge in a specialized zone, etc., the remaining number of games ZG will take a long time to complete. It can be done over a period of time. In this regard, in the first special notification type table, since the setting value can be narrowed down by the occurrence of the first special notification a plurality of times, the game itself in which the setting value is narrowed down ends early. The occurrence of events that lead to Therefore, as shown in FIG. 138(c), even if it takes a long time to complete the remaining number of games ZG, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the situation where the number of vacant games in the advantageous section FG is 0 or less, when a specific role is won as an additional opportunity, instead of adding the number of games in the advantageous section, the first special notification is executed as a suggestive effect of the set value. It was configured to be able to By doing so, it is possible to compensate for the fact that even if the addition based on the winning of a special role may occur, it may be meaningless, and the game can be considered as a final game in a situation where the number of vacant games FG is 0 or less. It is possible to avoid that the interest of

In particular, when a special role is won in a situation where the number of empty games FG is 0 or less, each time the special role is won in the advantageous section without waiting for the forced end of the advantageous section, the second 1. By making it possible to execute the special notification, it is possible to ensure the significance of the lottery results of each game, which can be a so-called final game, especially the special role, and it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game. Become.

When the number of empty games FG in the advantageous section becomes 0 or less and the specific role as the additional opportunity is won, in the configuration in which the set value suggestion performance is performed, as already explained, the specific role as the additional opportunity is selected. The winning probability of is common regardless of the set value, and the winning probability of the additional lottery and the number of additional games when winning the specific role are also common regardless of the set value. In other words, the winning probability of the specific role that triggers the generation of the suggestive effect of the set value is common regardless of the set value, and the chance of generating the suggestive effect is equally generated regardless of the set value. Therefore, for example, the occurrence probability of the suggestive effect of the set value itself varies depending on the set value, and compared to the configuration in which the occurrence probability is low at low settings, even the suggestive effect cannot be enjoyed due to the low setting. is less likely to occur, and it is possible to equally provide a setting value suggestive effect, that is, a chance to enjoy the first special notification regardless of the setting value.

In this case, the higher the winning probability of the additional lottery is, the higher the probability of occurrence of the suggestive effect of the set value. It is possible to easily predict from the probability of the additional lottery that the suggestive performance is likely to occur, and to prepare the mind for the occurrence of the suggestive performance, so that the degree of attention to the suggestive performance can be preferably increased. Become.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, the mode transition lottery during the advantageous section that occurs when the number of empty games FG is 0 or less will be described. The mode transition lottery in the advantageous section includes an attack mode (super attack mode) transition lottery during the challenge mode, a VB mode transition lottery during the attack mode, a special zone transition lottery during the VB mode, and the like. If the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the game shifts to the attack mode in which the initial number of games is 50 games. It can be said that In addition, if the lottery for transition to the VB mode is won, the game shifts to the VB mode in which the number of initial games is 60 games. can be said to be performed. Then, if you win the transfer lottery to the specialized zone, you will be transferred to the specialized zone with 5 games. It can be said that

That is, even if each mode transition lottery is won, the number ZG of remaining games in the advantageous section is added. It can be meaningless to people. Therefore, in this modified example, special notification can be executed even when the player wins the mode transition lottery.

FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing lottery processing for challenge mode, attack mode, and VB mode in this modification. The challenge mode lottery process is a process performed at step S6014 in the first special combination process (FIG. 124), and the attack mode lottery process is performed at step S6004 in the first special combination process (FIG. 124). The VB mode lottery process is a process executed in step S903 in the second special combination process (FIG. 33). Since these processes generally have the same processing configuration, they will be collectively described below.

That is, in these mode lottery processes, in step S6801, the type of the specific combination is grasped, and in step S6802, the process of acquiring the mode lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. Then, in step S6803, a mode transition lottery is performed.

The mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 141, is set so that the probability of winning each mode transition lottery differs depending on the current display mode and the type of the specific role that triggers the lottery. For example, the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the attack mode during the challenge mode is 90% with strong cherries, and 30% with weak cherries. Strong cherries are better than weak cherries. You have a high chance of winning the transfer lottery. On the other hand, as the probability of winning the lottery to move to the attack mode in the same challenge mode, the probability of winning is 30% in the strong cherry overlap 1, which is the overlapping role with the 1BB, and 40% in the weak cherry overlap 1. Winning with probability, the probability of winning the transfer lottery is higher for the weak cherry overlap 1 than for the strong cherry overlap 1. - 特許庁

The probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode during the attack mode differs depending on the rank of the attack mode. For example, in the lottery to switch to VB mode based on strong cherries, if the attack mode rank is 1, there is a 15% chance of winning, and if the attack mode rank is 4, there is a 60% chance of winning. It is set so that the higher the number, the higher the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode. On the other hand, in the transition lottery to the VB mode, the odds of winning are set so that it is difficult (not won) to win the transition lottery for each specific combination that overlaps with the 1BB. However, the addition lottery is set so that it is easier to win in the case of overlapping than in the case of non-overlapping (Fig. 129), and when a stop roll corresponding to a specific combination appears, it is called the 1st BB plus addition. It is possible to play the game while looking forward to enjoying either the benefit or the benefit of the VB mode.

In various mode lottery processing in FIG. 139, after the mode transition lottery is performed in step S6803, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set in step S6804. If the excess flag is not set, the mode lottery process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the excess flag is set, the flow advances to step S6805.

In step S6805, a process of grasping the type of special combination is executed. Then, in step S6806, the process of acquiring the second special notification lottery table is executed, and in step S6807, the second special notification lottery process is executed.

In the second special notification lottery table, as shown in FIG. 142, in the second special notification lottery performed instead of the attack mode transition lottery during the challenge mode, the execution lottery of the second special notification has a high probability (100% probability). is set to win the As already explained, the challenge mode in which the number of free games FG is 0 or less is the case where the challenge mode continues endlessly without winning the attack mode or the like during the challenge mode. is almost never possible. Therefore, if such a situation occurs, the second special notification is generated with a high probability as compensation for the hard work up to that point, that is, as if to thank the hard work.

On the other hand, in the second special notification lottery performed instead of the VB mode shift lottery during the attack mode, the winning probability of the execution lottery of the second special notification is set to differ depending on the type of the specific combination. As already explained, if a special role is won in the attack mode in which the excess flag is set, the lottery for execution of the first special notification is performed instead of the additional lottery. In other words, if a special win is won in the attack mode in which the excess flag is set, the execution lottery for the first special notification and the execution lottery for the second special notification are carried out. Each mode transition lottery and the additional lottery are processed in such a manner that the mode transition lottery is performed first, and then the additional lottery is performed. be done first. In this modified example, although the detailed explanation with reference to the drawings is omitted, if the execution lottery for the second special notification is won, the execution lottery for the first special notification is not won. In other words, the first special notification and the second special notification are not performed in duplicate in the same game.

In the second special notification lottery executed instead of the lottery for transition from the attack mode to the VB mode, it is set to win the second special notification lottery with the same probability as the winning probability in the first special notification lottery ( Figure 133). In other words, in this modified example, when a specific role is won during the attack mode, the execution lottery for the second special notification is performed, and the execution lottery for the first special notification is performed, and the winning probability is the same in any execution lottery. common. Therefore, it is possible to share the lottery table for both execution lotteries, thereby simplifying the configuration.

In this case, the probability of winning is set so as not to exceed 50% in any special combination, and the probability of winning is 30% or less. Therefore, the event that the player is not won in the execution lottery for the second special notification and the event in which the player is not won in the execution lottery for the first special notification occurs in about half (49%) of the times when the special combination is won. By suppressing the occurrence probability of the special notification in this way, it is possible to secure the rarity of the special notification in a configuration in which both special notifications can be performed, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention when the special notification occurs. becomes.

After the second special notification lottery is executed in step S6807 in various mode lottery processing, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery is won in step S6808. If the notification lottery is won, the process of setting the second special notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S6809, and then the mode lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6808 that the notification lottery has not been won, this mode lottery processing ends. Processing of the display control device 81 when the second special notification command is received will be described later.

Next, the special zone lottery during the VB mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 shows part of the winning result handling process.

As already explained, the VB mode is basically executed in the 3rd RT state, and lottery processing for each game is performed with reference to the 3rd RT state lottery table (FIG. 25). Then, it shifts to the specialized zone based on the 7th regame win, which is won with a probability of 5% when winning the BAR replay 1 (IV=11). In other words, if winning BAR replay 1 is used as a trigger for the lottery to move to the specialized zone, the probability of winning the lottery to move to the specialized zone triggered by BAR replay 1 is 5%, and other game results ( Other special roles) will not win the specialized zone transfer lottery (Fig. 142).

In the winning result handling process, if a negative determination is made in step S1310, it is determined in step S6901 whether or not the seventh replay winning has been established. If the 7th regame win is established, it is determined in step S6902 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current seventh regame winning has occurred during the VB mode. If it is the seventh replay win in the VB mode, it is determined that the conditions for shifting to the specialized zone are satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S6903. If a negative determination is made in step S6901 or step S6902, it is assumed that the condition for shifting to the specialized zone is not established, and the winning result handling process is terminated.

In step S6903, processing for setting a specialized zone flag is executed, in step S6904 processing for setting a specialized zone start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and in step S6905, processing for continuing the specialized zone is executed. Start counting numbers. The processing of steps S6903 to S6905 is the same as the processing of steps S1318 to S1320.

In subsequent step S6906, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, the winning result handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the excess flag is set, the process advances to step S6907. In step S6907, a process of acquiring the second special notification lottery table is executed, and in subsequent step S6908, the second special notification lottery is executed.

In the second special notification lottery executed instead of the transition lottery to the specialized zone in the VB mode, as shown in FIG. The winning probability is determined so that the second special notification is executed. In addition, in the second special notification lottery executed instead of the special zone, the winning probability is determined so that the second special notification is not executed in other game results (other specific combinations). That is, the conditions for executing the second special notification are set to be equivalent to the conditions for transitioning to the specialized zone.

After executing the second special notification lottery in step S6908, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery is won in step S6909. If the notification lottery is won, the second special notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S6910, and then the winning result handling process is terminated. Also, if it is determined that the notification lottery has not been won, the winning result handling process is terminated.

The second special notification setting process of the display control device 81 when the second special notification command is received will be described with reference to FIG. 143 . The second special notification setting process is executed as one of the other processes (step S1711) of the effect setting process (FIG. 43) in the display control device 81. FIG.

First, in step S7001, it is determined whether or not the second special notification command has been received. If not, the second special notification setting process is terminated. If so, the process advances to step S7002 to perform processing for adding 1 to the second special notification counter TH. The second special notification counter TH is a counter for grasping the number of times the second special notification has been made. In the subsequent step S7003, a process of grasping the setting value is performed. After executing the process of acquiring the second special notification type table in step S7004, the second special notification type lottery process is executed in step S7005.

In the second special notification type table, the type of the second special notification is set differently depending on the value of the second special notification counter TH and the set value. Specifically, as the second special notification, a second special notification A shown in FIG. 144(a) and a second special notification B shown in FIG. 144(b) are provided. For the second special notification A, for example, the character of the snake hub is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the speaker 64 emits the sound of the snake sticking out its tongue, "shah!", as its sound effect. . For the second special notification B, for example, a mongoose character is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the mongoose cry is emitted from the speaker 64 as a sound effect. That is, the player can clearly grasp the difference between the second special notification A and the second special notification B by the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effect from the speaker 64 .

As shown in FIG. 144(c), the second special notification type table is set such that the selected second special notification differs between set values 1, 3 and 5 and set values 2, 4 and 6. there is Specifically, when the second special notification counter TH is 1, the second special notification A is selected at 60% and the second special notification B is selected at 40% with the set values 1, 3, and 5. On the other hand, even if the second special notification counter TH is 1, with the set values 2, 4 and 6, the second separate notification A is selected at 40% and the second special notification B is selected at 60%. If the second special notification counter TH is 2 to 5, the second special notification A is selected at 80% and the second special notification B is selected at 20% with the set values 1, 3, and 5. On the other hand, even if the second special notification counter TH is 2 to 5, the second separate notification A is selected at 20% and the second special notification B is selected at 80% with the set values 2, 4, and 6. When the second special notification counter TH is 6 or more, the second special notification A is selected at 100% with the set values 1, 3, and 5, and the second special notification B is not selected. On the other hand, when the second special notification counter TH is 6 or more, the second separate notification B is selected at 100% with the set values 2, 4, and 6, and the second special notification A cannot be selected.

That is, for the second special notification, the set value can be narrowed down to an even number or an odd number depending on the type of the second special notification. The more even/odd the number, the easier it is to narrow down.

As already explained, in a configuration in which the execution lottery for the second special notification and the execution lottery for the first special notification can be performed in duplicate, if the lottery for the execution of the second special notification is won, the first special notification It is configured not to win the execution lottery. That is, the second special notification is easier to execute than the first special notification.

While the second special notification is a setting value suggestion capable of narrowing down the set value to an even/odd number, the first special notification is a setting value suggestion capable of narrowing down the set value. While the second special notification is a setting value suggestion that can be narrowed down by multiple executions, the first special notification is a setting value suggestion that may be narrowed down by one execution. , is due to the difference. That is, due to the difference as described above, the second special notification makes it possible to gradually narrow down the setting values, and it is possible to enjoy the game in which the setting values are narrowed down for a long time. With a configuration in which the second special notification is preferentially executed, it is possible to suitably realize a game in which the narrowing down is performed.

After executing the second special notification type lottery process in step S7005, the process advances to step S7006 to determine whether or not the result of the type lottery process is the second special notification A. If it is the second special notification A, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the second special notification A is performed in step S7007, and then the second special notification setting process is terminated. If it is not the second special notification A, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the second special notification B is performed in step S7008, and then the second special notification setting process is terminated.

As described above, even if it is not an increase in the number of games, even with regard to the mode transition lottery, if the mode transition as a result of the lottery does not affect the number of continuous games in the advantageous section. If a configuration is adopted in which the second special notification is performed as a setting value suggestion, it is possible to compensate for the mode shift lottery being performed in a situation where the excess flag is set.

When the mode transition lottery is performed, the second special notification is executed together with the mode transition lottery instead of performing the second special notification instead of the mode transition lottery. In some situations, a transition to VB mode can occur, and a transition to a specialized zone can occur. In particular, the special zone is a zone in which it is easy to win an additional lottery, and in a situation where the excess flag is set, it can also be said that the first special notification is likely to be executed. In other words, especially with regard to the specialized zone, instead of suggesting the first set value instead of the transition lottery, setting value suggestion is performed along with the transition lottery, thereby allowing the transition to the zone where setting value suggestion is easy. At the same time, it is possible to suggest a set value as a compensation for adding the number of games (adding 5 games) accompanying the transition to the specialized zone.

By setting the second special notification as a set value suggestion that makes it easier to narrow down the set value depending on the number of times it is executed, it becomes easier to narrow down the set value when the excess flag is set early. . By doing so, it is possible to provide enjoyment when the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less relatively early.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, a value corresponding to the number of additional games is stored in a predetermined area based on an additional opportunity generated in a situation where the excess flag is set. First, changes in the game number addition lottery process and the game number addition lottery process will be described with reference to FIG.

In the game number addition lottery process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 145(a), the process of grasping the type of the specific combination is executed in step S7101, the addition lottery table is acquired in step S7102, and the addition lottery table is acquired in step S7103. After the addition lottery is executed at , the game number addition lottery process is terminated. That is, in this modified example, regardless of the presence or absence of the excess flag, the additional lottery is executed.

In addition, in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 145(b), a process of grasping the type of the specific combination is executed in step S7111, and an number-of-additions-games lottery table is acquired in step S7112. Then, the number-of-games lottery is executed in step S7113, and then the number-of-addition-games lottery process ends. That is, in this modification, the lottery for the number of games to be added is also executed regardless of the presence or absence of the excess flag.

The number-of-games addition process in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is set, the number of games to be added is added in steps S7202 and S7203, and then the number of games to be added is terminated. These steps S7202 and S7203 are the same processes as steps S6502 and S6503.

If it is determined in step S7201 that the excess flag is set, the process proceeds to step S7204. In step S7204, a process of grasping the processing result of the number-of-additional-games lottery process, that is, a process of grasping the number of additional games is performed. Then, in step S7205, a process of adding the number of added games ascertained in step S7204 to the number of eliminated games EG provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. After executing the process of step S7205, this game number addition process ends.

That is, in the present modification, even if the number of vacant games FG in the advantageous section is 0 or less and the excess flag is set, even if an additional opportunity is generated, it is decided whether or not to execute the additional. A lottery for the number of games to be played in the case of executing the addition or addition is performed. Then, the result of the number-of-games lottery is not added to the number of continuations corresponding to the advantageous section, but is added to the number of eliminated games EG separately provided.

Next, the setting processing of the add-on command in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. The processing for setting the additional command includes step S6026 of the first special combination process (FIG. 124), step S919 of the second special combination process (FIG. 33), step S1006 of the third special combination process (FIG. 34), end determination processing ( 41) and step S1604 of the specialized zone processing (FIG. 42).

In step S7301, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, in step S7302 processing is performed to set the target addition command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the processing for setting the addition command ends. In this case, the display control device 81 performs an additional notification effect.

If it is determined in step S7301 that the excess flag is set, the process advances to step S7303 to execute processing for grasping the number of eliminated games EG. Then, in step S7304, processing for acquiring the third special notification lottery table is executed, and in step S7305, the third special notification lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 148(a), the third special notification lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the third special notification lottery differs depending on the value of the number of lost games EG. It is set so that the larger the number, the easier it is to win. More specifically, when the number of lost games EG is 0, that is, when the additional lottery for the number of games added this time is not won, the third special notification lottery is not won. When the number of eliminated games EG is 1 to 50, that is, when the number of games from 1 to 50 is selected as the number of games to be added this time, the player wins the third special notification lottery with a probability of 10%. When the number of eliminated games EG is 51 to 100 and the number of games 51 to 100 is selected as the number of games to be added this time, the player wins the third special notification lottery with a probability of 30%. When the number of eliminated games EG is 101 to 200 and the number of games 101 to 200 is selected as the number of games to be added this time, the player wins the third special notification lottery with a probability of 50%. When the number of eliminated games EG is 201 or more and the number of games of 201 or more is selected as the number of games to be added this time, the player wins the third special notification lottery with a probability of 80%. That is, it is set so that the third special notification lottery is more likely to be won in the case where a large number of games should have been added.

After the third special notification lottery is executed in step S7305, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery is won in step S7306. When winning, the third special notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S7307. If a negative determination is made in step S7306 or after the processing of step S7307 is executed, processing of clearing the number of lost games EG to the initial value (0) is performed in step S7308, and then the addition command setting processing ends. do.

The display control device 81 performs processing for executing the third special notification based on the reception of the third special notification command. Since the processing configuration of this processing is generally the same as the first special notification setting processing and the second special notification setting processing, the figure is omitted. , the third special notification type lottery is performed, and then the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute the third special notification of the corresponding type.

As the type of the third special notification, for example, the third special notification A, the third special notification B, the third special notification C, the third special notification D, the third special notification E, and the third special notification F are set. At least one of the display content of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effect of the speaker 64 is set to be different from each other, so that the player can grasp which type of third special notification is.

In the third special notification type table, as shown in FIG. 148(b), different types of third special notification are set depending on the set values. For example, if the set value is 1, the third special announcement A is selected with a probability of 100%, and the other third special announcements B to F are not selected. If the set value is 2, the third special notification B is selected with a probability of 60%, the third special notification C is selected with a probability of 40%, and the other third special notifications are not selected. If the set value is 3, the third special notification A is selected with a probability of 55%, the third special notification C is selected with a probability of 45%, and the other third special notifications are not selected. If the set value is 4, the third special notification B is selected with a probability of 50%, the third special notification C is selected with a probability of 45%, the third special notification D is selected with a probability of 5%, Other third special notifications are not selected. If the set value is 5, the third special notification A is selected with a probability of 45%, the third special notification C is selected with a probability of 45%, the third special notification D is selected with a probability of 8%, The third special notification E is selected with a probability of 2%, and the other third special notifications are not selected. If the set value is 6, the third special notification B is selected with a probability of 40%, the third special notification C is selected with a probability of 45%, the third special notification D is selected with a probability of 11%, The third special notification E is selected with a probability of 1%, the third special notification F is selected with a probability of 3%, and the third special notification A is not selected.

That is, when the third special notification A is selected, it is determined that the set value is one of 1, 3, and 5, and when the third special notification B is selected, the set value is set to 2, 4, and 6. is determined to be either Further, when the third special notification C is selected, it is determined that the set value is 2 or more, and when the third special notification D is selected, it is determined that the set value is 4 or more. It is determined that the set value is 5 or more for the 3rd special notification E, and that the set value is 6 for the 3rd special notification F. Therefore, it is possible to narrow down the set values by combining the types of the third special notification.

As described above, the number of games that should have been added is temporarily stored in the lost game number EG, and then the execution lottery for the third special notification is performed according to the value of the lost game number EG. , it is possible to adjust the benefits (number of games) that the player should have obtained, and the profit and loss, depending on the ease with which the third special notification is executed.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the third special notification lottery is performed based on the set value together with the value of the number of eliminated games EG in the second modified example. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the setting processing of the add-on command in this modified example.

In this modification, if it is determined in step S7401 that the excess flag is set, the number of lost games EG is grasped in step S7403, and then the set value is grasped in step S7404. After executing the process of acquiring the third special notification lottery table in step S7405, the third special notification lottery is executed in step S7406.

As shown in FIG. 150, the third special notification lottery table in this modification uses the value of the number of lost games EG and the set value as parameters, and is set so that the winning probabilities of the third special notification lottery are different. there is For example, if the number of lost games EG is 50 or less, if the setting value is 1, the probability of winning is 1/256, and if the setting value is 6, the probability of winning is 6/256. Even the number of lost games EG is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the third special notification lottery. Also, even with the same set value, the larger the value of the number of lost games EG is, the higher the probability of winning the third special notification lottery is, as in the second modification.

In the process of setting the add-on command, the processes in steps S7402 and S7407 to S7409 are the same as the processes in steps S7302 and S7306 to S7308 described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, by using not only the value of the number of lost games EG but also the set value as a parameter for the third special notification lottery itself, the branch of prediction of the set value when various third special notifications are performed increases. , the game of predicting the set value from the third special notification can be enriched.

More specifically, when any third special notification is made, it means that the third special notification lottery is won regardless of the set value. If the 3rd special announcement is not made despite winning the special role under the following circumstances, the case where the additional lottery was not won, or the number of games that were added even if the additional lottery was won In addition to the case where there was little That is, regardless of the third special notification, the fact that the third special notification is performed itself can be weighted in predicting that the set value is high. Then, on the premise that the player desires a high setting value, even if the type of the third special notification suggests a low setting that is not preferable for the player, the third special notification Based on the fact that it is being done, it may be determined that the setting is high instead of low, and the determination becomes dull, and the enjoyment of the game of predicting the set value increases.

<Modification 4>
In the above modifications 2 and 3, the third special notification is performed each time a special combination is won (when an extra win occurs). . FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the second section display process in this modified example.

In step S7501, it is determined whether or not the section indicator is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, the section display second processing is terminated. If it is being displayed, in step S7502, the number of games AG in the advantageous interval is added, and in step S7503, remaining game management processing is executed. Then, in step S7504, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has reached the upper limit (1500). When the upper limit has been reached, in step S7505, a process of grasping the total number of eliminated games TEG provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The total number of eliminated games TEG corresponds to the number of eliminated games EG in Modification 3, and is a counter to which a value corresponding to the number of games corresponding to the extra winning is added.

That is, although detailed description with reference to the drawings is omitted, in this modification, in the processing (step S7205) for adding the number of games to be added to the number of games to be eliminated EG in the number of games addition processing (FIG. 146), the number of elimination games EG Instead, a process of adding the number of additional games to the total number of eliminated games TEG is performed. In addition, in this modification, when it is determined that the excess flag is set in the process of setting the additional command (step S7301, step S7401), the output setting of the target additional command is simply not performed. Each process (steps S7303 to S7308, steps S7403 to S7409) relating to the third special notification is not performed.

After grasping the total number of eliminated games TEG in step S7505, the third special notification lottery table is acquired in step S7506, and the third special notification lottery is conducted in step S7507. In the third special notification lottery table, for example, the parameter referred to in the table of FIG. 148(a) is replaced with the total number of eliminated games TEG from the number of eliminated games EG. That is, the greater the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG, the easier it is to win the third special notification lottery.

After executing the third special notification lottery in step S7507, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery is won in step S7508. Perform output setting processing. If it is determined in step S7508 that the game has not been won, or if the process of step S7509 has been executed, then in step S7510 a process of clearing the total lost game number TEG to the initial value (0) is performed.

Each processing for termination in steps S7511 to S7513 is the same as the processing in steps S6105 to S6107. In addition, in this modification, even when the positive determination is made in both steps S7514 and S7515 and the advantageous interval ends before the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval is reached, the process proceeds to steps S7511 to S7513. It is configured. In other words, the data initialization process (step S7513) is performed even when the advantageous interval ends before the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval is reached. By doing so, it is possible to further clarify the distinction between the advantageous section and the normal section.

When the third special notification is executed when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated as described above, for example, the third special notification may be executed as an end effect of the attack mode. It may also be configured to execute the third special notification before or after, that is, separately from the end effect.

By doing so, even if the number of single-shot additional games is small, the third special notification is likely to be executed if the additional opportunity occurs multiple times. Therefore, for example, even if the winning of a specific role with a small average number of additional games such as low cherry, it is possible to give the meaning of winning, and the game performance after the number of vacant games FG becomes 0 or less. can be improved.

Moreover, the longer the number of games after the number of empty games FG becomes 0 or less, the more likely the number of additional opportunities to occur. Therefore, even if the empty game number FG becomes 0 or less in the number of games early after shifting to the advantageous section, it is possible to fully enjoy the game after the empty game number FG becomes 0 or less. can.

In the above configuration, the third special notification lottery table is basically configured to use the numerical value of the table using the number of lost games EG, but it is possible to separately provide a table with the total number of lost games TEG as a parameter. good too. Since the total eliminated game number TEG corresponds to the integrated value of the number of added games after the empty game number FG becomes 0 or less, it can be said that the total eliminated game number TEG tends to be larger than the eliminated game number EG. For example, if the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG exceeds the upper limit of the number of games to be added at one time (300 games in the above example) and does not exceed it, the probability of winning the third special notification lottery is different. , the significance of being an integrated value of multiple additions can be further ensured.

Further, the third special notification may be performed based on the total number of eliminated games TEG when the advantageous section is forcibly ended, and the third special notification may be performed based on the number of eliminated games EG when an additional opportunity occurs during the advantageous section. good. In this case, the third special notification based on the total number of eliminated games TEG and the third special notification based on the number of eliminated games EG may be different effects, different lottery tables, or different kind tables.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, in the configuration of presenting information that may be beneficial to the player by suggesting a set value as compensation for setting the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, the gaming situation on the day when the upper limit number of games is reached is taken into account. to present the above potentially useful information. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing the second section display process in this modified example.

In step S7601, it is determined whether or not the section indicator is being displayed, and if not being displayed, the second section display processing is terminated. If it is being displayed, processing for adding the number of games AG in the advantageous section is performed in step S7602, and processing for managing the number of remaining games is performed in step S7603. Then, in step S7604, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has reached the upper limit (1500).

When the upper limit value is reached, in step S7605, processing for grasping the setting value is executed. Then, in step S7606, by confirming the total number of games TG provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, a process of grasping the total number of games on the day is executed. The total number of games TG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games played on the day (total number of games). Such a counter is cleared to the initial value (0) when, for example, the winning probability setting process is performed, that is, the RAM clearing process is performed, and the number-of-games management process (FIG. 40) is started once. Every time, regardless of the number of bets, the game state, etc., it is incremented by 1 by an incrementing process (not shown).

At subsequent step S7607, the fourth special notification lottery table is obtained, and at step S7608, the fourth special notification lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 153, the fourth special notification lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the fourth special notification differs depending on the value of the total number of games TG and the set value. Specifically, it is set so that the larger the value of the total number of games TG is, the easier it is to win the fourth special notification lottery, and the higher the set value is, the easier it is to win the fourth special notification lottery. For example, when the value of the total number of games TG is 2000 or less, if the set value is 1, the winning probability is 1/256, and if the setting value is 6, the winning probability is 6/256. . Also, when the value of the total number of games TG is between 4001 and 6000, if the set value is 1, the winning probability is 4/256, and if the setting value is 6, the winning probability is 256/256. do.

After the fourth special notification lottery is executed in step S7608, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery is won in step S7609. If the notification lottery is won, a process of setting the fourth special notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S7610. If it is determined that the notification lottery is not won in step S7609, or after executing the processing of step S7610, the processing for the end of the advantageous section is performed in steps S7611 to S7613, and then the section display second processing exit. If a negative determination is made in step S7604, it is determined whether or not the termination condition is met in steps S7614 and S7615, and if the advantageous section is terminated, processing of steps S7611 to S7613 is performed. The processing of steps S7611 to S7615 is the same as the processing of steps S7510 to S7514.

Next, the setting processing of the attack mode ending effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the attack mode end effect setting process is a process executed in step S2306 in the all stop time effect setting process (FIG. 51), and is executed based on the reception of the attack mode end command. It should be noted that, based on the initialization processing of step S7614, etc. being performed, the attack mode end command is output in the number-of-games management processing, and as already explained, the attack mode end effect is performed. .

In step S7701, the total number of medals to be paid out during the advantageous section is grasped. The total number of payouts can be grasped by referring to the total number of payout counters in the various counter areas 183b. The total payout number counter is a counter that is added according to the number of medals paid out as a game result during the advantageous period and is initialized when the advantageous period ends. It is also possible to use a counter that performs subtraction processing according to the number of bets based on the number of bets placed at the start of each game, and to grasp the number of coins corresponding to the number of wins obtained by subtracting the number of inputs from the number of payouts.

In the subsequent step S7702, a process of grasping the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is performed. Then, in step S7703, it is determined whether or not the fourth special notification command has been received. If it has not been received, in step S7704 processing for setting the normal end effect is performed, and then the setting processing for the attack mode end effect is terminated. As the normal ending effect, as shown in FIGS. 155(a) and 57(b), the end of the attack mode, the number of continuous games and the total number of payouts are displayed.

If it is determined in step S7703 that the fourth special notification command has been received, then in step S7705 processing for acquiring the fourth special notification type table is executed, and in step S7706 fourth special notification type lottery processing is executed. do. Although a detailed description of the fourth special notification type table is omitted, for example, like the second special notification type table in FIG. good. As the fourth special notification, for example, a fourth special notification A illustrated in FIG. 155(b) and a fourth special notification B illustrated in FIG. 155(c) are provided. The fourth special notification A and the fourth special notification B are, for example, in the display contents of the first special notification A and the first special notification B, the number of continuous games and the total number of payouts are displayed instead of the characters corresponding to winning. may be

After executing the fourth special notification type lottery process in step S7706, it is determined whether or not it was the fourth special notification A in step S7707, and if it is the fourth special notification A, the fourth special The auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute the notification A. If it is the fourth special notification B, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute the fourth special notification B in step S7709. After executing the process of step S7708 or step S7709, the setting process of the attack mode end effect is terminated.

By doing so, when the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games and the game is forcibly terminated, it is possible to suggest a set value according to the game situation on the day.

Here, if the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the player who thinks that the player should have continued the game more is likely to end the game as it is because the forced termination reduces the motivation for the game. is also conceivable. In that respect, as shown in the present embodiment, if the setting value is suggested when the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less and forced termination occurs, for example, it is possible to predict that the setting value is high. As described above, even in situations where the motivation to play may be lost, it is possible to support the decision to continue playing the game. In particular, when the forced termination occurs, it is assumed that a large amount of medals have been obtained, and even if the player who sees such a large amount of medals guesses the setting value, he/she tends to overestimate the high setting side. It is considered that it is easy to make an inference based on In other words, it can be said that it is possible to stir up the desire to continue the game by providing an opportunity for estimating the set value in conjunction with the forced termination, rather than simply performing the forced termination.

On the other hand, for example, in the case where a forced termination occurs shortly after the opening of the game hall, if a suggestive effect that suggests a high setting or that the high setting is confirmed for the game machine occurs, the game machine will be closed. Although this encourages the player to continue playing the game, there is a possibility that others who see the suggestive effect sideways will predict that the set value of the other game machine is low in relation to the game machine in question. In other words, it can be said that it is not preferable for the game hall as a whole if a suggestive effect suggesting a high setting occurs in the stage or situation immediately after the opening of the game hall. Conversely, it is considered preferable as a business strategy for the game hall to generate a suggestive effect suggesting a high setting as much as possible, such as just before the end of business hours of the game hall.

Therefore, in suggesting the setting value based on the forced termination, by adopting a configuration in which the setting value is suggested in consideration of the game situation on the day, there is a disadvantage of suggesting the setting value (high It is possible to suppress as much as possible a decrease in the operation rate of other gaming machines due to the suggestion of setting, a decrease in the operation rate of the relevant gaming machine due to suggestion of low setting, etc.).

In particular, in this modified example, since the total number of games TG is used to take into account the game situation of the day, a conventional configuration is used as the configuration of the gaming machine, and the information is reflected in the suggestion of the setting value. can do. In addition, the total number of games TG is not only managed by the gaming machine, but can also be grasped by the player through a data display or the like installed in the gaming hall, and can be obtained from the data display or the like. After weighting the information, it is also possible to play a game of predicting the set value from the suggestion of the set value, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game of predicting the set value.

Furthermore, the total number of games TG is configured to be cleared to the initial value based on the processing for setting the winning probability, and is not cleared to the initial value simply by turning ON/OFF the power of the gaming machine. and Therefore, when the game hall is opened or closed, the set value is not changed or updated, and if the winning probability setting process is not performed, the previous day's total number of games TG is taken over. In this way, when predicting the setting value, it is possible to perform the prediction in addition to whether or not the setting value has been changed, so that the enjoyment of the prediction game is further enhanced.

<Modification 6>
The fourth special notification lottery table may be changed as follows.

FIG. 156(a) shows a fourth special notification lottery table in which not only the total number of games TG at the forced end but also the time at the forced end are parameters. Specifically, not only when the total number of games TG is 2000 or less, but also when the time is before 13:00, if the set value is 1, the probability of winning is 1/256. If the number is 6, the probability of winning is 6/256. In addition, not only when the total number of games TG is 4001 or more and 6000 or less, but also when the time is before 19:00, if the set value is 1, the winning probability is 4/256, and the set value is 6. If so, you will win with a probability of 256/256.

By doing so, even if the forced termination condition is met with a small total number of games, such as when the operation of the gaming machine starts after noon or in the evening instead of when the store opens first thing in the morning. Even if there is, if the time at which the condition for forced termination is met is late, the fourth special notification is likely to be executed as the set value suggestion. Therefore, it is possible to suggest a set value that is more suitable for the business style and operating conditions in the hall.

It should be noted that, in referring to the fourth special notification lottery table, the forced termination time may be determined from a predetermined built-in clock or the like provided in the gaming machine.

<Modification 7>
FIG. 156(b) shows a fourth special notification lottery table in which the lower the setting, the more likely the fourth special notification as a set value suggestion is executed when the forced termination condition is met in a small number of games or at an early time. . That is, when the total number of games TG is 2000 or less or when the time is before 13:00, if the set value is 1, the winning probability is 128/256, and if the set value is 6, the winning time is 256 minutes. Win with a probability of 4. On the other hand, if the total number of games TG is 2001 or more and 4000 or less, or if the time is before 16:00, if the set value is 1, the probability of winning is 2/256. If you win, you have a 12/256 chance of winning.

By doing as described above, if forced termination occurs relatively early, it tends to be judged that the high setting is likely to be used. can be done. That is, as described above, even if a low set value suggestion occurs in a situation where it is likely to be determined that the set value is high based on the number of games played and the number of medals won, the impression is that the setting is already high. As a player, it is considered that the game is likely to be continued without accepting the set value suggestion without question. Therefore, by generating a setting value suggestion of a low setting in such a situation, it is made difficult to cause an event in which only the probability of occurrence of the setting value suggestion of a low setting becomes low among the occurrence probabilities of the total setting value suggestion. be able to.

<Modification 8>
In this modification, the fourth special notification lottery type table is changed according to the total number of games when the condition for forced termination is satisfied. Specifically, when acquiring the fourth special notification type table in step S7705, the total number of games is grasped by grasping the counter corresponding to the total number of games TG on the main controller 101 side, and the total number of games is grasped. The fourth special notification type table to be acquired is made different depending on whether the number is 2000 games or less and when the number is 2001 games or more.

FIG. 157(a) shows the fourth special notification type table acquired when the total number of games is 2000 games or less, and FIG. It shows the acquired fourth special notification type table. In addition, in this modification, the fourth special notification A, the fourth special notification B, the fourth special notification C, the fourth special notification D, the fourth special notification E, and the fourth special notification F are set as the fourth special notification. Effect contents are set so that they can be identified from each other. The fourth special notification A to fourth special notification F correspond to the third special notification A to third special notification F in FIG. 148(b). That is, the fourth special notification A suggests odd number setting, and the fourth special notification B suggests even number setting. The fourth special notification C suggests a set value of 2 or more, the fourth special notification D suggests a set value of 4 or more, the fourth special notification E suggests a set value of 5 or more, and the fourth special notification F suggests a set value of 6. It is.

The type table of FIG. 157(a) is set so that the fourth special notification A to fourth special notification C are likely to be selected, and the fourth special notification D to fourth special notification F are not selected. That is, when the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is satisfied in a situation where the total number of games is small, even/odd set value suggestions are likely to be selected.

On the other hand, the type table in FIG. 157(b) is set so that not only the fourth special notification A and the fourth special notification B, but also the fourth special notification C to the fourth special notification F can be selected. That is, unless the total number of games is small, it is easier to narrow down the set values than in the case where the total number of games is small based on the fact that the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is met.

By doing so, by advancing the game (increasing the total number of games played), it becomes easier to gradually narrow down the setting values, and while advancing the game and aiming to obtain medals, it is possible to guess the setting values. It can provide fun to do.

In particular, by configuring the type table to differ according to the game situation, for example, it is possible to realize completely different suggestive effects according to the game situation, such as having different kind tables for the morning and afternoon. It is possible to keep the game from becoming boring throughout the day and to motivate the player to continue playing the game.

<Modification 9>
In this modification, when the advantageous interval is forcibly ended, the special interval is set in the normal interval after the advantageous interval ends by using the total number of eliminated games TEG. First, the section display second processing in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG.

The processing of steps S7801 to S7807 is the same as the processing of steps S6101 to S6107, and based on the fact that the conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section are satisfied, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator and the initialization of the data. process.

The data initialization processing in step S7807 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160. FIG.

As already explained, the data initialization process executed when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated is the process of initializing various counters, various flags, and the like related to game characteristics that change the degree of advantage according to the pressing order notification. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 159, the RAM 106 of the main controller 101 includes a winning flag storage area 106a, a stop information storage area 106b, a state information storage area 106c, various flag storage areas 106d, various counter areas 106e, and so on. is provided. Each of these areas 106a to 106e includes an area for storing various types of information (advantageous information, specific information) used in advantageous sections, and an area for storing various types of information (normal information) also used in normal sections. are provided separately. More specifically, an area for storing various information used in the advantageous section and an area for storing various information used also in the normal section are provided separately as areas that do not overlap with each other.

Specifically, in the winning flag storage area 106a, a winning flag storing area 201 corresponding to an advantageous section and a winning flag storing area 202 corresponding to a normal section are provided. The stop information storage area 106b is provided with a stop information storage area 203 corresponding to an advantageous section and a stop information storage area 204 corresponding to a normal section. The state information storage area 106c is provided with a state information storage area 205 corresponding to an advantageous section and a state information storage area 206 corresponding to a normal section. The various flags storage area 106d is provided with a various flags storage area 207 for advantageous sections and a various flags storage area 208 for normal sections. Various counter areas 209 for advantageous sections and various counter areas 210 for normal sections are provided in the various counter areas 106e.

Among these, an area for storing flags for grasping various display modes, such as a challenge mode flag and an attack mode flag, and a flag for grasping that additional conditions have been met, such as a challenge mode addition flag and an attack mode addition flag. and an area for storing the excess flag are provided in the various flag storage area 207 corresponding to the advantageous section. On the other hand, an area for storing a bet number flag for grasping the number of bets for each game, an area for storing a freeze effect flag for grasping that the condition for generating a freeze effect is satisfied, and a payout process are performed. An area for storing an in-payout flag for grasping that it is in the process of being paid is provided in the various flag storage area 208 corresponding to the normal section.

In addition, an area for storing the number of predictive games G1, an area for storing the number of continued challenge mode G2, an area for storing the number of continued attack mode G3, an area for storing the number of advantageous section games AG, and an area for storing the number of empty games FG. etc. are provided in various counter areas 209 corresponding to advantageous sections. On the other hand, an area for storing the total number of games TG, an area for storing a BB game number counter for counting the number of games between bonuses, an area for storing a payout medal counter for counting the number of medals paid out, etc. , are provided in various counter areas 210 corresponding to normal sections.

In the data initialization process in this modified example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 160, in step S7901, the process of initializing the winning flag storage area 201 corresponding to the advantageous section is performed. In the following step S7902, processing for initializing the stop information storage area 203 corresponding to the advantageous section is performed. In the subsequent step S7903, processing for initializing the advantageous section corresponding state information storage area 205 is performed. In the subsequent step S7904, processing for initializing the various flag storage area 207 corresponding to the advantageous section is performed. In the subsequent step S7905, processing for initializing the various counter areas 209 for advantageous sections is performed. Then, in step S7906, processing for initializing information and parameters relating to other advantageous sections is performed, and then this data initialization processing ends.

That is, in the data initialization processing executed based on the satisfaction of the conditions for ending the advantageous section, the various areas 201, 203, 205, 207, and 209 related to the advantageous section are initialized. No initialization processing is performed for the various areas 202, 204, 206, 208, and 210 that are used without distinguishing between the normal section and the advantageous section. Then, as described above, various areas related to these advantageous sections and various areas not related to advantageous sections or used without distinction between normal sections and advantageous sections are provided as separate areas so as not to overlap. Therefore, when the initialization process as described above is performed, an error occurs in which an area that should be initialized is not initialized, or an area that should not be initialized is initialized. is suitably suppressed.

Returning to the description of the second section display process, after the data initialization process is performed in step S7807, the special section setting process is performed in step S7808, and then the second section display process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S7804, it is determined in steps S7809 and S7810 whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. After performing the processing of , the section display second processing is terminated. If the termination condition is not satisfied, the second section display processing is terminated without performing the processing of steps S7805 to S7808. The processing in steps S7809 and S7810 is the same as the processing in steps S6108 and S6109.

The special section setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S8001, a process of grasping the total number of eliminated games TEG is performed. Here, the total number of eliminated games TEG is stored in the normal section counter area 210 of the RAM 106, as shown in FIG. Therefore, even if the data initialization process is performed, the total number of eliminated games TEG is not initialized. In other words, when the game number addition processing is performed in a situation where the number of empty games FG is 0 or less, the addition number is added to the counter of various continuation numbers in the various counter areas 209 corresponding to the advantageous section, such as the attack mode continuation number G3. Instead, a value corresponding to the total number of eliminated games TEG in the various counter areas 210 corresponding to normal sections is added.

In other words, in this modified example, when an additional opportunity arises, the number of additional games as information used during the advantageous interval is stored in various areas for the advantageous interval. As information that is also used during the normal section, there is a case where the total lost game number TEG is stored in various areas for the normal section. The process of determining whether the flag is set can also be said to be the process of selecting which area to perform the storage process. As described above, in this modified example, it is possible to change the area for storing the information on the event that occurred during the advantageous section depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag. By doing so, it is possible to take over the information of the event that occurred during the advantageous section to the normal section, on the premise that the initialization process is performed at the end of the advantageous section.

In subsequent step S8002, a process of acquiring a special section table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. Here, the special section is provided as a section in which the setting value suggestive effect is likely to occur in the normal section after the end of the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 162(a), the special section table is set such that the number of games in the special section differs according to the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG. Specifically, if the total number of eliminated games TEG is 0, no special section is set. 100, a special section of 30 games is selected. For example, the larger the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG is, the longer the special section is selected.

After specifying the number of games in the special section in the processes of steps S8001 and S8002, in step S8003, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the specified number of games to the number of games in the special section PG is performed. Then, in step S8004, it is determined whether or not the input number of special section games PG is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, processing for setting a special section flag is performed in step S8005, and the process proceeds to step S8006. , the special section command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The special section game number PG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the special section, and the special section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is a special section. Also, the special section command is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that it is a special section.

If it is determined in step S8003 that the number of games in the special section PG is 0, or if the process of step S8006 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S8007. In step S8007, a process of clearing the total lost game number TEG to the initial value (0) is performed. After that, the special section setting process ends. That is, when the total number of eliminated games TEG is 0 at the end of the advantageous section, the special section flag is not set and the special section is not set.

In the special section in this modified example, a pressing order notification effect is generated when a predetermined special replay is won. As shown in the above second embodiment and the like, special replays differ in the types of replay results that are won depending on the stop order, but the benefits that are given even if any of the replay results win This is a replay, and the result is that no transition to the game state such as the RT state occurs.

FIG. 163 shows a lottery table for normal game state in this modified example. In this modification, special replay 1 and special replay 2 can be won as special replays in the normal game state. The special replay 1 and the special replay 2 are as described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96, and the special replay 1 is a duplicate combination of the first replay, the ninth replay, and the eleventh to fifteenth replays. , the special replay 2 is a double combination of the first replay and the tenth to fifteenth replays. And the replay that wins differs depending on the stop order, and the corresponding replay wins for each stop result of the right down replay, the black BAR tenpai lost, the black BAR double tenpai lost, the black BAR single aligned, and the black BAR double aligned. To establish. The sum of the odds of winning the special replay 1, the special replay 2, and the normal replay is set to be the same as the winning probability of the normal replay in the normal game state lottery table in each of the above embodiments.

Processing during the special section will be described below.

FIG. 164(a) is a flowchart showing the number-of-games management process in this modified example.

In this modification, if it is determined in step S1401 that the number of bets is 3, it is determined in step S8101 whether or not the specific section flag has been set. If it is set, it is determined in step S8102 whether the game state is the normal game state or the first RT state. In the case of the normal game state or the first RT state, in step S8103, a process of subtracting 1 from the special section game number PG is performed. After that, in step S8104, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the special section PG has become 0, and if it has become 0, processing for clearing the specific section flag is performed in step S8105. If a negative determination is made in step S8101, step S8102, or step S8104, or if the process of step S8105 has been executed, the process advances to step S1402.

FIG. 164(b) is a flow chart showing the pushing process in this modified example.

In this modification, if a negative determination is made in step S4419, the process proceeds to step S8111. In step S8111, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game is the special replay 1 or special replay 2 win. If either the special replay 1 or the special replay 2 is won, the process advances to step S8112 to determine whether or not the specific section flag is set. If the specific section flag is set, then in step S8113 the pushing order notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the actual pushing order process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S8111 or step S8112, the pushing order process is terminated without setting the output of the pushing order notification command.

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing special replay notification processing in this modification. The special replay notification process corresponds to the special RT notification process in the second embodiment and the like. In other words, this is a process executed in step S4515 when it is determined in step S4514 of the pressing order notification process (FIG. 98) that the special replay win has been made.

In step S8201, processing for grasping the setting value is executed. In the subsequent step S8202, a process of acquiring a lottery table for notifying the pressing order when winning a special replay from the various table storage area 182a is executed. As shown in FIG. 162(b), the pressing order notification lottery table at the time of special replay winning is set so that the rate of occurrence of the pressing order notification effect differs depending on the setting value, and the winning mode when the pressing order notification effect occurs differs. It is

Specifically, it is set so that the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of occurrence of the pressing order notification effect is. It is set so that the ratio of selecting the pressing order notification effect of the matching winning mode is high. For example, if the set value is 1, the pressing order notification effect is generated with a probability of 25%, and the pressing order notification effect is selected in which the black BAR double tense is lost in any of the winning modes at the time of occurrence. Also, if the set value is 2, the push order notification effect will occur with a probability of 25% as in the case where the set value is 1, but part of it will select the push order notification effect with black BAR singles. be done. The pressing order notification effect in which black BARs are single is equivalent to a suggestive effect suggesting a set value of 2 or more. When the set value is 4 or more, when the pressing order notification effect is generated, the pressing order notification effect in which the black bars are double aligned is also selected. It corresponds to the suggestive production to suggest.

In step S8203, a push order notification lottery is executed based on the push order notification lottery table acquired in step S8202. In such a lottery process, a lottery is made as to whether or not to generate the push order notification, and the type of the push order notification effect (corresponding prize mode) when it is generated. Then, based on the result of the lottery, in step S8204, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the corresponding pressing order notification effect is performed.

As described above, depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag, the number of games drawn by lottery based on the additional trigger is stored as the number of added games, and the total number of eliminated games TEG is stored in a different storage area. The number of games is subject to the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section, and the total number of lost games TEG is not subject to the initialization process. As a result, as a configuration to perform initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section, it is necessary to clearly indicate the advantageous section by means of a section indicator etc. It is possible to take over the event information after the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to fill the gap between the advantageous section and the normal section, which may be caused by forcibly ending the advantageous section, and enhance the interlocking effect between the two sections.

Then, based on the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG, a special section is set after the end of the advantageous section, in which the setting value suggestive effect is likely to occur. As a result, the set value can be estimated after an event unfavorable to the player occurs, such as the occurrence of an additional opportunity in the situation where the excess flag is set in the advantageous section, It can be used as compensation for the above-mentioned unfavorable events.

In particular, even if an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, the number of games will eventually be forcibly terminated at the maximum number of games. , it is thought that the game will end as it is at the time of forced termination. On the other hand, since it is possible to set a long special section so that the additional opportunity is generated, the game should be ended after the special section is consumed at least, rather than immediately ending the game at the time of forced termination. It is possible to encourage Then, when a setting value suggestion that is favorable to the player occurs during the special section, there is a high possibility that the player will continue playing the game, which can lead to an improvement in the operation rate.

In this modification, since the setting values are suggested based on the special replay stop roll (stopping order), it gives the impression that the player has made the preferred setting values appear by his/her own operation. It is easy to do so, and the degree of attention to the effect of suggesting the set value is favorably increased.

In the special replay, the stop numbers differ depending on the stop order, but if the player does not want to generate suggestions for set values, it is preferable to operate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in a stop order different from the reported stop order. . By doing so, it is possible to avoid suggesting setting values against the intention of the player. That is, for example, a player who has already grasped that the setting is high may not consider it preferable for the surrounding players to know that his or her gaming machine is set at the high setting. Therefore, by doing so, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to generate the set value suggestion, thereby making it possible for the player to have the effect as he or she desires.

<Modification 10>
In this modified example, instead of or in addition to the configuration for generating the pushing order notification effect during the special section, the precursor game number table is changed during the special section. FIG. 166(a) shows a bonus precursor game number table in the normal mode in a situation not in the special section, and FIG. 166(b) shows a bonus precursor game number table in the normal mode during the special section. ing.

FIG. 166(a) is as described with reference to FIG. 35, and the number of precursor games is set so that one of 1 to 32 games is selected. The number of premonitory games that are likely to be selected is set differently depending on the content of the bonus and the advantageous section in which the winning is duplicated. Specifically, it is easier to select the number of omen games that are longer in overlapping winning with attack mode than in overlapping winning with challenge mode, and it is more likely to be selected in overlapping winning with super attack mode than overlapping winning with attack mode. A long predictive game number is likely to be selected.

As shown in FIG. 166(b), during the special section, the number of precursor games is set to be selected from 0 to 4 games, which is shorter than in the case of FIG. 166(a). It is likely to be the number of omen games. In addition, during the special section, the greater the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG that triggered the establishment of the special section, the easier it is for a short predictive game number to be selected. It is set so that the number of games can be easily selected.

More specifically, in the case of double winning with the challenge mode, if the total number of eliminated games TEG that triggered the setting of the special section this time is 1 to 50, the number of premonitory games of 4 games will be selected, while the total number of eliminated games will be selected. If the TEG is 201 or more, the number of precursor games of 0 games is selected. In addition, in overlapping winning with the attack mode, if the total number of eliminated games TEG that triggered the setting of the special section this time is 1 to 50, the number of predictive games of 2 games or 4 games is selected, while the total number of eliminated games is selected. If the number TEG is 201 or more, the precursor game number of 0 games is selected.

In this case, for example, as a special section flag, the special section flag 1 is set according to the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG when the total number of eliminated games TEG is 1 to 50, and the total number of eliminated games TEG is 51 to 100. If so, the special section flag 2 is set, if the total number of eliminated games TEG is 101 to 200, the special section flag 3 is set, and if the total number of eliminated games TEG is 201 or more, the special section flag 4 is set, and so on. However, it is preferable to make it possible to determine the total number of eliminated games TEG at the time of setting the special section after the fact.

As described above, the superiority of the special section can be ensured not only by the suggestion of the set value, but also by the number of premonitory games of the bonus. In particular, when a bonus such as the 1st BB is won, the player's loss is less if the bonus prize is established quickly because the bonus prize is not duplicated. From this point of view, by arranging that the number of precursor games is likely to be shortened during the special section as described above, it is possible to make up for the addition that has become invalid during the advantageous section.

<Modification 11>
In this modified example, the special notification is executed based on the fact that the number of empty games FG becomes 0 or less. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the number-of-games addition process in this modification.

In step S8301, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is set, the game number addition process is terminated. If the excess flag is not set and the number of empty games FG is still 0 or more, the process proceeds to step S8302 and subsequent addition processing. In step S8302, a process for grasping the number of games to be added this time is executed. Then, in step S8303, by grasping the number of empty games FG, it is determined whether the number of games to be added this time is equal to or greater than the number of empty games FG, that is, whether the number of empty games FG becomes 0 or less due to the number of games to be added this time. determine whether or not If it is not equal to or less than 0, in step S8304, the number of games to be added is added to the number of continuous games to be played, and then the game number addition process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the empty game number FG becomes 0 or less due to the current addition, in step S8305, the additional game number is added to the target continuous game number. After setting the 1 special notification execution command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the game number addition processing is terminated.

In this case, when the addition occurs, the addition command may be output, or the addition command and the first special notification execution command may be output. When the add-on command and the command for executing the first special notification are received, for example, as shown in FIGS. 168(a) and 168(b), the number of add-on game A character may be displayed, and the fact that the addition has occurred and the set value suggestion may be grasped at the same time.

Regarding the addition that triggers the setting of the excess flag, at least the excess of the upper limit number of games cannot be sufficiently benefited, but according to this modification, such a loss , setting value suggestions, which can be beneficial to the player. Also, for example, when the number of empty games FG becomes 0 or less when the number of free games is added to the upper limit of the number of games, there is no expectation for the occurrence of special effects in the subsequent games (situation where the number of games is small). However, it is possible to suitably generate the special notification.

Moreover, by making it possible to simultaneously grasp the information that an addition has occurred (the character corresponding to the number of games to be added) and the information suggesting the set value (the first special notification A and the first special notification B) as described above. , the setting value suggestion information can be presented with close relevance to a phenomenon favorable to the player, such as an addition, and the impression that the setting value suggestion information is beneficial to the player can be strengthened. becomes possible. That is, for example, it is believed that luck is involved in the outcome of the game, and for a player who takes lightly the level of the set value, even if the information suggesting the set value is presented, it cannot be useful information at all. be done. In that respect, as described above, by presenting the setting value suggestion information in association with the additional effect of the strong element of luck, it is possible to understand that the luck factor is strongly reflected in the setting value suggestion, It is possible to give the impression that the setting value suggestion is useful.

It should be noted that the setting value suggestion information and the information that the addition has occurred do not have to be presented completely at the same time. is presented together with the information that the addition has occurred.

<Modification 12>
The values of the number of eliminated games EG and the total number of eliminated games TEG may be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the third special notification setting process in this modified example. The third special notification setting process is a process that is executed in place of or in addition to the first special notification setting process, and is a process that is executed as one process of the additional effect setting process.

As already explained, the third special notification is a special notification that is executed based on the number of eliminated games EG and the total number of eliminated games TEG. 147, information on the number of eliminated games EG is set for the third special notification command, and then output to the display control device 81. FIG. Therefore, by receiving the third special notification command, the display control device 81 can grasp the number of additional games of the additional effect that should have occurred this time. It should be noted that information on the total number of eliminated games TEG may be set in the third special notification command.

In step S8401, a process of grasping information corresponding to the number of eliminated games EG is performed based on the received third special notification command. Then, in step S8402, the number of additional games that should have occurred this time is grasped. In step S8403, an additional effect is generated with the corresponding number of additional games. In this case, the same effect as the normal extra effect (for example, FIG. 136 (b)) may be used, or the background may be changed, for example, to indicate that it is different from the normal extra effect. It may be configured so that the player can comprehend it. Then, in step S8404, the special game number display section TGH is updated, and then the third special notification setting process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 170(a), the special game number display section TGH displays the number of normal games remaining in the advantageous section (attack mode, etc.) in consideration of the upper limit of 1500 games on the auxiliary display section 65. GH is set in a different area. More specifically, the special game number display section TGH is provided in an area adjacent to the normal game number display section GH. Therefore, when trying to see the normal game number display section GH, the special game number display section TGH is naturally easy to see, and the special game number display section TGH is provided in an area that is difficult for the player to overlook. Both of the display portions GH and TGH are set in areas that do not overlap with the pressing order notification effect.

In addition, the counter for displaying the number of games in the special game number display section TGH is set to differ in color, size, shape, etc. from the counter for displaying the number of games in the normal game number display section GH. This makes it easy to give the impression that the contents of the counters in the sections GT and TGH are different. Moreover, the counter for displaying the number of games in the special game number display section TGH is displayed larger than that in the normal game number display section GH, and the counter of the special game number display section TGH is more conspicuous. Rather, it is easy to give the player an impression that the content is meaningful.

Here, the normal game number display section GH is updated in accordance with the progress of the game during the advantageous section. That is, each time one game is played, the counter of the number-of-normal-games display section GH is updated by subtracting one from the counter. On the other hand, the counter of the number-of-special-games display section TGH is updated based on the occurrence of an additional opportunity, and is not decremented when completing the game. In particular, when the number-of-special-games display section TGH is updated, as shown in FIG. be done. Therefore, when compared with the counter of the normal game number display section GH being decremented, the counter of the special game number display section TGH is a counter that increases as the advantageous section approaches the end. It is easy to associate with the fact that some kind of beneficial event will occur, and it can be expected to have the effect of alleviating the sense of loss caused by the forced termination of the advantageous section.

In this modification as well, there is a configuration in which a set value is suggested according to the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG when the advantageous section is forcibly ended (a configuration in which the set value is suggested as an effect at the end, or by setting a special section). configuration for suggesting values). In other words, actually, the larger the value of the special game number display section TGH, the easier it is for the player to be presented with useful information, making it possible to provide a game effect that matches the player's expectations.

As described above, in the configuration in which the upper limit number of games is provided in the advantageous section, if the number of games exceeding the upper limit number of games occurs, the additional number of games exceeding the upper limit number of games will normally be meaningless for the player. Therefore, it is thought that they do not want to grasp the fact that the addition has occurred and the number of games that have been added. Based on that premise, the normal idea is to hide the fact that an extra game has occurred in such a situation and the number of extra games as much as possible so as not to be noticed by the player, that is, not to inform them. be.

On the other hand, as described above, in the present embodiment, the fact that such an addition has occurred and the number of games to be added are made meaningful, and the value displayed by the special game number display section TGH suggests the set value. It is possible to play a game while anticipating what will be played. In this way, by deliberately displaying the number of games that would normally not be displayed, it is possible to favorably implement a game in which setting values are suggested based on the number of games.

Moreover, since it is intentionally displayed in this way, even if the setting value is not suggested, the player can predict that the display has some meaning. It is considered that the game is played while In other words, since it is intentionally displayed, it is possible to expect an effect that the player himself/herself can predict the significance and benefit of the displayed information, and enjoy the prediction itself.

The above special number-of-games display section TGH may be configured to be displayed even at the end of the advantageous section, such as the end effect of the attack mode. By doing so, the player can calculate the total number of continuous games and the total number of earned medals from the special game number display section TGH when the advantageous section is not forcibly terminated. It is also possible to make it a fodder for reminiscing with a friend, such as "I was able to win a medal".

<Modification 13>
In this modified example, notification is made using the relationship between the actual number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG and the number of remaining games on the display. FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the actual number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG and the number of remaining games on display.

In this modification, as a predetermined additional effect, a post-add effect is set in which part or all of the number of games to be added is notified in a game after the game in which the additional opportunity is generated. That is, a part of the number of games remaining in the advantageous interval ZG is notified first as the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval, and the number of remaining games in the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous interval is notified later. Assuming that the number of games to be notified first is a display remaining number counter HG, and the number of games to be notified later is a post-addition counter BG, the number of advantageous section remaining games ZG is post-addition to the display remaining number counter HG. equal to the total value with the counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by 1 each time the game is played, and the post-addition counter BG is not decremented unless the post-addition effect occurs even if the game is completed. Note that the display remaining number counter HG and the trailing counter BG are both counters managed in the various counter areas 183b of the display control device 81, but they may be counters managed by the main control device 101. FIG.

For example, when the number of remaining games on the display reaches a predetermined number (1 in this modification) while the attack mode is being completed, that is, when the display remaining number counter HG reaches the predetermined number (1). When it becomes, a post-loading effect will occur. In the add-on effect, for example, similarly to the add-on effect, it is notified that the number of games (150 in the figure) corresponding to the add-on counter BG (150) has been added. As a result, the post-addition counter BG is decremented by the notification amount (becomes 0 in the figure), and the remaining number counter for display HG is updated by adding the notification amount by the post-addition effect, and the display is also the remaining number for display. The value corresponds to the counter HG (150 after completing one game in the figure).

The processing for performing the additional effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173. FIG. FIG. 172 shows the additional effect setting process in this modified example, and FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the additional effect setting process. The post-adding effect setting process is carried out by other processes in the effect setting process (FIG. 43) in the display control device 81. FIG.

In addition effect setting processing, if it is determined in step S8501 that the first special notification command has not been received, processing for grasping the number of additional games is performed in step S8502. Then, in step S8503, a subsequent lottery process is executed. The post-addition lottery process is a lottery process for determining whether the number of games to be added this time is to be announced in the current game or in a later game, that is, whether or not to be post-addition. For example, it is set so that the ratio of the post-addition is different depending on the type of special combination.

In the subsequent step S8504, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery is won. If no win has been made, that is, if it is determined that the current number of additional games is to be announced in the game, the process advances to step S8505 to perform processing for adding the current number of additional games to the display remaining number counter HG. After that, in steps S8506 to S8511, lottery for execution timing of the additional notification effect and setting of the additional notification effect are performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of games to be added this time is to be notified in a later game, then in step S8512, a process of setting an add-on flag to the various flag storage area 183a is performed. If the post-loading flag has already been set in step S8512, that state is maintained. Then, in step S8513, after a process of adding the number of games to be added this time to the add-on counter BG, the setting process of the add-on effect is finished.

When the first special notification command is received in step S8501, the first special notification setting process is performed in step S8514. The first special notification setting process in this modification will be described later.

In the post-adding effect setting process, in step S8601, it is determined whether or not the display remaining number counter HG is 1 as a predetermined value. As described above, the display remaining counter HG is decremented by 1 by subtraction processing (not shown) each time one game is played during the advantageous interval, and the display on the auxiliary display section 65 is updated in correspondence with the subtraction processing. be done. If the display remaining number counter HG is 1, it is determined in step S8602 whether or not the post-loading flag is set. If the display remaining number counter HG is not 1 or if the post-addition flag is not set, the post-addition effect setting process is terminated.

If the display remaining number counter HG is 1 and the post-loading flag is set, then in step S8603, a process for grasping the value of the post-loading counter BG is executed. Then, in step S8604, the number of games for the post-addition effect of this time is determined by lottery. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether the entire post-addition counter BG is to be notified as the post-addition effect, or a part of the post-addition counter BG is to be reported as the post-addition effect. In such a lottery, whether all or part of the lottery is to be selected depends on the magnitude of the value of the post-loading counter BG. In addition, in this modified example, in any case, the configuration is such that all of them are notified as a post-adding effect.

In the subsequent step S8605, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the number of games to be notified is added to the effect. In the subsequent step S8606, processing is performed to add the notified value of the post-addition counter BG to the display remaining number counter HG. Then, in step S8607, the value added to the notification and display remaining number counter HG is subtracted from the post-loading counter BG. In step S8609, processing for clearing the post-loading flag is performed. If the post-addition counter BG is not 0 in step S8608 or after performing the process of step S8609, the post-addition effect setting process is terminated.

In the configuration for performing the add-on effect as described above, for example, when a large amount of add-on is added to the add-on counter BG, the number of vacant games FG becomes 0 or less and the excess flag is set. Even so, there may occur a specific event in which it is not possible to grasp that the number of remaining games has reached the upper limit from the number of remaining games displayed. In this modified example, the specific event is used to eliminate the feeling of loss when winning a special combination.

The first special notification setting process in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S8701, it is determined whether or not the trailing flag is set. If the trailing flag is not set, the process for the first special notification is performed in steps S8702 to S8707. The processing of steps S8702 to S8707 is the same as the processing of steps S6701 to S6706.

If the post-loading flag is set, the flow advances to step S8708 to perform processing for grasping the post-loading counter BG. Then, in step S8709, the number of games to be played in the case of pseudo-addition is determined by lottery. In this case, the upper limit of the number of pseudo-additional games is determined by the post-addition counter BG.

Specifically, for example, the display control device 81 also stores a lottery table similar to the number-of-additional-games lottery table in the normal state (in the case where an extra game is actually generated) in FIG. 131 . Then, based on the lottery table and the game result of this time, a pseudo-additional number of games is selected by lottery. If the number of games selected by the lottery is equal to or less than the add-on counter BG, the number of games is determined as the number of games for the current pseudo add-on. On the other hand, if the number of games selected by the lottery is larger than the post-addition counter BG, the value of the post-addition counter BG is determined as the current pseudo-additional game number. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a pseudo-addition exceeding the post-addition counter BG while making it appear as if the addition is actually performed in relation to the specific role that triggered the addition. .

In the following step S8710, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to perform an additional effect with the number of pseudo-additional games determined in step S8709. In this case, if the effect is the same as the extra effect that normally occurs, it is possible to strongly give the impression that the extra effect has occurred with the current game result as a trigger.

In the subsequent step S8711, processing is performed to add the notification amount to the display remaining number counter HG, and in step S8712, processing is performed to subtract the notification amount from the post-addition counter BG. Then, in step S8713, it is determined whether or not the post-loading counter BG has become 0, and if it has become 0, the post-loading flag is cleared in step S8714. When it is determined in step S8713 that the post-loading counter BG is not 0, or after executing the process of step S8714, the first special notification setting process is terminated.

As described above, by using the unreported number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG (corresponding to the add-on counter BG), even when the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less, a pseudo add-on effect is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the feeling of loss when an extra opportunity occurs in a situation where the number of empty games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set.

In particular, the pseudo-addition of the unannounced amount is configured to be performed within the range of the post-addition counter BG, and the configuration is performed after the actual addition lottery and the number of games to be added lottery. It is possible to strengthen the impression that it is not a thing, but an actual addition based on the winning of a specific role, and it is possible to make the player feel pure joy at the fact that the pseudo addition is performed.

<Modification 14>
In this modified example, setting values are suggested using the pseudo-addition in the 13th modified example. FIG. 175 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-additional game number lottery process in this modification. The number-of-pseudo-additional-games lottery process is a process executed in step S8709.

In step S8801, processing for grasping setting values is performed. In subsequent step S8802, setting value suggestion lottery processing is performed. The setting value suggestion lottery process is a process of determining by lottery whether or not to perform the setting value suggestion at the time of this pseudo-addition. Specifically, a table of the number of pseudo-additional games for setting value suggestion is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery is made to determine whether or not the pseudo-additional game is to be performed based on the number of games including the content of the setting value suggestion.

As shown in FIG. 176(a), the set value suggestion pseudo add-on game number table is set so that the number of pseudo add-on games to be selected varies depending on the set value. For example, the pseudo add-on effect of the same number of games as the post-add counter BG as the number of games of the pseudo add-on can be selected at all set values, but is set to be more likely to be selected as the setting is higher. In addition, the pseudo-addition effect of the number of games added, for example, 10 as the first number to the add-on counter BG is selected at setting 1 to setting 3, and is set so that the lower the setting, the more likely it is to be selected. A second number added to the post-add counter BG, for example, 56, is set to be selected in setting 5 and setting 6 for the pseudo-add-on effect of the number of games added. The pseudo-addition effect of the number of games added, for example, 77 as the third number to the add-on counter BG is set to be selected only in the setting 6. - 特許庁

After the lottery process for setting value suggestion is performed in step S8802, it is determined in step S8803 whether or not a pseudo-addition effect for each number of games including content of setting value suggestion has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S8804, the number of games corresponding to the details of the winning is set as the current number of pseudo-additional games.

As shown in FIG. 176(a), in the pseudo-additional game number table for setting value suggestion, no setting suggestions are selected in which the number of games including these setting value suggestions is not selected regardless of the setting value. is set to obtain In the case where the setting suggestion disapproval is selected, the number of games of the pseudo-additional effect is determined by lottery according to the following processing.

That is, if the result of the lottery process in step S8802 is that the setting value is not suggested, a negative determination is made in step S8803, and in this case the process proceeds to step S8805. In step S8805, normal pseudo-additional game number lottery processing is performed. The pseudo add-on game number lottery process for normal use is the same as that described in Modification 13 above. A pseudo number of additional games is selected by lottery.

In the following step S8806, it is determined whether or not the number of games selected in step S8805 is equal to or less than the add-on counter BG. If it exceeds the post-addition counter BG, in step S8807, the value of the post-addition counter BG is set as the current number of pseudo-additional games, and then the pseudo-additional game number lottery processing is terminated. If the number of games selected in step S8805 is equal to or less than the add-on counter BG, then in step S8808 the selected number of games is set as the current number of pseudo-add-on games. End the process.

In this case, for example, when the number of games notified in the additional effect (pseudo-additional effect) is added to the total number of games and the number of remaining games, the upper limit value is 1500, the number of pseudo-additional games for suggesting the setting value. There is a possibility that the same number of games as the post-loading counter BG was selected by lottery. As described above, the number of games equal to the post-loading counter BG is more likely to be selected as the setting is higher, so it is possible to predict that the setting will be high. However, the addition effect of the same number of games as the post-addition counter BG may also occur when the number of games equal to or greater than the post-addition counter BG is selected in the normal pseudo-additional game number lottery process. In this case, it is not only necessary to generate an additional performance of the same number of games as the post-addition counter BG, but also the difficulty of predicting the set value is increased, which adds interest to the game.

For example, in the number-of-additional-games table based on the strong cherry winning in the attack mode, the maximum number of games to be selected is set as 200 games (FIG. 131). Therefore, for example, if an additional effect of 250 games is generated as the number of games exceeds 200 when the strong cherry is won, there is a high possibility that it is a pseudo-additional effect, and if the number of games is the same as the additional counter BG ( If the total number of games and the number of remaining games are added to the upper limit value), the result is that the expectation level, which is a high setting, increases.

On the other hand, even if the same 250-game additional effect occurs, if it is triggered by winning a weak cherry, the number of games will be within the range selected for the weak cherry (Fig. 131). Even if the number is the same as BG, it cannot be denied that the number of games equal to or greater than the add-on counter BG was selected in the normal pseudo add-on game number lottery process.

Also, in the above example, even if an additional effect exceeding 200 games is generated when a strong cherry is won, if it is the number of games (260) obtained by adding the first number (10) to the additional counter BG, the low setting is made. more likely to be. On the other hand, if it is an additional effect triggered by winning a weak cherry, it cannot be asserted that the setting is low.

Here, as described above, when the number of empty games on the display ascertained from the total number of games and the number of remaining games on the display is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of additional games played at one time, the post-addition counter BG is used. When the same number of games is added to the effect, it is clearly grasped that it includes the contents of setting value suggestion. On the other hand, if the number of vacant games on the display is less than the upper limit of the number of games to be added at one time, and the addition effect of the number of games equal to the number of games to be added to the second addition counter BG is generated, it is assumed that the setting value suggestion is included. cannot be determined. In other words, when the number of vacant games on the display is large, an additional effect including the contents of setting value suggestion is more likely to occur, and even if the excess flag is set early, the setting value will be increased accordingly. It is possible to bring about the merit that it becomes possible to enjoy the suggestion. In addition, when the number of empty games on the display becomes less than the upper limit of the number of additional games at one time, the player who desires an additional effect including the content of setting value suggestion may not be able to add an extra game based on a specific combination with a small upper limit number of games (for example, At most 50 games Chance A and Chance B-based top-ups). In other words, the player will want to add more games with a feeling that is completely opposite to the usual feeling of expecting an increase in the number of games, and it will be possible to realize novel gameplay that has not existed in the past.

Also, for example, if the added effect that has occurred is the number of games obtained by adding the second number (56) or the third number (77) to the post-addition counter BG, a high setting is expected as described above. It is possible. However, such content also differs from the suggested content from the number of games that appear depending on the progress of the game, such as the number of remaining games on the display.

For example, in FIG. 176(b1), in a situation where the total number of games is 1045, the number of remaining games on the display is 102, and the add-on counter BG is 353, the number of add-on games that appear and the suggested content of the set value are displayed. showing relationships. In this case, if the number of games to be added is 353 games, a high setting is suggested, and if the number of games to be added is 363 games, a low setting is suggested. Also, if the number of games to be added is 409 games, setting 5 or setting 6 is suggested, and if the number of games to be added is 430 games, setting 6 is decided.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 176(b2), even if the total number of games is 1045, the remaining number of games on the display is 56, and the add-on counter BG is 399, the add-on game number is 409. If it's a game, it suggests low settings. In other words, in the case of FIG. 176(b1), the number of games suggesting a setting of 5 or 6 will suggest a low setting in the situation of FIG. , the suggested content is completely different.

Also, as shown in FIG. 176(b3), even if the total number of games is 1045, the remaining number of games on the display is 35, and the add-on counter BG is 420, the additional game number is 430. If it's a game, it suggests low settings. In other words, in the case of FIG. 176(b1) above, the number of games for which setting 6 is fixed suggests a low setting in the situation of FIG. will be completely different.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the specialized zone is different from the above embodiments. In each of the above embodiments, there is a pattern of shifting to the specialized zone based on the occurrence of the seventh replay win during the VB mode, and a pattern of shifting to the specialized zone based on winning a lottery for shifting to the super attack mode. Patterns have been described, but in the present embodiment, patterns that shift based on winning of a specific combination during the attack mode or VB mode will be described.

FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing the second special combination processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the second special combination process is a process that is executed when a special combination is won, and is a process that is executed mainly when the display mode is the attack mode.

In the second special combination process in the present embodiment, the process when the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is not won is different. That is, the processing of step S10001 to step S10020 is the same as the processing of step S901 to step S920. A promotion lottery and a lottery to increase the number of games in attack mode are implemented, and if you win each of these lotteries, there is a process to give the corresponding benefits (shift to VB mode, rank promotion, increase the number of games). done.

In this embodiment, if it is determined in step S10015 that the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode performed in step S10014 immediately before was not won, the process proceeds to step S10021. In step S10021, a lottery for transition to a specialized zone is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when a special role is won during the attack mode, if a lottery for transition to the VB mode or a lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode is not won, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is performed. done. In the special zone lottery process, a special zone transfer lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the special zone is performed by a lottery counter or the like. conduct.

As shown in FIG. 179, the special zone transfer lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the transfer lottery differs depending on the type of specific combination.

Here, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a specific combination in the lottery process (FIG. 16) is different from those in the above-described embodiments. The winning probabilities of watermelon (IV=15) and weak watermelon (IV=16) are different. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a strong cherry is won with a probability of about 1/600, and a weak cherry is won with a probability of about 1/200. Also, a strong watermelon is won with a probability of about 1/300, and a weak watermelon is won with a probability of about 1/60. That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a strong cherry or a weak cherry (also collectively referred to as "cherry") is about 1/150 in total, and a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon (these Collectively, the probability of winning a watermelon is about 1/50 in total, and the watermelon is overwhelmingly easier to win than the cherry. These cherries and watermelons are set so that there is no difference in winning probability regardless of the set value. For example, the cherry winning probability of setting 1 and the cherry winning probability of setting 6 are common, The winning probability and the setting 5 watermelon winning probability are common. Winning probabilities of other special combinations are the same as those of the above embodiments. Also, the probabilities of the game results other than the specific combination (normal replay, push order replay, push order bell, 1st BB, 2nd BB, CB, lost, etc.) are the same as in the above embodiments.

In the special zone transfer lottery table, for example, a special zone transfer lottery based on strong cherries wins with a probability of 5%, and a special zone transfer lottery based on weak cherries wins with a probability of 0.5%. On the other hand, in the special zone transfer lottery based on the strong watermelon, the player wins with a probability of 15%, and in the special zone transfer lottery based on the weak watermelon, the player wins with a probability of 5%. That is, watermelon is set to have a higher winning probability as a game result than cherry, and also has a higher winning probability in the special zone transfer lottery.

These winning probabilities for each specific role in the special zone transfer lottery are set as common winning probabilities regardless of the set values, and are set so as not to differ depending on the set values.

In step S10022, based on the processing result of step S10021, it is determined whether or not the lottery for moving to the specialized zone has been won. If not won, the second special combination processing is terminated as it is. When winning, in step S10023, a process of setting a special zone winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. Then, in step S10024, a process for obtaining a precursor game number table is performed, in step S10025, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed, in step S10026, a process for setting the number of precursor games is performed, and in step S10027, a precursor command is performed. is set, the second special combination process is terminated. The processes of steps S10024 to S10027 are similar to the processes of steps S906 to S909, for example, and are processes for setting the portent mode.

Next, the third special combination processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As already explained, the third special combination process is a process that is executed when a special combination is won, and is a process that is executed mainly when the display mode is the VB mode.

In the third special combination process according to the present embodiment, similar to the changes in the second special combination process, the process in the case where the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is not won is different. That is, the processes of steps S10101 to S10107 are the same as those of steps S1001 to S1007, and a lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode based on the winning of a specific role is carried out. Addition processing and the like are performed.

In the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S10102 that the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode performed in step S10101 immediately before was not won, the process proceeds to step S10108. In step S10108, a lottery for transition to a specialized zone is executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if a special win is won in the VB mode and the player does not win the attack mode additional game number lottery, the lottery for transition to the specialized zone is performed. The special zone lottery process is the same as the process of step S10021, and is performed based on the table for the special zone transfer lottery.

As for the special zone transfer lottery table in the VB mode, similarly to the special zone transfer lottery table in the attack mode, as shown in FIG. is set to For example, a special zone transfer lottery based on strong cherries wins with a probability of 10%, and a special zone transfer lottery based on weak cherries wins with a probability of 1%. On the other hand, the special zone transfer lottery based on strong watermelon wins with a probability of 30%, and the special zone transfer lottery based on weak watermelon wins with a probability of 10%. That is, even in the VB mode, the probability of winning the specialized zone transfer lottery is set to be higher for the watermelon than for the cherry. In addition, the winning probability of special zone shift lottery including other special combinations is set to be higher in VB mode than in attack mode.

The winning probability for each specific role in the specialized zone transfer lottery during the VB mode is also set as a common winning probability regardless of the setting value, similarly to the winning probability during the attack mode, and does not differ depending on the setting value. is set to

In step S10109, based on the processing result of step S10108, it is determined whether or not the transfer lottery has been won. The processes of steps S10109 to S10114 are generally the same as the processes of steps S10022 to S10027, and are processes for setting the portent mode when the lottery for moving to the specialized zone is won. However, in step S10113, the number of games obtained by adding the number of remaining games in the VB mode to the number of precursor games determined by the lottery process for the number of precursor games is set as the current number of precursor games. In other words, the premonitory effect suggesting winning in the special zone is performed during the VB mode, but the transition to the special zone is made after the VB mode ends. It should be noted that the number of remaining games in the VB mode may be set as the number of precursor games, and in this case, it is possible to omit the lottery process for the number of precursor games.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery for transition to the specialized zone is performed based on the non-winning of the special combination based on the special combination in the attack mode or VB mode. With such a structure, the profit that can be obtained when winning a specific role in attack mode or VB mode is not limited to the direct addition of the number of games, and the expectation is higher. be done. In addition, it is possible to diversify the transition routes to the special zones and greatly improve the game playability.

As the processing for shifting the display mode to the specialized zone, supplementary description will be given of the mode shift notification processing and the push-up processing in this embodiment with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181. FIG. The specialized zone in this embodiment shifts based on the establishment of the seventh regame winning as in the above embodiments. However, in the present embodiment, the lottery at the time of winning the BAR replay (lottery for whether or not to win the seventh replay) does not perform the lottery for the transition to the specialized zone, but the winning of the specific role as described above. Transfer draws will be held from time to time. Then, when the transfer lottery at the time of winning the specific role is won, the special zone winning flag is set to enable the transfer, and after that, when the BAR replay 1 is won, the pressing order for establishing the 7th replay winning prize. It is configured to be notified and to shift to a specialized zone.

That is, in the mode transition notification process in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Based on this, a process for shifting to the corresponding display mode and a process for generating a push order notification when winning the push order role that will be the transition to the corresponding game state are performed.

In this embodiment, if it is determined in step S10213 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S10217. In step S10217, it is determined whether or not the special zone winning flag is set. If it is not set, the mode change notification process is terminated. When it is set, in step S10218, processing for clearing the special zone winning flag is performed. Then, in step S10219, a process of setting a specialized zone notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. The special zone notification flag is a flag for executing the pressing order notification corresponding to the seventh regame winning. After executing the process of step S10219, the special zone winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S10220, and then this mode transition notification process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to notify that the specialized zone has been won. This process may be executed under the condition that the special zone winning notification command is received in the other betting effect setting process (step S1809) of the betting effect setting process (FIG. 44), for example. .

In the pushing process according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 181, in steps S10301 to S10313, similarly to the processes in steps S1201 to S1213, the pushing process for promoting to the second RT state or the third RT state is performed. The order notification (3rd replay to 5th replay push order notification) and the push order notification for not falling to the 1st RT state (1st replay push order notification) are performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S10309, in this embodiment, it is determined in step S10314 whether or not the current game result is BAR replay 1 among BAR replays. If it is BAR replay 1, it is determined in step S10315 whether or not the attack notification flag is set, and in step S10316 it is determined whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. When a negative determination is made in step S10315, the push order process is terminated as it is without executing the push order notification in this BAR replay 1 winning game. In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S10316, the process advances to step S10307 to carry out processing for informing of the pressing order for establishing the first regame winning prize.

When both the attack notification flag and the specialized zone notification flag are set, the pressing order notification corresponding to the seventh re-game winning is executed in step S10317, and the seventh re-game winning is executed in step S10318. After performing the process of setting the push order notification command including the stop order corresponding to the display control device 81 as an object to be output, the push order process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the relationship between the stop order and the winning mode when the BAR replay 1 is won is changed so that the 7th replay win, the 1st replay win, and the 6th replay win have different stop orders. It is preferable to set (FIG. 23(c)). As a result, when the stop operation is performed according to the pressing order notification corresponding to the seventh re-game winning as described above, it is possible to establish the seventh re-game winning more reliably. Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined in step S1316 of the winning result handling process (FIG. 39) that the seventh regame winning has been established, instead of determining whether or not there is a VB notification flag in step S1317, The presence or absence of the specialized zone notification flag is confirmed. That is, when the seventh regame win is established and the specialized zone notification flag is set, the specialized zone start processing (from step S1318) is performed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid shifting to the specialized zone when the stop order happens to match the stop order corresponding to the seventh regame winning.

Also in the pushing order process of the present embodiment, if a negative determination is made in step S10314, the process for pushing order bell is performed in steps S10319 to S10322, which is the same as the process in steps S1219 to S1222. is.

Next, the processing for setting the additional effect in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182 . As already explained, the setting processing of the add-on effect is a process performed by the display control device 81 based on the reception of the add-on command from the main control device 101 .

In step S10401, it is determined whether or not it is in the specialized zone. If it is not in the specialized zone, in steps S10402 to S10413, similarly to steps S8502 to S8513, it is determined whether or not the current addition is to be added later. , determines whether or not to generate an additional effect at any timing of the game.

In the following description, as a comparison with the add-on effect, the add-on effect generated in the add-on winning game (add-on effect generated at a timing earlier than the add-on effect) is also called an immediate add effect.

If it is the add-on command received in the special zone at step S10401, after executing the add-on process for the special zone at step S10414, the setting process of the add-on effect is terminated.

Here, before explaining the special zone add-on processing, the effect in the add special zone in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 183 to 185. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 183(a), when the zone is shifted to the special addition zone, the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Increasing probability of addition". As a result, the player can clearly understand that the winning probability of the lottery for adding the number of games is high. Also, in the auxiliary display section 65, the total number of games added in the special zone is displayed by the number of games added in the special zone TUG. The special zone extra game number TUG is arranged, for example, in the upper central portion of the auxiliary display section 65, and is arranged at a position that particularly attracts the player's attention.

Also in the present embodiment, in the specialized zone, not only the special role but also the pushing order bell and pushing order replay are additionally won (FIG. 129). Therefore, every game, the number of games is increased, and the corresponding additional effect is performed, and the display of the number of added games TUG in the specialized zone is updated every game.

In the present embodiment, among the specific roles in the specialized zone, especially for watermelon and cherry, the case where the immediate addition effect is selected in the winning game and the time when the special zone ends In some cases, a post-adding effect is selected in which the notification of the number of games to be added is carried over.

In the following explanation, as a contrast to the immediate ride effects and post-load effects outside of the specialized zone, the additional effects that occur in the winning game in the specialized zone are also referred to as the immediate ride effects in the zone, and when the special zone ends The additional production to be generated (the additional production to be generated at a later timing than the immediate riding production in the zone) is also referred to as the subsequent riding production in the zone.

As shown in FIG. 184(a), for example, when the watermelon is won and the instant-on-the-zone effect is selected, the already-explained additional effect is generated. Such an additional effect is an effect in which the notification of the additional winning and the content notification of the number of additional games are performed at the same time. On the other hand, when the add-on effect in the zone is selected when the watermelon is won, the first add-on character BUP1, for example, as a character imitating a green treasure box corresponding to the watermelon, is displayed as a winning notification that the add-on win is made with the watermelon opportunity. Along with the display, the characters "Get!!" indicate that the first add-on character BUP1 (add-on right based on the watermelon opportunity) has been acquired. Also, as shown in FIG. 184(b), when the instant-on-the-zone effect is selected when the cherry is won, the already-explained additional effect is generated in the same way as when the immediate-on-the-zone effect is selected when the watermelon is won. . On the other hand, when the additional effect in the zone is selected when the cherry is won, the second additional character BUP2, for example, as a character imitating a red treasure box corresponding to the cherry, is displayed as a winning notification that the additional winning is made at the time of the cherry. Along with being displayed, the character display of "Get!!" indicates that the second add-on character BUP2 (add-on right based on the cherry chance) has been obtained. The first back-up character BUP1 and the second back-up character BUP2 have different display contents so that the player can identify them. Specifically, the characters have different colors as described above (BUP1 is green, BUP2 is red, and shown with different dot hatches in the figure).

As shown in FIG. 183(b), the acquired first character BUP1 and second character BUP2 are displayed side by side in the number of additional games TUG in the specialized zone. In FIG. 183(b), three first characters BUP1 are displayed, and one second character BUP2 is displayed, indicating that the second characters BUP2 are displayed three times during the watermelon opportunity zone. In addition, it shows that the post-adding effect during the cherry opportunity zone occurs once. In addition, FIG. 183(b) shows a situation in which the number of additional games TUG in the specialized zone is updated to "150", and this situation is the same as that in each game in the specialized zone. This indicates that a total of 150 games have been added by . More specifically, the situation in which the display of FIG. 183(b) is made means that the addition of 150 games occurs in the special zone, and furthermore, the addition effect occurs 4 times (3 times + 1 time) in the zone. is fixed, which means that there is a latent number of additional games greater than the 150 games displayed in the number of games to be added in the specialized zone TUG.

When the number of continuous games in the special zone becomes 0 and the special zone ends, a post-add effect corresponding to the first post-play character BUP1 and the second post-play character BUP2 is generated. Specifically, at the end of the final game in the specialized zone (after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has been stopped, more specifically, after medal payout is completed), as shown in FIG. "Judge" is displayed, indicating that the situation is such that a second-place effect is generated in the zone, which is the notification of the winning by the first second-place character BUP1 or the second second-place character BUP2. In addition, a first add-on game number BUG1 indicating the total number of add-on (add-on) games caused by the watermelon opportunity, and a second add-on game number BUG2 indicating the total number of add-on (add-on) games caused by the cherry opportunity. and is displayed. FIG. 185(a) shows the situation before the second addition effect is generated in the zone, and both the second addition game numbers BUG1 and BUG2 are 0 games.

In the middle-of-zone effect, a middle-of-zone later-on effect as a content notification is generated for each of the plurality of displayed later-on characters BUP1 and BUP2 (for example, each time the effect switch 66 is operated). For example, one of the plurality of displayed first characters BUP1 is moved to substantially the center of the auxiliary display section 65 and displayed in an enlarged manner, and the content corresponding to the notification of winning indicated by the first character BUP1. Notification is made. As the content notification, for example, a display is made as if the treasure box indicated by the first character BUP1 is opened and the contents pop out. The content corresponds to the number of added games, and FIG. 185(b) shows that 10 games have been added (later added). In this case, the display is updated by adding 10 games to the number BUG1 of the first additional games, and the display of the number of additional games TUG in the specialized zone is also updated by adding 10 games. After that, the contents of the remaining first back-up characters BUP1 are also sequentially notified.

After completion of the notification of the contents of the first character BUP1, the notification of the contents of the second character BUP2 is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 186(a), the second back-up character BUP2 is moved to substantially the center of the auxiliary display section 65 and displayed in an enlarged manner, and the winning announcement is indicated by the second back-up character BUP3. A content notification corresponding to is performed. For example, a display is made as if the treasure box shown as the second character BUP2 is opened and the contents pop out. As in the case of the first character BUP1, the content corresponds to the number of additional games, and FIG. 186(a) shows that 90 additional games have occurred. In this case, 90 games are added to the second additional game number BUG2 and the display is updated, and the display of the additional game number TUG in the specialized zone is also updated by adding 90 games.

When all information regarding the addition of watermelons and cherries that occurred in the special zone is completed (in-zone additional effect), as shown in FIG. Ratio notification indicating the selection ratio (selection ratio) of immediate boarding and post-boarding is performed.

Specifically, regarding the addition that occurred with the watermelon, the number of times the content of the number of additional games was notified in the game in which the watermelon was won (immediate number of times), and the addition triggered by the watermelon at the end of the special zone The number of times (the number of post-additions) of the content notification of the number of games is displayed as the first ratio display HP1. In addition, regarding the additions that occurred due to cherry winning, the number of times the details of the number of added games were notified in the game where the cherry was won (immediate number of times), and the number of additional games triggered by the cherry winning at the end of the special zone The number of times the content notification has been performed (the number of subsequent additions) is displayed as the second ratio display HP2.

In FIG. 186(b), in the specialized zone of this time, the number of immediate rides triggered by winning a watermelon is 1, and the number of times of post-boarding triggered by winning a watermelon is 3 times. It is shown in the stacked bar graph as HP1. In addition, in this special zone, the number of times of immediate loading triggered by winning a cherry is 2 times, and the number of times of post-loading triggered by winning a cherry is 1 in the stacked bar graph as the second ratio display HP2. are shown. In these stacked bar graphs, the area showing the number of times of immediate loading and the area showing the number of times of subsequent loading are indicated by different colors, and the player can clearly grasp the difference between these areas. (Different dot hatching is shown in the figure). More specifically, in this special zone, one-fourth (25%) of the watermelon-triggered additions were selected immediately, and three-fourths (75%) selected the subsequent addition. , In this specialized zone, two-thirds (about 66%) of the additions that occurred at the cherry opportunity chose immediate addition, and one-third (about 33%) chose post-addition. Visually and easily comprehensible.

In the present embodiment, regarding the addition in the specialized zone, the rate at which immediate addition is selected and the rate at which subsequent addition is selected (probability of winning the subsequent addition lottery) are set differently depending on the setting value. ing. In other words, with regard to the specialized zone, the player can predict and grasp the set value by informing the ratio of immediate loading and post-loading as described above. In the following, a detailed description will be given of the processing for performing the additional notification in the specialized zone, including the processing for performing the ratio notification.

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing special zone add-on processing.

In step S10501, a process of grasping the number of games to be added this time is executed. In the subsequent step S10502, a process for adding lottery to the middle of the zone is executed. In the mid-zone add-on lottery process, a timing table for the add-on performance for the special zone is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a, and whether the current add-on effect is to be immediately added or to be added later is decided by lottery.

As shown in FIG. 188, in the additional effect timing table for the specialized zone, the execution timing of the additional effect is set differently depending on the game result (winning combination) that triggered the additional winning and the set value. . Specifically, the execution timing of the additional effect is different for watermelon (commonly for strong watermelon and weak watermelon), cherry (common for strong cherry and weak cherry), and others as game results that have triggered the additional winning. is set to

As for the watermelon, in the setting 1, the immediate loading is selected at 40%, and the later loading is selected at 60%. In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 45% and later loading is selected at 55%. In setting 3, immediate loading is selected at 50%, and later loading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 55%, and later loading is selected at 45%. In setting 5, immediate loading is selected at 60%, and later loading is selected at 40%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 65% and later loading is selected at 35%. In other words, the higher the setting value, the lower the selection rate of the later loading, and the higher the selection rate of the immediate loading.

For Cherry, in setting 1, immediate loading is selected at 10% and later loading is selected at 90%. In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 30%, and later loading is selected at 70%. In setting 3, immediate loading is selected at 50%, and later loading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 70%, and later loading is selected at 30%. In setting 5, immediate loading is selected at 80%, and later loading is selected at 20%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 90% and later loading is selected at 10%. In other words, the higher the setting value, the lower the selection rate of the subsequent loading, and the higher the selection rate of the immediate loading, which is common with the watermelon.

On the other hand, compared to the case of watermelon as an additional opportunity, in the case of cherry, the difference due to the setting value of the ratio between the immediate addition and the subsequent addition is set to be large. That is, for example, in predicting the setting value when the immediate ride is selected, the cherry has a higher degree of contribution as the prediction material than the watermelon. In other words, predicting the setting value from the immediate/post-loading ratio of cherries has higher prediction accuracy than the setting value from the immediate/post-loading ratio of watermelon, and predicts the setting value more easily. It is possible.

As already explained, in the present embodiment, the winning probability is set so that it is much easier to win watermelons than cherries (FIG. 179). The winning probability is the same in the special zone, and watermelon is more likely to be won than cherry in the special zone. Then, in a game in which the set value is predicted from the immediate loading/post-loading ratio in the specialized zone, the watermelon whose prediction accuracy is low tends to be won, and the cherry whose prediction accuracy is high is hard to win. By doing so, the benefits of winning a cherry with a low winning probability are not only the benefits related to the degree of advantage such as the number of additional games, but also the presentation of information that can be useful to the player, such as information for predicting set values. Benefits can be added so that the proportion of benefits associated with the advantage is not too high.

After the mid-zone add-on lottery process is executed in step S10502, it is determined whether or not the mid-zone add-on lottery process is won in step S10503. If no prize has been won, that is, if immediate pick-up is selected, it is determined in step S10504 whether or not the current pick-up opportunity was a watermelon. If it is a watermelon, the process advances to step S10505 to execute a process of adding 1 to a watermelon immediate-loading counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The watermelon instant topping counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times the watermelon topping occurs during the special zone this time and the instant topping is selected.

If it is determined in step S10504 that there is no watermelon opportunity, the process proceeds to step S10506. In step S10506, it is determined whether or not the current increase opportunity was a cherry. If it is a cherry, the process advances to step S10507 to execute a process of adding 1 to a cherry pick-up counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The instant pick-up counter for cherries is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times when pick-up occurs during the special zone this time due to a cherry opportunity and the pick-up is selected.

After executing the process of step S10505 or step S10507, or when negative determination is made in step S10506, in step S10508, an additional effect (immediately adding effect in the zone) can be generated in the current game. set. In this case, the timing of generating the additional effect is set at the time when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in this embodiment, but at other timing such as when the first reel stop ON operation or the second reel stop OFF operation is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a riding effect is generated immediately in the zone.

After that, in step S10509, at the timing when the immediate addition effect occurs in the zone (or at a timing slightly delayed from the timing when the immediate addition effect occurs in the zone), the number of added games TUG in the specialized zone is the current number of added games. After setting the update effect so that the display is updated to the added display, the addition processing for the special zone is ended.

As already explained, the data for the additional effects in steps S10508 and S10509 are temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area. The CPU 181 reads the effect data temporarily stored in the effect data setting area at the timing of generating the additional effect (immediately added effect in the zone) so that the additional effect is performed. This is the same for the following other additional effects.

If it is determined in step S10503 that the middle-zone add-on lottery is won, that is, if add-on is selected as this add-on, the process proceeds to step S10510. In step S10510, it is determined whether or not the current addition opportunity was a watermelon. If it is a watermelon, the process advances to step S10511 to execute a process of adding 1 to the watermelon trailing counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The post-addition counter for watermelon is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times the post-addition is selected in the current specialized zone with the watermelon opportunity.

In the subsequent step S10512, a process of storing the current number of additional games in the watermelon additional individual area provided in the RAM 106 is executed. In this embodiment, a plurality of areas are provided as individual areas for watermelons, and specifically, 255 areas are provided. Each area is set to be able to store the number of games from 0 to 999, and it is possible to read out the number of games added based on the watermelon opportunity after the fact. For example, if 10 games are stored in the 1st area and 50 games are stored in the 2nd area, the 1st addition among those in which an addition occurs as a trigger for a watermelon in the specialized zone and the subsequent addition is selected It can be grasped after the fact that the number of added games for the second addition was 10 games and the number of added games for the next addition was 50 games. In step S10512, a process of storing the number of games to be added as a trigger for the current watermelon is performed in the area with the smallest number among the areas in which the number of games is not stored in the individual areas for watermelon to be added.

After that, in step S10513, the data is temporarily stored in the effect data setting area so that the first back-up character BUP1 as the watermelon back-up character is displayed when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. Finish the special zone add-on process. It is preferable that the display timing of the first second character BUP1 is the same as or slightly later than the instant-in-zone effect.

If it is determined in step S10510 that there is no watermelon opportunity, the process advances to step S10514. In step S10514, it is determined whether or not the current trigger for the addition was a cherry. If it is a cherry, the process advances to step S10515 to execute a process of adding 1 to the post-loading counter for cherry provided in the various counter areas 106e. The post-addition counter for cherries is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times extra-addition occurred during the special zone this time due to a cherry opportunity and the extra-addition was selected.

In the subsequent step S10516, a process of storing the current number of additional games in an individual area for cherry addition provided in the RAM 106 is executed. The post-loading individual area for cherries corresponds to the post-loading individual area for watermelon. That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of areas are provided also for the individual area for placing cherries later, and specifically, 255 areas are provided. Each area is set to be able to store the number of games from 0 to 999, and the number of games added based on the cherry timing can be read out after the event. In step S10516, processing is performed to store the number of additional games to be used as a trigger for the current cherry in the area with the smallest number among the areas in which the number of games is not stored in the additional individual area for cherry.

After that, in step S10517, the data is temporarily stored in the effect data setting area so that the second character BUP2, as the second character for cherry, is displayed when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. Finish the special zone add-on process. The display timing of the second character BUP2 is also preferably the same as or slightly later than the instant-in-zone effect. If a negative determination is made in step S10514, the special zone adding process is terminated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specialized zone, as for the trigger for adding other than watermelon and cherry, immediate loading is selected regardless of the set value (FIG. 188), so a negative determination is made in step S10514. never. In other words, it can be said that the determination processing in step S10514 is provided for expansion in the case of generating a post-addition even in other triggers for addition.

In steps S10513 and S10515, if there is already displayed first back-up character BUP1 or second back-up character BUP2, the displayed first back-up character BUP1 or second back-up character BUP2 is displayed. The effect data may be set so that the characters to be added this time are displayed side by side. By unifying the rules of the order of arranging (for example, by arranging in order such as upper left → upper right → lower left → lower right), a post-adding effect at the end of the special zone described later will be performed. In this case, it is possible to clearly understand what number of additional wins corresponds to the subsequent addition. Although the first back-up character BUP1 and the second back-up character BUP2 are displayed in separate areas (in FIG. 185, the first back-up character BUP1 is displayed in the upper left of the screen, the second back-up character BUP2 is on the upper right of the screen), they may be mixed and the arrangement order rule may be unified. By doing so, it is possible to more easily grasp when the additional winning is to be added in the game property of the special zone where the additional winning occurs with the watermelon and the cherry.

In addition, when the total number of characters already displayed and the number of characters already displayed becomes a predetermined number (for example, 5), the number of characters already displayed and the number of characters already displayed are combined. The configuration may be such that an integrated display character is displayed. For example, in a situation where four first characters BUP1 are being displayed, if a new opportunity to display the first character BUP1 occurs, a total of five watermelon moments will occur. A first integrated display character (for example, a treasure box with a different color or different shape) is displayed to indicate the situation. By doing so, when displaying a character corresponding to multiple additional opportunities using a limited display area, the upper limit (limiter) of the additional opportunity due to the absence or small displayable display area can avoid giving the impression that there is

Next, the processing for setting the special zone end effect in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The special zone end effect setting process is a process that is executed based on reception of the special zone end command from the main controller 101 in the all stop effect setting process (FIG. 51) (step S2316). .

As already explained, in the present embodiment, when the special zone ends, a post-boarding effect is performed, and the ratio of the immediate boarding/post-boarding ratio is notified. Specifically, first, in step S10601, a process of grasping the watermelon ready-to-use counter and the cherry ready-to-use counter is performed. In the subsequent step S10602, a process of grasping the watermelon trailing counter and the cherry trailing counter is performed. Then, in step S10603, the immediate/post-addition ratio for watermelon-triggered additions and the immediate/post-addition ratio for cherry-triggered additions are determined based on the grasped results of steps S10601 and S10602. Execute the calculation process. Then, in step S10604, a process of temporarily storing the calculated result in a register or the like is performed.

After that, in steps S10605 to S10620, processing is executed to generate a post-addition effect added at the opportunity of watermelon and cherry. That is, in step S10605, it is determined whether or not the watermelon trailing counter is greater than 0, that is, 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, the process advances to step S10606 to execute processing for grasping the number of additional games, starting with the area with the smallest number among the areas in which the number of games is stored in the individual area for additional watermelons. Then, in step S10607, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the pre-production of the watermelon rear-loading production is performed. In this case, the first back-up character BUP1 displayed first is selected from among the first back-up characters BUP1, and the first back-up character BUP1 is moved to substantially the center of the screen. Then, an operation instruction effect for prompting the operation of the effect switch 66 is also generated.

After executing the processing of step S10607, it is determined whether or not the effect switch 66 has been operated in step S10608, and waits until the effect switch 66 is operated. It should be noted that affirmative determination may be made in step S10608 depending on the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) regardless of whether or not there is an operation.

After an affirmative determination is made in step S10608, in step S10609, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that an additional effect is performed. In this case, the character of the treasure chest as the first character BUP1 placed in the approximate center of the screen is opened, and a display effect is performed as if the number of additional games pops out as the treasure inside (Fig. 185(b)). ).

In subsequent step S10610, the display of the number of additional games for watermelon BUG1 is controlled to be updated by adding the number of additional games of the additional effect performed in step S10609. In step S10611, the display of the number of added games TUG in the special zone is controlled so that the number of added games of the added effect performed in step S10609 is added and updated. Then, in step S10612, 1 is subtracted from the watermelon trailing counter, and the process returns to step S10605.

Since the post-addition counter for watermelon becomes 0, a negative determination is made in step S10605, and the process proceeds to step S10613. The processing from step S10613 to step S10620 is processing for superimposing based on cherry, and is substantially the same as the processing from step S10605 to step S10612.

That is, in step S10613, it is determined whether or not the trailing counter for cherry is greater than 0, that is, 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, the process advances to step S10614 to execute a process of ascertaining the number of additional games, starting with the area with the smallest number among the areas in which the number of games is stored in the separate individual area for cherry. Then, in step S10615, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the pre-staging effect of the rear-loading effect for cherry is performed. In this case, the first displayed second character BUP2 is selected from the second characters BUP2, and the selected second character BUP2 is moved to substantially the center of the screen. Then, an operation instruction effect for prompting the operation of the effect switch 66 is also generated.

After executing the process of step S10615, it determines whether operation of production|presentation switch 66 was performed in step S10616, and waits until operation of production|presentation switch 66 is performed. As in step S10608, the affirmative determination may be made in step S10616 regardless of whether or not an operation has been performed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

After an affirmative determination is made in step S10616, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled in step S10617 so that an additional effect is performed. In this case, the character in the treasure box as the second character BUP2 placed in the approximate center of the screen is opened, and a display effect is performed as if the number of additional games pops out as the treasure inside (Fig. 186(a)). ).

In the subsequent step S10618, display control is performed so that the display of the second add-on game number BUG2 as the add-on game number display for cherry is updated by adding the add-on game number of the add-on effect performed in step S10617. In step S10619, the display of the number of additional games TUG in the special zone is controlled so that the number of additional games of the additional effect performed in step S10617 is added and updated. Then, in step S10620, 1 is subtracted from the post-loading counter for cherry, and the process returns to step S10613.

Since the post-loading counter for cherry becomes 0, a negative determination is made in step S10613, and the process proceeds to step S10621. In step S10621, based on the information stored in step S10604, the first ratio display HP1 for immediate ride/later ride based on the watermelon win and the second ratio display HP2 for immediate ride/later ride based on the cherry win It is controlled to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 (Fig. 186(b)).

After that, in step S10622, after initializing various counters for the specialized zone such as each immediate loading counter and each subsequent loading counter, the processing for setting the special zone end effect is terminated.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The execution timing of the addition notification is configured to differ depending on the set value. More specifically, the results of the additional lottery set so that there is no difference in the probability of winning or the number of games to be added at the time of winning depending on the set value are notified at different timings depending on the set value. By doing so, it is possible to make a difference between the set values especially in the attack mode, in which the difference in the game characteristics due to the set values is difficult to occur.

As effects with different execution timings of the addition notification, there are provided an immediate addition effect in which the addition effect is performed in the game in which the addition opportunity occurs, and a post-addition effect in which the addition effect is performed in the game after the game in which the addition opportunity occurs. In addition, in any of the productions, the notification of the additional winning is executed in the game in which the additional opportunity is generated. More specifically, even when performing the after-adding effect, the configuration is such that the first after-adding character BUP1 and the second after-adding character BUP2 are displayed in the game. As a result, when the additional performance is selected, it is possible for the player to grasp that the additional performance will occur before the additional performance in the subsequent performance is generated, and the player who grasps it can , the game can be played while looking forward to the execution of the additional performance in the post-addition performance. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player can enjoy the one additional effect.

Even if the add-on effect is selected as described above, the fact that the add-on lottery has been won is notified in advance, and the higher the set value, the more likely the immediate add-on effect is selected. bottom. In this way, even when the add-on effect is selected, by notifying in advance that the player has won the add-on lottery, the add-on effect can be performed in a state that the player is not a little pleased by the notification. Even if it is predicted/understood that the setting is low due to the additional effect in the post-add effect, it is possible to compensate for the player's disappointment due to the prediction/understanding (low setting). It becomes possible.

The selection ratio of immediate loading/post-loading based on the cherry timing is made different from the selection ratio of immediate loading/post-loading based on the watermelon timing. By doing so, in predicting and grasping the setting value based on the selection ratio, not only the setting of the occurrence rate in terms of production but also the result of the lottery process (whether it is a cherry or a watermelon) be reflected. Therefore, a player who wants to predict/know the set value will play the game while hoping that the lottery result in each game will result in a desired selection ratio (in the above embodiment, a cherry with a set difference in the selection ratio). By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the lottery results of each game.

The setting difference between the selection ratio of immediate ride/later ride based on the cherry opportunity with low winning probability is larger than the selection ratio of immediate ride/later ride based on the watermelon opportunity with high winning probability. In this way, the superiority of winning a cherry can be secured by elements other than the elements directly linked to the player's profit, such as the number of medals to be paid out based on the winning of the cherry and the additional performance based on the winning of the cherry. can. Therefore, benefits for each lottery result can be set within a range that does not affect the payout rate.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, the additional effect timing table for the specialized zone is changed according to the transition timing to the specialized zone. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing zone extra lottery processing. As already explained, the zone extra lottery process is a process executed in step S10502 in the special zone extra process (FIG. 187).

In step S10701, it is determined whether or not the current special zone shift trigger is a cherry (either a strong cherry or a weak cherry). If the shift timing is not cherry, in step S10702, a process of acquiring the normal addition notification timing table from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10701 that the timing of the transition to the specialized zone this time was a cherry, in step S10703 a process of acquiring a special addition notification timing table from the various table storage area 182a is executed. . After one of the notification timing tables is obtained, a post-addition lottery is executed based on the notification timing table in step S10704, and then the mid-zone post-addition lottery processing ends.

Differences between the normal add-on notification timing table and the special add-on notification timing table will be described with reference to FIG. The normal add-on notification timing table is as shown in FIG. 188, and in FIG. rate) are shown as reference values.

That is, in the special add-on notification timing table, the parameters (immediate add-on/later add-on selection rate) when the add-on occurs triggered by winning the watermelon are different from those in the normal add-on notification timing table. Specifically, in the special add-on notification timing table, in setting 1, immediate add-on is selected at 10%, and later add-on is selected at 90%. In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 30%, and later loading is selected at 70%. In setting 3, immediate loading is selected at 50%, and later loading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 70%, and later loading is selected at 30%. In setting 5, immediate loading is selected at 80%, and later loading is selected at 20%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 90% and later loading is selected at 10%. In other words, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate of the subsequent addition and the higher the selection rate of the immediate addition, which is the same as the parameters for winning the watermelon in the normal addition notification timing table.

On the other hand, compared to the normal add-on notification timing table, the special add-on notification timing table is set so that the difference between the immediate add-on and the later add-on ratio setting values is larger. That is, for example, in predicting the set value when immediate riding is selected, the specialized zone shifted with the cherry opportunity is more useful as a prediction material than the specialized zone shifted with other special role opportunities high contribution. In other words, it is better to predict the set value from the immediate boarding/later boarding ratio in the specialized zone that shifted with the cherry opportunity, predicting the set value from the immediate boarding / late boarding ratio in the specialized zone that shifted with another specific role opportunity. The accuracy of prediction is higher than that of the conventional method, and it is possible to predict the setting value more easily. In other words, it can be said that the specialized zone to which the transition is made at a cherry-moment is a zone in which the setting value can be predicted more easily.

Moreover, in the special add-on notification timing table in this modified example, the immediate/post-add ratio based on the watermelon and the immediate/post-add ratio based on the cherry are common in any setting values. By doing so, it is possible to treat each addition trigger as common data in predicting and grasping the set values based on these ratios, and increase the parameter.

By doing so, it is possible to set special zones having completely different game characteristics of predicting and grasping set values without changing the additional performance in the special zones. As a result, it is possible to break away from the conventional game property of simply wanting a special zone with a large number of additional games, and create a new game property of wanting a special zone whose set values are easy to predict.

In particular, by making the special zone that shifts at the opportunity of a cherry with a low winning probability a special zone where it is easy to predict and grasp the setting value, the merit of winning with a low winning probability will be improved. It is possible to add it within a range that does not affect it.

In addition, the specialized zone that shifts with a cherry chance and the specialized zone that shifts with another special role opportunity only differ in the addition notification timing table used in selecting immediate boarding / later boarding, and winning a small role. It is possible to realize the above-described excellent game characteristics with a very simple configuration that does not require changes in odds, additional winning odds, and the like.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, when the immediate addition effect in the zone is selected, the addition effect timing table is changed. FIG. 192(a) is a flow chart showing the middle-of-zone lottery process in this modified example.

In step S10801, a process of acquiring a table counter ATK from various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is performed. The table counter ATK is a counter for the CPU 181 to specify an additional effect timing table to be acquired in this additional lottery. That is, in step S10802, the process of acquiring the additional notification timing table corresponding to the value of the table counter ATK acquired in step S10801 from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 is performed.

In this embodiment, as the additional notification timing table, as shown in FIG. 193, a plurality of additional timing tables are provided, and the four additional notification timing tables of the first to fourth additional notification timing tables are is provided. In addition, in this modification, there is no difference in the selection rate of immediate pick-up and late pick-up, such as cherry, watermelon, and other specific roles, and the common selection rate is set for immediate pick-up and pick-up for any special role. is selected. Therefore, the characters that are displayed when the second-place effect in the zone is selected are not associated with the role for which second-place is selected, such as the first second-place character BUP1 and the second second-place character BUP2. Instead, common characters are displayed. Also, in this modified example, the ratio notification at the end of the specialized zone is not performed.

The first addition notification timing table is a table that is selected when the table counter ATK is one. In this table, regardless of the set values, the selection rates for immediate loading and post-loading are both set at 50%.

The second addition notification timing table is a table that is selected when the table counter ATK is two. In this table, setting 1 selects immediate loading at 40% and late loading at 60%. In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 45% and later loading is selected at 55%. In setting 3, immediate loading is selected at 50%, and later loading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 55%, and later loading is selected at 45%. In setting 5, immediate loading is selected at 60%, and later loading is selected at 40%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 65% and later loading is selected at 35%. In other words, the higher the setting value, the lower the selection rate of the later loading, and the higher the selection rate of the immediate loading.

The third addition notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is 3. In this table, setting 1 selects immediate loading at 30% and late loading at 70%. In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 40% and later loading is selected at 60%. In setting 3, immediate loading is selected at 50%, and later loading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 60% and later loading is selected at 40%. In setting 5, immediate loading is selected at 70%, and later loading is selected at 30%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 80% and later loading is selected at 20%. In other words, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate of the subsequent ride, and the higher the selection rate of the immediate ride, which is common to the second addition notification timing table, but the setting value of the ratio of the immediate ride and the subsequent ride The difference due to is greater in the third addition notification timing table than in the second addition notification timing table.

The fourth addition notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is 4 or more. In this table, setting 1 selects immediate loading at 10% and late loading at 90%. In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 30%, and later loading is selected at 70%. In setting 3, immediate loading is selected at 50%, and later loading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 70%, and later loading is selected at 30%. In setting 5, immediate loading is selected at 90%, and later loading is selected at 10%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 100%, and later loading is selected at 0% (not selected). In other words, the higher the setting value, the lower the selection rate of the second addition, and the higher the selection rate of the immediate addition, which is common to the second addition notification timing table and the third addition notification timing table, but the second addition notification timing table and the third addition notification timing table The difference due to the setting value of the ratio to the addition is larger in the fourth addition notification timing table than in the second addition notification timing table and the third addition notification timing table.

Returning to the description of the middle-zone add-on lottery process, after acquiring one add-on notification timing table from the add-on notification timing tables in step S10802, the add-on lottery process is executed in step S10803. Then, in step S10804, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S10803 is immediate ride. If it is an immediate ride, in step S10805, a process of adding 1 to the table counter ATK is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10804 that it is not immediate loading but post-loading, processing for setting the table counter ATK to 1, which is the initial value, is executed in step S10806.

That is, in this modified example, the table counter ATK is incremented by 1 when immediate placement is selected in the post-placement lottery, and the table counter ATK returns to the initial value of 1 when post-placement is selected. As described above, the value of the table counter ATK is associated with the type of additional notification timing table used in the subsequent lottery. It is set so that the difference due to the setting value of the loading/post-loading ratio becomes large.

More specifically, basically (except for the first addition notification timing table), in any notification timing table, the higher the setting, the more likely it is that immediate riding will be selected, and the lower the setting, the more difficult it will be for immediate riding to be selected. It is In addition, the greater the value of the table counter ATK is obtained in the notification timing table, the greater the difference between the ease of selection of immediate ride with high setting and the ease of selection of immediate ride with low setting. For example, in the second addition notification timing table obtained when the table counter ATK is 2, setting 6 selects immediate addition with a probability of 65%, and setting 1 selects immediate addition with a probability of 40%. , the difference is about 1.6 times the probability. On the other hand, in the fourth addition notification timing table obtained when the table counter ATK is 4, setting 6 selects immediate addition with a probability of 100%, and setting 1 selects with a probability of 10%. is ten times more likely. Therefore, the larger the value of the table counter ATK, that is, the more consecutively the immediate boarding is selected, the easier it becomes to estimate the set value from the selection ratio of the immediate boarding and the later boarding.

Moreover, the more continuously the immediate ride is selected, the higher setting side switches to the notification timing table in which the immediate ride is more likely to be selected. It can be a material that proves (predicts) that. For example, as shown in FIG. 193, when using the switching of the first addition notification timing table to the fourth addition notification timing table, the probability that the immediate addition is selected four times in a row is 0.6% with setting 1. 2.7% for setting 2, 6.2% for setting 3, 11.6% for setting 4, 18.9% for setting 5, and 26% for setting 6. The difference from 6 is a probability difference of about 43 times. Then, as described above, since it is configured to switch to the addition notification timing table in which immediate riding is more likely to be selected as the setting is higher, in predicting the setting value by such continuity of immediate riding, setting of continuous probability It becomes a configuration in which the difference spreads at an accelerating rate.

That is, for example, in the case of a configuration that uses only the second addition notification timing table (configuration that does not cause switching to the third and fourth addition notification timing tables), the probability that immediate addition is selected four times in a row is set to 1. is about 2.7% in setting 6, and about 17.9% in setting 6. The difference between setting 1 and setting 6 is about 7 times the probability, and the notification timing table is switched as in this modification. less than the difference in configuration. On the other hand, if you try to create a setting difference without switching the notification timing table, it is necessary to increase the difference between the immediate addition/post-addition ratio due to the setting value, and once as in the fourth addition notification timing table It becomes possible to judge to some extent whether it is a high setting or a low setting by adding .

Therefore, by using the switching of the notification timing table as in the above configuration, it is possible to gradually narrow down the set values, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game in which the set values are predicted.

After performing the processing of step S10805 or step S10806 in the middle zone lottery process (FIG. 192(a)), display background change processing is performed in step S10807, and then the middle zone lottery process ends. do. In the display background change process, the display background color in the special zone effect of the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed in association with the value of the table counter ATK. For example, as shown in FIG. 192(b), if the table counter ATK is 1, the background color is displayed in white, and if the table counter ATK is 2, the background color is displayed in yellow. If the table counter ATK is 3, the background color is displayed in green, and if the table counter ATK is 4 or more, the background color is displayed in red. By doing so, the player can easily grasp the current value of the table counter ATK, that is, the number of times that the instant hit is continuously selected, and the accumulation of the instant hit is useful for predicting the set value. It is possible to liven up the game by changing the presentation (changing the background color).

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the addition notification timing table is switched based on the number of games in the advantageous section in which the specialized zone is executed. FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing the middle-of-zone lottery process in this modification.

In step S10901, a process of grasping the number of games in the current advantageous section is performed. As described above, the number of games in the advantageous section AG is managed by the main controller 101. In this modified example, the display controller 81 is also configured to have a similar counter. By outputting a command from the display control device 81 side, the number of games played in the current advantageous section can be grasped.

In step S10902, an additional notification timing table corresponding to the current number of games in the advantageous section is obtained from the table storage area 182a. Then, in step S10903, the post-addition lottery is executed, and then the process of the post-addition lottery in this zone ends.

As shown in FIG. 195(a), the add-on notification timing table in this modified example is such that the immediate add/later add-on ratio differs depending on the number of games completed in the advantageous interval (advantageous interval game number AG) and the set value. is set. Specifically, when the number of games played in the advantageous section is 1 to 99, regardless of the setting value, both immediate entry and subsequent entry are selected with a probability of 50%. When the number of completed games is 100 to 499, in the setting 1, immediate loading is selected at 40% and later loading is selected at 60%. In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 45% and later loading is selected at 55%. In setting 3, immediate loading is selected at 50%, and later loading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 55%, and later loading is selected at 45%. In setting 5, immediate loading is selected at 60%, and later loading is selected at 40%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 65% and later loading is selected at 35%. That is, when the number of played games is 100 to 499, the higher the set value is, the more likely it is that the player will select the immediate ride.

When the number of completed games in the advantageous section is 500 to 999, in setting 1, the immediate entry is selected at 30% and the later entry is selected at 70%. In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 40% and later loading is selected at 60%. In setting 3, immediate loading is selected at 50%, and later loading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 60% and later loading is selected at 40%. In setting 5, immediate loading is selected at 70%, and later loading is selected at 30%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 80% and later loading is selected at 20%. Also, when the number of games played is 1000 to 1399, in the setting 1, immediate loading is selected at 10% and later loading is selected at 90%. In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 30%, and later loading is selected at 70%. In setting 3, immediate loading is selected at 50%, and later loading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 70%, and later loading is selected at 30%. In setting 5, immediate loading is selected at 90%, and later loading is selected at 10%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 100%, and later loading is selected at 0% (not selected). Then, when the number of played games reaches 1400 to 1500, in the setting 1, immediate loading is selected (not selected) at 0%, and later loading is selected at 100%. In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 10% and later loading is selected at 90%. In setting 3, immediate loading is selected at 50%, and later loading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 80%, and later loading is selected at 20%. In settings 5 and 6, immediate loading is selected at 100%, and later loading is selected at 0% (not selected).

That is, when the number of games completed in the advantageous section increases, the higher the set value, the more likely immediate boarding is selected, and the difference between the set values in the selection rate between immediate boarding and later boarding increases. By doing this, the more the advantageous section is consumed, the easier it is to predict the setting value when adding in the special zone, and as a benefit for continuing the advantageous section for a long time, It becomes possible to give a privilege other than the privilege of the number of medals.

As already explained, when the number of games played in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit of 1500 games, the advantageous interval is forcibly terminated. Therefore, when the number of played games approaches 1500, there is a possibility that the benefit (addition) cannot be sufficiently obtained even if the player moves to the specialized zone. On the other hand, with the above configuration, even if the number of games played is close to the upper limit and the expectation for the addition in the specialized zone may decrease, the benefits of moving to the specialized zone can be realized. can be generated.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the parameters of the additional notification timing table in modification 3 are different. FIG. 195(b) shows an additional notification timing table in this modified example.

In the addition notification timing table in this modified example, the relationship between the number of games completed in the advantageous section and the set value is reversed from that in the third modified example. More specifically, when the number of games played in the advantageous section is 1 to 99, in setting 1 or setting 2, immediate entry is selected at 100%, and later entry is selected at 0% (not selected). In setting 3, immediate loading is selected at 80%, and later loading is selected at 20%. In setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 50%, and later loading is selected at 50%. In setting 5, immediate loading is selected at 10%, and later loading is selected at 90%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected (not selected) at 0%, and later loading is selected at 100%. That is, at the beginning of the advantageous section, the lower the setting, the more likely it is that immediate riding will be selected, and the higher the setting, the more likely it will be that later riding will be selected.

When the number of completed games is 100 to 499, in the setting 1, immediate loading is selected at 100% and later loading is selected at 0% (not selected). In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 90% and later loading is selected at 10%. In setting 3, immediate loading is selected at 70%, and later loading is selected at 30%. In setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 50%, and later loading is selected at 50%. In setting 5, immediate loading is selected at 30%, and later loading is selected at 70%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 10% and later loading is selected at 90%. That is, when comparing the case where the number of completed games is 1 to 99 and the case where the number of completed games is 100 to 499, the higher the set value is, the more likely it is that immediate boarding is selected. In a situation where the number of games is small, the difference in selection rate between immediate loading and later loading due to set values is overwhelmingly large. In other words, it is easier to predict and grasp the set value at the beginning of the advantageous section.

When the number of completed games in the advantageous section is 500 to 999, in the setting 1, 80% of immediate entry is selected, and 20% of later entry is selected. In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 70%, and later loading is selected at 30%. In setting 3, immediate loading is selected at 60% and later loading is selected at 40%. In setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 50%, and later loading is selected at 50%. In setting 5, immediate loading is selected at 40%, and later loading is selected at 60%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 30%, and later loading is selected at 70%. Also, when the number of games played is 1000 to 1399, in setting 1, immediate loading is selected at 65%, and later loading is selected at 35%. In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 60% and later loading is selected at 40%. In setting 3, immediate loading is selected at 55%, and later loading is selected at 45%. In setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 50%, and later loading is selected at 50%. In setting 5, immediate loading is selected at 45%, and later loading is selected at 55%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 40%, and later loading is selected at 60%. Then, when the number of played games reaches 1400 to 1500, regardless of the setting value, both immediate entry and post-entry are selected with a probability of 50%.

That is, as the advantageous section progresses, the setting difference between the selection rate of immediate boarding/later boarding becomes smaller. By doing so, it is possible to increase the frequency of predicting and grasping the set values. In other words, for example, the number of initial games in the attack mode in the advantageous section is 50, and if an additional opportunity occurs during the 50 games, it is possible to at least predict and ascertain the set value. By doing so, it becomes easier to play a game in which the set values are predicted and grasped, and it is possible to fully enjoy such a game.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, as a parameter of the additional notification timing table in modified examples 3 and 4, a display remaining counter HG is used instead of the number of games completed in the advantageous section. As already explained, the display remaining number counter HG indicates the number of remaining games in the attack mode displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 .

In the above-mentioned step S10901 in this modified example, instead of grasping the number of games in the advantageous interval, processing for grasping the display remaining number counter HG is performed. Then, in step S10902, an additional notification timing table corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG is acquired, and in step S10903, an additional lottery is performed.

As shown in FIG. 195(c), the add-on notification timing table in this modified example is set so that the immediate add-on/later add-on ratio differs depending on the display remaining number counter HG and the setting value. Specifically, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99, in setting 1 and setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 80%, and later loading is selected at 20%. In setting 3 and setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 85% and later loading is selected at 15%. In setting 5 and setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 90% and later loading is selected at 10%. When the display remaining number counter HG is 100 to 299, setting 1 selects immediate loading at 30% and late loading at 70%. In setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 40% and later loading is selected at 60%. In setting 3, immediate loading is selected at 50%, and later loading is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 60% and later loading is selected at 40%. In setting 5, immediate loading is selected at 70%, and later loading is selected at 30%. In setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 80% and later loading is selected at 20%. When the display remaining counter HG is 300 or more, in setting 1 and setting 2, immediate loading is selected at 20% and later loading is selected at 80%. In setting 3 and setting 4, immediate loading is selected at 15% and later loading is selected at 85%. In setting 5 and setting 6, immediate loading is selected at 10% and later loading is selected at 90%.

That is, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99 and when it is 300 or more, the setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, setting 5 and setting 6 have the same immediate/post-add ratio. are doing. Therefore, when the display remaining counter HG is 1 to 99 or 300 or more, setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, and setting 5 are used to narrow down the setting values from the immediate loading/post-loading ratio. and setting 6 are indistinguishable. On the other hand, when the display remaining number counter HG is 200 to 299, all of the settings 1 to 6 are set so that the immediate loading/postloading ratios are different. Therefore, from the viewpoint of narrowing down the set values, it is preferable that the display remaining number counter HG is 200 to 299 rather than 300 or more. In other words, it is announced that there are many remaining games in attack mode, and the number of remaining games in attack mode is announced with fewer games than the situation in which a large amount of medals can be expected. It is possible to create a new game property that breaks away from the conventional one-sided game of aiming to win medals.

Furthermore, comparing the case where the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99 and the case where it is 300 or more, the immediate loading/later loading ratio is reversed at any set value. More specifically, when the remaining number counter for display HG is 1 to 99, the immediate addition is more likely to be selected than the subsequent addition in any set value, and when the remaining number counter for display HG is 300 or more, any As for the set values, the later loading is more likely to be selected than the immediate loading. That is, in a situation where the number of remaining games in the attack mode is small, it is easy to select the immediate ride in which the number of remaining games is increased immediately, and in a situation where the number of remaining games in the attack mode is large. In a situation where a notification to that effect is being made, it is easy to select post-addition, in which the number of remaining games is increased ex post facto. By doing so, the former can provide a sense of security by increasing the number of remaining games, and the latter can provide a sense of superiority by saving the right to increase the number of remaining games. Therefore, it is possible to create an effect according to the situation and the player's emotions.

<Modification 6>
The configuration relating to the immediate loading/post-loading ratio is not limited only to the specialized zone during the attack mode, and may be applied to areas other than the specialized zone. FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing setting processing of the additional effect in this modified example.

In step S11001, it is determined whether or not it is a specialized zone, and if it is a specialized zone, special zone addition processing is executed in step S11026. Such addition processing is as described above. If it is determined in step S11001 that the zone is not a specialized zone, the number of additional games this time is grasped in step S11002, and a subsequent addition lottery is performed in step S11003. In the follow-up lottery, as the add-on notification timing table, in this modified example, a configuration using a table with different immediate add-on/add-on ratios for watermelon and cherry as shown in FIG. 188 will be described, but other tables may be used. . In step S11004, it is determined whether or not the subsequent loading lottery has been won. If it is determined that the subsequent loading lottery has not been won and immediate loading has been selected, the process proceeds to step S11005.

In step S11005, it is determined whether or not the current addition is a watermelon opportunity. If it is a watermelon opportunity, in step S11006, a process of adding 1 to the total watermelon immediate placement counter provided in the various counter area 183b of the RAM 183 is executed. The total watermelon-immediately-placed counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of times the watermelon-immediately-placed effect has occurred in the current attack mode. If it is determined in step S11005 that there is no watermelon opportunity, it is determined in step S11007 whether or not there is a cherry opportunity. If it is a cherry timing, in step S11008, a process of adding 1 to the total cherry loading counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is executed. The total cherry-on-the-spot counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of times the cherry-on-the-spot effect has occurred in the current attack mode. These steps S11005 to S11008 correspond to steps S10504 to S10507.

After either step S11006 or step S11008 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S11007, the process advances to step S11009. The processing of steps S11009 to S11015 is the same as the processing of steps S10405 to S10411.

If it is determined in step S11004 that the post-addition winning was made, the process proceeds to step S11016. In step S11016, a process of setting post-loading flags in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 is executed. The add-on flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that there is at least one add-on effect as a add-on effect. After executing the processing of step S11016, the processing for post-adding effect is executed in steps S11017 to S11024. The processing of steps S11017 to S11024 corresponds to the processing of steps S10510 to S10517.

That is, in step S11017, it is determined whether or not the current addition is a watermelon opportunity. If it is a watermelon opportunity, in step S11018, a process of adding 1 to the watermelon trailing counter is executed. In the following step S11019, a process of storing the current number of additional games in the separate area for adding watermelon is executed. Then, in step S11020, the display setting of the first back-up character BUP1 as the watermelon back-up character is performed.

If it is determined in step S11017 that the timing is not the watermelon timing, it is determined in step S11021 whether or not the timing is the cherry timing. If it is a cherry opportunity, in step S11022, a process of adding 1 to the cherry add-on counter is executed. In the following step S11023, a process of storing the current number of additional games in the individual area for cherry addition is executed. Then, in step S11024, the display setting of the second trailing character BUP2 as the trailing character for cherry is performed.

After either step S11020 or step S11024 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S11021, the process advances to step S11025. In step S11025, the processing for subtracting the number of games added this time from the add-on counter BG is executed, and then the add-on effect setting processing ends. The process of step S11023 corresponds to the process of step S8607.

Although detailed description with reference to drawings is omitted, as described above, when the number of remaining games on the display of the attack mode reaches a predetermined number due to the setting of the add-on flag, the add-on effect is generated. In this case, similar to the processing of steps S10605 to S10620 in FIG. While acquiring and erasing information, a post-adding performance is generated for each additional opportunity.

In this case, when the post-adding effect is executed, the value of the post-adding counter for watermelon is added to the post-adding counter for total watermelon provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, and the value of the post-adding counter for cherry is executed. is added to the post-add counter for all cherries provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, and then the process corresponding to steps S10605 to S10620 in the post-add effect is performed. In this case, as described above, the post-addition counter for watermelons and the post-addition counter for cherries are decremented by 1 each time the addition effect is generated, while the values of the post-addition counter for all watermelons and the post-addition counter for all cherries are changed. It does not change even if you perform an additional performance. By doing so, it becomes possible to calculate the immediate loading/later loading ratio ex post facto as shown below.

The setting processing of the attack mode end effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 197 . As already described, the attack mode end effect setting process is a process executed by the display control device 81 after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in the attack mode end game.

First, in step S11101, repair is executed to grasp the total number of medals won. In the following step S11102, a process of grasping the number of continuous games is executed. As already explained, the total number of medals won and the number of continued games are to be displayed in the attack mode end effect, and the processing in steps S11101 and S11102 is processing for displaying them.

In step S11103, a process of grasping the instant-on-the-top counter for all watermelons and the instant-on-the-top counter for all cherries is executed. In the subsequent step S11104, a process of grasping the trailing counter for all watermelons and the trailing counter for all cherries is executed. As described above, the total watermelon trailing counter and the total cherry trailing counter are counters to which the values of the watermelon trailing counter and the cherry trailing counter are added when performing the trailing performance.

Then, in step S11105, processing is performed to calculate the immediate/post-addition ratio for all watermelons and the immediate/post-addition ratio for all cherries. and perform processing to display it. After that, in step S11107, after execution of end processing on the display side at the end of the attack mode, such as initialization processing of various counters, the setting processing of the attack mode end effect is ended.

FIG. 198 shows an example of the attack mode end effect. In this example, as shown in FIG. 198(a), as notification that the attack mode has ended, the number of continued games and the number of earned medals are displayed. Then, for example, as an operation instruction character to prompt the operation of the effect switch 66, a character imitating a button and an arrow character indicating the operation direction of the button are displayed, and a character "PUSH" indicating that the button should be pressed is displayed. Display characters. When the effect switch 66 is operated, as shown in FIG. 198(b), as the third ratio display HP3, a graph corresponding to the total watermelon immediate/later ratio in the current attack mode is displayed. As the 4-ratio display HP4, a graph is displayed corresponding to the immediate loading/post-loading ratio for all cherries in the current attack mode. In the example of FIG. 198(b), the third ratio display HP3 and the fourth ratio display HP4 are displayed as pie charts, but the first ratio display HP1 and the second ratio display HP2 in FIG. It may also be a stacked bar chart, such as

By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the playability based on the immediate addition/later addition ratio of the additional effect not only in the specialized zone but also throughout the attack mode. In particular, considering that the winning probability of cherry is about 1/150 and the winning probability of watermelon is about 1/50, the number of games in the specialized zone is limited (5 games in each of the above embodiments). Opportunities to win these cherries and watermelons are extremely rare. In that case, even if a game of predicting and grasping the set value is performed in the specialized zone with the cherry or watermelon prepared with much effort, the opportunity may not occur easily. On the other hand, if the winning probability of cherries or watermelons is increased or the number of continuous games in the specialized zone is increased in an attempt to solve this problem, there is a concern that the ball output rate will increase. Therefore, as in the above configuration, cherry and watermelon in the attack mode are targeted for game characteristics based on the immediate/post-load ratio, thereby avoiding a rise in the ball payout rate and favorably achieving such game characteristics. can be realized.

<Modification 7>
Regarding the information regarding the execution timing of the addition notification, such as the immediate loading/post-loading ratio, the configuration is not limited to that displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . In this modified example, a configuration will be described in which the information about the execution timing can be read by a portable terminal or the like possessed by the player. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the mobile terminal processing executed by the display control device 81. FIG. The mobile terminal process is, for example, a process that is periodically activated by the display control device 81 . In this modified example, among the processes for portable terminals, a process for information relating to the immediate boarding/later boarding ratio during an advantageous section will be described.

In step S11201, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has started. When the advantageous section has started, in step S11202, the measurement of each of the total watermelon immediate loading counter, the total watermelon subsequent loading counter, the total cherry immediate loading counter, and the total cherry subsequent loading counter is started. More specifically, for example, a process of setting a flag that enables determination of whether or not measurement is in progress is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S11201, or if the process of step S11202 has been executed, it is determined in step S11203 whether or not the user has logged out. In addition, in this modification, the information regarding the immediate loading/post-loading ratio can be output only when the user information is input on the management screen of the gaming machine and logged in. In S11203, an affirmative determination is made when the logged-in user has logged out, whereas a negative determination is made instead of an affirmative determination if the user has not logged in from the beginning. If an affirmative determination is made in step S11203, and the logged-in user logs out, in step S11204, a total watermelon immediate loading counter, a total watermelon subsequent loading counter, a total cherry immediate loading counter, and a total cherry subsequent loading counter are executed. After completing the measurement of each counter such as , initialization processing of each of these counters is executed. That is, each counter is initialized by logging out. On the other hand, when the advantageous section starts, each counter starts counting regardless of the presence or absence of login. As a result, it is possible to prevent the user's own game data from being read by another succeeding user, while avoiding the event that the counter is not counted due to forgetting to log in.

If a negative determination is made in step S11203, or if the process of step S11204 has been executed, the process advances to step S11205. In step S11205, it is determined whether or not there is an operation requesting ratio display. This request operation is, for example, an operation corresponding to the operation instructing character (FIG. 198(a)) during the attack mode ending effect shown in Modification 6, and includes operation of the effect switch 66 and the like. If an affirmative determination is made in step S11205, the process advances to step S11206 to determine whether or not it is in an advantageous section. If it is not in the advantageous section, in step S11207, a process for displaying the immediate/post-addition ratio for all watermelons and the immediate/post-addition ratio for all cherries is performed. Incidentally, whether or not the game is in the advantageous interval is judged to be not in the advantageous interval in the end game of the advantageous interval (the game in which the attack mode ending effect is executed).

In this case, instead of displaying these ratios on the auxiliary display section 65 as shown in FIG. 198(b), as shown in FIG. code, barcode, etc.). By reading the code display, the player can perform data analysis or the like after the fact using his or her mobile terminal or the like. In addition, by doing so, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the displayed content is read by other players, and it is possible to ensure the superiority of having such information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S11206 and it is determined that the vehicle is in the advantageous section, in step S11208, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to display a restricted display. In the restricted display, as shown in FIG. 200(b), the auxiliary display portion 65 displays the characters "currently restricted", but does not display the immediate loading/post-loading ratio. That is, when the operation requesting the ratio display is in the advantageous section, the output of the information regarding the ratio display for the request operation is restricted. In this way, it is not possible to guess the setting value from the ratio display during the advantageous section, and it is made clear after the advantageous section ends, so that people who are preoccupied with the ratio display can be avoided.

After executing the processing of step S11207 or step S11208, other processing is executed in step S11209, and then the processing for the portable terminal ends. The other processing corresponds to processing for managing other information (total games played, the number of jackpot wins, the number of winning child roles, etc.) that can be read by the portable terminal. Also, if a negative determination is made in step S11205, the mobile terminal processing is terminated as is.

By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the execution timing of the addition notification after the fact. In particular, the number of occurrences and details of advantageous events such as the number of additional games won and the number of additional games are likely to be remembered by the player who desires the advantageous event. When such an event occurs, it is considered that it is likely to be erased from the player's memory, and it is difficult to remember the notification timing afterwards. In this regard, by making the notification timing readable to the portable terminal as in the above configuration, it is possible to greatly utilize the notification timing when data analysis is performed.

<Modification 8>
In the configuration for displaying (outputting) the immediate loading/post-loading ratio at the end of the attack mode, this display (output) may be performed partly at the end of the attack mode. In this modification, when the attack mode is forcibly terminated due to the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games), the ratio is displayed (output). FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing setting processing of the attack mode end effect in this modification.

The setting process of this modified example is substantially the same process as the flowchart in FIG. The difference is that after performing the same processing as in steps S11101 and S11102 in steps S11301 and S11302, it is determined in step S11303 whether or not it is forced termination. In the case of forced termination, in steps S11304 to S11307, similarly to steps S11103 to S11106, processing for displaying (outputting) the ratio is performed. After that, in step S11308, the initialization processing of each counter is executed, and then the setting processing of the attack mode end effect is ended. On the other hand, if the number of remaining games is 0 before the upper limit is reached, instead of forced termination, the process of step S11308 is performed without executing steps S11304 to S11307. End the setting process.

As described above, it is possible to compensate for the forced termination of the attack mode by outputting the information on the immediate loading/post-loading ratio based on the forced termination of the attack mode.

<Sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the player can select the execution timing of the additional effect. FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining how the execution timing of the additional effect is selected in this embodiment. Note that, in the present embodiment, the game in which the additional effect is executed is configured to be executed as the effect at the time of full stop. That is, in the present embodiment, the selection of the execution timing of the additional effect will be described as meaning the selection of the game in which the additional effect is to be executed.

In the present embodiment, in a game in which a specific role is won as an additional opportunity during the attack mode, it is possible to select the execution timing of the additional effect in the case of the additional winning as the specific role opportunity. In this embodiment, the execution timing is selected by determining which of the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be stopped first. Then, as the additional effects with different execution timings, there is an immediate addition effect in which the additional effect is generated in the game in which the additional winning is performed, as shown in the fifth embodiment, and a game after the game in which the additional winning is performed. In the attack mode, etc., when the number of remaining games on the display reaches a predetermined number (1), a post-adding effect is generated, and the sign mode is performed over a predetermined number of games from the game in which the winning game is added. After that, there is set an omen-mediated effect in which an additional effect is generated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 202(a), when a specific combination is won during the attack mode, the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters as a notification mode selection effect, "Stop the reels and choose your fate!" By operating the stop switches 42 to 44, it is informed that the aspect of the additional performance at the time of winning the additional prize can be selected. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that when the left reel 32L is first stopped, the immediate loading effect is selected, and when the middle reel 32M is first stopped, the subsequent loading effect is selected, and the right reel 32R is first stopped. It is assumed that when the stop operation is performed, the presentation via omen is selected. Therefore, in the notification mode selection effect, a character imitating the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is associated with a corresponding character corresponding to the effect selected when the respective stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. to display. Specifically, a first corresponding character TP1 (for example, the character "Immediately") is displayed corresponding to the character of the stop switch 42 to indicate an immediate riding effect, and a subsequent riding effect is displayed to correspond to the character of the stop switch 43. A second corresponding character TP2 (for example, the character "back") is displayed, and a third corresponding character TP3 (for example, the character "before") is displayed corresponding to the character of the stop switch 44 to indicate the effect via the omen. . In addition, a chance notification effect (surprise mark) indicating that the game is winning a special role is also generated. displayed so as not to overlap each other.

When the player first stops the left reel 32L in the game, as shown in FIG. A performance occurs.

When the player first stops the middle reel 32M in the game, as shown in FIG. A subsequent riding effect corresponding to the selection of the riding effect is generated. In this example, a first post-add character BUP1 is displayed to indicate that the add-on right based on the watermelon opportunity has been acquired as the post-add effect. The post-add effect based on the first post-add character BUP1 etc. is as described in the fifth embodiment and the like.

When the player first stops the right reel 32R in the game, as shown in FIG. A premonitory-passing effect corresponding to the selection of the passing-through effect is generated. In this example, as an effect for passing through the omen, the characters "chance" are displayed in the approximate center of the auxiliary display section 65, and a band display of "under chance" is generated on the auxiliary display section 65, and the omen mode is entered. is shown. The additional effect via the portent mode will be described later, but the additional effect occurs when the portent mode continues over the set number of games and the set number of games becomes 0.

A processing configuration for realizing the above effect will be described below.

FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing processing for setting an additional effect in this embodiment. As already explained, the setting process of the additional effect is a process executed by the display control device 81 when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in the special combination winning game.

In step S12001, a process of grasping the number of additional games to be played this time is performed. Then, in step S12002, it is determined whether or not the via precursor flag is set. The via omen flag is a flag that is set when the player selects the effect via omen based on the additional opportunity. If the via-omen flag is set in step S12002, it means that an additional opportunity occurs in a game prior to the current game, an effect via omen is selected, and the omen mode is on based on this selection, that is, , means that the additional effect has not yet occurred. If an affirmative determination is made in step S12002, in step S12003, the number of additional games in the omen mode, that is, the number of additional games in which the effect via the omen is selected and the additional effect has not yet occurred is grasped, and the grasped number of additional games. is added to the number of additional games this time. Then, in step S12004, a process of clearing the via precursor flag is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S12002, or after the processing of step S12004 is executed, in step S12005, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are turned on so that the notification mode selection effect (FIG. 202(a)) is executed. Control. Then, in step S12006, after executing the process of setting the notification mode selection flag, the setting process of the additional effect is finished. The notification mode selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the stop operation of the first reel in the current game is the stop operation targeted for the notification mode selection effect.

Next, in the game in which the notification mode selection effect is executed, the process when the stop operation of the first reel is performed (first stop ON effect setting process) will be described with reference to FIG. This process is a process executed in step S2204 in each stop operation effect setting process (FIG. 49). More specifically, this process is executed in step S2204 when it is determined in step S2203 that the first stop ON operation is set as the target reel.

In step S12101, it is determined whether or not the notification mode selection flag is set. If it is not set, in step S12102, another set first stop ON effect is executed, and then the first stop ON effect setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S12101 that the notification mode selection flag has been set, processing for clearing the notification mode selection flag is executed in step S12103. Then, in step S12104, it is determined whether or not the immediate ride effect has been selected in the current notification mode selection effect, that is, whether or not the current first stop ON operation was the stop ON operation of the left reel 32L (left stop switch 42). judge. When an affirmative determination is made in step S12104, a process of setting an immediate ride selection flag is executed in step S12105, and then the present first stop ON effect setting process is terminated. The immediate ride selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the immediate ride effect has been selected.

When a negative determination is made in step S12104, in step S12106, whether or not the post-adding effect is selected in the current notification mode selection effect, that is, the current first stop ON operation is the middle reel 32M (middle stop switch 43). It is determined whether or not there was a stop ON operation. When an affirmative determination is made in step S12106, the process of setting the post-addition selection flag is executed in step S12107, and then the present first stop ON effect setting process is terminated. The post-addition selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the post-addition effect has been selected.

If a negative determination is made in step S12106, it means that the effect via omen is selected in the current notification mode selection effect, that is, the current first stop ON operation is the stop ON of the right reel 32R (right stop switch 44). It means that it was an operation. In this case, in step S12108, after executing the process of setting the precursor selection flag, the present first stop ON time effect setting process is terminated. The omen selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the effect via omen has been selected.

FIG. 205 is a flow chart showing processing for additional notification effect at full stop in this embodiment. The all-stop additional notification effect process is a process executed in steps S2309 and S2319 in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 51). Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, the additional effect is executed as a full stop effect, and is not executed during the first stop ON operation, the second stop OFF operation, or the like.

In step S12201, it is determined whether or not the immediate ride selection flag is set. If the immediate ride selection flag is set, in step S12202, a process of clearing the immediate ride selection flag is executed. After that, in step S12203, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute an additional effect triggered by the current game (see FIG. 202(b1)).

If a negative determination is made in step S12201, it is determined in step S12204 whether or not the post-selection flag is set. If the trailing selection flag is set, in step S12205, processing for clearing the trailing selection flag is executed. After that, in step S12206, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute the additional effect (see FIG. 202(b2)). Then, in step S12207, a process of storing the current number of additional games in the individual area is executed, and in step S12208, a process of setting a post-addition flag is executed. The processing of these steps S12207 and S12208 corresponds to the processing of steps S11016, S11019, S11023, etc., and is processing for storage for generating an additional effect after the fact.

If the determination in step S12204 is negative, it is determined in step S12209 whether or not the portent selection flag is set. If the portent selection flag is set, in step S12210, processing for clearing the portent selection flag is executed. After that, in step S12211, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute an effect for the passage of the omen (see FIG. 202(b3)). Then, in step S12212, a process of storing the current number of additional games in the individual area is executed, and in step S12213, a lottery process for the number of predictive games is executed. Then, in step S12214, a process of inputting the number of predictive games drawn in step S12213 to the continuous effect counter is executed, and in step S12215, a process of setting a continuous effect flag and a via predictive flag is executed. The processing of setting the continuous effect flag in steps S12213, S12214 and S12215 corresponds to the processing of steps S2506, S2507 and S2509, and the processing for setting the portent mode on the display control device 81 side and It is a process in the case of executing a continuous effect based on. Further, by setting the via-omen flag in step S12216, when the setting processing of the additional effect is carried out in subsequent games (games until the number of omen games set in step S12212 is completed), An affirmative determination is made in step S12002.

After executing any one of steps S12203, S12208 and S12215, or after making a negative determination in step S12209, the process proceeds to step S12216. The processing of steps S12216 to S12220 is processing when it is selected to generate an additional effect in the subsequent games instead of the additional winning game, that is, when the additional effect or the effect via the omen is selected. .

That is, in step S12216, it is determined whether or not the add-on flag is set and the current game is a game for generating a add-on effect. More specifically, when the post-loading flag is set and the display remaining number counter HG is 1 as a predetermined value, affirmative determination is made in step S12216. When an affirmative determination is made in step S12216, setting processing of a post-adding effect is executed in step S12217.

Here, setting processing of the post-adding effect in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 206 . Incidentally, in the post-adding effect in this embodiment, basically the same effect as the post-adding effect (details notification) in the zone shown in the fifth embodiment is generated.

That is, in step S12301, the individual area in which the oldest data is stored among the plurality of individual areas is referred to, and the process of acquiring the data (additional game number) of the individual area is executed. In this case, the corresponding characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. are enlarged and displayed substantially in the center of the auxiliary display portion 65. FIG. In the subsequent step S12302, it is determined whether or not the effect switch 66 has been operated as an operation unit for effect, and waits until it is operated. If it is operated, the process advances to step S12303, and controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so as to display the number of additional games along with the effect of opening the treasure box as a content notification (FIG. 185(b)). ). In the following step S12304, the number corresponding to the number of games of the additional effect executed in step S12303 is added to the display remaining number counter HG, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the corresponding display is updated. do. Then, in step S12305, processing for erasing the current individual area data is performed, and in step S12306, it is determined whether or not unannounced individual area data remains.

In step S12306, if the data of the unannounced individual area remains, the process returns to step S12301 to repeat the processing of steps S12301 to S12305. That is, the add-on effect is configured to sequentially perform the add-on effect in the order in which the add-on opportunity occurs, and the player can enjoy the add-on effect while remembering at what timing the add-on effect occurred. Become.

If it is determined in step S12306 that no unreported individual area data remains, the process advances to step S12307 to execute processing for clearing the trailing flag. After that, in step S12308, as end processing of the add-on effect, for example, after notifying the total number of games added in the add-on effect of this time, etc., the setting process of the add-on effect is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the processing for addition notification at all stop time, when a negative determination is made in step S12216 or after the processing of step S12217 is executed, the process proceeds to step S12218. In step S12218, it is determined whether or not the via omen flag is set and the continuous effect counter is zero. As already explained, the continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games in the precursor mode, and is a counter that is decremented by one for each game. That is, the game in which the continuous effect counter becomes 0 is the final game in the sign mode. In this case, the process advances to step S12219 to execute processing for reading the number of additional games from the individual area. Then, in step S12220, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the corresponding number of games is added to the effect. When a negative determination is made in step S12218, or after the processing of step S12220 is executed, the processing for addition notification at stop is ended.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the relationship between the winning modes of various special combinations and the first reel, which is the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect.

When the specific combination is a strong cherry, as already explained, the combination of symbols corresponding to the 28th minor combination, the 32nd minor combination to the 35th minor combination stops on the active line, and a strong cherry winning is established (Fig. 17). For any of the 28th small winning combination and the 32nd through 35th small winning combinations, the corresponding symbol on the left reel 32L is the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol (FIG. 10). In this case, the "cherry" symbol is placed fourth on the left reel 32L, and the "second replay" symbol is placed sixth on the left reel 32L. That is, in the 3-bet game, from the timing when the 18th "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage to the timing when the 4th "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the left stop switch 42 is operated (ON operation), the symbol corresponding to the strong cherry can be stopped on the effective line. In other words, if the operation timing of the left stop switch 42 is the timing when the 5th "LUCKY" symbol to the 17th "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L reach the lower row, the symbol corresponding to the strong cherry is the valid line. It cannot be stopped immediately, resulting in a so-called dropout.

On the other hand, in the strong cherry, the corresponding symbols of the middle reel 32M are, for example, the "red bell" symbol, the "white bell" symbol or the "cherry" symbol in the 28th minor combination (Fig. 10). , are not separated by more than five symbols on the middle reel 32M, and regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the middle stop switch 43, any one of the symbols can be stopped on the activated line. In addition, in the strong cherry, the corresponding symbols on the right reel 32R are, for example, the "cherry" symbol, the "first replay" symbol, or the "second replay" symbol in the 28th minor winning combination (Fig. 10). Any one of these symbols can be stopped on the activated line regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 .

That is, when the additional winning is a strong cherry, in the notification mode selection effect, if the left reel 32L is stopped first and the immediate winning effect is selected, the strong cherry winning is caused by the stop operation. cannot be established, and there is a possibility that it will be lost. On the other hand, in the notification mode selection effect based on the strong cherry, if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped first to select the trailing effect or the effect via the omen, it will be missed due to the stop operation. There is no case. In this way, when the execution timing of the additional effect is selected based on the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has a different possibility of being missed. The presence or absence of the missing game can be added to the selection game of the execution timing of the additional performance.

For example, as a player who is concerned about the possibility of missing out due to the competition between the selection operation and the stop operation, in the notification mode selection effect triggered by winning a strong cherry, the middle reel 32M and the right reel It is conceivable to stop 32R first. In this case, as the added effect, the added effect or the effect via the omen is selected, and the added effect is generated in the game after the current game. On the other hand, when the left reel 32L is first stopped while being aware of the possibility of missing the winnings, the immediate addition effect is selected, and the addition occurs in the game. As a result, even if there is an omission, it is possible to clearly grasp whether the minor winning combination was not won or whether the omission was due to the occurrence of the additional effect in the game. By doing so, when the selection operation and the stop operation compete with each other, it is possible to create an effect that takes into account the risk of missing an item, and the playability of these selection operations is enhanced.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a game in which a specific role is won during an attack mode, the execution timing (execution game) of the additional performance triggered by the winning of the specific role is made different based on the stop operation mode of the game. More specifically, in the specific winning game, when the left reel 32L is first stopped, an immediate landing effect is generated, and when the middle reel 32M is first stopped, a subsequent landing effect is generated, and the right reel is activated. When the player 32R is operated to stop first, an effect via a sign occurs. In this way, by determining the execution timing of the effect at the time of addition according to the stop operation mode of the additional winning game, it is possible to realize the additional effect according to the taste of the player.

In particular, since the selection of the execution timing of the additional effect is performed in the additional winning game, for example, the selection of the execution timing is performed at the start of the attack mode or before the transition to the attack mode. The timing is likely to be close to the timing at which the additional opportunity is generated. As a result, it is possible to select the execution timing according to the situation of the attack mode that changes from moment to moment, and it is possible to reflect the desires of the player.

In the attack mode, notification of the order of pushing is frequently generated, but in the game for winning a special combination, which is a trigger for adding the key, the notification of the order of pushing is not generated. In other words, the notification mode selection effect and the pressing order notification effect are set so as not to compete with each other. As a result, in the notification mode selection effect, the event that there is no room for selection of the additional effect due to the fact that the pressing order for winning the desired result is set so much does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the game property by the notification mode selection effect.

As described above, while the push order notification occurs frequently during the attack mode, the push order notification does not occur when a special role is won. It is thought that the game proceeds with expectations for the occurrence of a game in which push order notification does not occur. In other words, since the notification mode selection effect is generated in a game in which the push order notification does not occur, the notification mode selection effect is performed in a situation where the degree of attention has already increased, and the game performance by such effect is suitable. can be realized.

As already explained, the attack mode is mainly executed in the second RT state, and in the second RT, the probability of winning one of the replays increases, and replay winnings are established frequently. Replays that can be won during the second RT state include, in addition to push-order replays such as falling replays 1 to 3 and second promotion replays 1 and 2, there are also replays that are not subject to push-order notification such as normal replays. In other words, in the second RT state in which replay wins are frequently won, there are not only games in which desired replay winnings are established by notification of the pressing order, but also games in which replay winnings are established without the notification of pressing order. Based on this premise, since it is configured to generate the notification mode selection effect when the specific role is won, whether the notification mode selection effect is generated depends on whether the specific role is won or the normal replay win. It will function as a branch production of. As a result, the level of interest in the notification mode selection effect is utilized to increase the level of attention in the normal replay winning game, and it is possible to improve the level of attention throughout the attack mode.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, in a situation close to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous period, the effect via omen cannot be selected. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the first stop ON effect setting process in this modification.

The processing of step S12401 to step S12407 is the same as the processing of step S12101 to step S12107. When the left reel 32L is first stopped, the immediate loading selection flag is set, and when the middle reel 32M is first stopped, Set the trailing selection flag. When it is determined in step S12406 that the middle reel 32M is not the first stop, in step S12408 it is determined whether or not the number of games executed in the current advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number of games (1450 games). . In other words, if the predetermined number of games is 1450 games, the affirmative determination in step S12408 means that the upper limit of the advantageous interval is less than 50 games away. In this case, even if the right reel 32R is set as the first stop and the effect via a sign is selected, the process proceeds to step S12405 to execute the process of setting the immediate pick-up selection flag. That is, when an additional opportunity occurs in a situation close to the upper limit of the advantageous section, the additional performance is generated assuming that the immediate addition performance is forcibly selected even if the performance via the sign is selected. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the advantageous section is forcibly terminated during the portent mode. Note that if it is determined in step S12408 that the number of games executed in the current advantageous section is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games, then in step S12409 the predictor selection flag is set and then this 1 End the effect setting process at the time of stop ON.

As described above, in relation to the forced termination game of the advantageous section, by making it possible to limit the execution of the effect selected in the notification mode selection effect, the advantageous section (attack mode ) can be avoided.

In the above configuration, it is assumed that the third corresponding character TP3 is displayed in which the effect via the sign is selected when the right reel 32R is set to the first stop. 3-compatible character TP3 may not be displayed. In this case, instead of the third corresponding character TP3, it is preferable to display the first corresponding character TP1 corresponding to the immediate riding effect. However, since the above configuration does not require a change in the notification mode selection effect itself, there is an advantage that the effect structure can be simplified. In addition, when the right reel 32R is set to the first stop in the notification mode selection effect, it may be configured to forcibly perform the following effect.

Furthermore, in the case where the middle reel 32M is set to the first stop and the additional effect is selected, according to the number of games completed in the advantageous section (if the number of executed games is 1450 or more), the immediate effect is forced. It is good also as a structure which carries out. In this case as well, the second corresponding character TP2 corresponding to the add-on effect may not be displayed, or the first corresponding character TP1 corresponding to the immediate add-on effect may be displayed instead of the second corresponding character TP2. good.

The correspondence between the selection operation executed in the notification mode selection effect and the execution timing of the selected addition notification may be changed according to the number of addition games at the time of the addition winning. Specifically, for example, when the number of additional games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games (100 games), the additional effect is executed with a predetermined probability (50%) at an execution timing different from the execution timing selected by the selection operation. It may be configured to be More specifically, when the number of additional games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games, even if the effect via the sign is selected, the effect via the sign is executed with a predetermined probability instead of the effect via the selected sign. good. By doing so, the surprise of the game being played at a timing different from the player's will is added to the surprise of the number of additional games, making it possible to make the player more astonished.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the notification mode selection effect is executed in the game (a game different from the additional winning game) in which the normal replay is won. FIG. 208(a) is a flow chart showing effect setting processing during normal replay. This process is performed in the display control device 81 during the starting effect setting process as the starting effect of the normal replay winning game in the attack mode.

In step S12501, it is determined whether or not the selected counter provided in the various counter area 183b of the RAM 183 is 1 or more. The selected counter indicates the number of games in which the execution timing of the additional effect selected in the notification mode selection effect is effective, and a predetermined value (20) is input by the selection operation, and is 1 each time one game is completed. A counter to be decremented.

If the selected counter is equal to or greater than 1, the effect setting process for normal replay ends. On the other hand, if the selected counter is 0, the process of setting the notification mode selection flag is performed in step S12502, and then the effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the normal replay winning game, the notification mode selection effect can be executed as the first stop ON effect.

In the first stop ON effect setting process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 209, in steps S12601 to S12608, the same processes as steps S12101 to S12108 are executed. After executing any one of steps S12605, S12607 and S12608, the process advances to step S12609 to execute processing of inputting, for example, "20" as a predetermined value to the selected counter, and then turns on the first stop. End the time effect setting process. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S12501 over 20 games thereafter. More specifically, by performing the selection operation when the normal replay is won, the notification mode selection effect will not occur even if the normal replay is won again during the next 20 games.

As the processing for setting various additional effects, as described above, it is executed in the processing for addition notification at all stop (FIG. 205). More specifically, by generating a notification mode selection effect at the time of winning a normal replay and performing a selection operation, any one of the immediate selection flag, the subsequent selection flag, and the omen selection flag is set, and thereafter, within 20 games. In the case of an additional winning, based on the selection operation performed in the game before the game in which the additional winning was made (based on the flags of the immediate selection flag, the subsequent selection flag, and the omen selection flag), all stop In the time addition notification process, the execution timing of the addition effect is set.

That is, in the notification mode selection effect at the time of winning the normal replay, when the left reel 32L is set to the first stop and the immediate ride effect is selected, the immediate ride selection flag is set, and if the additional win is made in the subsequent game, the additional win An additional effect is generated in the winning game (immediately an additional effect is generated). In addition, in the notification mode selection effect at the time of winning the normal replay, when the middle reel 32M is set to the first stop and the second addition effect is selected, the second addition selection flag is set, and if the second addition win is made in the subsequent game, the attack is performed. When the number of remaining games on the display of the mode reaches a predetermined number of games, an additional effect is generated (a post-add effect is generated). In the notification mode selection effect at the time of winning the normal replay, when the right reel 32R is set to the first stop and the effect via the omen is selected, the omen selection flag is set, and if an additional win is made in the subsequent game, the omen mode is selected. After passing through, an additional production occurs (an indication via a sign occurs).

In this way, by making the execution game of the notification mode selection effect and the additional winning game different games, the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect and the eye pressing operation in winning the specific combination do not compete. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event such as a failure to perform the pressing operation due to too much concentration on the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect, resulting in a failure to pick up.

In this modification, the selected counter processing for managing the selected counter will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 208(b). The selected counter processing is performed in the display control device 81 as one processing in the effect setting processing (FIG. 51) at the time of all stoppage.

In step S12511, it is determined whether or not the selected counter is 1 or more. If it is not 1 or more, that is, if it is 0, the selected counter processing is terminated. If it is 1 or more, in step S12512, a process of subtracting 1 from the selected counter is executed. Then, in step S12513, it is determined whether or not the selected counter has become 0, and if it is not 0, the selected counter processing is terminated. If it becomes 0, it is determined in step S12514 whether or not the subsequent selection flag or the precursor selection flag is set. If any of these flags is set, the corresponding flag is cleared in step S12515, and the immediate pick-up selection flag is set in step S12516, after which the selected counter processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S12514 and the immediate pick-up selection flag is set, even if the selected counter becomes 0, the selected flag is not cleared, and the selected counter processing is continued. finish.

As described above, the notification mode selection effect is generated in the normal replay winning game in the attack mode, and the selection operation in the game is considered effective over the predetermined number of games. When an opportunity to add a prize occurs before winning the replay, the configuration is such that a performance to add the prize is generated immediately. In other words, the default instant-on effect is set, and by the notification mode selection effect of the normal replay winning game, the additional effect for a predetermined number of subsequent games is executed at a timing different from the default instant-on effect, and the post-add effect or the effect via the omen. It was configured to let you choose to be done. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the selection operation at the time of winning the normal replay is regarded as valid until the end of the attack mode. However, with such a configuration, even if the execution timing desired by the player changes due to a change in the game situation (increase or decrease in the number of remaining games in the attack mode, an increase in the number of earned medals, etc.) after performing the selection operation, , it becomes difficult to respond to the change. On the other hand, by doing so, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the player himself/herself selects the execution timing of the additional effect according to the situation of the attack mode that can change from moment to moment.

Moreover, since the predetermined number of games is set to be the number of games (20 games) shorter than the initial number of games (50 games) of the attack mode, for example, when the notification mode selection effect occurs immediately after the start of the attack mode, , there remains room for the notification mode selection effect to occur at least one more time. As a result, even if the addition does not occur, in preparation for the case where it occurs, the execution timing of the addition effect is changed between the first half and the second half of the attack mode, and the player who wants to change the effect of the attack mode. It is possible to meet the needs. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game effect that meets the various needs of the player.

Furthermore, since it is configured to generate the notification mode selection effect with the randomly occurring event such as normal replay winning as a trigger, as described above, whether or not the notification mode can be selected also depends on luck. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the execution timing of the additional notification selected by the selection operation can be changed after the fact. FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing processing for addition notification when all vehicles are stopped in this modified example.

205. The difference between the process for addition notification at full stop in this modification and the flowchart of FIG. 205 is the process when the immediate ride selection flag is set. That is, if it is determined in step S12701 that the immediate ride selection flag is set, processing for clearing the immediate ride selection flag is executed in step S12702. Then, in step S12703, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect of the current game. The processes of steps S12701 to S12703 are the same as the processes of steps S12201 to S12203 described above.

In step S12704, it is determined whether or not the trailing flag is set. When it is determined that the add-on flag is set in step S12704, the add-on effect was selected at the add-on opportunity that occurred before this add-on opportunity, but the add-on effect was immediately performed at this add-on opportunity. means selected. In this case, correction processing is executed in step S12705. If the add-on flag is not set in step S12704, or if the correction process is executed in step S12705, the process advances to step S12718. The processing of steps S12706 to S12722 is the same as the processing of steps S12204 to S12220.

The correction processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S12801, an effect that can be moved forward is set. The effect that can be moved forward is an effect for notifying that the additional effect that was supposed to occur just before the end of the attack mode can be executed in the game this time by selecting the later effect. . More specifically, based on the first character BUP1, the second character BUP2, etc. acquired as the right to add on, to notify the situation in which it is possible to generate an add-on effect in the current game. For example, on the auxiliary display unit 65, a character display of "Would you like to open the stored treasure box?" Also, in the front-loading possible performance, the characters "YES" and "NO" are displayed, and the player can select whether or not to generate the front-loading additional performance by operating the performance switch 66 or the like.

After generating the forward tiltable effect in step S12801, it is determined in step S12802 whether or not a forward tilt instruction operation is performed to generate an additional effect by tilting forward. In the above example, it is preferable that the selection operation of the character display of "YES" is performed as the forward tilt instruction operation in the forward tilt possible effect.

If the forward-tilting instruction operation has not been performed in step S12802, it is determined in step S12803 whether or not a backward-loading maintenance operation has been performed to prevent the generation of the forward-tilting additional effect. In the above example, it is preferable that an operation for selecting the character display of "NO" in the front-loading possible effect is regarded as a rear-mounting maintaining operation. Further, for example, the operation of any one of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 may be the subsequent loading maintenance operation. This is because such an operation can be regarded as a declaration of intention to start the next game, and can also be regarded as a declaration of intention not to generate an additional performance ahead of schedule in the current game.

If it is determined in step S12803 that the trailing maintenance operation has been performed, the correction processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S12803, the process returns to step S12802, and loops until either the forward loading instruction operation or the rear loading maintaining operation is performed.

If it is determined in step S12802 that the forward tilt instruction operation has been performed, the number of stored individual areas is displayed in step S12804. More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 212(a), the first back-up character BUP1 and the second back-up character BUP2 are arranged and displayed according to the order in which the back-up effect should have been performed. This allows the player to grasp how many post-loading rights exist. In FIG. 212(a), three first add-on characters BUP1 are displayed side by side, indicating that there are three add-on rights triggered by the watermelon winning.

In subsequent step S12805, it is determined whether or not an individual area selection operation has been performed. For example, in FIG. 212(a), a cursor such as an arrow is displayed for the rearranged rights (treasure chests), and by moving/determining the cursor, one rearward right (treasure box) can be selected. . It is preferable to use the effect switch 66 for selecting the right to be added later. For example, the cursor may be automatically moved at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 seconds) to indicate the desired right to be added later. It is assumed that when the performance switch 66 is operated in this state, one post-loading right is selected and an individual area selection operation is performed. If an individual area selection operation has not been performed, the process returns to step S12805 and waits until a selection operation is performed.

If a selection operation has been performed, in step S12806, a process of reading data on the number of added games of the selected individual area is executed. Then, in step S12807, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the corresponding individual area is superimposed (FIG. 212(b)). In step S12808, processing is performed to add the current number of additional games to the display remaining number counter HG, and in step S12809, data erasing processing of the individual area corresponding to the additional effect generated in step S12807 is performed.

In step S12810, it is determined whether or not there is an unreported individual area. If it exists, the process returns to step S12802 and repeats steps S12802 to S12809. If there is no unreported individual area, a negative determination is made in step S12810, and the process advances to step S12811 to execute the process of clearing the trailing flag. After that, in step S12812, after executing the end processing of the post-adding effect, the correction processing is ended. The processing of steps S12811 and S12812 is the same as the processing of steps S12307 and S12308.

In the correction processing in this modified example, the characters corresponding to the acquired additional rights are displayed in order as shown in FIG. 212(a), and each character can be selected regardless of the acquisition order. That is, regardless of the order of occurrence of the additional opportunity that triggered the additional production, it is possible to generate the additional production. When there is a post-add right, it is possible to select to execute the add-on performance based on the second post-add right before the add-on performance based on the first post-load right.

More specifically, in FIG. 212(a), as three post-addition rights, from the left, the left treasure box indicates the post-addition right based on the first occurrence of the addition opportunity, and the middle treasure box is the second occurrence of the addition opportunity. The right treasure box shows the right of addition based on the third occurrence of the additional opportunity. The cursor shown in FIG. 212(a) points to the treasure chest corresponding to the second right to be added. In that situation, if it is determined that an individual area selection operation has been performed (step S12805: YES), in step S12806 the number of additional games is acquired from the individual area corresponding to the second additional right, and in step S12806 the number of additional games is obtained. An additional effect based on the second right to be added is generated (FIG. 212(b)). In this case, the add-on effect of the add-on right based on the add-on opportunity generated first has not yet occurred. That is, it is possible to make the order of occurrence of the additional opportunity and the order of occurrence of the additional performance in the subsequent performance different.

As described above, even if the additional effect is selected by the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect, the additional effect corresponding to the additional effect is supposed to be performed ex post facto. By making it possible to execute the game at a timing earlier than the timing of the game, it is possible to deal with a change of heart of the player according to the game situation that changes moment by moment. For example, if an additional opportunity occurs at the beginning of the attack mode, even if you select the additional production based on this additional opportunity as a post-addition production after expecting that the additional opportunity will occur after that, it is unlikely. There is also a possibility that the player may change his/her mind and desire to generate the additional effect selected as the additional effect before the execution timing of the additional effect due to deviation or the like. In this respect, as described above, by making it possible to change the selected post-add effect to the immediate add effect after the fact, it is possible to flexibly respond to the player's change of heart.

The opportunity for enabling the above change is the selection of the immediate addition effect at the time of the addition opportunity. If the timing for enabling the change, that is, the timing for executing the correction processing, is configured to be infinitely changeable, for example, by generating it every game, the effect of whether or not to make the change (forwardable effect) is frequently generated. This may cause annoyance, and may result in a configuration in which the intention of selecting the additional effect is not respected. In that respect, if the immediate addition effect is selected after the subsequent addition effect is selected, there is a high possibility that the player has a change of heart. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to reduce the execution frequency of the processing for the surroundings, and realize an effect that meets the needs of the player within a range that does not make the player feel troublesome in the effect.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is changed. As already explained, in each of the above embodiments, when the number of games executed during the advantageous interval reaches the maximum number of games (1500 games), the advantageous interval is forced regardless of the number of remaining games such as attack mode. A configuration (section display second processing) is used to terminate the processing immediately. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to the above-described first forced termination condition for the upper limit number of games, the number of medals increased or decreased (the difference between the number of medals paid out and the number of used medals) during the advantageous section is the upper limit increase number. Reaching (upper limit number of sheets, 2400 sheets) is set as a second forced termination condition.

213 and 213, the advantageous section ends under the first forced termination condition of the upper limit number of games and the second forced termination condition of the increased number of upper limit games. Description will be made with reference to FIG.

FIG. 213 shows how the advantageous section ends under the first forced termination condition. It is assumed that, for example, winning the challenge mode at timing ta1 starts the advantageous section, and the game shifts to the challenge mode at timing ta2. As already explained, even when the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode is won and the shift to the challenge mode is made, it is difficult for the slot machine 10 to generate the press order notification, and the number of medals held decreases as the game progresses. If the attack mode is won during the challenge mode and a transition to the attack mode occurs at the timing of ta3, the pressing order information can occur and the number of medals in possession increases. After that, for example, the transition to the VB mode occurs at ta4, and the attack mode returns at ta5, etc. When the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit of 1500 games at the timing of ta6, The advantageous section is forcibly terminated. In this example, although the number of increased or decreased medals in the advantageous section has not reached the upper limit increase (2400) at the timing of ta6, the first forced termination condition, which is the upper limit number of games, is satisfied. The advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of the number of remaining games such as attack mode.

FIG. 214 shows how the advantageous section ends under the second forced termination condition. It is assumed that, for example, winning the challenge mode at timing tb1 starts the advantageous section, and the game shifts to the challenge mode at timing tb2. Then, similarly to ta3 above, by shifting to the attack mode in which the push order notification can occur at the timing of tb3, an increase in the number of medals held can be expected.

Here, the RT state is shifted to the 2nd RT state or the 3rd RT state with a high replay probability by the push order notification at the time of winning the push order replay. 1) Winning a prize can be expected to increase the number of medals, as already explained. An increase of about 1.90 cards per game can be expected. In addition, bonus wins such as the 1st BB and the 2nd BB are provided as game results that can be expected to increase the number of medals held (can be expected to win medals). Medal payout occurs as the number of payouts. In the bonus state, one of the BB small/medium combination 1 to BB small/small combination 3 is won with a high probability every game, and an increase of about 6.00 per game can be expected. In other words, when comparing the number of medals increased (net increase) per game in the above ART state and the net increase in the bonus state, the net increase in the bonus state is larger, and in order to obtain the same number of payouts, the bonus A smaller number of games will suffice through the state.

In the example of FIG. 214, timings tb4 to tb5 and timings tb6 to tb7 indicate that the advantageous section has been completed as a bonus state. After the bonus state ends at tb7, when the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section reaches 2400, which is the upper limit increase number, at the timing of tb8, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. In this example, at timing tb8, the number of games played in the advantageous section has not reached the upper limit (1500 games, tb9), but the second forced termination condition, which is the upper limit increase, is satisfied. The advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of the number of remaining games in the attack mode or the like.

That is, if the upper limit increase number in the advantageous interval is set as the second forced termination condition, the number of games until the second forced termination condition is reached depends on the state in which each game in the advantageous interval is played. become different. FIG. 215 collectively shows lottery tables for the normal game state, the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state, and the BB state in this embodiment. As already explained, the normal game state and the 1st RT state have different types of replays that can be won, but the total replay probability is common, and the replay probability is relatively low compared to the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state. is in a state of In the second RT state and the third RT state, although the types of replays that can be won are different, the total replay probability is common, and the replay probability is relatively high compared to the normal game state and the first RT state. is. Therefore, in FIG. 215, the normal gaming state and the first RT state are collectively displayed as a low RT state, and the second RT state and the third RT state are collectively displayed as a high RT state. Note that the pressing order bell, the winning probability of the CB, and the number of medals paid out (privilege) at the time of winning are different from those in each of the above-described embodiments, but this is a change for adjusting the number of net additions.

FIG. 216 shows the difference in the number of net additions depending on each state and whether or not there is notification of the pressing order.

In a situation where the display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode and no press order notification occurs, and in the above-described low RT state (normal game state and first RT state), the expected net increase in number per game is about -1. The number of medals is 60, and the number of medals held decreases as the game is played. On the other hand, even in a situation where the pressing order notification does not occur, in the above high RT state (2nd RT state and 3rd RT state), the net increase in the number of coins that can be expected per game is about -0.03. The game can be played with almost no reduction in

On the other hand, if the display mode is in a situation where push order notification occurs, such as attack mode or VB mode, in the low RT state, the net increase in the number of cards that can be expected per game is about -0.99, which is the above. The net increase in the number of sheets in the low RT state in the case where the notification of the pressing order does not occur (decrease is less). In a situation where push order notification occurs and in a high RT state, the expected net increase in the number of medals per game is approximately +1.90, and many medals can be expected to be obtained.

Here, each of the net increase numbers is a net increase number that does not include the number of medals that can be acquired in the bonus state that transitions based on the winning of the bonus. That is, in the bonus state based on the winning of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB as described above, the net increase in the number of coins that can be expected per game is about +6.00. The net increase number in the bonus state is higher than the net increase number in the low RT state and high RT state in the situation where the above-mentioned pushing order notification does not occur, and in the low RT state and high RT state in the situation where the pushing order notification can occur. By taking into account the bonus state, the net increase in the number of coins per game that can actually be expected in each game becomes larger than when the bonus state is not taken into account. In FIG. 216, the net increase in the number of sheets considering the bonus state is also displayed, and in the low RT state in which the push order notification does not occur, about −1.05 sheets in the low RT state, about +0.52 sheets in the high RT state, and the pressing order. It is about −0.44 sheets in the low RT state and about +2.46 sheets in the high RT state in a situation where the notification can occur.

The net increase in the number of cards that takes into account the bonus state is the value obtained by converting the increased amount in the bonus state per game from the probability of winning the bonus per game and the number of cards obtained in the bonus state at the time of winning, without considering the bonus state. It is calculated by adding to the net increase number per game. For example, if the probability of winning a bonus is about 1/254 and the number of winning cards in the bonus state is 144 (216 cards - 3 cards x 24 games), the increase in the bonus state per game is converted to: Approximately 1/254×144 sheets=approximately 0.56 sheets. Then, this converted value is added to the above-mentioned net increase number without considering the bonus state, and the net increase number considering the bonus state is calculated.

The upper limit increase number (2400), which is the second condition for forced termination of the advantageous section defined in this embodiment, is the first condition for forced termination of the advantageous section. The expected number of acquisitions when digested in a possible high RT state (1500 games x about 1.90 = 2850), and the expected number of acquisitions when bonus conditions are added (1500 games x about 2.46 is set to be less than the number of sheets = 3690 sheets). In other words, if all the advantageous sections are completed in a high RT state in which the push order notification can occur, the advantageous sections are forcibly terminated under the second forced termination condition before the first forced termination condition. becomes (Fig. 214).

FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing the second section display processing in this embodiment.

In step S13001, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous section. Here, in this embodiment, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator may not be illuminated even after the transition to the advantageous section. This configuration will be described in detail later, but as already described, in the first section display process, the number of games in the advantageous section is counted (the number of games in the advantageous section is counted by setting the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag). addition of number AG). Therefore, in this embodiment, in step S13001, the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is grasped instead of whether or not the interval indicator is displayed. If the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 0, it is determined that the section is not in the advantageous section.

In step S13002, addition processing for the number of games AG in the advantageous interval is executed. Then, in step S13003, update processing of the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The advantageous interval increase/decrease number ZM is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the increase/decrease number of medals in the advantageous interval (the difference between the number of medals betted and the number of medals paid out in each game in the advantageous interval). In S13003, based on the winning result of the current game (previous winning result handling process and payout determination process), the number of medals increased or decreased (number of medals paid out in the current game - number of bets in the current game) is grasped. Then, a process of adding the medal increase/decrease number to the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM is performed. For example, if the current game is a 3-bet game and nine medals are paid out, the medal increase/decrease number is +6, and in step S13003, +6 is added to the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM. If the current game is a 3-bet game and medals are not paid out, the medal increase/decrease number is -3, and in step S13003, -3 is added to the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM.

After executing the process of step S13003, the number-of-remaining-games management process is executed in step S13004. The remaining game number management process is as shown in the flowchart of FIG. If the upper limit number of games in the section is exceeded, step S13110: NO), and in step S13111, instead of the above-described excess flag, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the first forced termination condition can be satisfied after that, and in the present embodiment, the second forced termination condition can be satisfied thereafter. It is configured to be distinguishable from the situation (second excess flag).

After executing the remaining game number management process in step S13004, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S13005. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing remaining number management processing.

In step S13201, the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM updated in step S13003 is grasped. In the following step S13202, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG (step S13107) calculated in the remaining game management processing in step S13004 and the expected net increase in the number of games in the advantageous section stored in the ROM 105 (expected increase/decrease number KM), a process of calculating the remaining increase/decrease expected number NM that can be obtained in the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is executed. In this embodiment, the expected increase/decrease number of sheets KM is the net increase in number of sheets (about +2.46 sheets) that takes into account the bonus state when the advantageous section is digested in the high RT state in the situation where the above-mentioned push order notification occurs. ) is used. That is, for example, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 500 games, the expected remaining increase/decrease number of cards NM is 500 games×2.46 cards=1230 cards.

In step S13203, based on the advantageous section increase/decrease number of sheets ZM grasped in step S13201 and the expected remaining increase/decrease number of sheets NM calculated in step S13202, the current number of remaining games in the advantageous section is taken into account to obtain during the current advantageous section. A process of calculating the number of sheets expected to increase or decrease (total increase/decrease expected number of sheets SM) is performed. Then, in step S13204, a process of calculating the number of blank sheets FM that can be increased is performed. The processing of step S13204 corresponds to the processing of calculating the number of vacant games FG that can be added in step S13109 in the number-of-remaining-games management processing. The process of step S13204 predicts in advance that the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated under the second forced termination condition in the subsequent game. It is a process to That is, in step S13204, the total expected increase/decrease number of sheets SM calculated in step S13203 is subtracted from 2400 sheets, which is the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section.

By the way, as shown in Figures 213 and 214 above, even during the advantageous section, before the transition to the attack mode occurs (up to ta3 in Figure 213 and up to tb3 in Figure 214), in each game The number of medals you have can decrease, and the net increase in the number of medals during this period is negative. Then, in the prediction process (step S13202) performed in each game during this period, it is conceivable that the prediction should be made with the net increase in the number of medals to decrease. However, as described above, in predicting whether or not the upper limit increase number is reached from the relationship with the current advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM, the decrease up to ta3 or tb3 is absorbed by the current advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM It is something that can be done. Therefore, as described above, a configuration is adopted in which the net increase in the number of sheets in between is not separately calculated, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

In step S13205, based on the processing result of step S13204, it is determined whether or not the number of empty sheets FM that can be increased becomes 0 or less, and the process will be forcibly terminated under the second forced termination condition in the future. If the number of empty sheets FM is equal to or greater than 1, it is determined that the number of increments has not reached the upper limit, and the remaining number management processing is terminated. If the empty number FM is 0 or less, the process advances to step S13206 to set the second excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the remaining number management process ends. The second excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the second forced termination condition can be satisfied thereafter.

In the second section display processing, after executing the remaining number management processing in step S13005, it is determined in step S13006 whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section AG has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or whether the number of games in the advantageous section has increased or decreased. It is determined whether or not ZM has reached 2400 or more, which is the upper limit increase number. If any of these forced termination conditions are met, the process advances to step S13007 to execute processing for ending the advantageous section.

That is, in step S13007, the number of games in the advantageous interval AG and the number of increased/decreased numbers in the advantageous interval ZM are cleared to zero. In the subsequent step S13008, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S13009, after performing processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the second section display processing ends. The display end processing of the section indicator and the data initialization processing have already been described.

Also, even if it is determined in step S13006 that none of the forced termination conditions have been satisfied, if it is determined in steps S13010 and S13011 that the normal termination conditions have been satisfied (challenge mode winning flag and attack mode If neither the winning flag, the challenge mode flag, nor the attack mode flag is set), the process advances to step S13007 to perform processing for ending the advantageous section. The processing when the normal end condition is satisfied is also the same as the processing described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are the first forced termination condition that defines the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, and the second forced termination condition that defines the upper limit increased number of the advantageous section. It is predicted in advance that the first forced termination condition and the second forced termination condition will be satisfied in the future (in subsequent games). By setting the excess flag, the CPU 102 can specify that the process will be forcibly terminated in the future.

Then, in the present embodiment, in a situation where these first excess flags and second excess flags are set, if an additional lottery such as an attack mode is won and an addition can occur, the benefit of the addition is due to forced termination. As a compensation for the fact that it is not possible to obtain the set value, the setting value is suggested so as to present information that can be beneficial to the player.

FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing processing for adding the number of games in challenge mode and attack mode in this embodiment. As already explained, this process is the process executed in steps S6025, S918, S1005, S1513, S1517, S1603, etc. of the first special combination process.

In step S13301, it is determined whether or not either the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set. If none of the excess flags have been set, the process advances to step S13302 to determine the number of games to be added this time. End the game number addition processing.

If it is determined in step S13301 that any excess flag has been set, the flow advances to step S13304. In step S13304, as in step S13302, a process of grasping the number of additional games played this time is executed. Then, in step S13305, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the total number of eliminated games TEG in the various counter areas 106e is performed. As already explained, the total lost game number TEG is a counter for grasping the excess number of games that will be lost due to the forced termination of the advantageous section.

After executing the processing of step S13305, processing for setting value suggestion (special notification) is performed in steps S13306 to S13311. That is, in step S13306, the process of grasping the specific combination that triggered the addition of the current bonus is executed. Then, in step S13307, the process of acquiring the fifth specific notification lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed, and then in step S13308, the fifth special notification lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 221, the 5th special notification lottery table includes a special combination that has triggered the addition (the trigger for the 5th special notification), the current display mode and the display mode to be added, and the set excess The probability of winning the fifth special notification lottery is set differently depending on the type of flag.

Specifically, similar to the lottery table for the first special notification, when the display mode is the challenge mode, it is easier to win the fifth special notification lottery than when the display mode is the attack mode. Also in the case of the normalized zone, it is easier to win the fifth special notification lottery than in the case of the attack mode. In addition, it is set so that the probability of winning a strong cherry is higher than that of a weak cherry, so that the combination with a lower appearance rate (winning rate) in each game is more likely to be won in the fifth special notification lottery.

Furthermore, when comparing the case where only the first excess flag is set and the case where only the second excess flag is set, the case where only the first excess flag is set is the case where only the second excess flag is set. is set so that it is easier to win the fifth special notification lottery than when is set. This means that if the first excess flag is set, forced termination will always occur, while if the second excess flag is set, forced termination will not occur depending on the lottery results of subsequent games. The difference is due to the fact that there is also

In addition, the winning probability of the fifth special notification lottery is set to be different between the case where one of the first excess flag and the second excess flag is set and the case where both excess flags are set, In this embodiment, it is set so that it is easier to win the fifth special notification lottery when the both excess flag is set. This is because the certainty of prediction of forced termination increases when both excess flags (also the first excess flag) are set rather than when only the second excess flag is set. If both excess flags (also the second excess flag) are set than if only the flag is set, even if it is forced to end due to the upper limit number of games, it will be sufficient at the time of forced termination. The difference is due to the fact that we can expect an increase in medals.

After performing the fifth special notification lottery in step S13308, it is determined in step S13309 whether or not the result of the fifth special notification lottery was a winning result. If the notification is won, the process of setting the fifth special notification execution command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S13310, and if the notification is not won, the process proceeds to step S13311 After executing the process of setting the fifth special notification non-execution command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the game number addition process is terminated.

The fifth special notification execution command and the fifth special notification non-execution command correspond to the first special notification execution command and the first special notification non-execution command, and receive the fifth special notification execution command The display control device 81 performs a lottery for the type of the fifth special notification, and controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to execute the corresponding fifth special notification. Specifically, the first special notification setting process in FIG. 135 may be applied as the fifth special notification setting process. By using the fifth special notification lottery table (FIG. 222(a)) in which the winning probabilities are set differently depending on the set values, the fifth special notification of the corresponding type may be executed.

More specifically, the fifth special notification lottery table is provided with a fifth special notification A, a fifth special notification B, and a fifth special notification C as types of the fifth special notification. Different presentation contents are set to such an extent that the player can distinguish between the display contents of the display and the effect sound from the speaker 64, respectively.

Which of the various fifth special notifications is likely to be selected differs depending on the setting status of the first excess flag and the second excess flag. Specifically, the fifth special notification A is likely to be selected in a situation where only the first excess flag is set (situation where the second excess flag is not set), and the fifth special notification B is only the second excess flag is set (the first excess flag is not set), and the fifth special notification C is likely to be selected in a situation where both excess flags are set.

Incidentally, by including information about whether or not the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set in the fifth special notification execution command and the like, the display control device 81 side can also perform the above-described types based on each excess flag. A choice can be made. In addition, when the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, the information (command) to that effect is output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81, and based on the information, the above-mentioned 5 It may be configured to select the type of special notification.

In the fifth special notification type lottery, after the lottery based on the type table of FIG. 222(a), details of the fifth special notification to be actually performed are determined based on the detail table of FIG. 222(b). Specifically, the fifth special notification A includes the fifth special notification a1 and the fifth special notification a2, and the fifth special notification B includes the fifth special notification b1 and the fifth special notification b2. The fifth special notification C is provided with a fifth special notification c1 and a fifth special notification c2. Different effect contents are set to such an extent that the player can identify them.

Depending on the set value, the detailed effects of the various fifth special notifications differ in which one is likely to be selected. Specifically, of the fifth special notification A, the fifth special notification a1 is likely to be selected with odd number settings of settings 1, 3, and 5, and the fifth special notification a2 is selected with even number settings of settings 2, 4, and 6. easy to be Among the fifth special notifications B, the fifth special notification b1 is likely to be set to 3 or more, and the fifth special notification b2 is likely to be selected to be set to 2 or less. is set not to be selected. Of the fifth special notification C, the fifth special notification c1 can be selected in settings 5 and 6, but not selected in settings 1 to 4, and the fifth special notification c2 can be selected in settings 1 to 4, Settings 5 and 6 are not selected.

That is, only the first excess flag is set, and then an additional opportunity occurs to perform the fifth special notification A, so that even or odd set values can be predicted, only the second excess flag is set, and then , and the fifth special notification B is performed, making it possible to predict whether the set value is high or low. Then, both excess flags are set, and after that, an additional opportunity occurs and the fifth special notification C is performed, so that it is possible to determine whether the setting is 5 or more or the setting is 4 or less.

In this way, depending on which excess flag is set, that is, depending on which forced termination condition is predicted to force termination in the future, the setting value suggestions that occur differ, Not only the enjoyment of predicting the set value, but also the enjoyment of which forced termination condition should be used to end the advantageous section is added, and the playability of the advantageous section is greatly improved.

More specifically, on the premise of aiming to acquire a large number of medals, it is considered preferable for the player to end the advantageous section under the second forced termination condition as the upper limit increase in number of medals. In view of the desire to see the set value suggestion that is generated by predicting that the condition for forced termination will be satisfied in the future, the purpose of aiming to satisfy the first condition for forced termination is also added.

In addition, the fifth special notification is set so that the setting value that is set by one occurrence is difficult to determine, and the setting value can be narrowed down by multiple occurrences. In that respect, the fifth special notification is a configuration that can occur when the additional condition is satisfied after each excess flag is set, so the set value is narrowed down as the additional condition is satisfied after each excess flag is set. However, it can be said that the more the additional condition is established after each of the excess flags is set, the more advantageous information is presented to the player.

Furthermore, since it is more advantageous for the additional condition to be satisfied after each excess flag is set, it may be advantageous for the player to set each excess flag as early as possible.

In other words, when each excess flag is set, the number of games in the advantageous section and the number of medal increases/decreases cannot be changed any more, but whether or not the additional condition is established after the excess flag is set, As for the game of narrowing down the set value, the advantage of the game differs depending on the timing at which the excess flag is set, thereby improving the game playability.

How the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 223 and 224. FIG.

FIG. 223 shows the case where the advantageous section starts at the timing tc1, the challenge mode starts at the timing tc2, the attack mode starts at the timings tc3 and tc5, and the VB mode starts at the timing tc4. is shown with the timing of tc6 as a reference. In this example, there is no bonus winning during the advantageous section, and in the game from timing tc3 to timing tc6, although the display mode is different between attack mode and VB mode, the number of net additions is about +1.90 in each case. state.

At timing tc6, the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has not reached the upper limit number of games of 1500 games in the advantageous interval, and the number of increased/decreased numbers in the advantageous interval ZM has not reached the upper limit increase of 2400. However, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval ZG is added to the current number of games in the advantageous interval AG, the upper limit number of games is exceeded, and in this case, the first excess flag is set. On the other hand, even if the remaining increase/decrease expected number NM is added to the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM, the upper limit increase number is not exceeded, and in this case, the second excess flag is not set.

In this example, when the number of games AG in the advantageous interval reaches 1500 games at the timing of tc7, the advantageous interval is forcibly terminated. As a result, the advantageous section ends without acquiring 2400 medals, which is the upper limit increase.

In FIG. 224, the advantageous section starts at the timing td1, the challenge mode starts at the timing td2, the attack mode starts at the timings td3, td5 and td7, and the bonus state starts at the timings td4 and td6. The timing of td8 during the attack mode is shown as a reference. In this case, in the games from timing td3 to timing td4, from timing td5 to timing td6, and from timing td7 to timing td8, the net increase number is about +1.90. On the other hand, the bonus state from the timing of td4 to the timing of td5 and from the timing of td6 to the timing of td7 changes in the state where the net increase number is about +6.00, and this bonus state is 1 in the advantageous section. The increased number of cards per game is substantially increased.

At timing td8, the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has not reached the upper limit number of games of 1500 games in the advantageous interval, and the number of increased/decreased numbers in the advantageous interval ZM has not reached the upper limit increase of 2400. However, when the remaining increase/decrease expected number NM is added to the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM, the upper limit increase number is exceeded, and in this case, the second excess flag is set. On the other hand, even if the number ZG of remaining games in the advantageous interval is added to the current number of games AG in the advantageous interval, the upper limit number of games is not exceeded, and in this case, the first excess flag is not set.

In this example, the advantageous interval increase/decrease number ZM reaches 2400 at timing td9, which is timing before timing td10 when the number of games remaining in the advantageous interval ZG is completed, and the advantageous interval is forcibly terminated. As a result, the advantageous section ends without completing the upper limit of 1500 games.

The relationship between both excess flags and the occurrence rate of the fifth special notification will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

In the advantageous section started from the timing of te1, at the timing of te2, if an additional opportunity such as winning a specific role such as a strong cherry occurs, at the timing of te2, the first excess flag and the second excess Since none of the flags are set, an additional lottery based on the additional opportunity is executed. Then, when winning the addition lottery, the corresponding number of games is added.

When the first excess flag corresponding to the upper limit number of games is set at timing te3, and the second excess flag corresponding to the upper limit increase number is not set, and the additional opportunity occurs at timing te4 after that, the above Since the first excess flag is set as shown in , the addition does not occur, and the fifth special notification can occur instead. As described above, the fifth special notification is given through the fifth special notification lottery, and the winning probability (occurrence rate) is indicated here as A %.

When the second excess flag corresponding to the upper limit increase number is set at timing te5, and the first excess flag corresponding to the upper limit number of games is not set, and an additional opportunity occurs at timing te6 after that, Since the second excess flag is set as described above, no extra charge is generated, and the fifth special notification can be generated instead. The winning probability (occurrence rate) of the fifth special notification lottery in this case is displayed here as B%.

When the first excess flag corresponding to the upper limit number of games is set at the timing of te7, and the second excess flag corresponding to the upper limit increase number is also set, and the additional opportunity occurs at the timing of te8. In this case, since the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set as described above, no addition occurs, and the fifth special notification may occur instead. The winning probability (occurrence rate) of the fifth special notification lottery in this case is indicated here as C%.

As already explained, in the fifth special notification lottery table, the probability that the fifth special notification is executed is higher when only the first excess flag is set than when only the second excess flag is set. Also, it is set so that the fifth special notification is executed with a higher probability when both excess flags are set than when only one of the excess flags is set. ing. That is, in the above example, if the occurrence rate of the fifth special notification at each timing of te4, te6, and te8 is compared, if the display mode is the same and the specific role is the same, the fifth special notification at the timing of te6 The occurrence rate (B%) of the notification is the lowest, the occurrence rate (C%) of the fifth special notification at the timing of te8 is the highest, and the occurrence rate increases in the order of B%, A%, and C%. In other words, the probability of presenting information that may be useful to the player, such as suggestion of set values, is lowest when only the second excess flag is set and highest when both excess flags are set.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

As conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section, the first forced termination condition, which is the upper limit number of games, and the second forced termination condition, which is the upper limit increase number of medals, are provided, and it is assumed that these forced termination conditions will be satisfied in the future. , the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG, etc., can be grasped in advance. It is configured to generate a set value suggestion according to the end condition. In this way, by setting multiple forced termination conditions, it is possible to prevent a large increase in medals unintended by the designer, etc. when completing an advantageous section, thereby avoiding an increase in the advantageous degree of the advantageous section. is possible, thereby ensuring the transparency and soundness of the game. On the other hand, by setting the upper limit increase number of medals as the second condition for forced termination, the maximum value of benefits that the player can obtain during the advantageous interval is defined. It is also conceivable that interest in the advantageous section will decline due to reasons on the designer's side, such as avoiding a sudden increase in the advantage of the route. In particular, from the point of view of the game purpose of aiming to increase the number of medals, when it is specified that the number of increases will reach the upper limit in the future, it will not be possible to obtain any more medals in the advantageous section. There is a high possibility that it will become a so-called digestion game. In that regard, as in the above configuration, even after it is specified that the upper limit increase number will be reached in the future, there is a configuration that presents information of high interest to the player, such as setting value suggestion, based on the additional opportunity. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the desire to play, and to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Suggestion of set value in the situation where it is specified that the upper limit number of games, which is the first forced termination condition, is specified, and in the situation where it is specified that the upper limit increase number of medals, which is the second forced termination condition, is reached The type of setting value suggestion and the occurrence rate were varied. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the points such as which forced termination condition will cause the advantageous section to be terminated. In other words, from the viewpoint of aiming to increase the number of medals, it may be preferable for the player to end the advantageous section under the second forced termination condition, but it is possible that the first forced termination condition will be satisfied in the future. From the point of view of desiring setting value suggestion to occur in a specified situation, one would want the first forced termination condition to be satisfied, and vice versa. In this way, in a configuration that has a plurality of forced termination conditions that forcefully end an advantageous section, not only the advantage when the forced termination condition is satisfied, but also given when it is specified that it is satisfied By differentiating the types of benefits (suggestion of setting values) that are provided, the interest in the game is significantly improved, and the game playability is greatly improved.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, the content of setting value suggestion (advantage) depends on which of specifying that the first forced termination condition is met and specifying that the second forced termination condition is met first. be different. FIG. 226(a) is a flowchart showing part of the remaining game management process in this modified example, and FIG. 226(b) is a flowchart showing part of the remaining number management process in this modified example.

That is, as shown in FIG. 226(a), in the remaining game number management process in this modified example, if a negative determination is made in step S13110 and it is determined that the number of available games FG that can be added is 0 or less, step S13401 is performed. proceed to In step S13401, a process of setting the first excess flag is executed as in step S13111. In subsequent step S13402, it is determined whether or not the second excess flag has already been set. That is, the process of step S13402 is the process of determining whether or not it has already been specified that the second forced termination condition will be met ex post facto at the stage where it is specified that the first forced termination condition will be met ex post facto. is. Then, when the second excess flag is set, in step S13403, the process of setting the second first flag in the various flags storage area 106d is executed, and then the number-of-games management process ends. The second first flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the fact that the second forced termination condition has been satisfied has been identified before the fact that the first forced termination condition has been satisfied. be. If the second excess flag is not set in step S13402, the remaining game number management process is terminated.

In the remaining number management process, as shown in FIG. 226(b), if a negative determination is made in step S13205 and it is determined that the number of available sheets FM that can be increased is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step S13451. In step S13451, a process of setting the second excess flag is executed as in step S13206. In subsequent step S13452, it is determined whether or not the first excess flag has already been set. That is, the process of step S13452 is the process of determining whether or not it has already been specified that the first forced termination condition will be met ex post facto at the stage where it is specified that the second forced termination condition will be met ex post facto. is. Then, when the first excess flag is set, in step S13453, the process of setting the first flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and then the number-of-games management process is terminated. The first first flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the determination that the first forced termination condition has been satisfied has been performed prior to the determination that the second forced termination condition has been satisfied. be. If the first excess flag is not set in step S13452, the remaining game number management process is terminated.

By the way, as already explained, in the event that an additional number of games exceeding the upper limit number of games as the first forced termination condition occurs, the additional number of games is not added to the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG, but is added to the total number of eliminated games TEG. be. Further, whether or not the upper limit increase in medals as the second forced termination condition is exceeded is basically determined by using the expected total increase/decrease number of medals SM predicted from the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG. done. Then, when the first excess flag is set and the second excess flag is set, the game specified as exceeding the upper limit increase number of medals is basically the game before the upper limit number of games. is a number. In other words, in a situation where it is specified that the first forced termination condition is satisfied and that the second forced termination condition is satisfied, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG has reached the upper limit number of games, and the advantage In this situation, it is specified that the upper limit increase of medals is exceeded before the number of remaining games ZG in the section is completed.

FIGS. 226(c) and 226(d) show the fifth special notification type table in this modified example. In the fifth special notification type table of FIG. 226(c), when only the first excess flag is set or when only the second excess flag is set, the allocation destination (fifth special notification type) is , is substantially the same as that of the seventh embodiment (FIG. 222(a)). Also, among the details of the fifth special notification type table in FIG. ).

In this modification, in addition to the fifth special notification A, the fifth special notification B, and the fifth special notification C, the fifth special notification D is set as the sorting destination of the type of the fifth special notification. 5 special notification D is a special notification that is mainly selected when the both excess flag is set. As shown in FIG. 226(c), when the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, the first first flag is set and the second first flag is not set, that is, If the specification that the first forced termination condition will be satisfied in the future is performed first, the fifth special notification A and the fifth special notification B each have 10 %, the fifth special notification C is distributed with a probability of 80%, and the fifth special notification D is not distributed. On the other hand, if the first first flag is not set and the second first flag is set, that is, specifying that the second forced termination condition will be satisfied in the future is performed first. 5th special notification A and 5th special notification B are distributed with a probability of 10%, respectively, the 5th special notification C is not distributed, and the 5th special notification C is not distributed. Notification D is distributed with a probability of 80%. In addition, in the same manner as the relationship between the fifth special notification A, the fifth special notification B, and the fifth special notification C, the fifth special notification D also has the fifth special notification A, the fifth special notification B, and the fifth special notification. Effect content is set to such an extent that the player can recognize that the notification is different from C. For example, the content displayed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effect from the speaker 64 are different. In this modification, when only the first excess flag is set and when only the second excess flag is set, the fifth special notification C and the fifth special notification D are distributed by 5% each. is changed to

In the detailed table, as shown in FIG. 226(d), the fifth special notification C is a set value suggestion that suggests whether the set value is 5 or more in the same manner as above, and if the set value is 4 or less, If so, the fifth special notification c1 is selected, and if the set value is 5 or more, the fifth special notification c2 is selected. On the other hand, the fifth special notification D is a set value suggestion suggesting whether the set value is 4 or 5 or something else (1 to 3, 6). If so, the fifth special notification d1 is selected, and if the set value is 1-3 or 6, the fifth special notification d2 is selected. Note that the fifth special notification d1 and the fifth special notification d2 are also set with different presentation contents to the extent that the player can distinguish between them by the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the effect sounds from the speaker 64, respectively.

That is, according to the present modification, when specifying that the first forced termination condition will be satisfied in the future is performed before specifying that the second forced termination condition will be satisfied in the future, In the case where the fifth special notification is issued when specifying that the second forced termination condition will be satisfied in the future is performed prior to specifying that the first forced termination condition will be satisfied in the future. The contents of the setting value suggestion are different, the former mainly generates a setting value suggestion (fifth special notification C) as to whether the setting value is 5 or more, and the latter mainly generates a setting value of 4 or 5 A setting value suggestion (fifth special notification D) as to whether or not is generated.

To explain the relationship between the identification of the first forced termination condition and the identification of the second forced termination condition, if the first forced termination condition is specified first, the number of remaining games in the same advantageous section Even if it is ZG, if the advantageous interval increase/decrease number ZM is relatively small, and if the second forced termination condition is specified first, even if the advantageous interval remaining game number ZG is the same, This is the case where the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM is relatively large. That is, if sufficient medals have not been obtained in the advantageous section up to that point, the first forced termination condition is likely to be specified first, and the fifth special notification C is likely to occur. If sufficient medals have been obtained in the advantageous section up to that point, the second forced termination condition is likely to be specified first, and the fifth special notification D is likely to occur.

In this way, after specifying the forced termination condition, the content of the game in the advantageous section up to that point is strongly reflected, and this information is used as a special notification to indicate the content of the set value suggestion (which the player can obtain). By varying the type of information received and information with different degrees of potential benefit), it is possible to associate the game content of the advantageous section with the special notification. As a result, it is possible to make a special notification in line with the game content.

Comparing the fifth special notification C and the fifth special notification D, the fifth special notification is a set value suggestion whether the set value is 5 or more, and the fifth special notification D has a set value of 4 or 5. By combining the fifth special notification C and the fifth special notification D, it is possible to narrow down the set value. That is, when the fifth special notification c1 is generated and the fifth special notification d1 is generated, it is determined that the set value is 6, and when the fifth special notification c1 is generated and the fifth special notification d2 is generated determines that the set value is 5, and when the fifth special notification c2 is generated and the fifth special notification d2 is generated, it is determined that the set value is 4, and the fifth special notification c2 is generated. Moreover, when the fifth special notification d1 is generated, it is determined that the set value is 3 or less. However, since the fifth special notification C and the fifth special notification D are unlikely to occur in the same advantageous section, it is highly necessary to go through the advantageous section multiple times in order to narrow down the information. Become. By doing this, even after the advantageous section has been forcibly terminated, it is possible to encourage enthusiasm for moving to a new advantageous section and establishing the forced termination condition in that advantageous section. Become.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, when it is specified that both the first forced termination condition and the second forced termination condition are satisfied, the game difference between each game in which the forced termination condition is likely to be satisfied is determined. Based on this, the content (advantage) of setting value suggestion is varied. FIG. 227(a) is a flowchart showing part of the remaining game management process in this modification, and FIG. 227(b) is a flowchart showing part of the remaining number management process in this modification.

That is, as shown in FIG. 227(a), in the remaining game number management process in this modified example, if a negative determination is made in step S13110 and it is determined that the number of available free games FG is 0 or less, step S13501 is performed. proceed to In step S13501, a process of setting the first excess flag is executed as in step S13111. In subsequent step S13502, it is determined whether or not the second excess flag has already been set. That is, in the process of step S13502, as in the process of step S13402, it is already specified that the second forced termination condition will be satisfied ex post facto at the stage where it is specified that the first forced termination condition will be met ex post facto. This is a process for determining whether or not the setting has been made. Then, when the second excess flag is set, a process of setting the second first flag is executed in step S13503.

After executing the process of step S13503, in step S13504, the process of grasping the difference between the upper limit number of games, which is the first forced termination condition, and the number of games exceeding the upper limit increase number is executed. The number of games exceeding the upper limit increase number is stored in the temporary storage area of RAM 106 at the stage when it is specified that the second forced termination condition will be satisfied in the future, that is, at the stage when the second excess flag is set. remembered. This processing will be described later. After executing the process of step S13504, or when a negative determination is made in step S13502, the remaining game number management process is terminated.

In the remaining number management process, as shown in FIG. 227B, if a negative determination is made in step S13205 and it is determined that the number of available sheets FM that can be increased is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step S13551. In step S13551, a process of setting the second excess flag is executed as in step S13206. In subsequent step S13552, a process of storing the number of games exceeding the upper limit increase number in the temporary storage area of RAM 106 is executed. Incidentally, the number of games that exceed the upper limit increase number exceeds the upper limit increase number obtained by dividing the difference between the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM and the upper limit increase number (2400) by the expected increase/decrease number KM. It is calculated by adding the current number of games in the advantageous section AG to the number of games up to the point where the number of games is reached.

In subsequent step S13553, it is determined whether or not the first excess flag has already been set. That is, in the process of step S13553, in the same way as the process of step S13452, it is already specified that the first forced termination condition will be met ex post facto at the stage when it is specified that the second forced termination condition will be met ex post facto. This is a process for determining whether or not the setting has been made. Then, when the first excess flag is set, a process of setting the first first flag is executed in step S13554.

After executing the process of step S13554, in step S13555, the process of grasping the difference between the upper limit number of games, which is the first forced termination condition, and the number of games exceeding the upper limit increase number is executed. After executing the process of step S13555, or when a negative determination is made in step S13553, the remaining game number management process is terminated.

An example of the fifth special notification type table in this modification is shown in FIG. 227(c). Note that the table when only the first excess flag is set or when only the second excess flag is set is the same as that of FIG. 226(c), and in FIG. It is shown by omitting it.

In the fifth special notification type table when both the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, as in the first modification, neither the first first flag nor the second first flag is set. The type of the fifth special notification to be distributed differs depending on whether or not there is. Furthermore, in this modification, the number of difference games ascertained in steps S13504 and S13555 also influences the type of the fifth special notification to be distributed.

More specifically, when the first first flag is set, that is, when the determination of reaching the upper limit number of games is performed first, in general, a sufficient increase in medals in the advantageous section up to that point is not generated, the type of sorting differs depending on whether the number of differential games is less than a predetermined number and is 99 games or less, or the number of differential games is greater than or equal to a predetermined number and is 100 games or more. When the difference game number is 99 games or less, both the fifth special notification A and the fifth special notification B are distributed at 20%, the fifth special notification C is distributed at 60%, and the fifth special notification D is distributed. can't On the other hand, when the number of differential games is 100 games or more, 100% is distributed to the fifth special notification C, and no other fifth special notification is distributed.

In addition, when the second first flag is set, that is, when the determination of reaching the upper limit increase number of medals is performed first, generally enough medals are increased in the advantageous section up to that point is generated, the type of sorting differs depending on whether the number of differential games is less than a predetermined number and is 99 games or less, or whether the number of differential games is greater than or equal to a predetermined number and is 100 games or more. When the difference game number is 99 games or less, both the fifth special notification A and the fifth special notification B are distributed at 20%, the fifth special notification C is not distributed, and the fifth special notification D is distributed at 60%. distributed. On the other hand, when the number of differential games is 100 games or more, 100% is distributed to the fifth special notification D, and no other fifth special notification is distributed.

That is, in the above-described modified example, the difference between the number of games satisfying the first condition for forced termination (maximum number of games) and the number of games satisfying the second condition for forced termination (games reaching the upper limit increase number) is calculated based on the number of games. Therefore, the type of setting value suggestion to be selected is different, and the setting value suggestion that makes it easier to narrow down the setting values is selected as the number of difference games increases. As described above, when it is specified that both the first forced termination condition and the second forced termination condition are met, basically the second forced termination condition is met first. , The difference number of games can be said to be the number of games that indicates how quickly the upper limit increase of medals is reached relative to the upper limit number of games. That is, setting values that are likely to be beneficial to the player are suggested by reaching the upper limit increase number in a smaller number of games. By doing so, it is possible to compensate for the case where the upper limit increase number is reached in a smaller number of games, that is, forcible termination without completing the remaining games up to the upper limit number of games.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, a configuration will be described in which information corresponding to the excess amount is presented at the time of forced termination. FIG. 228 is a flow chart showing the second section display process in this modified example.

As a change from the second section display process in the above embodiment, when the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the upper limit number of games, or when the number of advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM reaches the upper limit increase number and forced termination, The point is that the processing for presenting information according to the minute is performed. In other words, the processing of steps S13601 to S13606 is the same as the processing of steps S13001 to S13006, and updates the advantageous interval game number AG and advantageous interval increase/decrease number ZM, and determines whether or not there is an empty game number FG and empty number FM. Judgment processing is performed, and if the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the upper limit number of games or the number of increased/decreased numbers in the advantageous section ZM reaches the upper limit number of increases, an affirmative decision is made in step S13606 and the process proceeds to step S13607. In step S13607, the sixth special notification process is executed. Such processing is the processing for presenting information according to the excess amount. The processing of steps S13608 to S13612 is the same as the processing of steps S13007 to S13011.

The sixth special notification process in step S13607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S13701, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM is 2400 or more, and the current advantageous section forced termination (step S13606: YES) was performed under the second forced termination condition. If the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM is equal to or greater than 2400, the process advances to step S13702 to perform processing for grasping the total number of eliminated games TEG. As already explained, the total number of eliminated games TEG is a counter to which the number of added games is added when an extra game is added while any of the excess flags is set. In subsequent step S13703, a process of acquiring the sixth special notification A lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is performed.

In this modified example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, a sixth special notice is generated to present information that can be beneficial to the player according to the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG. The occurrence rate of the 6th special notification differs depending on the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG. The occurrence rate of the 6th special notification differs depending on whether or not it was performed. The above sixth special notification A lottery table is a table obtained when the advantageous section ends while at least the second forced termination condition is satisfied. On the other hand, when the advantageous section ends without the second forced termination condition being satisfied (due to the first forced termination condition), the sixth special notification B lottery table is acquired (step S13709).

In the sixth special notification A lottery table and the sixth special notification B lottery table, as shown in FIG. 230(a), the occurrence rate of the sixth special notification increases as the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG increases. However, the 6th special notification B lottery table (the winning rate of the 6th special notification B) is higher than the 6th special notification A lottery table (the winning rate of the 6th special notification A) ) are set so that the sixth special notification is more likely to occur when compared with the same value of the total number of eliminated games TEG. It should be noted that the sixth special notification A and the sixth special notification B are similar to the fifth special notification described above, and are to the extent that the player can distinguish them by the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65, the effect sound from the speaker 64, etc. , different production contents are set.

After acquiring the sixth special notification A lottery table in step S13703, the sixth special notification A lottery process is executed in step S13704, and it is determined whether or not the notification lottery is won in step S13705. If the notification lottery is won, in step S13706, after setting the command for execution of the sixth special notification A as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the processing for the sixth special notification ends. On the other hand, if the notification lottery is not won, the sixth special notification A non-execution command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S13707, and then the sixth special notification processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S13701 that the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM has not reached 2400, that is, if the current advantageous section is forcibly terminated without satisfying the second forcible termination condition, the process advances to step S13708. The processing of steps S13708 to S13713 is generally the same as the processing of steps S13702 to S13707. In step S13708, the processing for grasping the total number of eliminated games TEG is executed. to get Then, in step S13710, the sixth special notification B lottery process is executed, and in step S13711, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery is won. If the 6 special notification B execution command is not won in the notification lottery, the 6th special notification B non-execution command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S13713. End the sixth special notification process.

The display control device 81 that has received the commands related to the sixth special notification executes the sixth special notification during the attack mode end effect, for example, like the process related to the fourth special notification in the attack mode end effect setting process of FIG. Perform processing for Specifically, in FIG. 154 above, instead of or in addition to the process of determining whether or not the fourth special notification command has been received in step S7703, the command for executing the sixth special notification A or the sixth special notification B A process for determining whether or not an execution command has been received is performed. If no command related to the sixth special notification is received, or if it is a sixth special notification A non-execution command or a sixth special notification B non-execution command even if it is received, the process proceeds to step S7704 , the normal end effect is set, and then this setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S7703 that the execution command for the sixth special notification A or the command for execution of the sixth special notification B has been received, the process advances to step S7705 to acquire the sixth special notification detail table. As shown in FIG. 230(b), the 6th special notification detail table shows the details of the 6th special notification according to the type of the 6th special notification (6th special notification A and 6th special notification B) and the setting value. The production content is set differently. Specifically, the sixth special notification A includes the sixth special notification a1 and the sixth special notification a2, and the sixth special notification B includes the sixth special notification b1, the sixth special notification b2, and the sixth special notification b2. 6 special information b3 is provided, and these are also set with different performance contents to the extent that the player can distinguish between them by the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the effect sound from the speaker 64, respectively.

The details of the effects of various sixth special notifications differ depending on the set values as to which one is likely to be selected. Specifically, of the sixth special notification A, the sixth special notification a1 is likely to be selected with odd number settings of settings 1, 3, and 5, and the sixth special notification a2 is selected with even number settings of settings 2, 4, and 6. easy to be Also, of the sixth special notification B, the sixth special notification b1 is selected in settings 1 and 2, but not selected in settings 3 to 6, and the sixth special notification b2 is selected in settings 3 and 4. , settings 1, 2, 5, and 6, and the sixth special notification b3 is selected in settings 5 and 6, but not selected in settings 1-4.

In other words, when the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit increase number of the advantageous interval and the advantageous interval is forcibly ended, the sixth special notification A is performed, so that the even-odd set value can be predicted, and the advantageous interval upper limit increase number is not reached. When the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the sixth special notification B is performed, so that the set value can be narrowed down to a predetermined number of types or less (two types or less).

As described above, by making it possible to suggest different setting values according to the type of forced termination condition that causes the advantageous section to be forcibly terminated, the advantageous section can be determined under any forced termination condition. It is possible to entertain until the final stage of the advantageous section in terms of whether it will be forcibly terminated. In other words, in terms of the purpose of the game, such as wanting to increase the number of medals by playing the game, it is better to forcibly end the advantageous section when the upper limit number of increased medals is reached, and forcibly end it when the upper limit number of games is reached. It can be said that it is preferable for the player. On the other hand, setting value suggestions that occur when forced termination occurs without reaching the upper limit increase number can make it easier to narrow down the setting values. set to be higher than reached. In this case, it is conceivable that the player who wants to see through the set value will want the advantageous section to be forcibly terminated without reaching the upper limit increase number.

Conversely, a player who wants to enjoy the advantageous section for a long time may want to play as many games as possible without reaching the upper limit of increased number of medals. , which is not preferable from the viewpoint of easiness in narrowing down the set values.

In this way, by differentiating each forced termination condition and the type of set value suggestion that occurs at that time, while responding to the various needs of the players, new fun is created in the game, and the game characteristics of the advantageous section are created. can be suitably increased.

As described above, the 6th special notification A lottery table and the 6th special notification B lottery table both have different set value suggestion occurrence rates depending on the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG. The notification A lottery table is a table obtained when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated due to the fulfillment of the second forced termination condition, and the sixth special notification B lottery table is obtained when the first forced termination condition is satisfied. This table is acquired when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by doing so. In other words, depending on which forced termination condition the advantageous section was forcibly terminated, the total number of eliminated games TEG is used differently between the value for the first forced termination condition and the value for the second forced termination condition. It can be said that the weighting of the value of the number of eliminated games TEG is different. By doing so, while using a common counter such as the total number of eliminated games TEG, the memory capacity can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the number of games exceeding the forced termination condition is separately stored. It is In addition, if it is specified that it will be forced to end under the first forced termination condition, the number of additional games after that, and if it is specified that it will be forced to end under the second forced termination condition, after that and the number of additional games may be stored separately. In this case, the number of corresponding games may be grasped in steps S13702 and S13708.

<Modification 4>
This modified example is based on modified example 3 above, and gives a benefit at the time of forced termination in consideration of the information of the other forced termination condition.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 231, in the sixth special notification process in this modification, if it is determined in step S13801 that the second forced termination condition is met, in step S13802 the total disappearance game After grasping the number TEG, a process of grasping the number of games up to the upper limit number of games is executed in step S13803. In other words, unless both forced termination conditions are satisfied at the same time and the advantageous period is terminated, if the advantageous period is terminated due to reaching the upper limit increase of medals as the second forced termination condition, the upper limit number of games will not be reached. The first forced termination condition is not met. The process of step S13803 is a process of grasping the number of remaining games until the maximum number of games is reached.

In subsequent step S13804, a process of acquiring the sixth special notification A lottery table is executed. As shown in FIG. 232(a), the 6th special notification A lottery table in this modified example is, as shown in FIG. The rate of occurrence of the 6th special notice is different, and the higher the number of games up to 1500 games, the higher the rate of occurrence of the 6th special notice. It is set to increase the occurrence rate of special notification.

That is, in this modification, when the number of medal increases/decreases in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number and the game is forcibly terminated, the greater the number of games in the advantageous section that could not be completed, the more the set value suggestion as the sixth special notification occurs. It is set so that the set value suggestion is more likely to occur as the number of medals that cannot be obtained due to exceeding the upper limit increase number even though an addition has occurred is increased.

The processing of steps S13805 to S13808 is the same as the processing of steps S13704 to S13707, and after executing the sixth special notification A lottery processing, if the notification lottery is won, the sixth special notification A An execution command is set to be output, and if no winning is made, a sixth special notification A non-execution command is set to be output.

If it is determined in step S13801 that the upper limit increase number has not been reached, that is, if the current forced termination was forcibly terminated under the first forced termination condition instead of the second forced termination condition, the process proceeds to step S13809. Then, a process of grasping the total number of eliminated games TEG corresponding to the excess number of games is executed. Then, in step S13810, a process of grasping the remaining number of medals up to the upper limit increase number of medals is executed. That is, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit number of games as the first forced termination condition, the second forced termination condition of reaching the upper limit increased number is not satisfied, and the process of step S13810 is executed. , the remaining increase number up to the upper limit increase number.

In subsequent step S13811, a process of acquiring the sixth special notification B lottery table is executed. As shown in FIG. 232(b), the 6th special notification B lottery table in this modified example has a number up to 2400 and the number of games corresponding to the excess number of games (total number of eliminated games TEG). The occurrence rate of the 6th special notice is different, and the higher the number of up to 2400, the higher the occurrence rate of the 6th special notice. It is set so that the occurrence rate of notification is high.

That is, as in the sixth special notification A lottery table, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and is forcibly terminated, the greater the number of medals that did not increase during the advantageous section, the sixth special notification. The setting value suggestion is more likely to occur, and the setting value suggestion is more likely to occur as the number of games that were added but could not be completed due to the upper limit number of games being exceeded.

In particular, when comparing the 6th special notification A lottery table and the 6th special notification B lottery table, even if the total number of lost games TEG is the same, the 6th special notification B lottery table has a higher occurrence rate of the 6th special notification. is set so that the Given the original purpose of the game, which is to receive medals as a result of each game and aim to increase the number of medals, if the game is forcibly terminated without reaching the upper limit increase of medals in the advantageous section, the purpose cannot be achieved. This is based on the idea that the player's sense of loss due to this is greater than when the number of games does not reach the maximum number of games.

The processing of steps S13812 to S13815 is the same as the processing of steps S13710 to S13713, and after executing the sixth special notification B lottery process, if the notification lottery is won, the sixth special notification B An execution command is set to be output, and if no winning is made, a sixth special notification B non-execution command is set to be output.

As described above, in this modified example, in a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, a configuration is adopted in which a privilege such as a set value suggestion is given to the expectation that the other forced termination condition was met. , it is possible to compensate for the player's sense of loss. In addition, it is possible to compensate for the loss caused by the forced termination condition on the satisfied side by suggesting the set value. In other words, in this modified example, in a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, when one of the forced termination conditions is satisfied, the forced termination condition on the satisfied side and the forced termination condition on the other side are compensated for. By doing so, it is possible to increase the compensation to the player and suitably avoid the decrease in the desire to play due to the forced termination.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, based on Modification 3 and Modification 4, the upper limit number of games is reached and the advantageous section is forcibly terminated even though it is predicted that the upper limit number of increased medals will be reached. In this case, the sixth special notification is more likely to occur.

FIG. 233(a) shows part of the flowchart of the sixth special notification process in this modified example. That is, when the advantageous section is forcibly ended without the medal increase/decrease number reaching the upper limit increase number (step S13701: NO), the process after the sixth special notification B lottery process is executed in step S13710 is shown. ing.

In step S13901, it is determined whether or not the sixth special notification B lottery has been won. If the player wins, the 6th special notification B execution command is set to be output in step S13902 in the same manner as described above, and then the 6th special notification processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13901 that the game has not been won, the process advances to step S13903 to determine whether or not the second excess flag is set. If it is determined in step S13903 that the second excess flag is set, the game is forcibly terminated due to the upper limit number of games without reaching the upper limit increase number even though the second excess flag is set. This is the case (step S13701: NO). In this case, in step S13901, after setting the output of the sixth special notification B execution command, the processing for the sixth special notification ends. On the other hand, if the second excess flag is not set, the sixth special notification B non-execution command is output and set in step S13904 in the same manner as described above, and then the sixth special notification processing is terminated. That is, when the second excess flag is set, even if the sixth special notification B lottery is not won, the sixth special notification B is executed as if the lottery was won, and a process advantageous to the player is performed. will be

As shown in the seventh embodiment, when it is predicted that the first condition for forced termination of the advantageous interval will be satisfied based on the number of games remaining in the advantageous interval ZG (when only the first excess flag is set ), the prediction that the second forced termination condition of the advantageous section will be satisfied (when only the second excess flag is set), and the prediction that both forced termination conditions of the advantageous section will be satisfied are performed. There is a case (when both excess flags are set). On the other hand, even if both forced termination conditions are predicted to be met, unless both forced termination conditions are met at the same time (in the same game), if one forced termination condition is met, the other The advantageous section ends without the forced termination condition being met.

In this modification, when it is predicted that both forced termination conditions will be satisfied, if forced termination is performed under the first forced termination condition without satisfying the second forced termination condition, the game made it beneficial to those By doing so, it is possible to favorably follow up on the player's sense of loss, who has been expecting that the second forced termination condition will be satisfied.

<Modification 6>
In this modified example, in the case where it is predicted that the second forced termination condition will be satisfied in the future in the above modified example 5, the notification of the prediction is generated. , when the game is terminated without satisfying the second forced termination condition, it is advantageous for the player.

FIG. 233(b) shows a part of the flow chart of the 6th special notification process in this modified example, and the difference from the modified example 5 determines that the 6th special notification B lottery is not won. If so (step S13951: NO), it is determined in step S13953 whether or not a special notification that the second excess flag has been set has been executed.

Although detailed description with reference to drawings is omitted, in this modified example, when the second excess flag is set, a notification to that effect (special notification) can be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Then, the notification to that effect is made when a predetermined lottery is won, and when the predetermined lottery is not won, the notification to that effect is not performed even if the second excess flag is set. do not have.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 233(c) and 233(d), even if the total expected increase/decrease number SM is 2410 and the second excess flag is set, the second excess flag is When the limit excess information image GTP (in the figure, the image of "Break through the limit!") is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as notification that it has been set (Fig. 233(d)), and when it is not displayed (Fig. 233(c)). In this case, in FIG. 233(c), it is not possible to directly grasp that the medal increase/decrease number will reach the upper limit increase number, but in FIG. It is clearly comprehensible.

Then, in step S13953, in spite of the occurrence of the special notification that the above limit excess information image GTP is displayed, if forced termination is performed without reaching the upper limit increase number, in step S13952 a sixth special When the notification B execution command is set to be output and the special notification is not generated, the sixth special notification B non-execution command is set to be output in step S13954.

In this way, even when it is predicted that the number of increases will reach the upper limit, whether or not it is advantageous depends on whether or not the player has known in advance that the number of increases will reach the upper limit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the degree of advantage for the player from becoming excessively high.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, in a configuration where setting values are suggested based on excess or unachievable portions at the time of forcible termination of an advantageous section, if a set value suggestion based on the excess occurs before the forcible termination of the advantageous section , generates a set value suggestion at the time of forced termination by subtracting that amount of advantage.

FIGS. 234(a) and 234(b) are part of a flow chart of the sixth special notification process when the idea of subtracting the set value suggestions before forced termination is applied to the fifth and sixth modifications. showing the part.

That is, after executing the sixth special notification B lottery in step S13704, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery was won in step S13961 or step S13971. It is determined whether or not the 2 excess flag is set, or whether or not a special notification that the 2nd excess flag is set is executed in step S13973. If an affirmative determination is made in these steps S13963 and S13973, in this modification, in steps S13964 and S13974, whether or not a fifth special notification has occurred as a setting value suggestion based on the excess amount before the forced end of the advantageous section. determine whether In this process, it is preferable to temporarily store the information in the RAM 106 or the like when it is determined to execute the fifth special notification.

If the fifth special notification is not executed, step S13962 or step S13972 to output the sixth special notification B execution command, if the fifth special notification is executed, step S13965 or step S13975 , the sixth special notification B non-execution command is set to be output. In addition, when the second excess flag is not set in step S13963, or when the special notification to that effect is not executed in step S13973, the sixth special notification B non-execution command is output and set.

In this way, if a privilege based on the excess amount, etc. is given before the forced termination of the advantageous section, it is taken into consideration (subtracted) at the time of forced termination, and the privilege at the time of forced termination is set (Section 6 It is possible to solve the problem that the player's advantage due to the privilege based on the excess amount or the like becomes too high.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example, an application example in which a special section is set when an advantageous section is forcibly terminated will be described. As described in the ninth modification of the fourth embodiment, etc., the special section is a section that is set based on the total number of eliminated games TEG when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. In the normal section, the setting value suggesting effect is likely to occur. In the special section, for example, when special replays 1 and 2 are won, a predetermined stop number (a stop number that matches the "black BAR" pattern) is generated with a probability corresponding to the set value, and the set value is generated. can be predicted (see FIG. 162). In this modification, in addition to the total number of eliminated games TEG, the special section is set based on the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG and the number of games remaining up to the upper limit increase number. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing special section setting processing in this modification. The special section setting process is, for example, a process executed in step S7808 in the second section display process of FIG. 158, and is executed at the end of the advantageous section.

In step S14001, a process of grasping the total number of eliminated games TEG is performed. Then, in step S14002, a process of grasping the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is performed. Incidentally, the case where the number of games remaining in the advantageous interval ZG is equal to or greater than 1 means that the end processing of the current advantageous interval is terminated by the second forced termination condition.

In the subsequent step S14003, a process of grasping the number of difference up to the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is performed. This processing is the same as the processing of step S13803, and the difference number can be grasped by subtracting the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM from the upper limit increase number (2400 sheets). Note that in step S14003, if the current special section setting process is executed based on any forced termination condition, the difference number of sheets is grasped. That is, in step S14003, if the current advantageous section ends without satisfying any of the conditions for forced termination, such as when the attack mode continuation count becomes 0, the difference between the number of increments and the upper limit increase count is grasped. None (or grasped as 0).

In subsequent step S14004, a process of acquiring the special section table from the various table storage area 105a is performed. As shown in FIG. 236, in the special section table in this modified example, the number of games in the special section PG and the number of special section is set to be different from the number of sheets PM. As already explained, the number of games in the special section PG is a counter for defining the number of games in the special section, and is decremented by one each time one game is played in the special section. On the other hand, the special section number PM is a counter for determining the number of games in the special section, but is also a counter for grasping the number of medals paid out in each game. is a counter from which a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out is subtracted.

In step S14005, processing for inputting the number of games in the special section PG is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 236, when the difference between the number of games up to the upper limit increase number is 0 and the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 1 or more, that is, when the upper limit increase number is reached and the upper limit number of games is reached. (difference number=0 and ZG>0), a value (0 to 80 in the figure) corresponding to the number of remaining games TEG is added to the number of remaining games ZG. Enter the number of games in the section PG. In this case, the number of games corresponding to the number of games up to the upper limit number of games may be input to the special section game number PG, or the number of games up to the upper limit number of games may correspond to the value of the total lost game number TEG. It may be configured to input a value to be used. On the other hand, if the upper limit number of games is reached without reaching the upper limit increase number, and the game is forcibly terminated (difference number>0 and ZG=0), 0 is input to the number of special section games PG (no value is input). When the upper limit increase number is reached and the upper limit number of games is reached and the game is forcibly terminated (difference number = 0 and ZG = 0), a value corresponding to the value of the total disappearance game number TEG is input to the special section game number PG. . It should be noted that the value input to the number of games in the special section PG when both forced termination conditions are met tends to be larger than the value to be input to the number of games in the special section PG when only one of the forced termination conditions is met. is set to

In the subsequent step S14006, a process of inputting the special section number PM is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 236, when the upper limit increase number is reached and the game is forcibly terminated without reaching the upper limit number of games (difference number=0 and ZG>0), 0 is input to special section number PM (value ). On the other hand, if the upper limit number of games is reached without reaching the upper limit increase number and the game is forcibly terminated (difference number > 0 and ZG = 0), a value corresponding to the difference number up to the upper limit increase number is input to the special section number PM. . Then, when the upper limit increase number is reached and the upper limit number of games is reached and the game is forcibly terminated (difference number=0 and ZG=0), a value corresponding to the value of the total lost game number TEG is input to the special section number PM. Note that the value to be input to the special section number PM when both forced termination conditions are satisfied is likely to be larger than the value to be input to the special section number PM when only one of the forced termination conditions is satisfied. is set.

In step S14007, it is determined whether or not a value of 1 or more is input to the number of special section games PG or the number of special section games PM. If an affirmative determination is made in step S14007, a special section flag is set in step S14008, and a special section command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S14009. Incidentally, the special section command includes information on the values of the special section game number PG and the special section number PM. If a negative determination is made in step S14007 or after the processing of step S14009 has been executed, the processing of clearing the total number of eliminated games TEG is executed in step S14010, and then the special section setting processing ends.

The number-of-games management process in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 237 is a flow chart showing part of the number-of-games management process in this modified example.

In step S14101, it is determined whether or not the special section flag is set. If the special section flag is set, it is determined whether the game state is the normal game state or the first RT state in step S14102. In these low RT states, the process advances to step S14103 to execute subtraction processing of the number of special section games PG. These processes are the same as those of steps S8101 to S8103. In step S14104, subtraction processing of the special section number PM is executed based on the winning result of the current game. Specifically, a process of subtracting the number of medals to be paid out for the current game from the special section number PM is executed. In this case, if the result of the current game is a loss result, or if the stop result corresponding to the establishment of a prize is not obtained and the result is a so-called dropout, the number of medals paid out is 0, and the number of medals PM in the special section is 0. is subtracted (not subtracted in this game).

Then, in step S14105, it is determined whether or not both the special section game number PG and the special section number PM have become zero. If both are 0, a process of clearing the special section flag is executed in step S14106. Then, in step S14107, a special section end command for letting the display control device 81 know that the special section ends is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Through these processes, the special section ends. On the other hand, in step S14105, if either is not 0, that is, if, for example, even if the special section game number PG is 0, the special section number PM is not 0, etc., NO is entered in step S14105. A judgment will be made.

Thus, in this modification, at the end of the advantageous section, the special section is set according to the excess amount, and the difference number up to the upper limit increase number, the number of games up to the upper limit number of games, and the number of remaining games ZG are changed. A special section is set accordingly. In this way, not only the special section corresponding to the surplus generated in the advantageous section, but also the point that the number of medals obtained and the number of games that can be consumed are lost due to the forced termination condition of the other will be followed up in the special section. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately reduce the decrease in the player's desire to play.

Description will be given of the contents of the presentation in this modified example. FIG. 238 is a flow chart of setting processing for the attack mode end effect, and FIG. The attack mode end effect setting process is a process executed by the display control device 81 for setting effects that occur when the attack mode ends or when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated.

In step S14201, a process of ascertaining the total number of medals acquired in the current advantageous section (advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM) is executed. Then, in step S14202, a process of grasping the total number of continuous games in the current advantageous interval (number of games in the advantageous interval AG) is executed. Then, in step S14203, a process of setting an end effect including the total number of earned medals and the total number of continued games is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing of steps S7701, S7702, and S7704 described above.

In the following step S14204, it is determined whether or not the above special section command has been received. If the special section command has not been received, this setting process is terminated. If the special section command has been received, in step S14205, after the end of the advantageous section, a continuation effect indicating that the special section, which is an advantageous section for the player, continues, is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Execute the process.

In the subsequent step S14206, it is determined whether or not the value of the special section game number PG included in the received special section command is 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, in step S14207, after the ending effect set this time, a process for continuing the display of the number of remaining games in the previously executed advantageous section is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S14206 or after the processing of step S14207 is executed, it is determined in step S14208 whether or not the value of the special section number PM included in the special section command received this time is 1 or more. do. If the number is 1 or more, in step S14209, after the end effect set this time, the processing for continuing the display of the remaining increased number of sheets in the advantageous section that has been executed before is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S14208, or if the process of step S14209 has been executed, this setting process ends.

The details of the effects performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the like will be described with reference to FIG. Figures 239(a1), (b1), (c1), and (d1) show the content of effects when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and is forcibly terminated, and Figures 239(a2), (b2), ( c2) and (d2) show the effect contents when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number of medals and is forcibly terminated.

As shown in FIG. 239(a1), when the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is close to the upper limit number of games, the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval ZG reaches the upper limit number of games, and the first excess flag is set. , the auxiliary display unit 65 displays, for example, the limit excess information image GTP. After that, as shown in FIG. 239(b1), when the upper limit game of the advantageous interval is reached, the advantageous interval is forcibly ended, and the attack mode ending effect is performed. In this case, as described above, a special section is set according to the excess number and the difference number up to the upper limit increase number.

In the case where the end effect of the attack mode is performed, for example, triggered by a predetermined operation (based on the operation of any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58, etc.), the continuous effect shown in FIG. 239 (c1) occurs. More specifically, in the continuation effect, the face of a soldier as a predetermined character is displayed close-up on the auxiliary display part 65, and the loud male voice "not yet!" is generated from the speaker 64. This continuous effect is also used, for example, in the notification that the attack mode is to be added later, and is a effect that is executed as part of the simulated end effect as if the advantageous state were to end. More specifically, in the pseudo end effect, after the end notification such as the end effect of the attack mode is generated, the continuation notification as the continuation effect is generated. In other words, if the termination notification is performed without any of the forced termination conditions being satisfied, the continuation notification will occur after that, and the advantageous section will be continued. It is possible to give a strong impression that the special section is a section in which the advantageous section is continued by generating the continuation notification even at the time of the end and shifting to the special section.

As described above, after the continuous notification is performed, the transition to the special section is made. As shown in FIGS. 239(a1) and 239(b1), this time the upper limit number of games is reached and the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, so a value of 1 or more is input to the number of special sections PM. . Then, in step S14209, processing for continuing the display of the remaining increased number of coins in the advantageous section is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 239(d1), the display of the total number of won medals in the advantageous section and the display of the difference number (remaining number of payouts) up to the upper limit increase number is continued. As a result, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that the special section as the normal section continues the advantageous section that was performed before.

As shown in FIG. 239(a2), when the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM is close to the upper limit increase number, the total expected increase/decrease number SM reaches the upper limit increase number, and the second excess flag is set, the auxiliary The display unit 65 displays, for example, the limit excess information image GTP. After that, as shown in FIG. 239(b2), when the upper limit increase number of the advantageous interval is reached, the advantageous interval is forcibly terminated, and the attack mode ending effect is performed. In this case, as described above, a special section is set according to the excess amount, the number of games up to the maximum number of games, and the number of remaining games ZG.

As in FIG. 239(c1), after the ending effect (end notification), a continuation effect (continuation notification) occurs in the auxiliary display section 65 or the like triggered by a predetermined operation.

After the continuation notification is performed, the vehicle moves to the special section. As shown in FIGS. 239(a2) and 239(b2), since the advantageous section has been forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit increase number this time, a value of 1 or more is also input to the number of games in the special section PG. ing. Then, in step S14207, a process for continuing the display of the remaining increased number of games in the advantageous section is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 239(d2), the display of the total number of continuous games in the advantageous section and the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games is continued. As a result, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that the special section as the normal section continues the advantageous section that was performed before.

<Modification 9>
In this modified example, a process will be described in which the actual advantageous section increase/decrease number of sheets ZM is smaller than the predicted number of sheets (total increase/decrease expected number of sheets SM) by the remaining number management process. First, with reference to FIG. 240, an event that occurs when the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous sections ZM is smaller than the prediction will be described.

In FIG. 240(a), the timing of tf1, which is in the advantageous interval, is shown as a reference, and if the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous interval at that time is exhausted, the increase/decrease number exceeds the upper limit increase number at the timing of tf2. It shows the situation in which the second excess flag is set.

In this situation, if an additional opportunity occurs, even if the number of additional games is added to the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG, the upper limit number of games (1500 games) is not reached, but the second excess flag is set as described above. Therefore, as already explained, this additional amount is added to the total number of eliminated games TEG (FIG. 240(b)).

FIG. 240(c) shows the timing after FIG. 240(a) and FIG. 240(b), and is based on the timing of tf2 when the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous section has been exhausted. This example shows a case where the net increase in the number of sheets from tf1 to tf2 is lower than the prediction at tf1. In other words, at the time of tf1, even though it was predicted that the increase/decrease number would reach the upper limit increase number at the timing of tf2, the case where the increase/decrease number did not actually reach the upper limit increase number at the timing of tf2. showing.

Although the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 0 at the timing of tf2, the number of additional games of tf1 is added to the total number of eliminated games TEG as described above. In other words, if the player ends the advantageous interval just because the number of games remaining in the advantageous interval becomes 0, the player will suffer a great loss. Therefore, in such a case, the number of games to reach the upper limit increase number (timing of tf4) is predicted again, and the number of games up to that point (until the upper limit increase number is reached) is calculated as the total disappearance game number TEG. to the number of remaining games ZG (FIG. 240(d)).

The redistribution processing performed when the actual increase/decrease number is smaller than the prediction will be described below. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing redistribution processing. The redistribution process is a process that is executed after an affirmative determination is made in steps S1408, S1414, S1421, and S1426 in the number-of-games management process. becomes 0.

In step S14301, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation count, the attack mode continuation count, the VB mode continuation count, and the special zone continuation count are all zero. In other words, in step S14301, it is determined that the number of continuations of the attack mode is 0 in the immediately preceding process, for example, and then it is not the case of shifting to the challenge mode without shifting to the normal mode. If all the numbers of continuations are 0, it is determined in step S14302 whether or not the total number of eliminated games TEG is 1 or more. It is determined whether or not the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number of the interval is reached and the condition for forced termination is satisfied. The situation in FIG. 240(c) is the case where the determinations in steps S14301 and S14302 are affirmative and the determination in step S14303 is negative.

That is, when the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG becomes 0 even though the number of games to be added to the total number of eliminated games TEG is stored, the process proceeds to step S14304. In step S14304, a process of grasping the total number of eliminated games TEG is executed. Then, in step S14305, the remaining increase/decrease expected number NM is calculated when the total number of eliminated games TEG is consumed as an advantageous interval. More specifically, the expected remaining increase/decrease number NM is calculated by multiplying the total number of eliminated games TEG by the expected increase/decrease number KM. In the subsequent step S14306, a process of calculating the total expected increase/decrease number of sheets SM from the remaining expected increase/decrease number of sheets NM and the current advantageous section increase/decrease number of sheets ZM is executed. Then, in step S14307, a process of calculating the number of blank sheets FM that can be increased is executed. That is, the processing of steps S14304 to S14307 is processing for determining whether or not the upper limit increase number is exceeded when the total number of eliminated games TEG is all consumed as an advantageous interval.

In step S14308, it is determined whether or not the vacant number FM is 0 or less because the upper limit increase number is exceeded. If it does not become 0 or less and it is predicted that the upper limit increase number will not be exceeded even if all the total number of eliminated games TEG is consumed, the flow advances to step S14309 to set the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG to continue the attack mode. Perform the process of entering a number.

If the number of empty sheets FM is 0 or less in step S14308, the process proceeds to step S14310. In step S14310, a process of calculating the number of games YG required to reach the upper limit increase number is executed. More specifically, the number of games YG required to reach the upper limit increase is calculated by dividing the difference between the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM and the upper limit increase number by the expected increase/decrease number KM. Then, in step S14311, it is determined whether or not the number of games YG required to reach the upper limit increase number is greater than the number of empty games FG calculated from the number of games in the advantageous zone AG and the upper limit number of games of 1500 games. If the free game FG is larger, the advantageous section can be consumed up to the upper limit increase number. In this case, in step S14312, a process of dividing the number of games YG required for the upper limit increase number from the total number of eliminated games TEG is executed. , in step S14313, a process of adding the number of games YG required to reach the upper limit increase number to the number of continuations of the attack mode is executed.

If it is determined in step S14311 that the number of games YG required to reach the upper limit increase number is greater than the number of empty games FG, then in step S14314 the number of games corresponding to the number of empty games FG is calculated from the number of total eliminated games TEG. A division process is executed, and in step S14315, a process of adding the number of games corresponding to the number of empty games FG to the number of continuations of the attack mode is executed.

After any one of steps S14309, S14313, and S14315 is executed, in step S14316, a process of setting a redistribution flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The redistribution flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the attack mode continuation count has been re-inputted by each of the processes described above. After that, in step S14317, after setting an add-on command corresponding to the number of games added to the attack mode continuation number in the above process as an output target to the display control device 81, this redistribution process ends. . In this case, the number of displayed games and the number of attack mode continuations are adjusted by a post-addition notification or the like.

As described above, in the configuration in which the second excess flag is set by predicting the increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section, after the second excess flag is set, the number of added games is set to the total number of eliminated games TEG even if an additional opportunity occurs. , and the number of remaining games ZM is not added. However, if the actual number of increased numbers is less than the prediction, the number of remaining games ZM may become 0 before the number of increased numbers reaches the upper limit increase number. Therefore, if such an event occurs, the number of games up to the upper limit increase number is predicted again based on the value of the number of eliminated games TEG by the above-mentioned redistribution processing, and The required number of games is extracted from the disappearance game number TEG. Therefore, the addition after the second excess flag is set is not completely invalidated, and it is possible to preferably avoid the player from being disadvantaged.

Further, in the redistribution process, the number of remaining games ZM is redistributed within the range of the number of eliminated games TEG. It is possible to prevent the ball output rate from becoming too high.

<Modification 10>
In this modified example, in the configuration of modified example 9, when an additional trigger occurs after the second excess flag is set, the number of eliminated games TEG is not entirely added to the number of eliminated games TEG, but is temporarily stored in another counter. It is configured to be stored. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the number-of-games addition process in this modification.

That is, in step S14401, it is determined whether or not either the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set. If neither of these has been set, the number of games to be added this time is added to the corresponding number of continuous games in steps S14402 and S14403, and then this number of games addition process ends.

If it is determined in step S14401 that any of the excess flags has been set, then in step S14404 the number of additional games is grasped, and in this modification, the first excess flag is set in step S14405. Determine whether or not If the first excess flag is set, a process of adding the current number of added games to the total number of eliminated games TEG is executed in step S14406, as in the seventh embodiment.

On the other hand, if the first excess flag is not set in step S14405, that is, if only the second excess flag is set among the first excess flag and the second excess flag, the process proceeds to step S14407. In step S14407, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the number of elimination preparation games EJG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The number of games to be eliminated EJG is a value for temporarily storing the number of games to be added in the event that the number of games to be added is expected to be satisfied in the future when the second condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is expected to be satisfied in the future. is a counter.

After the process of step S14406 or step S14407 is executed, the process for the fifth special notification is executed in steps S14408 to S14413, and then the number of games addition process ends. The processing of steps S14408 to S14413 is the same as the processing of steps S13306 to S13311.

In this case, in the redistribution process (FIG. 241), in step S14302, instead of the total number of games to be eliminated TEG, it is determined whether or not the number of games to be eliminated EJG is 1 or more. In step S14304, instead of the total disappearance game number TEG, the disappearance preparation game number EJG is grasped. Used for calculation. In step S14312, the number of games CG up to the maximum number of games is subtracted from the number of preparatory games to disappear EJG, and in step S14314, the number of vacant games FG is subtracted from the number of preparatory games to disappear EJG.

FIG. 243(a) is a flow chart showing the vanishing game number moving process for moving the number of vanishing preparation games EJG to the total number of vanishing games TEG. The lost game number moving process is, for example, a process executed after step S13111 in the remaining game number management process, and is a process executed when the first excess flag is set. This is a process that is executed in a situation where

In step S14501, it is determined whether or not the second excess flag is set. When the second excess flag is set, in step S14502, the number EJG of preparation games to be eliminated is grasped, and the value of the number EJG of preparation games to be eliminated is added to the total number of games TEG to be eliminated. In this case, the value of the number of disappearance preparation games EJG is cleared. If the second excess flag is not set in step S14501, or after the process of step S14502 is executed, the lost game number moving process is terminated.

That is, in the present modification, if an addition occurs in a situation where only the second excess flag is set, a value corresponding to the added number of games is temporarily stored in the number of elimination preparation games EJG. Then, when the first excess flag is set, the number of games stored in the number of games to be eliminated EJG is moved to the total number of eliminated games TEG. If the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG becomes 0 before the first excess flag is set, the value of the number of games ready for extinction EJG is used to perform a redistribution process to the number of remaining games ZG. . In other words, in the present modification, the event that the number of games stored in the total number of eliminated games TEG is temporarily subtracted before elimination does not occur. In this way, by separately managing the number of disappearance preparation games EJG that can decrease and the total number of disappearance games TEG that does not decrease, the ease of managing the total disappearance game number TEG is improved. In presenting useful information to the player based on this, the rewriting frequency and access frequency of the total lost game number TEG, which is the basis for the information, can be reduced, and the storage stability of the total lost game number TEG can be ensured. Therefore, for example, an error such as erroneously erasing the total lost game number TEG is less likely to occur, and the profit that the player should obtain (presentation of information that can be useful, occurrence of setting value suggestion) due to the error is reduced. It is possible to preferably avoid the event of disappearance.

As described above, the number of games EJG for elimination preparation is stored with the number of games when an addition occurs while the second excess flag is set. Then, the second excess flag can be said to be a reference for determining whether or not the total number of eliminated games TEG when the forced termination condition is finally satisfied has been temporarily stored in the number of games to be eliminated EJG.

In this case, in the sixth special notification process at the time of forced termination, the sixth special notification lottery table may be changed depending on the presence or absence of the second excess flag. More specifically, for example, when the second excess flag is set, the process is performed according to the sixth special notification A lottery table, and when the second excess flag is not set, the sixth special notification B lottery The configuration is such that processing is performed using a table. In any of the sixth special notification lottery tables, the information on the total number of eliminated games TEG is used. and the processing for the sixth special notification based on the total number of eliminated games TEG that has not passed the number of eliminated preparation games EJG. It is also possible to produce a difference in the degree of advantage due to the set value suggestion.

In the RAM 106, as shown in FIG. 243(b), the total disappearance game number TEG and the disappearance preparation game number EJG are stored in the total disappearance game number TEG provided in the normal section counter area 210 of the various counter areas 106e. It is preferable to store the number of games EJG in the number of games TEG area, and to store the number of games in preparation for annihilation EJG in the number of games in annihilation preparation EJG area provided in the counter area 209 corresponding to the advantageous section of the various counter areas 106e. In this manner, in the configuration for presenting information beneficial to the player using the number of games in excess of the forced termination condition, the seventh embodiment is such that the excess can no longer be exceeded. In addition, information used in connection with notification of pushing order in the advantageous section (the number of games to be eliminated EJG) and information used in sections other than the advantageous section (total number of games to be eliminated TEG) are separately stored. This makes it possible to take over the information generated during the advantageous section even after the advantageous section ends.

The access restriction setting of the CPU 102 may be made different between the area in which the total number of games to be eliminated TEG is stored and the area in which the number of games to be eliminated EJG is stored. More specifically, in the area where the total number of eliminated games TEG is stored, access is permitted during the process of adding the number of games in steps S14406 and S14502 in the advantageous section, and access is prohibited during the process of subtracting the number of games, for example. With the limiting configuration, the stability of the information on the number of eliminated games TEG is ensured, and the special notification based on the number of eliminated games TEG can be performed more safely. On the other hand, if the number of games to be eliminated EJG is allowed to be accessed in both the addition process and the subtraction process in the advantageous section, the convenience of the number of games to be eliminated EJG is greatly improved. By thus setting different access restrictions for the numbers of games TEG and EJG, the significance of separately storing common information such as the number of games in the advantageous section in a plurality of storage areas is increased.

<Modification 11>
In this modified example, the subsequent advantages are differentiated based on the redistribution processing shown in modified example 10 being performed. FIG. 244 is a diagram for explaining an example of applying the difference in the degree of advantage based on the redistribution process to the sixth special notification at the time of forced termination. It is a flow chart which shows processing for special information.

That is, in step S14601, it is determined whether or not the above redistribution flag is set. When the redistribution flag is not set, as the sixth special notification of this time, the processing for generating the special notification using the sixth special notification A lottery table (steps S14602 to S14607) is executed. The processing of steps S14602 to S14607 is the same as the processing of steps S13702 to S13707.

On the other hand, if the redistribution flag is set and the redistribution of the total disappearance game number TEG and the disappearance preparation game number EJG is performed before the current forced termination, the sixth special notification will be issued. A process (steps S14608 to S14613) for generating a special notification using the special notification B lottery table is executed. The processing of steps S14608 to S14613 is the same as the processing of steps S13708 to S13713.

As already explained, in setting value suggestion using the 6th special notification A lottery table and setting value suggestion using the 6th special notification B lottery table, the one using the B lottery table used the A lottery table. It is easier to narrow down the setting value than the one (Fig. 230). The redistribution process is performed when the upper limit increase number is predicted to be reached, but the upper limit increase number is not reached in the game that was predicted to reach the upper limit increase number. This is a case where the payout of medals in each game is less than expected. In other words, the player does not receive as much profit as originally expected. Therefore, by varying the easiness of narrowing down the setting value when the sixth special notification is performed as described above, it is possible to compensate for the above-noted profit with information such as setting value suggestion.

<Modification 12>
In this modification, when the actual number of increase/decrease number of cards in the advantageous section ZM is smaller than the predicted number of sheets (total increase/decrease number of sheets SM) predicted by the remaining number management process, the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section is adjusted to increase. FIG. 245 shows the CB pressing order notification process in this modification. The CB push order notification process is a process that is executed when it is determined in the push order process (FIG. 38) that the CB (not shown) has been won. is a CB winning process, and is executed when the determination is affirmative.

In step S14701, the remaining payout number in the CB state (see step S605 of bonus state processing in FIG. 26) is referenced to determine whether or not the remaining payout number is 15. Here, as the winning combination in the CB state, CB small and medium combination 1 to CB small and medium combination 4 with index values IV=49 to 52 are set (see FIG. 17, etc.). Winning any one of the CB small and medium combination 4 with a high probability (one of them will surely win). The CB state is a 2-bet game, and if you win CB small and medium hand 1 to CB small and medium hand 4, you will win one of the 1st small hand to 41st hand, and as a privilege, 15 medals. A payout or 14 medals is paid out (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Which of the CB medium and small wins 1 to CB small and medium wins 4 wins is managed by the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are stopped (see FIG. 27(a)). More specifically, the CB small and medium winning combination 1 and the CB small and medium winning combination 2 achieve a small winning combination of paying out 15 medals regardless of the stop order, and the CB small and medium winning combination 3 and CB small and medium winning combination 4 are stopped. Depending on the order, the stop order of the small winning combination of paying out 15 medals and the small winning winning combination of paying out 14 medals are different.

The situation where the number of remaining payouts is 15 in step S14701 means that it is the first game in the CB state. If the remaining number of payouts is 15, the process advances to step S14702 to determine whether or not the above redistribution flag is set. If the redistribution flag is set, it is determined in step S14703 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is CB small and medium combination 3 or CB small and medium combination 4. That is, the process of step S14703 is a process of determining whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a result of different payout numbers depending on the stop order.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S14703, in step S14704, notification of the pressing order of the stop order for paying out 14 medals is generated. Thereafter, in step S14705, after outputting a push order command to the display control device 81, this CB push order notification processing is terminated. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S14701 to S14703, this process ends without performing the process for notifying the pressing order. In this case, a result of paying out 14 medals may win a prize, or a result of paying out 15 medals may win a prize.

By doing so, the net increase in the number of sheets after the redistribution processing is performed is increased. More specifically, when CB is won after the redistribution flag is set, 14 medals and 15 medals can be paid out in the CB state, and the increased number in the CB state is 14 sheets + 15 sheets - 2 sheets x 2 = 25 sheets. On the other hand, before the increase notification flag is set, for example, when 15 medals are paid out in the first game, the CB state ends in that game. is 15 - 2 = 13, resulting in a difference in the increased number of sheets that is nearly double compared to after the redistribution flag is set. By doing so, when the redistribution process is performed, that is, when the actual increased number of cards is less than the expected number of cards, it is possible to bring the number closer to the expected number of cards.

<Modification 13>
In this modified example, a process in which the actual advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM is larger than the predicted number of sheets (total increase/decrease expected number of sheets SM) by the remaining number management process will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 246, an event that occurs when the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous sections ZM is larger than predicted will be described.

In FIG. 246(a), timing tg1, which is in the advantageous section, is shown as a reference, and at timing tg2, when the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous section at that time is used up, the upper limit number of games is not reached, and the number of medals increases or decreases. does not exceed the upper limit increase number, and neither the first excess flag nor the second excess flag is set.

In this case, the auxiliary display section 65 can display the number of remaining games corresponding to the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval ZG. displayed as a number.

In FIG. 246(b), timing tg3, which is later than timing tg1, is shown as a reference. This example shows a case where the number of sheets increases more than the predicted increase/decrease number at timing tg1, and the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is exceeded at timing tg3. In other words, the timing of tg3 is the timing before tg2 when the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG (200 games) at the timing of tg1 should have been completed. In this case, when the upper limit increase number of the advantageous interval is exceeded as described above, the advantageous interval is forcibly terminated, and the auxiliary display section 65 performs, for example, an attack mode ending effect.

Then, at timing tg1, the number of remaining games corresponding to the number ZG of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is reported by the auxiliary display unit 65, and at timing tg3, the number of remaining games reported at time tg1 is all displayed. The advantageous section is forcibly terminated without completing it, and the player has the impression that the profit that should be obtained from the games for which tg1 was notified (remaining 100 games in FIG. 246) was unfairly exploited. may hold

FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the seventh special notification process in this modified example. The seventh special notification process is, for example, a process that is executed when the advantageous section is forced to end in the second section display process (for example, between steps S13606 and S13607 in FIG. 228).

In step S14801, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM is 2400 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S14801, and the current advantageous section ends without satisfying the second forced termination condition, the seventh special notification process ends. If the second forced termination condition is satisfied, it is determined in step S14802 whether or not the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is greater than zero. When the number of games remaining in the advantageous interval ZG is greater than 0, the game is forcibly terminated due to the second forced termination condition even though the number of games ZG remaining in the advantageous interval remains. If the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 0, the seventh special notification process is terminated, and if it is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S14803. In step S14803, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG ascertained in step S14802 includes a value that has already been notified. More specifically, the number of games for the post-addition notification (the number of games corresponding to the post-addition counter BG on the display control device 81 side, which will be described in the figure and below as the post-addition counter BG) is grasped, and the post-addition counter If BG is equal to the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval ZG, it is determined that the number of games in the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval ZG does not include the number of games that have already been notified. It is determined that the information already notified is included. If it is determined that the information that has already been notified is not included, the seventh special notification processing is terminated. That is, even if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is forcibly terminated due to the second forced termination condition, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is not notified, the seventh special No notification processing is performed.

If the information already notified is included, the process advances to step S14804. In step S14804, processing for grasping the notification amount is executed. In this case, by subtracting the post-loading counter BG from the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG, it is possible to grasp the reported amount. In subsequent step S14805, the seventh special notification lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a. As shown in FIG. 248(a), the seventh special notification lottery table is arranged so that the occurrence rate of the seventh special notification (the winning rate of the notification lottery) differs according to the number of games that have been notified ascertained in step S14804. , and is set so that the greater the number of games that have been notified, the higher the occurrence rate.

In subsequent step S14806, a lottery for execution of the seventh special notification is performed based on the number of games for which notification was obtained in step S14804 and the seventh special notification lottery table obtained in step S14805. Then, in step S14807, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won, and if it has been won, in step S14808 the command for executing the seventh special notification is set as an output target to the display control device 81, If the notification lottery is not won, the seventh special notification non-execution command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S14809. After executing the process of step S14808 or step S14809, the process for 7th special information is complete|finished.

The processing on the display control device 81 side that receives the seventh special notification execution command and the seventh special notification non-execution command is roughly the same as the processing when other special notification execution command/non-execution command is received. Since it is the same, the detailed description of the processing is omitted, but since the command for executing the seventh special notification and the command for not executing the seventh special notification are output at the end of the advantageous section, the attack mode end effect etc. , the seventh special notification (presence or absence of appearance of a predetermined character, type of character appearing, background, etc.) may be performed. When the display control device 81 executes the seventh special notification (when the command for executing the seventh special notification is received), the type of the seventh special notification is determined by type lottery or the like. As shown in FIG. 248(b), the seventh special notification type table is set so that the types (a1 to a4) of the seventh special notification to be generated differ depending on the set value. It is possible to predict the set value from the type of the seventh special notification.

However, the seventh special notification is set so that it is not possible or difficult to narrow down the setting value by itself regardless of the type of occurrence. That is, the seventh special notification a1 and the seventh special notification a2 are generated with any set value. Further, when the seventh special notification a3 occurs, it is determined that the setting is 3 or more, and when the seventh special notification a4 occurs, it is determined that the setting is 5 or more. However, regardless of the setting value, more than half of the types of the seventh special notification to be selected are the seventh special notification a1 and the seventh special notification a2, and compared with other special notifications, the set value The difficulty of narrowing down is high. In the situation of FIG. 246(b) above, at least the number of upper limit increases in the advantageous section has been reached, and the actual profit for the player is what was predicted in FIG. 246(a) (upper limit increase This is due to the fact that it has become more desirable to players than the number does not reach). In other words, in the situation of FIG. 246(b), the player does not suffer a substantial disadvantage, but rather enjoys more profit than expected. This is based on the idea that if information that can be useful is presented, it may be possible to reduce the extent to which it can be useful. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a balance between the loss or disadvantage of the player and the presentation of information (compensation).

As described above, in a configuration in which there are the first condition for forced termination of the upper limit number of games and the second condition for forced termination of the number of increased upper limit games as conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section, the second condition for forced termination occurs unexpectedly early. If it is established (in a game earlier than the prediction), a discrepancy may occur in relation to the content of notification of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section. Therefore, in order to eliminate the dissatisfaction that the player may feel due to the discrepancy, a configuration is adopted in which information that may be beneficial to the player is presented (suggestion of set values). By doing so, it is possible to suitably enjoy the game without losing the player's desire to play.

<Modification 14>
In this modification, based on modification 13, the actual increase/decrease number ZM in the advantageous section is greater than the number predicted by the remaining number management process (total increase/decrease expected number SM), and the number of remaining games is not notified. When the upper limit increase number is reached, the part of the notification that could not be consumed is used for setting the special section. FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing special section setting processing in this modification.

The processing of steps S14901 to S14905 is the same as the processing of steps S14001 to S14005. PG is set. In addition, in this modification, in addition to the number of games in the special section PG based on these parameters, the number of games based on the above-mentioned notification portion that could not be completed is set for the special section. The number of special section games PG based on TEG, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG, and the difference number up to the upper limit increase number is referred to as a first number of special section games PG1.

In step S14906, a process of ascertaining the number of notified games is executed. The processing in step S14906 is the same as the processing in step S14804, and the number of games that have been notified can be grasped by subtracting the post-loading counter BG from the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG. In the subsequent step S14907, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the number of games ascertained in the above step S14906 to the second special section game number PG2 provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Note that the value input in step S14907 may not be exactly the same as the value grasped in step S14906. A configuration may be adopted in which the values are input by lottery or the like, and the values obtained in step S14906 are used as parameters for the lottery.

After that, in step S14908, it is determined whether or not one of the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2 is 1 or more. In step S14910, a process for setting a special section is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S14908, or after the processing of step S14910 has been executed, the total number of eliminated games TEG is cleared in step S14911, and then the special section setting processing ends.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 250(a), in the special section game number subtraction process (15003), the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2 are each decremented by one. Then, in step S15004, it is determined whether or not the first special section game number PG1 out of the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2 has become 0. , the special section flag is cleared in step S15005 to end the special section. That is, although the number of games in the first special section PG1 and the number of games in the second special section PG2 are set as parameters for the number of games in the special section, the number of games in the special section itself is defined by the number of games in the first special section PG1. .

On the other hand, in the push order process in this modification, the occurrence rate of push order notification when special replays 1 and 2 are won is 1 or more for the number of games in the first special section PG1 and the number of games in the second special section PG2. The situation is different from the situation after the second special section game number PG2 becomes 0 (the situation where only the first special section PG1 is 1 or more). Specifically, if it is determined in step S15051 that special replays 1 and 2 have been won, it is determined in step S15052 whether or not the game is in the special section. If it is in the special section, the setting value is grasped in step S15053, and the push order notification lottery table at the time of special replay winning is acquired in step S15054. As shown in FIGS. 251(a) and 251(b), the pressing order notification table for winning a special replay shows the situation after the number of games PG2 in the second special section becomes 0 (only the first special section PG1 The situation in which the number of games is 1 or more (FIG. 251(a)) differs from the situation in which the number of games in the first special section PG1 and the number of games in the second special section PG2 are 1 or more (FIG. 251(b)). FIG. 251(a) is the same as the table shown in FIG. 162(b), and is set so that the rate of occurrence of push-order notification and the type of push-order notification when the push-order notification is generated differ depending on the set values. It is In FIG. 251(b), similar to FIG. 251(a), the rate of occurrence of push-order notification and the type of push-order notification when the push-order notification is generated are set differently depending on the set values, but the settings are different. Differences in occurrence rates of push order notifications depending on values and variations in types of push order notifications when generating push order notifications are different from those shown in FIG. The table in FIG. 251(b) is set so that setting values can be easily narrowed down from the occurrence rate and type.

In step S15055, a push order notification lottery process is executed, and in step S15056, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery is won. If the player wins, a process of setting a push order notification command is executed in step S15057.

That is, when a special section is set based on forced termination, a section is set in which setting values are likely to be narrowed down by the number of games that have already been notified. In this way, the fact that the number of games already notified is not completed can be followed up by the section in which setting values can be easily narrowed down, and the player's sense of absurdity can be favorably eliminated.

In particular, in the special section, if it is set in the special section, it does not mean that beneficial information is presented to the player. It is possible to avoid excessive events and maintain a good balance between the player's loss or disadvantage and its follow-up.

<Modification 15>
In this modified example, when the second excess flag is set in the remaining number management process, a new playability is provided using the relationship between the number of games that will reach the upper limit increase number and the number of games that have been notified. do. FIG. 252(a) shows part of the flowchart of the remaining number management process in this modified example.

In this modification, if it is determined in step S13205 that the number of available sheets FM that can be increased is 0 or less, a second excess flag is set in step S15101. Then, in step S15102, a process of ascertaining the number of games required to reach the upper limit increase number is executed, and in step S15103, a process of ascertaining the notified remaining number of games is executed.

In step S15104, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games as notified in step S15103 is larger than the number of games required to reach the upper limit increase number ascertained in step S15102. When the notified remaining number of games is greater, that is, when the second excess flag is set, when it is understood that the upper limit increase number is reached before the already notified remaining number of games is completely consumed, After setting the eighth special notification command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S15105, the remaining number management processing ends. If the number of games required to reach the upper limit increased number is greater than the number of remaining games that have been notified, the remaining number management process is terminated without setting the eighth special notification command.

FIG. 252(b) shows an example of the effect of the eighth special notification.

In this example, the number of remaining games that have been notified is 300 games, and the number of games required to reach the upper limit increase number is 250 games. Along with the display (300 games) and the display of the total number of won medals (1900), the limit excess information image GTP based on the setting of the second excess flag is displayed.

As the eighth special notification, the auxiliary display section will notify you that it will be advantageous to forcibly terminate the display of the number of remaining games while the displayed remaining number of games remains as much as possible when the upper limit increase number is reached and forced to end. 65. In this example, along with a girl character, an explanation is displayed in response to the display of the number of remaining games, saying, "You'll be super lucky if you have a lot left." An explanation is given that the subsequent special section will be advantageous.

By doing so, the phenomenon of forced termination without completing the notified remaining number of games is not a disadvantage for the player, but rather an advantageous phenomenon. It is possible to give the impression of the game, and it is possible to create a new game property using it.

In particular, in this modification, it is advantageous for the player to forcibly terminate the advantageous section as soon as possible, so it is possible to increase the expectation for the bonus state with a large expected increase/decrease per game. In other words, in a situation where it is known that the upper limit increase number will be reached, even if medals increase due to the notification of the pressing order in attack mode, etc., or if medals increase due to the bonus state, the final Since the number of medals to be added does not change, a phenomenon may occur in which the bonus win, which should be appreciated, cannot be enjoyed. On the other hand, as in the above configuration, it is advantageous to reach the upper limit increase number earlier, so that the bonus winning can be expected to be achieved earlier, so the bonus winning is pleasing. It is possible to strengthen a certain impression.

In the above modified example, the greater the number of remaining games that have been notified at the time of forced termination, the more advantageous it is for the player. However, if the notified number of remaining games is a predetermined specific number, such as a sharp number, it may be advantageous for the player.

For example, in FIG. 253(a), regarding the seventh special notification shown in Modification 13, the fewer the number of games that have been notified at the time of forced termination, the higher the occurrence rate of the seventh special notification. Shows a lottery table. By doing so, it is advantageous to forcibly end the game after the number of games that have already been notified is used up as much as possible, and it is possible to thoroughly enjoy the advantageous section to the end.

FIG. 253(b) shows that for the seventh special notification shown in Modification 13, if the number of games that have been notified at the time of forced termination is a predetermined specific number such as 10, 50, 100, or 200, The seventh special notification lottery table is shown in which the occurrence rate of the seventh special notification is higher than when there is no seventh special notification. By doing this, the number of games that have already been notified is exhausted early, or vice versa, and the phenomenon that the expectation for the 7th special notification is diminished is less likely to occur. In relation to the remaining number of completed games, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game result of each game until the end.

In the above configuration, for example, in the process of setting the addition effect (FIG. 172, etc.), depending on whether or not the second excess flag is set, whether the addition notification is immediate addition notification or later addition notification is made different. may be configured. In this case, for example, in a situation where a large number of games that have already been notified remain and the number of games is forcibly terminated at the upper limit increase number, it is more advantageous (the seventh special notification is more likely to occur). It is preferable for the player to select the post-addition notification in a configuration in which it is more advantageous to forcibly end the game at the upper limit increase number in a situation where the number of games already notified has decreased. By doing so, in a situation where the excess flag is set, such as the number of games to be added, even an event that may no longer be of interest can be played using the relationship with the number of games that have been notified. It is possible to incorporate it into the game, and the fun of the game can be improved.

<Modification 16>
In this modified example, the configuration for predicting that the second forced termination condition can be satisfied in the future is changed. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing remaining number management processing in this modification.

In step S15201, the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM is grasped. In the subsequent step S15202, processing for calculating the average value of the number of times bonus wins can be expected (expected bonus win count KB) from the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is performed. For example, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 500 games and the bonus winning probability is about 1/254, the expected number of bonus winning times KB is calculated as 500 games×about 1/254=about 1.97 times. be done.

In step S15203, an expected increase in the bonus (expected bonus increase number KBM) is calculated based on the expected bonus win count KB calculated in step S15202. For example, if the number of bonuses obtained is 144, the expected bonus increase number KBM is calculated as approximately 1.97 times (KB)×144=approximately 283.68.

In the subsequent step S15204, the number of games (reported number of games HG) excluding the number of games performed in the bonus state in the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZM when the bonus is won according to the expected number of bonus winnings KB is calculated. For example, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG is 500, the expected number of bonus wins KB is about 1.97, and the number of games required to complete the bonus state is 24, then the number of reported games HG is 500 games. - About 1.97 times (KB) x 24 games = about 452.72 games.

In step S15205, the remaining increase/decrease expected number NM is calculated when the advantageous section for the number of reported games HG is executed. In this case, the expected remaining increase/decrease number NM is calculated by multiplying the reported number of games HG by the expected increase/decrease number KM which is the net increase number (approximately +1.90) without considering the bonus state. In the example where the reported number of games HG is about 452.72 games, the remaining increase/decrease expected number of cards NM is calculated as about 452.72 games×1.90 cards (KM)=about 860.17 cards.

Then, in step S15206, by adding the expected remaining increase/decrease number NM and the expected bonus increase number KBM to the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG taking into account the number of games consumed in the bonus state is obtained. , the total increase/decrease expected number of sheets SM is calculated. In the above example, the total expected increase/decrease number of sheets SM is approximately 860.17 sheets (NM) + approximately 283.68 sheets (KBM) = 1143.85 sheets plus the current advantageous section increase/decrease number of sheets ZM. This value is smaller than the total expected increase/decrease number SM (1230 + ZM) calculated as the number of remaining games ZG in the same advantageous section in the seventh embodiment. Thereafter, in step S15207, the number of empty sheets FM that can be increased is calculated, and when the number of empty sheets FM becomes 0 or less (step S15208), a process of setting a second excess flag is performed (step S15209).

As described above, in predicting (calculating) the number of medals that can be expected to increase or decrease in the remaining advantageous section, not only the increase in the bonus state is taken into account, but also the number of remaining games in the advantageous section that will be consumed in the bonus state. By taking into account, it is possible to predict the increase/decrease in the number of medals more accurately.

In particular, even if the advantageous section is completed in the bonus state, the number of games in the advantageous section AG continues to be counted. The number of games played in the attack mode or the like is reduced by the state. That is, for example, if the increase in the number of cards that can be expected in the case of executing a predetermined number of games of so-called ART, which is an attack mode and a high RT state, is calculated in consideration of the transition to the bonus state, the ART when transitioning to the bonus state Since the counting of the number of remaining games is stopped, simply adding the increase in the number of cards expected in the ART state to the transition rate to the bonus state and the increase in the number expected in the bonus state, the number of games in the predetermined number of games It is possible to calculate the increase in the number of sheets that can be expected during ART. More specifically, for example, if the ART of 100 games is implemented with a net increase of about +1.90, and a bonus lottery that can be expected to win 144 medals at about 1/254 during that time is performed, the 100 By digesting the ART of the game, you can expect to get 100 games x about 1.90 medals + 100 games x about 1/254 x 144 medals = about 246 medals, which is converted to the net increase per game. Then, it becomes about 2.46 sheets. On the other hand, if the ART count is not stopped when transitioning to the bonus state, it is necessary to consider the reduction in the number of ART games for the bonus state. (100 games - 100 games x about 1/254 x 24 games (number of games required in bonus state)) x about 1.90 + 100 games x about 1/254 x 144 = about 227 medals can be expected, which translates into a net increase of 2.27 medals per game. In this way, by taking into account the configuration in which the counting of the advantageous interval is not stopped by the winning of the bonus in the advantageous interval, the expected increase in the number of coins can be predicted, thereby making it possible to perform more accurate prediction.

<Modification 17>
In this modified example, a technique for reducing fluctuations in which the number of net additions in the advantageous section fluctuates depending on the presence or absence of a BB win will be described. FIG. 255(a) shows part of the lottery table for the first RT state in this modified example.

In this modification, the winning probabilities of various replays during the first RT state in the seventh embodiment are different, and the normal replay with index value IV=1 has a higher winning probability than in the seventh embodiment. The winning probabilities of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 with values IV=2 to 5 are lower than those of the seventh embodiment. On the other hand, the total replay probability for all replays with index values IV=1 to 5 is set to be the same as in the seventh embodiment. Note that the index value IV=6 and after is the same as in the seventh embodiment.

By doing so, in the 1st RT state in this modification, the winning probability of the 1st promotion replay becomes lower than that of the seventh embodiment, and it is a situation where the push order notification may occur. Also, the average number of games until the transition to the second RT state is longer than in the seventh embodiment. The net increase in the number of medals in the 1st RT state in the situation where the press order notification can occur is as shown in FIG. can decrease.

FIG. 255(b) is a diagram for comparing the increase/decrease of medals in the case of winning a bonus during ART between the seventh embodiment and this modified example.

In the above seventh embodiment, if a bonus is won at the timing of th1 during ART, the bonus carry-over state occurs until the timing of th2 when the bonus winning is established, and the game state becomes the normal game state. In addition, in the return state from timing th3 when the bonus ends to timing th4 when the game returns to the second RT state, the game state is the normal game state and the first RT state. The net increase in the number of cards in each of these states is as described above. Before and after th4, it is about +1.90 sheets.

The figure shows that even in this modification, the bonus is won at th5, the bonus is won at th6, the bonus ends at th7, and the state returns to the second RT state at tf8. , th5 to th6 and th7 to th8 are about -0.99 cards per game, th6 to th7 are about +6.00 cards, and before th5 and after th8 are about +1.90 cards. .

The seventh embodiment and this modification differ in the average number of games from the end of the bonus to the return to the second RT state, and the average number of games in the seventh embodiment is th3 to th4 in the figure, The average number of games in this modification is th7 to th8, and this modification tends to be longer. By doing so, the number of net increases when a bonus is won during ART increases the number of net increases when a bonus is won during ART (the number of net increases from th1 to th4 and the number of net increases from th5 to th8). can be suppressed. Therefore, the fluctuation range of the number of net additions when a bonus is won during ART becomes small, and the difference between the predicted value of the number of net additions and the actual value can be reduced.

Incidentally, in this modified example, the probability of winning the first promoted replay during the first RT state is about 1/50, and the transition to the second RT state can occur in an average of 50 games. In addition, in the normal game state, it is possible to shift to the 1st RT state by losing (1/3) when winning a bell, which is about 1/5.5, so that transition can occur in an average of 16.5 games. . In other words, after the bonus, it takes an average of 66.5 games to return to the second RT state. The average increase/decrease number of medals in this case is about -64.8 (-0.99×66.5). Add 214 bonus cards to this, and calculate the net increase in the number of cards from winning the bonus to returning to ART in 70.5 games, which is a total of 24 games in the bonus state, is about 2.12. It will be more than the net increase. Assuming that it takes about 8 games to win a bonus, the number of net increase will be about +1.90, which is almost equal to the number of net increase in ART are so equal that the player cannot perceive the difference).

<Modification 18>
In this modified example, the total expected increase/decrease number of sheets SM calculated in the remaining number management process is appropriately corrected. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing processing for setting an add-on command in this modified example. The addition command setting process is a process that is started when an addition command is set to be output to the display control device 81 after the process of adding the number of games such as attack mode. In addition, in this modification, even when the addition is not won, the setting process of the addition command is activated, and the execution timing of the addition notification is immediate addition notification, subsequent addition notification, stop ON operation, or stop OFF. The operation timing and the like are determined by the main controller 101 side.

In step S15301, it is determined whether or not an additional lottery was won in this additional lottery. As already explained, in this modified example, the addition command setting process is activated even when the addition is not won. I can say. Further, even in the situation where the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, it is determined in step S15301 that the additional lottery was not won. If the game is not activated when the game is not won, but when the game is won on top, the flow advances to step S15302 to perform processing for grasping the number of games on top this time. Then, in step S15303, the first adjustment process is executed. The first adjustment process is a process for correcting the total expected increase/decrease number SM calculated in the second section display process of the previous game, etc., when adding this time.

The first adjustment process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that FIG. 260 will also be referred to as needed in the description.

In step S15401, a process of grasping the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. This display remaining number counter HG corresponds to the display remaining number counter HG on the side of the display control device 81, and is the number of remaining games in the currently notified advantageous section. It corresponds to the number of games ZG. In the drawings and the following description, it is referred to as a display remaining number counter HG. In step S15402, the counter temporarily inputs the value of the display remaining number counter HG to the calculation counter SC provided in the various counter areas 106e. The calculation counter SC is a counter used in arithmetic processing such as the total expected increase/decrease number of sheets SM.

In step S15403, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the calculation counter SC to which the remaining number counter for display HG (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section already notified ZG) is input is performed. Then, in step S15404, a process of calculating the remaining maximum expected increase number NMM from the calculation counter SC after the addition and the maximum increase/decrease number MM is performed. The maximum increase/decrease number MM is the maximum number that can be expected per game. In this modification, the maximum increase/decrease number MM is set to 12, which is obtained by subtracting the bet number 3 from the maximum payout number 15 per game. In addition, in the state at the time of calculation and in the state after that, the number of payouts with the highest probability of winning (the so-called main combination, the order of pressing the bell in attack mode) will be increased (9 cards - 3 cards = 6 cards) to the maximum increase/decrease number MM may be Then, in step S15405, the calculated remaining maximum expected increase number NMM is added to the current advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM to calculate the total increase/decrease maximum expected number SMM.

FIG. 260(a) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the numbers of games, counters, etc. when the first adjustment process is performed. The figure shows a case where an addition occurs at the timing of ti1. At the timing of ti1, the number of games up to ti2 corresponding to the display remaining counter HG is greater than the number of games in the advantageous section AG. It has already been notified, and shows a case where an addition of the number of games from ti2 to ti4 occurs as an addition this time. At the timing of ti1, the expected number of increases is obtained as the total expected increase/decrease number of sheets SM in the immediately preceding section display second processing, and in this example, it is predicted that the upper limit of the number of increases of 2400 sheets will not be reached. ing.

Then, as described above, in step S15405, the number of games added this time is added to the number of remaining games ZG, and the total increase/decrease maximum expected number SMM is calculated. In subsequent step S15406, it is determined whether or not the calculated total increase/decrease maximum expected number SMM exceeds the upper limit increase number. If it is determined that the upper limit increase number is exceeded, in step S15407 the upper limit increase number is subtracted from the total maximum expected increase number SMM to calculate the excess amount CM. A process of calculating the excessive number of games CG corresponding to the minute CM is performed. Then, in step S15409, a process of calculating a notification upper limit HJ, which is an upper limit at which an event of forcible termination without completing the number of games already notified, does not occur for this addition is executed. More specifically, the notification upper limit HJ is calculated by subtracting the display remaining number counter HG and the number of excess games CG from the calculation counter SC.

In FIG. 260(a), the excess number of games CG corresponding to the excess amount CM is calculated from the calculated total maximum increase/decrease expected number SMM. Based on the timing of ti1, if the maximum increase is expected in each game, including this addition, the upper limit increase number is exceeded in ti4. More specifically, when the maximum increase is expected exceeds the upper limit increase number in the game of ti3. In this case, the number of games from ti3 to ti4 is calculated as the excessive number of games CG, and the number of games from ti2 to ti3 is calculated as the notification upper limit HJ.

After calculating the notification upper limit HJ in step S15409, a process of setting adjustment flags in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S15410. The adjustment flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the excess number of games CG and the notification upper limit HJ have been calculated assuming that the total maximum expected increase/decrease number SMM exceeds the upper limit increase number by this addition.

In the subsequent step S15411, a process of adding the number of games exceeding the notification upper limit HJ, that is, the number of excess games CG to the first adjustment counter CC1 provided in the various counter areas 106e. Thereafter, after clearing the calculation counter SC in step S15412, the first adjustment process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step S15406 that the total maximum increase/decrease expected number SMM does not exceed the upper limit increase number, then the calculation counter SC is cleared in step S15412 without calculating the excess number of games CG, etc. This first adjustment process ends.

Returning to the description of the addition command setting process, after the first adjustment process is executed in step S15303, a subsequent addition lottery process is executed to determine whether or not the current addition notification is to be a subsequent addition notification in step S15304. Such processing is processing corresponding to the processing of step S8503 on the display control device 81 side. Then, in step S15305, it is determined whether or not the additional information is selected, and if the immediate addition information is selected instead of the additional information, in step S15306, the current additional game is added to the remaining number counter HG for display. number or the notification upper limit HJ set in the first adjustment process. In this case, if the notification upper limit HJ is not set, the notification of the number of additional games this time is generated in the game, and if the notification upper limit HJ is set, an additional notification corresponding to the notification upper limit HJ is generated. occurs in the game. The processing of steps S15307 to S15312 corresponds to the processing of steps S8506 to S8511, and is processing for setting at what timing of the current game the addition notification is to be generated. After executing any one of the processes of steps S15309, S15311 and S15312, in step S15313, the process of outputting and setting an additional command including the information set in each of the above processes is executed, and then this additional command is executed. end the setting process.

If it is determined in step S15305 that the post-loading notification has been selected, a process of setting a post-loading flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S15314. Then, in step S15315, a process of adding the current number of additional games or the notification upper limit HJ to the post-addition counter BG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The post-loading counter is also a counter corresponding to the post-loading counter BG on the display control device 81 side, and will be referred to as the post-loading counter BG in the drawings and the following description. After that, in step S15316, the add-on command in which various information is set is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this add-on command setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S15301 that the addition has not been won, the third adjustment process is executed in step S15317, the addition command is output set in step S15318, and the addition command setting process ends. Note that the third adjustment process will be described later in detail.

Next, the second adjustment process activated in the section display second process in this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second adjustment process is a process for readjusting the first adjustment counter CC1 set in the first adjustment process based on the result of the current game. is invoked after the

In step S15501, the number of games corresponding to the reported number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG is grasped as the display remaining number counter HG. In the subsequent step S15502, the number of games corresponding to the notification upper limit HJ is grasped. Then, in step S15503, a process of inputting the display remaining number counter HG and the notification upper limit HJ to the calculation counter SC is executed. Thereafter, in step S15504, a process of calculating the remaining maximum expected increase/decrease number of sheets NMM is executed from the calculation counter SC and the maximum increase/decrease number of sheets MM, and in step S15505, a process of calculating the total maximum expected increase/decrease number of sheets SMM is executed. The processes of steps S15504 and S15505 correspond to the processes of steps S15404 and S15405 described above.

In the following step S15506, it is determined whether or not the total maximum expected increase/decrease number SMM exceeds the upper limit increase number. Execute the process of calculating The processes of steps S15506 to S15508 correspond to the processes of steps S15406 to S15408.

In the subsequent step S15509, a process of inputting the difference between the first adjustment counter CC1 and the excess number of games CG to the second adjustment counter CC2 provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S15506 or after the processing of step S15509 is executed, the calculation counter SC is cleared and then the second adjustment processing ends.

FIG. 260(b) shows a situation where the second adjustment process is performed after the first adjustment process is performed in FIG. 260(a). The first adjustment process is performed at the start of the game, while the second adjustment process is performed at the end of the game. The timing of ti5, which is the end of the game, is shown as a reference.

As described above, the notification upper limit HJ at the time of extra winning is calculated from the maximum increase number, and the game exceeding the upper limit increase number derived from the maximum increase number If it does not reach , the game will be different from the previous prediction. More specifically, at ti1 in FIG. 260(a), a game that exceeds the upper limit increase number was predicted as ti3, but if the result of this game is not the maximum increase number, then ti3 It is predicted that the upper limit increase will be exceeded in the later game ti6. The above-mentioned second adjustment process is a process for correcting this deviation between ti3 and ti6. This is the process of inputting to the adjustment counter CC2.

As described above, the first adjustment process is executed in the game in which the opportunity to add the bonus is generated, while the second adjustment process is executed at the end of each game. Therefore, the deviation is cumulatively added to the second adjustment counter CC2 in each game.

FIG. 259 is a flow chart showing the third adjustment process started in the process of setting the add-on command.

In step S15601, it is determined whether or not the second adjustment counter CC2 is 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, in step S15602, a pseudo-additional lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a. The pseudo-additional lottery refers to the amount of the first adjustment counter CC1 that has not been won in the addition lottery this time, but is based on the second adjustment counter CC2, that is, the amount for which the addition notification restriction has been performed, after that. This is an effect for notifying the number of games for which an additional notification is possible depending on the game situation, and the same effect as the additional notification is set. Although the detailed description of the pseudo-additional lottery table is omitted, it is set whether or not the pseudo-additional lottery is won based on the game result, the display mode, etc., similarly to the extra-additional lottery table.

In step S15603, a pseudo-additional lottery process is executed, and in step S15604, it is determined whether or not the lottery process has been won. If the prize is not won, the third adjustment process is terminated as it is, and if the prize is won, the process advances to step S15605. In step S15605, as the number of games to be notified in the second adjustment counter CC2, the number of pseudo-additional notification games is determined by lottery or the like. Then, in step S15606, processing for setting an additional notification effect is executed. More specifically, an add-on command for performing an add-on notification of the number of pseudo-add-on notification games is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . Then, in step S15607, the current number of pseudo-additional games is subtracted from the second adjustment counter CC2, and then the third adjustment process is terminated.

As described above, even if the remaining number of games is notified, the upper limit that the notified number of games will not be forcibly terminated without consuming the notified number of games is calculated from the maximum increase number, and an additional notification is made up to the upper limit. By doing so, it is possible to avoid inconsistencies in reporting after the fact, and to prevent the feeling of discomfort and loss from being forced to end without completing the number of games that have already been reported. It becomes possible.

In addition, after calculating the notification upper limit as described above and performing additional notification based on the upper limit, it is configured to readjust the notification upper limit by the second adjustment process according to the actual game situation. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the additional notification is unnecessarily restricted and not to hinder the effect of improving the degree of attention to the additional notification, while preventing the contradiction in the notification. .

The number of games that can be notified in the second adjustment process is notified as a pseudo-addition in the third adjustment process when the addition is not won. It is also possible to give an impression as if an additional lottery was held, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Modification 19>
In this modified example, the remaining game number management process and the remaining number management process that are started in the game after the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set will be described.

That is, in the present embodiment, if processing for increasing the number of remaining games, such as adding the number of games in attack mode, is performed in the advantageous interval, the event that the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval ZG is reduced due to a factor other than the completion of the game does not occur. It is configured so that it does not occur. Then, in the remaining game number management process, once the first excess flag is set, that is, after it is specified that the upper limit number of games has been reached, the specified number is not overturned. Then, regarding the remaining game number management process, once the first excess flag is set, the remaining game number management process is not started, or even if it is started, the first excess flag is set. Alternatively, the remaining game number management process may be terminated without executing the processes of steps S13101 to S13111.

On the other hand, with respect to the second excess flag, that is, after it is specified that the upper limit increase in medals has been reached, as described above, the upper limit increase in medals may not be reached depending on the subsequent game situation. It can also happen. The remaining number management processing in this case will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In this modification, in step S15701, it is determined whether or not the second excess flag has already been set. If not set, the process advances to step S15702 to execute processing for specifying that the second forced termination condition of steps S15702 to S15707 will be satisfied in the future. The processing of steps S15702 to S15707 is the same as the processing of steps S13201 to S13206.

If it is determined in step S15701 that the second excess flag has been set, the flow advances to step S15708 to determine whether or not a predetermined correction condition has been established. If the correction condition is satisfied, the process for identifying whether the second forced termination condition will be satisfied in the future in steps S15302 to S15307 is executed again, and if the correction condition is not satisfied If so, the number-of-remaining management process ends without performing the process for specifying.

The above correction conditions are, for example, when a bonus is won, when a bonus is won, when the RT state shifts to a low RT state (when transitioning from the 2nd RT state or 3rd RT state to the 1st RT state or normal game state ), when the RT state transitions from the high RT state to the low RT state, and when it returns to the high RT state, the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM and the previously predicted number of sheets (total increase/decrease expected number SM) exceeds a predetermined number.

If the correction process is performed based on bonus winning, bonus winning, or when the RT state transitions to the low RT state, the state where the expected increase/decrease number KM is substantially different from that used for prediction can be prevented. The configuration is such that correction is performed based on the transition, and there is no need to consider bonuses, RT state transition rates, etc. in advance prediction, and the processing configuration of prediction processing (remaining number management processing) is simplified. In addition, when the RT state transitions from the high RT state to the low RT state, if it is configured to perform correction processing based on the return to the high RT state, the number of staying games in the low RT state can be reduced. Processing such as prediction in advance is omitted, and it is only necessary to correct the decrease in the actual low RT state, further simplifying the processing configuration. In addition, if a configuration is adopted in which correction is performed when the difference between the actual increase/decrease number and the predicted number of sheets exceeds a predetermined number, the correction will be made after the difference from the predicted number of sheets has occurred, and the number of times correction processing is performed and the number of possible It becomes possible to lower the resistance, and further simplification of the processing is achieved.

<Modification 20>
In this modified example, a situation in which a bonus win is won near the end of the advantageous section will be described. First, the situation just before the end of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 262(a) shows the case where the bonus winning flag of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is set in the game of tj1 in which the push order information such as the attack mode occurs, and at tj2 after tj1. It shows a case where a bonus prize is won. In this case, by winning the bonus, the game state from tj1 to tj2 in which the bonus winning is carried over becomes the normal game state, and the net increase number during the normal game state becomes smaller than the net increase number during the attack mode. More specifically, in games from tj1 to tj2, an increase of about -0.99 per game can be expected, and the number of medals in hand can be reduced (see FIG. 216). In addition, since the game state is the normal game state even in the return state from tj3 when the bonus state ends to tj4 when the game state returns to the second RT state, the number of owned medals can decrease. When the transition to the second RT state occurs at tj4, the number of possessed medals increases, and medals can be expected to increase until tj5 when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes 0.

On the other hand, FIG. 262(b) shows the case where the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached at tj6 between tj3 when the bonus state ends and tj4 when the second RT state returns. As described above, in the games from tj3 to tj4, the net increase in the number of medals per game is negative, but the game is forcibly terminated at tj6 when the number of medals is decreasing. Then, even though the number of games has reached the maximum number of games, the number of medals in possession is finally reduced to less than the maximum number (timing tj3 in the figure), which is advantageous. The section will be forcibly terminated, and the long-awaited game will end in a slump. If such an event occurs, the player's sense of satisfaction cannot be fully satisfied, which is not desirable.

Therefore, in this modified example, the setting processing of the portent mode is devised in relation to the bonus winning near the end of the advantageous interval.

FIG. 263 is a flow chart showing a sign setting process at the time of winning a bonus in this embodiment. The sign setting process at the time of bonus winning is, for example, a process executed under the condition that the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is set in the process corresponding to the lottery result, and setting the sign mode based on the bonus winning. This is a process for performing In the above-described first embodiment, even in the first to third special combination processes, a transition lottery such as a challenge mode or an attack mode or an additional lottery is performed to set the omen mode. In this case, the precursor mode setting process may be performed redundantly, but in this case, the precursor mode set in the following precursor setting process at the time of winning the bonus is given priority. In addition, as already explained, the omen mode is a mode in which a suggestive effect that suggests the winning content occurs with a relatively high probability, and a continuous effect occurs when the number of omen games set as the omen mode approaches 0. In this mode, the content of the winning is notified when the value becomes 0. That is, in the omen mode based on bonus winning, a suggesting effect suggesting bonus winning is generated, and a bonus winning notification is performed through a continuous effect.

In step S15801, it is determined whether or not the set 1st BB winning flag and 2nd BB winning flag have been set in the current game, that is, whether or not it is a bonus winning game. If the game is not a winning game and the bonus is being carried over, the sign setting process is terminated as it is. If the game is a winning game, a process of obtaining an omen table is executed in step S15802. An example of the portent table is shown in FIG. More specifically, in the omen table, 0 to 32 games are set as the number of omen games, and the number of omen games to be selected depends on whether or not the display mode and the attack mode, etc., are simultaneously won at the time of winning. is different. Note that the omen table is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 35, and the game result that triggered the bonus win (for example, even if the same 1st BB is won, the trigger is a strong cherry duplication 1 or a weak cherry). Cherry overlap 1, etc.) and the winning bonus type (for example, even if it overlaps with the same strong cherry, it overlaps with the 1st BB, whether it is a strong cherry overlap 1, or overlaps with the 2nd BB) The number of precursor games to be selected may be set differently depending on whether the number of strong cherry overlaps is 2, etc.). Also, the number of precursor games to be selected may be set differently depending on the presence or absence of overlap with other results (for example, whether the 1st BB is won alone, or whether the strong cherry overlap is 1, etc.). Furthermore, the number of precursor games is not limited to 0 to 32 games, and a configuration in which a larger number of games can be selected, or a configuration in which 0 games are always selected (so-called one-shot announcement) may be employed.

In subsequent step S15803, based on the precursor table obtained in step S15802, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode based on the current bonus win is determined by lottery, and the determined number of precursor games is input to the precursor counter. .

In step S15804, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning of this time is the bonus winning in the advantageous section. If it is in the advantageous section, it is determined in step S15805 whether or not the first excess flag is set, out of the first excess flag and the second excess flag. If the first excess flag is set and it is specified that the maximum number of games will be reached in the future, in steps S15806 to S15810, the maximum number of games will be reached during the return state after the bonus state. 262(b) will occur.

More specifically, in step S15806, the number of games (A) required to reach the upper limit number of games is determined from the current number of games in the advantageous zone AG and the upper limit number of games (1500). In the following step S15807, a process of grasping the current number of precursor games (B) is performed based on the result of the lottery in step S15803. In step S15808, a process of grasping the number of games (24 games in both the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state) to be executed in the bonus state won this time is performed. Then, in step S15809, processing is performed to grasp the average value (D) of the number of return games from the end of the bonus state until the transition to the second RT state occurs due to the notification of the pressing order. In the present slot machine 10, the average number of games until the shift to the first RT state occurs due to the failure to press the order bell in the normal game state is about 11 games, and the first promotion replay is won in the first RT state. The average number of games played until the transition to the second RT state occurs is about 8 games, and the average number of return games (D) is about 19 games. After that, in step S15810, whether or not the maximum number of games is reached during the return state after the bonus state is determined. Determining whether it is greater than the sum of (C) and less than the sum of the number of precursor games (B), the number of bonus games (C), and the average number of return games (D). do.

As shown in FIG. 262(b), when the number of games (A) required to reach the maximum number of games is less than the sum of the number of precursor games (B) and the number of games in the bonus state (C), the precursor The number of games required to reach the maximum number of games (A) is the average of the number of precursor games (B), the number of games in the bonus state (C), and the number of return games. The case where the number of games is more than the sum of the value (D) is the case where the maximum number of games is reached after returning to the second RT state after the end of the bonus state.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S15810, in step S15811, a process of ascertaining the number of games (E) from the end of the bonus state until reaching the maximum number of games is executed. This processing is calculated by subtracting the number of precursor games (B) and the number of games in the bonus state (C) from the number of games required to reach the maximum number of games (A). Then, in step S15812, the number of games (E) calculated in step S15811 is set as the adjusted number of games, and the adjusted number of games is added to the number of precursor games determined in step S15803 to obtain the current number of precursor games. Execute the process to be. More specifically, a process of adding the calculated adjustment game number (E) to the precursor counter is performed.

After executing the process of step S15812, in step S15813, the process of setting the precursor command including information on the number of precursor games of this time as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then this precursor setting process is terminated. do. In this case, the sign mode is performed over the number of games to which the adjusted number of games (E) has been added, and after the adjusted number of games (E) is consumed, the winning bonus notification is performed. In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S15804 and the bonus is not won in the advantageous section, or if the first excess flag is not set in step S15805, further, in step S15810, the upper limit number of games during recovery If it is determined that the number of games has not been reached, the process proceeds directly to step S15813, and a portent command including information on the number of portent games (the number of portent games drawn in step S15803) to which the number of adjusted games in step S15812 has not been added. is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this precursor setting process is terminated.

As a result of the above processing, as shown in FIG. 264, the number of omen games when the bonus is won in the game of tk1, which is in the advantageous section, is the original number of games up to tk2 (B) and the number of games up to tk3. The value to which (E) is added is set. As a result, if the notification in the precursor mode is followed, the bonus state will be consumed from tk3 to tk5, and will be forcibly terminated at tk5. In other words, before the adjustment, the number of medals reached the maximum value at tk4, and after that, the number of medals was reduced until tk5, and the game was forcibly terminated. , the game is forcibly terminated when the player's satisfaction reaches its climax.

In particular, even if the number of adjustment games is added as described above, the number of games in the portent mode and the return state does not change, so the maximum number of medals held at the time of forced termination does not change. By doing so, it is possible to greatly vary the impression given to the player upon forced termination without greatly varying the degree of advantage for the player.

By the way, by setting the bonus winning flag, the game state changes from the previous high RT state (second RT state or third RT state) to a low RT state (normal game state here), and the replay probability is greatly increased. It will be lower, and reach points based on bonus winnings can also appear. In other words, the player can perceive the winning of the bonus at a timing before the notification of the winning of the bonus is performed, and as described above, in the low RT state, the number of medals held can decrease. Therefore, it is better to win the bonus as soon as possible after detecting the bonus winning, so that the decrease in the number of medals you have can be suppressed. For example, in FIG. 264, if the bonus is won immediately after winning the bonus at tk1, it is conceivable that the upper limit number of games is reached after returning to the high RT state after the bonus state. More specifically, after winning the bonus at tk1, by making a bonus winning between the average value of the number of return games (D) and the number of adjusted games (E) subtracted, the high RT state After returning, the maximum number of games will be reached. During this period, the total number of medals changes when the maximum game is reached. The total number of medals is the largest in the case of winning at times, and the smallest in the case of completing the game obtained by subtracting the number of adjusted games (E) from the average number of returning games (D). That is, depending on the skill of the player (the number of games required from bonus detection to bonus winning is large or small), the maximum number of medals held at the time of forced termination may be greater than that at tk5 in FIG. 264 above. By leaving room for technical intervention in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game and encourage active participation in the game.

On the other hand, after playing the game obtained by subtracting the adjusted number of games (E) from the average number of returning games (D), the later the bonus winning, the more the number of decreases until the bonus winning, and the higher the RT state. Since the return is not expected, the fluctuation in the total number of medals when reaching the upper limit game is that the later the bonus winning, the smaller the total number of medals, and the amount of decrease is from the average value (D) of the number of returning games after winning the bonus. It is larger than the amount of decrease up to the game from which the adjusted number of games (E) is subtracted. In other words, if the bonus win is made from the bonus winning to the game obtained by subtracting the adjusted number of games (E) from the average number of returning games (D), the average number of returning games (D) is reduced to the adjusted number of games ( It can be said that the effect of reducing the decrease in the number of owned medals is higher than in the case of winning a bonus after the game in which E) has been subtracted. The point in time when the number of adjusted games (E) is subtracted from the average value (D) of the number of return games after winning the bonus is also called the first branch point.

After the number of premonitory games (B) before addition of the number of adjusted games (E) from the bonus winning, the total number of medals when reaching the upper limit game until the adjusted number of games (E) is used is difficult to change as described above. In other words, after the number of premonitory games (B) has been consumed from the winning of the bonus, even if the player wins the bonus early, there is no effect of reducing the decrease in the number of medals held. The point of time when the number of precursor games (B) before addition of the number of adjustment games (E) has been consumed after winning the bonus is also referred to as a second branch point.

In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the effect mode of the portent effect, such as the effect suggesting whether or not a bonus is won in the portent mode, is changed based on each branch point. For example, from the time of bonus winning, at the first branch point, a suggestive effect is generated indicating that there is a possibility that a continuous effect (FIG. 60) will occur (predictive effect is set as the first mode), and the first branch point is reached. From to the second branch point, it notifies that a continuous effect will occur, and also explains the conditions for winning content in the continuous effect (explanation of the number of stages of Daruma drop, etc.). ), and a continuous effect is generated after the second branch point (prediction effect is the third aspect). By doing so, the player who perceives that there is a possibility that a continuous effect will occur due to the effect up to the first branch point will be able to confirm, for example, whether or not he or she has won a bonus before the first branch point. , and the player who clearly recognizes that a continuous effect will occur due to the effect after the first branch point, for example, to establish a bonus prize by the second branch point. After the second branch point, players are expected to enjoy the performance (continuous performance) rather than early bonus winning. In other words, from the bonus winning to the first turning point and the second turning point, the game is aimed at the bonus prize, and after the second turning point, the player enjoys the performance rather than the early bonus prize. is realized. In this way, by setting the presentation mode of the sign mode according to the relationship between the skill of the player and the final number of medals obtained, it is possible to provide an unprecedentedly interesting game.

<Modification 21>
In this modified example, the relation between the bonus winning just before the end of the advantageous section, especially the bonus winning just before the end of the challenge mode, and the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be explained. FIG. 265 is a diagram showing how a specific combination is won in the challenge mode, and FIG. 265(a) shows a case where the winning specific combination is a double combination with a bonus such as a strong cherry overlap 1. FIG. 265(b) shows a case where the winning specific combination is not a double combination with a bonus such as strong cherry. As already explained, the challenge mode is a mode in which the probability of winning an attack mode or the like is higher than in the normal mode, and is also called a chance zone (CZ). In the challenge mode, if the lottery for switching to the attack mode is not won during a predetermined number of games, the challenge mode ends.

FIG. 265(a) shows a case where, when the challenge mode is started at tm1, a special role is won in the game at tm2 before tm3 when the challenge mode ends. As already explained, the challenge mode is included in the advantageous section, and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator starts when the specific combination is won (tm1), which triggers the shift to the challenge mode.

As described above, the specific hand won in tm2 is, for example, a double hand with a bonus such as 1 strong cherry overlap. do. Then, the omen mode is set based on the winning of the bonus or the winning of the attack mode. For example, if the sign mode or continuous effect set at tm2 is started from tm2 and continues to tm4 after tm3, which is the end game of the challenge mode, bonus winning or attack is performed in the game at tm4 Winning notification of mode winning is performed. Then, at tm4, the game moves to the bonus state, and after tm5 when the bonus state ends, the attack mode is entered.

In this case, although the challenge mode ends at tm3 as described above, since the attack mode winning flag is set, the section indicator display ending process is not performed in the second section display process. In other words, the display on the section indicator started at tm1 does not end at tm3 and continues after tm5.

On the other hand, in FIG. 265(b), although the special role was won at tm2 during the challenge mode, the special role was not a double role with the bonus, and the lottery for transition to the attack mode was won. do not have. However, even with the specific combination of tm2 in FIG. If the game starts from tm2 and continues to tm4 after tm3, which is the ending game of the challenge mode, non-winning notification of bonus non-winning or attack mode non-winning is performed in the game of tm4 (winning notification is performed). cannot be broken).

In this case, in FIG. 265(b) as well, although the challenge mode ends at tm3, the attack mode winning flag is not set. Termination processing is performed. That is, in the continuous effect starting from tm2, the section indicator is displayed until tm3, but not displayed from tm3 to tm4. In other words, in comparison with FIG. 265(a), in FIG. 265(b), the display of the section display is terminated at the end of the challenge mode at tm3. Without waiting, it becomes clear that the lottery of tm2 was not won. In that case, not only will it be revealed that you have not won the prize, but the ridiculousness of the continuous performance being executed will stand out, and there is a possibility that the attention to the performance, including other performances, will be greatly reduced. .

FIG. 266 is a flow chart showing a sign setting process when a duplicate target combination is won in the challenge mode in this modification. Here, the overlapping target role means the overlapping results such as strong cherry overlapping 1, 2 and weak cherry overlapping 1, 2, etc., which are overlapped winnings with the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, and the overlapping results with the 1st BB and the 2nd BB in the overlapping results. The result includes winning non-overlapping results (if strong cherries 1 and 2 are overlapping results, strong cherries are non-overlapping results, and if weak cherries 1 and 2 are overlapping results, weak cherries are non-overlapping results). The sign setting process when a duplicate target role is won in the challenge mode is, for example, a process that is executed when the above-mentioned duplicate target role is won in the lottery result handling process in the challenge mode, regardless of whether the bonus is won or not. This is a process for setting the portent mode first. In other words, this is the process of setting both the precursory mode based on the above-mentioned bonus winning and the pseudo precursory mode based on the non-winning of the bonus. It should be noted that, as in the case of the modification 20, the various precursor mode setting processes for the first to third special combination processes overlap with the precursor setting process when a duplicate target combination is won in the challenge mode. However, the configuration is such that priority is given to the portent mode set in the portent setting process when a duplicate target role is won in the challenge mode.

In step S15901, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the current game is the duplicate target combination. If it is not a duplicate target role, the precursor setting process is terminated as it is. If it is a duplicate target combination, a process of acquiring a precursor table is executed in step S15902, and a lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S15903. Such processing is the same as the processing in steps S15802 and S15803 described above. The number of precursor games set in the precursor table is also as described above, and the number of precursor games to be selected differs depending on the game result or the like.

In the subsequent step S15904, it is determined whether or not the current overlapping target role is a result of overlapping with the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. In the case of overlapping results with the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, in step S15905, the information on the number of precursor games determined in step S15903 and the information on the fact that the bonus has been won (this precursor mode is the bonus After setting the portent command including information indicating that the mode is the portent mode for notification as an output target to the display control device 81, this portent setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S15904 that the current overlapping target hand is a non-overlapping result rather than an overlapping result with the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, the process proceeds to step S15906. In step S15906, the number of remaining games in the current challenge mode is compared with the number of precursory games determined in step S15903, and it is determined whether or not the number of precursory games is greater than the number of remaining games in the challenge mode. do. In other words, the process of step S15906 is the process of determining whether or not the game in which the result of the current portent mode is notified (the game in which the portent counter becomes 0 and the winning notification or non-winning notification is performed) is in the challenge mode. . If the result notification is during the challenge mode, the process advances to step S15905 to proceed to step S15905, and the information of the number of precursor games determined in step S15903 and the information that the bonus has not been won (this precursor mode is the bonus non-winning notification After setting the portent command including the portent mode information for performing the porting mode as an output target to the display control device 81, the port setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S15906 that the result of the precursory mode will be notified after the challenge mode, then in step S15907 the number of remaining games in the challenge mode is subtracted from the number of precursory games to calculate the difference between the number of games. I do. Then, in step S15908, a process of adding the number of difference games calculated in step S15907 to the number of continuations of the challenge mode is executed. By this process, the challenge mode is extended by the difference game number.

In subsequent step S15909, a process of setting an additional CM pseudo end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The display control device 81 that has received the additional amount CM pseudo end command controls not to perform the effect during the challenge mode for the amount added in step S15908. In other words, the additional CM pseudo-end command practically extends the number of games in the challenge mode, but visually makes it difficult or impossible to perceive that the challenge mode has been extended. This command is for

In addition, in this modification, when the continuous effect is performed during the challenge mode, whether or not the challenge mode is being performed can be grasped from the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 (for example, together with the display content in the continuous effect) , a configuration in which the auxiliary display unit 65 displays that the game is in the challenge mode), and the above additional CM pseudo end command makes it possible to grasp whether the challenge mode is in progress during the continuous production. It can be said that this is a command for not displaying. On the other hand, when the continuous effect is performed during the challenge mode, whether or not the challenge mode is being performed cannot be determined from the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 (in the above example, the challenge mode is being performed during the continuous effect). ), it is possible to omit the additional CM pseudo-end command.

Further, information to that effect may be transmitted to the display control device 81 for the additional CM pseudo end command. For example, the information to that effect may be set in the precursor command.

In subsequent step S15910, an additional notification non-generating process is executed to prevent an additional notification from being generated when the number of difference games is extended. Note that in step S15910, for example, a process of setting an add-on non-occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. The add-on non-occurrence flag is, for example, a process for not performing the add-on notification process in the challenge mode with respect to the extension of step S15908 in the first special combination process. More specifically, although the additional notification based on the extension of step S15908 is not generated, the additional notification based on other triggers (such as winning a special combination in another game) is allowed.

After the process of step S15910 is executed, the process proceeds to step S15905, and the number of precursor games obtained by adding the number of difference games in step S15908 to the number of precursor games determined in step S15903, and the above-mentioned bonus non-winning information. (Information that the current portent mode is a portent mode for notifying that the player has not won a bonus) is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this portent setting process is executed. finish.

As a result of the above processing, as shown in FIG. 267, in the challenge mode started from tn1, in the case where a non-overlapping result is won at tn2, the target combination wins at tn2. The challenge mode that should have been extended to later tn4. In this case, the portent mode and continuous effect set at tn2 are executed until tn4, and the display of the section display started from tn1 continues until tn4. As a result, it is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which the result of the continuous performance is completely understood depending on whether or not the section indicator is displayed, and it is possible to suitably enhance the performance effect during the challenge mode.

Here, in order to avoid the phenomenon that the result of the continuous production is completely understood depending on whether or not the section indicator continues to be displayed, in addition to the configuration that extends the challenge mode (advantageous section) as described above, the challenge Although the mode (advantageous section) ends, a configuration is also conceivable in which only the display of the section indicator is continued. However, with such a configuration, even though the advantageous section is clearly indicated by the section indicator, the significance of the section indicator becomes negligible, and the credibility of the display of the section indicator itself deteriorates. It is also conceivable to put away. On the other hand, by extending the challenge mode itself as in the above configuration, it is possible to preferably expect the effect of continuous presentation while securing the relationship between the advantageous section and the section display. It becomes possible to

As described above, since the additive CM pseudo end command is output, among tn2 to tn4 in which the continuous production is performed, tn2 to tn3 are displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 together with the continuous production and the challenge mode It is displayed that it is in the challenge mode, and the display that it is in the challenge mode is not displayed for tn3 to tn4. In this manner, when the overlapping result is won as the overlapping target role, the effect mode up to tm4 and the effect mode up to tn4 are the same mode from the viewpoint of displaying whether or not the challenge mode is on, and the display is the same. Therefore, it becomes impossible to judge the result of this sign mode (continuous production). Thereby, the production effect of the continuous production is further enhanced.

To avoid a phenomenon in which an extra notification is not generated when a challenge mode is extended, so that a player is informed of the fact that the extension has been secretly performed in accordance with the continuous performance by the additional notification, and the event is spoiled. be able to.

In the above configuration, whether or not to extend the challenge mode is determined depending on whether the overlapping target role is a result of overlapping with the first BB, a result of overlapping with the second BB, or a non-overlapping result. As a result, winning in the attack mode, etc. is not confirmed even if the result is a duplicate result. An event such as not being elected at the same time may also occur. Then, in step S15904, even if an affirmative determination is made as a result of overlap with the bonus and the challenge mode extension process is not performed, the display of the section indicator may end when the challenge mode ends. . In other words, even if the display of the section indicator ends during the continuous performance, the winning notification may be performed as a result of the sign mode or the continuous performance. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the phenomenon of not being able to have expectations at all just because the display of the section indicator has ended, and to make the continuous performance more enjoyable.

<Modification 22>
In this modified example, the advantage of the challenge mode extended when setting the sign mode based on non-overlapping result winning is made different from the above-described modified example 21. FIG. FIG. 268 is a flow chart showing a sign setting process when a duplicate target combination is won in the challenge mode in this modification.

This modification is substantially the same as the precursor setting process of Modification 21, except that in step S16007, the number of remaining games in the challenge mode is subtracted from the number of precursor games to calculate the number of differential games. After that, in step S16008, instead of adding the difference game number to the challenge mode continuation number, the difference game number is added to the continuation number of the second challenge mode different from the current challenge mode.

The second challenge mode is a challenge mode that is set to be less advantageous for the player than the normal challenge mode (in the following description, also referred to as "first challenge mode" for comparison). be. More specifically, the attack mode win probability is set to be lower in the second challenge mode than in the first challenge mode (see FIG. 269(b)).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 269(a), when the double target role is won at tо2 which is during the first challenge mode started at tо1, and the double target role is not won as a bonus, as described above. Then, extension processing of the second challenge mode is performed in step S16008.

As a result, when the first challenge mode ends at tо3, the second challenge mode continues, and the second challenge mode continues until tо4 when the continuous performance started from tо2 ends. In this case, although the second challenge mode from t3 to t4 is an advantageous section, the advantage for the player is set lower than that for the first challenge mode, and the advantage for the player is unfairly set for the convenience of the performance. It is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which the result of the continuous effect becomes completely obvious depending on whether or not the display of the section indicator continues, while suppressing the excessive increase.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 269(b), in the second challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery for transition from the regular mode to the attack mode is high, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition from the first challenge mode to the attack mode is high. Although set to be low, the winning probability of the attack mode transition lottery in the second challenge mode is actually set to be almost the same or about the same as that in the normal mode. By doing so, even though it is possible to process the second challenge mode as an advantageous section, even if the second challenge mode is added from the relationship of production, the advantage is almost the same as when it is not added. It is possible to prevent changes from occurring.

<Modification 23>
In this modification, the lighting start condition of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is changed. That is, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, basically, the game in which the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won is set as the start game, and the lighting process is performed at the timing until the next game after the start game can be played. It was configured so that In other words, whether or not the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won can be clearly grasped by the presence or absence of lighting of the eighth display segment N8. However, in such a configuration, as shown in the modification 21, etc., even in the lottery during the advantageous section, the result of the effect being executed can be fully understood depending on whether or not the section indicator continues to be displayed. In addition, regarding the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, the same inconvenience may occur depending on whether or not the section display starts to be displayed.

Therefore, in this modification, the display start timing of the section indicator is set to a situation in which the push order notification can occur in the advantageous section, and a situation in which the net increase in the number of It is assumed that the game satisfies the starting condition of In this case, in the above configuration, basically, the start condition is satisfied in the game in which the attack mode start effect is performed (the game in which the attack mode is started) (see FIG. 51). More specifically, an attack mode winning notification sets an attack notification flag to generate various push order notifications (FIGS. 36 and 38), and by shifting to the second RT state, the number of net increases becomes positive (FIG. 216), the attack mode is started, and the condition for starting the display of the section indicator is satisfied. That is, even if the challenge mode is won and the advantageous section starts, the display of the section indicator does not start.

In addition, for example, when a bonus such as the 1st BB and the attack mode are won at the same time, although the net increase in the number of sheets becomes positive due to the bonus prize winning, the present slot machine 10 is configured so that the press order notification during the bonus state does not occur. Therefore, the display start condition of the section indicator is established after the press order notification is generated at the end of the bonus (after the attack mode winning notification is performed). Also, even if you win the lottery to move to the attack mode during the bonus state, although the net increase in the number of sheets is positive during the bonus state, it is not possible to notify the pressing order, so the pressing order notification is generated. At the end of the bonus to be obtained, the display start condition of the section indicator is satisfied.

That is, the first start condition is a situation in which the push order notification can occur, the second start condition is a situation in which the net increase in the number of sheets is positive, and after the transition to the advantageous section, the first start condition and the second start condition are set. The display of the section indicator is started based on the fact that the conditions are satisfied. In this modified example, the first start condition and the second start condition do not have to be satisfied at the same time (in the same game). The display of the section indicator may be started when the start condition is met, or the display of the section indicator may be started when the first start condition is met after the second start condition is met. Good composition. By doing so, the degree of freedom in the display start game of the section indicator can be greatly improved, and the configuration can be very useful for solving the above-described inconvenience in performance.

When the bonus is won in the challenge mode, the display of the section indicator is not started during the challenge mode as described above, and the display of the section indicator is not started even when the bonus is won. Inconvenience in the production shown in , does not occur.

However, when the display start timing (start game) of the section indicator is different from the start timing (start game) of the advantageous section, the following problems may occur.

For example, as shown in FIG. 270(a), assuming that the advantageous section is started by winning the challenge mode at tp1, and then the attack mode is started at tp2, the display of the section display is turned off. When started, it is possible to continue the advantageous section with an upper limit up to tp3 when any forced termination condition is satisfied. In this case, in the advantageous section from tp1 to tp3, the section (substantial increase section) in which medals can be substantially increased by the pushing order notification is from tp2 to tp3.

On the other hand, in FIG. 270(b), even if the transition to the advantageous section is tp1, which is the same as in FIG. ). Then, in the advantageous section from tp1 to tp3, the actual increase section from tp2 to tb3, which is the section in which medals can be substantially increased by notification of the pushing order, becomes shorter than in the case of FIG. 270(a). 270(a) and 270(b), even if the attack mode is started at tp2, A player's advantage is potentially different.

FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the first section display process in this modified example.

That is, in step S16101, it is determined whether or not the section indicator is displaying. If it is not being displayed, the process advances to step S16102 to perform processing for determining whether or not it is in an advantageous section. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the upper limit of transition to the advantageous section is established, or whether or not the transition has already been made. If it is not in the advantageous section, the first section display processing is terminated. If it is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S16103.

In step S16103, it is determined whether or not the advantageous interval start processing has already been performed by determining whether or not the advantageous interval game number AG is being measured. If it is before the start of measurement of the number of games AG in the advantageous interval, an advantageous interval start process is performed in steps S16104 to S16106.

That is, in step S16104, processing for starting measurement of the number of games AG in the advantageous interval is performed. Then, in step S16105, a process of starting to measure the number of pre-start games MG provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. The number of games before the start MG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games after the shift to the advantageous section and before the display of the section indicator starts, and corresponds to the number of games from tp1 to tp2 in FIG. After that, in step S16106, output start processing of the winning signal is performed. The winning signal is a kind of output signal that is output from an external terminal connected to the main control unit 101 to a hall computer, a hall data device, or the like. The winning signal has a LOW state and a HI state as its output state, and the hall computer and the data device can identify the switching and the state of the winning signal. In step S16106, by switching the winning signal from the LOW state to the HI state, the hall computer or the data device identifies that the advantageous section has started.

If it is determined in step S16103 that the advantageous section start processing has already been executed, or if the start processing has been executed in step S16106, the process proceeds to step S16107. In step S16107, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the display of the section indicator is satisfied. More specifically, the attack notification flag is set as the first start condition indicating that the press order notification may occur, and the second start condition is the situation where the number of net increases is positive, that is, When a transition to the second RT state occurs or a transition to the bonus state occurs, it is determined that the display start condition is met. If the display start condition is not met, the section display first process is terminated. If it is determined that the display start condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S16108, and processing for starting the display of the section indicator is performed in steps S16108 to S16110.

That is, in step S16108, lighting processing of the eighth display segment N8 is performed as display start processing of the section indicator. In the subsequent step S16109, a process of changing the prediction condition of the remaining number management process is performed. More specifically, in the process of calculating the total expected increase SM (prediction process, steps S13202 and S13203), the expected increase/decrease number KM that serves as the basis for calculation is changed to a value different from the previous value. In this case, the expected increase/decrease number KM before the start of display of the section indicator is set to the net increase number of sheets in the low RT state (approximately -1.05 or approximately -0.44, see FIG. 216), and when the section indicator starts to display Based on this, the expected increase/decrease number of sheets KM is assumed to be the net increase in number of sheets in the high RT state, and the prediction process is performed. In this way, by reflecting the subtraction amount of the previous section in the predicted number of sheets (total increase expected number of sheets SM), it becomes possible to calculate the predicted number of sheets more accurately.

In the subsequent step S16110, output stop processing of the winning signal is performed. More specifically, by switching the output state of the winning signal from the HI signal to the LOW signal, the hall computer and the data device specify that the display of the section indicator has started after the start of the advantageous section. Then, in step S16111, display signal output processing is performed, and then this section display first processing ends. The display signal is a kind of output signal that is output from an external terminal connected to the main control unit 101 to a hall computer, a hall data device, or the like, like the winning signal. A LOW state and a HI state are set as the output state of the display signal, and the switching and state of the display signal can be specified in hall computers and data equipment. In step S16111, by switching the display signal from the LOW state to the HI state, the display of the section indicator is started, and the hall computer and the data device specify that the above-described substantial increase section has started.

Also, if it is determined in step S16101 that the section display is being displayed, display continuation processing is performed in step S16112, and then the section display first processing ends.

Next, the section display second processing in this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S16201, it is determined whether or not it is in an advantageous section. If it is not in the advantageous section, the second section display processing is terminated. If it is in the advantageous interval, in step S16202, addition processing for the number of games AG in the advantageous interval is executed. In the following step S16203, update processing of the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM is executed. These processes are as already explained.

In step S16204, it is determined whether or not the section indicator is being displayed. If a negative determination is made in step S16204, it means that the interval indicator has not yet started to display even if it is in the advantageous interval. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of pre-start games MG is executed in accordance with the completion of the current game. In the subsequent step S16206, a process of setting the number-of-games-before-start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The number-of-games-before-start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp information on the number of games before the start MG. In a predetermined area (for example, the upper right corner) or a display section different from the auxiliary display section 65, the pre-start game number notification corresponding to the value of the pre-start game number MG is executed.

If it is determined in step S16204 that the interval display is being displayed, or after the command for setting the number of games before start is performed in step S16206, the number of remaining games management process is executed in step S16207. In S16208, remaining number management processing is executed. The number-of-remaining-games management process and the number-of-remaining-numbers management process are also as described above.

In step S16209, it is determined whether or not any condition for forced termination is satisfied. If any forced termination condition is satisfied, in step S16210, the number of games before start MG, the number of games in the advantageous section AG, and the number of advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM are initialized, and in step S16211, Determines whether or not the section indicator is being displayed. If it is being displayed, the section indicator display end processing is executed in step S16212. Specifically, a process for turning off the eighth display segment N8 is performed. When a negative determination is made in step S16211, or after the processing of step S16212 is executed, data initialization processing is executed in step S16213. After that, in step S16214, the output stop processing of the display signal is executed, and then the section display second processing is ended. Specifically, step S16214 executes processing for switching the output mode of the display signal from the HI signal to the LOW signal.

If it is determined in step S16209 that the forced termination condition is not met, it is determined in step S16215 whether or not there is a winning flag for each mode corresponding to the advantageous section. The presence or absence of each mode flag corresponding to the section is determined, and if the corresponding mode flag is not set, the process advances to step S16210 to execute processing for ending the advantageous section. These processes are as already explained.

How the winning signal and the start signal are output and an example of display on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 273(a), when the advantageous section starts at tq1, the output mode of the winning signal switches from the LOW signal to the HI signal. This makes it possible for the hall computer and data equipment to grasp the transition to the advantageous section. When the attack mode is started at tq2, the display start processing of the section indicator is performed assuming that the display start condition of the section indicator is established. In this case, the player can grasp that the transition to the substantial increase section has occurred based on the eighth display segment N8. In this case, switching of the output mode of the winning signal and switching of the output mode of the display signal are performed. More specifically, at tq2, the winning signal is switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal. Also, at tq2, the display signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

The display of the section indicator and the output of the HI signal of the display signal continue until tq3 when the advantageous section ends, the display of the section indicator ends at tq3, and the display signal is switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal. .

In the preliminary section after the start of the advantageous section from tq1 to tq2 and before the start of display on the section indicator, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays (starts) the number of games in the preliminary section, as shown in FIG. The number of pre-start games corresponding to the value of the number of previous games MG) is performed, and the number of advantageous interval games corresponding to the number of advantageous interval games AG is displayed. Further, in the target section as the substantial increase section after the start of display of the section display from tq2 to tq3, the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, displays the number of games in the previous section, as shown in FIG. 273(c). Along with the display of the number of section games, display of the number of target section games (display of the number of consecutive attack modes) is performed.

In this way, by shifting the display start timing of the section indicator from the start timing of the advantageous section, it is possible to increase the production effect of the transition lottery to the advantageous section and the transition lottery to the substantially increased section, and before the display of the section indicator starts. , the player can grasp the number of games in the advantageous section, and can play the game after understanding the degree of advantage in the substantial increase section when shifting to the substantial increase section. This makes it possible to ensure the fairness of the game while enhancing the effect of the game production.

Here, the display of the number of preliminary section games, the display of the number of target section games, and the display of the number of advantageous section games are managed by the display control device 81 on the sub side. It is also possible to hide the display of the number of games or display a different display from the corresponding section as one effect. That is, for example, in the challenge mode, if a continuous effect occurs in a situation where the number of games in the preliminary section is being displayed, it is possible to hide the display of the number of games in the preliminary section, Even during the continuous production, the number of games in the previous section will continue to be displayed, and even if the challenge mode ends (even if the preliminary section ends), the number of games in the previous section will continue to be displayed until the continuous production ends. It is possible. As a result, while ensuring the credibility of the advantageous section by the section display, it is possible to grasp the potential advantage of the advantageous section by displaying the number of games in the previous section, etc. In addition, in relation to other effects, the displayed It is possible to greatly improve the degree of freedom.

In addition, the winning signal is externally output in the preliminary section, and the display signal is externally output in the target section. It is possible to clearly distinguish a game machine that has transitioned to a section from a game machine that has not, and it is also possible to grasp the degree of survival of the advantage of the substantially increased section after the start of display of the section indicator. As a result, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a reset process when the hall is opened/closed. In addition, it is also possible to use it as a judgment material when specifying whether or not it is a fraudulent act.

<Modification 24>
In this modified example, the difference in the advantage of the substantially increased section (target section) due to the game situation in the previous section in the above modified example 23 will be described.

FIG. 274(a) shows a case where the advantageous section starts at tr1 and the display of the section indicator starts at tr2. As already described, in this embodiment, the first forced termination condition that the upper limit number of games is reached and the second forced termination condition that the upper limit increase number of medals is reached are set as forced termination conditions for the advantageous section. In this case, the first condition for forced termination is defined by the number of games in the advantageous interval AG counted from tr1, and the first condition for forced termination is satisfied at tr4 when the number of games in the advantageous interval AG reaches the upper limit number of games. . On the other hand, the second forced termination condition is defined by the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM counted from tr1. becomes.

In other words, the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM is not the number of increases from tr2 where the actual increase section starts, but the number of increases from tr1 reaches the upper limit increase number, so that the second forced termination condition is satisfied. As for the number of increases from when the substantial increase section starts at tr2 until the upper limit number of increases is reached, the decrease from r1 to tr2 (α sheets) is added to the upper limit number of increases.

Then, for example, in FIG. 274(b), compared to the case of FIG. 274(b) shows that it is slower, and the amount of decrease in medals from tr1 to tr2 is greater in β medals in FIG. 274(b) than in α medals in FIG. 274(a). In other words, in the case of FIG. 274(b), the number of games from the start of the advantageous section to the start of the actual increase section is greater, but the number of medal increases from the start of the actual increase section to the upper limit increase number is reached. is more in the case of FIG. 274(b) than in the case of FIG. 274(a), and the advantage at the time when the substantial increase section is disclosed is that in FIG. 274(b) is more advantageous to the player. (2400+α<2400+β).

However, as already described, even in a substantially increased section, when the upper limit number of games, which is the first forced termination condition, is reached, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated before the upper limit increase number is reached. Then, the later the start of the actual increase section, the more medals will be added until the upper limit increase is reached, and there is a branch point (third branch point) of the reach limit at which the upper limit increase can be reached. .

The branch point of the reach limit is the number of games in the pre-section, the net increase in the pre-section (approximately -1.05), and the upper limit of the number of games in the actual increase section calculated from the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section (1500). This is the number of games in the preliminary section when the sum of the net increase in the number of games in the actual increase section (approximately +2.46) and the upper limit increase number (2400) is 367 games in the present embodiment. In this case, the number of medals that can be decreased when 367 games are completed in the preliminary section is about 385, and the maximum number of medals that can be increased when moving to the actual increase section is the upper limit increase number of about 385. With 2400 added, the total is about 2785.

In other words, the maximum number of medals that can be increased when moving to the real increase section gradually increases until the number of games at which the advance section is the turning point of the reach limit is completed. On the other hand, the maximum number of medals that can be increased when moving to the real increase section gradually decreases after completing the number of games that serve as the turning point of the attainment limit.

FIG. 275(a) shows a part of the flowchart of the section display second process in this modified example.

Steps S16301 to S16303 are the same as the processing in steps S16201 to S16203 above, and update the number of games AG in the advantageous interval and the number of games increased/decreased in the advantageous interval ZM on the condition that it is in the advantageous interval. Then, in step S16304, it is determined whether or not the section indicator is displaying, and it is grasped whether or not it is the preceding section. If it is the pre-start section, the pre-start game number MG is updated in step S16305. Then, in step S16306, it is determined whether or not the number of pre-start games MG has reached the branch point of the reach limit.

If the branch point of the reaching limit has not been reached, then in step S16307, a process of setting the first number-of-games-before-start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. In this case, as with the number-of-games-before-start command, the display control device 81 displays the number of games in the pre-start section, and gradually increases the maximum number of medals that can be increased when shifting to the actual increase section. 274(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays, for example, "Expected number of sheets is increasing!".

When the reaching limit branch point is reached, in step S16308, a process of setting a second number-of-games-before-start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. Then, in step S16309, processing for shifting to the second challenge mode is performed. As shown in FIG. 275(b), in the second challenge mode in this modified example, the winning probability of the transition lottery to the attack mode is improved more than in the first challenge mode (challenge mode before transition processing in step S16309). mode is set. In other words, if you exceed the branch point of the reach limit, the maximum number of medals that can be increased when moving to the real increase section will decrease, but the transition rate to the real increase section (attack mode) will be higher than before. It is configured as follows. The display control device 81 that has received the second number-of-games-before-start command displays the number of games in the preliminary section, and instead of gradually decreasing the maximum number of medals that can be increased when shifting to the substantial increase section, As a notification to the effect that the transition rate to the substantially increased section is improving, as shown in FIG. conduct.

As described above, if the preliminary section becomes longer, the number of medals will decrease before the transition to the actual increase section, so the advantage of the entire advantageous section may be lower. The maximum number of medals that can be increased after the transition can be greater the longer the pre-segment. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game without making the player give up on the game even though it is difficult to win the lottery for shifting to the substantially increased section (difficult to shift to the substantially increased section).

On the other hand, if the preliminary interval becomes too long, it will become impossible to reach the upper limit increase number in the actual increase interval due to the relationship with the upper limit number of games. In this case, as described above, by increasing the winning probability of the transition lottery to the real increase section, it is possible to move to the real increase section relatively easily, so the upper limit increase number will not be reached. However, it is also possible to complete the substantial increase section without giving up.

In this way, the game situation in the preliminary section after the start of the advantageous section and before the display of the section indicator starts to affect the advantage in the substantially increased section after the start of display of the section indicator. , By incorporating it into the game, it is possible to create a novel game like never before.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, each embodiment and each modification described above are not limited to the description content thereof, and all or part of the various configurations shown in each embodiment and each modification or other embodiments and each modification can be arbitrarily It is also possible to combine with Also, the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In these cases, it is preferable to ensure the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of each embodiment and each modified example, and it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of them.

(1) As advantageous sections, there is an attack mode in which the frequency of push order notifications is higher than in normal mode, a challenge mode in which the probability of winning a lottery to transition to attack mode is higher than in normal mode, and a super zone that includes an additional special zone. The configuration includes the attack mode, the VB mode, and the mode that is selected for each of these modes and is before the transition, but if the mode includes at least the function related to the pressing order notification that is improved compared to the normal mode, the above is included. is not limited to For example, the challenge mode may not be set.

(2) Although the VB mode as a pseudo-bonus is configured to be transitionable only during the attack mode, it may be configured to be transitionable even during the normal mode. In this case, when a lottery for switching to the VB mode is won, the winning game is set as the start game, and the display of the section indicator is started before the operation of the game following the start game is permitted. And it is sufficient. Also, in this case, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won at the same time as the VB mode, the starting game should be the game in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won.

(3) Small wins with medal payouts such as high cherry, low cherry, high watermelon, low watermelon, etc., and winning with these high cherries, etc. Although specific replays having a common mode, and overlapping combinations of these small wins and specific replays and bonuses have been described as examples, the results that trigger the lottery are not limited to these results. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined bonus is performed alone, or a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is performed even in normal replays. Alternatively, a transition lottery or the like may be performed based on the number of games played or the cumulative number of points separately awarded based on each result. In any case, it is sufficient that the timing of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section or the like does not cause a difference in the probability of winning or the frequency of occurrence depending on the set value.

(4) The winning mode of the game results in which the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is performed is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured such that all the specific roles are won in a common winning mode, or the winning mode may be common among some of the specific roles. Further, the winning mode of the game result (for example, normal replay) in which the transition lottery is not performed and the winning mode of the special combination may be partly or wholly common.

(5) Although the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display portion N9 have been described as examples of the section indicator, the configuration of the section indicator is not limited to the above. The section indicator may be configured to clearly display whether or not it is an advantageous section by at least switching the display mode. Also, the display mode (lighting mode) in the advantageous section may be different from that described above. For example, the operation part of the start lever 41 and a part or all of the predetermined credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are configured to be light emission controllable, and the operation part and the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 emit light based on the advantageous section. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the function as the section indicator is ensured by a predetermined operation unit. As described above, the display of the section indicator is started at a timing before the operation of the game following the start game is permitted. By displaying the advantageous section at or near the predetermined operating section as described above, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the transition to the advantageous section.

Further, the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65 may include a display section having a section display function. In this case, at least the display unit having the function of the section indicator is preferably controlled by the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 controls the auxiliary display section 65 itself to perform the function of the section indicator. It may be configured to be controlled by the main controller 101 together with the display unit.

Furthermore, as a section indicator, a character that can be displaced between a predetermined first position and a second position different from the first position is provided at a position (for example, the front part of the game machine) that can be visually recognized by the player. Whether or not it is an advantageous section is notified by a display mode including the role object when the role object is placed at the first position and a display mode including the role object when the role object is placed at the second position. may be configured.

(6) A plurality of section indicators may be provided in addition to the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display section N9. That is, it may be configured to include one section indicator, or may be configured to include a plurality of two or more section indicators. When a plurality of display devices are provided, they may be combined with section displays having other configurations as in (5) above.

(7) Regarding the section indicator, the notification mode of the predetermined notification means attached to or adjacent to the section indicator may be changed in accordance with the display mode of the section indicator. The predetermined notification means attached to the section indicator is, for example, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 attached to the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator in the instruction monitor 68. mentioned. Further, examples of the predetermined notification means adjacent to the section indicator include the auxiliary display section 65, the payout number display section 62, and the like.

For example, the section indicator can be configured to start displaying at a predetermined timing, and the predetermined notification means is set to the first notification mode at the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing different from the predetermined timing. A second notification mode different from the first notification mode is used as the predetermined notification means. In this case, assuming that the visibility and display content of the display of the section indicator may be different depending on whether the predetermined notification means is in the first notification mode or in the second notification mode, It is possible to change the appearance of the section indicator without changing the display mode of the section indicator.

Further, by combining the configuration for changing the display mode of the section indicator and the configuration for changing the notification mode of the predetermined notification means, it is possible to make the section indicator look more diverse.

For example, the predetermined notification means is composed of a plurality of light-emitting units such as LEDs, and the light-emitting units are arranged in a matrix (for example, a grid of x columns and y rows). Then, one element of the matrix (for example, the element in column a and row b) is replaced with a section indicator. Then, when the a-th column and b-th row interval indicator is lit and displayed, the a+n-th column to the a-n-th column and the b-th row around it or the a-th column and the b+n-th column to the bn-th row The light-emitting portion of the outer circumference is turned on and displayed, and the light-emitting portion on the outer periphery thereof is turned off. In addition, when the a-th column and b-th row interval display is turned off, the a+n-th to a-n-th columns and the b-th columns around it, or the a-th and b+n-th to b-nth columns light-emitting parts are turned off, and the outer light-emitting parts are turned on (x, y, a, b, and n are all natural numbers). By doing so, it is possible to easily recognize the section indicator, which is one element in the matrix, in relation to the light-emitting portions of the other elements. Further, when the a-th column and the b-th row section indicator are lit, the adjacent light-emitting portions of the a+1-th column and the b-th row are lit and displayed, and the other light emitting portions are lit and displayed. Further, when the a-th column and b-th row section indicator is turned off, the adjacent light-emitting portions of the a-th column and b+1-th row are turned on, and the other light emitting portions are turned off. By doing so, the lighting/lighting-off of the a-th column and b-th row section indicator is the lighting/lighting-off of the a+1th column and bth light emitting unit and the ath column and b+1th light emitting unit. It becomes difficult to distinguish between them, and it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the interval indicator, which is one element in the matrix, in relation to the light-emitting portions of the other elements. In this case, the light-emitting units that are lit/unlit instead of the interval indicator are not limited to the light-emitting units adjacent to the interval indicator. It is good also as a structure which determines at random by lottery etc.

Further, the other predetermined notification means may be configured to differ between the notification mode in the start game and the notification mode in the advantageous section.

(8) By increasing the brightness of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator and the illuminance directed toward the front of the game machine, section display is performed more than other display sections (surrounding display sections, other predetermined notification means). Although it is configured to improve the visibility of the device, when displaying the section indicator, the brightness and illuminance of other display units (surrounding display units, other predetermined notification means) are reduced. You can improve the quality. Further, the difference in brightness or illuminance from other display portions is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, 10 times the brightness or illuminance.

Further, the visibility may be improved in relation to the display colors of other display units. That is, by making the luminescent color of the section indicator and the display color (luminescent color) of the other display section, for example, a complementary color (opposite color) relationship, the visibility of the section indicator and other display sections is improved. It is good also as a structure which makes it possible (makes distinction easy).

Conversely, the brightness and illuminance may have the opposite relationship to the above relationship to reduce the visibility of the section indicator. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the section indicator, to make it difficult to notice that the display is being performed, and to improve the presentation effect of the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Since the visibility of the display portion of the display portion is high, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to other display portions. As for the display colors, by making the luminescent color of the interval indicator and the display color (luminescent color) of the other indicator, for example, a similar color relationship, it is possible to distinguish between the interval indicator and the other indicator. It becomes difficult to stick, and the impression that these section indicators and other display units are related to each other can be strengthened.

(9) The display start mode table of the section indicator is not limited to the above. For example, in addition to the game result that triggered the start of the display, the table may include, as parameters, the number of bonus winnings on the day or over a plurality of days, the number of transitions to the advantageous section, or the number of winnings. , the display start mode may be different. In this case, for example, if the display start mode table makes it easier to predict the content and set values of the advantageous section as the number of wins in the bonus or advantageous section increases on the day or over a plurality of days, it is possible to match the progress of the game. As a result, it becomes easier to predict the contents of the game and the set values gradually, and it is possible to realize the playability as if the player develops the contents of the performance of the game machine.

(10) In a configuration in which the display start mode of the section indicator is set according to the content of the advantageous section, the degree of advantage, etc., the content of the advantageous section, the degree of advantage, etc., and the content of the advantageous section, the degree of advantage, etc., are matched one-on-one without going through a lottery for the display start mode. It may be an associated display start mode.

(11) The display end mode table of the section indicator is not limited to the above. For example, in addition to the content of the advantageous section at the end, the number of games played at the end (the value of the number of games in the advantageous section AG) may be included as a parameter, or the time at the end may be included as a parameter. However, the time at the start of the advantageous section may be included as a parameter, or the length of time required to complete the advantageous section may be included as a parameter. Based on these parameters, the display end mode differs. It is better to For example, in the case of a configuration including the number of games played at the time of completion as a parameter, it is possible to provide more useful information to the player as the number of games played increases (the more rewards are obtained during the advantageous section). Alternatively, the display end mode table may be such that the less the number of games played (the fewer the benefits obtained during the advantageous section), the more beneficial information can be provided to the player. good too.

(12) Although the display end mode table of the interval indicator is configured to present useful information to the player, a configuration related to the display start mode table may be applied. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which setting values and the like can be presented as useful information for the player depending on the display start mode of the section indicator.

(13) Information on set values has been described as an example of useful information for a player to be presented at the end of the display of the section indicator. Alternatively, a configuration in which a discount ticket, coupon, or the like for a product is presented may be used. In addition, in a configuration in which the display start mode table is changed in a specific state, when an advantageous display start mode table is selected according to the cumulative number of wins and the cumulative number of non-wins in bonuses, advantageous sections, etc., the cumulative number is changed. A presented or suggested configuration may be used.

(14) By setting a freeze state in the start game, it is configured to restrict the start of the game following the start game. It may be configured to restrict the start of the next game.

(15) A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined effect is generated during the freeze state in the starting game. For example, during the freeze state, specific rotation control is performed to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in reverse or at low speed, or after performing the specific rotation control, a predetermined pattern combination (for example, "red 7" pattern matching) may be configured to generate an effect of stopping or temporarily stopping on a predetermined line (for example, middle line L2). In this case, depending on the length of the period of the freeze state, that is, depending on the content and degree of advantage of the advantageous section when the display of the section indicator is started, the rotation direction and rotation speed are changed, etc. It may be configured to vary the mode of rotation control, the type of predetermined pattern combination to be stopped or temporarily stopped (for example, "red 7" pattern matching and "black BAR" pattern matching), or the predetermined pattern combination to be stopped or temporarily stopped. A configuration may be adopted in which the types of lines (for example, the upper line L1 and the middle line L2) are made different.

(16) In a configuration in which the length of the period of the freeze state is set according to the content or degree of advantage of the advantageous section or the display start mode of the section indicator, the freeze state is generated multiple times, and the freeze state is generated multiple times. The total length of the period of the freeze state may be associated with the content or degree of advantage of the advantageous section or the display start mode of the section indicator, or the number of times the freeze state occurs multiple times It may be associated with the content, the degree of advantage, or the display start mode of the section indicator.

(17) In the configuration in which the section indicator can be lit in a plurality of colors like the ninth display portion N9, the configuration is such that the color to be lit is different as the display start mode, but the display end mode is It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the color to be turned off is differentiated. In this case, it is preferable to switch the lighting state in white during the advantageous interval to the lighting state of the corresponding color in the end game, and then turn off the lighting state.

(18) If you win a lottery to move to an advantageous section based on a bonus and a specific combination (for example, 1 strong cherry overlap, 1 strong watermelon overlap, etc.), the game in which you won the overlapping role will be frozen. In addition to generating, the length of the freeze state period is set according to the content of the advantageous section and the degree of advantage, etc. After the carryover state, the section is displayed until the operation of the next game is permitted with the bonus winning game as the start game. It may be configured to start displaying the vessel. Furthermore, in the case of winning a lottery to transition to an advantageous section with the above bonus and a specific role overlapped as a trigger, the game is a game after the game in which the overlapped role was won and before the bonus winning game In addition to generating a freeze state, set the length of the freeze state period according to the content of the advantageous section and the degree of advantage, etc., and allow the operation of the next game with the bonus winning game as the start game. may be configured to start displaying. Furthermore, when winning a lottery to move to an advantageous section with the overlapping role of the bonus and the specific role as a trigger, a freeze state is generated in the bonus winning game, which is a game after the game in which the overlapping role is won. At the same time, the length of the freeze state period is set according to the contents of the advantageous section and the degree of advantage, etc., and the bonus winning game is set as the start game, and the section indicator starts to be displayed before allowing the operation of the next game. may be configured. In the configuration in which the freeze state is generated during the carryover state, the freeze state may be generated multiple times in multiple games. or the display start mode of the section indicator, or the number of occurrences of a plurality of freeze states may be associated with the content or degree of the advantageous section or the display start mode of the section indicator. good too.

(19) If the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won based on the winning replay, the winning game of the winning replay is set as the start game, and the start operation of the start lever 41 is performed instead of the betting operation in the next game of the start game. Although it is the end of the start timing of the display, it may be determined by lottery whether the end of the start timing is the betting operation or the start operation at the time of winning replay. Also, a plurality of winning replays may be provided, and depending on the type of winning replay, it may be configured such that whether the betting operation is the final period or the start operation is the final period. In this case, it is preferable that the stop rolls are different in each winning replay, and the stop rolls (for example, bell alignment) corresponding to other payout small combinations are stopped on a line different from the effective line on the side where the start operation is the end. With this configuration, it is possible to further enhance the effect of surprise when the display of the section indicator is started based on the start operation. Even in this case, it is more preferable to allow the start operation based on the bet operation.

(20) Although the 1st BB and 2nd BB are used to transition to the bonus state, it may be configured such that the 1st BB and 2nd BB wins are used to transition to the bonus state and replay is awarded. In this case, since the replay is granted, if the first BB winning is set as the start game, the start operation of the start lever 41 instead of the bet operation of the next game is regarded as the end of the display start timing of the section indicator. It is also possible to

(21) In a configuration that determines the display start mode of the section indicator based on the display start mode table for the specific state when the game state becomes a specific state, the transition condition to the specific state or the continuation condition of the specific state The parameters of (end condition) are not limited to those described above. For example, parameters for conditions for transitioning to a specific state include a configuration for setting a transition to a specific state or a transition lottery according to the number of games played since the RAM was cleared or the power was turned on; A configuration in which transition setting or transition lottery is performed according to the number of games, a configuration in which transition setting or transition lottery to a specific state is performed according to the number of games between bonuses, special hand, replay, small hand, loss, bonus, advantage A configuration is conceivable in which transition setting or transition lottery is performed according to the number of wins in a section or the like, the number of winning prizes or the number of transitions. Further, when judging the success or failure of these transition conditions, the number of continuous games may be determined by lottery or the like, and the length of the determined number of continuous games may be changed according to each of the above parameters. Parameters for the specific state continuation condition (end condition) include a configuration for setting continuation to the specific state or a continuous lottery according to the number of games played after transitioning to the specific state, a specific role in the specific state, replay, It is conceivable to configure continuous setting or continuous lottery according to the number of wins such as small wins, losses, bonuses, etc., the number of wins or the number of transitions. Further, the probability of winning the transition lottery or the continuation lottery may differ according to the number of transitions to the specific state or the number of occurrences of transition triggers.

(22) When starting the 8th display segment N8 as the section indicator at the start of the advantageous section, depending on the type of advantageous section that has been won (any of challenge mode, attack mode, and super attack mode) Although the display modes such as the display start timing and the luminescent color at the start of display are configured to be different, the display modes may be configured to be different according to the number of continuous games in the winning advantageous section. For example, the initial number of games in the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the special zone may be variable, and the initial number of games may be determined by lottery or the like at the time of transition to these modes (at the time of winning). Then, the display start mode of the section indicator may be determined according to the determined initial number of games. When the display end mode at the end of the advantageous section is made different, the display end mode may be made different according to the length of the continuous advantageous section. In addition to the number of initial games, the display start/end mode may be changed according to parameters that change the degree of advantage (for example, ease of transition to VB mode in attack mode). The display start/end mode may be changed depending on the combination of these parameters and the type of advantageous section.

(23) The trigger for transition to the special RT state and the termination conditions are not limited to those described above. For example, a special role with medal payout (strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.), a role that overlaps the special role and the bonus (strong cherry overlap 1, strong watermelon overlap 1, etc.), a special role that replaces the special role with a specific replay , or any combination thereof may be used. In addition, as an end condition, when the bonus overlaps, the special RT state is terminated based on the bonus winning, but even when the bonus overlaps, the special RT state is terminated by completing a predetermined number of games or stopping the transition roll. It is good also as a structure which ends.

(24) In a configuration in which a lottery to move to an advantageous section based on a bonus overlapping role is won and a transition to a special RT state is made, a special replay during the special RT state may be performed depending on the stop result of the game that has become the bonus overlapping role. It is good also as a structure which makes a stop result different. For example, if the duplicate role is a strong watermelon overlap 1, in a game in which the strong watermelon overlap 1 is won, a strong watermelon winning prize (30th minor role winning) is established, and a strong watermelon If you miss (if you do not win the 30th minor role), the special replay will be stopped. In order to make it easier to predict the content and the degree of advantage of the special replay, the special replay may be configured to have different stop outcomes.

(25) In the configuration for transitioning to the special RT state, the effect by the display control device 81 may be a configuration in which the pseudo precursor mode is not set. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not generate a continuous production|presentation.

(26) Regarding the press order notification effect for special replay winnings during the special RT state, not only the stop result that the black BAR is out of tenpie, but also the stop result that the black BAR doubles, and the black BAR single. The notification of the pressing order of the eyes may also be performed when a lottery for execution of the notification of the pressing order is won.

(27) With regard to the pressing order notification effect when winning a special replay during the special RT state, an upper limit may be set for the number of times the pressing order notification effect is generated. For example, if the upper limit is set to 1 time in a special RT state, and the black BAR double matching or black BAR single matching, etc. is performed, and the corresponding stop roll appears once, the following results will be obtained. A similar configuration may be adopted in which the pressing order notification effect is not performed when the special replay is won. In this case, if a stop result different from the executed pressing order notification effect appears due to a failure of the eye pressing operation, an erroneous operation of the stopping order, etc., the pressing order notification effect may be generated again.

(28) Suggest the content of the advantageous section and the degree of advantage by causing a predetermined stop result (black BAR double matching, black BAR single matching, etc.) to appear by means of a press order notification effect when winning a special replay during a special RT state. In the configuration, the content of the advantageous section and the advantage level may be suggested by the number of appearances of the predetermined stop roll. For example, when the first number (once) of black BAR singles appears as a predetermined stop result, it is confirmed that the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode has been won, and the black BAR is determined as a predetermined stop result. A configuration may be adopted in which, when a second number (twice) of singles appearing, which is more than the first number, it is determined that the lottery for shifting to the attack mode, which is more advantageous than the challenge mode, is won. In this case, it is preferable to change the pressing order notification effect at the time of winning the special replay so that the number of appearances corresponds.

(29) In the configuration in which the notification cancellation lottery is triggered by the special combination in the special RT state, the cancellation lottery is performed when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has already been won. Even if it is not, it is good also as a structure which performs cancellation lottery. In this case, if the cancellation lottery is won without winning the transition lottery, although the pressing order notification effect is generated, the stop lottery that determines the advantageous section such as the stop lottery where the black BARs are double aligned. It is preferable to have a configuration in which a pressing order notification effect is generated so as not to appear.

(30) In the configuration in which the notification cancellation lottery is performed with the special combination in the special RT state as a trigger, the winning probability of the cancellation lottery table is not limited to the above. For example, a uniform winning probability may be set regardless of the type of special combination. Also, the number of winning times of the specific combination during the special RT state may be stored, and the winning probability may differ according to the number of winning times. In this case, as the number of wins increases, the release win probability should be higher. Furthermore, the winning probability of the notification cancellation lottery may be different depending on the relationship between the special role that triggered the transition to the special RT state and the special role that was won during the special RT state. If the specific combination and the specific combination won during the special RT state are of the same specific combination (same index value IV), it may be easier to win the notification release lottery than otherwise.

(31) In the configuration in which the notification cancellation lottery is performed with the special combination in the special RT state as a trigger, the content to be notified after the cancellation may be different from the above. Specifically, the content of the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section that has already been executed may be sufficient. For example, the transition to the advantageous section based on the game result before the result that triggers the transition to the special RT state. It may be the content of the lottery, or the result that triggered the transition to the special RT state may be a notification that the transition lottery was not won or that a transition lottery was performed.

(32) In a configuration in which a notification release lottery is performed with a special combination in the special RT state as a trigger, a decision to an advantageous section based on the game result (duplicate combination with a bonus) that triggered the transition to the special RT state The setting of the sign mode has been described as an example of a configuration that makes it difficult to notify the contents of the transition lottery in the game that resulted in the game result, but the notification in the game that resulted in the game result is restricted. Any configuration may be used, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which notification is not performed in the game. In this case, the precursor mode may not be set.

(33) In a configuration having a plurality of special RT states and different types of special replays that can be won in each special RT state, the winning probability of special replays may be higher than the winning probability of normal replays. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which only the special replay is won without winning the normal replay. By doing so, it is possible to increase the frequency (probability) of establishing a special replay, and by aiming for the "black BAR" symbol in each game, it is possible to make the desired stop roll appear relatively smoothly. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player from getting bored with the game aiming at the "black BAR" pattern in each game.

(34) In a configuration having a plurality of special RT states and different winning probabilities for special replays that can be won in each special RT state, the types of special replays are not limited to those described above. For example, the odds of winning the special replay 3 may be varied. Also, the number of special replays that can be won may not be one type, but may be a plurality of types. In this case, the type of RT state is predicted by the difference in the winning probability of each special replay (by the balance of the winning probability), Accordingly, a configuration may be adopted in which a game in which the content of the advantageous section is predicted is performed. More specifically, for example, in the 6th RT state, it is easy to win the special replay 3 and difficult to win the special replay 4, and in the 7th RT state, it is difficult to win the special replay 3 and easy to win the special replay 4. and so on. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined special replay can be won only in a predetermined RT state. For example, special replay 5 may be elected only in the 5th RT state.

(35) In a configuration in which the number of stops of black BAR symbols during a special RT state suggests the presence or absence of a bonus win or the content of an advantageous section, if a bonus win is made during a special RT state that is not based on a bonus win, the "black BAR" symbol will be displayed. count (black BAR stop counter), notification scenario, and upper limit value may be reset.

(36) In the configuration in which the presence or absence of a bonus win or the content of an advantageous section is suggested by the stop result in the special RT state, the symbol to be stopped is not limited to the "black BAR" symbol, and the stop position is not limited to the middle stage. For example, when the stop positions are set to the upper stage, the middle stage, and the lower stage, a plurality of corresponding symbols may be stopped on one reel.

(37) In the configuration in which the presence or absence of a bonus win or the content of an advantageous section is suggested based on the number of stoppages of the corresponding symbols during the special RT state, the notification scenario is set according to the content of the suggestion, but the notification scenario is the above. not limited to For example, a plurality of types of notification scenarios are set for one suggestive content, and one notification scenario may be selected from among the plurality of types by lottery or the like. In this case, for example, there is a notification scenario in which the upper limit of the black BAR stop counter is 2 even though the bonus winning is suggested. .

(38) In a configuration in which the presence or absence of a bonus win or the content of an advantageous section is suggested by the number of stoppages of corresponding symbols during a special RT state, a configuration in which the corresponding symbol count (black BAR stop counter) is decremented at a predetermined timing. may be For example, if the corresponding symbols do not stop (if the eye-pushing operation fails) in spite of the notification of the order in which the corresponding symbols can be stopped, the count of the corresponding symbols is decremented. may be configured. Further, when the stop order in which the corresponding symbols cannot be stopped is notified, the count of the corresponding symbols may be subtracted.

(39) In the configuration in which the presence or absence of a bonus win or the content of the advantageous section is suggested by the stop result during the special RT state, the configuration may be such that the type of bonus can also be suggested. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the content of the suggestion is made different depending on whether the special RT state is based on the first BB or the second BB (for example, the upper limit of the black BAR stop counter or the notification scenario is made different).

(40) After shifting the game state to the special RT state, the stop roll during the special RT state suggests the presence or absence of a bonus win and the content of the advantageous section, but the game state can be changed to the normal game state, the In the first RT state, it may be possible to suggest the presence or absence of a bonus win or the contents of the advantageous section by the stop result. In this case, for the special replay, it is possible to win not only the carryover state but also the normal game state and the 1st RT state, and the state equivalent to the carryover state and fake special RT state (BB non-winning and advantageous section non-winning In the game after winning the special role, a configuration may be adopted in which a pressing order notification effect of the corresponding stop order is generated based on the special replay winning. In other words, in the case of a game result (specific role, duplicate role, etc.) that triggers the transition to the special RT state, the content of the push order notification effect at the time of special replay winning is different (predetermined stop result and It may be configured to shift to a mode in which a pressing order notification effect is likely to occur).

(41) In a configuration in which the presence or absence of a bonus win or the content of an advantageous section is suggested by the number of stoppages of corresponding symbols during a special RT state, the accumulated number of stoppages of corresponding symbols over a plurality of games and the stoppage of corresponding symbols related to a single game. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the presence or absence of a bonus win or the content of an advantageous section is suggested differently depending on the number of games played, or a configuration in which the cumulative number of stops and the number of stops related to a single game are weighted differently. Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which bonus winning is confirmed when the cumulative number of stops is 3 or more, when the number of stops related to a single game reaches 3, that is, the cumulative number of stops corresponding to bonus winning is cleared in one game. In this case, bonus winning and attack mode winning may be determined, or bonus winning may be determined when the number of stoppages related to the single game is 2 or more.

(42) In a configuration in which the number of stops of corresponding symbols is changed by changing the stop result of the special replay during the special RT state according to the order notification effect, the number of corresponding symbols is 0 as the stop order of one special replay. A configuration that does not include the stop order that becomes

(43) In a configuration in which the number of stops of the corresponding symbols is changed by changing the stop result of the special replay during the special RT state according to the order notification effect, one corresponding symbol is the stop order of one special replay. The stop order may include a first number (one) as described above and a second number (two) having one or more corresponding symbols and different from the first number.

(44) In a configuration in which the presence or absence of a bonus win or the content of an advantageous section is suggested by the number of stops of the corresponding symbol during the special RT state, if the suggested content is determined by the cumulative number of stops or the number of stops in a single game, the background color In addition to the change of , a configuration may be adopted in which a confirmation effect of the corresponding content is performed. For example, in a configuration in which bonus winning is confirmed when the cumulative number of black BAR symbols stopped is 3 or more, a bonus winning notification effect is generated in a game in which the cumulative number of black BAR stops (black BAR stop counter) reaches 3. may be

(45) As a special RT state, the total replay probability is higher than in the normal game state, but in any special RT state or all special RT states, the total replay probability is higher than in the normal game state. A lower configuration may also be used.

(46) In a configuration having multiple special RT states, the total replay probability in each special RT state was set to be the same for all, but the probability is not exactly the same, and although there is a slight difference, the player's The probabilities may be similar to the extent that they can be recognized as the same in bodily sensation. More specifically, for example, if the difference in replay probability between special RT states is less than 1/10 of the replay probability, it is considered to be recognized as having similar probabilities. Also, the relationship with the total replay probability with other RT states (the second RT state and the third RT state) is the same, and the probability may not be exactly the same, but may be the same.

(47) Advantageous intervals may be defined as follows. A section in which at least one pressing order notification corresponding to the winning of the maximum number of payouts occurs. More specifically, in a push-order bell that can pay out 9, 3, or 0 medals depending on the stop order, the push-order notification that 9 medals will be paid out is generated at least once. interval.

(48) Even when the advantageous section ends before reaching the continuation upper limit, the initialization process may be performed.

(49) Even when the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won alone, a configuration may be adopted in which a transfer lottery for an advantageous section, an additional lottery, or the like is performed. In each of the above-described embodiments, the single winning of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is designed so that there is no difference in the winning probability due to the set value. It is considered that no inconvenience will occur.

(50) Regarding the bonuses of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the winning probability differs depending on the set value including the winning probability of the duplicated combination, but a bonus whose winning probability does not differ depending on the set value may be provided. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery for shifting to an attack mode or the like can be performed during a bonus carry-over state in which the probability of winning does not differ according to the set value. In other words, there may be a case where a lottery for transition to an attack mode or the like is performed in the winning of a special combination that is being carried over, and a case where it is not performed. Also, although the winning probabilities of the first BB and the second BB are set to be the same according to the set values, they may be different.

(51) In addition to 1BB and 2BB, CBs (1st CB to 4th CB) are provided as transitional hands in which the probability of a small win can change depending on the transition of the game state. Other transition roles may be provided. Other transition roles include MB (middle bonus), which has no limit on the number of sliding frames, REG (regular bonus), which has a lower maximum acquisition number than the 1st BB and 2nd BB, and one JAC game. SB (single bonus) etc. can be considered. Also, the maximum number of wins for each bonus is not limited to the above. For example, the maximum acquisition number during the CB state may be set to 3, which is less than 15, or may be set to 0.

(52) Although medals are not paid out when the transition combination (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) wins, medals may be paid out.

(53) A configuration may be adopted in which a lottery for transition to an attack mode or the like, an additional lottery, or the like is performed during the bonus. In this case, there is no set difference in the winning probability, the number of winnings, the transition lottery to the attack mode during the bonus, or the additional lottery probability or advantage. It is preferable that these lotteries are not performed when a certain bonus is won.

(54) In order to ensure that there is no difference in the probability or advantage of the transition lottery to the attack mode or the like or the additional lottery depending on the setting value, the lottery is configured to be performed based on the lottery result with no particular setting difference. A lottery may be drawn based on a certain lottery result, but setting differences may be prevented by adjusting the benefits at the time of winning (the winning probability of a privilege, transition lottery, etc., and the number of additional games). For example, with setting 1, you will win with a probability of 1/100, and with setting 6, you will have a special role that you will win with a probability of 1/10. At setting 6, it is 1/20. By doing so, the total added winning probability becomes 1/200 regardless of the setting value, and the setting difference is eliminated.

(55) As the effect of the section display unit by other notification means, the content of the effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 has been mainly described. It is good also as a structure which generates.

(56) By winning the transition lottery to the attack mode or the like or the additional lottery, basically an event that is advantageous to the player will occur, but for example, it may be configured to perform an end lottery such as the attack mode. Alternatively, a subtraction lottery for the number of continued games may be performed.

(57) Although the game in which the number of bets is 3 has been mainly described, the above invention may be applied to a 1-bet game in which the number of bets is 1 or a 2-bet game in which the number of bets is 2. For example, if you win a lottery to move to an advantageous section in a 1-bet game or a 2-bet game, or if you win a lottery to move to an advantageous section in a 3-bet game, the section indicator display start mode table will be changed. By making them different, the display start modes of the section indicators may be different.

(58) In the situation where the excess flag is set, the setting value is suggested when an additional opportunity occurs. It is also possible to provide a specific zone in which it is easy to perform the overrun, and to make it easier to move to the specific zone when an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set.

(59) In the situation where the excess flag is set, the setting value is suggested when an additional opportunity such as winning a special role occurs, but the additional opportunity is not limited to the above. For example, the number of games completed during the advantageous interval may trigger the addition, or the number of small wins won, the number of prizes won, the number of medals paid out, etc. during the advantageous interval may trigger the addition. , it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which setting values are suggested when these additional triggers occur in a situation in which the excess flag is set.

(60) When there is an opportunity to increase the number of games, setting values are suggested instead of adding the number of games.

(61) In the situation where the excess flag is set, if the lottery for mode transition from challenge mode to attack mode or from attack mode to specialized zone, etc. is won, setting values are suggested after mode transition is performed. , mode transition may be omitted.

(62) Although it is configured to suggest a setting value when an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, even if an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is not set, the additional If the lottery is not won, setting values may be suggested. Further, when the additional lottery is not won, it is assumed that the additional lottery is won, and the number of additional games may be added to the total number of eliminated games TEG or the like.

(63) In the configuration in which the set values are suggested by referring to the total number of eliminated games TEG at the time of forced termination, the display mode at the time of forced termination may be taken into account. For example, a set value suggestion table (a third special notification lottery table, a third special notification type table, etc.) is prepared for each display mode at the time of forced termination. In the case of forcible termination during the special zone, a configuration may be adopted in which setting value suggestions are likely to occur with a smaller total number of eliminated games TEG than in the case of forcible termination during the attack mode.

(64) When a forced termination of a game occurs during a bonus, processing such as suggestion of set values may be different from that in the case where the game is not during the bonus. For example, if the game is to be forcibly terminated when the bonus is not in progress, setting values are suggested in the game to be forcibly terminated, while if the game is to be forcibly terminated during the bonus, the setting values are suggested after the bonus is finished. may be Further, processing such as setting value suggestion may be changed according to the type of bonus. For example, if a game that is forced to end occurs during the first BB, in which the winning probability is common regardless of the set value, the setting value is suggested, while the game is forced to end during the second BB, in which the winning probability differs depending on the set value. A configuration may be adopted in which setting values are not suggested when a different game occurs, or vice versa. In addition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which set values are suggested in the forced termination game during the first BB, and set values are suggested after the bonus is finished during the second BB, or vice versa. When different processing such as setting value suggestion is to be performed, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery is used to determine which processing is to be performed, and then the winning probabilities thereof are different.

(65) The number of forcibly ended games in the advantageous section is not limited to the above number (1500), and may be more or less.

(66) The additional lottery table and the number of additional games lottery table are not limited to those described above, and may be configured to perform an additional lottery on other occasions (small winning combination or replay), the winning probability, and the additional game at the time of winning. The range, average, etc. of the numbers are also arbitrary. For example, the number of games (eg, 2000 games) exceeding the upper limit number of the advantageous section may be selected as the number of additional games.

(67) In the situation where the excess flag is set, if there is an opportunity to add a value, the set value is suggested in return for presenting information beneficial to the player. It is not limited to setting value suggestion. For example, it may be the above-mentioned advertisement, coupon, or the like, or a configuration in which a privilege such as a rare image is given.

In addition, when an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, information beneficial to the player is presented by changing the manner of notification of the pressing order bell and pressing order replay winning. It is good also as a structure which a privilege is provided. For example, the pushing order bell is set for a first combination in which 1 or 0 medals are paid out, a second combination in which 9 medals are paid out, which is more than the first combination, and 15 medals, which is more than the second combination. A combination in which medals are paid out and a combination in which the medals are paid out. In the normal section other than the advantageous section, if the pushing order notification is not performed, the winning of the first combination is easily established. The structure should be easy to establish. Until the excess flag is set, the pressing order of the second combination is likely to be notified, and after the excess flag is set, the pressing order of the third combination is notified based on the occurrence of an additional opportunity. The configuration should be easy. By doing so, it is also possible to provide a privilege when an additional opportunity arises in a situation where the excess flag is set.

In this case, when betting 3 coins, an increase of 6 medals can be expected by winning the 2nd role, and an increase of 12 medals can be expected by winning the 3rd role. medals can be expected to increase. Therefore, when the push order notification for establishing the winning of the third combination is generated as described above, the number of games corresponding to two times of winning the push order bell is subtracted from the upper limit number of games. A configuration may be adopted in which forced termination occurs at the upper limit number of games. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merit of ending the advantageous section early without substantially changing the total number of medals acquired.

(68) Forced termination conditions may be defined by the total number of medals paid out or the total number of won medals (total number of medals paid out minus total number of bets) instead of the number of games. In this case, it is better to manage the attack mode etc. not by the number of games but by the prescribed number of total medals paid out or the total number of medals acquired (the attack mode etc. is terminated when the prescribed number is reached). Even in the case of occurrence of the above, it is preferable to increase the number of games instead of the number of games. For example, the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated when the total number of medals acquired reaches 3000. Then, as a result of adding the specified number in the attack mode or the like, the excess flag is set when the specified number reaches 3000 sheets. With such a configuration, even if the pushing order notification for winning a winning combination with a large number of payouts is performed in a situation where the excess flag is set as in (67) above, the total number of medals the player can obtain. does not change, and it is possible to enjoy the advantage of being able to finish the advantageous section in a small number of games while keeping the advantage level unchanged.

(69) It is also possible to store the number of times for each type of additional trigger that occurred in a situation where the excess flag is set, and to configure a configuration in which the lottery table and type table for setting value suggestion differ according to the number of times. For example, after the excess flag is set, the strong cherry has been won once and the weak cherry has been won four times. In the situation where the cherry has been won four times and the weak cherry has been won once, the setting value is suggested when the weak cherry is won, and the setting value is narrowed down when the winning probability and the setting value are suggested. A configuration with different ease may be used, and considering that it is difficult to win strong cherries, the latter may be a set value suggestion (a set value suggestion that makes it easier to narrow down the set values) that is more advantageous to the player. good.

(70) In the configuration for suggesting set values in consideration of the gaming situation of the day, the total number of games TG is configured to be initialized by changing the winning probability, that is, by clearing the RAM. may be initialized by power ON/OFF.

(71) In the configuration of suggesting a set value in consideration of the game situation of the day, the configuration may be such that information other than the total number of games TG and time is taken into consideration as the game situation of the day. For example, instead of or in addition to the time, a configuration may be adopted in which elapsed time since the power is turned on is taken into consideration. Also, for example, a bonus, the number of times a predetermined small winning combination is won, the number of winnings, and the like may be taken into account. The number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals may be taken into consideration. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of forced terminations is taken into consideration.

(72) In a configuration in which setting values are suggested in consideration of the game situation of the day, when forced termination occurs at a relatively early stage, setting value suggestions are less likely to occur or low setting value suggestions are likely to occur. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a high set value suggestion is likely to occur when forcibly terminated at a relatively early stage, a configuration in which a low set value suggestion is unlikely to occur, or a high set value. A configuration in which suggestions are less likely to occur may be employed.

In addition, assuming that the operation rate is high in the first morning and evening, if the setting value suggestion is likely to occur if it is forced to end in the daytime other than that, the operation rate by the player who anticipates the setting value suggestion can be expected to increase. In this case, for example, the operation rate of the previous day or over a number of days up to the previous day can be grasped from a built-in clock, game number counter, etc., and based on the operation rate, a table for suggesting set values (special notification lottery table) , special notification type table, etc.) may be changed.

(73) In a configuration in which set values are suggested in consideration of the gaming situation of the day, the data to be referred to, such as the total number of games TG, is data that can be managed over a period of multiple days. It is good also as a structure which takes into consideration the game situation over. For example, the total number of games TG may be configured so that it is not initialized even if the winning probability is changed, and the set value is suggested in consideration of the total number of games since the game machine was installed in the game hall. It is good also as a structure to carry out. In this case, at the beginning of introduction (initial installation), setting value suggestions may be difficult/easily to occur.

(74) When the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the setting value is suggested in consideration of the game situation of the day. It may be configured to perform value suggestion. As another advantageous state, for example, when the bonus state is satisfied not only by the number of payouts, but also other forced termination conditions are satisfied (for example, when a specific ending combination is won, When a so-called puncture occurs), and when the bonus state ends based on the establishment of forced termination conditions before the bonus state reaches the upper limit of the number of payouts, the setting value is suggested in consideration of the game situation on the day. may be configured.

(75) Although the storage area for the advantageous section and the storage area for the normal section are provided in separate areas so as not to overlap each other, it is sufficient if the CPU 102 can distinguish between them. Part may be duplicated.

As a configuration provided in separate areas, a configuration in which a RAM for an advantageous section and a RAM for a normal section are provided, instead of providing separate areas in one RAM, may be employed. In this case, although the CPU can access both RAMs, the information in both RAMs should not be communicated directly with each other (without going through the CPU).

(76) Depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag, the information when the additional opportunity occurs is stored in the storage area for the advantageous section or the storage area for the normal section. is set, when an additional opportunity occurs, a process is performed to store information (additional game number) based on the additional opportunity in a predetermined area provided in the storage area for the advantageous section. Then, the information stored in the predetermined area is re-stored in the normal section storage area (the total number of eliminated games TEG and the number of eliminated games EG) at least at the timing before the initialization process is performed. may be

(77) Depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag, the information when the additional opportunity occurs is stored in the storage area for the advantageous section or the storage area for the normal section. Any storage area may be configured to store the corresponding information when any of the above occurs. Specifically, for example, when an additional trigger occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, the number of additional games is added to the number of continuations of the attack mode, etc., and the number of additional games is added to the total number of eliminated games. A configuration may also be adopted in which processing for adding to the TEG and the number of eliminated games EG is also performed. Even in this case, the number of added games such as the attack mode added after the above excess flag is set is initialized by the initialization process at the time of forced termination, while the total number of eliminated games TEG and the number of eliminated games are initialized. Since the EG is not initialized, it is possible to use the total number of eliminated games TEG and the like in the normal section.

(78) Store information corresponding to events occurring during the advantageous section in the normal section storage area, and set a special section in the normal section after the forcibly terminated advantageous section based on the stored information. Although it is configured, the scene in which the information corresponding to the event that occurred during the advantageous section is used is not limited to the normal section after the forced termination. For example, after the forced termination, it may be configured to be used when a transition is made to an advantageous section again (for example, a configuration in which setting values are more likely to be suggested in the advantageous section that has been re-shifted), or the power may be turned ON/OFF after the forced termination. (For example, a configuration in which setting values are likely to be suggested in the morning of the next day) may be used, or a configuration may be used during the bonus when the bonus is won after forced termination ( For example, a configuration may be adopted in which setting values are likely to be suggested during a bonus).

(79) During the special section, special replays 1 and 2 will be pushed in order to notify effect, and a short premonition game number will be selected when the bonus is won. , and the special notification as the number of short precursor games may be configured to occur not only during the special section, but also during other normal sections or advantageous sections. In this case, there is a configuration in which the probability of occurrence of the special notification is higher in the special section than in the other normal section or advantageous section, and a notification beneficial to the player (announcement of pressing order with easy setting value, short number of premonitory games, etc.) ) is preferable.

(80) Although the number of eliminated games EG and the total number of eliminated games TEG are displayed in the auxiliary display section 65 as the special game number display section TGH, they may be displayed in another display section.

(81) The special game number display section TGH is configured to display the number of times corresponding to the number of added games as the total number of eliminated games TEG. Alternatively, the total lost game number TEG, which is the threshold value for the presence or absence of occurrence, may be set to 100%, and the percentage up to the total lost game number TEG may be displayed in the special game number display section TGH. In this case, every time the total number of eliminated games TEG is added, the percentage of the special game number display section TGH approaches 100%, giving a strong impression that some kind of benefit can be obtained by reaching 100%. becomes possible.

Also, the special game number display section TGH may be a light emitting section capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors, and may be configured to suggest that some kind of benefit can be obtained (expect that a set value will be suggested) depending on the color of the emitted light. In this case, as the light emission of a plurality of colors, light is emitted in colors corresponding to the expectations of the light emission colors of other general expected effects, such as white→blue→yellow→green→red→rainbow. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that some kind of benefit can be obtained by changing the emission color.

(82) In the configuration in which the number of eliminated games EG and the total number of eliminated games TEG are displayed in the special number-of-games display section TGH, the configuration is such that the total number of eliminated games TEG and the like are simply displayed and the set values are not suggested. may be

(83) By displaying the number of eliminated games EG and the total number of eliminated games TEG in the special number-of-games display section TGH, the configuration that expects compensation for invalidation of the extra due to the forced termination is limited to the forced termination of the advantageous section. not, and may be applied to other advantageous conditional terminations. For example, a high-probability state and a low-probability state in which the probability of winning a bonus (1st BB, 2nd BB, etc.) or VB mode is relatively high or low, and an upper limit is set for the number of times a bonus or VB mode is won during the high-probability state. set up. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which a bonus or VB mode can be won a plurality of times with one winning, or a configuration in which a bonus or VB mode can be won even during a bonus or VB mode, after the number of winnings reaches the upper limit. can also win the bonus or VB mode. In such a configuration, by displaying the number of bonuses and VB mode wins after the upper limit is reached, even if the upper limit is reached, that is, if the bonus or VB mode is invalidated after reaching the upper limit, Even if there is, it is possible to expect that some kind of benefit can be obtained from the fact that the number of wins after reaching the upper limit is intentionally displayed.

(84) Assuming post-addition effect, if there is an unreported amount (if the post-load flag is set) when an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, the range of the unreported amount In this case, it is configured to determine the number of pseudo add-on games by referring to the add-on game number lottery table for normal times, but the add-on game number lottery table for pseudo add-on is used. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of games for pseudo-addition is determined. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a large number of games is likely to be pseudo-added when the number of uninformed parts is large, and a pseudo-additional number of games is likely to be produced when the number of uninformed parts is small.

(85) On the premise of the post-adding effect, if an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, if there is an uninformed amount, a pseudo-addition within the range of the uninformed amount The configuration is such that the setting value is suggested when the pseudo addition is performed beyond the unreported amount, but the setting value is suggested within the range that does not exceed the unreported amount. may be

For example, setting 1 to 3 is suggested when the number of pseudo-additions obtained by subtracting 10 as the first number from the post-addition counter BG occurs, and when the number of pseudo-additions obtained by subtracting 56 as the second number from the post-addition counter BG occurs. Setting 5 or setting 6 may be suggested, and setting 6 may be suggested when the number of pseudo-additions equal to the third number minus 77 from the post-addition counter BG occurs. In this case, the pseudo-addition of the number of times obtained by subtracting the first to third numbers from the post-addition counter BG is not only generated as a setting value indication, but can also be selected based on the normal addition game number lottery table. become a thing. Therefore, when the pseudo-addition of these times occurs, whether or not it has occurred as a setting value suggestion is also taken into consideration when predicting the setting value, and the enjoyment of the predictive game is improved. .

Furthermore, with the above configuration, the situation in which the setting value suggestion occurs requires that the trailing counter BG be equal to or greater than the first to third numbers. It becomes difficult to judge whether or not it is being performed, and the enjoyment of predicting the setting value is improved.

Needless to say, the values of the first to third numbers are not limited to the above values.

(86) If an additional trigger occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set on the premise of a post-add effect, even in a configuration that generates a pseudo-add-on if there is an unnotified amount, the target section is limited to the advantageous section. However, it may be applied to other advantageous conditions or intervals. For example, a high-probability state and a low-probability state in which the probability of winning a bonus (1st BB, 2nd BB, etc.) or VB mode is relatively high or low, and an upper limit is set for the number of times a bonus or VB mode is won during the high-probability state. set up. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which a bonus or VB mode can be won a plurality of times with one winning, or a configuration in which a bonus or VB mode can be won even during a bonus or VB mode, after the number of winnings reaches the upper limit. can also win the bonus or VB mode. In such a configuration, it may be further notified that the upper limit has been reached. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a winning notification is performed.

(87) In addition game count lottery processing (Fig. 130) and game count addition processing (Fig. 132), it is determined whether or not an excess flag is set, and whether or not subsequent processing is executed is determined differently. However, if the excess flag is set at least in the previous game number addition lottery process (FIG. 128), the game number addition lottery is not performed, and the addition lottery is won in the subsequent determination process. It is determined that it has not. Therefore, in a situation where the excess flag is set, the addition game number lottery process (FIG. 130) and the game number addition process (FIG. 132) are not actually executed. In these processes, the excess flag determination process may be omitted.

(88) As a compensation for forced termination due to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, it is configured to suggest a set value, etc., but the set value is provided as compensation when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated due to other factors that can be grasped in advance. A configuration may be adopted in which a suggestion or the like is performed. For example, when the game is forcibly terminated due to the closing time of the game hall (when the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous section cannot be completely played within business hours), a setting value may be suggested.

(89) The description was made on the premise that the number of games may be increased if a specific role is won during an advantageous period. , or only subtraction may occur. Assuming that the number of games can be subtracted, even if the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less, the upper limit number of games is not necessarily reached, and subsequent games can be enjoyed more. In this case, after moving to the advantageous section, the number of remaining games exceeding the maximum number of games will be displayed visually. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of remaining games on the display is subtracted up to.

(90) When the pressing order bell or pressing order replay is won, the winning combination differs depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the benefits given are different, and the stopping order is notified. Although the advantage for the player is made different depending on whether or not the stop operation is performed, any combination may be used as long as the advantage for the player is different by notifying the user of the stop operation.

For example, on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel, the first pattern (for example, "black BAR" pattern) and the second pattern (for example, "red 7" pattern) cannot be aimed at the same time (at positions separated by five symbols or more). )Deploy. Then, the first symbol on the left reel 32L, the predetermined symbol on the middle reel 32M (eg, "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol), and the predetermined symbol on the right reel 32R (eg, "first replay" symbol or "Second replay" symbol) and stop on the activated line, the first result winning is established, and the second symbol on the left reel 32L and the predetermined symbol on the middle reel 32M (for example, "first replay" symbol or " second replay symbol) and a predetermined symbol on the right reel 32R (for example, a "first replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol) stop on the activated line, so that the second result winning is established, A prize mode is set for the first result and the second result. In this case, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the first symbol when the first result is won, the first result prize can be established, but if the stop operation is performed aiming at the second symbol instead of the first symbol, the first result prize will not be awarded. It will not work and no corresponding benefits will be granted. Similarly, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the second symbol when the second result is won, the second result winning can be established, but if the stop operation is performed aiming at the first symbol instead of the second symbol, the second result winning is not possible. It will not work and no corresponding benefits will be granted. On top of that, a special role is provided in which either the first result or the second result is won, and when the special role is won, which one of the first result or the second result is won (first symbol and second result) Which of the two symbols should be targeted for the stop operation of the left reel 32L?). Also in such a configuration, it is possible to win the winning result (either the first result or the second result) by the notification, and the advantage for the player changes depending on the presence or absence of the notification. At least one of a mode in which such notification is likely to be performed, a mode in which the probability of transition to the mode in which the notification is likely to be performed is high, and a mode in which those who have won the lottery for transition to these modes are before transition. The advantageous interval may be a situation including the mode, or the advantageous interval may be a situation including at least one of the above modes, including each of the above modes and each mode based on the pushing order.

In addition, by performing the black BAR pushing notification (Fig. 106) when winning a special replay, the 15th replay winning instead of the 1st replay is established. You may apply it to the structure which makes a stop roll different.

In other words, the stopping operation for differentiating the winning combination is not limited to the stopping order, and may be any stopping operation mode including the timing of the stopping operation. is not limited to notification of the pressing order, and may be notification of a mode related to an operation mode.

(91) In a configuration in which the display start mode of the section indicator is changed according to the result that triggers the lottery when winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section, and the stop result and the display start mode of the section indicator are associated. Also, the display start mode of the section indicator may be changed depending on the winning mode of the result that triggers the lottery or whether or not there is a winning. For example, a strong cherry with an IV of 13 is set as overlapping roles of the 28th minor role and the 32nd to 35th minor roles. , the display start modes of the section indicators may be made different. More specifically, there are cases where "cherry" symbols are aligned on the activated line and stop, and the 28th small combination is established to win a strong cherry prize, and "cherry" symbols are not aligned on the activated line and the second win is achieved. The display start mode of the interval indicator may be different depending on whether any one of the 32nd to 35th small wins is established and a strong cherry win is achieved. In addition, in a special role that may be missed, if the special role winning is established when the special role is won, and if the special role winning is not established due to the failure, the section display will be displayed. may be configured to have a different display start mode.

In these cases, the section indicator does not start lighting up until the circulator stops, at which point the winning mode, the stop result, and the presence or absence of a dropout will be branched. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which lighting of the section indicator is started at the timing, and the timing and mode (color, etc.) of lighting start are changed depending on the branch. Specifically, for example, on the premise that the stop operation is performed in the order of the left reel 32L → middle reel 32M → right reel 32R, when the middle reel 32M is stopped, the winning mode etc. , branches of the 28th small winning combination and the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination), so that the section indicator starts lighting after the middle reel 32M stops, at the timing after the second stop OFF time A certain third stop ON time is set as a default lighting start timing. When the stop operation is performed and the winning mode etc. diverges to the first mode (the 28th minor win winning side in strong cherry), lighting is started at the time of the third stop ON specified above, while winning a prize When the aspect etc. branches to the second aspect (32nd to 35th minor winning side in strong cherry), lighting for change instead of the specified lighting start timing (when the 3rd stop is ON) As the start timing, lighting is started at the third stop OFF. By doing so, it is possible to provide enjoyment using the relationship between the success or non-success of the eye-pushing operation and the timing at which it becomes possible to recognize winning of an advantageous section by the start of lighting of the section indicator.

(92) Regarding the advantageous section, the winning probability of the transition lottery and the benefits at the time of winning (transition mode, the number of additional games, etc.) are common regardless of the setting value, but the winning probability etc. are different depending on the setting value. good too. In this case, depending on the type of result that triggers a lottery such as a transfer lottery, there are cases where there is a difference in the set value probabilities and prizes at the time of winning, and there are cases where there is no difference in the probability and prizes at the time of winning due to the set values. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

(93) In the instruction monitor 68, the display mode of the pressing order information (“1” to “6”) using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is not limited to the above. For example, the winning combination differs depending on the stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to stop first, and the stopping order of the second and third reels includes a three-choice pressing order combination that does not affect the winning combination. In this case, pressing order information (display of "7") displayed by lighting the first display segment N1, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7, and the first display segment N1 to the 7. Pressing order information displayed by lighting the display segment N7 (display of "8"), the first display segment N1 to the third display segment N3, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment The pressing order information (display of "9") displayed by lighting the segment N7 may be used to notify the pressing order of these three options.

(94) In the instruction monitor 68, the timing of extinguishing the pushing order information using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is not limited to the time when the third reel stop ON operation is performed. It suffices that the push order notification is performed until the stop switches 42 to 44 to be pressed are grasped (the push order information should be displayed). For example, it may be during the second reel stop ON operation or during the second reel stop OFF operation. Further, in the case of performing the pressing order notification of the pressing order of three options, it may be performed at the time of the first reel stop ON operation or at the time of the first reel stop OFF operation. Furthermore, the light may be turned off after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time of these operations.

Furthermore, the timing may be later than the third reel stop ON operation, the third reel stop OFF operation, or a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) from the third reel stop OFF operation. The light may be turned off after a lapse of time, or may be at the end of payout of medals.

(95) The instruction monitor 68 may also be used as the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62. In these cases, the display units 60 to 62 perform the push order notification at the timing when the push order notification is performed, while displaying the original display of each of the display units 60 to 62 at the timing when the push order notification is not performed. It should be configured to perform

When used as the credit display unit 60, the credit display unit 60 may display credits at least until a bet operation is performed, and then notify the pressing order (based on the operation of the start lever 41). The push order notification ends at least at the timing before the timing when the number of medals acquired (paid out) in the game increases and is updated (the timing when medal payout starts) (the push order information is turned off). ), for example, it may be configured to be finished by the time the third reel is stopped ON, and to be switched to credit display when medal payout is started.

The remaining payout number display unit 61 is a display unit for displaying the number of remaining payouts during the bonus. There is a configuration in which notification is not performed (a game feature different from a game feature in which medals are increased by notification of the pressing order), and a game in which the number of remaining payouts is displayed by the remaining payout number display unit 61 and a game in which the notification of the pressing order is performed. You may avoid duplication. Incidentally, in this case, the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display section 65 may be generated during the bonus.

When the payout number display unit 62 is also used, it is preferable that the pressing order information is terminated before at least the payout number display unit 62 starts displaying the number of payout medals of the game. For example, when the 3rd reel stop ON operation is performed, the push order notification is terminated (the push order information is turned off), and if the payout combination is won, the payout number is displayed when the 3rd reel stop OFF operation is performed. do it. Such a configuration may be applied to the remaining payout number display section 61 .

Further, the display units 60 to 62 may be used to notify the pressing order. In the game panel 25, a credit display section 60 is arranged on the left side, a remaining payout number display section 61 is arranged in the middle, and a payout number display section 62 is arranged on the right side (FIG. 1). When the left stop switch 42 should be operated, the credit display section 60 is displayed, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the remaining payout number display section 61 is displayed, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the payout is displayed. The pressing order may be notified by displaying the number display section 62 or the like. In this case, as described above, from after the bet operation is performed to when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the pressing order is notified on any of the display units 60 to 62. However, since the original display function is guaranteed, the period from after the betting operation is performed to when the third reel stop ON operation is set as the period in which the pressing order is notified by these display units 60 to 62, and other than that. During the period of (2), the original display of each of the display units 60 to 62 may be performed.

(96) The number of continuous games in the advantageous interval is managed by the number of games AG in the advantageous interval. (until three replays are won in a row) may be set as one set, and the number of sets may be used for management. Specifically, in the attack mode, a predetermined number of games (50 games) is set as one set, and the number of sets is determined by lottery at the start of the attack mode or at the time of the attack mode transition lottery. Then, the attack mode is terminated when the determined number of sets is completed. In this case, when the measurement conditions such as winning a special role are established during the attack mode, a lottery with the number of sets will be performed as an additional lottery for the attack mode. It is preferable to have a configuration in which the number of sets is added.

In such a configuration, in relation to the upper limit number of games (1500 games) in the advantageous section, for example, a predetermined predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) is set as one set, or a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, replay 3 consecutive wins) or a specific number of games (e.g. 50 games). A configuration may be adopted in which an upper limit set number is set and the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by completing the upper limit set number. In this case, the number of sets of advantageous sections may be determined by a predetermined counter, and forced termination may be performed when the counter reaches the upper limit (30). If the challenge mode and the omen mode are taken into consideration, the number of games is determined so that the number of sets includes the challenge mode and the omen mode (for example, the total number of games of the omen mode and the challenge mode is one set). If the above-mentioned counter reaches the upper limit value, including these modes, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval will be reached. In addition, in a configuration where the number of games per set can vary (a configuration in which a set consists of whether a predetermined end condition is met or a specific number of games are played), the number of games is less than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. , the counter for the number of sets can be the upper limit.

In relation to the excess flag, it is preferable to set the excess flag when the sum of the number of sets that have been consumed and the number of sets that have not been consumed reaches the upper limit of the number of sets in the counter for the number of sets. .

(97) A configuration may be adopted in which the pushing order notification is performed also in the challenge mode or the sign mode. More specifically, including attack mode, challenge mode, omen mode, etc., when the transition to the specific game state even as an advantageous interval, the advantageous interval until the press order notification occurs at least a predetermined number of times (once) A configuration that does not end may be adopted.

(98) As a lottery result in the advantageous section, the timing of notification of the result of the additional lottery is set to differ between the immediate loading effect and the post-loading effect according to the set value, but the lottery result is set to change the notification timing of the lottery result. is not limited to the additional lottery, and other lotteries may be used as long as the lottery is in the advantageous section. For example, the timing of notifying the result of the number of add-on games lottery may be changed according to the set value. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the setting difference of the loading/post-loading ratio is different. Moreover, it is not limited to the lottery related to the instruction function, and for example, the timing of announcing the result of the BB lottery during the advantageous interval may be configured to differ depending on the set value. It may be configured to allow Further, the notification timing of the winning result of a small combination such as cherry may be changed according to the set value. In this case, the notification timing in the winning game may be changed according to the set value.

(99) In the case of carrying out the back-up effect, the first back-up character BUP1, the second back-up character BUP2, etc. are configured to notify the winning result, but these characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. may not be displayed. . In this case, on the premise that the additional effect has result notification (winning notification) and content notification (winning game number notification), in the additional effect, the result notification is made at the same timing as the content notification of the additional effect, or slightly later. A configuration may be adopted in which it is performed at an early timing, and in a game in which an additional lottery is performed, the result notification may not be performed.

In addition, in the add-on performance, when the add-on lottery is won, the first add-on character BUP1, the second add-on character BUP2, etc. are displayed, but these characters BUP1, BUP2 are also displayed when the win is not made. may be configured. In this case, the characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. are characters indicating that the additional lottery has been performed. When these characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. are displayed in the case of non-winning, in the content notification, the effect that the treasure box is empty or that the number of additional games is 0 is performed. It is good also as a structure which alert|reports.

(100) As a lottery with no setting difference, the notification timing of the additional lottery is configured to differ between the immediate addition effect and the subsequent addition effect according to the set value, but if the lottery has no setting difference, it is not limited to the additional lottery. Other lotteries may be used. For example, it may be determined by lottery for the number of additional games, or the timing of notification of the result of the lottery for the number of additional games may be changed according to the set value. may be different depending on the setting value, or the setting difference of the immediate loading/post-loading ratio may be different. In addition, it is not limited to the lottery related to the instruction function. For example, the timing of announcing the result of the BB lottery in the normal section or the advantageous section may be changed according to the set value. It is good also as a structure which changes with a value. Further, the notification timing of the winning result of a small combination such as cherry may be changed according to the set value. In this case, the notification timing in the winning game may be changed according to the set value.

(101) The table counter ATK is incremented based on the continuation of the immediate add-on effect as the add-on effect in the specialized zone to switch the add-on notification timing table. It is good also as a structure which switches an addition alerting|reporting timing table. In this case, it is preferable that the table counter ATK is initialized (1) based on the occurrence of the instant-on performance.

In addition, the continuity of the immediate loading effect and the subsequent loading effect is not limited only to the special zone, and as an additional effect that occurred during the attack mode, the continuous immediate loading effect and the subsequent loading effect A configuration may be adopted in which the notification timing table is switched.

In addition, the trigger for switching the addition notification timing table is not limited to the continuity of the selected production, and when the addition by the same kind of small role continues (for example, when the addition of the cherry timing continues), the addition notification timing table , and the table counter ATK may be initialized when additional small wins of other types continue.

(102) Although it is configured that the addition notification timing table is switched due to the continuation of the immediate ride effect, the configuration is such that the addition notification timing table is switched simply according to the number of times the immediate ride effect is selected even if it is not continuous. may be In this case, for example, the first addition notification timing table is selected when the number of times of selection of immediate addition effect (table counter ATK) is 1 to 3 times, and the number of times of selection of immediate addition effect (table counter ATK) is 4 times to 5 times. Settings based on the selected addition notification timing table, such as the first addition notification timing table is selected if the fourth addition notification timing table is selected and the number of times the immediate addition effect is selected (table counter ATK) is 6 or more. The difficulty level of guessing the value may not change uniformly depending on the number of times (difficulty increases as the number of times increases, or decreases as the number of times increases). .

(103) Although the difficulty level of estimating the set value based on the selected addition notification timing is reduced by increasing the number of consecutive times of immediate riding effects, A configuration may be adopted in which the difficulty of estimating the set value based on the additional notification timing is increased.

(104) In the configuration for switching the additional notification timing table, the configuration may be such that the initial value of the table counter ATK differs depending on the timing of transition to the specialized zone. Specifically, for example, if the trigger for shifting to the specialized zone is watermelon, the initial value of the table counter ATK is set to 1, while if the trigger for shifting to the specialized zone is cherry, the initial value of the table counter ATK is For example, the value may be set to 3. By doing so, it is possible to vary the difficulty of estimating the set value based on the timing of transition to the specialized zone.

(105) The specialized zone to be shifted at the time of cherry was set to a specialized zone in which a special addition notification timing table with a large setting difference between the immediate loading/post-loading ratio was used, but the transition to the specialized zone was made at the time of watermelon. It may be configured to move to the special zone at another special role opportunity.

(106) Although the specialization zone that shifts at the cherry opportunity and the specialization zone that shifts at the opportunity of another specific role are configured to have different additional notification timing tables, the specialization that is used is different. The number of zones is not limited to two, but may be three or more.

(107) In the game feature of predicting the set value based on the immediate/post-addition ratio, the additional effect may occur at a timing different from the immediate-addition effect and the post-addition effect. For example, the game property may be such that the set value is predicted based on the selection rate including the performance via the omen.

(108) When the special zone ends or the attack mode ends, it is configured to output information on the immediate/later ride ratio. If not, that is, if watermelon or cherry is not won, the information on the immediate ride/later ride ratio may not be output.

(109) A configuration may be adopted in which the information regarding the notification timing, such as the immediate loading/post-loading ratio, can be output by lottery. For example, an output lottery may be performed with a predetermined probability at the end of the attack mode, and the information regarding the notification timing may be output when the output lottery is won. The winning probability of the output lottery is arbitrary, but the winning probability may differ depending on the set value. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability, or vice versa. Also, the odds of winning may differ depending on the number of games played in the attack mode (advantageous section).

(110) The output timing of the information relating to the notification timing, such as the immediate loading/post-loading ratio, is not limited to the end of the special zone or the end of the attack mode, and may be configured to be output at other timings. For example, it may be configured to output based on the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaching a predetermined number of games (for example, 1000 games) before the upper limit. Also, it may be configured to be output during the bonus state at the start or end of the bonus state in which the player wins during the attack mode. Furthermore, it may be configured such that output can be triggered by winning a specific combination (for example, winning a cherry) during the attack mode.

(111) In the configuration for outputting information related to notification timing, such as the immediate/post-addition ratio, it is also possible to output information including the information that an additional lottery was performed but was not won in the additional lottery. In addition, when outputting information regarding the notification timing of an additional effect triggered by a winning combination such as a cherry that may be missed, information including whether or not there is a missed game may be output.

(112) In the configuration for outputting the information on the immediate ride/later ride ratio, only the ratio may be output, and the information on the number of times of each instant ride effect and the subsequent ride effect may not be output. By doing so, for example, it is possible to avoid suppressing a bad impression given to the player due to a small number of additional wins.

(113) In the notification mode selection effect, when a reel that causes a dropout is selected, the immediate loading effect is selected. A configuration may be adopted in which an effect via an omen is selected. In addition, the selection operation and the execution timing of the selected additional notification are associated with each other in the relationship between the reels that cause omission and the reels that do not cause omission. It is good also as a structure which matches a selection operation and the execution timing of the additional alerting|reporting selected according to the height of possibility of. More specifically, for example, when the reel with the highest probability of being missed (reel with a small number of symbols corresponding to winning) is selected, the placing effect may be selected immediately.

(114) In the notification mode selection effect, the execution timing of the additional effect is selected by the stop operation of the first reel, but the execution timing is selected by the stop operation of the second reel or the stop operation of the third reel. good too. Further, in a predetermined reel, a first specific pattern, a second specific pattern and a third specific pattern which are in a relationship that cannot be stopped at the same time are provided, and the execution timing is selected depending on which specific pattern is to be stopped. good too.

(115) By the correction processing, in the situation where the post-add effect is selected, the data of each post-add effect is individually changed to the immediate add effect, but each data can be uniformly changed to the immediate add effect. It is good also as composition which assumes. Further, it may be possible to select whether or not to immediately change to the superimposition effect according to the type of the superimposition trigger of the data to be superimposed. Further, it may be possible to select whether or not to change to the immediate addition effect depending on the number of added games.

(116) Although the modification processing is configured to change the data in which the subsequent addition effect is selected to the immediate addition effect, it may be configured to change to the effect via the omen, or the data in which the effect via the omen is selected. may be changed to an immediate put-on effect or a later put-on effect.

(117) The configuration of the individual area to be stored when the post-adding effect or the premonition-mediated effect is selected/determined is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit of the number of games that can be stored may be less than or more than the above. Also, the number of individual data can be changed.

(118) Regarding the individual areas that store additional data, if more memory triggers (selection of additional effects, etc.) than the number of individual areas provided occur, the data in one or more of the individual areas On the other hand, it may be configured to add the number of additional games this time. In the case of a configuration in which addition is made to data of a plurality of areas, the number of games to be added this time may be divided evenly and added, or may be added with a weighted division.

(119) When the add-on effect is selected, the first add-on character BUP1, the second add-on character BUP2, etc. are displayed according to the add-on win opportunity, and these add-on characters are the above. is not limited to For example, different characters may be displayed according to the number of additional games.

(120) The configuration of differentiating the execution timing of the additional effect is not limited to the effect when winning the additional lottery, and may be applied when the additional lottery is not won.

(121) In a configuration in which the execution timing of the additional effect is determined based on the player's selection operation, the execution timing differs from the execution timing selected by the player through the selection operation due to the relationship between the number of additional games and the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. It is good also as composition which performs additional production at timing. More specifically, for example, in a situation where 50 games are left until the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section (situation where the number of executed games is 1450 games), if 100 games, which is more than 50 games, are added, an immediate addition effect is generated. is selected, an additional performance is generated as a post-addition performance. By doing so, it is possible to grasp that the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated due to the addition of the upper limit number of games or more by performing the additional effect at the timing different from the selection operation of the player himself/herself.

Note that this configuration may be used for setting value suggestion. More specifically, with a predetermined probability, the additional effect is generated at a timing different from the execution timing by the player's selection operation. Then, when the setting value is the first setting value (for example, setting 1), the additional effect is executed at the first probability (for example, 10%) as the predetermined probability (for example, 10%) at a timing different from the selection operation, and the setting value is the first setting value. In the case of a second set value (for example, set 6) different from the 1 set value, a second probability (for example, 80%) different from the first probability as the predetermined probability is added at a timing different from the selection operation. Configure it to run. By doing so, it is possible to realize a new playability such as predicting the set value through the occurrence of the additional effect at the execution timing different from the selection operation of the player himself.

Furthermore, when the number of games that is more than the number of vacant games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is added, an additional effect can occur at an execution timing different from the selection operation. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of generating an additional effect at the execution timing differs depending on the set value. By doing so, it is possible to obtain the advantage of being able to predict the set value when an addition exceeding the upper limit occurs, and it is possible to ensure that the upper limit is exceeded due to the addition.

(122) In a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions, such as the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase number, are provided as forced termination conditions for the advantageous section, these forced termination conditions are not limited to the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number. , or may be configured to include other conditions. Other conditions include, for example, the case where the number of winnings of a predetermined result (which may be a bell, a replay, multiple types of payout results, or multiple types of replays may be acceptable) during an advantageous period reaches the maximum number of times, or continuous winning. One forced termination condition is when the number of times reaches the upper limit. Or, for example, when the number of bonus winnings in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of times or when the number of consecutive winnings reaches the upper limit number of times, one forced termination condition is set, for example, after transitioning to the advantageous section One forced termination condition is when the time reaches a predetermined time. It may be used as an end condition.

In these cases, it is possible to predict in advance that the forced termination condition will be satisfied from the current game content (advantage zone remaining game number ZG), and based on the prediction result, it may be beneficial to the player, such as suggesting a set value. The configuration may be such that a specific process for presenting information, granting a privilege, or the like is executed.

(123) In a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set for the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase number, if it is specified in advance that each forced termination condition is satisfied, a first excess flag and a second An excess flag is set, and if the additional condition is satisfied thereafter, the number of added games is added to the total number of eliminated games TEG. may be provided and stored separately. For example, when the first excess flag is set, the subsequent number of added games is added to the first total eliminated game number TEG1 provided in the various counter areas 106e, and when the second excess flag is set, may be configured to add the number of additional games after that to the second total number of eliminated games TEG2 provided in the various counter areas 106e. In this case, when both the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, the first total eliminated game number TEG1 and the second total eliminated game number TEG2 corresponding to the first excess flag are selected. It is preferable that the number of added games is added to one total number of eliminated games TEG1. By doing so, it is possible to simplify the processing for correction when the situation in which the second excess flag is set is resolved after the fact.

(124) The values and relationships between the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase number are not limited to those described above. or more than 2400 sheets. However, in terms of game characteristics such as aiming to increase the upper limit increase number in the advantageous section, it is better if the net increase number in the advantageous section is defined so that the upper limit increase number is reached when the advantageous section of the upper limit number of games is consumed. More specifically, it is preferable that the number of net increase is defined so that the number of games to be played is less than the upper limit number of games to reach the upper limit increase number.

(125) In the advantageous section, whether or not to continue the attack mode or the like is controlled by the number of continuations based on the number of remaining games, but it may be controlled by the number of payouts. More specifically, for example, in the above configuration, 50 games are set as the initial game when shifting to the attack mode, and the attack mode ends when the 50 games are completed. An initial payout number of 100 may be set at the time of transition, and the attack mode may end when 100 or more coins are paid out. In this case, it is preferable to add the number of payouts instead of the number of games when an addition occurs. Further, instead of the number of payouts, the number of increases and decreases obtained by subtracting the number of used cards from the number of payouts may be defined.

(126) When calculating the number of increased/decreased number of game media ZM in the advantageous interval, the number of game media paid out in each game is subtracted from the number of game media used in each game. A configuration having a game and a game that is not reflected may be used. For example, since the deduction becomes zero when a replay win is made, the calculation of the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM may not be performed. By doing so, it is possible to expect a significant effect of reducing the processing load compared to a configuration in which calculation is performed for each game. In particular, since the calculation is mainly performed in the high RT state where the replay winning probability is high, the reduction effect can be significant.

Also, during the advantageous section, it may be configured so that the number of payouts and the number of uses for a predetermined number of bets are not reflected. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of payouts and the number of coins used in the game performed in the 1-bet mode are not reflected. In this case, for example, in the CB state in which the 2-bet mode is the prescribed number, it may be configured to be reflected in the calculation of the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM as a game resulting from CB winning in the 3-bet mode. Further, for example, when the bonus winning flag is set, it may be configured to reflect the payout number and the used number regardless of the number of bets. By allowing the state to continue endlessly, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to perform the act of completing the number of games substantially exceeding the upper limit number of games.

(127) When the first excess flag is set to specify that the upper limit number of games is exceeded, and the second excess flag is set to specify that the upper limit increase number is exceeded. The type of special notification that occurs (contents of set value suggestions) and the rate of occurrence of special notification are made different depending on the situation, so that the degree of advantage for the player is different. , one may suggest a set value, and the other may display a rare image. Further, the degree of advantage is not limited to those of the above-described embodiment and modifications, and may be reversed. ) may occur.

In addition to the set excess flag, the type of special notification to be generated (contents of set value suggestion) and the rate of occurrence of special notification are varied depending on the total number of eliminated games TEG, thereby increasing the degree of advantage for the player. Although it is configured to be different, the advantage level and the type and content of the special notification to which the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG is reflected are not limited to those of the above-described embodiment and modifications, and are reflected to different ones. may be For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the smaller the total number of eliminated games TEG (the smaller the number of additions after it is specified that the upper limit has been reached), the more advantageous the special notification is generated for the player.

(128) The type of special notification (contents of set value suggestion) or special notification to be generated depends on whether the identification of exceeding the upper limit number of games or the identification of exceeding the upper limit increase number is performed first. However, the configuration for different advantages is not limited to this. etc., may be different contents. Further, the degree of advantage is not limited to those of the above-described embodiment and modifications, and may be reversed. ) may occur.

(129) The number of net additions for each state is not limited to the above. For example, the net increase in the number of cards (about +1.90 in the seventh embodiment) when the attack mode is completed in the high RT state is not limited to that of the above embodiment or modification, and is per game. The number may be less than 2 or may exceed 2. For example, a net increase number such as 3, 5, 10, or 14 per game may be set.

(130) It is configured not to perform a transition lottery such as an attack mode or an additional lottery based on a winning combination that has a different winning probability depending on the set value (for example, overlapping result with 2nd BB, strong cherry overlap 2, weak cherry overlap 2, etc.). However, it may be configured to perform. In this case, even in a bonus state based on winning combinations with different winning probabilities based on set values (for example, the 2nd BB state based on the strong cherry overlap 2), a transition lottery such as an attack mode or an additional lottery may be performed.

(131) When it is specified in advance that multiple forced termination conditions such as the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase number are satisfied, it occurs according to the number of advantageous section games AG when the specification is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the degree of advantage for the player differs by making the type of special notification different. For example, depending on whether the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number is reached before or after a predetermined number of games (1000 games), the advantage of the special notification to be generated, A configuration may be adopted in which the types are different, and a configuration may be adopted in which a special notification advantageous to the player is generated before a predetermined number of games are played.

(132) A configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions such as an upper limit number of games and an upper limit increased number are provided, and when one of the forced termination conditions is satisfied, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated even if the other forced termination condition is not satisfied. However, the configuration may be such that forced termination is performed after waiting for all of the forced termination conditions to be satisfied.

(133) If the upper limit increase number is not reached, the second excess flag may be cleared in the remaining number management process according to the gaming situation after it is specified that the upper limit increase number is reached. In this case, it is configured to temporarily store information that it has been specified that the upper limit increase number has been reached once, and a situation in which it is not specified at all that the upper limit increase number has been reached and a situation in which specification is once performed For example, the advantage and type of special notification when the upper limit increase number is reached after that may be changed. Also, if the advantageous section ends without being forcibly terminated (without reaching the upper limit increase number), if the information that the above identification has been performed is temporarily stored, the setting value is suggested. On the other hand, if the above identification is not performed, setting value suggestion may not be performed, or vice versa.

(134) Regarding the upper limit increase number, it was explained on the premise that the upper limit increase number may not be reached depending on the gaming situation after it is specified that the upper limit increase number is reached. Also, it may be configured such that the upper limit number of games may not be reached depending on the gaming situation after it is specified that the upper limit number of games will be reached. For example, if the configuration is such that the subtraction processing of the remaining number of games ZG is performed according to the game result, etc. during the advantageous period, the subtraction processing is performed even when the upper limit number of games is specified. Depending on the winning situation of the game result to be played, an event may occur in which the upper limit number of games is not reached. In this case, depending on the game situation after it is specified that the upper limit increase number is reached, each invention in the case where the upper limit increase number is not reached is changed after it is specified that the upper limit number of games is reached. It may be applied when the upper limit number of games is not reached according to the game situation.

(135) After being notified that the second excess flag has been set, when the advantageous section ends without reaching the upper limit increase number, it is configured to be more advantageous than otherwise. It may be configured such that when the notification is performed, it is more disadvantageous than when the notification is not performed.

(136) In the case of forcible termination due to reaching the upper limit increase number without consuming the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, the notification amount is compensated by special notification, but the configuration is not compensated. Conversely, it may be configured to generate a special notification that is advantageous if there is no notification. The number of remaining games to be notified differs greatly depending on which of the immediate addition notification and the subsequent addition notification is selected as the additional notification. The case where there are few is when many post-boarding notifications are selected. Then, when there is at least a large amount of notification, it is considered that a lot of production was performed (showy production was performed), and the amount of production and the degree of liveliness are subtracted from the advantage of special notification ( If there are a lot of performances, it may be considered that the player has fully enjoyed the game, and no compensation is provided or the compensation is reduced accordingly.

(137) When the advantageous section is forcibly terminated due to reaching the upper limit number of games, when executing the 6th special notification based on the excess, if the 2nd excess flag is set, the 6th special notification lottery is not won. Even if it is, it is configured to be advantageous for the player by treating it as winning, but for example, the process for the 6th special notification is performed using the 6th special notification A lottery table instead of the 6th special notification B lottery table. , etc., may be configured to perform advantageous processing. Also, if the fifth special notification is executed even if the second excess flag is set, the non-winning is not treated as winning, so that the advantage is not excessively increased, but for example, the sixth special notification B lottery The process for the sixth special notification may be performed using a lottery table in which setting values are more difficult to narrow down than the table. Furthermore, not only whether or not the fifth special notification is executed, but also the number of times the fifth special notification is executed and the execution mode may be taken into account to set the sixth special notification. A configuration may be adopted in which the sixth special notification is not executed if more than the number has been executed, and the sixth special notification is executed if the number is less than a predetermined number.

(138) In a configuration where a plurality of forced termination conditions such as an upper limit number of games and an upper limit increased number are provided, a configuration in which the content of the special notification differs depending on which of the forced termination conditions the game is terminated, and the degree of advantage differs. If the number of games is forced to end at the upper limit number of games, the number of games up to the upper limit increase number is taken into account, and if the number of games is forced to end at the upper limit increase number, the number of games up to the upper limit number of games is taken into consideration. If you force quit, the number of games up to the upper limit number of games is taken into account, but if you force quit at the upper limit number of games, the difference up to the upper limit increase number is not taken into account, or vice versa. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that takes into consideration the situation up to the establishment of the forced termination condition.

(139) In the case of forced termination at the upper limit number of games, in the special section, the difference number up to the upper limit increase number is taken into consideration, and the display of the remaining payout number is continued. If the number of remaining increases is not displayed (at least at the time of forced termination), the number of payouts does not need to be displayed in the special section, and in the event of forced termination with the maximum increased number, the number of games up to the maximum number of games in the special section In consideration of the number of games, it was configured to continue displaying the number of remaining games, but in the first place, if the number of remaining games is not displayed during the advantageous section (at least at the time of forced termination), the number of remaining games in the special section may not be displayed. Further, the presence or absence of display continuation may be changed depending on whether or not the display is displayed at the time of forced termination.

(140) In the case of forced termination at the upper limit number of games, in the special section, the continuity of the special section is managed by the difference number up to the upper limit increase number, and the remaining payout number is displayed. The continuity of the special section may be managed by the number of increments, and the remaining number of increments may be displayed. In this case, it becomes easier for the special section to continue until the state shifts to a state in which an increase in the amount of game media can be expected.

(141) The number of games to be eliminated EJG and the total number of games to be eliminated TEG are managed separately in the advantageous section counter area 209 and the normal section counter area 210, respectively. , may be managed in the normal section counter area 210, or may be managed in another area. Information about the excess may be used only for special notification, etc., and may not be deleted at the time of forced termination. may be maintained in the normal section until the transition to the next advantageous section (deleted at the time of transition to the next advantageous section), and the information about the excess may be stored in a predetermined reset process (reset button operation, RAM clear Operation, power ON/OFF, etc.) may be maintained (deleted based on a predetermined reset process).

(142) The number of games in the elimination preparation game number EJG is moved to the total elimination game number TEG based on the setting of the first excess flag. Any configuration that allows In the case of a configuration in which the game is moved at the time of forced termination, the special notification in the advantageous section should be based on the number of games EJG to prepare for elimination, and the special notification at the time of forced termination and after that should be based on the total number of games TEG to be eliminated.

(143) The number of games in the number of games to be eliminated EJG is moved to the total number of eliminated games TEG based on the setting of the first excess flag. good. In this case, the excess when only the second excess flag is set is managed as the number of elimination preparation games EJG, and when the first excess flag is set (and when only the first excess flag is set) (when the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set) can be managed as the total number of eliminated games TEG. Furthermore, it is possible to grasp the difference between the number of excess games that occurs after the second excess flag is set until the first excess flag is set as the number of elimination preparation games EJG.

(144) The excess information stored in the total disappearance game number TEG via the disappearance preparation game number EJG and the excess information stored in the total disappearance game number TEG without passing the disappearance preparation game number EJG are stored. It may be configured to be managed separately (for example, in separate counters or separate storage areas). Even if the same counter (total number of eliminated games TEG) is used, it is possible to store a boundary value between the number of games played and the number of games not played. It is only necessary that it is possible to determine whether or not the number of games to be eliminated EJG is used when performing the processing.

(145) A special notification that is more advantageous if the number of remaining games that have already been notified is increased and the number of remaining games that have been notified is increased, or a special notification that is more advantageous if the number of remaining games that have been notified at the time of forced termination is smaller. , The number of remaining games that have been notified at the time of forced termination is a more advantageous special notification, but if there is a number of remaining games that have been notified, it will be forcibly terminated with the upper limit increase, and some processing will occur. is performed, and it may be advantageous to forcibly end the game at the upper limit increase number or the upper limit number of games when there is no notified remaining number of games.

(146) A special notification that is more advantageous if the number of remaining games that have been notified is increased and the number of remaining games that have been notified is increased, or a special notification that is more advantageous if the number of remaining games that have been notified is smaller at the time of forced termination. In the configuration that the number of remaining games that have been notified at the time of forced termination is a more advantageous special notification, the number of remaining games that is advantageous is clearly indicated on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. At the same time, the display of the number of remaining games may be updated (for example, updated by counting down) when each game is completed toward the indicated number of games.

(147) A special notification that is more advantageous the more the game is forcibly terminated due to the increase in the upper limit with a large number of remaining games that have been notified, or a special notification that is more advantageous if the number of remaining games that have been notified at the time of forced termination is smaller. , In a configuration where the number of remaining games notified at the time of forced termination is a more advantageous special notification, the number of remaining games at the time of forced termination is not the number of remaining games, but the upper limit increase number is reached, such as transition to a bonus state. A special notification process may be performed as the number of remaining games at the time when a specific condition is established before the number of games reaches the upper limit increase number.

(148) In the configuration for performing the first adjustment process to the third adjustment process, in particular, the configuration for predicting the subsequent increase/decrease number based on the maximum increase/decrease number MM can be used for other processes. If the total expected increase/decrease number SM is predicted based on the maximum increase/decrease number MM in the process, then the expected remaining increase/decrease number NM may be calculated from the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG and the maximum increase/decrease number MM.

(149) Although the second adjustment process is configured to be activated each time the second process for section display is performed, it may be configured to be activated, for example, when a correction condition is satisfied. The correction conditions include, for example, the case where the deviation from the total increase/decrease maximum expected number SMM predicted in the first adjustment processing exceeds a predetermined value, or the case where the game state (RT state) shifts to another state. be.

(150) When the bonus is won at the end of the advantageous section, if it is found that the maximum number of games will be reached after the bonus ends and during the return to the high RT state, from the end of the bonus until the maximum number of games is reached The number of games is added to the number of precursor games, but the average number of games in the return state may be added to the number of precursor games. In this case, it is possible to omit the process of calculating the number of games until the upper limit number of games is reached.

(151) When the bonus is won at the end of the profit interval, if it is found that the maximum number of games will be reached after the bonus is finished and while returning to the high RT state, from the end of the bonus until the maximum number of games is reached In place of or in addition to the configuration of adding the number of games to the number of predictive games, a configuration may be employed in which a special notification such as setting value suggestion is generated in order to follow up on the forcible termination due to the tail end. In this case, the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated without waiting for the execution of the upper limit number of games (specifically, forcibly terminated based on the end of the bonus). Further, when the upper limit number of games is reached during the return state, the advantageous section may be extended until the return to the high RT state.

(152) The challenge mode can be extended based on the winning of the duplicate target role that triggers the bonus lottery at the end of the challenge mode, but the extension target mode is not limited to the challenge mode. It may be in other advantageous section modes such as attack mode or VB mode.

(153) When extension processing of the mode is performed based on winning of a duplicate target role at the end of the attack mode or VB mode, not only the number of continuations of the sign mode and the continuous effect but also the average game until the transition to the RT state A configuration may be adopted in which extension processing is performed in consideration of the number and actual transitions. That is, for example, if the actual transition of the RT state is taken into account, the game up to the fall replay win (the game up to the fall replay win) may be subject to the extension processing.

(154) The extension processing of the challenge mode has been described on the premise that the omens mode is set based on the fact that the overlapping target role is won, and the continuous production will finally occur, but the continuous production does not occur in the omens mode. It is also applicable to a configuration in which the portent mode ends at .

(155) When the duplicate target role is won at the end of the challenge mode, the extension processing of the challenge mode is performed on the premise that the precursor mode is set. The configuration may be such that the extension process is performed at times.

(156) Although the challenge mode can be extended based on the fact that a duplicate target role is won at the end of the challenge mode, the challenge mode is not extended, and only the interval indicator display continuation game is extended. may be

(157) The configuration for extending the second challenge mode, which is more disadvantageous than before, may be applied when the attack mode, VB mode, etc. are extended when a duplicate target combination is won in the final stage of the challenge mode. In this case, for example, the attack mode or the like in which the normal pressing order notification is likely to occur is referred to as the first attack mode or the like, and the amount extended by the extension processing is the first attack mode in which the probability of occurrence of the pressing order notification is lower than that in the first attack mode. A configuration of two attack modes may also be used. In place of or in addition to the configuration for lowering the advantage depending on the occurrence probability of the push order notification, the advantage of the target role to be notified when the push order notification occurs is changed (for example, in the first attack mode, the first number In the second attack mode, the pressing order corresponding to the second result resulting in a second number of payouts that is less than the first number is reported, etc.) good.

(158) The advantageous section is configured to be initialized by RAM clear processing (reset processing) by the manager of the game hall, etc., in addition to forced termination in the second section display processing. It is good also as a structure performed. For example, the initialization process may be performed when a predetermined combination (forced termination combination) is won in an advantageous section or when the predetermined combination is won, or the initialization process may be performed at the time of forced termination.

(159) In the configuration in which the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is performed after the start condition after the transition to the advantageous section is established, the start condition is not limited to the above, and at least the first start It is sufficient if the configuration satisfies the following conditions: a situation in which push order notification can occur, and a situation in which an increase in the number of game media can be expected as the second start condition. and the second start condition are satisfied at the same time (in the same game), the start condition may be satisfied.

In addition, when the bonus and attack mode are won at the same time, the start condition may be satisfied when the bonus is won (when attack mode is won) in addition to when the bonus is won, or when the bonus is finished (when attack mode is announced). ), or the start condition may be satisfied when a transition to the attack mode occurs after the bonus is finished.

(160) The display of the number of games in the preliminary section (display based on the number of games before start MG) is not limited to the above. A configuration in which the background color changes (for example, a blue background for 0 to 99, a yellow background for 100 to 199, a red background for 200 and above, etc.) may be used.

(161) In the preliminary section, the description has been made on the premise that the number of owned medals can decrease in each game, but the preliminary section may include a section in which the number of owned medals increases. For example, if you win a bonus during the preliminary section, but you do not win the attack mode (if the situation does not allow the push order notification to occur), the start condition will not be met, but it will be held during the preliminary section. An increase in medals can be expected.

(162) The ball payout rate is changed according to each setting value, and the ball payout rate is the lowest at setting 1 and the highest at setting 6. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long period of time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(163) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(164) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) provided with a ball-inserting and ball-paying function like a pachinko machine instead of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

For example, a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls may be configured to have a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball output rate, etc., and each of the above inventions may be applied to suggest these set values and as a teaching effect. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high-probability state and a low-probability state in which the jackpot probability is high and low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-probability state, In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball rate is high and low, each of the above inventions may be applied with the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 being the high ball entry state.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. In the slot machine, a start lever is operated while medals as game media are betted. Then, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the above, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

<Characteristic AA group>
Features AA1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state (executing the first specific role process by the main controller 101) is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result. function) and
Based on the fact that the game state shifts to the specific game state, the specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start the notification, and based on the end of the specific game state, the specific Specific game state notification means (function to execute section display first process to section display fourth process by main control device 101) that terminates notification by turning off the notification means,
with
The specific game state notification means is
In a predetermined first mode, the first means for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means (for example, in the main control device 101, the processing for starting the display of the section indicator at the time of the first stop OFF operation is executed function) and
In a second mode different from the first mode, second means for starting or ending notification by the specific notification means (for example, processing for starting display of the section indicator at the time of the third stop OFF operation in the main controller 101 function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the result of the lottery, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving body results in winning the first result or winning the second result. A result such as winning a prize is set, and there are cases in which mode notifications regarding these stop operation modes are performed. be.

In this case, when the state shifts to a specific game state in which mode notification is likely to be performed, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the notification by the specific notification means is also terminated. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state. The sense of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who sits on the game table after finishing the game can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game based on the mode notification.

Moreover, in this game machine, the start and end of notification by the specific notification means may be performed in the first mode or in the second mode. In this way, by using the specific notification means for simply starting notification upon transition to the specific game state and ending notification upon termination of the specific game state, the performance effect in the game can be fully expected. is also possible. Also, if the above configuration is used, for example, by winning the transition lottery to the specific game state and starting the notification by the specific notification means, or by playing the specific game state, the notification by the specific notification means was terminated. Information such as the content of the game and the content of the specific game state can be provided to the player who has played the game in the start/end mode of notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure equality among players depending on the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means, and to ensure superiority over the player who has played the game that triggers the notification. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Regarding the "specific game state notification means", "on the basis of the transition of the game state to the specific game state, the specific notification means is turned on to start notification, and the specific game state ends. The notification is terminated by turning off the specific notification means based on the above-mentioned specific notification means. The notification by the specific notification means may be terminated based on the termination of the game state. This is the same for the "specific game state notification means" in the following other features.

Feature AA2. The specific game state notification means, depending on the advantage of the specific game state, when the first means starts or ends the notification by the specific notification means, and the second means starts or terminates the notification by the specific notification means The gaming machine according to feature AA1, characterized in that it is possible to make the case of termination different.

According to the above configuration, the start and end of notification by the specific notification means differ depending on the advantage of the specific game state, depending on whether it is performed in the first mode or in the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the specific notification means when the notification by the specific notification means starts/ends.

Feature AA3. As the specific game state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode, etc.) with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific game state notification means is
When the specific game state is a predetermined first predetermined state, the first means starts or ends the notification by the specific notification means,
When the specific game state is a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state, the feature AA1 or feature AA2 characterized by starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means by the second means The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the advantage of the specific game state differs between the first mode and the second mode depending on the type of the specific game state. Since it is important to shift to what kind of state in the game property by the stop operation mode and mode notification of the first result and the second result, the notification by the specific notification means can be achieved by doing as described above. It is possible to favorably increase interest in initiation. Also, when the notification is terminated, if the notification of the specific notification means is terminated in a mode associated with the information indicating which state it is, the lingering of these states can be seen through the termination mode of the notification of the specific notification means. can be enjoyed.

Feature AA4. As the specific game state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode, etc.) with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific game state notification means is
When the specific game state is the first predetermined state, the first means starts notification by the specific notification means,
The gaming machine according to feature AA3, wherein when the specific game state is the second predetermined state, the second means starts notification by the specific notification means.

According to the above configuration, among the features AA3, the effect at the start of notification can be favorably exhibited.

Feature AA5. The specific game state notification means performs notification during the specific game state in the same manner when the notification is started or ended by the first means and when the notification is started or ended by the second means. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA4, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, since the notification mode is the same during the specific game state, the function of ensuring equality between players can be achieved by the notification of the specific notification means, and the points with different notification modes of the specific notification means can be displayed at the start time. By summarizing at the time and end, it becomes easy to understand the timing at which attention should be paid, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the specific notification means.

Feature AA6. The specific game state notification means starts notification by the specific notification means in either the first mode or the second mode according to the content of the specific game state when starting notification by the specific notification means The gaming machine according to any one of the features AA1 to AA5, further comprising start time setting means (a function of executing the section display first process by the main control device 101) for setting whether or not to display the section display.

According to the above configuration, the content of the specific game state differs depending on whether the notification is started in the first mode or the second mode. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in which aspect it is, and thereby favorably achieve the effect of increasing the degree of attention.

It should be noted that the above "according to the content of the specific game state" is, for example, "a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode) with different advantages for the player as the specific game state. etc.), and depending on whether the specific game state is a first predetermined state or a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state, such as " You may express using the kind of state. Also, it may be associated with the number of continuous games or the like, such as "according to the length of the specific game state".

Feature AA7. The specific game state notification means, according to the advantage of the specific game state when starting the notification by the specific notification means, the notification by the specific notification means in any of the first mode and the second mode The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA6, further comprising start time setting means for setting whether to start (a function of executing the section display first process by the main controller 101).

According to the above configuration, the advantage of the specific game state differs depending on whether the notification is started in the first mode or the second mode. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in which aspect it is, and thereby favorably achieve the effect of increasing the degree of attention.

Further, when this configuration is applied to the above feature AA6, the "start time setting means" of feature AA6 may be replaced with the "start time setting means" of this configuration, and the "start time setting means" of feature AA6 may be replaced with " "first start time setting means", and "start time setting means" in this configuration may be read as "second start time setting means". That is, when the "starting time setting means" overlaps in applying each feature, one "starting time setting means" may be limited by the configuration of the other "starting time setting means", or both " A configuration may also be adopted in which the "initial setting means" coexists. It should be noted that the limitation and duplication of each means also apply to the following features.

Feature AA8. When the notification of the specific notification means is started or terminated by the first means, the notification is started or terminated at a first timing as the first mode, and the specific notification is performed by the second means Features AA1 to AA7 characterized in that when the notification of means is started or ended, the notification is started or ended at a second timing different from the first timing as the second aspect The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

In addition to the difference in timing, the mode of starting/ending the notification of the specific notification means includes the difference in display content (different colors, different images, etc.), and the difference in sound. The notification start/end timing of the specific notification means is different from the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to make other differences (differences in display contents, sound, etc.) the same, and the first means and the second means share performance data at the start/end of the notification of the specific notification means. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects of the above features with a simple configuration.

Feature AA9. The second timing is a timing after the first timing, and when the notification of the specific notification means is started at the second timing, the specific notification means is at the first timing. The gaming machine according to feature AA8, characterized in that the specific game state to be notified by the specific notification means is more likely to be advantageous to the player than when the notification of is started.

According to the above configuration, if the information start timing on the rear side is more advantageous for the player, the later the information start, the more preferable it is, and it is possible to enjoy the thrill of whether or not the information will start for a long time. becomes.

Feature AA10. In a situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result and the lottery for transition to the specified game state is won, the specified result by stopping the specified pattern combination corresponding to the specified result at the valid position. A starting game is a game in which the privilege corresponding to can be granted by the privilege granting means,
The specific game state notification means starts notification by the specific notification means at a timing before at least allowing the operation of the game subsequent to the start game,
The gaming machine according to feature AA9, wherein the first timing and the second timing are included in the starting game.

According to the above configuration, the timing at which the notification by the specific notification means is started is more limited, so that it is less likely that the performance will be delayed in the game, such as whether or not the notification is performed. In addition, by setting the end of the timing at which the notification by the specific notification means is started, points to be noted about whether or not the notification is performed by the specific notification means (whether or not the transfer lottery is won) are aggregated. If the timing on the rear side is more advantageous for the player as in feature AA9, the notification is started at the timing on the front side to give a sense of security. It is possible to realize the playability such as whether the notification is started or whether the excitement is felt without the notification being started until the later timing.

Feature AA11. The first means starts or ends notification by the specific notification means based on operation of a first stop operation means among the plurality of stop operation means,
The second means starts or starts notification by the specific notification means based on operation of a second stop operation means operated later than the first stop operation means among the plurality of stop operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA10, characterized in that the game ends.

According to the above configuration, the notification by the specific notification means is started or ended in accordance with the operation of the plurality of stop operation means. In this way, for example, while hoping that the notification by the specific notification means does not start or end, that is, the specific game state or the specific game state continues, the stop operation means is operated with expectation. It is possible to Therefore, it is possible to increase the fun of operating the stop operation means during the progress of each game.

In addition, if the above configuration is applied to the feature AA6, the following effects can be obtained.

Since the content of the specific game state to be notified by the specific notification means may differ depending on the destination of the stop operation means operated, in a game in which notification by the specific notification means can be started, the degree of expectation is changed step by step. Each stop operation means can be operated. In addition, in terms of game characteristics in which the corresponding orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of each stop operation means, and all the orbiting bodies are stopped, the pattern combination corresponding to the game result is stopped. With the operation of , there is a high possibility that the combination of symbols corresponding to the game result is nearing completion. Then, it is possible to link the completion degree of the pattern combination corresponding to the game result at the timing when the notification of the specific notification means is started and the contents of the specific game state to be notified by the specific notification means. Therefore, with the above configuration, it is possible to perform notification by the specific notification means using the relationship with the pattern stopped on each rotating body, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the notification. .

Moreover, if the above configuration is applied to the feature AA7, the following effects can be obtained.

Since the advantage of the specific game state to be notified by the specific notification means may differ depending on the destination of the stop operation means operated, in the game where notification by the specific notification means can be started, the degree of expectation is changed step by step. Each stop operation means can be operated while In addition, in terms of game characteristics in which the corresponding orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of each stop operation means, and all the orbiting bodies are stopped, the pattern combination corresponding to the game result is stopped. With the operation of , there is a high possibility that the combination of symbols corresponding to the game result is nearing completion. Then, the degree of completion of the pattern combination corresponding to the game result at the timing when the notification of the specific notification means is started and the advantage of the specific game state to be notified by the specific notification means can be linked. Therefore, with the above configuration, it is possible to perform notification by the specific notification means using the relationship with the pattern stopped on each rotating body, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the notification. .

Feature AA12. The stop operating means is displaceable from an initial position to an operating position,
The drive control means performs drive control so as to stop the corresponding revolving body when the stop operation means is operated from the initial position to the operation position,
According to the advantage of the specific game state when the notification by the specific notification means is started, based on the operation of the predetermined stop operation means from the initial position to the operation position as the first mode It is set whether to start notification by the specific notification means or, as the second mode, to start notification by the specific notification means based on the return of the predetermined stop operation means from the operation position to the initial position. The game machine according to any one of the characteristics AA1 to AA11, further comprising start time setting means (a function of executing the section display first process by the main controller 101).

According to the above configuration, when the stop operating means is operated from the initial position to the operating position to stop the rotating body, the notification by the specific reporting means is started, and when the stop operating means is operated to the operating position. There is a case where the notification by the specific notification means is started based on the return to the initial position later (after the revolving body is stopped), and the advantage of the specific game state to be notified by the specific notification means is different. ing. By doing so, it is possible to start notification by the specific notification means in relation to the action of stopping each circulating body and the afterglow after stopping, and the notification by the specific notification means is started. The degree of attention to the matter is more suitably increased.

Feature AA13. Said specific game state notification means, according to the content of said specific game state that was the notification target when the notification by said specific notification means is terminated, in any of said first mode and said second mode It is characterized by comprising end time setting means for setting whether to end the notification by the specific notification means (function for executing processing for ending the advantageous section display in the first section display processing by the main controller 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA12.

According to the above configuration, whether the notification is terminated in the first mode or in the second mode differs depending on the content of the specific game state that has been carried out. By doing so, for example, when the content of the specific game state is not what the player wants (such as when the game ends in a short number of games), the content of the specific game state is It is possible to expect a dramatic effect at the end of the game by, for example, changing the ending mode of notification by the specific notification means depending on whether the game is desired (such as when the game continues over a long number of games). becomes.

Feature AA14. Effect executed during the specific game state, content notification means for executing content notification (additional notification effect) regarding the specific game state during the execution (function of executing the additional notification effect in the display control device 81) with
The content notification by the content notification means is more likely to be more advantageous to the player as the period from the occurrence of the trigger for execution of the notification to the notification is longer,
The specific game state notifying means is arranged so that the content of the specific game state to be notified by the specific notifying means is more advantageous to the player, and the game state is set to the rear side of the first means and the second means. The game machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA13, characterized in that the means for starting or ending the notification facilitates the start or end of the notification by the specific notification means.

According to the above configuration, the later the start and end of the notification by the specific game state notification means, the more advantageous the content of the specific game state that is the target of the notification is for the player. is associated with the relationship of the execution timing of , the notification becomes familiar and easy to understand for the player. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize a game in which the start/end of notification by the specific game state notification means is associated with the content and the player is entertained.

Feature AA15. The specific game state notification means is
Depending on the game situation when the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is won, the first means starts notification by the specific notification means or the second means starts notification by the specific notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA14, characterized in that it is possible to differentiate whether to play.

According to the above configuration, not only is the transition lottery to the specific game state won, but also the start mode of notification by the specific notification means differs depending on what kind of game situation the transition lottery is won. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the notification modes.

Feature AA16. Situation setting means (in the main control unit 101) for setting the game situation to a specific situation under one condition that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result and the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is not won. function to execute specific state processing),
The specific game state notifying means is arranged so that information that can be beneficial to the player is more likely to be suggested from the start mode of notification by the specific notifying means in the specific situation than in a situation that is not the specific situation. The game machine according to feature AA15, wherein it is possible to make a difference between the first means and the second means in which the notification by the specific notification means is started.

According to the above configuration, even if the lottery result is the specific result or the lottery for transition to the specific game state is not won, the game situation can be set to the specific situation. Information that can be beneficial to the player when winning the lottery for transition to the specific game state during the specific situation is suggested by the start mode of notification by the specific game state notification means. In this way, not only whether the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won or not, but also whether or not the specific situation is set becomes the heart of the game, and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is not won. You can try not to get too discouraged.

It should be noted that "information that may be beneficial to the player" may be, for example, "information on set values set by the setting means".

Feature AA17. The first result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order, and
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The game machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA16, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating bodies as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at eye pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circular body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bet Nine medals awarded based on winning the first minor win in the game) are awarded, and each of the stop operation means is a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result win is established by operating with , the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second minor win in a 3-bet game) is given,
The manner notification means provides the predetermined notification, based on the lottery result of the lottery means, as the manner notification, the order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. It can be expressed as "characterized by being executable by means", and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Feature AA18. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA17, wherein the winning probability of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is the same winning probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. .

According to the above configuration, there is no difference in the winning probability due to the set value regarding the specific game state, so even if any one of the gaming machines installed in the game hall is selected, the game regarding the specific game state is equal. Guaranteed. By applying such a configuration to a configuration in which notification is uniformly started at the time of state transition by the specific notification means, it is possible to further enhance the effect of ensuring equality.

Feature AA19. As the specific game state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than the normal game state, a high probability state that is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal game state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA18, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (precursor mode), which is a lottery for transition to a high probability and is before transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both in the stage before the advantage increases due to the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, by adopting a configuration in which notification is started by a specific notification means when shifting to the specific game state, the game is finished without noticing that it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid the phenomenon that In other words, if the transition to the high-frequency state is made, the player can be considered to be able to grasp the state transition by being notified of the state. By setting it as the structure notified by the notification start of an information means, it becomes possible to make it grasp|ascertain more suitably the transition to a specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to expect the production effect and the improvement of interest described in the feature AA1.

Feature AA20. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state (executing the first specific role process by the main controller 101) is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result. function) and
Based on the fact that the game state shifts to the specific game state, the specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start the notification, and based on the end of the specific game state, the specific Specific game state notification means (function to execute section display first process to section display fourth process by main control device 101) that terminates notification by turning off the notification means,
with
The specific game state notification means is
At a predetermined first timing, the first means for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means (for example, the main controller 101 executes a process for starting the display of the section indicator at the time of the first stop OFF operation. function) and
A second means for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means at a second timing different from the first timing (for example, starting the display of the section indicator at the time of the third stop OFF operation in the main controller 101 function to execute processing to
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the result of the lottery, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving body results in winning the first result or winning the second result. A result such as winning a prize is set, and there are cases in which mode notifications regarding these stop operation modes are performed. be.

In this case, when the state shifts to a specific game state in which mode notification is likely to be performed, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the notification by the specific notification means is also terminated. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state. The sense of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who sits on the game table after finishing the game can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game based on the mode notification.

Moreover, in this game machine, the notification by the specific notification means may be started or ended at the first timing or at the second timing. In this way, by using the specific notification means for simply starting notification upon transition to the specific game state and ending notification upon termination of the specific game state, the performance effect in the game can be fully expected. is also possible. Further, if the above configuration is used, a game in which notification by the specific notification means is started by winning the transition lottery to the specific game state, or notification by the specific notification means is ended by playing the specific game state. Information such as the contents of the game and the contents of the specific game state can be provided to the player who has played the game at the start/end timing of the notification of the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure equality among players depending on the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means, and to ensure superiority over the player who has played the game that triggers the notification. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature AA21. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state (executing the first specific role process by the main controller 101) is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result. function) and
Based on the fact that the game state shifts to the specific game state, the specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start the notification, and based on the end of the specific game state, the specific Specific game state notification means (function to execute section display first process to section display fourth process by main control device 101) that terminates notification by turning off the notification means,
with
The specific game state notification means is
A first means for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means by setting the lighting state or the lighting-out state in a predetermined first color (for example, the main controller 101 displays the section indicator in red) function to execute processing to start display) and
A second means for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means by setting the lighting state or the lighting-out state in a second color different from the first color (for example, a green section in the main controller 101 a function that executes processing to start display on the display);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the result of the lottery, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving body results in winning the first result or winning the second result. A result such as winning a prize is set, and there are cases in which mode notifications regarding these stop operation modes are performed. be.

In this case, when the state shifts to a specific game state in which mode notification is likely to be performed, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the notification by the specific notification means is also terminated. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state. The sense of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who sits on the game table after finishing the game can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game based on the mode notification.

Moreover, in this game machine, the start and end of notification by the specific notification means may be performed in the first color or in the second color. In this way, by using the specific notification means for simply starting notification upon transition to the specific game state and ending notification upon termination of the specific game state, the performance effect in the game can be fully expected. is also possible. Further, if the above configuration is used, a game in which notification by the specific notification means is started by winning the transition lottery to the specific game state, or notification by the specific notification means is ended by playing the specific game state. Information such as the content of the game and the content of the specific game state can be provided to the player who has played the game by using different colors at the start/end of the notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure equality among players depending on the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means, and to ensure superiority over the player who has played the game that triggers the notification. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Note that each configuration of the features AA1 to AA19 may be applied individually to the feature AA20 or the feature AA21, or each configuration may be applied in combination.

<Characteristic AB group>
Features AB1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main controller 101). and,
Based on the transition of the game state to the specific game state, the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start the notification during the state, and based on the end of the specific game state Specific game state notification means (function to execute section display first processing to section display fourth processing by main control device 101) that terminates the notification during the state by turning the specific notification device into the extinguished state;
with
The specific game state notification means, in a situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result is placed at the effective position. The start game is the game in which the privilege corresponding to the specified result can be granted by the privilege granting means by stopping the It is intended to start notification during the state by the specific notification means,
At the timing before the start of the notification during the state by the specific game state notification means, a special notification corresponding to the content of the specific game state that is the target of the notification during the state is specified in advance. Special notification means that can be executed by notification means (8th display segment N8, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, auxiliary display unit 65, etc.) (execution of section display first processing and special RT state processing by main controller 101 and a function of executing special RT state notification means by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the result of the lottery, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving body results in winning the first result or winning the second result. A result such as winning a prize is set, and there are cases in which mode notifications regarding these stop operation modes are performed. be.

In this case, when the state shifts to a specific game state in which the mode notification is likely to be performed, the state notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the state notification by the specific notification means is also terminated. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state. The sense of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who sits on the game table after finishing the game can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game based on the mode notification.

On the other hand, if the start of the in-state notification is timed as described above, whether or not the in-state notification will finally start (before the operation of the next game is permitted). There is a risk that the player's attention will be focused only on this, and in this case, the player should judge whether or not the in-state notification is started when the operation of the game following the start game is permitted. Therefore, the attention of the starting game itself may decrease. Therefore, in this game machine, in addition to the notification during the state, during the start game, which is the timing before the start of the notification during the state, and the timing when the transition lottery is won (mainly, the start game start timing ), a special notification corresponding to the content of the specific game state can be executed by a specific notification means. By doing so, attention is paid to whether or not the notification during the state is started by the specific notification means, and the player who is interested in the next game after the start game is notified of the target of the interest in the start game. can be moved to

Features AB2. When the special notification is performed by the special notification means at a first timing and when the special notification is performed at a second timing that is later than the first timing, The gaming machine according to feature AB1, wherein the specific game state for which the in-state notification is started by the specific notification means has different advantages.

According to the above configuration, depending on the timing at which the special notification is performed by the special notification means, the advantage of the specific game state to be notified during the state that is started after that differs. By doing so, interest in the special notification to the special notification means can be enhanced with a simple configuration.

Features AB3. Characteristic AB2, characterized in that the more advantageous the content of the specific game state is for the player, the easier it is for the special notification means to perform the special notification at the second timing rather than at the first timing. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the later the execution timing of the special notification is, the easier it is for the player to enter a specific game state with advantageous contents. It is possible to allow the progress operation of the start game to be performed while expecting that the in-state notification will be started before the operation of the next game is permitted. Therefore, by associating the progress of the game in the start game with the degree of expectation, it is possible to realize a game property in which the degree of expectation varies step by step.

In addition, since it is premised on the time-limited notification that the notification during the state is started before the operation of the game following the start game is permitted, the special notification that is performed before the notification during the state If the later execution timing of is more advantageous, the closer the execution/start timings of the special notification and the in-state notification are, the more advantageous it is for the player. In this way, it is possible to raise awareness of the fact that the notification during the state is started by using the difference between the advantage of the specific game state and the execution timing of the special notification, and the degree of freedom of the notification mode is compared. It is possible to greatly change the impression of the notification, even if the notification is in a low-target state.

Features AB4. As the specific game state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode, etc.) with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The special notification means facilitates the special notification at a first timing when the specific game state that is the target of the notification during the state to be started is a predetermined first predetermined state, When the specific game state that is the target of the state notification to be started is a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state, the second timing different from the first timing is used. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB3, characterized in that it has a configuration that facilitates special notification.

According to the above configuration, if the notification timing at which the special notification is likely to be executed is changed depending on the type of the specific game state, the type of the specific game state to be shifted after that (in-state notification is started) is predicted from the notification timing. , is added to diversify the game.

Features AB5. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB4, wherein the special notification means can execute the special notification based on a predetermined operation of the stop operation means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to associate the operation of each stop operation means and the special notification until the notification during the state is performed, and in the situation that the special notification may be won in the lottery for transition to the specific game state. The stop operation means can be operated with anticipation of what will be done.

In particular, in a game machine that utilizes the result that benefits given may differ depending on the order of stop operation among the stop operation modes, the player tends to pay attention only to the order of operation of each stop operation means. , to stop the symbols by operating the respective stop operation means, the inherent game nature of the slot machine may be neglected. In that respect, as described above, if the special notification is performed based on the operation of the stop operation means, a passive game such as stopping the revolving body by operating the stop operation means according to the instructed order In addition to the ability to operate the stop operation means, it is possible to realize active game characteristics such as generating a special notification, and by increasing the attention to each operation of each stop operation means, each stop operation can be realized. It is possible to rekindle or secure the original game characteristics of the slot machine such as operating the means to stop the pattern.

Features AB6. The stop operating means is displaceable from an initial position to an operating position,
The drive control means performs drive control so as to stop the corresponding revolving body when the stop operation means is operated from the initial position to the operation position,
By the special notification means, when the predetermined stop operation means is operated from the initial position to the operation position, the predetermined stop operation means is moved from the operation position more than when the special notification is performed based on the operation. The gaming machine according to feature AB5, wherein the content of the specific game state is more likely to be advantageous to the player when the special notification is made based on the return to the initial position.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the stop operation means is displaced to the operation position and the corresponding rotating body is stopped, rather than performing a special notification while stopping the rotating body, after the rotating body stops. It is advantageous for the player if the special notification is made in . In other words, when the orbiting body stops and the stop result is seen in combination with the special notification, it is more advantageous than when only the special notification is performed before stopping. ) can strengthen the impression of being advantageous.

Features AB7. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB6, wherein the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification as the specific notification means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to not only consolidate the configuration, but also increase the degree of attention to the special notification by using the high level of interest in the in-state notification, or use the high level of interest in the special notification. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the in-state notification, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to both notifications.

Features AB8. The specific notification means is configured to be switchable between an extinguished state and a lit state,
The specific game state notification means starts the notification during the state by switching the specific notification means from the light-out state to the lighting state, and the state by switching the specific notification means from the lighting state to the light-out state. It is to end the medium notification,
Characteristic AB7, characterized in that the special notification means performs the special notification by using the timing of switching the specific notification means from the light-off state to the light-on state when the in-state notification is started. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification means can be realized by a simple configuration of switching between the extinguished state and the lighting state, and even with the simple configuration, the special notification by the special notification means such as the difference in switching timing to the lighting state It is possible to enhance the performance effect. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both the simplification of the configuration and the improvement of the production effect, which may conflict with each other.

Features AB9. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (first BB) including the specific result, and in a situation where the transition lottery to the specific game state is won, the transition corresponding to the transition result is placed in the valid position pattern combination does not stop and the privilege corresponding to the transition result is not granted by the privilege granting means, the game won as a result of the transition is regarded as a winning game, and the winning as a result of the transition can be reserved. Retaining means (function for executing the processing of step S609 by the main controller 101),
In a situation where the winning of the transfer result is reserved by the reservation means, a privilege corresponding to the transfer result is given by the privilege granting means by stopping the pattern combination for the transfer at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB8, wherein the starting game is a game.

According to the above configuration, by withholding the winning transition result, the number of games in which the special notification can be executed is increased by the reserved amount, and the execution timing of the special notification is diversified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by predicting/grasping the contents of the specific game state to be notified during the state by the special notification.

Regarding the ``transition result'', ``if the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result stops at the effective position, it is advantageous to the player. By limiting the configuration of "shifting to an advantageous state (bonus state)", it is further clarified that it is a so-called jackpot result (bonus) that can be reserved by the reservation means.

Features AB10. Characteristic AB9, wherein the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification in a game between the winning game and the start game in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, since the special notification is performed in the game between the winning game and the start game, the delay of the game while the specific result winning is reserved is suppressed. In other words, by suspending the transition result winning, the game for determining whether the transition result is delayed or not can be realized to maintain the sense of expectation, but the suspended game is long. While the effect of sustaining the sense of anticipation can be expected as much as possible, the longer the reserved game is, the more likely it is that the game will be delayed and the degree of attention may be lowered. In this respect, if the special notification is executed during the reservation as in the above configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to cause the feeling of delay and to maintain the expectation by the reservation.

Features AB11. The special notification means is capable of executing the special notification based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined notification response result in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine of feature AB10, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the lottery result of each pending game. That is, if the special notification is not simply performed as an effect during the reservation, but is configured to perform the special notification based on the lottery result of the lottery means in the reservation, each game in the reservation is waiting for the special notification or the transition result winning prize. It is possible to give meaning to the lottery of each game instead of making it a game of digestion.

Features AB12. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specified result (for example, a single hand of strong watermelon) that does not include the transition result among the specified results, the game in which the lottery result is the first specified result is the above. is considered the starting game,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a second specified result (for example, double combination of strong watermelon + first BB) among the specified results including the transition result, the game in which the transition result wins is established as the starting game. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB9 to AB11, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, whether or not to hold depends on the type of identification result. In this way, there are cases where the execution of the special notification and the start of the notification during the state are suspended, and the case where the execution of the special notification and the start of the notification during the state are not suspended. Modes of starting medium notification are greatly diversified.

Features AB13. The gaming machine according to feature AB12, wherein a common pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position in the game in which the first specified result is won and the game in which the second specified result is won. .

According to the above configuration, it is not possible to judge from the stop result whether the execution of the special notification and the start of the in-state notification are also suspended. As a result, even if the special notification and the in-state notification are not performed when the common pattern combination is stopped, the expectation for the subsequent game can be maintained.

Features AB14. The gaming machine according to feature AB13, wherein the common pattern combination can be stopped even when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specified result and the transfer lottery is not won.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific result is won, the common symbol combination is stopped regardless of whether or not the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, and the stop outcome becomes the same. Therefore, even with the same stop roll, there is a pattern in which the special notification and the in-state notification are performed without being reserved by the retaining means, and a pattern in which the special notification and the in-state notification are performed after being retained by the retaining means, In addition, a pattern is added in which neither the special notification nor the in-state notification is performed in the first place. In this way, not only in the game in which the common picture combination is stopped, but also in the subsequent game, the game can be played while giving the player a sense of anticipation for the special notification and the in-state notification.

Features AB15. The first result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order, and
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The game machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB14, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating bodies as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at eye pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circular body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bet Nine medals awarded based on winning the first minor win in the game) are awarded, and each of the stop operation means is a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result win is established by operating with , the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second minor win in a 3-bet game) is given,
The manner notification means provides the predetermined notification, based on the lottery result of the lottery means, as the manner notification, the order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. It can be expressed as "characterized by being executable by means", and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Features AB16. As the specific game state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than the normal game state, a high probability state that is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal game state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB15, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (premonition mode), which is a lottery for transition to a high probability and is before transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both in the stage before the advantage increases due to the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, by adopting a configuration in which notification is started by a specific notification means when shifting to the specific game state, the game is finished without noticing that it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid the phenomenon that In other words, if the transition to the high-frequency state is made, the player can be considered to be able to grasp the state transition by being notified of the state. By setting it as the structure notified by the notification start of an information means, it becomes possible to make it grasp|ascertain more suitably the transition to a specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to expect the production effect and the improvement of interest described in the feature AB1.

<Characteristic AC group>
Features AC1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main controller 101). and,
Based on the transition of the game state to the specific game state, the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start the notification during the state, and based on the end of the specific game state Specific game state notification means (function to execute section display first processing to section display fourth processing by main control device 101) that terminates the notification during the state by turning the specific notification device into the extinguished state;
with
The specific game state notification means, in a situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result is placed at the effective position. The start game is the game in which the privilege corresponding to the specified result can be granted by the privilege granting means by stopping the It is intended to start notification during the state by the specific notification means,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising limiting means (a function of executing a section display third process by a main controller 101) capable of limiting permission of operation of a game subsequent to the starting game.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the result of the lottery, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving body results in winning the first result or winning the second result. A result such as winning a prize is set, and there are cases in which mode notifications regarding these stop operation modes are performed. be.

In this case, when the state shifts to a specific game state in which the mode notification is likely to be performed, the state notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the state notification by the specific notification means is also terminated. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state. The sense of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who sits on the game table after finishing the game can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game based on the mode notification.

On the other hand, if the above is done, the timing at which the notification during the state can be started is shortened, resulting in a monotonous start effect in which the effect at the start cannot be expected, or the timing is shortened. There is also concern that the fact itself may be overlooked. In this regard, since this gaming machine is provided with a restricting means capable of restricting the permission of the operation of the game subsequent to the starting game, the permission of the operation of the game following the start game is restricted. It is possible to make the user aware that the notification will be performed, and by restricting the permission of the next game operation in this way, the period during which the notification can be started during the state is extended. Diversification of the mode of starting the middle notification is achieved.

Features AC2. Equipped with progress processing execution means (function for executing normal processing by main control device 101) for performing game progress processing,
Characteristic AC1 characterized in that execution of a specific process (a function of executing a payout control process by the main controller 101) among the progress processes in the start game is restricted by the restriction by the restriction means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the progress of the start game is restricted by restricting the execution of the specific process among the progress processes of the start game, thereby restricting the operation of the game following the start game. can be done. In this way, while ensuring the independence of each game, it is possible to reflect the event of transition to the specific game state that occurred in the start game to the game following the start game.

Feature AC3. The gaming machine according to feature AC1 or feature AC2, wherein operations in the start game are also restricted during the restriction period in which the restriction is performed by the restriction means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to restrict the progress of the starting game by restricting the operation of the starting game, thereby restricting the permission of the operation of the game following the starting game. . In this way, while ensuring the independence of each game, it is possible to reflect the event of transition to the specific game state that occurred in the start game to the game following the start game.

Features AC4. The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC3, wherein the specific game state notification means can start the in-state notification during the restriction period by the restriction means.

According to the above configuration, by restricting the operation, it is possible to make the user aware that the in-state notification will be started, and to confirm the start of the in-state notification in a favorable manner.

Features AC5. Restriction period setting means for setting the length of the restriction period for which the restriction is performed by the restriction means (function for executing freeze setting processing in the third section display process by the main controller 101),
The restriction period setting means is configured so that the period from when the restriction by the restriction means is started to when the notification during the state is started corresponds to the content of the specific game state to be notified of the notification during the state. The gaming machine according to feature AC4, wherein the length of the restriction period can be set.

According to the above configuration, since the period from when the operation of the game following the starting game is permitted to when the in-state notification is started is associated with the content of the specific game state, it is restricted. The length of the period from can be given a strong interest, and by increasing the attention to the length of the period, it is possible to preferably increase the attention to the start of the in-state notification.

Features AC6. The gaming machine according to feature AC5, wherein control corresponding to a predetermined operation performed by the player is restricted by the restriction performed by the restriction means.

According to the above configuration, by restricting the control corresponding to the operation performed by the player, compared to the configuration in which the unilateral progress of the processing on the gaming machine side is restricted, the player can perform the operation. As a result, it becomes difficult to understand when the restriction starts. Therefore, in a configuration in which the length of the limited period is important, as in the feature AC5, the length is difficult to clearly grasp, and if the start timing (length of the period) of the notification during the state is Even if it is unfavorable for the player, it is possible to maintain the sense of anticipation until the transition to the specific game state.

Features AC7. Restriction period setting means for setting the length of the restriction period during which the restriction is performed by the restriction means (function for executing freeze setting processing in the section display third process by the main controller 101),
The restriction period setting means is configured such that the period from the start of the state notification to the end of the restriction by the restriction means is the content of the specific game state corresponding to the state notification by the specific game state notification means. A gaming machine according to any one of features AC4 to AC6, wherein the length of the restricted period can be set correspondingly.

According to the above configuration, since the period from when the in-state notification is started until the operation of the next game is permitted corresponds to the content of the specific game state, as a player, the in-state notification is started first. Focusing on this, when the in-state notification is started, attention is paid to the timing at which the operation is permitted, and it is possible to perform chronological or step-by-step effects.

Features AC8. The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC7, wherein the specific game state notification means can start the in-state notification during a period different from the restriction period by the restriction means.

According to the above configuration, the period in which the operation is restricted in the first place is considered to be a period in which the degree of attention is enhanced in terms of performance, and if it is configured so that the in-state notification can be started even outside that period, It is possible to evenly improve the degree of attention.

Features AC9. Restriction period setting means for setting the length of the restriction period during which the restriction is performed by the restriction means (function for executing freeze setting processing in the section display third process by the main controller 101),
The restriction period setting means can set the length of the restriction period according to the advantage of the specific game state corresponding to the in-state notification by the specific game state notification means. Features AC1 to The gaming machine according to any one of AC8.

According to the above configuration, the period in which the operation of the next game can be restricted and the notification during the state can be started is secured, and the length of the secured period (restricted period) is the length of the specific game state. It will correspond to the advantage. By doing so, it is possible to further increase the feeling of excitement depending on the length of the period during which the feeling of excitement increases, such as whether or not the in-state notification is started. For example, if the specific game state is more advantageous as the period during which the notification during the state can be started is longer, not only the pleasure of whether or not the notification during the state is started, but also that the period continues for a long time even if it is not started. In addition, the synergistic effect of increasing the degree of attention can be expected such that the longer the period in which the in-state notification is not started, the more people expect that the in-state notification will be started. Also, if the shorter the period during which the state notification can be started, the more advantageous the specific game state is, the period of enjoying whether the state notification is started is condensed, and it is possible to provide a strong feeling of excitement. Become.

Features AC10. The restricted period setting means is characterized in that the more advantageous the contents of the specific game state corresponding to the in-state notification by the specific game state notification means, the easier it is to set the longer the limited period. game machine.

In general, on the premise that the longer the performance time is, the more advantageous it is for the player, the longer the restriction period, the more advantageous the content of the specific game state is for the player. Such a configuration is easy for the player to understand, and the effect can be well balanced with other effects.

Features AC11. The first result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order, and
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The game machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC10, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating bodies as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at eye pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circular body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bet Nine medals awarded based on winning the first small win in the game) are awarded, and each of the stop operation means is a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result win is established by operating with , the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second minor win in a 3-bet game) is given,
The manner notification means provides the predetermined notification, based on the lottery results of the lottery means, as the manner notification, the order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. It can be expressed as "characterized by being executable by means", and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Feature AC12. As the specific game state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than the normal game state, a high probability state that is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal game state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC11, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (premonition mode), which is a lottery for transition to a high probability and is before transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both in the stage before the advantage increases due to the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, by adopting a configuration in which notification is started by a specific notification means when shifting to the specific game state, the game is finished without noticing that it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid the phenomenon that In other words, if the transition to the high-frequency state is made, the player can be considered to be able to grasp the state transition by being notified of the state. By setting it as the structure notified by the notification start of an information means, it becomes possible to make it grasp|ascertain more suitably the transition to a specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to expect the production effect and the improvement of interest described in the feature AC1.

<Characteristic AD group>
Features AD1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main controller 101). and,
Based on the transition of the game state to the specific game state, the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start the notification during the state, and based on the end of the specific game state Specific game state notification means (function to execute section display first processing to section display fourth processing by main control device 101) that terminates the notification during the state by turning the specific notification device into an extinguished state;
with
The specific game state notification means is
In a situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result stops at the valid position, thereby the specific result. A game in which a privilege corresponding to the above can be granted by the privilege granting means is set as the starting game, and at least before the operation of the game following the starting game is permitted, the specific reporting means notifies the player of the state. is to start
When the first specific pattern combination stops at the effective position in the start game, a first means for starting the notification during the state by the specific notification means in a first mode (for example, when the super attack mode is won, the main control a function of executing processing for starting the display of the section indicator at the time of the first stop OFF operation of the game with the stop number corresponding to the strong cherry in the device 101;
When a second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination stops at the effective position in the start game, the in-state notification by the specific notification means is changed to a second mode different from the first mode. (For example, when the super attack mode is won, the main control unit 101 executes the process of starting the display of the section indicator at the time of the third stop OFF operation of the game with the stop number corresponding to the weak cherry )and,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the result of the lottery, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving body results in winning the first result or winning the second result. A result such as winning a prize is set, and there are cases in which state notifications regarding these stop operation modes are performed, and game characteristics are created in which the presence or absence of winning is changed depending on the presence or absence of the state notification, and the degree of advantage is varied. be.

In this case, when the state shifts to a specific game state in which the mode notification is likely to be performed, the state notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the state notification by the specific notification means is also terminated. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state. The sense of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who sits on the game table after finishing the game can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game based on the mode notification.

On the other hand, if the start of the in-state notification is restricted as described above, there is a possibility that the start mode of the in-state notification will be simplified. On the other hand, there is a limit to diversification of the mode of starting in-state notification. In this regard, in this gaming machine, the starting mode of the in-state notification is made different depending on the stop result in the start game, that is, the type of the specific result and the winning mode when the specific result is won. Thus, it becomes possible to start the notification during the state in relation to the stop result of each circulating body, and the performance effect by the notification during the state can be greatly enhanced without changing the configuration of the specific notification means.

Features AD2. The specified result includes a first specified result (eg, strong cherry) and a second specified result (eg, weak cherry),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specified result, a privilege corresponding to the first specified result is given by stopping the first specified pattern combination (triple cherry) at the valid position,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specified result, a privilege corresponding to the second specified result is given by stopping the second specified pattern combination (single cherry) at the valid position. The gaming machine according to feature AD1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, since the stop number differs depending on the type of the specified result, in the gaming machine with the feature AD1, the start state of the in-state notification differs depending on the type of the specified result. By doing so, it is possible to add the pleasure of predicting the subsequent development while grasping what triggered the lottery for transition to the specific game state, thereby improving the interest.

Features AD3. The specified result includes a third specified result (for example, strong cherry),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third specified result, the privilege corresponding to the third specified result is given by stopping the first specified pattern combination at the valid position, and the valid position The gaming machine according to feature AD1 or feature AD2, wherein a privilege corresponding to the third specified result is given when the second specified pattern combination stops at .

According to the above configuration, even if the third specified result is the same, the case where the first specified pattern combination is stopped and the winning is established, and the case where the second specified pattern combination is stopped and the winning is established. , the mode of starting the in-state notification is different. In this way, the interest in the stopping roll can be particularly enhanced.

Features AD4. The specified result includes a fourth specified result (for example, strong watermelon),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fourth specified result, the privilege corresponding to the fourth specified result is given by stopping the first specified pattern combination at the valid position, and the valid position The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD3, wherein a privilege corresponding to the fourth specified result is not given because the second specified pattern combination is stopped at the time.

According to the above configuration, in the case of the fourth specified result, the first specified pattern combination is stopped and the prize is established, and the second specified pattern combination is stopped and the winning is not established, resulting in a so-called dropout. Depending on the situation, the manner in which the in-state notification is started differs. In this way, the interest in the stopping roll can be particularly enhanced.

Features AD5. The first means stops at a specific number (second for strong cherries and weak cherries) among the above-mentioned circulators before stopping the specific circulators (for example, when winning the super attack mode with strong cherries, the first During the stop OFF operation), it is possible to start the notification during the state according to the first mode,
The second means is capable of starting the in-state notification according to the second aspect after the specific orbiting body stops (for example, when the super attack mode is won with a weak cherry, the third stop OFF operation is performed). The game machine according to any one of the characterizing features AD2 to AD4.

According to the above configuration, the game result that triggers the in-state notification differs depending on whether the in-state notification is started before or after the predetermined rotating body stops. That is, in a game in which each stop operation means is operated to stop the revolving body, when the in-state notification is started based on the first specific result, the in-state notification is started before the specific number of operations. 2 When the in-state notification is started based on the specified result, the in-state notification is started after the specified operation. By doing so, for example, if it is not possible to determine whether the result of the current game is the first specific result winning or the second specific result winning before the specific operation, Even if the in-state notification is not started at that time, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of hope that the lottery for transition to the specific game state has been won. Also, if it can be determined that the result of the current game is the winning of the first specific result, the game will proceed while hoping that the in-state notification will start before the specific operation. In addition, if it is determined that the result of this game is the winning of the second specific result, the game proceeds while hoping that the in-state notification will be started at the transition of the specific operation. It is thought that Furthermore, even in a situation where it can be determined that the winning of the third specific result or the winning of the fourth specific result can be determined, whether the in-state notification is started before the specific operation or after that. The game progresses while predicting the start timing of the in-state notification from the relationship (commonality, difference) between the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination. In any case, it is possible to consolidate the period of interest as to whether or not the in-state notification is started, and to add the inflection of the game.

Features AD6. The first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination may have a common symbol that stops at the effective position up to the specific number (for example, the left reel of strong cherries and weak cherries). The gaming machine according to feature AD5.

According to the above configuration, whether the first specific result or the second specific result is won cannot be determined from the stop roll up to the specific number, and in the fourth specific result, there is no omission of up to the specific number. Therefore, even if the in-state notification is not started by the time the specific orbiting body is stopped, the lottery for transition to the specific game state will be won when the orbiting body after the specific number is stopped. You can play games while connecting your wishes.

Features AD7. The gaming machine according to feature AD5 or feature AD6, wherein the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination have different patterns that stop at the effective position on the specific revolving body.

According to the above configuration, by stopping the specific revolving body, it is possible to determine whether the winning of the first specific result or the second specific result is possible, the winning mode of the third specific result can be determined, and the fourth specific result can be determined. It is possible to determine whether or not the player has won a prize. Therefore, in particular, in a situation where the notification during the state has not been started before that, stopping the specific orbiting body is, for example, the transition to the specific game state triggered by the first specific result or the fourth specific result winning. It becomes a turning point as to whether the possibility of winning the lottery disappears. Therefore, the stopping operation of the specific rotating body becomes more interesting, and the interest is enhanced.

Feature AD8. The specified result includes a first specified result (eg, strong cherry) and a second specified result (eg, weak cherry),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specified result, a privilege corresponding to the first specified result is given by stopping the first specified pattern combination (triple cherry) at the valid position,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specified result, a privilege corresponding to the second specified result is given by stopping the second specified pattern combination (single cherry) at the valid position,
In the transition lottery by the transition lottery means, when the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, the transition lottery to the specific game state is won with the first probability, and the lottery result of the lottery means is the first. The gaming machine according to any one of the features AD1 to AD7, characterized in that, in the case of a 2-specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state is won with a second probability.

According to the above configuration, since the winning probability of the transition lottery differs depending on the type of the specific result, the stop winning number is stopped as a result of easy winning of the transition lottery, and the stop winning is a result of being difficult to win the transition lottery. The possibility of in-state notification being started in the start game is different between when the number is stopped. In this way, whether the in-state notification is started in the first mode or the case in which the in-state notification is started in the second mode is determined from the stop result including the ease of starting. It is possible to increase the interest in the stop roll.

Features AD9. The specified result includes a first specified result (eg, strong cherry) and a second specified result (eg, weak cherry),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specified result, a privilege corresponding to the first specified result is given by stopping the first specified pattern combination (triple cherry) at the valid position,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specified result, a benefit corresponding to the second specified result is given by stopping the second specified pattern combination (single cherry) at the valid position,
The content of the specific game state may be different between the transition lottery by the transition lottery means based on the first identification result and the transition lottery by the transition lottery means based on the second identification result. The gaming machine according to any one of AD8.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific pattern combination is stopped and the state notification is started in the first mode, and when the second specific pattern combination is stopped and the state notification is started in the second mode The contents of the specific game state when started are different from when it is started. Therefore, when the first specified combination of symbols stops and when the second specified combination of symbols stops, the player will feel different pleasures, and it is possible to increase interest in the winning number.

Features AD10. The identification results include a payout result in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and a replay result in which the next game can be played again without requiring new game media,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result, the predetermined number of game media are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the first specified result by stopping the first specified pattern combination at the valid position. we,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the replay result, the replay becomes possible as a privilege corresponding to the replay result by stopping the second specific pattern combination at the valid position,
In the first means, when the specified result is the payout result, as the first aspect, the state informing is performed before accepting an accepting operation (betting operation) of accepting a game medium in a game subsequent to the starting game. and start
When the specified result is the replay result, the second means, as the second mode, starts the in-state notification before permitting the start operation of the start operation means in the game subsequent to the start game. The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD9, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first specific pattern combination is stopped if the result is a payout, and the second specific pattern combination is stopped if the result is a replay, the notification during the state is started depending on which pattern combination is stopped. The end of timing is different. More specifically, in the case of transitioning to the specific game state based on the payout result, the first specific pattern combination is stopped in the start game, and the in-state notification is made before the accepting operation of the game medium in the next game is permitted. When it is started and shifts to a specific game state based on the replay result, the second specific pattern combination is stopped in the start game, and the state medium notification is made before the start operation of the start operation means for the next game is permitted. is started. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the variations of the end period until the in-state notification is started. Moreover, by associating the final variation with the stop roll, when the manager of the gaming hall or the like tries to confirm which result caused the notification during the state to be started, for example, the first specific pattern combination is stopped. In the case where the state notification is started after the reception operation, etc., it is determined that the current game is the start game instead of the previous game, such as the start timing of the state notification and the start game can be confirmed from the stop result.

Features AD11. The starting operation means is configured to allow the starting operation by performing the reception operation on a predetermined reception means (for example, the first credit input switch 56),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the replay result and the second specific pattern combination stops at the valid position, the position is visible through the display section and is different from the valid position. Each of the circular body patterns is attached so that the first specific pattern combination stops at a specific position,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the replay result, means for enabling the replay by performing the reception operation on the reception means in the next game (at the time of operation in the main controller 101) A gaming machine according to feature AD10, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing for setting a bet flag.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific pattern combination stops at the valid position and wins as a result of the replay, the first specific pattern combination stops at a specific position different from the valid position. Therefore, visually, it is difficult to determine whether the replay result win is established or the payout result win is established. Moreover, in the next game in which a replay win has been established, it is possible to replay the next game by performing a reception operation on a predetermined reception means, so that it is possible to determine whether or not new game media are required. Although there are differences, the operation performed by the player in the next game is the same for the payout result and the replay result. By doing so, in the configuration where the end of the start timing of the state notification is different between the payout result and the replay result, the player can tell which result the state notification is started or started. can be made difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to make the driver feel more excited about when the in-state notification will start.

Feature AD12. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result winning, a first stopping means for stopping the first specific pattern combination (for example, when a double combination of strong watermelon and bonus is won, the main controller 101 and a second stopping means for stopping the second specific pattern combination (for example, when a double combination of a strong watermelon and a bonus is won, the main control unit The gaming machine according to any one of the features AD1 to AD11, further comprising: a function of stopping the stop roll resulting in a watermelon winning prize in 101).

According to the above configuration, there are cases where the first specified pattern combination is stopped and cases where the second specified pattern combination is stopped even if the specified result is the same. Therefore, even with the same specific result, there are cases where state notification is started in the first mode and state state notification is started in the second mode, and even if the lottery result is the same In addition, it is possible to expect an effect of improving the degree of attention by different stop numbers and different notification modes within a range that does not cause complication of the lottery results.

Note that the above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature AD5.

Feature AD13. The first result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order, and
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The game machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD12, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating bodies as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at eye pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circular body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets 9 medals awarded based on winning the first minor win in the game) are awarded, and each of the stop operation means is a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result win is established by operating with , the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second minor win in a 3-bet game) is given,
The manner notification means provides the predetermined notification, based on the lottery result of the lottery means, as the manner notification, the order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. It can be expressed as "characterized by being executable by means", and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Feature AD14. As the specific game state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than the normal game state, a high probability state that is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal game state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of the features AD1 to AD13, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (premonition mode), which is a lottery for transition to a high probability and is before transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both in the stage before the advantage increases due to the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, by adopting a configuration in which notification is started by a specific notification means when shifting to the specific game state, the game is finished without noticing that it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid the phenomenon that In other words, if the transition to the high-frequency state is made, the player can be considered to be able to grasp the state transition by being notified of the state. By setting it as the structure notified by the notification start of an information means, it becomes possible to make it grasp|ascertain more suitably the transition to a specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to expect the production effect and the improvement of interest described in the feature AD1.

<Characteristic AE group>
Features AE1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
A lottery that is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and has the same winning probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, and the specific game state. transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery (function for executing the first special combination process by the main controller 101);
At least by a predetermined specific timing in a specific game in which the game state shifts to the specific game state, a specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start a state notification, and the specific game state Specific game state notification means (section display first processing to section display fourth processing by main controller 101 for ending notification during state by turning off the specific notification means based on the end of the game state function) and
with
The specific game state notification means is
When the first specified result (for example, strong watermelon) of the specified results is used as a trigger to win the lottery for transition to the specified gaming state, the specified timing is the first specified timing (timing to allow betting operation). starting the notification during the state;
When winning the transition lottery to the specific gaming state triggered by a second specific result (for example, winning replay) different from the first specific result of the specific results, the specific timing is from the first specific timing The game machine is characterized in that the in-state notification is started by a later second specific timing.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the result of the lottery, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving body results in winning the first result or winning the second result. A result such as winning a prize is set, and there are cases in which state notifications regarding these stop operation modes are performed, and game characteristics are created in which the presence or absence of winning is changed depending on the presence or absence of the state notification, and the degree of advantage is varied. be.

In this case, when the state shifts to a specific game state in which the mode notification is likely to be performed, the state notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the state notification by the specific notification means is also terminated. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state. The sense of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who sits on the game table after finishing the game can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game based on the mode notification.

Here, in the state notification, the notification is started at least by the specific timing in the specific game state that shifts to the specific game state, and the end of the notification start is set. There is a possibility that the expectation for the game will fade at once, and the degree of attention will decrease in the game that can be in a specific game state. In that respect, in the above configuration, by making the end of the notification during the state differ depending on the game result that triggered the winning of the transition lottery to the specific game state, even if one of the ends is exceeded, the end of the state It is possible to continue the game while leaving the sense of expectation for the notification. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature AE2. The lottery result by the lottery means includes a payout result in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out and a replay result in which the next game can be played again without requiring new game media,
The first specified result is the payout result,
The gaming machine according to feature AE1, wherein the second specified result is the replay result.

According to the above configuration, the start and end of the in-state notification by the specific game state notification means differ depending on whether the result is a payout result or a replay result. In this way, by using the conventional payout result and replay result to change the start and end period of the in-state notification, there is no need to set a special game result, and with a relatively simple configuration, It is possible to obtain the effect of the feature AE1.

Feature AE3. The specific game state notification means is
when the specified result is the payout result, starting the in-state notification with the timing at which the receiving operation (betting operation) of accepting a game medium in the specified game is permitted as the first specified timing;
Characteristic AE2, characterized in that, when the specified result is the replay result, the in-state notification is started with the timing at which the start operation of the start operation means is permitted in the specified game as the second specified timing. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the timing at which the player's operation is permitted is set as the end of each period, and if it is a payout result, it is the timing that permits the reception operation, and if it is a replay result, the start operation is permitted. It's timing. In this way, by setting the timing at which the player's operation is allowed to be the final period, it is possible to actively progress the game without waiting until the notification is started. Further, in general, the replay result is allowed to start operation without requiring an acceptance operation, but the final period is set together with the operation mode according to each game result, which leads to complication of the configuration. It is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects without using

Feature AE4. The starting operation means is configured to allow the starting operation by performing the reception operation on a predetermined reception means (for example, the first credit input switch 56),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specified result and the first specified pattern combination corresponding to the first specified result stops at the valid position, the privilege granting means provides the predetermined privilege is configured to pay out a number of game media,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the replay result and a second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination stops at the valid position, the position is visible through the display unit. and the pattern of each of the circular bodies is attached so that the first specific pattern combination stops at a specific position different from the effective position,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the replay result, means for enabling the replay by performing the reception operation on the reception means in the specific game (operating time bet in main controller 101) A gaming machine according to feature AE3, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing for setting a flag.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific pattern combination stops at the valid position and wins as a result of the replay, the first specific pattern combination stops at a specific position different from the valid position. Therefore, visually, it is difficult to determine whether the replay result win is established or the payout result win is established. Moreover, in the next game in which a replay win has been established, it is possible to replay the next game by performing a reception operation on a predetermined reception means, so that it is possible to determine whether or not new game media are required. Although there are differences, the operation performed by the player in the next game is the same for the payout result and the replay result. By doing so, in the configuration where the end of the start timing of the state notification is different between the payout result and the replay result, the player can tell which result the state notification is started or started. can be made difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to make the driver feel more excited about when the in-state notification will start.

Feature AE5. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is changed to an advantage for the player based on the fact that the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. transition means for transitioning to a state (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, the first reservation means (main controller 101 of step S609 by the main controller 101) withholds the transition result winning until the pattern combination for transition stops at the effective position. function to perform processing) and
with
The specified result includes a third specified result of the replay result and the transition result,
The specific game state notification means, when shifting to the specific game state based on the overlapping result, a second reservation that reserves the start of the notification during the state until the pattern combination for transition stops at the effective position. The game machine according to any one of features AE2 to AE4, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing the first section display process and the fourth section display process by the main controller 101).

According to the above configuration, the lottery result includes the transition result (so-called jackpot result) that triggers the transition to an advantageous state, and also includes the overlapping result of the replay result and the transition result. Then, in the case of overlapping results, the transition result winning is reserved until the transition result winning of the replay result and the transition result is established. In such a configuration, when shifting to the specific game state based on the overlapping result, the specific game, which is the game that shifts to the specific game state, is reserved until the game in which winning is established as a result of the transition. By doing so, it is possible to strengthen the impression of winning the transition lottery to the specific game based on the transition result winning among the overlapping results, and it is consistent with the transition result winning being reserved. You can guarantee the sex.

Feature AE6. The specific game state notification means, when winning a lottery for transition to the specific game state triggered by the third specific result of the specific result, notifies the state by the first specific timing as the specific timing. The gaming machine according to feature AE5, characterized by starting.

According to the above configuration, when the specific game itself is also reserved as a result of the reservation of winning as a transition result, the start and end period of the in-state notification in the specific game coincides with that of the payout result. In this way, in the configuration (characteristic AE2) in which the start and end periods of the in-state notification are different between the payout result and the replay result, by determining the start and end period of the third specific result in which the replay result and the transition result are duplicated. Even if the replay is not given based on the transition result winning, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies between different game operations and start and end periods according to the game results.

Feature AE7. The first result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order, and
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The game machine according to any one of features AE1 to AE6, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating bodies as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at eye pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circular body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bet Nine medals awarded based on winning the first minor win in the game) are awarded, and each of the stop operation means is a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result win is established by operating with , the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second minor win in a 3-bet game) is given,
The manner notification means provides the predetermined notification, based on the lottery result of the lottery means, as the manner notification, the order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. It can be expressed as "characterized by being executable by means", and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Feature AE8. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
The gaming machine according to any one of features AE1 to AE7, wherein the winning probability of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is the same winning probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. .

According to the above configuration, there is no difference in the winning probability due to the set value regarding the specific game state, so even if any one of the gaming machines installed in the game hall is selected, the game regarding the specific game state is equal. Guaranteed. By applying such a configuration to a configuration in which notification is uniformly started at the time of state transition by the specific notification means, it is possible to further enhance the effect of ensuring equality.

Feature AE9. As the specific game state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than the normal game state, a high probability state that is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal game state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features AE1 to AE8, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (premonition mode), which is a lottery for transition to a high probability and is before transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both in the stage before the advantage increases due to the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, by adopting a configuration in which notification is started by a specific notification means when shifting to the specific game state, the game is finished without noticing that it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid the phenomenon that In other words, if the transition to the high-frequency state is made, the player can be considered to be able to grasp the state transition by being notified of the state. By setting it as the structure notified by the notification start of an information means, it becomes possible to make it grasp|ascertain more suitably the transition to a specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to expect the production effect and the improvement of interest described in the feature AE1.

<Characteristic BA group>
Features BA1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main controller 101). and,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is changed to an advantage for the player based on the fact that the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. transition means for transitioning to a state (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, the reservation means (main controller 101 performs step S609 processing of step S609 by the main controller 101) withholds the transition result winning until the pattern combination for transition stops at the effective position. function) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reserve means (main control means) for limiting execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means. a function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101);
In a situation where the game state is the specific game state and the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined special result (for example, special replays 1 and 2). , the first control means (in the main control unit 101, for example, the stop output of the black BAR double set) for executing the stop control of each of the loops so that the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position. A function to control so that replay winning is established with eyes),
In a situation where the game state is the normal game state and the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result (for example, special replay), the valid A second control means (in the main controller 101, for example, a black BAR non- A function to control so that replay winning is established at the stop roll that will be stopped),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege granting means if the rolled number corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the state shifts to an advantageous state for the player, and if the pattern combination for transition does not stop, winning is reserved as a result of the transition. In such a configuration, furthermore, there is provided a specific game state in which the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the rotating body, and the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of state notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game, and the game performance is greatly improved. improves.

On the other hand, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, if it is configured to perform a lottery for transition to the specific game state, a stop operation is performed so as not to stop the pattern combination for transition, There is a possibility that a move to an advantageous state will not occur easily, and an act of infinitely generating a lottery to move to a specific game state will be performed. As a result, the difference in the degree of advantage between a player who can perform a stop operation that does not stop the transition pattern combination and a player who cannot perform such a stop operation becomes significant, and from the viewpoint of game fairness. It is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate due to the design, so it is also undesirable from such a point of view. Therefore, in the state in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, the execution of the transition lottery to the specific game state is restricted, so that the intended payout rate can be achieved and the fairness of the game. can be guaranteed.

In addition, by making it possible to reserve the transition result winning, in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state is internally confirmed, if the game is played while suggesting it by production etc., it is possible to prevent the transition to the advantageous state There are also benefits such as maintaining a sense of anticipation. However, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the lottery for transition to the specific game state is not performed, so although the expectation for the advantageous state can be improved, from the viewpoint of the expectation for the specific game state Then, it can be said that the situation in which the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means is not preferable for the player.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, depending on whether or not the transition lottery to the specific game state is won, the stop number at the time of special result winning is changed. there is Specifically, if it is in the specific game state and the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the stop roll at the time of the special result winning is set to the first specific pattern combination, and the normal game state is reached, In addition, if the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the stop roll at the time of the special result winning is set to the second specific symbol combination. By doing so, even in a situation in which the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is restricted, if the first specific combination of symbols appears, the game state can be transferred to the specific game state. It is possible to grasp that the player has won the transition lottery, and to play the game while maintaining the expectation for the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature BA2. special means (e.g., , a function of executing notification lottery processing 1 in the display control device 81, and a lottery table for special RT states with different special replay winning probabilities).

According to the above configuration, in the specific game state, since the frequency at which the first specific pattern combination is stopped can be changed by the special means, for example, the special result wins and the first specific pattern combination does not stop. However, the specific game state is not completely denied, and the expectation for the specific game state can be continued. In other words, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, a game is added to predict whether or not the game is in the specific game state from the frequency of stopping the first specific combination of symbols. It is possible to favorably improve interest.

In addition, as a specific configuration of the above configuration, for example, "when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the first control means executes specific control that allows the first specific pattern combination to be stopped. Means for determining whether or not (function for executing notification lottery processing 1 in display control device 81), or means for changing the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result (special replay winning probability is at least one of the lottery tables for different special RT states".

Feature BA3. The gaming machine according to feature BA2, wherein the special means is capable of varying the frequency at which the first specific pattern combination stops according to the content of the specific game state.

According to the above configuration, a game is added such as predicting the content of the specific game state based on the stop frequency of the first specific pattern combination in a situation where the winning transition result is reserved by the reservation means. In this way, not only whether or not the game is in the specific game state, but also the content of the state can be predicted from the stop result.

Feature BA4. As the first specified picture combination, a first specified picture combination (for example, black BAR single set) and a second specified picture combination different from the first specified picture combination (for example, black BAR out of ten ) and
The special means is characterized in that it is possible to change the stopping frequency of the first type specific picture combination and the second type specific picture combination according to the content of the specific game state. A gaming machine described in BA3.

According to the above configuration, the contents of the specific game state differ depending on whether the first specific picture combination out of the first specific picture combination or the second specific picture combination is stopped. , it is possible to increase interest in the stop roll.

Feature BA5. As the specific game state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode, etc.) with different degrees of advantage for the player,
When the specific game state is the first predetermined state, the special means performs the special notification so that the first type specific pattern combination is easily stopped, and the specific game state is the first predetermined state. The gaming machine according to feature BA4, characterized in that, when the second predetermined state is different, the second type specific pattern combination is easily stopped.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to achieve the effect of feature BA4 by a specific configuration.

Feature BA6. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special means changes the execution frequency of the special notification (black BAR pressing notification effect) that allows the first specific pattern combination to be stopped, The gaming machine according to any one of features BA2 to BA5, wherein the stop frequency of the first specific symbol combination is changed.

According to the above configuration, since the stop frequency of the first specific pattern combination is adjusted depending on the presence or absence of the notification, the configuration is such that the pre-transition mode is suggested, taught, etc., as effects. can be realized with a relatively easy configuration.

Feature BA7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the first control means can stop the first specific pattern combination by stopping each of the orbiting bodies in the first specific stop order. When the looping bodies are stopped in a second specific stop order different from the first specific stop order, the second control means performs control to enable the second specific pattern combination to be stopped. we,
The gaming machine according to feature BA6, wherein the special means performs notification regarding the first specific stop order as the special notification.

According to the above configuration, depending on the stop order at the time of winning the special result, it is configured differently whether the first specific pattern combination is stopped or the second specific pattern combination is stopped. , By notifying about the first specific stop order corresponding to the first specific pattern combination, the stop frequency of the first specific pattern combination is changed, so that the stop operation mode including the stop order Affinity with the specific game state in which the degree of advantage changes based on the information increases, and the player can easily understand that the execution of the special notification is an indication of the specific game state (pre-transition mode).

Feature BA8. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the specific circular body in each circular body is operated to stop at a first timing, the specific patterns forming the first specific pattern combination are stopped at the effective position. When the specific pattern is stopped at a second timing different from the first timing, the specific pattern cannot be stopped at the effective position,
The gaming machine according to feature BA6 or feature BA7, wherein the special means can notify that the specific rotating body is to be stopped at the first timing as the special notification.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to stop the first specific pattern combination by pressing the specific revolving body. It is a configuration that incorporates the effect of suggesting and teaching the game state. By doing so, it is possible to make the player feel as if he/she has won the specific game state by his own stop operation, and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game (stop operation).

Feature BA9. The privilege granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the first specific pattern combination stops at the valid position, a special privilege (replay) is given as a privilege corresponding to the special result,
Any one of the characteristics BA6 to BA8, wherein the special privilege is given when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the second specific pattern combination stops at the effective position. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, although the stop number may differ depending on the stop order and stop timing, the benefits obtained are common regardless of the stop number (stop order, stop timing). becomes. By doing so, it is possible to secure consistency with the fact that the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means is restricted in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. In other words, since the advantage at the time of winning a specific result does not change due to the special notification, even if the winning of the transition result is intentionally delayed in a situation where the winning of the transition result is reserved by means of reservation, the profit based on the specific result will not be unfair. not to enjoy.

Features BA10. a first control means (main controller 101) having at least the lottery means and the mode notification means;
a second control means (display control device 81) having at least the special means;
has
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result or the second result, the mode notification is performed by the mode notification means in the first control means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special notification by the special means in the second control means is performed, while the mode notification by the mode notification means in the first control means is not performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA6 to BA9, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, in notifying the stopping order of the special results, particularly in the feature BA9 that quotes the feature BA7, it is possible to clarify the difference between the first result and the second result that have different winning results. In other words, the lottery means and mode notification means related to the player's profit are integrated into the first control means, thereby making it easier to take measures to preferably avoid fraudulent acts, and mainly performing effects that are not related to profit. are concentrated in the second control means, and the functions are decentralized. In such a configuration, if the special notification by the special means is a function of the second control means, it is clarified that the change in the stop number based on the special result is not directly related to profit, For example, when the design of the special means is changed, it can be done without the need to calculate a new ball payout rate. Therefore, it is possible to realize excellent playability by the special means with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature BA11. Based on the transition of the game state to the specific game state, a specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start notification, and based on the end of the specific game state. Specific game state notification means (function to execute section display first process to section display fourth process by main control device 101) that terminates notification by turning off specific notification means,
As the specified result, a duplicate result including the transition result (for example, strong cherry duplicate 1, strong watermelon duplicate 1, chance A duplicate 1) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the overlapped result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, the specific game state notification means enters the advantageous state by stopping the pattern combination for transition. The game to be shifted to is the start game, the notification by the specific notification means is not started at a timing prior to the start game, and the specified at a timing prior to permitting the operation of the game following the start game. The gaming machine according to any one of the features BA1 to BA10, wherein the notification by the notification means is started.

According to the above configuration, when the specific game state is entered, the notification by the specific game state notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the notification is terminated. In other words, by confirming the presence or absence of notification by the specific game state notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether it is in the specific game state. To eliminate the feeling of inequality between a player who ends a game immediately and a player who sits down on a game table after finishing the game. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game based on the order notification.

In addition, when the transition to the specific game state is based on the overlapping result winning including the transition result, the notification by the specific game state notification means is started until the start game in which the pattern combination for transition stops and shifts to the advantageous state. is restricted. In other words, as described above, while eliminating the sense of inequality between players regarding the specific game state, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the notification regarding the specific game state is also limited, and the special result It is possible not to reduce the joy of the appearance of the first specific pattern combination at the time of winning (the joy of knowing that the lottery for shifting to the specific game state has been won). Therefore, it is possible to favorably improve the gameability in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means while ensuring the equality among the players by the specific game state notification means.

Feature BA12. As the specified result, a non-overlapping result (for example, strong cherry, strong watermelon, chance A) that does not include the transition result is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the non-overlapping result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, the specific game state notification means sets the game that wins the specific result as the start game, and the start game. The gaming machine according to feature BA11, wherein the notification by the specific notification means is started at a timing prior to permitting the operation of the next game of the game.

According to the above configuration, the case where the start of notification by the specific game state notification means is restricted is limited to the time of overlapping winning with the transition result, and the game is ended despite the transition to the specific game state. It is possible to reduce the phenomenon such as being lost as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the function of ensuring equality among players by providing the specific game state reporting means.

Feature BA13. A first overlap result (for example, strong cherry overlap 1) that is an overlap result with a first specified result (for example, strong cherry) among the specified results is set as the overlap result;
A first non-overlapping result (eg, strong cherry) that is a non-overlapping result of the first specified result (eg, strong cherry) among the specified results is set as the non-overlapping result,
The privilege granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first overlapping result, based on the fact that the pattern combination for the first specific result has stopped at the valid position, granting a privilege corresponding to the first specific result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the first specified result is given based on the stopping of the pattern combination for the first specified result at the valid position. The gaming machine according to feature BA12, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, in the game winning the first overlapping result that is a duplicate winning of the first specific result and the transition result, and the game winning the first non-overlapping result that is a single winning of the first specific result, In either case, the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped and the first specific result winning can be established. It becomes difficult to judge from the appearance. On the other hand, the notification by the specific game state notification means sets the game in which the transition result winning is established in the case of the first overlapping result as the start game, and the game in which the first specific result winning is established in the case of the first non-overlapping result. Let it be the starting game. Therefore, even if the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won with any result as a trigger, an event may occur in which the presence or absence (start timing) of the start of notification by the specific game state notification means is different. In other words, when the pattern combination for the first specified result is stopped, even if the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started before the operation of the next game of the game is permitted, the first specified result To leave the possibility that a pattern combination for a result is based on a first specific result in a first overlapping result, and to maintain expectation even when a lottery for transition to a specific game state is not won. It is possible to

Moreover, in this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the lottery for transition to the specific game state has been won by the stop roll at the time of winning the special result, so that the subsequent stop roll can attract great interest. .

Feature BA14. As the overlapping result, a second overlapping result (for example, strong watermelon overlapping 1) that is an overlapping result with a second specified result (for example, strong watermelon) among the specified results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a second non-overlapping result (for example, strong watermelon) that is a non-overlapping result of the second specified result (for example, strong watermelon) among the specified results is set,
The privilege granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second overlapping result, based on the fact that the pattern combination for the second specific result has stopped at the valid position, granting a privilege corresponding to the second specific result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the second specified result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the second specified result has stopped at the valid position. is a
The gaming machine according to feature BA13, wherein the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means differs between the lottery based on the first specified result and the lottery based on the second specified result.

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is also taken into account in the game characteristics of feature BA13. That is, for example, if the first specified result is more likely to win the transition lottery than the second specified result, the pattern combination for the first specified result is stopped, and the notification by the specific game state notification means is started. If not, the possibility of winning the specific game state is higher than when the pattern combination for the second specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started. Expectations for the appearance of a specific pattern combination are increased. On the other hand, when the pattern combination for the second specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started, the effect of surprise when the first specific pattern combination appears after that is enhanced. . As described above, by adding the winning probability of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means to entertain the stop numbers, the game performance of predicting whether or not the winning of the specific game state is predicted from the stop numbers during the reservation is remarkably improved. .

Feature BA15. As the overlapping result, a third overlapping result (eg, chance A overlapping 1) that is an overlapping result with a third specified result (eg, chance A) among the specified results is set;
As the non-overlapping result, a third non-overlapping result (for example, chance A) that is a non-overlapping result of the third specified result (for example, chance A) among the specified results is set;
The privilege granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third overlapping result, based on the fact that the pattern combination for the third specific result has stopped at the valid position, granting a privilege corresponding to the third specific result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the third specified result is given based on the stopping of the pattern combination for the third specified result at the valid position. is a
The ratio of the overlapping result and the non-overlapping result in the lottery by the lottery means is the ratio of the first overlapping result and the first non-overlapping result, and the third overlapping result and the third non-overlapping result. The gaming machine according to feature BA13 or feature BA14, wherein the ratio is different.

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transition result is also taken into account in the game characteristics of feature BA13 and feature BA14. That is, for example, the ratio of the first overlapping result to the first non-overlapping result is higher than the ratio of the third overlapping result to the third non-overlapping result, and the ratio of overlapping results with the migration result is higher (same stop If the combination of symbols for the first specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started, the third specific result is obtained. There is a higher possibility that the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means than when the pattern combination for the result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started. In other words, in the configuration of the feature BA14, if it is a non-overlapping result and a specific game state, the notification by the specific game state notification means is started in the game, so as described above, the first specific result for If the pattern combination is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started, the possibility of winning the specific game state is higher than in the case of the pattern combination for the third specific result. As described above, by adding the probability of winning as a transition result and making the player enjoy the stop roll, the playability of predicting the presence or absence of winning of the specific game state from the stop roll during the reservation is remarkably improved.

Feature BA16. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA15, wherein the special result is a result that does not trigger a lottery for transition to the specific game state by the transition lottery means.

According to the above configuration, the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, and in the situation where the transition lottery to the specific game state is restricted, the result different from the result to be restricted for the transition lottery to the specific game state , whether or not the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won (whether or not the mode is before transition) is notified by the stop result. Therefore, it is possible to purely enjoy the stop result without making the player feel a sense of loss due to the restricted result.

Feature BA17. In a situation in which the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result winning is higher than in a situation in which the transition result winning is not reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA16, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, since the probability of obtaining a special result is high during the reservation, it is easy to enjoy the game of whether the first specific pattern combination is stopped or the second specific pattern combination is stopped. can be done.

Feature BA18. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the valid position, the privilege providing means provides a replay as a privilege corresponding to the special result. or pays out game media equal to or less than the number of bets in the game in which the special result is won.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a game in which the specific game state is guessed from the stop result without excessively increasing the advantage during the reservation. In other words, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which an increase in the number of game media can be expected as a result of special prize winning, profits can be enjoyed by the special result winning, and the special result win is expected in anticipation of an increase in game media. , it can be a barrier to playability for purely enjoying the stop roll.

Feature BA19. The first result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order, and
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA18, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating bodies as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at eye pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circular body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets 9 medals awarded based on winning the first minor win in the game) are awarded, and each of the stop operation means is a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result win is established by operating with , the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second minor win in a 3-bet game) is given,
The manner notification means provides the predetermined notification, based on the lottery result of the lottery means, as the manner notification, the order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. It can be expressed as "characterized by being executable by means", and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Feature BA20. As the specific game state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than the normal game state, a high probability state that is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal game state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics BA1 to BA19, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (premonition mode), which is a lottery for transition to a high probability and is before transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both in the stage before the advantage increases due to the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, by adopting a configuration in which notification is started by a specific notification means when shifting to the specific game state, the game is finished without noticing that it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid the phenomenon that In other words, if the transition to the high-frequency state is made, the player can be considered to be able to grasp the state transition by being notified of the state. By setting it as the structure notified by the notification start of an information means, it becomes possible to make it grasp|ascertain more suitably the transition to a specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to improve the effect of increasing expectations for the specific game state described in feature BA1.

<Characteristic BB group>
Features BB1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means operates in the first stop operation mode. is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the above, the symbol combination corresponds to a second result different from the first result, and the symbol combination of the second mode, which is different from the pattern combination of the first mode. A first operation mode result (for example, push order bell) that allows the combination of symbols to be stopped;
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means performs the third stop operation. When operated in a fourth stop operation mode different from the mode, the pattern combination of the fourth mode, which is the pattern combination corresponding to the third result and which is different from the pattern combination of the third mode, can be stopped. A second operation mode result (for example, special replay) is set,
A first mode relating to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode, or the third stop operation mode and the fourth stop operation mode, based on the lottery results of the lottery means. A first mode notification means (a function of executing a process for notification of the pressing order by the display control device 81) capable of performing notification (press order notification effect) by the first notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means (function of executing the first specific winning process by the main controller 101) for executing a lottery for transition to the specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result; ,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is changed to an advantage for the player based on the fact that the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. transition means for transitioning to a state (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, the reservation means (main controller 101 performs step S609 processing of step S609 by the main controller 101) withholds the transition result winning until the pattern combination for transition stops at the effective position. function) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reserve means (main control means) for limiting execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means. a function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101);
In a situation where the transition result win is reserved by the reservation means, the first mode notification is performed by the first mode notification means based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the second operation mode. Possible special notification means (function for executing special RT notification processing by the display control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege granting means if the rolled number corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the state shifts to an advantageous state for the player, and if the pattern combination for transition does not stop, winning is reserved as a result of the transition. In such a configuration, furthermore, a specific game state is provided in which the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the rotating body, and the advantage level is changed depending on the presence or absence of the first mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. there is Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game, and the game performance is greatly improved. improves.

On the other hand, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, if it is configured to perform a lottery for transition to the specific game state, a stop operation is performed so as not to stop the pattern combination for transition, There is a possibility that a move to an advantageous state will not occur easily, and an act of infinitely generating a lottery to move to a specific game state will be performed. As a result, the difference in the degree of advantage between a player who can perform a stop operation that does not stop the transition pattern combination and a player who cannot perform such a stop operation becomes significant, and from the viewpoint of game fairness. It is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate due to the design, so it is also undesirable from such a point of view. Therefore, in the state in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, the execution of the transition lottery to the specific game state is restricted, so that the intended payout rate can be achieved and the fairness of the game. can be guaranteed.

In addition, by making it possible to reserve the transition result winning, in a situation where the transition to an advantageous state is internally confirmed, if the game is played while suggesting it with a production etc., it is possible to prevent the transition to the advantageous state There are also benefits such as maintaining a sense of anticipation. However, since the lottery for transition to the specific game state is not performed in the situation where the winning transition result is reserved by the retaining means, the player may not be able to clearly understand that the transition lottery will not be performed. is not preferred.

In that regard, in the above configuration, even in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the transition lottery to the specific game state is restricted, the first mode notification based on the result of the second operation mode is executed. . As with the results of the first operation mode, the results of the second operation mode are set so that the winning results are the same, although the stop numbers differ depending on the stop operation mode. That is, if the second operation mode result is obtained, the player's advantage does not change even if the first mode notification is performed. Therefore, in the situation where the transition lottery to the specific game state is restricted as described above, if the first mode notification is performed based on the second operation mode result, the transition result winning is retained by the retaining means. It is possible to execute the first mode notification within a range not contrary to the purpose of restricting the lottery for transition to the specific game state, and to make it difficult to understand the situation where the transition lottery is restricted by the execution of the first mode notification. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability during the reservation while ensuring the fairness of the game.

Feature BB2. The first mode notification means does not execute the first mode notification even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine according to feature BB1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the case where the first mode notification is executed in a situation where the winning transition result is reserved by the reservation means is the result of the second operation mode among the result of the first operation mode and the result of the second operation mode. limited in some cases. As described above, the result of the first operation mode and the result of the second operation mode may differ in the winning result depending on the stop operation mode of the first operation mode result, while the result of the second operation mode may differ depending on the stop operation mode. You will get the same result regardless. By doing so, in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved, while ensuring the significance of restricting the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, the first mode in the reserved situation Notification becomes executable.

Feature BB3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the first operation mode, the first notification means provides the second mode notification regarding the stop operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. A second mode notification means (a function of executing the pushing process by the main controller 101) that can be executed by different second notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the instruction monitor 68). The gaming machine according to feature BB1 or feature BB2, comprising:

According to the above configuration, the first mode notification means performs the first mode notification for both the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result, while the second mode notification means executes the first mode notification for the first operation mode result. 2 mode notification is executed. As described above, between the results of the first operation mode and the results of the second operation mode, the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the first operation mode result. You will get the same result regardless. In other words, the first mode notification and the second mode notification include the second mode notification that causes a change in the profit of the player, and the first mode notification that does not cause a change in the same profit. Then, for example, in order for the manager of the game hall to monitor the relationship between the stop operation mode and the winning result, it is sufficient to monitor the second mode notification by the second notification means. In this way, by entrusting the notification associated with the player's profit to the second mode notification, the first mode notification can be used as the notification for effect, and it is possible to make the notification related to the profit or related to the profit. The degree of freedom of notification can be overwhelmingly increased, such as notification of non-reporting.

Feature BB4. a first control device (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means and the second mode notification means;
a second control device (display control device 81) having at least the first mode notification means;
The gaming machine according to feature BB3, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the lottery means and the second mode notification means, which are directly related to the player's profit, and the first mode notification means for effect are mounted in separate control devices. It is possible to take countermeasures against fraud in a concentrated manner, and it is possible to suppress a local increase in the processing load by decentralizing the functions.

By restricting the "second control device" to "provided separately from the first control device", the effect of being separate control devices is more clearly achieved.

Feature BB5. Based on the transition to the specific game state, a predetermined notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start notification, and the predetermined notification is based on the end of the specific game state. Equipped with a specific game state notification means (a function of executing the first section display process to the fourth section display process by the main control device 101) that terminates the notification by turning off the means,
The first mode notification means is capable of executing the first mode notification regardless of whether or not notification by the specific game state notification means is started, while the second mode notification means is capable of executing the specific game state notification means. The gaming machine according to feature BB3 or feature BB4, wherein the second mode report can be executed under one condition that the report by the report means is started.

According to the above configuration, regarding the specific game state, when the specific game state shifts to the specific game state, notification by the specific game state notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the notification also ends. That is, by confirming the presence or absence of notification to the predetermined notification means by the specific game state notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state, for example, even if it has transitioned to the specific game state To eliminate the sense of inequality between a player who finishes a game without noticing it and a player who sits down on a game table after finishing the game. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game with the special notification.

In addition, with respect to the first mode notification and the second mode notification, the second mode notification can be executed under one condition that the notification by the specific game state notification means is started, so that the second mode notification is directly linked to profits, and the importance of monitoring the second mode notification together with the notification by the specific game state notification means is increased. In addition, since the first mode notification can be executed regardless of whether or not notification is started by the specific game state notification means, the degree of freedom when performing the first mode notification is improved, and the function as production is further enhanced. can be increased.

Feature BB6. The transition lottery means can execute a transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the transition result winning,
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the start of notification by the specific game state notification means corresponding to the result of the transition lottery to the specific game state executed based on the transition result winning, A feature characterized by having means capable of restricting at least until the transition result winning is established (for example, a function of executing step S4204, step S4208, section display fourth processing in main controller 101) A game machine described in BB5.

According to the above configuration, the consistency between the limitation of the transition lottery to the specific game state in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the fact that the second mode notification is not performed in the situation is ensured. It becomes possible to guarantee, and in a situation where winning as a result of transition is reserved, it is possible to sustain the expectation that the lottery for transition to the specific game state will also be won.

Feature BB7. By performing the first mode notification by the special notification means, specific content corresponding to the result of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means executed with the transition result reserved by the reservation means as a trigger is suggested. The gaming machine according to feature BB6, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved, the first mode notification based on the result of the second operation mode is performed, so that the transition to the specific game state triggered by the reserved transition result is performed. Since the content of the transition lottery is suggested, even if the execution of the transition lottery to the specific game state is restricted in such a situation, it is possible to keep the interest in the transition lottery.

Feature BB8. As the specific game state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode, etc.) with different degrees of advantage for the player,
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, if the result of the transition lottery means executed based on the transition result winning is the transition winning to the first predetermined state, the special notification means executes the first mode notification for the third stop operation mode in which the pattern combination of the third order in the result of the second operation mode can be stopped;
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the result of the transition lottery executed based on the transition result winning is a transition winning to a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state. , the special notification means executes the first mode notification for the fourth stop operation mode in which the pattern combination of the fourth order in the result of the second operation mode can be stopped. The gaming machine according to feature BB7.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the winning content of the transition lottery to the specific game state by utilizing the result of the second operation mode in which the stop operation mode is changed to change the stop outcome. By doing so, it is possible to realize a new game property using the mode notification in a situation where the mode notification directly linked to profit may be restricted.

Feature BB9. As a lottery result by the lottery means, there are provided a plurality of types of replay results that can be granted as a privilege by the privilege granting means,
As the plurality of types of replay results, the replay is granted by the privilege granting means, and a transition replay result (e.g., promotion replay) that triggers the transition of the game state, and the replay by the privilege granting means. A non-transition replay result (for example, special replay) that is granted and does not trigger a transition of the game state is provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics BB1 to BB8, wherein the second operation mode result is the non-transfer replay result.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where winning as a transition result is reserved, even if winning is achieved as a result of the second operation mode, the game state does not shift, and replay is simply awarded. The effects of the feature BB1 are not contrary to the purpose of restricting the lottery for the transition to the specific game state in a situation where winning of the transition result is reserved by performing the mode notification using such a game result. It becomes possible to play

Feature BB10. The result of the first operation mode is that when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result is When it becomes possible to stop and each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the second stop operation corresponding to the second result is performed. The pattern combination of the mode is stoppable,
The result of the second operation mode is that when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result is When it becomes possible to stop and each of the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode, the fourth stop corresponding to the third result is operated. The pattern combination of the mode can be stopped,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the first operation mode or the result of the second operation mode, the first mode notification means determines the first stop order and the second stop order, or the third stop order. Characteristic BB1 characterized in that the first order notification (push order notification effect) regarding the stop order including the stop order and the fourth stop order can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification. The game machine according to any one of BB9.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating bodies as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at eye pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circular body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "the result of the first operation mode is that when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the first mode is When the game is stopped, the first winning result is established, and the first privilege (for example, 9 medals awarded based on the winning of the first minor combination in a 3-bet game) is awarded by the privilege giving means, and each of the stops is performed. When the operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the second mode is stopped and the second result winning is achieved. is established, and a second privilege different from the first privilege (for example, three medals awarded based on winning a second minor win in a 3-bet game) is awarded by the privilege granting means;
The result of the second operation mode is that when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode is stopped and the third result is obtained. A prize is established, a third privilege (replay) is granted by the privilege granting means, and each of the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode. If it is done, the pattern combination of the fourth mode is stopped, the third result winning is established, and the third privilege is granted by the privilege granting means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the first operation mode or the result of the second operation mode, the first mode notification means determines the first stop order and the second stop order, or the third stop order. and the fourth stop order, including the fourth stop order, can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification." In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the award.

Feature BB11. As the specific game state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than the normal game state, a high probability state that is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal game state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics BB1 to BB10, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (premonition mode), which is a lottery for transition to a high probability and is before transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both in the stage before the advantage increases due to the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, by adopting a configuration in which notification is started by a specific notification means when shifting to the specific game state, the game is finished without noticing that it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid the phenomenon that In other words, if the transition to the high-frequency state is made, the player can be considered to be able to grasp the state transition by being notified of the state. By setting it as the structure notified by the notification start of an information means, it becomes possible to make it grasp|ascertain more suitably the transition to a specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to improve the effect of increasing the expectation for the specific game state described in the feature BB1.

<Characteristic BC group>
Features BC1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main controller 101). and,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is changed to an advantage for the player based on the fact that the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. transition means for transitioning to a state (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, the reservation means (main controller 101 performs step S609 processing of step S609 by the main controller 101) withholds the transition result winning until the pattern combination for transition stops at the effective position. function) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reserve means (main control means) for limiting execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means. a function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101);
When the execution of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is restricted by the restriction means, a special notification regarding the transition lottery by the transition lottery means that has already been executed is made based on the specific result winning subject to the restriction by the restriction means. Executable special notification means (function for executing notification cancellation processing and special RT notification processing by the display control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege granting means if the rolled number corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the state shifts to an advantageous state for the player, and if the pattern combination for transition does not stop, winning is reserved as a result of the transition. In such a configuration, furthermore, there is provided a specific game state in which the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the rotating body, and the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of state notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game, and the game performance is greatly improved. improves.

On the other hand, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, if it is configured to perform a lottery for transition to the specific game state, a stop operation is performed so as not to stop the pattern combination for transition, There is a possibility that a move to an advantageous state will not occur easily, and an act of infinitely generating a lottery to move to a specific game state will be performed. As a result, the difference in the degree of advantage between a player who can perform a stop operation that does not stop the transition pattern combination and a player who cannot perform such a stop operation becomes significant, and from the viewpoint of game fairness. It is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate due to the design, so it is also undesirable from such a point of view. Therefore, in the state in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, the execution of the transition lottery to the specific game state is restricted, so that the intended payout rate can be achieved and the fairness of the game. can be guaranteed.

In addition, by making it possible to reserve the transition result winning, in a situation where the transition to an advantageous state is internally confirmed, if the game is played while suggesting it with a production etc., it is possible to prevent the transition to the advantageous state There are also benefits such as maintaining a sense of anticipation. However, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the lottery for transition to the specific game state is not performed, so although the expectation for the advantageous state can be improved, from the viewpoint of the expectation for the specific game state Then, it can be said that the situation in which the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means is not preferable for the player.

In particular, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the player cannot enjoy the benefit of normally performing a transition lottery, and the player may feel that he or she has lost money, and the transition result wins. The more games that are reserved, the more likely such an event will occur. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when the transition lottery to the specific game state is restricted when the specific result is won, if it is configured to notify the transition lottery that has been performed before that, it will be as if the specific result was won. It is possible to make it seem as if a lottery for transition to a specific game state has been performed, and to make it difficult to realize that the lottery for transition is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the game characteristics based on the advantageous state and the specific game state.

Feature BC2. The gaming machine according to the feature BC1, wherein the special notification means relates to the transition lottery by the transition lottery means that has already been executed, and is capable of informing unreported contents.

According to the above configuration, the contents of notification by the special notification means are more limited. More specifically, the content of notification by the special notification means does not include information related to the transition lottery that has already been notified, but rather relates to an unannounced lottery. The effect of making it seem as if the transition lottery has been performed based on the specific result can be further enhanced since the content of the transition lottery is in the near game.

Feature BC3. The transition lottery means is capable of executing a transition lottery for the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result,
In a game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the transition result, a means capable of restricting execution of the notification regarding the lottery by the transition lottery means triggered by the transition result (such as an attack mode in the display control device 81) A gaming machine according to feature BC1 or feature BC2, characterized by comprising a function of executing processing for setting an omen mode when winning.

According to the above configuration, when the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is performed based on the transition result, execution of notification regarding the transition lottery is restricted. It is possible to minimize the phenomenon that the transfer lottery is not performed before the winning of the specified result.

Feature BC4. Any one of the characteristics BC1 to BC3, wherein the special notification means can execute the special notification in a game after the game in which the specific result is restricted by the restriction means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, in the game subsequent to the game in which the specific result is won, in which the transition lottery is restricted, the notification regarding the transition lottery that has been executed before the game in which the specific result is obtained is provided. By doing so, the game for which the special notification is performed is not limited to the game in which the specific result is won, and the special notification can be diversified. Even if there is, it is possible to enjoy the game after the specified result while expecting a change in the content of the special notification.

Feature BC5. When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined special result in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific result is restricted by the limiter, the special notification means The gaming machine according to feature BC4, characterized in that it is capable of executing special notification.

According to the above configuration, when the special notification is performed, it is taken into consideration that the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a special result. It is possible to create expectations for the content of the special notification that was supposed to be given. In other words, even if the special notification is not performed in the configuration in which the result of the transition lottery is favorable to the player by performing the special notification, the reason why the special notification is not performed is the result of the transition lottery. Not only is the game unfavorable to the player, but there are also cases in which the player does not win the special result, and the sense of anticipation can be maintained. In particular, the execution timing of the special notification is limited to a situation in which the transition result win is reserved by the reservation means, so there are many cases where the special result does not occur until the transition result wins, and the above special notification is not performed. There is a high possibility that it will be a factor that did not exist. Therefore, it is possible to favorably achieve the effect of sustaining the sense of anticipation as described above.

Feature BC6. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the first control means (in the main controller 101, for example, A function to control so that a replay prize is established at the stop result of black BAR double alignment),
A second control for controlling each of the revolving bodies so that a second special pattern combination different from the first special pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. Control means (function of main control device 101 for controlling, for example, a replay winning at a stop result that the black BAR is not stopped);
with
The gaming machine according to feature BC5, wherein the special notification means executes, as the special notification, notification that the first special combination of symbols can be stopped.

According to the above configuration, the special notification is performed by the stop roll when the special result is won. By doing so, in the configuration for performing special notification based on special result winning, there is no need for a configuration such as changing the probability of special result winning before and after specific result winning, and the feature BC5 can be achieved with a simple configuration. It can be effective.

Feature BC7. The special notifying means limits the execution of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means by the restriction means in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, and the game in which the specific result is won. is used as a trigger game, and the game after the trigger game is easier to notify about the transition lottery by the transition lottery means that has been executed than the game before the trigger game. Features BC1 to The gaming machine according to any one of BC6.

According to the above configuration, when a specific result is won in a situation where the transition result is reserved, the game in which the specific result is won is set as the trigger game, and the game after the trigger game is executed more than the game before the trigger game. It becomes easier to notify about the completed transfer lottery. By doing so, even if the transition lottery has already been executed, it is possible to make the player feel as if the transition lottery was performed based on the specified result of the opportunity game.

Feature BC8. A plurality of types of the identification results are set,
The special notification means, according to the type of the specific result for which the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is to be restricted by the limiter, is more likely to occur in the later game than in the game before the trigger game. The gaming machine according to feature BC7, characterized in that it is possible to vary the probability of facilitating the notification of the shift lottery by the executed transition lottery means.

According to the above configuration, according to the type of the pending specific result, the probability that the transition lottery is likely to be notified in the game after the game in which the specific result is won is different. The notification by can be produced in line with the actual situation of the transition lottery. Specifically, for example, it is common that there are results that are likely to be won in the transition lottery and results that are difficult to be won in the transition lottery as specific results, and the change in the pending notification rate is also adjusted according to the winning probability. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the impression as if the transition lottery was performed based on the specified result of the opportunity game.

Feature BC9. If the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and then the transition result winning is established, means capable of informing about the lottery by the transition lottery means that has already been executed (fourth section display process by main controller 101) The gaming machine according to any one of features BC1 to BC8, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the above configuration, even if the specific result is not won during the reservation, or even if the specific result is won, the special notification is performed based on the special result winning, for example, as in the feature BC5. Even if winning is established as a result of transition without notification, the phenomenon of transitioning to an advantageous state without notification of the lottery by the already-executed transition lottery means can be reduced as much as possible. By doing so, it is possible to preferably perform the notification regarding the lottery by the shift lottery means.

Features BC10. The first result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order, and
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The game machine according to any one of features BC1 to BC9, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating bodies as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at eye pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circular body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets 9 medals awarded based on winning the first minor win in the game) are awarded, and each of the stop operation means is a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result win is established by operating with , the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second minor win in a 3-bet game) is given,
The manner notification means provides the predetermined notification, based on the lottery result of the lottery means, as the manner notification, the order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. It can be expressed as "characterized by being executable by means", and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Features BC11. As the specific game state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than the normal game state, a high probability state that is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal game state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features BC1 to BC10, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (precursor mode), which is a winning lottery for transition to a high probability and before transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both in the stage before the advantage increases due to the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, by adopting a configuration in which notification is started by a specific notification means when shifting to the specific game state, the game is finished without noticing that it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid the phenomenon that In other words, if the transition to the high-frequency state is made, the player can be considered to be able to grasp the state transition by being notified of the state. By setting it as the structure notified by the notification start of an information means, it becomes possible to make it grasp|ascertain more suitably the transition to a specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to improve the effect of increasing the expectation for the specific game state described in the feature BC1.

<Characteristic BD group>
Features BD1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function to execute the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main controller 101). and,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is changed to an advantage for the player based on the fact that the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. transition means for transitioning to a state (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main controller 101) withholds the winning of the transition result until the pattern combination for transition stops at the effective position. functions to perform) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reserve means (main control means) for limiting execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means. a function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101);
with
As the game state, a plurality of replay states (particularly, the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state) are set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined replay result is different from the normal game state,
Replay state transition means ( A function to execute processing for shifting to any of the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state in the special RT state processing of the main controller 101);
When the game state is shifted to the replay state by the replay state transition means, a selection means (special RT of the main controller 101) capable of selecting the replay state to be shifted based on a specific event related to the specific game state In the state processing, a function to set the RT state depending on the presence or absence of the challenge mode winning flag, the attack mode winning flag, and the special zone winning flag);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege granting means if the rolled number corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the state shifts to an advantageous state for the player, and if the pattern combination for the shift does not stop, winning is reserved as a result of the shift. In such a configuration, furthermore, there is provided a specific game state in which the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the rotating body, and the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of state notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game, and the game performance is greatly improved. improves.

On the other hand, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, if it is configured to perform a lottery for transition to the specific game state, a stop operation is performed so as not to stop the pattern combination for transition, There is a possibility that a move to an advantageous state will not occur easily, and an act of infinitely generating a lottery to move to a specific game state will be performed. Then, the difference in the degree of advantage between a player who can perform a stop operation that does not stop the pattern combination for transition and a player who cannot perform such a stop operation becomes remarkable, and from the viewpoint of game fairness. It is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate due to the design, so it is also undesirable from such a point of view. Therefore, in the state in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, the execution of the transition lottery to the specific game state is restricted, so that the intended payout rate can be achieved and the fairness of the game. can be guaranteed.

In addition, by making it possible to reserve the transition result winning, in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state is internally confirmed, if the game is played while suggesting it by production etc., it is possible to prevent the transition to the advantageous state There are also benefits such as maintaining a sense of anticipation. On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the pattern combination for transition itself, there are many cases where the execution of the lottery for the specific state is restricted as a specific result, and the player feels that he has lost. obtain. Therefore, based on a situation in which such a situation can occur, that is, a situation in which the winning transition result is reserved by the reservation means, a replay state in which the probability of obtaining a predetermined replay result changes, a so-called RT state. After making the transition, the type of the replay state is selected based on the specific event related to the specific game state. By doing this, a game such as predicting a specific event related to a specific game state is added from the type of replay state, and the specific result is a situation in which the execution of the lottery related to the specific game state is restricted. Also, it becomes possible to entertain the game related to the specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature BD2. The transition lottery means can execute the transition lottery based on the transition result winning,
The gaming machine according to feature BD1, wherein the specific event is the content of the transition lottery performed based on the transition result winning.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the transition to the re-game state is made based on the transition result winning, the transition to the re-game state differs depending on the content of the transition lottery performed based on the transition result winning. By doing so, it is possible to suitably realize a game in which the content of the transition lottery is predicted from the transitioned re-game state.

Feature BD3. If the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay), means (main controller 101) for controlling each revolving body so as to be able to stop the pattern combination for the specific replay at the effective position. function to execute reel control processing in
The gaming machine according to feature BD1 or feature BD2, wherein the frequency at which the pattern combination for the specific replay is stopped differs depending on the type of the replay state selected by the selection means.

According to the above configuration, the stopping frequency of the specific re-game pattern combination that can appear when winning the specific re-game result differs depending on the type of re-game state. By doing so, it is possible to predict the type of replay state from the frequency of stopping the specific replay combination of symbols, thereby predicting a specific event related to the specific game state. Become.

Feature BD4. The gaming machine according to feature BD3, wherein the probability of obtaining the specific re-game result differs depending on the type of the re-game state.

According to the above configuration, since the winning probability of the specific re-game result itself differs, the appearance rate of the specific re-game pattern combination may also differ depending on the type of re-game state. In this way, for example, when a specific re-game result is won, there is no need to perform control such as whether or not to stop the pattern combination for the specific re-game depending on the stop order, stop timing, or the like. Therefore, with a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to realize a game in which a specific event for a specific game state is predicted from the appearance rate of the pattern combination for a specific replay.

Feature BD5. Any one of features BD1 to BD4 characterized in that the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be one of the replay results is the same probability or almost the same probability regardless of the type of the replay state. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, in order to realize a game of predicting a specific event for a specific game state in a situation where winning as a transition result is reserved, the degree of advantage of the replay state to be transitioned to during the reservation is made different. no need arises. Therefore, the playability of the specific game state can be realized without considering the payout rate or the like.

It should be noted that "the same probability or approximately the same probability" includes not only completely the same probability, but also a difference in probability that makes it difficult for the player to perceive the difference in probability.

Feature BD7. The specific conditions include a non-winning condition (for example, a double role that results in a BB non-winning) that is satisfied without the transition result winning being reserved by the reservation means,
The lottery in the replay state selected by the selection means based on the establishment of the non-winning condition and the replay state selected by the selection means based on the establishment of the winning condition. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics BD1 to BD6, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the means is one of the replay results is the same probability or almost the same probability.

According to the above configuration, the replay state that is shifted based on the reservation of the transition result win by the reservation means and the replay state that is not, have the same or substantially the same probability of a replay result. Become. In this way, when a game is played to predict whether or not winning as a transition result is reserved when shifting to the replay state, it cannot be predicted from the winning probability of the replay result. In this way, the prediction game can be made heavy.

Feature BD8. A normal replay result (normal replay) is set as the replay result that can be won in the normal game state,
A specific replay result (special replay) is set as the replay result that can be won in the replay state,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the normal replay result, means for controlling each of the revolving bodies (reel control of the main controller 101) so as to be able to stop the pattern combination for normal replay at the effective position. A function that executes a process to win a replay at the stop result of a normal replay in the process);
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay), means (main controller 101) for controlling each revolving body so as to be able to stop the pattern combination for the specific replay at the effective position. In the reel control process of, for example, a function to execute a process to win a replay when the black BAR is stopped, and
Means (main controller) for controlling each of the revolving bodies so as to be able to stop the pattern combination for normal replay at the valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay) A function of executing a process for winning a replay at the stop result of a normal replay in the reel control process of 101);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD7, wherein the frequency at which the specific re-game pattern combination is stopped differs depending on the type of the re-game state selected by the selection means.

According to the above configuration, in the game property of predicting the type of replay state from the appearance rate of the pattern combination for the specific replay, even when the specific replay result is won, the same stop result as the normal replay result is obtained. may occur. By doing so, either the pattern combination for the specific re-game is stopped or the pattern combination for the normal re-game is stopped when the specific re-game result is won without changing the winning probability of the specific re-game result. It is possible to change the appearance rate of the pattern combination for the specific replay only by changing the pattern combination. Therefore, with a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to predict the type of replay state from the appearance rate of the pattern combination for the specific replay, thereby predicting the specific event related to the specific game state. can.

Feature BD9. The transition lottery means can execute the transition lottery based on the transition result winning,
the migration results include a first migration result and a second migration result;
As the specific game state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode, etc.) with different degrees of advantage for the player,
When executing the transition lottery based on the first transition result winning, the transition lottery means performs a transition lottery to a first predetermined state of the specific game state, and based on the second transition result winning. When executing the transition lottery, a transition lottery to a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state of the specific game state is performed,
Said re-game state shifting means shifts to a first re-game state among said plurality of re-game states on condition that said first transition result winning is reserved by said reserve means, and said second re-game state is caused by said reserve means. Characteristic BD1 to BD8 characterized in that a transition is made to a second re-game state different from the first re-game state among the plurality of re-game states on the condition that winning is reserved as a result of transition. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, the type of transition result, the type of replay state, and the content of the specific game state in which the transition lottery is performed are associated with each other. In other words, an event occurs in which the game moves to the first re-gaming state in spite of winning as a result of the second transition, or to the second re-gaming state in spite of winning as a result of the first transition. do not have. Therefore, the transparency of the game is ensured, and the game in which the specific game state is predicted from the type of the replay state can be suitably realized.

Feature BD10. Based on the transition of the game state to the specific game state, a predetermined notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start notification, and based on the end of the specific game state. Specific game state notification means (function to execute section display first process to section display fourth process by main control device 101) that terminates notification by turning off predetermined notification means,
When the game state is shifted to the replay state by the replay state transition means, means capable of restricting the start of notification by the specific game state notification means ) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD9, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, regarding the specific game state, when the specific game state shifts to the specific game state, notification by the specific game state notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the notification also ends. That is, by confirming the presence or absence of notification to the predetermined notification means by the specific game state notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state, for example, even if it has transitioned to the specific game state To eliminate the sense of inequality between a player who finishes a game without noticing it and a player who sits down on a game table after finishing the game. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game with the special notification.

In addition, when the replay state is shifted to the replay state by the replay state shift means, the start of notification by the specific game state notification means may be restricted. In this way, when the transition to the re-game state is made based on the reserving of the transition result winning by the reservation means, the game of predicting the specific event related to the specific game state from the type of the re-game state can be preferably performed. can be executed. In other words, when notification is started by the specific game state notification means, in a configuration in which the presence or absence of transition to the specific game state is set as a specific event, the specific event is predicted by notification by the specific game state notification means. This is because it will be grasped before long.

Feature BD11. The first result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order, and
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD10, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating bodies as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at eye pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circular body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bet Nine medals awarded based on winning the first minor win in the game) are awarded, and each of the stop operation means is a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result win is established by operating with , the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second minor win in a 3-bet game) is given,
The manner notification means provides the predetermined notification, based on the lottery result of the lottery means, as the manner notification, the order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. It can be expressed as "characterized by being executable by means", and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Feature BD12. As the specific game state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than the normal game state, a high probability state that is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal game state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD11, wherein at least one of a pre-transition state (premonition mode), which is a lottery for transition to a high probability and is before transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both in the stage before the advantage increases due to the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, by adopting a configuration in which notification is started by a specific notification means when shifting to the specific game state, the game is finished without noticing that it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid the phenomenon that In other words, if the transition to the high-frequency state is made, the player can be considered to be able to grasp the state transition by being notified of the state. By setting it as the structure notified by the notification start of an information means, it becomes possible to make it grasp|ascertain more suitably the transition to a specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to improve the effect of increasing expectations for the specific game state described in the feature BD1.

Feature BD13. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main controller 101). and,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is changed to an advantage for the player based on the fact that the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. transition means for transitioning to a state (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, the reservation means (main controller 101 performs step S609 processing of step S609 by the main controller 101) withholds the transition result winning until the pattern combination for transition stops at the effective position. functions to perform) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reserve means (main control means) for limiting execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means. a function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101);
with
As the game state, a plurality of replay states (especially, the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state) are set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined replay result is different from the normal game state,
The plurality of re-game states are set so that the probabilities of specific re-game results among the re-game results are different,
The transition lottery means can execute a transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the transition result winning,
Replay state transition means ( A function to execute processing for shifting to any of the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state in the special RT state processing of the main controller 101);
When the game state is shifted to the re-game state by the re-game state transition means, a selection means (main control A function of executing processing for setting the RT state depending on the presence or absence of the challenge mode winning flag, the attack mode winning flag, and the special zone winning flag in the special RT state processing of the device 101;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege granting means if the rolled number corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the state shifts to an advantageous state for the player, and if the pattern combination for transition does not stop, winning is reserved as a result of the transition. In such a configuration, furthermore, there is provided a specific game state in which the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the rotating body, and the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of state notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game, and the game performance is greatly improved. improves.

On the other hand, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, if it is configured to perform a lottery for transition to the specific game state, a stop operation is performed so as not to stop the pattern combination for transition, There is a possibility that a move to an advantageous state will not occur easily, and an act of infinitely generating a lottery to move to a specific game state will be performed. Then, the difference in the degree of advantage between a player who can perform a stop operation that does not stop the pattern combination for transition and a player who cannot perform such a stop operation becomes remarkable, and from the viewpoint of game fairness. It is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate due to the design, so it is also undesirable from such a point of view. Therefore, in the state in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, the execution of the transition lottery to the specific game state is restricted, so that the intended payout rate can be achieved and the fairness of the game. can be guaranteed.

In addition, by making it possible to reserve the transition result winning, in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state is internally confirmed, if the game is played while suggesting it by production etc., it is possible to prevent the transition to the advantageous state There are also benefits such as maintaining a sense of anticipation. On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the pattern combination for transition itself, there are many cases where the execution of the lottery for the specific state is restricted as a specific result, and the player feels that he has lost. obtain. Therefore, based on a situation in which such a situation can occur, that is, a situation in which the winning of the transition result is reserved by the reservation means, one of a plurality of replay states with different probabilities of specific replay results is selected. In addition, the type of the replay state is selected according to the degree of expectation for winning the lottery for the transition to the specific game state. By doing so, a game is added such as predicting and grasping the type of replay state from the winning probability of the specific replay result, and predicting the expectation of winning the lottery for transition to the specific game state, and the specific result. Thus, even in a situation where the execution of lottery related to the specific game state is restricted, it is possible to entertain the game related to the specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Note that each configuration of the features BD1 to BD12 may be applied individually to the feature BD13, or each configuration may be applied in combination.

<Characteristic BE group>
Features BE1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main controller 101). and,
The notification by the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is started when the game state shifts to the specific game state, and the notification by the specific notification means is terminated when the specific game state ends. Specific gaming state notification means (function for executing section display first processing to section display fourth processing by main control device 101),
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is changed to an advantage for the player based on the fact that the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. transition means for transitioning to a state (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, the reservation means (main controller 101 performs step S609 processing of step S609 by the main controller 101) withholds the transition result winning until the pattern combination for transition stops at the effective position. function) and
with
As the specified results, overlapping results including the transition result (eg, strong cherry overlapping 1, strong watermelon overlapping 1, chance A overlapping 1) and non-overlapping results not including the transition result (eg, strong cherry, strong watermelon, Chance A) is set,
The specific game state notification means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the non-overlapping result and the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won, the game in which the non-overlapping result is won is set as the start game, and the operation of the game following the start game. Means for starting notification by the specific notification means at a timing before allowing the (function for executing the section display first process in the main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the overlap result or the transition result, and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, the game transitions to the advantageous state by stopping the pattern combination for transition. The start game is set so that the notification by the specific notification means is not started at the timing before the start game, and the notification by the specific notification means is started at the timing before the operation of the game following the start game is permitted. means for starting (function for executing the section display fourth process in main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the result of the lottery, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving body results in winning the first result or winning the second result. A result such as winning a prize is set, and there are cases in which mode notifications regarding these stop operation modes are performed. be.

In this case, when the state shifts to a specific game state in which mode notification is likely to be performed, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the notification by the specific notification means is also terminated. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state. The sense of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who sits on the game table after finishing the game can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game based on the mode notification.

Moreover, the notification by the specific game state notification means is such that at least the game in which the lottery result that triggered the transition to the specific game state can win a prize is set as the start game, and the operation of the game following the start game is allowed. , and the start timing of the notification is a time-limited notification. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce as much as possible the occurrence of ending the game even though the lottery for transition to the specific game state has been won.

On the other hand, if the notification of the transition lottery is limited as described above, the result of the transition lottery can be clearly determined by whether or not the notification by the specific game state notification means is started. As a result, it can be viewed as a lack of interest in the production.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the transition lottery to the specific game state is the transition to the advantageous state, and the transition result (so-called jackpot) that can be reserved until the winning is established. and a non-overlapping result that does not overlap with the transition result, and the notification start by the specific game state notification means is made different for the overlapping result and the non-overlapping result.

More specifically, if you win a lottery to transition to a specific gaming state with a non-overlapping result as a trigger, the game that won the non-overlapping result will be the starting game, and before allowing the operation of the next game. When notification by the specific game state notification means is started, and the result including the transition result (mainly duplicate result) is selected as a trigger for the transition lottery to the specific game state, the pattern for transition corresponding to the transition result A game in which a combination stops and shifts to an advantageous state is set as a start game, and notification by the specific game state notification means is started before permitting the operation of the next game.

By doing so, even if the stop result corresponding to the result that triggers the lottery for transition to the specific game state appears, even if the notification by the specific game state notification means does not start in the game, Since there is still the possibility that the result of the overlap is left, it is possible to make the notification by the specific game state notification means limited to a limited period of time, while providing a notification with a high production effect. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve interest.

Feature BE2. A first overlap result (for example, strong cherry overlap 1) that is an overlap result with a first specified result (for example, strong cherry) among the specified results is set as the overlap result;
A first non-overlapping result (e.g., strong cherry) that is a non-overlapping result of the first specified result (e.g., strong cherry) among the specified results is set as the non-overlapping result;
The privilege granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first overlapping result, based on the fact that the pattern combination for the first specific result has stopped at the valid position, granting a privilege corresponding to the first specific result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the first specified result is given based on the stopping of the pattern combination for the first specified result at the valid position. The gaming machine according to feature BE1 characterized by:

According to the above configuration, in the game winning the first overlapping result that is a duplicate winning of the first specific result and the transition result, and the game winning the first non-overlapping result that is a single winning of the first specific result, In either case, the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped and the first specific result winning can be established. It becomes difficult to judge from the appearance. On the other hand, the notification by the specific game state notification means sets the game in which the transition result winning is established in the case of the first overlapping result as the start game, and the game in which the first specific result winning is established in the case of the first non-overlapping result. Let it be the starting game. Therefore, even if the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won with any result as a trigger, an event may occur in which the presence or absence (start timing) of the start of notification by the specific game state notification means is different. In other words, when the pattern combination for the first specified result is stopped, even if the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started before the operation of the next game of the game is permitted, the first specified result To leave the possibility that a pattern combination for a result is based on a first specific result in a first overlapping result, and to maintain a sense of expectation even when a lottery for transition to a specific game state is not won. It is possible to

Feature BE3. As the overlapping result, a second overlapping result (for example, strong watermelon overlap 1) that is an overlapping result with a second specified result (for example, strong watermelon) among the specified results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a second non-overlapping result (for example, strong watermelon) that is a non-overlapping result of the second specified result (for example, strong watermelon) among the specified results is set,
The privilege granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second overlapping result, based on the fact that the pattern combination for the second specific result has stopped at the valid position, granting a privilege corresponding to the second specific result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the second specified result is given based on the stopping of the pattern combination for the second specified result at the valid position. is a
The gaming machine according to feature BE2, wherein the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means differs between the lottery based on the first specified result and the lottery based on the second specified result.

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is also taken into account in the game characteristics of feature BE2. That is, for example, if the first specified result is more likely to win the transition lottery than the second specified result, the pattern combination for the first specified result is stopped, and the notification by the specific game state notification means is started. If not, the possibility of transition winning becomes higher than when the pattern combination for the second specified result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started, and the first specific pattern is selected. Expectations for the emergence of combinations are increased. On the other hand, when the pattern combination for the second specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started, the effect of surprise when the first specific pattern combination appears after that is enhanced. . As described above, by adding the winning probability of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means and entertaining the stop numbers, the playability of predicting the result of the transition lottery from the stop numbers during the reservation is remarkably improved.

Feature BE4. As the overlapping result, a third overlapping result (eg, chance A overlapping 1) that is an overlapping result with a third specified result (eg, chance A) among the specified results is set;
A third non-overlapping result (e.g., chance A) is set as the non-overlapping result, which is a non-overlapping result of the third specified result (e.g., chance A) among the specified results,
The privilege granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third overlapping result, based on the fact that the pattern combination for the third specific result has stopped at the valid position, granting a benefit corresponding to the third specific result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the third specified result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the third specified result has stopped at the valid position. is a
The ratio of the overlapping result and the non-overlapping result in the lottery by the lottery means is the ratio of the first overlapping result and the first non-overlapping result, and the third overlapping result and the third non-overlapping result. The gaming machine according to feature BE2 or feature BE3, wherein the ratio is different.

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transition result is also taken into consideration in the game characteristics of the feature BE2 and the feature BE3. That is, for example, the ratio of the first overlapping result to the first non-overlapping result is higher than the ratio of the third overlapping result to the third non-overlapping result, and the ratio of overlapping results with the migration result is higher (same stop If the combination of symbols for the first specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started, the third specific result is obtained. There is a higher possibility that the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means than when the pattern combination for the result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started. In other words, in the configuration of feature BE3, if the non-overlapping result is in the specific game state, notification by the specific game state notification means is started in the game. If the pattern combination is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started, the possibility of winning the specific game state is higher than in the case of the pattern combination for the third specific result. As described above, by adding the probability of winning as a result of transition to enjoy the stop numbers, the playability of predicting the result of the transition lottery from the stop numbers during the reservation is remarkably improved.

Feature BE5. As the overlapping result, a fourth overlapping result (for example, middle bell overlapping 1) that is an overlapping result with a fourth specified result (for example, middle bell) among the specified results is set;
As the non-overlapping result, a fourth non-overlapping result (for example, middle bell) that is a non-overlapping result of the fourth specific result (for example, middle bell) among the specific results is set;
The privilege granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fourth overlapping result, based on the fact that the pattern combination for the fourth specific result has stopped at the valid position, granting a privilege corresponding to the fourth specific result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fourth non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the fourth specified result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the fourth specified result has stopped at the valid position. is a
As the specific game state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode, etc.) with different degrees of advantage for the player,
As the transition lottery by the transition lottery means, a first transition lottery that is a transition lottery to a first predetermined state (challenge mode) and a transition lottery to a second predetermined state (attack mode) different from the first predetermined state. A second transition lottery is set,
In the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery executed based on the first specified result, any transition lottery can be won, while the first transition lottery executed based on the fourth specified result and in the second transition lottery, the game machine according to any one of the features BE2 to BE4 is set so as not to be won in either one of the transition lotteries.

According to the above configuration, among the specific game states, the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state include those that do not shift depending on the type of the specific result. That is, in the case of the first identification result, the state can be shifted to either the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state, but in the case of the fourth identification result, the state cannot be shifted to either one. By doing so, when the pattern combination for the first specified result corresponding to the first overlapping result or the first non-overlapping result is stopped, the fourth specified result corresponding to the fourth overlapping result or the fourth non-overlapping result In addition to the viewpoint of whether or not the pattern combination for the result is stopped, whether or not it is reserved, and whether or not the notification by the specific game state notification means is started, the lottery for transition to any predetermined state is performed. From the point of view of whether or not the player was caught, it is possible to play a game in which the subsequent trend can be enjoyed.

Feature BE6. As the overlapping result, a fifth overlapping result (for example, middle bell overlapping 1) that is an overlapping result with a fifth specified result (for example, middle bell) among the specified results is set;
As the non-overlapping result, a fifth non-overlapping result (for example, middle bell) that is a non-overlapping result of the fifth specific result (for example, middle bell) among the specific results is set;
The privilege granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fifth overlapping result, based on the fact that the pattern combination for the fifth specific result has stopped at the valid position, granting a privilege corresponding to the fifth specific result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fifth non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the fifth specified result is given based on the stopping of the pattern combination for the fifth specified result at the valid position. is a
As the specific game state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode, etc.) with different degrees of advantage for the player,
As the transition lottery by the transition lottery means, a first transition lottery that is a transition lottery to a first predetermined state (challenge mode) and a transition lottery to a second predetermined state (super attack mode) different from the first predetermined state. A second transition lottery is set,
In the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery executed based on the first specified result, there is a case where neither transition lottery is won, while the first shift lottery executed based on the fifth specified result The gaming machine according to any one of features BE2 to BE5, wherein at least one of the transition lottery and the second transition lottery is set so that a player wins the transition lottery.

According to the above configuration, among the specific game states, the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state include those that always transition to one of the predetermined states depending on the type of the specific result. In other words, in the case of the first specified result, the state may not shift to either the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state, and in the case of the fifth specified result, the state may shift to either one. By doing so, when the pattern combination for the first specific result corresponding to the first overlapping result or the first non-overlapping result is stopped, the fifth specific result corresponding to the fifth overlapping result or the fifth non-overlapping result In addition to the viewpoint of whether or not the combination of patterns for the result is suspended, whether or not notification by the specific game state notification means is started, and which predetermined state to shift to Also from the point of view, it is possible to play a game that enjoys the subsequent trend.

Feature BE7. The first result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is winning when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order, and
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features BE1 to BE7, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating bodies as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at eye pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circular body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets 9 medals awarded based on winning the first minor win in the game) are awarded, and each of the stop operation means is a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result win is established by operating with , the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second minor win in a 3-bet game) is given,
The manner notification means provides the predetermined notification, based on the lottery result of the lottery means, as the manner notification, the order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. It can be expressed as "characterized by being executable by means", and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Feature BE8. As the specific game state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than the normal game state, a high probability state that is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal game state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features BE1 to BE7, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (premonition mode), which is a lottery for transition to a high probability and is before transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both in the stage before the advantage increases due to the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. . Including such a state, by adopting a configuration in which notification is started by a specific notification means when shifting to the specific game state, the game is finished without noticing that it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid the phenomenon that In other words, if the transition to the high-frequency state is made, the player can be considered to be able to grasp the state transition by being notified of the state. By setting it as the structure notified by the notification start of an information means, it becomes possible to make it grasp|ascertain more suitably the transition to a specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to improve the effect of increasing expectations for the specific game state described in feature BE1.

<Characteristic CA group>
Features CA1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination for the first mode can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop mode. When operated in a second stop operation mode different from the operation mode, the pattern combination for the second mode different from the pattern combination for the first mode can be stopped. ) is set and
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is changed to an advantage for the player based on the fact that the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. transition means for transitioning to a state (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, the reservation means (main controller 101 performs step S609 processing of step S609 by the main controller 101) withholds the transition result winning until the pattern combination for transition stops at the effective position. function) and
with
As the game state, a replay state is set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the replay result is higher than that in the normal game state,
When a specific condition including a winning condition that is satisfied by the reservation means withholding the transition result winning and a non-winning condition that is satisfied without the transition result winning being reserved by the reservation means is satisfied, Replay state transition means (function for executing special RT state processing by the main control device 101) capable of shifting the game state to the replay state is provided,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the operation mode result in the replay state, the mode notification means shifts to the replay state based on the success of the winning condition as the specific condition. If there is, it is easy to execute the mode notification related to the first stop operation mode, and if the replay state is shifted based on the establishment of the non-winning condition as the specific condition, the second stop operation A gaming machine characterized by comprising special mode notification means (function for executing special RT notification processing by a display control device 81) that facilitates execution of the mode notification related to the mode.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege granting means if the rolled number corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the state shifts to an advantageous state for the player, and if the pattern combination for transition does not stop, winning is reserved as a result of the transition.

Furthermore, a replay state (so-called RT state) is set as the game state in which the probability of replay results is higher than that in the normal game state, and the transition to the replay state is made on the condition that winning is reserved as a transition result. In other cases, the state is shifted to a replay state on the condition that winning is not suspended as a result of the transition. Therefore, when transitioning to the replay state, the degree of advantage for the player after that largely depends on whether or not winning as a result of transition is reserved, and the player's interest is considered to be whether or not there is a reservation.

Here, the replay result is a result in which there is no so-called dropout. Therefore, for example, if the presence or absence of the reservation is configured to be performed by means of an effect, etc., the relatively low frequency of the need for eye pressing during the replay state means that the effect of the presence or absence of the reservation may be overlooked. It is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing On the other hand, there is a possibility that a problem may arise in that the stop numbers for winning a prize as a replay result are generally uniform, but the stop numbers may be monotonous.

In this regard, in the above configuration, by changing the mode notification when the result of the operation mode wins during the replay state, the pattern combination for the first mode is stopped or the pattern combination for the second mode is resumed. A game has been added in which the presence or absence of the reservation is predicted depending on whether the game is to be stopped. In other words, the presence or absence of a reservation that the player is interested in during the replay state is suggested by the stop roll, and by making the player grasp it, not only is it possible to avoid the monotony of the stop roll in the replay state, but also the It is possible to anticipate a performance effect such as dramatically improving the degree of attention to the stop roll. As a result of the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature CA2. As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
transition lottery means (function of executing the first specific winning process by the main controller 101) for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result; ,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reserve means (main control means) for limiting the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means. a function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101);
The gaming machine according to feature CA1, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the execution of the lottery for transition to the specific game state related to the mode notification is restricted in a situation where winning as a transition result is reserved. That is, in the re-gaming state, if the execution of the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state regarding the mode notification is restricted, the reservation of the transition result winning is confirmed, and the execution of the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state regarding the mode notification is restricted. If not, it is determined that the transfer result election is not reserved. In other words, if the situation is unfavorable to the player, that is, the execution of the transition lottery is restricted, it is a favorable situation for the player, that is, the winning of the transition result is reserved. If it is a favorable situation for the player, it will be an unfavorable situation for the player that the transition result winning is not reserved, and in any case it will be a favorable situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to achieve well-balanced playability.

Feature CA3. The pattern combination for the first mode is formed by a first number of predetermined specific patterns stopping at a specific position (middle line L2) that can be visually recognized through the display unit on each of the circular bodies. ,
Characteristic CA1 characterized in that the pattern combination for the second mode is established by stopping a second number of the specific patterns, which is smaller than the first number, at the specific position on each of the revolving bodies. Or the gaming machine according to feature CA2.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the symbol combination for the first mode and the symbol combination for the second mode can be grasped by the number of stopped specific symbols. By doing so, for example, it is possible to make it easier to understand, for example, a game in which the presence or absence of a reservation is predicted based on the difference in the number of stop rolls, and the determination is made based on the number of stops of a specific pattern.

Feature CA4. The gaming machine according to feature CA3, wherein the second number is zero.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the stop rolls when the pattern combination for the first mode stops and the case where the pattern combination for the second mode stops determines whether or not the specific pattern stops at the specific position. or a clearer difference. Therefore, it is possible to make the game simpler in predicting whether or not there is a reservation.

Furthermore, for example, in the above-mentioned predictive game, if it is not desired to stop the specific pattern at the specific position any more, with the above configuration, it is possible, for example, not to win the operation mode result any more. Without using such a complicated configuration, it is possible to adjust whether or not the specific pattern is stopped depending on the difference in the stop operation mode, and the predictable game can be realized with a simpler configuration.

Feature CA5. a specifying means (black BAR stop counter) for counting the number of times the specified pattern stops at the specified position over a plurality of games in the replay state;
When the number counted by the specifying means reaches a specified number, the special mode notifying means, if the replay state is shifted based on the establishment of the non-winning condition as the specified condition, the Means for disabling the execution of the mode notification related to the first stop operation mode (executing processing for setting the black BAR non-stop pressing order notification effect from the notification scenario and the value of the black BAR stop counter in the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to feature CA4, characterized in that it has a function to

According to the above configuration, when the number of stops of the specific symbols reaches the specific number in the replay state in which winning is not reserved as a transition result, the first stop operation mode corresponding to the combination of symbols for the first mode is performed. Notification will not be executed. As a result, the first number of the specific patterns will not stop as the pattern combination for the first mode, so that the specific pattern will not stop at the specific position as the pattern combination for the second mode. As a result, the number of specific patterns stopped at a specific position does not exceed a specific number, thereby predicting that the transition result winning is not reserved, and conversely, the number of specific patterns stopped at a specific position exceeds a specific number. Through this, it is possible to let the player know that the transfer result election is reserved.

Feature CA6. The special mode notifying means, even if the number counted by the specifying means is less than the specified number, the re-gaming state is shifted based on the fact that the non-winning condition is established as the specified condition. and when the first number is added to the number counted by the specifying means and the number exceeds the specified number, means (display control device The gaming machine according to feature CA5, characterized in that, in 81, the processing of setting the pressing order notification effect for non-stopping of the black BAR from the type of special replay and the value of the black BAR stop counter. .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent a phenomenon in which the number of specific patterns stopped at a specific position exceeds a specific number even though the transfer result winning is not reserved by the reservation means. Therefore, in a game in which the presence or absence of reservation is predicted from the number of stops, contradiction between the number of stops and the presence or absence of reservation is less likely to occur.

Feature CA7. As the operation mode result, a plurality of operation mode results are provided in which the number of the specific patterns stopped at the specific position when the pattern combination for the first mode stops,
Characteristic features CA3 to CA6, characterized in that the number of the specific patterns stopped at the specific position when the pattern combination for the second mode stops for any of the results of the plurality of operation modes is 0. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which the presence or absence of a reservation is predicted based on the number of stops of a specific pattern, the number of increases in the number of stops is made different depending on the type of operation mode result, thereby diversifying the rate of increase while achieving the characteristic CA5. If it is desired not to increase the number of stoppages and the presence/absence of a reservation, it is only necessary to notify the mode of the second stop operation mode. can do.

Feature CA8. Means capable of changing the content (background color) of the specific effect (background color) in the specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) according to the number counted by the specifying means (processing for setting the effect at the time of addition by the display control device 81 A gaming machine according to any one of features CA3 to CA7, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the number of specific symbols stopped at specific positions from the contents of the predetermined effect by the specific notification means, and the player does not need to count the number by himself. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to play a game in which the presence or absence of reservation is predicted from the number of stops.

Feature CA9. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the operation mode and each of the orbiting bodies is stopped in the first stop operation mode, the stop timing of the predetermined orbiting body among the orbiting bodies is the first timing. , the pattern combination for the first mode is stopped, while if the stop timing of the predetermined circular body is a second timing different from the first timing, the pattern combination for the first mode is different. Any one of features CA3 to CA8, characterized in that, as a pattern combination, a pattern combination for a low number in which the number of the specific patterns stopped at the specific position is smaller than the first number is stopped. game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the stop operation mode matches the first stop operation mode (for example, even if the stop operation mode is the stop order and matches the first stop order), the first The number of specific symbols does not necessarily stop at a specific position, and the timing of the stop operation, that is, the first number of specific symbols stops depending on the timing of the eye pressing operation. Also, it is different whether or not the combination of low number of specific symbols is stopped. In this way, it is possible to stop the specific pattern by the player's own stop operation and make the player feel as if he/she has won the winning as a result of the transition, and it is possible to improve the playability during the replay state.

Feature CA10. In a game that is to be shifted to the replay state when the winning condition is established, each of the revolving bodies stops and shifts to the replay state when the non-winning condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of the features CA1 to CA9, wherein in the game, a stop result for stopping on each of the revolving bodies is common.

According to the above configuration, it is not possible to determine whether or not winning is reserved as a result of the transition from the game stop result that triggers the transition to the replay state. Therefore, the playability of predicting and grasping the presence or absence of a reservation from the stop result during the replay state is not spoiled.

Feature CA11. Grasping means (special RT counter) for grasping the number of games in the replay state shifted due to the establishment of the non-winning condition;
Means (main controller 101) for returning from the replay state to the game state before shifting to the replay state based on the number of games grasped by the grasping means reaching a predetermined number. function to execute processing to return to the original game state based on the special RT counter becoming 0 in );
The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA10, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to limit the replay state in which the transition result winning is not reserved. Therefore, it is possible to solve the inconvenience that the replay state with a high probability of winning the replay result continues endlessly even though the transition result winning is not reserved.

Regarding the "predetermined number", if the number is "larger than the denominator of the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will result in the operation mode result", then at least once during the replay state on average. Winning can be expected as a result of the operation mode, and there is an advantage that it is possible to suitably realize the game property using the stop roll. Conversely, if the "predetermined number" is "a number smaller than the denominator of the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be the result of the operation mode", it is difficult to win the operation mode result during the replay state. Therefore, there is an advantage that the rarity of the stop roll based on the operation mode result can be increased, and the degree of attention to the stop roll can be increased.

Feature CA12. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
A lottery that is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and has the same winning probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, and the specific game state. A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery (a function of executing the first special combination process by the main control device 101) is provided,
Any one of the characteristics CA1 to CA11, wherein as the transition result, there is provided a first transition result (second BB) in which the probability of winning by the lottery means differs depending on the set value set by the setting means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped, the state shifts to an advantageous state for the player, and the pattern combination for transition must be stopped. For example, in addition to the game feature that the winning result of the transition is reserved, a specific game state is provided in which, when winning the result of the operation mode, the stop roll is changed depending on whether or not there is a mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game, and the game performance is greatly improved. improves. Moreover, regarding the specific game state, the set values that cause changes in the rate of increase or decrease of the game media are set so that there is no difference in the winning rate of the transition lottery, and there is a greater element of luck regarding whether or not you win. The fairness of the game is ensured by being enhanced. On the other hand, if there is no difference due to the set values, the pleasure of selecting one game machine from a plurality of game machines installed in the game hall, that is, the prediction of which set value is set. There is also a possibility that the enjoyment of the game played while doing so may be lost. Therefore, in the above configuration, by providing the first transition result in which the winning probability differs depending on the set value as the transition result, the game in which the set value is predicted can be suspended depending on the stop roll during the replay state. It is possible to entertain the game characteristics interlocked with the specific game state while predicting the game.

In addition, regarding the "specific game state", "as the specific game state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than in the normal game state, a high frequency state in which it is easier to shift to the high frequency state than in the normal game state. At least one of a probability state and a pre-transition state (precursor mode) that has won a lottery for transition to the high-frequency state or the high probability and is before transition may be set. In this case, " According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the game property is improved. It is a stage, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state.By including such a state, when the state is shifted to the specific game state, the specific notification means starts notification , it is possible to preferably avoid the phenomenon of ending the game without noticing that it has transitioned to the specific game state. It is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the state of the previous stage of such a high frequency state is notified by the start of notification of the specific notification means. As a result, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means." It should be noted that the variations of the "specific game state" are the same for each of the following features.

Feature CA13. As the transition result, a second transition result (first BB) having a common winning probability determined by the lottery means is provided regardless of the setting value set by the setting means,
Said re-game state shifting means is characterized by shifting to said common re-game state even when either of said first transition result winning and said second transition result winning is retained by said retaining means. The gaming machine according to feature CA12.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to complicate the game in which the setting value is predicted while predicting whether or not there is a reservation in the replay state. In other words, even if it is determined whether or not there is a reservation in the replay state, is it the result of the first transition that has a difference in the winning probability due to the set value or the second transition that has no difference in the winning probability due to the set value? As if it is a result, the number of branches in the prediction of the setting value increases, and the game in which the setting value is predicted can be made more diverse, thereby improving the playability.

Feature CA14. As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
The transition lottery means can execute a transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the transition result winning,
Based on the fact that the game state shifts to the specific game state, the specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start the notification, and based on the end of the specific game state, the specific Specific game state notification means (function to execute section display first process to section display fourth process by main control device 101) that terminates notification by turning off the notification means,
The specific game state notification means is
When the game result that triggered the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is a result that does not include the transition result, the game in which the prize is established as a result of the transition lottery is set as the start game, and the operation of the game following the start game is permitted. First means for starting notification by the specific notification means at an earlier timing (function for executing section display first processing by main controller 101);
When the game result that triggered the transition lottery by the transition lottery means includes the transition result, the game in which the transition result win is established is set as the start game, and the operation of the game following the start game is permitted. Second means for starting notification by the specific notification means at the earlier timing (function for executing section display fourth processing by main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA13, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped, the state shifts to an advantageous state for the player, and the pattern combination for transition must be stopped. For example, in addition to the game feature that the winning result of the transition is reserved, a specific game state is provided in which, when winning the result of the operation mode, the stop roll is changed depending on whether or not there is a mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game, and the game performance is greatly improved. improves.

In such a configuration, when a transition to a specific game state occurs, notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the notification also ends. That is, if the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state. The sense of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who sits on the game table after finishing the game can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game with the special notification.

Moreover, the notification by the specific notification means is started at least before the lottery result that triggered the start of the specific gaming state permits the operation of the game following the start game in which the winning game is won, and the start timing of the notification is limited. It is reported. More specifically, if the lottery result that triggered the start is a result that does not include the transition result and the transition result winning is not reserved, the operation of the game following the game in which the lottery result wins. If the result of the lottery that triggered the start is a result that includes the transfer result, and if the result of the transfer result win can be withheld, the next game in which the transfer result winning was established Notification is started before the operation of the game is permitted. In other words, basically, although notification is started in the game of the lottery result winning that triggered the start of the specific game state, if the transition result winning is reserved, the specific game until the transition result winning is established The start of notification by the state notification means is restricted. Then, for example, in a game that has a game result that can trigger the start of a specific game state, if notification by the specific game state notification means is not started, (1) the transition lottery to the specific game state has been won and If the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, or (2) if the transfer lottery to the specific game state is not won and the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, or (3) the specific game Either the lottery for transition to the state or the result of the transition has not been won. In this respect, as in the above feature CA1, it is possible to guess whether or not the transition result has been won from the stop result of the operation mode result. If the notification has not been started, it is possible to narrow down whether the above case (1) or (2) or (3) is the case from the stop result of the operation mode result. By doing so, it is possible to make the game of guessing whether or not there is a reservation based on the stop result more advanced, and to improve the interest.

In particular, as in the feature CA12 and the feature CA13, as a transition result, in a configuration having a first transition result with a difference in the winning probability due to the set value and a second transition result with no difference, winning the transition lottery to the specific game state If it is assumed that the probability does not differ depending on the set value, the first transition result cannot perform the transition lottery to the specific game state, and the second transition result can not perform the transition lottery to the specific game state. It becomes a configuration that can perform Then, in cases (1) and (2) above, if the first transition result is reserved, it will be case (2), and if the second transition result is reserved, it will be case (1). Therefore, it is possible to narrow down which case it is based on the relationship with the type of migration result.

Feature CA15. As a result of the operation mode,
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result can be stopped as the pattern combination for the first mode. When the operation means is operated in the second stop operation mode, the symbol combination for the second mode is a pattern combination corresponding to a second result different from the first result, and A first operation mode result (for example, a push order bell) that allows the second mode pattern combination different from the pattern combination of , to be stopped;
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the third mode pattern combination corresponding to the third result can be stopped as the first mode pattern combination, and each of the stop operation means can be stopped. When the operation means is operated in the second stop operation mode, the pattern combination for the second mode is a pattern combination corresponding to the third result, which is different from the pattern combination in the third mode. A first operation mode result (e.g., special replay) that allows the pattern combination of the fourth mode to be stopped is set,
The special mode notification means performs the mode notification when the operation mode result is the second operation mode result, and does not perform the mode notification when the operation mode result is the first operation mode result. The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA14, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, in the game of predicting the presence or absence of a reservation from the stop roll when the operation mode result is won, if the operation mode result is the second operation mode result, the stop roll is adjusted by the mode notification, If it is the result of the first operation mode, the mode notification is not performed and the stop result is not adjusted. The result of the first operation mode and the result of the second operation mode may differ in the winning result depending on the stop operation mode of the first operation mode result, while the result of the second operation mode is the same regardless of the stop operation mode. wins. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game in which the presence or absence of a reservation is predicted from the stop result at the time of winning as a result of the operation mode, within a range that does not cause a change in the player's profit. Therefore, in setting the game to be predicted, there is no need to consider the payout rate and the like, and the setting can be made in anticipation of a pure performance effect.

Feature CA16. As a result of the operation mode, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination for the first mode can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means can be stopped. As the second stop operation mode, when operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order, the pattern combination for the second mode can be stopped (for example, a push order bell). is set and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the order correspondence result, the manner notification means sets the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification. The game machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA15, characterized in that it can be executed by a predetermined notification means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating bodies as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at eye pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circular body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bet Nine medals awarded based on winning the first minor win in the game) are awarded, and each of the stop operation means is a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result win is established by operating with , the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second minor win in a 3-bet game) is given,
The manner notification means provides the predetermined notification, based on the lottery result of the lottery means, as the manner notification, the order notification (pushing order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. It can be expressed as "characterized by being executable by means", and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

<Characteristic CB group>
Features CB1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means operates in the first stop operation mode. is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the above, the symbol combination corresponds to a second result different from the first result, and the symbol combination of the second mode, which is different from the pattern combination of the first mode. A first operation mode result (for example, push order bell) that allows the combination of symbols to be stopped;
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means operates in the third stop operation mode. When operated in a fourth stop operation mode different from the above, the symbol combination corresponding to the third result and different from the pattern combination of the third mode can be stopped. A second operation mode result (for example, special replay) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the first operation mode, the first mode notification (push order notification) regarding the stop operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is selected as the first mode notification (press order notification). a first mode notification means (a function of executing the pushing process by the main controller 101) executable by the notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 in the instruction monitor 68);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the second operation mode, the second mode notification (press order notification effect) regarding the stop operation mode including the third stop operation mode and the fourth stop operation mode is performed. 2nd mode notification means (function of executing the pressing order notification process by the display control device 81) executable by the 2 notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
with
a first specific state (advantageous interval) in which execution of both the first mode notification by the first mode notification means and the second mode notification by the second mode notification means is allowed;
a second specific state (normal section) in which execution of the first mode notification by the first mode notification means is restricted, while execution of the second mode notification by the second mode notification means is permitted;
is set and
In the second specific state, based on the second mode notification by the second mode notification means, suggesting means for suggesting the degree of advantage after the second specific state (executing special RT notification processing by display control device 81 A game machine characterized by having a function to play.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the number corresponds to the lottery result, a first operation mode result is set in which the winning result is different depending on the stop operation mode of the revolving body. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the degree of advantage is changed depending on whether or not the first mode is notified when the result of the first operation mode is won. In addition, since the result of the second operation mode in which the result of winning is common depending on the stopping operation mode of the orbiting body is also set, the second mode notification at the time of winning the result of the second operation mode is set as the first specific state. By interweaving the information with the notification and generating it, etc., it is possible to realize a game property with suppressed gambling property without excessively changing the advantage.

In such a configuration, a second specific state is set in which the execution of the first mode notification is restricted and the execution of the second mode notification is permitted. By setting such a second specific state, it is possible to realize a game property in which the mode notification does not cause a change in the degree of advantage even when the mode notification is performed, and the mode notification only aims to acquire game media. It is possible to contribute to the creation of new game properties that break away from conventional game properties. On the other hand, although players may want to enjoy such new game features, it is not that they do not want to acquire game media, etc., and the fact is that interest in the degree of advantage is still high. It can be said. Therefore, in the second specific state, if the mode notification is used to suggest the degree of advantage after the second specific state, the game of predicting the subsequent development by the mode notification is added, and the mode notification is added. It is possible to improve the playability in the second specific state in which the advantage itself does not change. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Feature CB2. The first specific state is a state in which at least the execution frequency of the first mode notification by the first mode notification means can be higher than in the normal game state,
a first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery for determining whether or not to transition the gaming state to the first specific state (function for executing the first specific combination process by the main controller 101);
The notification by the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is started based on winning the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means, and the specific notification is based on the end of the first specific state. Specific notification execution means for ending notification by means (function for executing section display first processing to section display fourth processing by main controller 101);
with
The specific notification executing means does not perform notification by the specific notification means in the second specific state even if the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is won. The gaming machine according to feature CB1.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration having the first specific state in which execution of the first mode notification and the second mode notification is permitted, and the second specific state in which only the second mode notification is permitted to be performed, the first Since the specific state is set so that the execution frequency of the first mode notification can be higher than that in the normal game state, the player expects to shift to the first specific state while playing the game. Conceivable. In that respect, when the first transition lottery to the first specific state is won, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the first specific state ends, the notification by the specific notification means ends, so the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means It becomes possible to confirm whether it is in the first specific state. By doing so, for example, it is possible to suppress the game from ending without noticing that the first transition lottery to the first specific state has been won, and the game can be suppressed. It is possible to eliminate the bias in profit between the player who ends the game and the succeeding player who plays the game after that.

As described above, if the specific notification means for clearly indicating whether or not the first specific state is provided, the effect of securing the fairness of the game as described above can be expected. Since the player may pay attention only to the specific notification means regardless of the occurrence of the effect, etc., the effect of the effect may be reduced. Therefore, in the above configuration, since the specific notification means is not notified in the second specific state in the first place, the result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means, that is, the start of the notification of the specific notification means It is possible to urge the player, who has been paying a lot of attention, to shift his attention to the second aspect notification that occurs in the second specific state, and to determine the degree of advantage after that based on the second aspect notification. It is possible to suitably realize the game property of predicting the.

Feature CB3. The suggesting means performs the second mode notification for the third stop operation mode and the second mode notification for the fourth stop operation mode, after the second specific state. The gaming machine according to feature CB1 or feature CB2, characterized in that the degrees of advantage are set to be different.

According to the above configuration, the suggesting means performs the stop operation in the third stop operation mode and stops the pattern combination in the third mode, and also performs the stop operation in the fourth stop operation mode and enters the fourth mode. The advantage after the second specific state is different between when the combination of symbols is stopped. In this way, if a suggestion is made using the stop result, even if the common third result wins, interest in the stop operation is increased and the subsequent advantage is predicted. The playability can be suitably improved.

Feature CB4. The suggesting means is capable of executing a specific effect (change of background color) when the second mode notification of the third stop operation mode is performed and the pattern combination of the third mode is stopped; When the second mode notification for the stop operation mode is performed and the pattern combination of the fourth mode is stopped, the specific effect can be executed, while the second mode notification for the third stop operation mode and when the pattern combination of the fourth mode is stopped, the specific effect is not executed, the second mode notification of the fourth stop operation mode is performed, and the pattern combination of the third mode is stopped. The gaming machine according to feature CB3, wherein the advantage after the second specific state can be suggested by not executing the specific effect when the game is played.

According to the above configuration, the suggesting means executes a specific effect as a kind of suggestion if the stop operation is performed in accordance with the second mode notification, but does not execute the specific effect if the stop operation is performed without complying with the second mode report. . In other words, a suggestion is established when the set of the second mode notification and the stop result match. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game that does not follow the notification of the second mode even though all winning results are the third results, and it is possible to favorably implement the game property using the suggesting means.

Feature CB5. A second transition lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for executing a second transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game state to the second specific state,
As a lottery result by the second transition lottery means, a first result that does not shift to the first specific state after the second specific state (for example, a specific role that is not won in the second BB win, bonus, attack mode, etc.) , the gaming machine according to any one of features CB1 to CB4, characterized by including a second result (for example, winning the first BB) that can shift to the first specific state after the second specific state.

According to the above configuration, in the second specific state, there are a pattern in which the transition to the first specific state is not performed after the second specific state and a pattern in which the transition to the first specific state is performed after the second specific state. It is also possible to suggest whether or not to shift to the first specific state after that by using the suggestion by the second mode notification performed in the second specific state. In particular, the first specific state is a state in which both types of notification are permitted, and the degree of advantage changes depending on the type of notification. It is possible to easily associate the first specific state with the suggestion by the mode notification.

Feature CB6. Characteristic CB5, wherein the suggesting means is capable of suggesting whether or not to transition to the first specific state after the second specific state as the degree of advantage after the second specific state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature CB5 can be exhibited by a specific configuration.

Feature CB7. A payout result in which a predetermined number of game media are awarded as the privilege by the privilege granting means is set as a lottery result by the lottery means,
As the game state, a third specific state (bonus state) is set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined payout result is higher than that in the normal game state,
When the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is the first result, transitioning to the third specific state after the second specific state,
Characteristic CB5 characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second result, the state is shifted to the third specific state after the second specific state, and then the state is shifted to the first specific state. Or the gaming machine according to feature CB6.

According to the above configuration, a predetermined number of game media are paid out if a prize is awarded as a result of the payout. Such a third specific state is set to occur after the second specific state in both the first result and the second result, and the first specific state is generated after the third specific state by the first result and the second result. It was made different whether or not to shift to. In this way, even if the transition to the second specific state is based on any result, at least the third specific state will occur after the second specific state, and expectations for the second specific state will be heightened. It is possible to raise it further.

Feature CB8. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
The probability that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means will be the first result may differ depending on the set value set by the setting means, and the lottery result by the second transition lottery means may differ from the second result. The gaming machine according to any one of features CB5 to CB7, wherein the probability of becoming equal is common regardless of the set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the probability of the first result not transitioning to the first specific state after the second specific state differs depending on the set value that changes the increase/decrease rate of the game medium, etc. The probability of the second result of transitioning to one specific state is the same regardless of the set value. That is, for the first specific state in which the advantage level changes due to the first mode notification (also the second mode notification), the transition probability can be the same regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to make the element of luck more important as to whether or not to shift to the first specific state, and to ensure the fairness of the game based on the first specific state. On the other hand, if there is no difference due to the set values, the pleasure of selecting one game machine from a plurality of game machines installed in the game hall, that is, the prediction of which set value is set. There is also a possibility that the enjoyment of the game played while doing so may be lost. Therefore, in the above configuration, if there is no transition to the first specific state after the second specific state, a difference due to the set value may occur, so that the enjoyment of playing the game while predicting the set value is not spoiled. Within the range, the fairness of the game based on the first specific state can be ensured.

Feature CB9. A payout result in which a predetermined number of game media are awarded as the privilege by the privilege granting means is set as a lottery result by the lottery means,
As the game state, a third specific state (bonus state) is set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined payout result is higher than that in the normal game state,
A second transition lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for executing a second transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game state to the second specific state,
As a lottery result by the second transition lottery means, a third result (a specific combination that is not won in the bonus, attack mode, etc.) that does not shift to the third specific state after the second specific state, and the second specific The gaming machine according to any one of features CB1 to CB8, characterized by including a fourth result (for example, winning the 1st BB) that can shift to the third specific state after the state.

According to the above configuration, a predetermined number of game media are paid out if a prize is awarded as a result of the payout. By setting such a third specific state and having the above configuration, in the second specific state, a pattern that does not shift to the third specific state after the second specific state, and a pattern that does not shift to the third specific state after the second specific state Since there is a pattern of shifting to the third specific state after that, using the suggestion by the second mode notification performed in the second specific state, it is also possible to suggest whether to shift to the third specific state after that. is also possible.

Feature CB10. Characteristic CB9, wherein the suggesting means is capable of suggesting whether or not to transition to the third specific state after the second specific state as the degree of advantage after the second specific state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature CB9 can be exhibited by a specific configuration.

Feature CB11. As the lottery result of the lottery means, a replay result is set as the bonus, which is to be given as the bonus by the bonus giving means,
the second operation mode result is a specific replay result of the replay results;
As the game state, a plurality of replay states are set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means wins the predetermined replay result is higher than that in the normal game state,
Means (main controller) for shifting to a specific re-game state in which the probability of winning the specific re-game result among the plurality of re-game states is higher than the normal game state based on the transition to the second specific state A gaming machine according to any one of features CB1 to CB10, characterized in that it has a function of executing special RT state processing according to 101).

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a plurality of replay states are set, the specific replay state among them is set as the second specific state. In the specific re-game state, the probability of winning the specific re-game result as the result of the second operation mode increases. By using the replay state in this way, it is possible to change the winning probability of the game result without using the so-called jackpot state such as the above-described third specific state. It is possible to increase the possibility of winning as a result of the second operation mode.

Feature CB12. The result of the first operation mode is that when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result is When it becomes possible to stop and each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the second stop operation corresponding to the second result is performed. The pattern combination of the mode is stoppable,
The result of the second operation mode is that when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result is When it becomes possible to stop and each of the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode, the fourth stop corresponding to the third result is operated. The pattern combination of the mode can be stopped,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the first operation mode or the result of the second operation mode, the first mode notification means determines the first stop order and the second stop order, or the third stop order. Characteristic CB1, characterized in that the first order notification (push order notification effect) regarding the stop order including the stop order and the fourth stop order can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification. The game machine according to any one of CB11.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of circulating bodies as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at eye pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the circular body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "the result of the first operation mode is that when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the first mode is When the game is stopped, the first winning result is established, and the first privilege (for example, 9 medals awarded based on the winning of the first minor combination in a 3-bet game) is awarded by the privilege giving means, and each of the stops is performed. When the operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the second mode is stopped and the second result winning is achieved. is established, and a second privilege different from the first privilege (for example, three medals awarded based on winning a second minor win in a 3-bet game) is awarded by the privilege granting means;
The result of the second operation mode is that when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode is stopped and the third result is obtained. A prize is established, a third privilege (replay) is granted by the privilege granting means, and each of the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode. If it is done, the pattern combination of the fourth mode is stopped, the third result winning is established, and the third privilege is granted by the privilege granting means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the first operation mode or the result of the second operation mode, the first mode notification means determines the first stop order and the second stop order, or the third stop order. and the fourth stop order, including the fourth stop order, can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification." In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the award.

<Characteristic DA group>
Feature DA1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order, and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in the stop order of 2,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is given by a predetermined notification means (the first display segment on the instruction monitor 68). N1 to 7th display segment N7) has an executable order notification means (function for executing push order processing by main controller 101),
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state is a predetermined specific result (first specific role processing by main controller 101 function) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state (the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 is executed function) and
a first grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific gaming state;
a second grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state;
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific game state, the first end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (normal A function that executes the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means in the specific game state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times , a second end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (function for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101);
an increasing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the specific condition is established in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions ascertained by the first ascertaining means and the remaining number of times ascertained by the second ascertaining means has reached the upper limit number of times, or When the specific situation occurs by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition, it is possible to cause a specific event that is different from the event based on the increase process and that can be beneficial to the player. Specific event execution means (a function of executing each process for special notification in a situation where the excess flag is set by the main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the number corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the revolving body, and the presence or absence of order notification regarding the stopping order. A specific game state is provided such that the degree of advantage varies depending on the game. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, and when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific game state, the processing for increasing the remaining number of times of the specific game state, so-called addition can occur, the playability of each game is greatly improved.

However, the original game of the so-called slot machine is to aim at the pattern of the revolving body and stop it to obtain a privilege. The playability may become sparse, and if the specific game state using order notification is allowed to be executed without limit, there is a possibility that the payout rate of balls may exceed the payout rate intended by the designer. Therefore, in the above configuration, regardless of the remaining number of times in the specific game state, the game ends when the upper limit number of times is reached. By doing so, it is possible to make the game property using the order notification a game property accompanying the above-mentioned original game property, and to fully enjoy both game properties.

However, if the upper limit number of times is defined as described above, in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number of times has already reached the upper limit number of times, even if the specific condition is satisfied, no extra charge will occur. A game in such a situation becomes a so-called digestive game, and the enjoyment of the game can be extremely reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number of times has already reached the upper limit, or when the increase process based on the establishment of a specific condition results in a specific situation, the increase process (addition) is performed. A specific event that is different from the event and that can be beneficial to the player occurs. By doing so, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the addition is not performed or it is meaningless even if the addition is performed, and the fun of each game is increased even in the above-mentioned specific situation. It is possible to Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve interest.

Regarding the "first result" and "second result", "the first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means It may be expressed as "a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode". In this case, "stopping order" should be read as "stop operation mode", "order notification" should be read as "mode notification", and "order notification means" should be read as "mode notification means".

Feature DA2. The gaming machine according to feature DA1, wherein the specific event is an event that is not related to the occurrence probability, occurrence frequency, and occurrence number of the order notification.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to further ensure consistency with setting the upper limit number of times and not performing the increasing process.

The above configuration can also be expressed as "the occurrence probability, the occurrence frequency, and the number of occurrences of the order notification do not change depending on whether the specific event occurs or not".

Feature DA3. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
The gaming machine according to feature DA1 or feature DA2, wherein the specific event executing means performs, as the specific event, suggestion notification suggesting information of a set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, since the setting value suggestive information is presented as the specific event, the player can use it as a basis for deciding whether to continue the game after the specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times and ends. That is, it can be determined that the game should be terminated after the end of the specific game state if the suggestion information indicates a low setting, and that the game should be continued even after the specific game state is ended if the suggestion information indicates a high setting. Therefore, it can be said that the suggestive notification of the set value is useful for the player who desires an increase in the game media and does not want the game media to decrease.

Feature DA4. The gaming machine according to feature DA3, wherein the specific condition has a common establishment probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the increase process has a common occurrence probability regardless of the set value. That is, in a situation where the upper limit number of times has been reached, the specific condition that triggers the increase process occurs with a common occurrence probability regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to make the fact that the setting value suggestion notification is performed strongly related to the element of luck. As a result, for example, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconveniences such as, for example, the higher the setting, the more likely it is that the chance of suggestive notification of the set value will occur, so that the suggestive notification does not substantially occur at low setting.

Moreover, since the establishment probability of the specific condition is common regardless of the set value as described above, the possibility that the specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times can be the same regardless of the set value. In other words, the probability itself of occurrence of a specific situation in which the setting value suggestive notification can be performed is also common regardless of the setting value, and the setting value is not involved in the occurrence rate of the setting value suggestive notification. becomes possible.

Feature DA5. The specific condition when the increase processing is performed can be satisfied based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result,
A probability of establishment of the specific condition when the increase processing is performed differs depending on the type of the special result,
Characteristics DA1 to DA4 characterized in that the type of the specified result that has a higher probability of meeting the specific condition when the increase process is performed tends to have a higher probability of meeting the specific condition when the specific event occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, the probability of a special result and the increase processing being performed and the probability of a special result and a specific event occurring are linked. By doing so, it is possible to easily understand that a specific event occurs instead of performing the increase processing based on the special result. Therefore, for example, in a specific situation, in the event that a special result is won with a high probability of performing an increase process, it is possible to heighten expectations for the occurrence of a specific event in advance, thereby increasing the player's mind. By making preparations, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to a specific event.

Feature DA6. As the specific game state, a plurality of types of predetermined states including a first predetermined state (attack mode) and a second predetermined state (specialized zone) different from the first predetermined state are set,
The specific condition in the case where the increase processing is performed is such that even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of special result, the establishment probability differs between the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state. can be,
In the specific game state, the higher the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the increase process is performed, the higher the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the specific event occurs. A gaming machine described in DA5.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the probability of performing the increase process changes depending on the type of specific game state (predetermined state) even for the same type of special result, the probability of the occurrence of a specific event is also the type of specific game state (predetermined state). state), and is linked with the case of increase processing. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making it easier for the user to understand that a specific event will occur instead of performing the increase processing based on the special result.

Feature DA7. A special state (VB mode, specialized zone) in which the minimum number of continuous games is set is set as the specific game state,
During the specific game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined special condition, a special transition means for shifting the specific game state to the special state (for example, by the main controller 101 to set the VB notification flag function to execute processing),
The specific event executing means is capable of causing the specific event when the special condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is brought about by shifting to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. The game machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA6, characterized in that

If the transition to the special state occurs during the specific game state, the special state continues over the minimum number of continuous games. It can be regarded as equivalent to performing the processing for increasing the number of times. Then, it may be meaningless for the player to shift to the special state in the specific situation or to enter the specific situation by shifting to the special state. Therefore, in the above configuration, even such a special state can be treated as a target of a specific event, thereby avoiding the sense of meaninglessness.

Feature DA8. The specific condition when the increase processing is performed can be satisfied based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result,
The specific condition when the increase processing is performed is that even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of special result, the probability of establishment of the special state is higher than that of other states in the specific game state. is a configuration in which
The establishment probability of the specific condition when the specific event occurs is also higher in the special state than in other states in the specific game state,
When the specific event execution means causes the specific event when the special condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by shifting to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, The gaming machine according to feature DA7, wherein transition to the special state is allowed based on the establishment of the special condition.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the increase processing is likely to be performed when transitioning to the special state, the specific event is generated when the transition to the special state occurs in a specific situation, or when the transition to the special state results in a specific situation. In this case, the transition to the special state itself is permitted. Therefore, the configuration allows the occurrence of the specific event even during the special state while causing the specific event to occur when the special state transitions. In this way, by setting the special state to a state in which the increase processing is likely to be performed and a state in which the specific event is likely to occur, the transition to the special state during the specific game state can be performed when the specific situation or the specific situation approaches. It is possible to make the player look forward even in a difficult situation.

Feature DA9. When the specific condition is established in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition, or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition Storage means for storing number information corresponding to the number of times to be increased to number information storage means (number of lost games EG) (function for executing processing for adding the number of games to be added to the number of lost games EG by the main control unit 101) with
The specific event execution means according to any one of characteristics DA1 to DA8, characterized in that the specific event execution means can cause the specific event based on the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is met in a specific situation, a specific event may occur based on the number of times the increase processing is performed. By doing so, it is possible to generate a specific event as compensation for the privilege that should have been obtained by the increase processing, for example, the greater the number of times information, the more likely the specific event will occur.

Feature DA10. The number information stored in the number information storage means is stored at least until the specific game state in which the specific event occurs transitions to the normal game state, and the stored information is stored. In the situation where the specific condition is newly established in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase processing based on the establishment of the specific condition, the above-mentioned can be updated by adding the number of times information corresponding to the number of times increased when the increase processing is performed to the stored number of times information;
The specific event execution means, when shifting from the specific game state to the normal game state, indicates that it is possible to cause the specific event based on the number information stored in the number information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature DA9.

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is established multiple times in the specific situation, the number of times information when the increase processing is performed is accumulated, and based on the total number of times information, the specific event occurs at the end of the specific game state. . By doing so, in the configuration of the feature DA9, even if the number of times information based on the satisfaction of each specific condition is small, it is possible to cause the specific event by satisfying the specific condition a plurality of times. You can keep your hopes up.

In particular, if the specific situation occurs relatively early after entering the specific game state, a game in which the number of executions of the specific game state reaches the maximum number of times, that is, a game that can be a so-called digestion game, is performed for a long period of time. It will happen. In that regard, by adopting a configuration in which a specific event can occur by accumulating multiple increment processes, as in the above configuration, the more games that can be the completion game, the more likely the specific event will occur, making it feel like a completion game. can be suppressed.

Feature DA11. The specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event each time the specific condition is satisfied, and the second end means changes the specific game state to the normal game state. The gaming machine according to feature DA10, characterized in that the specific event can be generated based on the number information stored in the number information storage means based on the transition.

According to the above configuration, the specific event occurs every time the specific condition is established, and the specific event can occur depending on the integrated value when the increase processing is performed at the end of the specific game state. By doing so, both the effect of keeping the specific game state from getting bored due to the occurrence of the specific event each time and the effect of making the specific game state enjoyable over a long period of time by establishing the specific condition multiple times are both enjoyed. It is possible to

Feature DA12. The specific event executing means is capable of causing the specific event based on the establishment of the specific condition during the normal game state after the specific game state in which the specific condition is established is finished. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA11.

According to the above configuration, it is also possible to take over the establishment of the specific condition during the specific game state as a specific event in the normal game state after the specific game state ends. Since the specific event is different from the increase processing, the event in the specific game state is taken over to the normal game state within a range that does not contradict the meaning of forcibly ending the specific game state by the upper limit number of times. configuration. By doing so, the linkage between the specific game state and the normal game state is enhanced, and the amusement of the game is improved.

Feature DA13. When the specific condition is established in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition, or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition means for storing information corresponding to the number of times to be increased to a predetermined information storage means (number of eliminated games EG) (function for executing processing for adding the number of games to be added to the number of eliminated games EG by the main control unit 101); ,
When shifting from the specific game state to the normal game state by at least the second end means, an initialization process that can be executed to initialize the specific information involved in the order notification used during the specific game state initialization means (function for executing initialization processing by main controller 101);
When the initialization process is performed by the initialization means, means for limiting the initialization of the information stored in the information storage means (the number of lost games is provided in the normal section area in the main control device 101). a function to execute processing to be stored in a designated area);
The gaming machine according to feature DA12, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the specific game state ends when the number of executions in the specific game state reaches the upper limit, the specific information related to the order notification is initialized, so that the specific game state is forced. Based on the information in the specific game state that was forcibly ended despite the fact that the game ended in 2011, the effect of the feature DA11 is maintained while preventing the occurrence of a so-called continuous game, such as moving to the specific game state again. can be expected.

Feature DA14. The increase process can be executed even when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or even when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA13, characterized by:

In the above configuration, it is clarified that even if a specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation, or if the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition results in a specific situation, the increase process itself is not limited. be. In other words, for example, in a configuration in which execution of processing related to predetermined order notification including increase processing is restricted in a normal game state that is not a specific game state, the increase processing related to the specific situation is not subject to that restriction. is clarified. However, as described above, even if the increase process is performed in the situation described above, it may become meaningless due to the upper limit of the number of times. can be expected.

Feature DA15. Based on the fact that the game state shifts from the normal game state to the specific game state, the specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start notification, and the specific game state is the normal game. Specific game state notification means (function to execute section display first processing to section display fourth processing by main controller 101) to end notification by turning off the specific notification means based on the transition to the state with
The specific game state notifying means is characterized in that even when the second end means shifts the specific game state to the normal game state, the specific game state notification means ends the notification by setting the specific game state to the extinguished state. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA14.

According to the above configuration, when the normal game state shifts to the specific game state, notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends and shifts to the normal game state, the notification also ends. That is, if the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state. The sense of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who sits on the game table after finishing the game can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game with the special notification.

In particular, even when the specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times and shifts to the normal game state, the notification by the specific notification means ends, so that the player can confirm that the specific game state has ended, that is, the specific condition in the specific situation It can be clearly understood that the increase processing was not performed even if was established. Then, even if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, it is difficult to entertain the afterglow of the end of the specific game state due to the structure in which the notification of the specific notification means is strictly terminated. In that respect, as in feature DA1, if it is configured to cause a specific event, even if it is a configuration in which it is possible to clearly grasp that the specific game state has been forcibly terminated by the specific notification means, through the specific event , it is also possible to entertain the reverberation based on the establishment of a specific condition.

Feature DA16. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order, and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in the stop order of 2,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is given by a predetermined notification means (the first display segment on the instruction monitor 68). N1 to 7th display segment N7) has an executable order notification means (function for executing push order processing by main controller 101),
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than that in the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state is a predetermined specific result (first specific role processing by main controller 101 function) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state (the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 is executed function) and
a first grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific gaming state;
a second grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state;
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific game state, the first end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (normal A function that executes the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means in the specific game state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times , a second end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (function for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101);
an increasing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the specific condition is established in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions ascertained by the first ascertaining means and the remaining number of times ascertained by the second ascertaining means has reached the upper limit number of times, or Specific event execution means (main controller) capable of causing a specific event different from the event based on the increase process when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition A function to execute each process for special notification in a situation where the excess flag is set by 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the number corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the revolving body, and whether or not there is an order notification regarding the stopping order. A specific game state is provided such that the degree of advantage varies depending on the game. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, and when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific game state, the processing for increasing the remaining number of times of the specific game state, so-called addition can occur, the playability of each game is greatly improved.

However, the original game of the so-called slot machine is to aim at the pattern of the revolving body and stop it to obtain a privilege. The playability may become sparse, and if the specific game state using order notification is allowed to be executed without limit, there is a possibility that the payout rate of balls may exceed the payout rate intended by the designer. Therefore, in the above configuration, regardless of the remaining number of times in the specific game state, the game ends when the upper limit number of times is reached. By doing so, it is possible to make the game property using the order notification a game property accompanying the above-mentioned original game property, and to fully enjoy both game properties.

However, if the upper limit number of times is defined as described above, in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number of times has already reached the upper limit number of times, even if the specific condition is satisfied, no extra charge will occur. A game in such a situation becomes a so-called digestive game, and the enjoyment of the game can be extremely reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number of times has already reached the upper limit, or when the increase process based on the establishment of a specific condition results in a specific situation, the increase process (addition) is performed. A specific event, which is a different event from the By doing so, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the addition is not performed or it is meaningless even if the addition is performed, and the fun of each game is increased even in the above-mentioned specific situation. It is possible to Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve interest.

Regarding the "first result" and "second result", "the first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means It may be expressed as "a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode". In this case, "stopping order" should be read as "stop operation mode", "order notification" should be read as "mode notification", and "order notification means" should be read as "mode notification means".

<Feature DB group>
Feature DB1. As the game state, a low-advantage state (normal section) and a high-advantage state (advantage section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set.
a first grasping means (advantage zone game number AG) for grasping the number of times executed in the high advantage state;
a second grasping means for grasping the number of times the high advantage state remains (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG);
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantageous state, a first ending means (normal A function that executes the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of
Based on the fact that the number of executions ascertained by the first ascertaining means reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times in the high advantageous state, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number ascertained by the second ascertaining means. , a second termination means (a function of forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the second section display processing by the main controller 101) for shifting the high-advantage state to the low-advantage state;
A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to set the winning probability);
A gaming machine comprising
Specific information grasping means for grasping specific information (total number of games) corresponding to the gaming situation of the day (function for executing processing for grasping the total number of games in the second section display processing by the main controller 101);
Suggestion notification execution means (function for executing processing for performing fourth special notification by the display control device 81) for executing suggestion notification suggesting information of the set value set by the setting means;
with
The suggestive notification executing means can execute the suggestive notification based on the specific information grasped by the specific information grasping means when the second termination means causes the high-advantage state to transition to the low-advantage state. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low. Since there are cases where the process ends based on reaching the upper limit number of times, it is possible to prevent the advantage of the high-advantage state from being extremely increased. However, it is considered that the player wants the high advantage state to continue for a long time, and it is preferable that the high advantage state is forcibly ended even if there are remaining number of times based on reaching the upper limit number of times. Alternatively, if the forced high-advantage state ends, it is conceivable that the player's will to continue playing the game may be extremely reduced. Therefore, when such a high advantage state is forcibly ended, a setting value that causes a change in the increase/decrease rate or the increase/decrease mode of the game medium is suggested. It is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game by, for example, making a suggestive notification.

On the other hand, depending on the situation in which the high-advantage state has reached the upper limit number of times, the suggestion notification of the set value as described above may motivate the player to end the game rather than to continue the game. That is, for example, when the situation in which the high advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times is a situation such as shortly after the opening of the game hall, when the suggestion notification of the high setting is performed as described above, the game machine that plays the game machine Although it can be a motivation for players to continue playing, other gaming machines are determined to have a low setting in relation to the high setting of the other gaming machine, and the motivation to end the game It may be attached. In addition, for example, in a situation where the high-advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times and the game hall is about to close, rather than taking into account the motivation to continue the game or the motivation to end the game, the setting value is simply suggested and notified. There may be cases where it is better to go to Therefore, when the high-advantage state has reached the upper limit number of times, the high-advantage state is forcibly terminated by providing a setting value suggestive notification in consideration of the specific information corresponding to the game situation on the day. In this case, it is possible to suitably suppress the player's desire to continue playing the game.

Feature DB2. A specific execution means (for example, a function of executing a game number addition process by the main controller 101) for executing a specific process related to the continuation rate or number of continuations of the high advantageous state,
The gaming machine according to the feature DB1, wherein the specific execution means executes the specific processing regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, while the specific processing regarding the continuation rate and the number of continuations is executed regardless of the set value, when the high advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times as a result of the specific processing and ends, the set value suggestion may occur. . In this case, the fact that the high-advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times is due to luck and has nothing to do with the set value, but when the high-advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times, a large amount of game media is obtained. Under such circumstances, the player tends to predict a set value higher than the actual set value. However, even if the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times, it may require a large amount of game media until then. The total payout rate is not always high depending on the game situation. Therefore, in regard to the high advantage state as described above, by performing a suggestion notification of the set value in consideration of the game situation at the time of forced termination, the impression that the player has of the acquired game media is indicated by the suggestion notification of the set value. It can be used as a boost for continuation of the game at the time of forced termination.

In addition, in more detail about the "specific execution means", for example, it is possible to execute a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition from the low advantageous state to the high advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. transition lottery means (function for executing mode lottery processing by the main controller 101)", or, for example, "increase means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (function of executing game number addition processing by main control device 101)", or, for example, "means capable of executing the end lottery of the high advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition". .

Furthermore, the ``specific execution means'' may be expressed as ``executing the specific processing with a uniform probability regardless of the level of the set value set by the setting means'', or as ``the above Regardless of the level of the setting value set by the setting means, the specific process is executed with a common probability." Regardless, the results of the specific processing are common."

Feature DB3. The specific information grasping means can grasp, as the specific information, the total number of game executions among the gaming situations on the day,
The suggestion notification executing means, when the second ending means causes the transition from the high-advantage state to the low-advantage state, determines that the total number of executions grasped by the specific information grasping means is a predetermined specific number of times (2000 times), the execution probability of the suggestion notification is lower than when the total number of executions exceeds the specific number of times, or the suggestion notification executed when the total number of executions is equal to or less than the specific number of times A feature DB1 or a feature DB2 characterized in that the suggestive notification is executed in such a manner that it is more difficult for a player to predict the set value than the suggestive notification executed when a specific number of times is exceeded. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when comparing the case where the total number of executions is equal to or less than the specific number of times and the case where the total number of executions exceeds the specific number of times, the former case is more difficult to execute the suggestion notification of the set value, and even if it is executed, the setting value is difficult to predict. Therefore, even if the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times in a situation where the number of times is less than or equal to the specific number of times, it is difficult to narrow down the setting value. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which the setting value is determined at a stage soon after the opening of the game hall and the operation rate of the game machine or other game machines is lowered.

Feature DB4. The specific information grasping means is capable of grasping time information as the specific information from the gaming situation of the day,
The suggestion notification executing means is adapted to change the time information grasped by the specific information grasping means to a predetermined specific time (13:00 ), the execution probability of the suggestion notification is lower than when the time information is after the specific time, or the suggestion notification executed before the specific time is more likely Characteristic features DB1 to DB3 characterized in that the suggestive notification is executed in such a manner that the player is less likely to predict the set value than the suggestive notification executed after the specific time. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, when comparing the case where the forced termination time is before the specific time and the case where it is after the specific time, the former case is more difficult to execute the suggestive notification of the setting value. Even if it is set, it may be difficult to predict the set value. Therefore, even if the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times before the specific time, it is difficult to narrow down the setting value. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which the setting value is determined at a stage soon after the opening of the game hall and the operation rate of the game machine or other game machines is lowered.

In particular, by adding the above configuration to the feature DB 3, it is possible to suggest setting values according to the operation start time of the day. Specifically, for example, in the feature DB 3, if the start of operation on the day is late, it may be determined that the specified number of times has been exceeded at a later stage than the case where the specified number of times has been exceeded since the first morning of operation. In that case, there is a possibility that the setting values may not be suggested as intended by the designer. Therefore, by combining the configuration of the feature DB4 with the configuration of the feature DB3, it is possible to generate the suggestive notification of the set value as intended by the designer.

Feature DB5. The specific information grasping means is capable of grasping, as the specific information, at least one of the total number of executions since power-on or time information, among the gaming situations of the day.
The suggestion notification executing means, when the second ending means causes the transition from the high-advantage state to the low-advantage state, determines that the total number of executions grasped by the specific information grasping means is a predetermined specific number of times (2000 times) or below, or if the time information is a first specific situation before a predetermined specific time (13:00), the total number of executions exceeds the specific number of times, or the time information is after the specific time The execution probability of the suggestion notification suggesting a low setting is higher than in the case of the second specific situation, or the suggestion report executed in the case of the first specific situation is higher than the second specific situation Characteristic feature DB1 to The gaming machine according to any one of DB4.

According to the above configuration, when the high-advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times at a relatively early stage from the opening of the game hall and is forcibly terminated, the suggestive notification that facilitates the narrowing down of the low setting is executed. A situation in which the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times at a relatively early stage is considered to be a situation in which a large amount of game media is acquired and the total ball output rate is high. Therefore, it is thought that there is a high possibility that the player will continue playing the game even if the suggested notification of the set value makes it easier to narrow down to a lower setting as described above. be done. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which the suggestive notification of the set value on the low setting side is performed in anticipation of such a situation, the rate of occurrence can be balanced with the suggestive notification of the set value on the high setting side without causing a decrease in the operating rate. can keep.

Feature DB6. The suggestion notification executing means
Using a suggestive notification information group in which information corresponding to a plurality of types of suggestive notifications is stored as the suggestive notification of the set value, selecting information corresponding to one suggestive notification from the suggestive notification information group, and selecting the information corresponding to the suggestive notification A configuration for executing the suggestion notification based on information corresponding to the suggestion notification,
When the second terminating means shifts from the high-advantage state to the low-advantage state, the suggested notification information group used in the first specific situation and the suggested notification information group used in the second specific situation , are different, the probability of execution of the suggestive notification suggesting the low setting is increased, or the suggestive notification is executed in such a manner that the setting value of the low setting is easily predicted. The gaming machine described in the characteristic feature DB5.

According to the above configuration, the configuration of the feature DB 5 can be realized with a simple configuration such as switching of the suggestive notification information group, that is, the table used for the suggestive notification.

Feature DB7. Transition means (by main controller 101) capable of transitioning the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means becoming a predetermined transition result (second BB) function to execute bonus state processing),
The rate of increase of game media in each game tends to be higher during the special game state than during the high advantage state,
The special game state is set to be transferable even during the high advantage state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DB1 to DB6, wherein the first grasping means grasps the number of times of execution including the number of times of games executed during the special game state.

According to the above configuration, a special game state is set as a so-called jackpot state in which the increase rate of game media is high, and the number of games during the special game state is also taken into account in the number of executions. If the special game state intervenes in the advantageous state, the final number of acquired game media can be greater than if the special game state does not intervene. That is, in a high advantage state in which the upper limit number of times is set, the final number of acquired game media is diversified when the high advantage state ends according to the upper limit number of times. By doing this, when the high advantage state ends due to the upper limit number of times, for example, if the number of acquisitions is large, the high setting is predicted, and if the number of acquisitions is small, the low setting is predicted. The fun of predicting the set value at the end is added.

Feature DB8. The gaming machine according to the feature DB7, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result winning can differ depending on the set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature DB 7, the number of acquisitions at the time of forced termination of the high-advantage state can actually differ depending on the set value. As a result, it is possible to increase the significance of providing the suggestive notification of the set value at the time of forced termination.

Feature DB9. The specific information grasping means is capable of grasping, as the specific information, the total number of game executions among the gaming situations of the day,
The total number of executions is initialized when the setting value set by the setting means is changed, but is not initialized when the gaming machine is turned on or off. The gaming machine according to any one of characteristic features DB1 to DB8.

According to the above configuration, the total number of executions as the game status reflected in the suggestion notification at the time of forced termination is not initialized by power-on or power-off, but is initialized by the change processing of the set value. Therefore, if the power is turned on/off without changing the set value when the game hall closes or opens, the total number of executions of the previous day is taken over. As a result, it is possible to perform a game in which the set value is predicted based on factors such as whether or not the set value has been changed, in addition to the suggestive notification of the set value, thereby greatly improving the playability.

Feature DB10. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order, and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in the stop order of 2,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is given by a predetermined notification means (the first display segment on the instruction monitor 68). N1 to 7th display segment N7) has an executable order notification means (function for executing push order processing by main controller 101),
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state is a predetermined specific result (first specific role processing by main controller 101 function) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state (the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 is executed function) and
with
The low advantageous state is the normal game state,
The game machine according to any one of features DB1 to DB9, wherein the high advantage state is the specific game state.

In the amusement machine having the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery and the revolving body is started to revolve, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops and the revolving body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the revolving body. A specific game state is provided as a high-advantage state such that the degree of advantage differs depending on the presence or absence of the game. By applying the configuration related to setting value suggestion according to the game situation of the characteristic DB 1 to the gaming machine having such a configuration, it is possible to suitably adjust the subsequent operation rate when the specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times. can be done.

In particular, compared to the special game state accompanied by the transition of the game state, that is, the jackpot state, the above-mentioned specific game state is different for the player depending on the presence or absence of notification, the frequency of notification, the mode of notification, etc. Advantages vary. In such a configuration, compared to one-to-one correspondence with the game result like the transition of the game state, there is a high degree of freedom in setting the continuation condition, and the number of continuations of the specific game state is strictly defined. It is easy to realize a game property that is not set, that is, a game property that allows the player to enjoy how long the specific game state continues. On the other hand, in such game characteristics, when the upper limit number of times is reached and the specific game state ends, it is thought that the intention to continue the game after that may decrease, and there is concern about a decrease in the operating rate. In this regard, by applying the configuration of the feature DB 1 to such a gaming machine, the user can enjoy the continuity of the specific game state and continue playing the game even after the number of continuations reaches the upper limit number of times. It is possible to motivate them to continue.

<Characteristic DC group>
Features DC1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order, and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in the stop order of 2,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is given by a predetermined notification means (the first display segment on the instruction monitor 68). N1 to 7th display segment N7) has an executable order notification means (function for executing push order processing by main controller 101),
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state is a predetermined specific result (first specific role processing by main controller 101 function) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state (the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 is executed function) and
Specific end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition (function for executing end processing of the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101) and,
Specific storage means capable of storing specific information that is information used in the specific game state and is involved in the order notification (process for storing information corresponding to various areas for advantageous sections in RAM 106 by main controller 101 function) and
Normal storage means that can store normal information that is information that can be used outside the specific game state and is not involved in the order notification (stores information corresponding to various areas for normal sections in RAM 106 by main controller 101 function to perform processing) and
When shifting from the specific game state to the normal game state by the specific end means, the initialization means (the section display number by the main controller 101) capable of executing the initialization process of the specific information stored in the specific storage means 2 function to execute initialization processing during processing);
With respect to a specific event occurring during the specific gaming state (for example, an opportunity to add the number of games in a situation where the excess flag is not set), the specific storage means uses information corresponding to the specific event (the number of games to be added) as the specific information. a first means (a function of executing a process of adding the number of games to be added to the corresponding number of continuations in the game number addition process by the main controller 101) capable of executing a storage process to be stored in the
With regard to the specific event that occurs during the specific game state (for example, a trigger for adding the number of games in a situation where the excess flag is set), the information corresponding to the specific event (the number of lost games) is normally stored as the normal information. a second means capable of executing a storage process to be stored in the means (a function of executing a process of adding the number of added games to the number of eliminated games in the process of adding the number of games by the main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the number corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the revolving body, and the presence or absence of order notification regarding the stopping order. A specific game state is provided such that the degree of advantage differs depending on the game, and the playability of each game is improved.

However, the original game of the so-called slot machine is to aim at the pattern of the revolving body and stop it to obtain a privilege. The playability can be neglected, and if the specific game state can be executed unlimitedly by increasing the consecutive game performance of the specific game state using the order notification, the ball payout rate will exceed the designer's intention. There is also the possibility that a ball may be produced. Furthermore, if the continuous game performance of the specific game state is increased, even if the game is ended thinking that the specific game state has ended, cases such as the specific game state actually continuing are likely to occur. The fairness between the player who ends the game and the succeeding player who takes a seat at the game machine after the game ends is not ensured.

Therefore, in the above configuration, at the end of the specific game state, for the specific event in the specific game state, since it is configured to perform the initialization process of the specific storage means to be stored as the specific information involved in the order notification, the specific game It is possible to eliminate the feeling of unfairness among the players without increasing the continuous property of the state too much.

However, if the above configuration is used, the impression that the game characteristics of the specific game state and the game characteristics of the normal game state are different from each other will be strong, and the interlocking between these two game states will be reduced, and it will be seen as a whole. There is also a concern that the playability may deteriorate. Therefore, in the above configuration, regarding the specific event in the specific game state, the information is not stored as specific information, but is provided as normal information that is not involved in order notification. The information of the specific event during the specific game state can be handed over to the normal game state as information different from the order notification. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the continuous game performance in the specific game state from being excessively high and to enhance the linkage between the specific game state and the normal game state while ensuring equality among players. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature DC2. a specific storage area (various areas for advantageous sections in RAM 106) corresponding to the specific storage means;
a normal storage area (various areas for normal sections in the RAM 106) corresponding to the normal storage means;
is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature DC1, wherein the specific storage area and the normal storage area are set as storage areas that do not overlap each other.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature DC1, the location where each information is stored is physically different. Such an error is less likely to occur, and a phenomenon in which the specific information remains without being initialized even after the end of the specific game state is also less likely to occur.

Feature DC3. Using the normal information corresponding to the specific event stored in the normal storage means by the second means, after the specific game state in which the specific event occurs, a special notification is issued by the specific notification means. The gaming machine according to feature DC1 or feature DC2, characterized by comprising executable special notification means (a function of executing a special replay notification process by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, since the special notification for the specific event that occurred during the specific game state is executed after the specific game state is finished, the interlocking between the specific game state and the normal game state is called the special notification. It is possible to do so through performance.

Feature DC4. Selecting means for selecting which of the first means and the second means to execute storage processing when the specific event occurs (process for determining whether or not an excess flag is set in main controller 101 The gaming machine according to any one of features DC1 to DC3, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the above configuration, the information about the specific event is stored as either specific information or normal information. By doing so, since both information are not stored redundantly, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity, and when taking over the normal information based on the specific event at the end of the specific game state, the specific information is related It is possible to reduce the possibility of being inherited as

Feature DC5. Increase determination means (main A function of executing a game number addition lottery process by the control device 101);
Increase processing means capable of executing the process of increasing the remaining number of times based on the determination result by the increase determination means being the result of executing the increase process (function of executing the game number addition process by the main controller 101) )and,
with
The selection means is
selecting to execute the memory processing by the first means when the determination result by the increase determination means is a result of executing the increase process as the specific event;
Characteristic feature DC4, characterized in that when the result of determination by the increase determining means as the specific event is that the increase processing is not to be executed, the memory processing by the second means is selected to be executed. game machine.

According to the above configuration, when it is determined whether or not to increase the number of continuous games in the specific gaming state as the specific event, when it is determined that the number of continuous games is to be increased, as the specific information related to the order notification When it is determined that the number of continuous games is not to be increased after the memory processing by the first means is performed, the memory processing by the second means is performed as normal information that is not involved in order notification. Information indicating that the decision has resulted in an unfavorable result for the player, assuming that it is advantageous for the player to increase the number of continuous games in the specific game state and that the player desires the increase processing. However, it is stored as normal information and can be handed over until after the specific game state. By doing so, the information corresponding to the profits that could not be fully enjoyed in the specific game state can be handed over to the normal game state without taking over the profits in the specific game state to the normal game state. Interlocking between the specific game state and the normal game state can be enhanced by, for example, making it possible to enjoy the profit in the normal game state.

Feature DC6. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the result of determination by the increase determination means is that the increase processing is to be executed, or a restriction means capable of executing restriction processing for restricting the execution of the increase processing. (a function of executing processing for setting an excess flag by the main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to feature DC5, wherein the selection means selects such that the storage processing by the second means is performed based on the restriction processing by the restriction means being performed.

When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the result of determination by the increase determination means is that the increase process is executed, and the execution of the increase process itself is restricted. Even if the result of the lottery is a specific result, there is no merit for the player during the specific game state, rather, it would have been better if the specific result was obtained in a situation where the predetermined condition was not satisfied. can be. In that respect, in the above configuration, since the information of the unfortunate result is stored so as to be handed over to the normal game state, even if the unfortunate result is reached, the specific game state is terminated. You can create a sense of anticipation that you will get some benefit later.

Feature DC7. a first grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific gaming state;
a second grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number;
with
The specific termination means is
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific game state, the first end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (normal A function that executes the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means in the specific game state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times , a second end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (function for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101);
with
The predetermined condition is satisfied when the sum of the number of executions ascertained by the first ascertaining means and the remaining number of times ascertained by the second ascertaining means reaches the upper limit number of times. A gaming machine described in DC6.

In the above configuration, the specific game state may end based on the remaining number of times in the specific game state, or may end based on reaching the upper limit number of times. The configuration is established when the sum of the number of times remaining and the number of times remaining reaches the upper limit number of times. In other words, when the number of remaining games cannot be expected to increase even if the increase process is performed, the storage process is performed by the second process based on the specified result that triggers the increase process. Players who want to play as many games as possible in the specific gaming state are expected to perform an increase process in each game in the specific gaming state, that is, they want the game result to be the specific result. When the number of remaining games cannot be expected to increase even if the increase processing is performed, the interest in the game result of the game in that situation decreases, the interest in the specific game state itself also decreases, and the degree of attention to the game. may drop significantly. In that respect, as in the above configuration, even in such a situation, if the specific result is won, the memory processing by the second means is performed, so that the specific result win that can be meaningless Information can be handed over after a specific game state, and it can be meaningful to have a specific result in that situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability during the specific game state.

Feature DC8. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specified result in a situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second means determines that the increase process is executed as a result of determination by the increase determination means. The gaming machine according to feature DC6 or feature DC7, wherein a specific number of times to increase the remaining number of times in the increase processing of the case is set as the normal information, and a storage process for storing the normal information in the normal storage means is executed.

According to the above configuration, when the specified result is won when the predetermined condition is met, the specified number of times, which was supposed to be increased by the increase processing, is stored as it is as the normal information. By doing so, when the memory processing is performed by the second means instead of the first means, special processing such as information conversion processing is not required, and the effects of the characteristic DC6 and the like can be obtained with a simple configuration. I can expect it.

Feature DC9. In the normal game state, a special state (special section) in which a predetermined special notification can be executed is set,
When the specific game state is shifted to the normal game state by the specific end means, a means capable of shifting to the special state (a function of executing a process of setting a special section flag by the main control device 101);
Means for selecting the number of executions of the special state based on the information of the specific number of times the memory processing is performed by the second means (corresponding to the special section game number PG based on the special section table by the main controller 101) function to execute the process of entering a value) and
The gaming machine according to feature DC8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the specific game state is shifted to the normal game state, there is a case where the transition is made to a special state in which special notification can be executed, and the number of executions of the special state is stored by the second means. specified number of times. Therefore, the information that the increase processing was not performed during the specific game state is inherited as the information of the continuity of the special state in which the special notification is performed, and the specific game state and the normal game state are changed to the special state. can be linked via

Features DC10. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
The gaming machine according to feature DC9, wherein the special notification is a suggestive notification as information of the set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, instead of performing the increase processing during the specific game state, the suggestive notification can be executed after the specific game state. Assuming that the player desires a high setting, the suggestive notification of the setting value becomes useful information for the player, and by presenting such useful information, the increase processing is performed. It is possible to compensate for the absence of

Feature DC11. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order, the third specific pattern combination is stopped, and the third result winning can be established, and each of the stop operation means. is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order, the fourth specific pattern combination different from the third specific pattern combination is stopped, and the third result winning can be established. A second order correspondence result (for example, special replay) is set as
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the second order notification (push order notification effect) regarding the stop order including the third stop order and the fourth stop order is specified as the special notification by specific notification means (auxiliary display) The gaming machine according to feature DC9 or feature DC10, characterized by comprising a second order notification means (a function of executing a special replay notification process by the display control device 81) that can be executed by the unit 65).

According to the above configuration, if the result corresponding to the second order does not change the benefit to be obtained although the winning number differs depending on the order of stopping, the first order causes a change in the advantage even if it is performed during the normal game state. A specific game state in which notification (order notification of feature DC1, referred to as first order notification in relation to the above configuration, and result of feature DC1 order correspondence is also referred to as first order correspondence result) is performed A special notification can be realized by a notification using the stop result within a range that does not contradict the intended meaning.

Feature DC12. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined special result, winning notification means (display control A function of executing a bonus winning notification effect by the device 81);
Number-of-games setting means for setting the number of winning notification games from the game in which the special result is won to the game in which the winning notification is performed by the winning notification means. function) and
with
Any of the characteristics DC9 to DC11, wherein the winning notification game number set by the game number setting means tends to be shorter when the special notification is performed than when the special notification is not performed. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, it is preferable for a player who wants to know the winning of the special result as soon as possible that the number of winning notification games is set short by performing the special notification. It is possible to compensate for the lack of

<Characteristic DD group>
Features DD1. As the game state, a low-advantage state (normal section) and a high-advantage state (advantage section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set.
a first grasping means (advantage interval game number AG) for grasping the number of times executed in the high advantage state;
a second grasping means (advantage section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the number of remaining times of the high advantage state;
First transition means for transitioning the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantageous state (normal A function that executes the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of
Based on the fact that the number of executions ascertained by the first ascertaining means reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times in the high advantageous state, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number ascertained by the second ascertaining means. , second transition means for transitioning the high-advantage state to the low-advantage state (function for forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the second section display processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
an increasing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (additional notification) that the increase process has been performed can be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) A function of executing an additional notification effect by the display control device 81);
When the increase processing is performed in a situation where the sum of the number of executions ascertained by the first ascertaining means and the remaining number of times ascertained by the second ascertaining means has reached the upper limit number of times Specific notification execution means (special game number display in the third special notification setting process by the display control device 81) that can execute specific notification about the excess exceeding the upper limit number by the predetermined notification means or another notification means function to execute the update process of the part) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low. Since there are cases where the process ends based on reaching the upper limit number of times, it is possible to prevent the advantage of the high-advantage state from being extremely increased. Such a configuration has a so-called additional function in which the number of remaining high-advantage states is increased when a specific condition is met, and expectations for the specific condition being met are heightened.

On the other hand, if the game in which the specific condition is established is before the total number of executions and remaining number of games reaches the upper limit, it is preferable for the player as described above, but the total number of games reaches the upper limit. After that, no matter how many specific conditions are met, the high advantage state will end when the upper limit number of times is reached, so interest in the success or failure of the specific condition will decrease. The game becomes a so-called digestive game, and there is a possibility that the degree of attention to the game will be extremely reduced.

In that respect, in the above configuration, even after the total has reached the upper limit number of times, it is configured to perform specific notification of the excess amount when it is assumed that the increase processing has been performed, and by exceeding the upper limit number of times The configuration is such that the player is dared to know the number of times the benefit has not been received sufficiently. In other words, even if the increase processing is performed, the increase processing will not be performed due to the upper limit number of times. By notifying, if the increase processing was performed beyond the upper limit number of times, the benefits that would have been obtained would be calculated, or some kind of compensation for not being able to receive the benefits It is possible to have a sense of expectation that the will be performed. In other words, instead of hiding the inability to enjoy the benefits of the increase process, the reversed idea of daring to make it explicit will evoke feelings different from the feeling of loss based on the inability to enjoy the benefits. It is possible to improve the playability in the situation where the upper limit number of times has been reached.

Feature DD2. The specific notification executing means is capable of notifying the number of times corresponding to the excess amount as the specific notification, and notifying the number of times so as to be comprehensible as a number of times different from the remaining number of times. The gaming machine described in DD1.

Although it is possible to add the excess to the remaining number and display it on the same display of the number of times, in the above configuration, by displaying the number of times separately, it is only easy to grasp the excess. However, since the excess amount is displayed separately, it is possible to create a strong impression that some form of compensation is being provided by the excess amount.

Features DD3. When performing the increasing process, the increasing means selects one number of times using a number information group in which a plurality of types of number of times information are stored, and increases the remaining number of times by the selected number of times. ,
The specific notification execution means selects one number of times as the number of times of excess by using the number information group or an information group in which the same type of number information as the number information group is stored, and the selected number of times The gaming machine according to feature DD1 or feature DD2, wherein the increase notification corresponding to the number of times can be executed as the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, the same or similar information group (table) as the actual increase notification is used to determine the number of times to be notified in the specific notification, so if the increase process is performed, the excess amount is clearly can be grasped. Further, if the same information group is used to determine the number of times, there is no need to store the information group exclusively for that purpose, which contributes to the reduction of the storage capacity.

Feature DD4. The specific notification execution means is
As the notification of the number of times corresponding to the excess, it is possible to notify a predetermined number of times information,
By performing the increase notification corresponding to the selected number of times, the selected number of times is added to the predetermined number of times information, and then the predetermined number of times information can be updated and notified. The gaming machine according to feature DD3.

According to the above configuration, when the increase process exceeding the upper limit number of times is performed a plurality of times, the number of times corresponding to each increase process is integrated and notified. By doing so, even after the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit, the pleasure of adding and increasing the reported excess is added, and the reported number is increased. By gradually increasing the number of times, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation that the content of compensation that will be executed will also become generous.

Feature DD5. Special notification execution means capable of executing a predetermined special notification based on the number of times of excess in the specific notification by the specific notification execution means (function of executing third special notification setting processing by display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features DD1 to DD4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, special notification is executed as compensation for the excess amount. For example, if the configuration is such that beneficial information is presented to the player when the special notification is performed, the player will be satisfied if the special notification is performed. Even if the notification is, for example, a flashy effect, by seeing the flashy effect, the player's sense of loss due to the fact that the increase processing was not performed can be compensated to some extent.

Feature DD6. The special notification executing means can execute the special notification as a transition notification (attack mode end effect) when the second transition means shifts from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state. The gaming machine according to feature DD5.

According to the above configuration, the transition notification when the high-advantage state ends becomes the special notification, and the excess amount is reflected. In the transition notification when the high advantage state ends, generally, the number of game media acquired during the high advantage state, the number of continuous games, etc. are notified, and the excess amount for these notifications By reflecting , it becomes easy to associate how many more games are continued if there is no upper limit, or the number of acquired game media if there is no upper limit. In addition, when such a shift notification is taken with a photograph or the like, the information of the excess will be reflected. Even in the case of reviewing it later, it is possible to immerse the user in the memory.

Feature DD7. Characteristic DD5, wherein the special notification executing means can execute the special notification in the low advantageous state after the transition from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state by the second transition means; or The gaming machine according to feature DD6.

According to the above configuration, the excess of the high-advantage state can be reflected in the low-advantage state instead of the high-advantage state. Therefore, by using the excess amount, it is possible to enhance the interlocking effect of the high-advantage state and the low-advantage state.

Feature DD8. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
The special notification execution means according to any one of characteristics DD5 to DD7, characterized in that it is possible to execute, as the special notification, a suggestive notification suggesting the information of the setting value set by the setting means. game machine.

Based on the premise that the player desires a high setting, the suggestive notification of the setting value can be useful information for the player. Therefore, as described above, if the setting value suggestion notification is performed based on the excess amount, it is predicted that the setting value suggestion will be performed from the excess amount notified by the specific notification, and the When the setting value is suggested, it is possible to realize a game feature such as predicting the setting value, and it is possible to increase the interest in the specific information that is the starting point of the game.

Feature DD9. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order, and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in the stop order of 2,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is given by a predetermined notification means (the first display segment on the instruction monitor 68). N1 to 7th display segment N7) has an executable order notification means (function for executing push order processing by main controller 101),
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state is a predetermined specific result (first specific role processing by main controller 101 function) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state (the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 is executed function) and
with
The low advantageous state is the normal game state,
The game machine according to any one of features DD1 to DD8, wherein the high advantage state is the specific game state.

In the amusement machine having the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery and the revolving body is started to revolve, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops and the revolving body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the revolving body. A specific game state is provided as a high-advantage state in which the degree of advantage differs depending on the presence or absence of the game. By applying the configuration relating to the specific notification of the characteristic DD1 to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the game performance can be favorably improved after the total number of execution times of the specific game state and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit number of times. can be done.

In particular, compared to the special game state accompanied by the transition of the game state, that is, the jackpot state, the above-mentioned specific game state is different for the player depending on the presence or absence of notification, the frequency of notification, the mode of notification, etc. Advantages vary. In such a configuration, compared to one-to-one correspondence with the game result like the transition of the game state, there is a high degree of freedom in setting the continuation condition, and the number of continuations of the specific game state is strictly defined. It is easy to realize a game property that is not set, that is, a game property that allows the player to enjoy how long the specific game state continues. On the other hand, it can be said that the problem described in the feature DD1 is likely to occur by setting the upper limit number of times for such game characteristics. In this regard, by applying the configuration of the feature DD1 to such a gaming machine, it is possible to enjoy the continuity of the specific game state, and at the same time improve the game performance when it is determined that the number of continuations reaches the upper limit number of times. can be improved.

<Characteristic DE group>
Feature DE1. As the game state, a low-advantage state (normal section) and a high-advantage state (advantage section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set.
a first grasping means (advantage zone game number AG) for grasping the number of times executed in the high advantage state;
a second grasping means for grasping the number of times the high advantage state remains (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG);
First transition means for transitioning the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantageous state (normal A function that executes the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of
Based on the fact that the number of executions ascertained by the first ascertaining means reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times in the high advantageous state, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number ascertained by the second ascertaining means. , second transition means for transitioning the high-advantage state to the low-advantage state (function for forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the second section display processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
an increasing means (a function of executing the number-of-games adding process by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the number of remaining games based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (additional notification) that the increase process has been performed can be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) A function of executing an additional notification effect by the display control device 81);
with
The increase notification execution means can execute the increase notification for the increase in the special number of times, which is part or all of the number of times increased by the increase process, in a game after the game in which the increase process is performed. It has a post-notification execution means (function for executing post-addition effect setting processing by the display control device 81),
The sum of the number of times of execution ascertained by the first ascertaining means and the remaining number of times ascertained by the second ascertaining means has reached the upper limit number of times, and the post-notification executing means relates to the increasing process. In a specific situation where an uninformed portion exists as the special number of times (a situation in which the excess flag is set and the post-loading flag is set), when the specific condition is satisfied, within the range of the uninformed portion, the A first special notification executing means (a function of executing a first special notification setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a first special notification (pseudo additional notification) as an increase notification by the predetermined notification means. A game machine characterized by

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low. Since there are cases where the process ends based on reaching the upper limit number of times, it is possible to prevent the advantage of the high-advantage state from being extremely increased. Such a configuration has a so-called additional function in which the number of remaining high-advantage states is increased when a specific condition is met, and expectations for the specific condition being met are heightened. Moreover, even if the processing for increasing the remaining number of times is performed, there are cases where part or all of the number of times is not notified immediately, so that the sense of anticipation when the specific condition is met can be continued for a long time. .

On the other hand, if the game in which the specific condition is established is before the total number of executions and remaining number of games reaches the upper limit, it is preferable for the player as described above, but the total number of games reaches the upper limit. After that, no matter how many specific conditions are met, the high advantage state will end when the upper limit number of times is reached, so interest in the success or failure of the specific condition will decrease. The game becomes a so-called digestive game, and there is a possibility that the degree of attention to the game will be extremely reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, even after the total reaches the upper limit number of times, if there is an unreported portion of the increase process, the unreported portion is used, and the range of the number of times of the unreported portion is used. Since the increase notification can be executed within the game, the impression that the number of remaining games has increased can be given without generating a mismatch between the increase notification and the number of continuous games in a highly advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to favorably play the game after the total number of times reaches the upper limit.

Feature DE2. When performing the increasing process, the increasing means selects one number of times using a number information group in which a plurality of types of number of times information are stored, and increases the remaining number of times by the selected number of times. ,
The first special notification execution means selects one number of times as the number of times of the unreported portion by using the number information group or an information group in which the same type of number information as the number information group is stored, and selects the number of times The gaming machine according to feature DE1, wherein the first special notification can be executed as the increased notification corresponding to the number of times the game has been played.

According to the above configuration, the same or similar information group (table) as the actual increase notification is used to determine the number of times to be notified in the first special notification. It is possible to strengthen the impression that the increase processing is performed on the Further, if the same information group is used to determine the number of times, there is no need to store the information group exclusively for that purpose, which contributes to the reduction of the storage capacity.

Feature DE3. When the selected number of times exceeds the number of times of the unnotified amount, the first special notification execution means can notify the number of times of the unnotified amount as the first special notification. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, while enjoying the advantage of the first special notification that the increase notification is performed within the range of the unreported amount, the effect of simplifying the configuration related to the selection of the number of times and simulating the actual increase processing is expected. be able to.

Feature DE4. In the specific situation, when the specific condition is satisfied, beyond the range of the unreported amount, the second special notification (pseudo additional notification) as the increase notification can be executed by the predetermined notification means Special notification executing means (function for executing the first special notification setting process by the display control device 81);
By performing the second special notification by the second special notification executing means, a granting means that can grant a special privilege different from the privilege based on the increase processing (by pseudo-additional notification by the display control device 81 function to suggest setting values),
The gaming machine according to any one of features DE1 to DE3, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, on the premise of the first special notification as the increased notification within the range of the number of unreported minutes, the second special notification as the increased notification exceeding the range of the number of unreported minutes is performed. Therefore, even if there is a discrepancy between the notification of the increase and the number of continuous games in a highly advantageous state, it will lead to a happy event for the player, and the number of executions and the remaining It is possible to enhance the playability after the total number of times reaches the upper limit.

In particular, the second special notification is executed under the condition that there is an unreported portion of the increase process, so if there is no unreported portion, that is, the total of the number of executions and the remaining number of times is the upper limit number of times The second special notification is made not after the player has grasped that it has been reached, but before it is grasped. By doing so, the second special notification will exceed the expectations of the player who desires the increase processing until the total reaches the upper limit number of times, and the second special notification will exceed the player's expectations. Happiness can be increased. In other words, in a situation where the player already knows that the total number has already reached the upper limit, it is considered that the player's interest has shifted from the increase processing to the awarding of the special privilege. If so, even if a special privilege is given in such a situation, it is considered difficult to provide a pleasure equal to or greater than the special privilege. Therefore, in a situation where something different from the special privilege (increase processing) is desired, by giving the special privilege along with the increase processing, it is possible to provide the pleasure more than the special privilege.

Feature DE5. The second special notification execution means can execute the increased notification by adding a predetermined specific number of times (10 times, 56 times, 77 times) to the number of times of the unnotified portion as the second special notification. The gaming machine according to feature DE4, characterized in that:

The unnotified number of times is the number obtained by subtracting the number of times of execution and the number of times of notification out of the remaining number of times from the upper limit number of times of the high advantageous state, and each time the game of the high advantageous state progresses, that is, the number of times of execution As the number of times increases, the number of times of non-notification decreases, and the special number of times also changes depending on the ratio of non-notification by the post-notification means. Then, as in the above configuration, in the configuration in which a special privilege is given by performing an increase notification of the number of times that is the number of times that has not been notified by adding a specific number of times, the special privilege is given. The number of notifications changes depending on the progress of the game. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the increase notification that triggers the granting of the special privilege at a glance, and the player who is playing on the game machine and grasps the game situation and the player who is watching the game from the side. The easiness of noticing that the special privilege is given can be made different from that of the other person who is looking at it. In other words, by making it easy for the players playing on the gaming machine to notice that the special privilege is given, and making it difficult for other players to notice, the players playing on the gaming machine have an advantage. can be guaranteed.

Feature DE6. The second special notification executing means can execute the increased notification by adding a first specific number of times (10 times) as the specific number of times to the number of times of the unnotified amount, and On the other hand, it is possible to execute the increase notification by adding a second specific number of times (56 times, 77 times) different from the first specific number of times as the specific number of times,
The content of the special privilege given by the giving means differs between when the increase notification is executed by adding the first specific number of times and when the increase notification is executed by adding the second specific number of times. The gaming machine according to feature DE5, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of feature DE5, the number of times of increase notification that special benefits are given is more diversified, and which special benefits are given is also complicated. It is possible to ensure the superiority of the players who are playing on the game machine.

Feature DE7. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to set the winning probability);
In the specific situation, when the specific condition is established, beyond the range of the unreported amount, the second special notification (pseudo additional notification) as the increase notification can be executed by the predetermined notification means Special notification executing means (function for executing the first special notification setting process by the display control device 81);
By performing the second special notification by the second special notification executing means, a granting means that can grant a special privilege different from the privilege based on the increase processing (by pseudo-additional notification by the display control device 81 function to suggest setting values),
with
6. The feature according to any one of features DE1 to DE6, wherein the granting means can grant the special privilege by executing suggestion notification suggesting information of the set value set by the setting means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, on the premise of the first special notification as the increased notification within the range of the number of unreported minutes, the second special notification as the increased notification exceeding the range of the number of unreported minutes is performed. Therefore, even if there is a discrepancy between the notification of the increase and the number of continuous games in a highly advantageous state, it will lead to a happy event for the player, and the number of executions and the remaining It is possible to enhance the playability after the total number of times reaches the upper limit.

In particular, the second special notification is executed under the condition that there is an unreported portion of the increase process, so if there is no unreported portion, that is, the total of the number of executions and the remaining number of times is the upper limit number of times The second special notification is made not after the player has grasped that it has been reached, but before it is grasped. By doing so, the second special notification will exceed the expectations of the player who desires the increase processing until the total reaches the upper limit number of times, and the second special notification will exceed the player's expectations. Happiness can be increased. In other words, in a situation where the player already knows that the total number has already reached the upper limit, it is considered that the player's interest has shifted from the increase processing to the awarding of the special privilege. If so, even if a special privilege is given in such a situation, it is considered difficult to provide a pleasure equal to or greater than the special privilege. Therefore, in a situation where something different from the special privilege (increase processing) is desired, by giving the special privilege along with the increase processing, it is possible to provide the pleasure more than the special privilege.

In the above configuration, in particular, suggested information on setting values is presented as a special privilege. In other words, since the information of the set value is presented by the second special notification exceeding the range of the unnotified amount, the player can decide whether or not to continue the game after the high advantage state ends. It can be used as a material for judgment.

Moreover, when the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times and ends, it is considered that a large amount of game media has been acquired, and even if information indicating a low setting is presented, a large amount of game media can be acquired. Therefore, there is a high possibility that it will be determined that the setting is high, and it is likely that it will be determined that the game should be continued. Therefore, for example, in comparison with the configuration in which the setting value is suggested when the upper limit number of times is not reached, the setting value can be suggested, and at the same time, the effect of making the game continuation decision criteria looser to the continuation side can be expected.

Feature DE8. The gaming machine according to feature DE7, wherein the establishment probability of the specific condition is common regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is established with the same establishment probability regardless of the set value, the set value is suggested when the second special notification exceeds the upper limit number of times. By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware of the importance of the set value even if the set value is less involved in the high advantage state, and the game can be played from a plurality of game machines installed in the game hall. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of selecting a game machine to play.

Feature DE9. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order, and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in the stop order of 2,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is given by a predetermined notification means (the first display segment on the instruction monitor 68). N1 to 7th display segment N7) has an executable order notification means (function for executing push order processing by main controller 101),
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state is a predetermined specific result (first specific role processing by main controller 101 function) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state (the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 is executed function) and
with
The low advantageous state is the normal game state,
The game machine according to any one of features DE1 to DE8, wherein the high advantage state is the specific game state.

In the amusement machine having the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery and the revolving body is started to revolve, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops and the revolving body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the revolving body. A specific game state is provided as a high-advantage state such that the degree of advantage differs depending on the presence or absence of the game. If the configuration relating to the first special notification of the feature DE1 is applied to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the game performance is favorably improved after the total number of executions of the specific advantageous state and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit number of times. can be made

In particular, compared to the special game state accompanied by the transition of the game state, that is, the jackpot state, the above-mentioned specific game state is different for the player depending on the presence or absence of notification, the frequency of notification, the mode of notification, etc. Advantages vary. In such a configuration, compared to one-to-one correspondence with the game result like the transition of the game state, there is a high degree of freedom in setting the continuation condition, and the number of continuations of the specific game state is strictly defined. It is easy to realize a game property that is not set, that is, a game property that allows the player to enjoy how long the specific game state continues. On the other hand, it can be said that the problem described in the feature DE1 is likely to occur by setting the upper limit number of times for such game characteristics. In that respect, by applying the configuration of the feature DE1 to such a gaming machine, while enjoying the continuity of the specific game state, the game performance when it is determined that the number of times of continuation reaches the upper limit number of times is improved. can be improved.

<Characteristic EA group>
Feature EA1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
A lottery performed based on the lottery result by the lottery means during the specific game state, and the specific notification corresponding to the result of the predetermined specific lottery can be notified by the specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). Specific notification execution means (for example, a function of executing the setting process of the additional effect by the display control device 81),
The specific notification execution means is
When the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the first notification means ( A function of executing processing for generating an additional notification effect in an additional winning game by the display control device 81;
When the setting value set by the setting means is a second setting value different from the first setting value, the specific notification is set to a second mode different from the first mode (in the case of an additional effect , the execution timing of the additional effect) (the function of executing the process of generating the additional notification effect in the game after the additional winning game by the main control device 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the result of the lottery, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the revolving body results in winning the first result or winning the second result. A result such as winning a prize is set, and there are cases in which mode notifications regarding these stop operation modes are performed. be.

Here, in a configuration in which the increase/decrease rate and increase/decrease mode of game media are managed by set values set by the setting means, it is common to vary the probability of lottery by the lottery means according to each set value. On the other hand, in order to create the above-mentioned game characteristics, if a difference is provided for setting values such as the presence or absence of mode notification, the probability of transition to a specific game state, continuity, etc., there will be too many parameters with setting differences. As a result, there is a possibility that the rate of increase or decrease of the game media or the width of the increase or decrease in the increase or decrease mode may increase due to overlapping of the upper or lower limits of each parameter. On the other hand, in the game during the specific game state, if there is no difference due to the set value, the enjoyment during the specific game state may decrease.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the mode of notification of the result of the specific lottery executed during the specific game state (specific notification) is configured to vary depending on the set value, so that the ball payout rate is less likely to be affected by the set value. It is possible to create a difference in playability depending on the set value within the range. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the “first mode” and “second mode” may be expressed as “first timing” and “second timing”. In this way, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, it becomes possible to exhibit the above excellent effects with a simpler configuration.

Feature EA2. The specific notification executing means provides, as the specific notification, a first specific notification indicating that the specific lottery has been won (additional notification effect in the immediate loading effect in the zone, and the first late-loading character BUP1 in the late-loading effect in the zone). display of second add-on character BUP2) and second specific notification regarding the content of the case of winning the specific lottery (notification of the number of games in the add-on effect in the immediate add-on effect in the zone, specialization in the add-on effect in the zone) notification of the number of additional games at the end of the zone), and
The first notification means executes the first specific notification in a specific mode and executes the second specific notification in the first mode,
The gaming machine according to feature EA1, wherein the second notification means executes the first specific notification in the specific mode, and executes the second specific notification in the second mode. .

According to the above configuration, as the specific notification, the first specific notification that the specific lottery related to the specific gaming state has been won, and the second specific notification regarding the winning content of the specific lottery are provided, and the first specific The notification is performed in a common mode (specific mode) regardless of the setting value, and the second specific notification is performed in a different mode depending on the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event such as ending the game without noticing that the specific lottery has been won. is reflected in the performance (a game property in which the set value is predicted and grasped) can be realized.

Feature EA3. When the first setting value is set by the setting means, the increase rate of the game media is higher than when the second setting value is set,
The gaming machine according to feature EA2, wherein the timing of the first mode is set prior to the timing of the second mode.

According to the above configuration, the timing of executing the second specific notification is earlier as the set value increases the increase rate of the game media. Assuming that the player desires a set value that increases the rate of increase and preferentially selects a game machine with such a set value, the specific lottery It is preferable that the second specific notification as the content of the winning is executed as soon as possible. In this way, the set value can be predicted and grasped using the execution timing of the second specific notification.

Here, in the game property of predicting and grasping such set values, if the predicted and grasped set values are unfavorable for the player (in the above example, the second set value), the player's There is a possibility that the desire to play may suddenly decrease. In this regard, in the above configuration, even if the second set value is predicted and grasped as being unfavorable for the player by the second specific notification, the specific lottery is won by the first specific notification before that. Since the notification of is performed, the second specific notification is made after the player is slightly pleased with the first specific notification, and the decrease in motivation for the game can be alleviated.

Feature EA4. The specific lottery is executed based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a specific result (specific combination),
At least a first specified result (watermelon) and a second specified result (cherry) are provided as the specified result,
The ratio of the case where the specific notification is performed by the first notification means and the case where the specific notification is performed by the second notification means is defined as a notification ratio (immediate loading/post-loading ratio), and the notification in the case of the first setting value The notification ratio difference, which is the difference between the ratio and the notification ratio when it is the second set value, is different between the specific notification based on the first identification result and the specific notification based on the second identification result. The gaming machine according to any one of features EA1 to EA3, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, regarding the notification ratio between when the specific notification is performed in the first mode and when it is performed in the second mode, the notification ratio in the case of the first setting value and the notification in the case of the second setting value The difference in reporting ratio from the ratio is different between the case of the first specified result and the case of the second specified result. For example, when the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is larger than the notification ratio difference based on the second specific result, in the game of predicting and grasping the set value, the specific notification based on the first specific result is better. It can be a strong basis as a prediction/understanding material rather than a specific notification based on the second specific result. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the ease of prediction and comprehension varies depending on the type of specific result, interest in the specific result that triggers the specific notification is heightened, and attention is paid to the lottery results of each game. It becomes possible to increase it suitably.

Feature EA5. is set so that the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second specified result is higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the first specified result,
Characteristic EA4 characterized in that the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first identification result is set to be larger than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second identification result The game machine described.

Based on the premise that the larger the notification ratio difference, the more powerful the basis for predicting and grasping the set value, the first specific result with a low winning probability has a larger notification ratio difference than the second specific result. Then, the specific notification based on the first specific result can serve as a strong basis for predicting and grasping the set value. Therefore, the merit of winning the first specific result with a low winning probability can be created in addition to the benefits of the specific lottery based on the first specific result and the benefit of winning the specific lottery. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the winning of the first specific result.

In addition, if the benefit from the specific lottery is a benefit related to the ball output rate, such as a benefit related to continuity during a specific game state, the above-mentioned benefits can be provided by providing the notification. It is possible to provide a merit from a viewpoint different from the rate, and it is possible to increase the merit of being the first specified result while avoiding an increase in the payout rate.

Feature EA6. As game states in the specific game state, a first specific game state (specialized zone for cherry timing) and a second specific game state (specialized zone for specific timing other than cherry) are set,
In the first specific game state, the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is set to be larger than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second specific result. cage,
In the second specific game state, the information ratio difference of the specific information based on the first specific result is set to be smaller than the information ratio difference of the specific information based on the second specific result. The gaming machine according to feature EA4 or feature EA5, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the information ratio difference based on the first specific result and the second specific result is reversed between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. That is, in the first specific game state, the effect of the feature EA5 is exhibited, and in the second specific game state, it becomes easy to predict and grasp the set value when the winning probability is high and the second specific result is won. Therefore, in the second specific game state, it is easier to predict and grasp the set value than in the first specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the game in which the set value is predicted and grasped from the viewpoint of which specific game state will be reached, and through the diversification of the game, the interest can be improved.

Feature EA7. The lottery result by the lottery means is set so that the probability of the second specified result is higher than the probability of the first specified result,
The gaming machine according to feature EA6, further comprising means for shifting to the second specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific result with a low probability of winning is obtained, there is a case where the transition is made to the second specific game state in which the set value can be easily predicted and grasped. By doing so, it is possible to provide the merit based on the winning of the first specific result not only from the viewpoint of specific notification based on the winning, but also from the viewpoint of transition of the specific game state, and the first specific result It is possible to further improve the superiority of the results.

Feature EA8. Any one of the characteristics EA4 to EA7, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first specified result and the probability that the second specified result will be the same regardless of the game state The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize game characteristics using the first identification result and the second identification result without changing the lottery probability of the lottery means. Therefore, for example, there is no need to change the lottery table, etc., and compared to a configuration that can be applied only in a limited state such as a jackpot state in which the probability of winning a small combination is different from that in a normal game state, the game performance can be realized. Greatly increases the degree of freedom in

Feature EA9. The first notification means, as the first mode, executes the specific notification in a game in which the specific lottery is held,
The game according to any one of features EA1 to EA8, wherein the second notification means, as the second aspect, executes the specific notification in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific lottery was performed. machine.

According to the above configuration, the difference in the mode between the specific notification by the first notification means and the specific notification by the second notification means is the difference in the mode in different games. By doing so, there is a difference between whether the result of the specific lottery is notified in the game or in the game after that, and the game property due to the difference in the notification mode can be extended. It is possible to entertain for a long period of time.

Feature EA10. Means for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state (advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
Means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number of times in the specific game state end processing) and
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features EA1 to EA9, wherein the specific lottery is a lottery relating to an increase process for increasing the remaining number of games.

According to the above configuration, the specific lottery is a lottery related to increasing processing for increasing the number of remaining times in the specific game state, that is, an additional lottery. In view of the game characteristics that are advantageous to the player due to the state notification being performed in the specific game state, it is advantageous to continue the specific game state for a long time, and such an increase in the remaining number of times is a favorable phenomenon for the player. In particular, after shifting to the specific game state, the game should be played while hoping that the specific game state will continue for a long time. In addition, by making the execution mode of the specific notification related to the processing for increasing the remaining number of times different depending on the set value, it is possible to make the player pay great attention to the difference in the execution mode, and the winning probability of the increase processing. It is possible to entertain the user while associating the setting value with the increasing process without actually providing a setting difference for the above.

Feature EA11. The specific notification executing means provides, as the specific notification, a first specific notification that the increase processing is to be performed (additional notification effect in the immediate loading effect in the zone, first character BUP1 or BUP1 in the post-loading effect in the zone). display of a second character BUP2), and a second specific notification regarding the number of increments in the remaining number of times when the increase processing is performed (notification of the number of games in the additional effect in the zone immediate effect, post-add effect in the zone). In the production, it is possible to notify the number of additional games at the end of the special zone) and
The first notification means executes the first specific notification in a specific mode and executes the second specific notification in the first mode,
The gaming machine according to feature EA10, wherein the second notification means executes the first specific notification in the specific mode, and executes the second specific notification in the second mode. .

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the first specific notification that the number of games has been added (increase processing) in the specific gaming state and the second specific notification regarding the number of games to be added are provided. The specific notification is executed in a common mode (specific mode) regardless of the setting value, and the second specific notification is executed in a different mode depending on the setting value. Therefore, after pleasing the player through the addition performed by the first specific notification, the second specific notification regarding the number of games to be added is performed in a manner with a setting difference, and the second specific notification is that This is done in a situation where interest in the notification has been heightened in advance. In other words, it is considered that the difference in the notification mode gives a great impression to the player who is waiting impatiently, and the advantage of providing the setting difference in the notification mode of the second specific notification is to be exhibited more preferably. becomes possible.

Feature EA12. The first notification means executes the first specific notification as the specific mode in the game in which the specific lottery is held, and executes the second specific notification as the first mode in the game in which the specific lottery is held. and run
The second notification means executes the first specific notification as the specific mode in a game in which the specific lottery is held, and executes the first specific notification as the specific mode in a game after the game in which the specific lottery is held as the second mode. The gaming machine according to feature EA10 or feature EA11, characterized by executing.

According to the above configuration, when the addition notification (specific notification) is performed by the first notification means, notification of the addition winning in the game in which the specific lottery was performed (first specific notification) and notification of the number of additional games (Second specific notification) is performed, resulting in a so-called immediate boarding notification. On the other hand, when the additional notification (specific notification) is performed by the second notification means, the additional winning notification (first specific notification) is performed in the game in which the specific lottery was performed, and the additional game is performed in the subsequent game. A notification of the number (second specific notification) is performed, which is a so-called subsequent notification. In this way, the immediate addition notification and the subsequent addition notification in the addition notification are configured to be different depending on the set value, so that even if the addition winning rate and the number of addition games at the time of winning are not caused by the difference due to the setting value, the game can be played. It is possible to involve a setpoint for the number superposition.

Feature EA13. means for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific gaming state (advantageous section game number AG);
Means (main controller 101 A function that executes processing for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second processing by
with
A ratio of the case where the specific notification is performed by the first notification means and the case where the specific notification is performed by the second notification means is defined as a notification ratio, and the notification ratio when the specific notification is the first setting value and the second setting value. The gaming machine according to any one of features EA10 to EA12, wherein an information ratio difference, which is a difference from the information ratio when , differs according to the number of times of execution.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the upper limit number of times is set in the specific game state, the first set value regarding the notification ratio between when the specific notification is performed in the first mode and when it is performed in the second mode The notification ratio difference between the notification ratio in the case of and the notification ratio in the case of the second set value varies depending on the number of executions of the specific game state, and the difficulty of predicting and grasping the set value changes. For example, if there is still room for the number of games to reach the maximum number of times, the player will want to add more games, and if the number of games remaining to reach the maximum number of times is small, the number of games will be increased. It is thought that the player does not feel very happy even if the number is increased, and rather thinks that it is a loss if the number is increased beyond the upper limit. In that respect, by adopting the above configuration, the degree of difficulty in predicting and grasping the set value is varied in relation to the number of remaining games up to the upper limit, so that it is possible to predict and grasp the happiness when the addition occurs. It is possible to make up for it from the viewpoint of ease of doing.

Feature EA14. A number display means (function for executing a process for performing display corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81) capable of displaying the number display corresponding to the remaining number on a predetermined display means,
Any one of features EA10 to EA13, wherein whether the specific notification is performed by the first notification means or the second notification means is different depending on the number of times displayed by the number display. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, whether the specific notification as the additional notification is performed in the first mode or the second mode differs depending on the number display corresponding to the remaining number of times in the specific game state. In the case of winning an additional lottery as a specific lottery, for example, in a situation where the number of times displayed is small, the player will feel relieved by increasing the number of times displayed due to the addition. Depending on the circumstances, it may be preferable to have a sense of superiority that the potential remaining number of times is greater than the number of times displayed, rather than immediately increasing the number of times displayed. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by making the mode of the additional notification different according to the number of times displayed from the number of times display, an effect that utilizes the difference in emotions due to the above addition is performed. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effective presentation that attracts the player.

Feature EA15. Grant determination means (function for executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) that executes grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the occurrence of a determination trigger;
A benefit that allows a player to receive a benefit corresponding to the grant response result based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the benefit to the player. Giving means (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A plurality of stages of setting values are provided, which are capable of causing a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the game media based on the determination result of the provision determination means, and one of the plurality of stages of setting values is Setting means to be set (function for executing processing for setting winning probability by main control device 101);
It is a determination executed based on the determination result by the grant determination means, and a specific determination means for executing a specific determination in which the winning probability is common regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. 1 special combination processing to 2nd special combination processing),
The specific notification corresponding to the determination result by the specific determination means can be executed by the predetermined specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). function) and
with
The specific notification execution means is
When the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the first notification means ( A function of executing processing for generating an additional notification effect in an additional winning game by the display control device 81;
When the setting value set by the setting means is a second setting value different from the first setting value, the specific notification is set to a second mode different from the first mode (in the case of an additional effect , the execution timing of the additional effect) (the function of executing the process of generating the additional notification effect in the game after the additional winning game by the main control device 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the set value is set to change the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease mode of the game media based on the determination result of the provision determination means, the set value does not affect the probability of winning by the specific determination means. However, it affects the execution mode of the specific notification as the result notification corresponding to the determination result by the specific determination means, and the execution mode differs between the first set value and the second set value. By doing so, it is possible to associate the setting value and the specific determination without providing a difference due to the setting value for the winning probability regarding the specific determination executed based on the determination result by the provision determining means. Become.

Here, it is thought that a player who desires an increase in the amount of game media will search for a game machine on which better set values are set and play a game, and the suggestive effect of suggesting the set values set by the setting means. It can be said that it is possible to make the game more interesting by providing it. On the other hand, if the suggestive effect is configured so that the occurrence probability differs depending on the setting value, the suggestive effect itself does not occur or is unlikely to occur depending on the set value, and the suggested effect prepared with much effort becomes effective. A situation that is not used may also occur, and, for example, in order to provide a suggestive effect such as confirming that it is a predetermined set value when it appears, it is necessary to separately prepare a suggestive effect for the predetermined set value. In that respect, in the above configuration, regarding the specific notification that has a function as a suggestive effect, the winning probability itself of the specific judgment that triggers the specific notification does not differ depending on the set value, so the occurrence rate of the specific notification Since the set values can be made common and only the manner of execution of the specific notification is made different, there is no need to prepare separate specific notifications for each set value. Therefore, the suggestive effect can be implemented more simply and effectively, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Note that the “first mode” and “second mode” may be expressed as “first timing” and “second timing”. In this way, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, it becomes possible to exhibit the above excellent effects with a simpler configuration.

Note that each configuration of the features EA1 to EA14 may be applied individually to the feature EA15, or each configuration may be applied in combination. In this case, it is preferable to match the terminology between the configurations as appropriate, such as by replacing the "grant determining means" in the feature EA15 with the "lottery means".

<Characteristic EB group>
Features EB1. Based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, specific determination means (first specific role processing by main controller 101 to third function to execute the special combination process),
Event executing means for executing the specific event based on the determination result by the specific determining means being a result corresponding to the execution of the specific event (function for executing processing such as adding the number of games by the main controller 101) and,
Specific notification execution means (additional effect by display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification corresponding to execution of the specific event or execution of the specific event by specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) function to execute setting processing) and
a number-of-times grasping means for grasping the number of times of the specific event (a function of executing processing for managing the watermelon post-counter and the watermelon immediate-counter by the display control device 81);
with
The specific notification execution means is
A first notification execution means (function for executing a process for performing an immediate riding effect in the zone in the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing;
a second notification execution means (a function of executing a process for performing a second-in-zone effect in the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing later than the first timing;
Selection means (display A function of executing a process of selecting an additional notification timing table corresponding to the table counter ATK in the control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when a specific event advantageous to the player occurs as a result of winning the specific determination, the player can comprehend the specific event based on the specific notification corresponding to the specific event. For example, if the specific event is a jackpot, the specific notification is a jackpot notification, and the player can fully enjoy the jackpot and feel a sense of superiority by the jackpot notification.

Here, when a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs, even if the advantage level of the specific event does not change each time the specific event occurs, the player's emotion when the specific event occurs is subtle each time it occurs. It is thought that significant changes will occur. Specifically, while it is thought that the person will be very pleased with the occurrence of the specific event at the first occurrence, they will become “habituated” to the occurrence as the number of occurrences increases, and they will not feel as much joy as the first occurrence. It is assumed that it will disappear.

Therefore, in the above-described configuration, the execution timing of the specific notification for the occurrence of the specific event is different for each occurrence, thereby realizing the specific notification corresponding to the subtle change of the player at each occurrence. is possible, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature EB2. The gaming machine according to feature EB2, wherein the selection means makes it easier for the selection means to perform the specific notification by the first notification execution means as the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means decreases.

According to the above configuration, the smaller the number of occurrences of the specific event that is advantageous to the player, the earlier the notification is made. A player who is looking forward to whether or not an advantageous specific event will occur may prefer to be informed of it as soon as possible. It is considered that the unexpected timing of the notification of the specific event would make the user feel more joy than expected. Therefore, by adopting the configuration described above, it is possible to suitably realize the specific notification according to the player's emotion, which can change with each occurrence.

Feature EB3. The number-of-times grasping means is the number of times of the specific event that caused the specific notification to be executed by the first notification executing means, out of the number of times of the specific event, or the second notification. Specific number grasping means for grasping either one of the number of second specific events, which is the number of times of the specific event for which the specific notification is executed by the execution means function to execute processing to manage the counter),
The selection means executes a plurality of notifications including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means according to the number of times of the first specific event or the number of times of the second specific event grasped by the specific number of times grasping means. The gaming machine according to feature EB1 or feature EB2, wherein a notification execution means for executing the specific notification is selected from means.

According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the next specific notification is selected based on the number of times the specific notification is performed at the first timing (or the second timing) rather than simply the number of times the specific event is performed. In this case, for example, if many executions are performed at the first timing, the second timing is likely to be selected next time, or the first timing is likely to be selected next time. Considering the timing of the specific notification, it is possible to determine the execution timing of the new specific notification, and the subtle difference in the impression given to the player can be adjusted well by the execution timing of the specific notification.

Feature EB4. The first identification ascertained by the specific number of times ascertaining means based on execution of the specific notification by a notification execution means different from the specific notification by the notification execution means on the side ascertained by the specific number of times ascertainment means. The gaming machine according to feature EB3, further comprising means capable of initializing the number of events or the number of second specific events (function for executing the process of step S10806 by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, for example, when the specific frequency grasping means grasps the number of first specific events, when the specific notification is executed by the first notification executing means, the number of first specific events is incremented by 1, When the second notification executing means executes the specific notification, the first specific event frequency is initialized (reset). That is, the number of times ascertained by the specific number of times grasping means is the consecutive number of times the specific notification is executed by the first notification executing means or the consecutive number of times the specific notification is executed by the second notification executing means. As a result, for example, if the specific notification at the first timing continues, the execution timing of the specific notification is determined according to the number of grasps, such as making it easier to perform the specific notification at the first timing. Then, a decision can be made according to the number of consecutive hits up to that point.

Feature EB5. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
The selection means is capable of selecting the notification executing means for executing the specific notification based on the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means and the setting value set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features EB1 to EB4.

According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the specific notification also changes depending on the set value that changes the increase/decrease rate and increase/decrease mode of the game media. For example, a situation in which a large amount of game media has been acquired due to a good set value, a situation in which game media have not been acquired due to a bad set value, In comparison with the occurrence of an advantageous specific event, it is considered that the player is more pleased with the occurrence of the latter than the former. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to realize a specific notification in response to a subtle change in the player's emotion based on an advantageous specific event and whether the set value is good or bad.

Feature EB6. The selection means is
when the number of times ascertained by the number of times ascertaining means is the first number of times and the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, a predetermined notification execution means is selected with a first probability; When the number of times ascertained by the number of times ascertaining means is the first number of times and the set value set by the setting means is a second set value different from the first set value, the first probability and selects the predetermined notification execution means with different second probabilities,
When the number of times ascertained by the number of times ascertaining means is a second number of times greater than the first number of times and the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the When the predetermined notification executing means is selected, the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is the second number of times, and the setting value set by the setting means is the second setting value, the third Selecting the predetermined notification execution means with a fourth probability different from the probability,
The gaming machine according to feature EB5, wherein the probability difference between the third probability and the fourth probability is set to be larger than the probability difference between the first probability and the second probability.

According to the above configuration, when the notification execution means is selected based on the number of times of the specific event and the set value, the greater the number of times, the greater the influence of the set value. By doing so, for example, in the case of a configuration in which a setting value is suggested according to the execution timing of the specific notification, the more the specific event is executed, the easier it is to narrow down the setting value. In other words, it is possible to prevent the set values from being narrowed down in a situation where the number of executions of the specific event is small, so as not to spoil the enjoyment of the game in which the set values are gradually narrowed down.

More specifically, the 'predetermined notification execution means' is 'first notification execution means' or 'second notification execution means'.

Feature EB7. The gaming machine according to feature EB6, wherein when the first number of times is one, the first probability and the second probability are the same probability.

According to the above configuration, when the specific event is executed for the first time, there is no difference in the execution timing of the specific notification due to the set value. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which the setting value is determined from the first time, and it is possible to suitably realize the game property of predicting the setting value.

Feature EB8. Notification in which information of the notification execution means for executing the specific notification is stored from a plurality of notification execution means including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means according to the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means. Execution means information group (additional notification timing table) is set respectively,
Features EB1 to EB7, wherein the selection means selects the notification execution means for executing the specific notification by switching the information execution means information group to be used according to the number of times ascertained by the number of times ascertainment means. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the notification execution means selected by the selection means simply by switching the notification execution means information group (table) according to the number of executions of the specific event. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the effect of the feature EB1 with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature EB9. As the game state, at least a normal game state (normal section) and a specific game state (advantageous section) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features EB1 to EB8, wherein the specific event is an event capable of increasing the remaining number of times in the specific game state.

According to the above configuration, the specific event is executed during the specific game state in which the game state is advantageous in the first place, and when the specific event occurs, the number of remaining times of the specific game state increases. In other words, the specific event is an addition to the specific game state. By configuring the execution timing of the specific notification (additional notification) when such an addition occurs to differ according to the number of times the addition occurs, for example, when the number of times the addition occurs is small and the remaining number of times is small In addition, it is possible to make an addition notification using a subtle difference in the player's emotion when an addition occurs, depending on whether the number of occurrences of the addition is large and the number of remaining times is large.

<Characteristic EC group>
Feature EC1. Based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, specific determination means (first specific role processing by main controller 101 to second 3 function to execute the special combination process),
Event executing means for executing the specific event based on the determination result by the specific determining means being a result corresponding to the execution of the specific event (function for executing processing such as adding the number of games by the main controller 101) and,
Specific notification execution means (additional effect by display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification corresponding to execution of the specific event or execution of the specific event by specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) function to execute setting processing) and
a specific storage means (a function of executing processing for managing the watermelon post-addition counter and the watermelon immediate-addition counter by the display control device 81) capable of storing information about the timing at which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification execution means; ,
Specific output means capable of outputting specific information corresponding to the information stored in the specific storage means at a timing after the timing when the specific notification is executed by the specific notification execution means. A function to execute processing for displaying the immediate/post-loading ratio and the immediate/post-loading ratio for cherry),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when a specific event advantageous to the player occurs as a result of winning the specific determination, the player can comprehend the specific event based on the specific notification corresponding to the specific event. For example, if the specific event is a jackpot, the specific notification is the jackpot notification, and the player can fully enjoy the jackpot and feel a sense of superiority by the jackpot notification. While the specific notification can be performed at various timings, in the above configuration, the timing at which the specific notification is executed is stored, and the specific information regarding the timing is output after the fact. Here, for example, when game data is aggregated after the fact, specific events such as big wins may be displayed on the data display in the game hall, and such events that are advantageous to the player are stored in memory. It is considered that it is easy to remain and can be easily remembered later. On the other hand, regarding the execution timing of the specific notification that a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs, the desire of the player will be satisfied at the time when such specific notification is made, and the game will be played by the occurrence of the specific event. Since the person's sense of exhilaration is likely to increase further, it is thought that the specific notification executed before that will easily fade from memory as the sense of exhilaration increases. In other words, regarding the specific notification, it is considered that the execution timing in particular is difficult for the player to remember. Therefore, as in the above configuration, such information that is difficult to remember can be stored on the gaming machine side and read out (output) afterwards, thereby helping the player to collect data. It becomes possible.

Feature EC2. As the specific events, a plurality of specific events (different numbers of games added) having different degrees of advantage for the player are set,
The game according to characteristic EC1 is characterized in that the specific storage means can store different pieces of information even when the specific event has the same degree of advantage, but when the timing at which the specific notification is executed is different. machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific events have the same advantage, if the execution timing of the specific notification is different, it is possible to collect them separately. That is, even if the big wins are the same, if the notification timings of the big wins are different, they can be totaled as separate information. For example, in the conventional tallying method, big wins and small wins are tallied separately, but the same big win is generally tallied as the same information even if the notification timing is different. According to the above configuration, it is possible to further clarify the difference from the conventional technology and more preferably realize the tallying of the notification timings shown in the feature EC1.

Feature EC3. The specific notification execution means is
A first specific notification executing means (a function of executing a process for performing an immediate ride effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing;
A second specific notification executing means (a function of executing a process for performing a post-adding effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing different from the first timing;
with
The specific output means is capable of outputting ratio information between the specific notification executed by the first specific notification executing means and the specific notification executed by the second specific notification executing means as the specific information. The gaming machine according to feature EC1 or feature EC2, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, ratio information between the ratio of execution at the first timing and the ratio of execution at the second timing is output as the information on the execution timing of the specific notification. By doing so, not only is it possible to facilitate the tallying, but for example, when the number of executions of a specific event is small, only the ratio is output without outputting the number of times, which is undesirable for the player. It is also possible to avoid the fact that information is represented realistically.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.
"The specific notification executing means
A first specific notification executing means (a function of executing a process for performing an immediate ride effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing;
A second specific notification executing means (a function of executing a process for performing a post-adding effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing different from the first timing;
with
The specific output means is capable of outputting ratio information between the specific notification executed by the first specific notification executing means and the specific notification executed by the second specific notification executing means as the specific information. , information on the number of times of the specific notification executed by the first specific notification executing means and the specific notification executed by the second specific notification executing means is not output.

Feature EC4. A restriction capable of restricting the output of the specific information by the output means in a specific situation (advantageous section) in which the specific event is being executed or a game based on the specific event is being played. The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC3, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing the processing of step S11206 by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the output of the specific information is restricted during the specific event or in the specific situation where the game based on the specific event is being played. For example, during the jackpot, the information about the execution timing of the jackpot notification is not output. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the user cannot fully enjoy the specific event or the like due to excessive attempts to collect data during the specific situation. Moreover, by assuming such a configuration, the specific information can be output at a later timing, so the significance of storing such specific information is increased.

Feature EC5. The specific notification executing means uses a predetermined information group (additional notification timing table including information on set values) to determine the execution timing of the specific notification and then executes the specific notification,
The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC4, wherein the information set in the predetermined information group can be useful information for the player.

According to the above configuration, the information set in the predetermined information group is used to determine the execution timing of the specific notification, and the execution timings are aggregated so as to be set in the predetermined information group. It becomes possible to predict and grasp information. Since the information set in the predetermined information group can be useful information for the player, counting the execution timings can also be said to be an act for collecting information that can be useful for the player. Therefore, the significance of the output of the specific information is enhanced, and the output of the specific information can bring about merits for the player.

Feature EC6. In the specific storage means, the specific area for storing information about the timing at which the specific notification is performed is configured to be capable of storing information about the timing at which a plurality of the specific notifications are performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics EC1 to EC5, wherein the specific output means can output cumulative information of the plurality of stored information as the specific information.

According to the above configuration, when there is a plurality of pieces of information regarding execution timing of the specific notification, such as when the specific notification is executed multiple times, the accumulated information is output as the specific information. Therefore, the player can more easily perform data analysis based on the specific information.

Feature EC7. A first determination condition (cherry) and a second determination condition (watermelon) are set as the determination conditions,
The specific information storage means separately stores information corresponding to the execution timing of the specific notification based on the establishment of the first determination condition and information corresponding to the execution timing of the specific notification based on the establishment of the second determination condition. The game machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC6, wherein the game machine can be stored in the .

According to the above configuration, the information corresponding to the execution timing of the specific notification is stored for each type of determination condition, so that it is possible to perform more useful data analysis when the information obtained differs for each type. Become.

Feature EC8. Having an operation unit (effect switch 66) that can be operated by the player,
It is characterized by comprising a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S11203 and S11204 by the display control device 81) capable of erasing information stored in the specific storage means based on the operation of the operation unit. A gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC7.

According to the above configuration, the player can freely select whether or not to erase the information stored in the specific storage means. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the successor from handing over the game data played by the player himself/herself, and it is possible to ensure the superiority of collecting the specific information.

Feature EC9. A configuration in which the specific information is output by the specific output means based on the operation of the operation unit,
The gaming machine according to the characteristic EC8, wherein the specific storage means can store information regarding the timing at which the specific notification is executed regardless of whether or not the operation unit is operated.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the information regarding the execution timing of the specific notification is erased or output by operating the operation unit, and the information regarding the execution timing of the specific notification is stored regardless of whether or not the operation unit is operated. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to output the specific information due to forgetting to perform the operation, etc., while securing the superiority of collecting the specific information by leaving it to the player's operation.

Feature EC10. As game states, a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are set,
A first end means for ending the specific game state according to the number of times remaining in the specific game state (a function of executing a process to normally end the advantageous section in the main control device 101);
A second end means for ending the specific game state regardless of the remaining number of times in the specific game state (a function of forcibly ending the advantageous section in the main control device 101);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC9, wherein the specific output means is capable of outputting the specific information based on the end of the specific game state by the second end means. .

The specific game state advantageous to the player may end depending on the remaining number of playable times or may end regardless of the remaining number of times. The former is a normal mode of termination, and the latter corresponds to forced termination when, for example, the number of times of execution reaches the upper limit. In such a configuration, if the game is forcibly terminated by the second termination means, the player who still wants to enjoy the specific game state may have the impression that the profit to be obtained has been exploited. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by configuring to output the specific information instead, it is possible to follow up on the forced termination of the specific game state.

<Characteristic ED group>
Feature ED1. As the game state, a low-advantage state (normal section) and a high-advantage state (advantage section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set.
a first grasping means (advantage zone game number AG) for grasping the number of times executed in the high advantage state;
a second grasping means for grasping the number of times the high advantage state remains (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG);
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantageous state, a first ending means (normal A function that executes the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of
Based on the fact that the number of executions ascertained by the first ascertaining means reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times in the high advantageous state, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number ascertained by the second ascertaining means. , a second termination means (a function of forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the second section display processing by the main controller 101) for shifting the high-advantage state to the low-advantage state;
A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to set the winning probability);
A gaming machine comprising
an increasing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (additional notification) that the increase process has been performed can be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) A function of executing a setting process of an additional effect by the display control device 81);
with
When performing the increase notification, the increase notification execution means is a specific notification execution means (display control device) capable of executing specific notification suggesting the information of the set value set by the setting means according to the number of times of execution A game machine characterized in that it has a function of executing a late-loading effect in a zone and an immediate-loading effect in a zone according to 81).

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low. Since there are cases where the process ends based on reaching the upper limit number of times, it is possible to prevent the advantage of the high-advantage state from being extremely increased. Such a configuration has a so-called additional function in which the number of remaining high-advantage states is increased when a specific condition is met, and expectations for the specific condition being met are heightened.

On the other hand, even if a specific condition is met and the remaining count is increased, for example, if the remaining count reaches the upper limit, such as when the number of executions is close to the upper limit, there is a sufficient increase. There are also situations where it is not possible to expect, and in a high advantage state where the upper limit is set, the expectation for an increase in the remaining number of times varies greatly depending on the situation.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in performing the increase notification corresponding to the increase processing, by making it possible to suggest the set value according to the number of executions, even if the remaining number of times cannot be expected to increase, the specified Even in a situation in which the merits of condition establishment cannot be fully enjoyed, it is possible to follow up on the merits by suggesting set values. Therefore, it is possible to fully enjoy the high-advantage state, and it is possible to suitably improve the interest.

Feature ED2. The specific notification executing means is arranged so that the closer the number of times of execution ascertained by the first grasping means is to the upper limit number of times, the easier it is to grasp the information of the setting value set by the setting means in the specific notification. The gaming machine according to feature ED1, characterized by being able to suggest.

According to the above configuration, as the number of times of execution increases and approaches the upper limit number of times, and even if the increase processing is performed, it becomes difficult to fully enjoy the advantage thereof, it becomes easier to grasp the set value by the specific notification. As a result, it is possible to make up for the merits that cannot be enjoyed by the increase processing by suggesting the set values.

Feature ED3. The specific notification execution means is
When the number of executions ascertained by the first ascertaining means is the first number of times and the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the execution mode of the specific notification is determined with a first probability. The setting value information is suggested in a specific mode, the number of executions ascertained by the first grasping means is the first number, and the setting value set by the setting means is the first number. If the second set value is different from one set value, suggesting the information of the set value so that the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode with a second probability different from the first probability,
When the number of executions ascertained by the first ascertaining means is a second number of times greater than the first number of times and the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, a third probability the setting value information is suggested so that the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode, and the number of times of execution grasped by the first grasping means is the second number of times, and When the set value to be set is the second set value, the information of the set value is suggested so that the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode with a fourth probability different from the third probability. is a
The gaming machine according to feature ED2, wherein the probability difference between the third probability and the fourth probability is set to be larger than the probability difference between the first probability and the second probability.

According to the above configuration, the number of times of execution increases and approaches the upper limit number of times, and even if the increase processing is performed, the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode so that the merit cannot be fully enjoyed, and the setting value is suggested. The difference between the set values in the probability that the Thereby, the effect of the characteristic ED2 can be exhibited by a specific configuration.

Feature ED4. The game according to any one of features ED1 to ED3, wherein the specific notification executing means is capable of suggesting information on the set value according to execution timing of the increase notification as the specific notification. machine.

According to the above configuration, if the set value is suggested using the difference in execution timing of the increase notification, there is no need to prepare different modes of effects for the set values that are set in multiple stages. As a result, the specific notification can be realized with a simple configuration without complicating the rendering configuration.

Feature ED5. The specific notification execution means executes the increase notification at a first timing when the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, and the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value. When the second setting value is different from the first setting value, the specific notification can be executed by executing the increase notification at a second timing different from the first timing. The gaming machine described in feature ED4.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature ED4 can be achieved with a more specific configuration.

Feature ED6. The gaming machine according to feature ED5, wherein the second timing is a game after the first timing.

According to the above configuration, the game is played in which the first timing and the second timing are different. In this case, the remaining number of times when the specific notification is performed at the first timing differs from the remaining number of times when the specific notification is performed at the second timing. For example, when the specific notification is given when the remaining number of times is small and when the remaining number of times is large, it is considered that the former gives greater pleasure to the increase in the remaining number of times. In other words, the impression given to the player is greatly different when the processing for increasing the remaining number of times is performed by the increase notification. By using such a difference in the impression received by the player to suggest a set value, for example, by suggesting a low setting at a timing when the player feels happy about the increase notification. , it is possible to relieve the sadness of the low setting, and conversely, by suggesting a high setting at the timing when the increase notification does not feel so happy, it is possible to supplement the joy of the increase notification. can.

Feature ED7. The specific notification execution means is
When the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the increase notification is executed in the first game, and the setting value set by the setting means is higher than the first setting value. If the second set value is advantageous for, the increase notification is executed in a second game that is a game after the first game,
For the same setting value set by the setting means,
when the number of executions ascertained by the ascertaining means is the first number of executions, a specific selection rate at which the second game is selected over the first game is the first selection rate;
When the number of executions ascertained by the ascertaining means is a second number of executions greater than the first number of executions, the specific selection rate is set to a second selection rate higher than the first selection rate. The gaming machine according to any one of features ED4 to ED6, capable of executing specific notification.

According to the above configuration, the higher the setting, the more easily the increase notification is executed in the later game, and when compared with the same set value, the number of times of execution is higher than that of the beginning where the number of times of execution of the specific game state is small. By adopting a configuration in which the increase notification is more likely to be executed in the later game at the end where the Although the suggestion to that effect is likely to be made, the joy of being notified of the increase can soften the sadness of the low setting. On the other hand, since it is easier to suggest that the setting is high at the end of the specific game state, even if you do not feel happy about the increase notification, you will follow up with the suggestion that the setting is high. becomes possible.

Feature ED8. The increase notification is
A first means for executing the increase notification in a game in which the specific condition is established (a function of executing a process for performing an immediate riding effect in the display control device 81);
A second means for executing the increase notification in a game after the game in which the specific condition is established (function for executing a process for performing a post-adding effect in the display control device 81);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics ED4 to ED7, wherein the increase means executes the increase process in a game in which the specific condition is established.

According to the above configuration, since the increase processing itself is executed in the game in which the specific condition is established, even if the increase notification is performed after the game as in the second means, there is a difference in performance. , and the configuration can be simplified in performing the specific notification due to the difference in the execution timing of the increase notification while managing the number of times of execution, the upper limit number of times, and the like.

Feature ED9. A number-of-times notification means (a function of executing a process for managing the display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81) capable of executing a number-of-times notification corresponding to the remaining number of times by a predetermined notification means,
When the second means executes the increase notification in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific condition is established, the number of times notification means is configured to control the result of the increase processing executed in the game in which the specific condition is established. The number of times notification is performed without reflecting the number of times, and the result of the increase processing for the increase notification is reflected in the number of times notification based on the fact that the increase notification is performed by the second means A gaming machine described in ED8.

According to the above configuration, while the remaining number of times is grasped to some extent by the number of times notification means, when the increase notification is performed after the fact, the result of the increase processing is not reflected in the number of times notification until the increase notification occurs. As a result, it is possible to obtain the effect of notifying the increase after the game, as well as the effect of simplifying the processing configuration such as the feature ED8.

Feature ED10. The gaming machine according to feature ED9, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of performing the specific notification according to information about the number of times notification notified by the number of times notification means.

According to the above configuration, the setting value is suggested (specific notification) by performing the increase notification in consideration of the information about the number of times notification on the display. In this way, for example, even if there are actually many remaining counts left, but a small number of counts are displayed in the count alert on the display, the increase alert will be treated as a case where the user would feel happy. becomes possible. Therefore, there are many occasions in which a configuration such as the feature ED6 is applied, and it is possible to exhibit the presentation effect of the feature ED1 in a more suitable manner.

<Characteristic FA group>
Features FA1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state is a predetermined specific result (first specific role processing by main controller 101 function) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state (the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 is executed function) and
Grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state;
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the specific game state, normal transition means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (normal end condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101 A function that executes the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment of
an increasing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (additional notification) that the increase process has been performed can be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) A function of executing the setting process of the additional effect by the display control device 81);
with
The increase notification execution means is
A first notification execution means (a function of executing a process for performing an additional effect based on the immediate addition selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification in the first mode;
a second notification executing means (a function of executing a process for performing an additional effect based on the additional selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification in a second mode different from the first mode; ,
with
The first notification execution means is based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in a first specific stop operation mode in a specific game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed, and the corresponding revolving body stops. and executing the increase notification in the first mode when the increase process is performed,
In the specific game, the second notification executing means is configured such that when the stop operation means is operated in a second specific stop operation mode different from the first specific stop operation mode, the corresponding looping body stops. A gaming machine characterized by executing the increase notification in the second mode when the increase processing is performed based on the above.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, and aspects related to the stop operation mode. A specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of notification. Moreover, when a specific condition is established in a specific game state, the remaining number of times in the specific game state may be increased, and by continuing the specific game state for a long time, it may be possible to acquire a large amount of game media. , the playability of each game has been remarkably improved.

On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, the game tends to be a one-sided game from the gaming machine, such as the player performing a stop operation based on the mode notification on the gaming machine side and winning the corresponding result. In view of the original game nature of the slot machine, such as aiming at the pattern of the revolving body and stopping it to obtain a privilege, the above game machine-led game is not preferable.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the mode of execution of the increase notification when the increase processing is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition is given to the player according to the mode of the stop operation by the stop operation means in the specific game in which the mode notification is not performed. It was configured to let you choose. By doing so, it is possible to make the player intervene in the game in the specific game state, and it is possible to encourage the participation of the player in the game that can be led by the gaming machine.

In addition, regarding the "specific game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed", "a special result (specific combination, normal replay) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means", and "the above When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is operated in the second stop operation mode. The special result winning can be established by being operated in the stop operation mode of (1), and the game "the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result" may be the "specific game".

Note that the “first mode” and “second mode” may be expressed as “first timing” and “second timing”. In this way, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, it becomes possible to exhibit the above excellent effects with a simpler configuration.

Feature FA2. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a replay result that enables the next game to be played again without requiring a new game medium is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature FA1, characterized in that, when the specific game state is entered, the game machine can shift to a regame state in which the probability that the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined regame result is higher than that of the normal game state. .

According to the above configuration, when the state is shifted to the specific game state in which the mode notification is performed, the state can be shifted to the so-called RT state in which the probability of obtaining a predetermined replay result increases. As a result of the replay, winning is generally established regardless of the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, but in the RT state, the mode notification is performed and a benefit is obtained in the stop operation mode according to the RT state. It is conceivable that, in addition to the games in which the winning result is the first result or the second result, there are frequently games in which the winning probability is high and the game is winning as a result of a predetermined replay. As described above, as a result of the replay, winning is generally established regardless of the mode of the stop operation. A game or a game in which the stop operation mode is not related to whether a prize is won or not may be reduced, thereby reducing the room for the player to intervene in the game. In this respect, as described in the feature FA1, the execution mode of the increase notification is determined based on the stop operation mode of the specific game in which the mode notification is not performed. can be set as a specific game. As a result of the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that the above configuration limits that "when the lottery result by the lottery means wins a specific re-game result, winning of the specific re-game result is established regardless of the stop operation mode of each of the stop operation means". By doing so, it becomes possible to more clearly exhibit the above effects.

Feature FA3. The specific condition is satisfied based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the specific result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. The gaming machine according to feature FA1 or feature FA2, wherein the specific result winning can be established by being operated in the stop operation mode of 2.

According to the above configuration, in the specific result winning game that triggers the execution of the increase processing, the specific result winning is established regardless of the stop operation mode of the stop operation means. In other words, a game that is not subject to execution of state notification by the state notification means triggers the increase processing, and the execution manner of the increase notification when the increase processing is performed is determined by the stop operation manner of the game. Assuming that in the specific game state, the player is playing while hoping that the increase processing will be performed, the interest in the game in which such mode notification is not performed is not the same as other games (where mode notification is performed). It is considered to be high compared to the game that is played). Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the execution mode of the increase notification is determined in the game in which the player is originally interested, as in the above configuration, it is possible to fully enjoy the game property of selecting the increase notification by oneself.

Feature FA4. The gaming machine according to feature FA3, wherein a game for which a lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result is the specified game.

According to the above configuration, the specific result winning game is the specific game. That is, the game in which the increase processing is performed and the game in which the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase processing is performed are the same game. It is considered that the joy of the player when the increase notification is performed varies depending not only on the execution mode but also on the progress of the game (the specific game state). It is possible to make the selection of the execution mode of , in a situation closer to the progress that changes every moment. In other words, for example, it is conceivable to select a special notification execution mode at the start of a game or at the start of a specific game state. There is also a possibility that an increase notification is performed in the execution mode. In that respect, according to the above configuration, it is possible to realize an increase notification that is more in line with the player's preference.

Feature FA5. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the specific result winning is established by stopping the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result at the valid position,
In the specific circular body among the circular bodies, the specific patterns forming the specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position when the corresponding stop operation means is operated to stop in the first stop mode. On the other hand, it is characterized in that it is attached to the specific winding body so that it cannot be stopped at the effective position when the stop operation is performed in a second stop mode different from the first stop mode. A gaming machine described in FA4.

According to the above configuration, since the specific result is a result of a so-called missing result, in the game property of selecting the execution mode of the increase notification in the stop operation mode in the specific result winning game, the stop operation for making such a selection is performed. , the operation is performed without failing to obtain the specified result, and the difficulty of the operation is increased, thereby improving the game.

Feature FA6. The second aspect is timing after the first aspect,
The first specific stop operation mode is a stop operation mode in which the first stop operation means of the respective stop operation means is stopped at a specific number,
The second specific stop operation mode is a stop operation mode in which a second stop operation means different from the first stop operation means of the respective stop operation means is stopped at the specific number,
The gaming machine according to feature FA5, wherein the stop operation means corresponding to the specific looping body is the first stop operation means.

According to the above configuration, the execution mode of the increase notification is selected depending on which stop operation means is used for the specific number of stop operations, and in the specific result winning game, the stop operation is performed for the looping body that is left uncollected. When the means is stopped at a specific number, the first mode is selected. By doing this, even if there is a dropout, the increase notification will be performed at a relatively early timing, and multiple questions such as whether it was a dropout or whether the specific result was not won in the first place. It can be configured to solve doubts and anxieties due to possibility earlier.

Feature FA7. The gaming machine according to feature FA3, wherein a game preceding a game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific result is the specific game.

According to the above configuration, the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase process is performed is selected by the stop operation mode of the game before the specific result winning game that triggers the increase process. By doing so, it is possible to perform the selection operation and the operation to establish the specific result winning in separate games, so that the player can concentrate on each operation.

Feature FA8. Based on the transition to the specific game state, a means (attack mode start effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a transition notification (attack mode start effect) of the transition to the specific game state by a predetermined notification means function),
The gaming machine according to any one of features FA1 to FA7, wherein a game subsequent to the game in which the transition notification is performed is the specific game.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that one of the games in the specific game state is the specific game, and the difference from the game characteristics selected before or at the start of the specific game state becomes clearer. In other words, in the game after the specific game state is started, it is possible to more clearly achieve the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game in which mode notification is not performed.

Feature FA9. The gaming machine according to any one of features FA1 to FA8, wherein the second mode is included in a game different from the game in which the first mode is included.

According to the above configuration, the game for which the increase notification is performed may be a different game depending on the stop operation mode in the specific game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to influence the effects of the player's selection over a plurality of games, thereby increasing the importance and significance of the selection.

Feature FA10. When the stop operation means is operated in the second specific stop operation mode in the specific game, and when a game prior to the target game including the second mode is further defined as the specific game, the increase The gaming machine according to feature FA9, wherein the notification execution means executes the increase notification in a mode corresponding to the stop operation mode of the stop operation means in the specific game on the rear side.

In the configuration in which the increase notification is performed in the later game across the games like the feature FA9, it is conceivable that the specific game may be performed while the later game is selected. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the rear side selection is prioritized, it is possible to execute the increase notification in a manner that takes into consideration the situation at the time of selection.

Feature FA11. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state is a predetermined specific result (first specific role processing by main controller 101 function) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state (the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 is executed function) and
Grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state;
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the specific game state, normal transition means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (normal end condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101 A function that executes the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment of
an increasing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (additional notification) that the increase process has been performed can be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) A function of executing a setting process of an additional effect by the display control device 81);
with
The increase notification execution means is
A first notification execution means (a function of executing a process for performing an additional effect based on the immediate addition selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification in the first mode;
a second notification executing means (a function of executing a process for performing an additional effect based on the additional selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification in a second mode different from the first mode; ,
with
The first notification execution means performs the increase processing based on the stop operation means being operated in a first specific stop operation mode in a specific game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed. Execute the increase notification in the first mode when the
The second notification execution means, in the specific game, based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in a second specific stop operation mode different from the first specific stop operation mode, the increase processing is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the increase notification when performed is executed in the second mode.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, and aspects related to the stop operation mode. A specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of notification. Moreover, when a specific condition is established in a specific game state, the remaining number of times in the specific game state may be increased, and by continuing the specific game state for a long time, it may be possible to acquire a large amount of game media. , the playability of each game has been remarkably improved.

On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, the game tends to be a one-sided game from the gaming machine, such as the player performing a stop operation based on the mode notification on the gaming machine side and winning the corresponding result. In view of the original game nature of the slot machine, such as aiming at the pattern of the revolving body and stopping it to obtain a privilege, the above game machine-led game is not preferable.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the mode of execution of the increase notification when the increase processing is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition is given to the player according to the mode of the stop operation by the stop operation means in the specific game in which the mode notification is not performed. It was configured to let you choose. By doing so, it is possible to make the player intervene in the game in the specific game state, and it is possible to encourage the participation of the player in the game that can be led by the gaming machine.

In addition, regarding the "specific game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed", "a special result (specific combination, normal replay) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means", and "the above When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is operated in the second stop operation mode. The special result winning can be established by being operated in the stop operation mode of (1), and the game "the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result" may be the "specific game".

Also, the “first mode” and the “second mode” may be expressed as “first timing” and “second timing”. In this way, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, it becomes possible to exhibit the above excellent effects with a simpler configuration.

Feature FA12. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state is a predetermined specific result (first specific role processing by main controller 101 function) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state (the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 is executed function) and
Grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state;
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the specific game state, normal transition means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (normal end condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101 A function that executes the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment of
an increasing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (additional notification) that the increase process has been performed can be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) A function of executing the setting process of the additional effect by the display control device 81);
with
The increase notification execution means is
A first notification execution means (a function of executing a process for performing an additional effect based on the immediate addition selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification in the first mode;
a second notification executing means (a function of executing a process for performing an additional effect based on the additional selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification in a second mode different from the first mode; ,
with
The first notification execution means is adapted to operate the stop operation means in a first specific stop operation mode in a specific situation where each of the orbiting bodies is circling in a game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed. Based on that, executing the increase notification in the first mode when the increase process is performed,
The second notification execution means, in the specific situation, based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in a second specific stop operation mode different from the first specific stop operation mode, the increase processing is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the increase notification when performed is executed in the second mode.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, and aspects related to the stop operation mode. A specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of notification. Moreover, when a specific condition is established in a specific game state, the remaining number of times in the specific game state may be increased, and by continuing the specific game state for a long time, it may be possible to acquire a large amount of game media. , the playability of each game has been remarkably improved.

On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, the game tends to be a one-sided game from the gaming machine, such as the player performing a stop operation based on the mode notification on the gaming machine side and winning the corresponding result. In view of the original game nature of the slot machine, such as aiming at the pattern of the revolving body and stopping it to obtain a privilege, the above game machine-led game is not preferable.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the mode of execution of the increase notification when the increase processing is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition is given to the player according to the mode of the stop operation by the stop operation means in the specific game in which the mode notification is not performed. It was configured to let you choose. By doing so, it is possible to make the player intervene in the game in the specific game state, and it is possible to encourage the participation of the player in the game that can be led by the gaming machine.

In addition, regarding "a game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed", "a special result (specific combination, normal replay) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means", and "the lottery When the lottery result by the means is the special result, the special result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is operated in the second stop operation mode. The special result winning can be established by being operated in the stop operation mode, and the game "the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result" is changed to "the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed." It can also be called a game.

Also, the “first mode” and the “second mode” may be expressed as “first timing” and “second timing”. In this way, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, it becomes possible to exhibit the above excellent effects with a simpler configuration.

<Characteristic FB group>
Features FB1. As the game state, a low-advantage state (normal section) and a high-advantage state (advantage section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set.
grasping means for grasping the number of remaining times of the high advantage state (number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG);
Transition means for transitioning the high-advantage state to the low-advantage state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the high-advantage state. A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment),
an increasing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (additional notification) that the increase process has been performed can be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) A function of executing the setting process of the additional effect by the display control device 81);
with
The increase notification execution means is
A first notification execution means (immediately displayed in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification triggered by a predetermined specific condition at a first timing based on the player performing the first selection operation. A function that executes processing for performing an additional effect based on the selection flag);
Second notification execution means capable of executing the increase notification triggered by the predetermined specific condition at a second timing after the first timing based on the second selection operation by the player. (a function of executing a process for performing an additional effect based on the additional selection flag in the display control device 81);
After the second selection operation is performed, the predetermined specific condition is set based on the fact that the player performs the third selection operation in a specific situation until the second timing. A third notification execution means (function for executing correction processing in the display control device 81) for executing the increase notification triggered by the third timing different from the second timing;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a configuration having a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low, when a specific condition is established, the remaining number of high-advantage states is increased. It has a function, and when the remaining number of times is increased, an increase notification is given as an additional notification.

Moreover, in this gaming machine, the player can select either the first timing or the second timing after that as the execution timing of the increase notification. It has a function that can be customized by the player, and it is possible to make it a gaming machine that meets the needs of the player. Further, in a situation where the increase notification at the second timing is selected, the increase notification is generated at a third timing different from the second timing according to the player's selection in a specific situation before reaching the second timing. It also has a function that can be changed to let By doing so, if the second timing is once selected but the player changes his or her mind due to the subsequent game situation, etc., the execution timing of the increase notification can be changed after the fact, and various needs can be met. A gaming machine is realized.

Feature FB2. Storage means (by display control device 81) capable of storing the result of the increase process triggered by the predetermined specific condition to be executed at the second timing by the second notification execution means in a predetermined storage area individual area),
The third notification execution means is
means for acquiring the result of the increase process triggered by the predetermined specific condition stored in the storage means (function for executing the process of step S12806 by the display control device 81);
means for executing the increase notification corresponding to the acquired result of the increase process at the third timing (function for executing the process of step S12807 by the display control device 81);
means for erasing the acquired result of the increase process from the storage means (function for executing the process of step S12809 by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to feature FB1, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the content of the increase notification that was supposed to be executed at the second timing so as to be executed at the third timing while avoiding duplication or omission. By doing so, it is possible to realize the playability of the characteristic FB1 while avoiding the inconvenience that the player suffers a disadvantage or the occurrence of a mismatch in the performance.

Feature FB3. The storage means is capable of individually storing results of a plurality of the increase processes,
The third notification executing means can separately execute the increase notification for the result of the increase processing individually stored at the third timing based on the third selection operation by the player. The gaming machine according to feature FB1 or feature FB2.

According to the above configuration, when there are a plurality of pieces of information corresponding to the increase notification that should have been executed at the second timing, it is possible to individually change each to be executed at the third timing. By doing so, it is possible to realize an effect that better meets the needs of the player.

Feature FB4. The storage means stores information corresponding to the result of the increase process selected to be executed at the second timing, which is obtained by performing the increase process based on the first specific trigger, and the first specific trigger. separately storing information corresponding to the result of the increase process selected to be executed at the second timing, wherein the increase process is performed based on a second specific trigger different from the trigger; is possible and
The increase processing is performed based on the first specific trigger based on the third selection operation by the player, and corresponds to the result of the increase processing selected to be executed at the second timing. is executable at the third timing, the increase processing is performed based on the second specific trigger, and the increase processing selected to be performed at the second timing The gaming machine according to feature FB3, wherein the information corresponding to the result of is executable at the second timing.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature FB3.

Regarding the "second specified trigger", "different from the first specified trigger" does not only mean that the type of trigger when the "specific condition" is met is different, It also includes the fact that the timing (game) at which the "specific condition" is established is different.

Feature FB5. The storage means stores information corresponding to the result of the increase process selected to be executed at the second timing, which is obtained by performing the increase process based on the first specific trigger, and the first specific trigger. and information corresponding to the result of the increase process selected to be executed at the second timing, wherein the increase process was performed based on a second specific trigger that occurred prior to the trigger. separately memorizable,
The increase processing is performed based on the first specific trigger based on the third selection operation by the player, and corresponds to the result of the increase processing selected to be executed at the second timing. is executable at the third timing, the increase processing is performed based on the second specific trigger, and the increase processing selected to be performed at the second timing The gaming machine according to feature FB3 or feature FB4, wherein the information corresponding to the result of is executable at the second timing.

According to the above configuration, while the increase notification for the second specific trigger that occurred earlier remains at the second timing, the increase notification for the first specific trigger that occurred later is set to the third timing prior to the second timing. It is possible to execute That is, by using a configuration that can individually store the results of the increase processing, it is possible to perform the increase notification in an order different from the order in which the increase processing was performed.

Feature FB6. Display control means (display control device 81) having a predetermined display screen (auxiliary display unit 65);
Means (step S12804 by the display control device 81) capable of displaying on the predetermined display screen corresponding information corresponding to the information on the result of the increase process individually stored in the storage means in the specific situation. function) and
means for enabling selection of one of the displayed correspondence information based on a third selection operation by the player (function for executing the processing of steps S12805 and S12806 by the display control device 81);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features FB2 to FB5, wherein the third notification execution means executes the increase notification for the selected correspondence information at the third timing.

According to the above configuration, the player can execute the increase notification at the third timing by selecting one correspondence information among the correspondence information displayed on the predetermined display screen. In this way, by making selections while displaying them on the display screen, it is intuitively understandable, and even a player who is not accustomed to the game can easily perform the selection operation. Therefore, it is possible to make the game machine rich in user friendliness.

Feature FB7. The gaming machine according to any one of features FB1 to FB6, wherein the game in which the first timing exists and the game in which the second timing exists are different games.

As in the above configuration, if the configuration of the feature FB1 is applied to a gaming machine that assumes that the increase notification is performed in different games by the first selection operation and the second selection operation, the first timing and the The second timing becomes a timing further apart in terms of time, the second timing is selected, and not only is it likely to occur a specific situation before that, but in such a specific situation, the third selection operation is made to be performed. It becomes possible to secure grace time.

Feature FB8. the first timing exists in a first game in which the specific condition is satisfied;
the second timing exists in a second game after the first game;
The third timing exists in a third game prior to the second game,
The gaming machine according to feature FB7, wherein the third notification execution means executes the increase notification in the third game when the third selection operation is performed.

According to the above configuration, when the first selection operation is performed, the increase notification is generated in the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, and when the second selection operation is performed, in the game after the game in which the specific condition is satisfied An increase notification occurs. Assuming such a configuration, when the third selection operation is performed, an increase notification is generated in the game in which the selection operation was performed. By doing so, when the third selection operation is performed, the increase notification is immediately executed, so that not only is it possible to make it easy for the player to understand, but also the third selection operation is performed. Since there is no need to newly store the information when the information is changed, the configuration can be simplified.

<Characteristic GA group>
Feature GA1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main controller 101) capable of executing payout of game media in a number corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal game state and a first specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode etc.) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (for example, attack mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states (for example, challenge mode) in the first specific game state is set. and
In the normal game state, a first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery to determine whether to transition to the first specific game state (executing a lottery for transition to the challenge mode in the first specific role process by the main controller 101) function) and
The first specific transition means (main controller 101 A function that executes processing to shift to challenge mode in the winning result response processing by),
Second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery for determining whether or not to transition to the second specific game state (function for executing a lottery for transition to the attack mode in the first specific winning process by the main controller 101);
Second specific transition means (main controller 101 A function to execute processing for shifting to attack mode in the winning result response processing by),
In the second specific game state, a predetermined termination condition of the second specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and the number of games is managed). In the configuration of (1), the first grasping means for grasping the remaining number until the number of remaining payouts or the number of increased coins becomes 0, or the number of paidouts or the number of increased coins reaches the set number of coins (number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG). and,
a second grasping means (advantage section game number AG, advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM) for grasping at least one of the number of executions of the first specific game state and the increase/decrease number of game media increased or decreased in the first specific game state;
Based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means, the first end means for shifting the second specific game state to the normal game state (the normal end condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101 A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment),
grasped by the first grasping means based on at least one of the fact that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times and the number of increases/decreases has reached the upper limit number of increases; Regardless of the remaining number to be played, the second end means for shifting the first specific game state including the second specific game state to the normal game state (advantageous section in the section display second process by the main controller 101 A function that executes the process to forcibly terminate) and
an increasing means (a function of executing the game number addition processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing the processing for increasing the second specific gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
The sum of the number of executions ascertained by the second ascertaining means and the remaining number ascertained by the first ascertaining means has reached the upper limit number of times, or the increase/decrease number ascertained by the second ascertaining means and the planned increase/decrease number based on the remaining number ascertained by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number, or the specific condition is satisfied A specific event that is different from the event based on the increase process and can be beneficial to the player, based on the fact that the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on Execution means (a function of executing each process for special notification in a situation where the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set by the main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine, in which game media can be paid out by a payout means if the number corresponds to the result of the lottery, a first specific game state is provided which tends to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , Since a more advantageous second specific game state is provided as a state included in the first specific game state, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed. A game property premised on the state transition that is advantageous to the stage is realized, and it is possible to greatly use it for improving amusement.

These 1st specific game state and 2nd specific game state, in addition to the case where the 2nd specific game state ends based on the remaining number until the end condition of the 2nd specific game state, the number of executions of the 1st specific game state When the upper limit number of times is reached or the number of game media increases or decreases reaches the upper limit increase number, the first specific game state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of the second specific game state. By continuing the 1st specific game state and the 2nd specific game state endlessly, inconveniences such as an increase in game media exceeding the expectation of the designer and a player's difficulty in completing the game are avoided.

However, if the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number of the first specific game state are defined as described above, the total of the current number of times of execution and the remaining number is the upper limit when the so-called addition such as the increase process of the second specific game state occurs. If the number of times exceeds the number of times, or if the total of the current number of increases and decreases and the planned increase/decrease based on the remaining number exceeds the upper limit number of increases, no further increase can be expected. The sense of anticipation will be extremely lowered, and the increase processing will be regarded as a loss, which may result in a great loss of interest in the game.

Therefore, in the above configuration, if the specific situation exceeds the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number or the specific situation is caused by performing the increase process, it is an event different from the increase process (addition) and the game It allows specific events to occur that may be of benefit to those involved. By doing so, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the addition is not performed or it is meaningless even if the addition is performed, and the fun of each game is increased even in the above-mentioned specific situation. It is possible to

Moreover, in the above configuration, the second specific game state is a state included in the first specific game state, and when the first specific game state ends, the second specific game state also ends at the same time. When the second specific game state ends, the first specific game state also ends. For example, in a configuration in which the first specific game state is not ended even if the second specific game state is ended, if the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number of the first specific game state is defined, the first specific game state When the transition to the second specific game state after the second specific game state ends while continuing, the number of times and the number of increases up to the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number of the first specific game state are small. easily occur. On the other hand, as in the above configuration, if the first specific game state is also ended when the second specific game state ends, when shifting to the second specific game state in the first specific game state, In the first specific game state until then, the amount consumed in the second specific game state does not exist, and the phenomenon that the number of times up to the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number and the number of increases are less likely to occur Become. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game between the first specific game state in which the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number are defined and the second specific game state included therein.

It should be noted that ``the number of game media increased or decreased in the specific game state'' is more specifically defined as ``the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the specific game state and the number of game media paid out in the specific game state. is the difference between the number of game media used in .

In addition, regarding the "first specific game state" and "second specific game state", "as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, winning is established. A lottery by the lottery means having a first result and a second result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode. Based on the result, mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the second display segment N1 on the instruction monitor 68). 7 display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main control device 101)", and the "first specific game state" is changed to the "said mode A first specific game state in which an event related to notification is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a "second specific game state" is defined as "an event related to the mode notification is more likely than other states in the first specific game state." It may be expressed as a second specific game state that is likely to be advantageous to the player. Note that this point is also applicable to other configurations (including other feature groups).

Feature GA2. When the number of times of execution reaches the upper limit number of times, the second end means shifts the first specific game state to the normal game state even if the number of increases/decreases has not reached the upper limit number of increases, and the increase/decrease. The gaming machine according to feature GA1, wherein when the number reaches the upper limit increase number, the first specific game state is shifted to the normal game state even if the number of times of execution does not reach the upper limit number of times. .

According to the above configuration, when the number of times of execution reaches the upper limit number of times or the number of increases/decreases reaches the upper limit number of increases, the first specific game state is forcibly terminated by the second end means and the normal game state is entered. In this way, if one of the forced termination conditions (upper limit) is met, the process is terminated regardless of the status of the other, thereby increasing the significance of providing multiple types of forced termination conditions. In other words, if the second terminating means waits for both of the termination conditions to be met, then the second terminating means will make the conditions for forcible termination more severe, thereby avoiding erroneous forcible termination. However, if, as in the above configuration, the game is forcibly terminated when either one of the forced termination conditions is met, the player's profit depends on which of the forced termination conditions is forcibly terminated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by using such a plurality of forced termination conditions.

Feature GA3. The gaming machine according to feature GA1 or feature GA2, wherein the increase/decrease number can reach the upper limit increase number before the number of executions reaches the upper limit number.

Based on the premise of a game in which game media are paid out according to the game result and the aim is to increase the number of game media, it is Rather, it can be said that the goal of the game has been achieved. On the other hand, if the number of times of execution reaches the upper limit number of times without reaching the upper limit increase number and the first specific game state is terminated, the target is terminated without being achieved. The above configuration is a configuration for securing the superiority of the upper limit increase number based on the difference between the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number. By making it possible to reach the upper limit increase number, in other words, by not making it so that the upper limit increase number cannot be reached even if the number of times of execution reaches the upper limit number of times, the goal of the game is clarified, and the game can be played. It is possible to set the upper limit so as not to reduce the player's desire to play.

Feature GA4. Any one of the characteristics GA1 to GA3, wherein the result of multiplying the average value of the expected increase/decrease number that can be expected per game during the second specific game state by the upper limit number of times is greater than the upper limit increase number. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

The above configuration defines that the result of multiplying the so-called net increase number by the upper limit count as the average value of the expected increase/decrease number is larger than the upper limit increase number. Like this, reaching the upper limit number of increases before reaching the upper limit number is not an accidental event but an event that can occur normally (on average). In other words, it becomes easier to aim to exceed the upper limit increase number, and the goal of the game becomes clear, such as reaching the upper limit increase number before the game is forcibly terminated due to the upper limit number of times.

On top of that, in the above configuration, when all the first specific game state is played in the second specific game state, the upper limit increase number is reached before reaching the upper limit number of times, so in the first specific game state When a state other than the second specific game state is included, the difference between the game reaching the upper limit number of times and the game reaching the upper limit increase number can be reduced or reversed by the number of executions. That is, if the number of executions of the state that is not the second specific game state is large, the upper limit number of times can be reached before the upper limit increase number is reached. By doing so, the aim of the game, such as how to shift from the first specific game state to the second specific game state, becomes clearer, and it becomes possible to draw out the interest of the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Feature GA5. The specific event executing means is
when the specific condition is satisfied in a first specific situation in which the sum of the number of executions ascertained by the second ascertaining means and the remaining number ascertained by the first ascertaining means has reached the upper limit number of times; or based on the occurrence of the first specific situation by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition, an event that is different from the event based on the increase process and that can be beneficial to the player. A first execution means capable of causing one specific event (a function of executing processing for performing various special notifications based on the fact that the first excess flag is set by the main controller 101);
The sum of the increase/decrease number grasped by the second grasping means and the planned increase/decrease number corresponding to the remaining number grasped based on the remaining number by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number What is the event based on the increase process based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied in the second specific situation, or based on the fact that the second specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition? Second execution means capable of causing a second specific event which is different and can be beneficial to the player function to execute processing for
The gaming machine according to any one of features GA1 to GA4, characterized by comprising:

In a configuration in which a plurality of end conditions such as the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number are set, a first specific situation exceeding the upper limit number of times and a second specific situation exceeding the upper limit increase number are assumed. There may be a difference in profits that the player cannot obtain between the specific situation and the second specific situation. Therefore, by managing these separately as in the above configuration and by differentiating the specific event that occurs depending on which specific situation it is, it is possible to set the specific event according to the loss of profit due to these specific situations. , etc., it is possible to compensate the player more appropriately according to a specific event.

Feature GA6. A configuration in which the first specific event and the second specific event can differ in the degree of advantage or the degree of benefit to the player, or whether the first execution means causes the first specific event The probability of winning the first lottery in the first lottery and the probability of winning the second lottery in the second lottery of whether or not to cause the second specific event by the second execution means can be different. The gaming machine according to feature GA5, characterized by being at least one of:

Comparing the disappearance of the excess number of times of the second specific game state and the disappearance of the excess increase/decrease number (increase number), the degree of feeling of loss that both can give to the player can be different. The above configuration follows the degree of the player's sense of loss based on each specific event and the likelihood of occurrence of the specific event. becomes possible.

Feature GA7. A configuration in which the second specific event is an event that can be more beneficial to the player than the first specific event, or a first lottery to determine whether the first specific event is caused by the first execution means A configuration in which the probability of winning the second lottery is higher than the probability of winning the first lottery in the second lottery for determining whether or not the second specific event is caused by the second execution means. The gaming machine according to feature GA6, characterized by being at least one.

Comparing the disappearance of the excess number of times in the second specific game state and the disappearance of the excess number of increases and decreases (increase number), it is better that the excess number of increases and decreases (increase number) disappears. The latter (disappearance of the increased number) is directly linked to the player's profit, and the player can feel a greater sense of loss. The above configuration is a configuration that follows whether it is directly linked to such profit and the degree of loss due to the loss of profit by each specific event and the likelihood of occurrence of the specific event. It is possible to more suitably compensate for the person.

Feature GA8. Calculation means for calculating the scheduled increase/decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (function for executing prediction processing based on the expected increase/decrease number KM in the remaining payout quantity management processing by the main controller 101) with
The calculating means is capable of calculating the expected increase/decrease number based on the remaining number and an average value of the expected increase/decrease number that can be expected per game in the second specific game state. The gaming machine according to GA6 or feature GA7.

According to the above configuration, the planned increase/decrease number is calculated based on the expected increase/decrease number per game and the remaining number of times. With such a configuration, it is only necessary to store the expected increase/decrease number in the second specific game state in advance, and the expected increase/decrease amount can be calculated with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature GA9. Calculation means for calculating the scheduled increase/decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (prediction processing based on the maximum increase/decrease number MM in the first adjustment processing and the second adjustment processing by the main controller 101) functions to execute),
The calculating means is capable of calculating the expected increase/decrease number based on the remaining number and the maximum expected increase/decrease number that can be expected per game in the second specific game state. The gaming machine according to any one of GA5 to GA8.

According to the above configuration, the expected increase/decrease number is calculated based on the maximum expected increase/decrease number per game and the remaining number of times. Therefore, it is only necessary to store the maximum expected increase/decrease in the second specific game state in advance, and the maximum expected increase/decrease can be calculated with a relatively simple configuration.

In particular, in the above configuration, since the maximum expected increase/decrease number is used, the calculated planned increase/decrease number is the maximum value, and an event in which the actual increase/decrease number exceeds the maximum value does not occur. By doing so, for example, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as ending the first specific game state earlier than planned due to surpassing.

In addition, when applying the feature GA9 to the feature GA8, the "calculation means" of the feature GA8 may be expressed as the "first calculation means", and the "calculation means" of the feature GA9 may be expressed as the "second calculation means". , the same “calculating means” may be configured to be capable of calculating based on the “average value” and the “maximum value” respectively.

Feature GA10. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a transition result (first BB or second BB) that permits a transition to a transition game state in which the probability that the game media will be paid out by the payout means may be different from the previous state etc.) are provided,
The lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, and transition means ( a function of executing bonus state processing of the main controller 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, and a holding means (first BB winning flag or second BB by the main controller 101) capable of holding the transition result until the pattern combination for transition stops at the effective position A function that does not clear the winning flag until the corresponding BB win),
By transitioning to the transition gaming state, the game can be executed at least a predetermined number of times,
calculating means for calculating the scheduled increase/decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (function for executing the remaining number management process by the main control device 101);
The calculating means calculates the average value of the number of increase/decrease in game media during the transition game state, the number obtained by subtracting the predetermined number of times from the remaining number, and the expected increase/decrease that can be expected per game during the second specific game state. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to any one of features GA5 to GA9, wherein the expected increase/decrease can be calculated based on the maximum value.

When the transition to the transition game state occurs, the winning probability of the outcome for which game media are to be paid out differs, so the number of game media increases or decreases may also differ. If you want to calculate the number, by adding the rate of transition to the transition game state and the number of increases and decreases during the transition game state to the number of increases and decreases in each game during the second specific game state, when the predetermined game is executed can be calculated. However, assuming that the first specific game state is forcibly terminated when the number of games in the first specific game state reaches the upper limit number of games, by shifting to the transition game state, the number of games corresponding to that The number can not be consumed in the first specific game state, especially in the second specific game state, and simply adding the increase/decrease number in the transition game state to the increase/decrease number in the second specific game state will increase the predicted increase/decrease number. This can lead to inaccurate results. Therefore, in the above configuration, the number of games played in the transition gaming state is excluded from the number of games played in the second specific gaming state. It is possible to calculate the increase/decrease number that is easy to use in relation to the end condition.

Feature GA11. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics GA1 to GA10, wherein the specific event executing means performs suggestion notification suggesting the information of the setting value set by the setting means as the specific event.

According to the above configuration, since the setting value suggestive information is presented as the specific event, the player can use it as a basis for deciding whether to continue the game after the first specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number and ends. be able to. That is, if the suggestion information indicating the low setting, it can be determined that the game should be ended after the first specific game state is completed, and if the suggestion information indicating the high setting is completed, the game can be continued even after the first specific game state is completed. Therefore, it can be said that the suggestive notification of the setting value is useful for the player who desires an increase in the game media and does not want the game media to decrease.

Feature GA12. The gaming machine according to feature GA11, wherein the predetermined specific condition has a common establishment probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the increase process has a common occurrence probability regardless of the set value. In other words, in a situation where the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number is reached, the specific condition that triggers the increase process occurs with a common occurrence probability regardless of the set value, and when it occurs, the set value suggestion notification is performed. Become. By doing so, it is possible to make the fact that the setting value suggestion notification is performed strongly related to the element of luck. As a result, for example, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconveniences such as, for example, the higher the setting, the more likely it is that the chance of suggestive notification of the set value will occur, so that the suggestive notification does not substantially occur at low setting.

Moreover, since the establishment probability of the specific condition is common regardless of the set value as described above, the possibility that the first specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number is the same regardless of the set value. can be a thing. In other words, the probability itself of occurrence of a specific situation in which the setting value suggestive notification can be performed is also common regardless of the setting value, and the setting value is not involved in the occurrence rate of the setting value suggestive notification. becomes possible.

Feature GA13. The specific condition when the increase processing is performed can be satisfied based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result,
A probability of establishment of the specific condition when the increase processing is performed differs depending on the type of the special result,
Features GA1 to GA12 characterized in that the special result of a type with a higher probability of establishment of the specific condition when the increase processing is performed tends to have a higher probability of establishment of the specific condition when the specific event occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, the probability of a special result and the increase processing being performed and the probability of a special result and a specific event occurring are linked. By doing so, it is possible to easily understand that a specific event occurs instead of performing the increase processing based on the special result. Therefore, for example, in a specific situation, in the event that a special result is won with a high probability of performing an increase process, it is possible to heighten expectations for the occurrence of a specific event in advance, thereby increasing the player's mind. By making preparations, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to a specific event.

Feature GA14. As the second specific game state, a plurality of types of predetermined states including a first predetermined state (attack mode) and a second predetermined state (specialized zone) different from the first predetermined state are set,
The specific condition when the increase processing is performed is such that even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of special result, the establishment probability differs between the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state. can be,
In the second specific game state, the higher the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the increase process is performed, the higher the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the specific event occurs. The gaming machine according to feature GA13.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the probability of performing the increase process changes depending on the type (predetermined state) of the second specific game state even for the same type of special result, the probability of the occurrence of the specific event is also the second specific game state It changes depending on the type (predetermined state) of , and is linked with the case of increase processing. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making it easier for the user to understand that a specific event will occur instead of performing the increase processing based on the special result.

Feature GA15. A special state (VB mode, specialized zone) in which the minimum number of continuous games is set is set as the second specific game state,
During the second specific game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined special condition, a special transition means (for example, VB notification by the main controller 101 to shift the second specific game state to the special state function to set the flag),
The specific event executing means is capable of causing the specific event when the special condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is brought about by shifting to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. The gaming machine according to any one of the features GA1 to GA14, characterized in that it is possible.

If the transition to the special state occurs during the second specific game state, the special state continues for the minimum number of continuous games. It can be regarded as equivalent to performing the process of increasing the minimum number of continuous games. Then, it may be meaningless for the player to shift to the special state in the specific situation or to enter the specific situation by shifting to the special state. Therefore, in the above configuration, even such a special state can be treated as a target of a specific event, thereby avoiding the sense of meaninglessness.

Feature GA16. The specific condition when the increase processing is performed can be satisfied based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result,
The specific condition when the increase process is performed is that even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of special result, the special state is higher than the other states in the second specific game state. It is a configuration that increases the probability of establishment,
The establishment probability of the specific condition when the specific event occurs is also higher in the special state than in the other states in the second specific game state,
When the specific event executing means causes the specific event when the special condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by shifting to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, The gaming machine according to feature GA15, wherein transition to the special state is permitted based on the establishment of the special condition.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the increase processing is likely to be performed when transitioning to the special state, the specific event is generated when the transition to the special state occurs in a specific situation, or when the transition to the special state results in a specific situation. In this case, the transition to the special state itself is permitted. Therefore, the configuration allows the occurrence of the specific event even during the special state while causing the specific event to occur when the special state transitions. Thus, by making the special state a state in which the increase processing is likely to be performed and a state in which the specific event is likely to occur, the transition to the special state during the second specific game state can be performed in the specific situation or the specific situation. Even in a situation where is approaching, it is possible to make the player look forward to it.

Feature GA17. When the specific condition is established in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition, or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition A storage means (total number of eliminated games TEG by the main controller 101) to store the increase information corresponding to the remaining number to be increased to the increased information storage means (total number of eliminated games TEG). function),
GA1 to GA16, characterized in that the specific event executing means can cause the specific event based on the increase information stored in the increase information storage means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is established in the specific situation, a specific event may occur based on the increase information when the increase processing is performed. By doing so, for example, it becomes possible to generate a specific event as compensation for a privilege that should have been obtained by the increase process, such as the more the increase information, the more likely the specific event will occur.

Feature GA18. The increase information stored in the increase information storage means is stored at least until the first specific game state in which the specific condition is satisfied transitions to the normal game state, and the increase information is stored. In the situation, if the specific condition is newly established in the specific situation, or if the specific situation becomes the specific situation by performing the increase processing based on the establishment of the specific condition, based on the establishment of the specific condition can be updated by adding the increase information corresponding to the remaining number to be increased when the increase processing is performed to the stored increase information;
The specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event based on the increase information stored in the increase information storage means when shifting from the first specific game state to the normal game state. The gaming machine according to feature GA17, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is established multiple times in the specific situation, the increase information when the increase process is performed is integrated, and based on the total increase information, the specific event at the end of the first specific game state occurs. By doing so, in the configuration of the feature GA17, even if there is little increase information based on the establishment of each specific condition, if the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the specific event can be generated, and the specific event can be triggered. You can keep your hopes up.

In particular, if the specific situation occurs relatively early after entering the first specific game state (second specific game state), the number of executions of the first specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times, or the number of increases or decreases reaches the upper limit increase number. A game that can be a so-called digestion game will be played over a long period of time. In that regard, by adopting a configuration in which a specific event can occur by accumulating multiple increment processes, as in the above configuration, the more games that can be the completion game, the more likely the specific event will occur, making it feel like a completion game. can be suppressed.

Feature GA19. The specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event each time based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the second end means terminates the first specific game state in the normal game. The gaming machine according to feature GA18, wherein the specific event can be caused based on the increase information stored in the increase information storage means, based on the transition to the state.

According to the above configuration, the specific event occurs every time the specific condition is established, and at the end of the first specific game state, the specific event can occur depending on the integrated value when the increase processing is performed. By doing so, the effect of keeping the first specific game state from becoming boring due to the occurrence of the specific event each time, and the effect of making the first specific game state enjoyable over a long period of time by establishing the specific condition a plurality of times. can be enjoyed together.

Feature GA20. The specific event executing means is capable of causing the specific event based on the establishment of the specific condition during the normal game state after the first specific game state in which the specific condition is established is finished. The gaming machine according to any one of features GA1 to GA19, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is also possible to take over the establishment of the specific condition during the second specific game state (first specific game state) as a specific event in the normal game state after the end of the first specific game state. becomes. And since the specific event is a different event from the increase process, the second specific game state ( 1st specific game state) It becomes the constitution which takes over the event in normal game state. By doing so, the linkage between the second specific game state (first specific game state) and the normal game state is enhanced, and the interest in the game is enhanced.

Feature GA21. When the specific condition is established in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition, or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition means for storing the increase information in a predetermined increase information storage means (total number of eliminated games TEG) (function for executing a process of adding the number of added games to the total number of eliminated games TEG by the main controller 101);
Initializing means capable of executing initialization processing for initializing various information used during the first specific game state when at least the second end means causes the transition from the first specific game state to the normal game state (Function to execute initialization processing by main controller 101);
When the initialization processing is performed by the initialization means, means for limiting the initialization of the information stored by the increase information storage means a function of executing processing to store in an area provided in the area);
The gaming machine according to feature GA20, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the number of executions during the first specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times or the number of increases or decreases reaches the upper limit increase number, when the first specific game state is terminated, the first specific game state Since the various information used during is initialized, even though the first specific game state was forcibly terminated, based on the information in the first specific game state that was forcibly terminated, again , it is possible to expect the effect of the characteristic GA20 while preventing the occurrence of so-called consecutive games such as shifting to the first specific game state.

Feature GA22. When the specific condition is established in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition, or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition means for storing the increase information in another information storage means (the number of games to be eliminated EJG) different from the predetermined increase information storage means (the process of adding the number of games to the number of games to be eliminated EJG by the main controller 101). function) and
Means for storing the increase information stored in the separate information storage means in the increase information storage means (the number of eliminated games by the main controller 101) at least before the initialization processing is performed by the initialization means. function to execute movement processing),
with
Information stored by the separate information storage means is subject to initialization processing by the initialization means, while information stored by the increased information storage means is not subject to initialization processing by the initialization means. The gaming machine according to the characterizing features GA21.

According to the above configuration, by moving the information to the increased information storage means, which is not subject to the initialization process, before the initialization process, it is convenient to use the increased information to cause the specific event. Its accuracy is improved. More specifically, for example, by setting access restrictions on areas that are not subject to initialization and areas that are not subject to initialization, there are cases where information that is not subject to initialization is also initialized. In such a case, the area to be initialized may be more easily accessible than the area not to be initialized. Then, by temporarily storing the increased information in the separate information storage means to be initialized, the convenience of the increased information is improved, and the increased information is moved to the increased information storage means at the time of initialization processing. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event in which the increase information is initialized.

Feature GA23. The specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation in which the sum of the increase/decrease number grasped by the second grasping means and the planned increase/decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means reaches the upper limit increase number. or after the specific situation has been reached by performing the increase processing based on the establishment of the specific condition, a special event in which the increase/decrease number grasped by the second grasping means does not reach the upper limit increase number. is a possible configuration,
Means (main A gaming machine according to the feature GA22, characterized by comprising a function of executing a redistribution process by the control device 101).

According to the above configuration, if the specific situation can be resolved afterward, the player will be greatly disadvantaged if the increase information is not treated as the remaining number. Therefore, by temporarily storing the additional information in the separate information storage means and returning the temporarily stored information when the specific situation is resolved, the player will not be disadvantaged. Become. On top of that, as in the feature GA22, by temporarily storing it in a separate information storage means different from the increased information storage means, the convenience and accuracy in generating a specific event using the increased information are further improved. can. In other words, if the configuration is such that the increased information is stored as it is in the increased information storage means, and assuming that the access restriction is provided as described above, when the specific situation is resolved, the access restriction is lifted and then the increased information is stored. It is necessary to move the increased information in the storage means as the remaining number. This eliminates the need for processing such as canceling access restrictions, which enhances convenience.

Feature GA24. The increase process can be executed even when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or even when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features GA1 to GA23, characterized by:

In the above configuration, it is clarified that even if a specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation, or if the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition results in a specific situation, the increase process itself is not limited. be. However, even if the increase process is performed in the above situation, it may be meaningless depending on the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number, as described above. Excellent results can be expected.

Feature GA25. Based on the game state shifting from the normal game state to the first specific game state, or when the game state shifts from the normal game state to the first specific game state and a predetermined start condition is satisfied. Based on this, the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start notification, and the specific notification means is turned off based on the transition of the first specific game state to the normal game state. A specific game state notification means (function for executing the section display first process to section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that terminates the notification by doing so,
The specific game state notification means terminates the notification by setting the specific notification means to the extinguished state even when the second end means shifts the first specific game state to the normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features GA1 to GA24, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the normal game state shifts to the first specific game state, or when a predetermined start condition is established after that, the specific notification means starts notification, and the first specific game state ends and the normal game When the transition to the state, the notification also ends. That is, if the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the first specific game state, for example, despite the fact that the first specific game state continues To eliminate the sense of inequality between a player who finishes a game without noticing it and a player who sits down on a game table after finishing the game. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game with the special notification.

In particular, even when the first specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times or reaches the upper limit increase number and shifts to the normal game state, the notification by the specific notification means ends, so that the player can continue to play the first specific game state. is completed, that is, even if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, the increase process is not performed. Then, even if the specific condition is established in the specific situation, it is difficult to entertain the afterglow of the end of the first specific game state from the structure in which the notification of the specific notification means is strictly terminated. Become. In that respect, as in feature GA1, if it is configured to cause a specific event, even if it is a configuration that can clearly grasp that the first specific game state has been forcibly terminated by the specific notification means, even if it is a specific Through events, it is also possible to entertain the afterglow based on the establishment of specific conditions.

Feature GA26. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main controller 101) capable of executing payout of game media in a number corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal game state and a first specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode etc.) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (for example, attack mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states (for example, challenge mode) in the first specific game state is set. and
In the normal game state, a first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery to determine whether to transition to the first specific game state (executing a lottery for transition to the challenge mode in the first specific role process by the main controller 101) function) and
The first specific transition means (main controller 101 A function that executes processing to shift to challenge mode in the winning result response processing by),
Second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery for determining whether or not to transition to the second specific game state (function for executing a lottery for transition to the attack mode in the first specific winning process by the main controller 101);
Second specific transition means (main controller 101 A function to execute processing for shifting to attack mode in the winning result response processing by),
In the second specific game state, a predetermined termination condition of the second specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and the number of games is managed). In the configuration of (1), the first grasping means for grasping the remaining number until the number of remaining payouts or the number of increased coins becomes 0, or the number of paidouts or the number of increased coins reaches the set number of coins (number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG). and,
a second grasping means (advantage section game number AG, advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM) for grasping at least one of the number of executions of the first specific game state and the increase/decrease number of game media increased or decreased in the first specific game state;
Based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means, the first end means for shifting the first specific game state to the normal game state (the normal end condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101 A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment),
grasped by the first grasping means based on at least one of the fact that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times and the number of increases/decreases has reached the upper limit number of increases; Regardless of the remaining number to be played, the second end means for shifting the first specific game state including the second specific game state to the normal game state (advantageous section in the section display second process by the main controller 101 A function that executes the process to forcibly terminate) and
an increasing means (a function of executing the number-of-games adding process by the main control device 101) capable of executing the process of increasing the second specific gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
The sum of the number of executions ascertained by the second ascertaining means and the remaining number ascertained by the first ascertaining means has reached the upper limit number of times, or the increase/decrease number ascertained by the second ascertaining means and the planned increase/decrease number based on the remaining number ascertained by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number, or the specific condition is satisfied Specific event executing means capable of causing a specific event different from the event based on the increase process (first excess by main controller 101 A function to execute each process for special notification in a situation where the flag or the second excess flag is set);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine, in which game media can be paid out by a payout means if the number corresponds to the result of the lottery, a first specific game state is provided which tends to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , Since a more advantageous second specific game state is provided as a state included in the first specific game state, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed. A game property premised on the state transition that is advantageous to the stage is realized, and it is possible to greatly use it for improving amusement.

These 1st specific game state and 2nd specific game state, in addition to the case where the 1st specific game state ends based on the remaining number until the end condition of the 2nd specific game state, the number of executions of the 1st specific game state When the upper limit number of times is reached or the number of increase/decrease of game media reaches the upper limit increase number, the first specific game state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of the second specific game state. The endless continuation of the first specific game state and the second specific game state avoids problems such as an increase in the number of game media exceeding the designer's expectations and a player's difficulty in finishing the game.

However, if the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number of the first specific game state are defined as described above, the total of the current number of times of execution and the remaining number is the upper limit when the so-called addition such as the increase process of the second specific game state occurs. If the number of times exceeds the number of times, or if the total of the current number of increases and decreases and the planned increase/decrease based on the remaining number exceeds the upper limit number of increases, no further increase can be expected. The sense of anticipation will be extremely lowered, and the increase processing will be regarded as a loss, which may result in a great loss of interest in the game.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in the case of a specific situation in which the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number is exceeded, or when the specific situation occurs due to the increase process, a specific event different from the increase process (addition) will occur. I have to. By doing so, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the addition is not performed or it is meaningless even if the addition is performed, and the fun of each game is increased even in the above-mentioned specific situation. It is possible to Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve interest.

It should be noted that ``the number of game media increased or decreased in the specific game state'' is more specifically defined as ``the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the specific game state and the number of game media paid out in the specific game state. is the difference between the number of game media used in .

Feature GA27. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101) capable of executing payout of game media in a number corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal game state (normal section) and a specific game state (attack mode in an advantageous section, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
In the normal game state, transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the specific game state (function for executing a lottery for transition to the attack mode in the first specific winning process by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (attack mode in the winning result correspondence processing by the main controller 101 function to execute the process to shift to
In the specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and in the configuration of number management, a first grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining payout number or the increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or the increase number reaches the set number of coins;
Second grasping means (advantage section game number AG, advantageous section increase/decrease) for grasping at least one of the number of executions of a predetermined game state (advantageous section) including the specific game state and the increase/decrease number of game media in the predetermined game state number of sheets ZM), and
Based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means, a first end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state. A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the fact),
grasped by the first grasping means based on at least one of the fact that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times and the number of increases/decreases has reached the upper limit number of increases; Second termination means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state regardless of the remaining number (a function of forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101); ,
increasing means (function for executing game number addition processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing processing for increasing the specific gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
The sum of the number of executions ascertained by the second ascertaining means and the remaining number ascertained by the first ascertaining means has reached the upper limit number of times, or the increase/decrease number ascertained by the second ascertaining means and the planned increase/decrease number based on the remaining number ascertained by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number, or the specific condition is satisfied A specific event that is different from the event based on the increase process and can be beneficial to the player, based on the fact that the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on Execution means (a function of executing each process for special notification in a situation where the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set by the main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a game medium can be paid out by a payout means if the number corresponds to the result of a lottery, a specific game state is provided that tends to be more advantageous for a player than a normal game state. In addition to the case where the game state ends based on the remaining number of times until the end condition of the specific game state is satisfied, the number of executions of a predetermined state including the specific game state reaches the upper limit, or the number of game media increases or decreases. When the number of increases is reached, it is set to end regardless of the number of remaining specific game states. Inconveniences such as an increase occurring and the player being unable to easily finish the game are avoided.

However, if the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number are defined as described above, when the so-called addition such as the increase processing of the specific game state occurs, the total of the current execution number and the remaining number exceeds the upper limit number of times, or the current number of times If the total of the increase/decrease number and the planned increase/decrease number based on the remaining number exceeds the upper limit increase number, no further increase can be expected, so the expectation for the occurrence of the above increase processing will be extremely low. In addition, the increase processing may be seen as a loss, which may result in a significant loss of interest in the game.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in the case of a specific situation in which the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number is exceeded, or when the specific situation occurs due to the increase process, a specific event different from the increase process (addition) will occur. I have to. By doing so, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the addition is not performed or it is meaningless even if the addition is performed, and the fun of each game is increased even in the above-mentioned specific situation. It is possible to Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve interest.

It should be noted that ``the number of game media increased or decreased in the specific game state'' is more specifically defined as ``the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the specific game state and the number of game media paid out in the specific game state. is the difference between the number of game media used in .

Feature GA28. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main controller 101) capable of executing payout of game media in a number corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal game state (normal section) and a specific game state (such as an attack mode in an advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
In the normal game state, transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the specific game state (function for executing a lottery for transition to the attack mode in the first specific winning process by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (attack mode in the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 function to execute the process to shift to
In the specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and the number management configuration a first grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining payout number or the increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or the increase number reaches the set number of coins;
Second grasping means (advantage section game number AG, advantageous section increase/decrease) for grasping at least one of the number of executions of a predetermined game state (advantageous section) including the specific game state and the increase/decrease number of game media in the predetermined game state number of sheets ZM), and
Based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means, a first end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state. A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the fact),
grasped by the first grasping means based on at least one of the fact that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times and the number of increases/decreases has reached the upper limit number of increases; Second termination means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state regardless of the remaining number (a function of forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101); ,
increasing means (function for executing game number addition processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing processing for increasing the specific gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
The sum of the number of executions ascertained by the second ascertaining means and the remaining number ascertained by the first ascertaining means has reached the upper limit number of times, or the increase/decrease number ascertained by the second ascertaining means and the planned increase/decrease number based on the remaining number ascertained by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number, or the specific condition is satisfied Specific event executing means capable of causing a specific event different from the event based on the increase process (first excess by main controller 101 A function to execute each process for special notification in a situation where the flag or the second excess flag is set);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a game medium can be paid out by a payout means if the number corresponds to the result of a lottery, a specific game state is provided that tends to be more advantageous for a player than a normal game state. In addition to the case where the game state ends based on the remaining number of times until the end condition of the specific game state is satisfied, the number of executions of a predetermined state including the specific game state reaches the upper limit, or the number of game media increases or decreases. When the number of increases is reached, it is set to end regardless of the number of remaining specific game states. Inconveniences such as an increase occurring and the player being unable to easily finish the game are avoided.

However, if the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number are defined as described above, when the so-called addition such as the increase processing of the specific game state occurs, the total of the current execution number and the remaining number exceeds the upper limit number of times, or the current number of times If the total of the increase/decrease number and the planned increase/decrease number based on the remaining number exceeds the upper limit increase number, no further increase can be expected, so the expectation for the occurrence of the above increase processing will be extremely low. In addition, the increase processing may be seen as a loss, which may result in a significant loss of interest in the game.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in the case of a specific situation in which the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number is exceeded, or when the specific situation occurs due to the increase process, a specific event different from the increase process (addition) will occur. I have to. By doing so, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the addition is not performed or it is meaningless even if the addition is performed, and the fun of each game is increased even in the above-mentioned specific situation. It is possible to Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve interest.

It should be noted that ``the number of game media increased or decreased in the specific game state'' is more specifically defined as ``the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the specific game state and the number of game media paid out in the specific game state. is the difference between the number of game media used in .

Further, each configuration shown in the features GA1 to GA25 may be applied to the features GA26 to GA28 individually or in combination.

<Characteristic GB group>
Features GB1. As the game state, a low-advantage state (normal section) and a high-advantage state (advantage section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set.
As a state included in the high-advantage state, a specific high-advantage state (e.g., attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than other states (e.g., challenge mode) in the high-advantage state is set;
A predetermined end condition for the specific high advantage state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and in the configuration of number management, the number of remaining payouts or increase a remaining number grasping means (advantageous interval remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the number becomes 0, or the payout number or the increase number reaches the set number) is established;
Normal termination means for terminating the specific high advantage state and transitioning to the low advantage state based on the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means. A function that executes processing to end the advantageous section without satisfying the conditions),
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state is ended and the low advantageous state is ended based on the establishment of a predetermined first specific condition. (function for forcibly ending the advantageous interval based on the number of games in the advantageous interval AG reaching the upper limit number of games in the second interval display processing by the main controller 101) and,
Regardless of the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means, the specific high advantage state is included based on the establishment of a second specific condition that is a predetermined condition and is different from the first specific condition. Second specific ending means for ending the high advantageous state and transitioning to the low advantageous state (based on the fact that the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM has reached the upper limit increase number in the section display second processing by the main controller 101) A function that executes processing to forcibly terminate the advantageous section) and
In the specific high advantage state, first specifying means (remaining game management by main controller 101) capable of specifying in advance that the first specified condition is satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means function to perform processing) and
Second specifying means (remaining number of sheets management by main controller 101) capable of specifying in advance that the second specified condition is satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means in the specific high advantageous state function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high-advantage state includes a specific high-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is even higher. In the included configuration, the specific high advantageous state is ended based on the number of remaining specific high advantageous states, and the high advantageous state is terminated based on the satisfaction of the first specific condition or the second specific condition in the high advantageous state. Since it may end with the state, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high-advantage state including the specific high-advantage state is extremely increased. For a player who desires a high advantage state, especially a specific high advantage state, to continue for a long time, it is necessary to grasp the remaining number of the specific high advantage state, as well as the first specific condition in the high advantage state including the specific high advantage state. It is thought that the user wants to know how soon the second specific condition will be satisfied. Therefore, in the above configuration, the first specific condition and the second specific condition can be individually specified before the condition is satisfied. It is also possible to use the desired contents for game play. In particular, the high-advantage state can be terminated according to different conditions such as a first specific condition and a second specific condition, and these conditions can be specified separately. The excitement of the high-advantage state is heightened, and it is possible to suitably realize a game property that utilizes the mutual relationship between the excitement and the two specific conditions. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that "it is possible to specify in advance that the first specific condition is satisfied" or "it is possible to specify in advance that the second specific condition is satisfied" means, for example, "it is possible to determine in advance that the first specific condition is satisfied." , can be specified in the game before the first specific condition is established" or "the fulfillment of the second specific condition can be specified in the game before the second specific condition is established" It is also possible to express

Further, the ``first specific end means'' and the ``second specific end means'' may be, for example, ``regardless of the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number grasping means, when a predetermined first specific condition is met. Based on this, a first specific end means for ending the high advantageous state and transitioning to the low advantageous state by ending the specific high advantageous state, Regardless, when a second specific condition different from the first specific condition, which is a predetermined condition, is satisfied, the specific high advantageous state is terminated, and the high advantageous state is terminated. It may be expressed as "second specific end means for shifting to a low advantage state".

Furthermore, the ``first specific condition'' and ``second specific condition'' are replaced by ``first specific condition set as a termination condition for the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state'' and ``including the specific highly advantageous state. It may be expressed as "a second specific condition which is a condition set as a condition for ending the high-advantage state and which is different from the first specific condition".

Feature GB2. When the first specifying means specifies that the first specified condition is satisfied, it is possible to cause a first specified event that can be beneficial to the player before the first specified condition is satisfied. A first specific event execution means (a function of executing processing for performing various special notifications in a situation where the first excess flag is set by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81);
When the second specifying means specifies that the second specified condition is satisfied, it is possible to cause a second specified event that can be beneficial to the player before the second specified condition is satisfied. A second specific event executing means (a function of executing processing for performing various special notifications in a situation where the second excess flag is set by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to feature GB1, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, not only is it specified in advance that the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied, but based on the result of the specification, the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied rather than A first specific event and a second specific event may occur before which may be beneficial to the player. By doing so, in the configuration for grasping whether the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, it is significant to grasp the grasp before the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied. In a high-advantage state (especially a specific high-advantage state), it is determined (specified) in advance that the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied, and the first specific event and the second specific event are generated. Such a game property is added, and the amusement of the game is improved.

It should be noted that ``first specific event execution means capable of causing a first specific event that can be beneficial to the player before the first specific condition is satisfied'', and ``first specific event that can be beneficial to the player. A second specific event executing means capable of causing two specific events before the second specific condition is satisfied is provided as "a second specific event execution means that can cause a player to perform a second specific event before the first specific condition is satisfied." It may be expressed as "a first privilege granting means capable of granting one privilege" or "a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege to a player before the second specific condition is satisfied". . This is the same for the "specific event execution means" defined by other features and other feature groups, and conversely, the "privilege granting means" defined by other features and other feature groups is " It can also be expressed as "specific event executing means".

Feature GB3. The first specific event by the first specific event execution means can be more beneficial to the player as soon as the first specific condition is satisfied in the specific high advantage state (first excess flag is set, for example, the number of times setting values are suggested as the fifth special notification is increased, and the setting values are easily narrowed down),
The second specific event by the second specific event executing means can be more beneficial to the player as soon as the second specific condition is satisfied in the specific high advantage state (first excess flag is set, for example, the number of setting values suggested as the fifth special notification is increased, and the setting values are easily narrowed down).

According to the above configuration, it is determined (specified) that the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied in the specific high advantageous state, and the first specific event and the In the gameplay of causing the second specific event, further interest is added such as confirming that the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied as soon as possible. A great playability is created.

Feature GB4. The first specifying means can specify in advance that the first specifying condition is not satisfied based on the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means,
Any one of the characteristics GB1 to GB3, wherein the second specifying means can specify in advance that the second specifying condition is not satisfied based on the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to specify in advance that the first specific condition and the second specific condition are not satisfied depending on the current balance, and on the premise that such a situation exists, the above feature By making it possible to separately specify that the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied, as in GB1, for example, the first specific condition is satisfied but the second specific condition is not satisfied, or the second specific condition is not satisfied. It becomes possible to identify each situation in which the specific condition is satisfied but the first specific condition is not satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to increase the significance of providing a plurality of specific conditions, and to make great use of the processing and presentation when the success or failure of each specific condition is specified in advance.

Feature GB5. Based on the fact that the first specifying means specifies that the first specified condition is satisfied and the second specifying means specifies that the second specified condition is satisfied, it can be beneficial to the player. Third specific event execution means capable of causing a third specific event (main control device 101 or display control device 81, various special notifications in a situation where the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set function to execute processing to perform),
After specifying that the first specifying condition is satisfied by the first specifying means, the second specifying means specifies that the second specifying condition is satisfied; The third specific event by the third specific event executing means after the first specific condition is specified by the first specifying means after the second specific condition is specified to be met. The game according to any one of the features GB1 to GB4, characterized in that the degree of advantage or the degree of benefit of the machine.

According to the above configuration, the advantage of the third specific event occurring after the identification by the first identifying means that the first specific condition is satisfied and the identification by the second identifying means that the second specific condition is satisfied differ in degree and degree of potential benefit. By doing so, it is possible to incorporate into the game the playability such as which of the first specific conditions and the second specific conditions as a plurality of forced termination conditions is specified in advance, and which of the conditions is to be specified first. It becomes possible, and the amusement of a game is heightened.

Feature GB6. The remaining number grasping means grasps the number of remaining games as the number of remaining games in the specific high advantage state,
Regardless of the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means, the first specific end means determines that the number of games executed in the high advantage state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games as the first specific condition. As the establishment of, the high advantageous state is terminated and the low advantageous state is entered,
Regardless of the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means, the second specific end means determines the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the high advantage state and the number of game media paid out in each game. When the second specific condition is satisfied that the increase/decrease number, which is the difference between the number of used game media and the number of used game media, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, the high-advantage state is terminated and the low-advantage state is entered. The game machine according to any one of features GB1 to GB5, characterized in that it is a machine for transition.

According to the above configuration, it is determined that the maximum number of games is reached first and then the maximum increase number is reached, and that the maximum increase number is reached first and then the maximum number of games is reached. Comparing the case where the identification is later and the number of executions in the same high advantage state, the former is expected to have a smaller number of increases and decreases compared to the number of executions. is set as the condition for forced termination, which one is specified first can be information that strongly reflects the game situation up to that point. Therefore, for example, like the feature GB5, by varying the degree of advantage of the third specific event depending on the future of these specific events, it is possible to generate the third specific event in line with the game situation up to that point. can.

Feature GB7. When the second specifying means specifies that the second specifying condition holds in a situation where the first specifying means specifies that the first specifying condition holds, or the second specifying means specifies the second specifying condition is specified to hold, when the first specifying means specifies that the first specifying condition is met, it is possible to grasp which of the first specifying condition and the second specifying condition is met first. Specific grasping means (function for grasping the difference between the upper limit number of games and the number of games that will exceed the upper limit increase number by the main controller 101) Features GB1 to The gaming machine according to any one of GB6.

According to the above configuration, when it is specified that both of the specific conditions are satisfied in a configuration that can specify in advance whether the first specific condition is satisfied or the second specific condition is satisfied, which specific condition is satisfied first. It is grasped by the specific grasping means whether or not. Since any of the specific conditions ends the high advantage state, unless both specific conditions are met in the same game, if one of the specific conditions is met, the other specific condition is not met. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by grasping which specific condition is met first, it is possible to grasp the specific condition that is highly likely not to be met, and the Processing (such as following it) can also be performed.

Feature GB8. The game according to feature GB7, wherein the specific grasping means can grasp a difference between a game specified when the first specific condition is satisfied and a game specified when the second specific condition is satisfied. machine.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which it is possible to specify in advance whether the first specific condition is satisfied or the second specific condition is satisfied, when it is specified that both the specific conditions are satisfied, the game in which the specific conditions are satisfied is performed. A difference can be grasped. As a result, for example, the first specific condition is met relatively early, but the second specific condition is not met for a long time. The high advantage state ends without being able to fully obtain the benefits of the high advantage state specified by the side specific conditions, and the game where the first specific condition is satisfied and the game where the second specific condition is satisfied are different. If the game is almost the same, the benefits of the high advantage state specified by both specific conditions will be fully obtained before the high advantage state ends. While predicting the benefits (profits) that have been made, it is possible to perform processing according to the prediction.

In the configuration "the first specific condition is satisfied based on the fact that the number of executed games in the high advantage state has reached the predetermined upper limit number of games", "the game specified when the first specific condition is satisfied ' is 'a game in which the number of executed games in a highly advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games'.

Feature GB9. Even if the second specifying means specifies in advance that the second specified condition is satisfied, the high advantageous state is terminated without the second specified condition being satisfied due to the subsequent game situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features GB1 to GB8, wherein

According to the above configuration, even if it is specified that the second specific condition is established, that is, that the high advantage state is terminated by the second specific end means in the future, depending on the subsequent game situation, for example, Since the high advantage state may end without the second specific condition being satisfied when the specific high advantageous state ends, if the satisfaction of the second specific condition is desirable for the player, the subsequent game situation It is not preferable for the player that the second specific condition is not satisfied by It is preferable for the player not to be established. In other words, by leaving room for the specified result by the second specifying means to change depending on the subsequent game situation, while creating a game property using the specified result by the second specifying means, the subsequent game attracts attention. It is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in the degree of

Feature GB10. When the second specifying means specifies in advance that the second specified condition is satisfied, and the second specified condition is not satisfied due to the subsequent game situation, and the high advantageous state is terminated. In this case, the third specific event execution means (the main control device 101 and the display control device 81 that cause a third specific event that can be beneficial to the player) performs processing for performing various special notifications based on the redistribution processing ), the gaming machine according to feature GB9.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the establishment of the second specific condition is favorable for the player, if the high advantage state ends without the second specific condition being established due to the subsequent game situation, A third special event occurs that may be of interest to the player. By doing so, it is possible to follow the feeling of loss of the player who expects the second specific condition to be satisfied by the third specific event.

Feature GB11. In a specific situation specified in advance by the second specifying means that the second specified condition holds a function to execute processing for performing special notification that the second excess flag has been set by the device 101),
When the specific notification is executed in the specific situation, the second specific condition is not satisfied due to the subsequent game situation, and the high The gaming machine according to feature GB10, characterized in that the advantage of the third specific event when the advantageous state is terminated is set so as to be likely to be advantageous to the player.

On the premise that the establishment of the second specific condition is a favorable event for the player, when the specific notification that the establishment of the second specific condition is specified is executed, the player 2 Assuming that the specific condition will be satisfied in the future, play the game while enjoying a sense of superiority, or use the profit from the satisfaction of the second specific condition to calculate the profit, etc., to fully enjoy the game until the second specific condition is satisfied. considered to be enjoyed. On the other hand, even if it is specified that the second specific condition is satisfied, the player has no way of knowing it, and there is no reason for the player to make such calculations, so even if the second specific condition is not satisfied Even if it becomes like this, the player's degree of disappointment is considered to be low. The above configuration is intended to eliminate the inconvenience caused by notification of the fulfillment of the second specific condition (such as discouraging the player if the second specific condition is not met). By adjusting the degree of advantage of a specific event, it becomes possible to favorably follow up on the inconvenience even if it occurs. In addition, even if it is specified that the second specified condition is established, if the specified notification is not carried out, it is possible to lower the advantage of the third specified event, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to improve the soundness of the game by not setting the advantage of .

Feature GB12. When the second specifying means specifies that the second specified condition is satisfied, it is possible to cause a second specified event that can be beneficial to the player before the second specified condition is satisfied. A second specific event execution means (function for performing various special notifications based on the fact that the second excess flag is set by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81) is provided,
The advantage of the third specific event is higher when the second specific event by the second specific event execution means does not occur than when the second specific event by the second specific event execution means occurs. The gaming machine according to feature GB10 or feature GB11, characterized in that is set so that is likely to be advantageous to the player.

According to the above configuration, when the high-advantage state ends without the second specific condition being satisfied, even if the expectation of the second specific condition being satisfied is aroused before the end, the second specific event causes the second specific event to occur. Assuming that the player can enjoy the profit of the number, the advantage of the third specific event is lowered. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player's advantage from being unreasonably increased, and to maintain the balance of the game.

Feature GB13. The remaining number grasping means grasps the number of remaining games as the number of remaining games in the specific high advantage state,
Regardless of the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means, the first specific end means determines that the number of games executed in the high advantage state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games as the first specific condition. As the establishment of, the high advantageous state is terminated and the low advantageous state is entered,
Regardless of the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means, the second specific end means determines the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the high advantage state and the number of game media paid out in each game. When the second specific condition is satisfied that the increase/decrease number, which is the difference between the number of used game media and the number of used game media, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, the high-advantage state is terminated and the low-advantage state is entered. The game machine according to any one of features GB1 to GB12, characterized in that it is a machine for transition.

According to the above configuration, a gaming machine in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set: the first specific condition that the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games, and the second specific condition that the number of game media increases or decreases reaches the upper limit increase number. , whether or not the number of games reaches the upper limit is specified by the first specifying means before reaching the upper limit number of games, and whether or not the number of increases or decreases reaches the upper limit increase number is determined before reaching the upper limit number of increases. It is specified by the second specifying means. The number of game media increases or decreases based on the game results of each game. and the number of increases and decreases may not be a constant relationship. Therefore, by separately predicting the number of games and the number of increase/decrease, it becomes possible to accurately predict that the high advantage state will be forcibly terminated in the future.

Feature GB14. The second identifying means obtains the remaining number of games from the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means and an average value of the expected increase/decrease expected per game in the specific high advantage state. a first prediction means for predicting a first expected increase/decrease number (a function of executing a prediction process based on the expected increase/decrease number KM in the remaining payout number management process by the main controller 101), and the first prediction means The gaming machine according to feature GB13, wherein it is possible to specify in advance that the second specified condition is satisfied based on a prediction result.

According to the above configuration, the number of remaining games and the average value of the expected increase/decrease expected per game in a specific high advantage state (i.e. average net increase) are used to predict future increases/decreases. Based on the result, identify that the increase/decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number. By doing so, it is possible to predict and specify that the upper limit increase number will be reached simply by storing the average value in advance without using complicated calculation processing.

Feature GB15. The second specifying means obtains the number of remaining games from the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means and the maximum expected increase/decrease that can be expected per game in the specific high advantage state. A second prediction means for predicting a second expected increase/decrease number (a function of executing a prediction process based on the maximum increase/decrease number MM in the first adjustment process or the second adjustment process by the main controller 101) for predicting the second expected increase/decrease number, 2. The gaming machine according to feature GB13 or feature GB14, wherein it is possible to specify in advance that the second specific condition is satisfied based on the prediction result of the prediction means.

According to the above configuration, the number of remaining games and the maximum expected increase/decrease expected per game in a specific high advantage state (that is, the maximum net increase) are used to predict future increase/decrease numbers. Based on the result, identify that the increase/decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number. By doing so, it is possible to predict and specify that the upper limit increase number will be reached simply by storing the maximum value in advance without using complicated calculation processing.

Especially with this configuration, it is possible to suitably avoid reaching the upper limit increase number unexpectedly. In other words, if the expected increase/decrease number in each game is the maximum value, the increase number will not be greater than that. No event occurs.

Feature GB16. As game states, a low-advantage state (normal section) and a high-advantage state (attack mode, etc. in an advantageous section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set.
In the high-advantage state, a predetermined termination condition of the high-advantage state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, Remaining number grasping means (advantageous interval remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining payout number or the increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or the increase number reaches the set number) is established;
Normal end means for ending the high-advantage state and transitioning to the low-advantage state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means A function that executes processing to end the advantageous section without being established) and
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the high advantage state is ended based on the establishment of a predetermined first specific condition (reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval). The first specific end means for transitioning to the low advantage state (processing for forcibly ending the advantageous interval based on the number of games in the advantageous interval AG reaching the upper limit number of games in the second interval display processing by the main controller 101). function) and
Regardless of the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means, a second specific condition that is a predetermined condition and is different from the first specific condition (reaching the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section) is established. (In the second section display processing by the main controller 101, the number of increases/decreases in the advantageous section ZM has reached the upper limit increase number.) A function that executes processing to forcibly terminate the advantageous section based on the fact) and
In the high advantage state, a first specifying means (remaining game management processing by the main controller 101) capable of specifying in advance that the first specifying condition is satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means function) and
Second specifying means (remaining number management processing by main controller 101) capable of specifying in advance that the second specified condition is satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means in the high advantageous state function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low. Since there are cases where the game ends based on the establishment of the first specific condition or the second specific condition, the advantage of the high advantageous state is prevented from being extremely increased. A player who desires the high advantage state to continue for a long time would like to know how long it takes for the first specific condition and the second specific condition to be satisfied, as well as grasping the remaining number of the high advantageous state. Therefore, in the above configuration, the first specific condition and the second specific condition can be individually specified before the condition is satisfied. It is also possible to use the desired contents for game play. In particular, the high-advantage state can be terminated according to different conditions such as a first specific condition and a second specific condition, and these conditions can be specified separately. The excitement of the high-advantage state is heightened, and it is possible to suitably realize a game property that utilizes the mutual relationship between the excitement and the two specific conditions. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that "it is possible to specify in advance that the first specific condition is satisfied" or "it is possible to specify in advance that the second specific condition is satisfied" means, for example, "it is possible to determine in advance that the first specific condition is satisfied." , can be specified in the game before the first specific condition is established" or "the fulfillment of the second specific condition can be specified in the game before the second specific condition is established" It is also possible to express

In addition, "first specific condition" and "second specific condition" may be replaced by "first specific condition set as conditions for ending a predetermined state (advantageous section) including said highly advantageous state" and " It may be expressed as "a second specific condition which is a condition set as a condition for ending a predetermined state and which is different from the first specific condition".

Further, each configuration shown in features GB1 to GB15 may be applied to the feature GB16 individually or in combination.

In this case, for example, in feature GB6, "the means for grasping the number of remaining games grasps the number of remaining games as the number of games remaining in the high advantage state;
The first specific end means determines that the number of executed games in a predetermined state (advantageous section) including the high advantage state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games regardless of the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means. Assuming that the first specific condition is established, the high advantageous state is ended and the state is shifted to the low advantageous state,
The second specific end means pays out games according to the game results of each game in a predetermined state (advantage zone) including the high advantage state, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. When the second specific condition is satisfied that the increase/decrease number, which is the difference between the number of paid out media and the number of used game media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, the high advantage state is terminated. It is preferable to apply it after modifying the expression such as "It is to shift to the low advantage state", and such modification is the same when applying other corresponding configurations to the feature GB16.

<Characteristic GC group>
Features GC1. As the game state, a low-advantage state (normal section) and a high-advantage state (advantage section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set.
As a state included in the high-advantage state, a specific high-advantage state (e.g., attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than other states (e.g., challenge mode) in the high-advantage state is set;
In the specific high advantage state, a predetermined termination condition of the specific high advantage state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and the number management configuration , the number of remaining payouts or the number of increased numbers becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the number of increased numbers reaches a set number) is established (advantageous section remaining number of games ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the condition is established;
Normal termination means for terminating the specific high advantage state and transitioning to the low advantage state based on the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means. A function that executes processing to end the advantageous section without satisfying the conditions),
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state is ended and the low advantageous state is ended based on the establishment of a predetermined first specific condition. (function for forcibly ending the advantageous interval based on the number of games in the advantageous interval AG reaching the upper limit number of games in the second interval display processing by the main controller 101) and,
Regardless of the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means, the specific high advantage state is included based on the establishment of a second specific condition that is a predetermined condition and is different from the first specific condition. Second specific ending means for ending the high advantageous state and transitioning to the low advantageous state (based on the fact that the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM has reached the upper limit increase number in the section display second processing by the main controller 101) A function that executes processing to forcibly terminate the advantageous section) and
When the high advantage state is ended by the first specific ending means, a first specific event executing means (for example, an upper limit game A function to execute the sixth special notification process when forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the number);
When the high advantage state is ended by the second specific end means, a second specific event execution means capable of causing a second specific event that can be beneficial to the player (for example, the upper limit is increased by the main controller 101 A function to execute the sixth special notification process when forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the number);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high-advantage state includes a specific high-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is even higher. In the included configuration, the specific high advantageous state is ended based on the number of remaining specific high advantageous states, and the high advantageous state is terminated based on the satisfaction of the first specific condition or the second specific condition in the high advantageous state. Since it may end with the state, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high-advantage state including the specific high-advantage state is extremely increased. Considering that the player probably wants the high advantageous state, especially the specific high advantageous state, to continue for a long time, the high advantageous state can be maintained by the first specific condition or the second specific condition regardless of the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state. If the game ends, the player will feel as if the remaining specific high advantage state has been exploited, and there is a possibility that the desire to continue the game or to play the game again will be lost. Therefore, when the high-advantage state ends based on the establishment of the first specific condition or the second specific condition, such a high-advantage state is forced to occur by allowing a specific event that can be beneficial to the player to occur. It is possible to eliminate the inconvenience when it can be terminated.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the specific event that occurs differs depending on whether the forced termination is caused by the first specified condition or the second specified condition. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to which specific condition the game will be forcibly terminated, and even the event of forcibly terminating the high-advantage state can be used in the game. Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the ``first specific end means'' and the ``second specific end means'' are, for example, ``regardless of the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number grasping means, when a predetermined first specific condition is met. Based on this, a first specific end means for ending the high advantageous state and transitioning to the low advantageous state by ending the specific high advantageous state, Regardless, when a second specific condition different from the first specific condition, which is a predetermined condition, is satisfied, the specific high advantageous state is terminated, and the high advantageous state is terminated. It may be expressed as "second specific end means for shifting to a low advantage state".

Furthermore, the ``first specific condition'' and ``second specific condition'' are replaced by ``first specific condition set as a termination condition for the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state'' and ``including the specific highly advantageous state. It may be expressed as "a second specific condition which is a condition set as a condition for ending the high-advantage state and which is different from the first specific condition".

Feature GC2. When the high-advantage state is terminated by the first specific termination means, a first specification means (for example, by main controller 101) for specifying the remaining number of the specific high-advantage state until the second specification condition is satisfied. a function to execute the process of step S13810);
When the high-advantage state is terminated by the second specific end means, second specifying means (for example, by main controller 101) specifies the number of remaining specified high-advantage states until the first specified condition is satisfied. a function to execute the processing of step S13803);
with
The first specific event execution means is capable of causing the first specific event based on a result of identification by the first identification means,
The gaming machine according to feature GC1, wherein the second specific event execution means can cause the second specific event based on the result of identification by the second identification means.

In a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions such as a first specific condition and a second specific condition are set, unless the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied at the same time, the first specific condition is satisfied, which is highly advantageous. When the state ends, the second specific condition is not satisfied, and when the second specific condition is satisfied and the high advantage state ends, the first specific condition is not satisfied, and either specific condition is satisfied. The highly advantageous state will end without enjoying the benefits of the highly advantageous state specified in the conditions to the maximum extent. The above configuration is a configuration for compensating for such benefits that cannot be enjoyed as the first specific event and the second specific event. It is possible to bring out more interest in the game, such as ending the high-advantage state with .

In particular, in a configuration in which a specific high advantageous state is included in a high advantageous state, the first specific event and the second specific event are associated with the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state, so that the specific condition on the side that is not satisfied is established. It is possible to make the first specific event and the second specific event take maximum consideration of the benefits that would have been enjoyed if it had been possible, and further increase the player's interest in each specific event. becomes possible.

The 'first specifying means' and 'second specifying means' may be, for example, 'if the high advantageous state is terminated by the first specifying end means, the remaining number until the second specifying condition is satisfied A first specifying means for specifying the remaining number ascertained by the ascertaining means; It may be expressed as "second specifying means for specifying the remaining number grasped by the means".

Feature GC3. The remaining number grasping means grasps the number of remaining games as the number of remaining games in the specific high advantage state,
Regardless of the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means, the first specific end means determines that the number of games executed in the high advantage state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games as the first specific condition. is established, the high-advantage state is terminated and the low-advantage state is entered,
Regardless of the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means, the second specific end means determines the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the high advantage state and the number of game media paid out in each game. When the second specific condition is satisfied that the increase/decrease number, which is the difference between the number of used game media and the number of used game media, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, the high-advantage state is terminated and the low-advantage state is entered. It is intended to migrate
The gaming machine according to feature GC2, wherein the first specific event has a higher degree of advantage or a greater degree of potential benefit to the player than the second specific event.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, namely, the first specific condition that the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games and the second specific condition that the number of increases or decreases reaches the upper limit increase number, the upper limit A first specific event that occurs when the game is forcibly terminated because the first specific condition for reaching the maximum number of games has been met before the number of games is increased, and a second specific condition for reaching the upper limit for the number of games is met before the number of games is reached. When comparing the second specific event that occurs when the game is forcibly terminated as a result, the first specific event is more advantageous or more beneficial to the player than the second specific event. there is In other words, from the premise of the game that game media are paid out as a result of each game and the game media is intended to increase, the player who has reached the maximum number of games and has been forcibly terminated will not be able to further increase the game media. Although there is a sense of disappearance that it was expected, there is also an idea that it will be enough for the side that reached the upper limit increase number and was forcibly terminated even if it reached the upper limit as the increase number of game media. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by increasing the compensation on the side that has reached the upper limit number of games and decreasing the compensation on the side that has reached the upper limit increase number, the balance of both compensations (privileges) is maintained and the game is optimized. can be achieved.

Feature GC4. The remaining number grasping means grasps the number of remaining games as the number of remaining games in the specific high advantage state,
Regardless of the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means, the first specific end means determines that the number of games executed in the high advantage state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games as the first specific condition. is established, the high-advantage state is terminated and the low-advantage state is entered,
Regardless of the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means, the second specific end means determines the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the high advantage state and the number of game media paid out in each game. When the second specific condition is satisfied that the increase/decrease number, which is the difference between the number of used game media and the number of used game media, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, the high-advantage state is terminated and the low-advantage state is entered. It is intended to migrate
When the high-advantage state is ended by the first specific end means or the second specific end means, a special state (special section) advantageous to the player is created in the low-advantage state after the end of the high-advantage state. Equipped with settable special state setting means (function for executing special section setting processing by main controller 101),
The first specific event executing means sets the end condition of the special state set by the special state setting means to a corresponding number of games corresponding to the increase number up to the upper limit increase number specified by the second specifying means. setting the end condition to be established when the medium is dispensed in the special state can be set as the first specific event;
The second specific event executing means executes the end condition of the special state set by the special state setting means by the number of games corresponding to the number of games up to the maximum number of games specified by the first specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature GC2 or feature GC3, wherein the second specific event can be set to set the end condition as being satisfied when the game is completed.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, the first specific condition that the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games, and the second specific condition that the number of increases or decreases reaches the upper limit increase number are set. When the high-advantage state ends under the forced termination condition, a special state advantageous to the player is set in the low-advantage state, and the conditions for terminating the special state are the number of games up to the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number. Incremental numbers up to are used. More specifically, if the number of games is reached and forced to end, the number of increases up to the number of increases is used as a condition for ending the special state. , the number of games up to the upper limit number of games is used as a condition for ending the special state. By doing so, in a configuration in which a plurality of conditions for forced termination of a highly advantageous state are set, when one forced termination condition ends, the feeling of loss that the other forced termination condition could not be satisfied is eliminated. It is possible to make up for it with a special state.

Feature GC5. In the specific high advantage state, a first information reporting means (remaining number of games by the display control device 81) capable of reporting the first information corresponding to the number of games up to the upper limit number of games in the high advantage state by a predetermined reporting means a function that executes processing to display) and
In the specific high advantageous state, a second information reporting means capable of reporting the second information corresponding to the number of increases up to the upper limit increase number of the high advantageous state by a predetermined reporting means (remaining increased number of sheets by the display control device 81 a function that executes processing to display) and
When the corresponding number corresponding to the number of increases up to the upper limit number of increases is set by the first specific event executing means as the termination condition of the special state, the second information notified in the specific highly advantageous state Means (function for executing the processing of step S14209 by the display control device 81) capable of continuing the notification of the second information by the notification means in the special state;
When the number of games corresponding to the number of games up to the upper limit number of games is set by the second specific event executing means as a termination condition of the special state, the first information notified in the specific high advantage state Means (function for executing the processing of step S14206 by the display control device 81) capable of continuing the notification of the first information by the notification means in the special state;
The gaming machine according to feature GC4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the upper limit number of games is reached and the game is forcibly terminated, the increased number up to the upper limit increase number is used for the special state, and when the upper limit increase number is reached and the game is forcibly terminated, In a configuration in which the number of games up to the upper limit number of games is used in a special state, the notification of information corresponding to the number of increases up to the upper limit increase number that was notified in the specific high advantage state until then, and the upper limit number of games The notification of information corresponding to the number of games up to is carried over to the special state and notified. By doing so, it is possible to make it seem as if the high advantage state (especially the specific high advantage state) continues until the forced termination condition of the side that could not be actually satisfied is satisfied. , even if the transition to the special state is recognized, it is easy to understand that the difference up to the forced termination condition on the side that could not be satisfied in the high advantage state was taken over to the special state. It is possible to clearly grasp that the difference up to the forced termination condition is compensated for in the state.

Feature GC6. When transitioning from the specific high advantageous state to the low advantageous state, end notification execution means (by the display control device 81 of step S14203) capable of executing end notification that the specific high advantageous state ends function to perform processing) and
Pseudo-end notification executing means (display control device) capable of executing a pseudo-end notification suggesting that the specific high-advantage state ends by a predetermined notification means when the specific-high advantageous state does not transition to the low-advantage state 81, a function of executing a process for performing an end effect when a post-boarding notification occurs);
with
The pseudo end notification by the pseudo end notification executing means is configured such that, after executing the end notification by a predetermined notification means, continuous notification is executed to make the player aware that the specific high advantageous state will continue. and
When the special state is set by the special state setting means, after the end notification is executed by the end notification execution means, a pseudo continuous notification execution means ( The gaming machine according to feature GC5, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S14205 by the display control device 81.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make a pseudo end notification by the pseudo end notification execution means such that the specific high advantageous state continues due to the continuation notification even though the end notification makes it appear that the specific high advantageous state will end. As a premise, even if the specific high advantageous state (high advantageous state) is forcibly terminated and the transition to the special state is performed, the same flow as the pseudo end notification is performed, so that the special state is continued as if the specific high advantageous state continues. It is possible to give an impression as if it is in a state where By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect of inheriting the information up to the upper limit number of games and the information up to the upper limit increase number in the special state.

Feature GC7. Increase processing means (processing for adding the number of games such as attack mode by main controller 101) capable of executing processing for increasing the specific high advantage state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined increase condition in the specific high advantage state function) and
When the increase condition is satisfied in a specific situation in which it is specified that the first specific condition or the second specific condition is subsequently satisfied based on the current remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means or, when the specific situation occurs as a result of the increase processing performed by the increase processing means, excess information storage means ( total number of eliminated games (TEG),
with
The first specific termination means terminates the high advantageous state regardless of the excess information stored in the excess information storage means when the first specific condition is satisfied;
The second specific termination means terminates the high advantageous state regardless of the excess information stored in the excess information storage means when the second specific condition is satisfied,
When the high-advantage state is terminated by the first specifying end means, a third specifying means for specifying the excess information stored in the excess information storage means (for example, the processing of step S13708 by the main controller 101 is function) and
When the high advantageous state is terminated by the second specifying end means, the fourth specifying means for specifying the excess information stored in the excess information storage means (for example, the process of step S13702 by the main controller 101 function) and
with
The first specific event executing means can set the first specific event based on the result of identification by the third identifying means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features GC1 to GC6, wherein the second specific event execution means can set the second specific event based on the result of identification by the fourth identification means.

In the above configuration, when it is specified in advance that the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, the excess amount of the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state is stored as the excess information, and then the first specific condition is stored. When the specific condition or the second specific condition is established, the high advantage state ends regardless of the excess information. Then, although it is desired that the increase processing to increase the remaining number of the specific high advantage state is executed until the specific situation is specified when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, when the specific situation is reached, the game becomes difficult. Players cannot help but feel that even if the increase processing is performed, it is meaningless, and there is concern that their motivation to play will drop significantly. Therefore, by using the excess amount in the specific high advantageous state to create a configuration in which a specific event can occur at the end of the high advantageous state, it is possible to create meaning for increasing the excess amount, and the game Decrease in motivation can be suppressed.

Note that when the above configuration is applied to features GC2 to GC6, the "first specific event execution means" and "first specific event" in the above configuration and the "first specific event execution means" and " The "first specific event" may be the same or different. If they are different, in order to clearly distinguish them, "first specific event execution means" and "first specific event" in the above configuration are replaced with "third specific event execution means" and "third specific event" respectively. can be expressed as Further, even if the "second specific event execution means" and "second specific event" in the above configuration are the same as the "second specific event execution means" and "second specific event" of features GC2 to GC6, may be different. If they are different, in order to clearly distinguish them, the "second specific event execution means" and "second specific event" in the above configuration are replaced with "fourth specific event execution means" and "fourth specific event" respectively. can be expressed as

Feature GC8. The remaining number grasping means grasps the number of remaining games as the number of remaining games in the specific high advantage state,
Regardless of the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means, the first specific end means determines that the number of games executed in the high advantage state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games as the first specific condition. As the establishment of, the high advantageous state is terminated and the low advantageous state is entered,
Regardless of the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means, the second specific end means determines the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the high advantage state and the number of game media paid out in each game. When the second specific condition is satisfied that the increase/decrease number, which is the difference between the number of used game media and the number of used game media, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, the high-advantage state is terminated and the low-advantage state is entered. It is intended to migrate
The excess information storage means is
First storage means for storing information on the number of games corresponding to the increase process as the excess information (adding the number of games to be added to the total number of eliminated games TEG when the first excess flag is set by the main controller 101) function to perform processing) and
A second storage means for storing, as the excess information, information on an increase in the number of game media that can be expected in the number of games corresponding to the increase process (total disappearance game when the second excess flag is set by the main controller 101) a function of executing a process of adding the number of games to the number TEG),
The third specifying means specifies information on the excess number of games stored in the first storage means,
The gaming machine according to feature GC7, wherein the fourth specifying means specifies the excess information of the increased number stored in the second storing means.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of forced termination conditions, that is, the first specific condition that the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games and the second specific condition that the number of increases or decreases reaches the upper limit increase number, these conditions are set. If the fulfillment of the forced termination condition is specified in advance, and if an increase process is performed as a so-called extra process after that specification, the excess amount corresponding to the increase process will be the excess information of the number of games, respectively. It is stored as excess information for the increased number. In the event of forced termination, a specific event will occur based on the excess information, and in the event of forced termination at the maximum number of games, a specific event will occur based on the exceeded information on the number of games. If it is forcibly terminated at the upper limit increase number, a specific event will occur based on the excess information of the increase number. By doing so, the benefits that would have been received if the game had not been forced to terminate are linked with the reason for the forced termination, and it is possible to favorably follow up on the player's sense of loss due to forced termination.

Feature GC9. Increase processing means (processing for adding the number of games such as attack mode by main controller 101) capable of executing processing for increasing the specific high advantage state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined increase condition in the specific high advantage state function) and
When the increase condition is satisfied in a specific situation in which it is specified that the first specific condition or the second specific condition is subsequently satisfied based on the current remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means or, when the specific situation occurs as a result of the increase processing performed by the increase processing means, excess information storage for storing excess information of the specific high advantageous state corresponding to the increase processing based on the establishment of the increase condition. Means (total disappearance game number TEG);
with
The first specific termination means terminates the high advantageous state regardless of the excess information stored in the excess information storage means when the first specific condition is satisfied;
The second specific termination means terminates the high advantageous state regardless of the excess information stored in the excess information storage means when the second specific condition is satisfied,
When the high advantageous state is terminated by the first specific ending means, the first specifying means (step S13810 by main controller 101) for specifying the remaining number of the specified high advantageous state until the second specified condition is satisfied. ) and
When the high advantageous state is terminated by the second specific ending means, second specifying means for specifying the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state until the first specified condition is satisfied (step S13803 by main controller 101) function) and
When the high advantageous state is terminated by the first specifying end means, the third specifying means for specifying the excess information stored in the excess information storage means (main controller 101 executes the process of step S13809 function) and
When the high advantageous state is terminated by the second specifying end means, the fourth specifying means for specifying the excess information stored in the excess information storage means (main controller 101 executes the process of step S13802 function) and
with
The first specific event executing means can set the first specific event based on the result of identification by the first identification means and the result of identification by the third identification means,
Any one of the features GC1 to GC8, wherein the second specific event execution means can set the second specific event based on a result of identification by the second identification means and a result of identification by the fourth identification means. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

In the above configuration, when it is specified in advance that the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, the excess remaining number is stored as excess information, and then the first specific condition or the second specific condition is stored. When the specific condition is satisfied, the high advantage state ends regardless of the excess information. Then, although it is desired that the increase processing to increase the remaining number of the specific high advantage state is executed until the specific situation is specified when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, when the specific situation is reached, the game becomes difficult. Players cannot help but feel that even if the increase processing is performed, it is meaningless, and there is concern that their motivation to play will drop significantly. Therefore, by using the excess amount to cause a specific event at the end of the specific high advantageous state (high advantageous state), it is possible to create meaning for increasing the excess amount, It is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play.

However, in a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions such as a first specific condition and a second specific condition such as the first specific condition and the second specific condition are set, the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied at the same time. Unless otherwise specified, if the first specific condition is satisfied and the high advantageous state ends, the second specific condition is not satisfied, and if the second specific condition is satisfied and the high advantageous state ends, the first condition is not satisfied. The specific condition is not established, and the high advantage state will end without enjoying the benefits of the high advantage state defined by any of the specific conditions to the maximum. In other words, for example, if the game is forcibly terminated under the first specific condition, if a specific event is generated based on the excess of the first specific condition, the player's sense of loss can be alleviated to some extent. For the player who expected the benefit of the second specific condition, forced termination under the first specific condition may result in dissatisfaction because the player could not sufficiently receive the benefit.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in addition to the excess amount of the forced termination side, the benefit of the side that did not lead to the forced termination is taken into consideration to cause a specific event. By doing so, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, it is possible to follow up the feeling of loss at the time of forced termination more favorably.

Feature GC10. As game states, a low-advantage state (normal section) and a high-advantage state (for example, attack mode in an advantageous section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set.
In the high-advantage state, a predetermined termination condition of the high-advantage state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, Remaining number grasping means (advantageous interval remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining payout number or the increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or the increase number reaches the set number) is established;
Normal end means for ending the high-advantage state and transitioning to the low-advantage state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means A function that executes processing to end the advantageous section without being established) and
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the high advantage state is ended based on the establishment of a predetermined first specific condition (reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval). The first specific end means for transitioning to the low advantage state (processing for forcibly ending the advantageous interval based on the number of games in the advantageous interval AG reaching the upper limit number of games in the second interval display processing by the main controller 101). function) and
Regardless of the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means, a second specific condition that is a predetermined condition and is different from the first specific condition (reaching the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section) is established. (In the second section display processing by the main controller 101, the number of increases/decreases in the advantageous section ZM has reached the upper limit increase number.) A function that executes processing to forcibly terminate the advantageous section based on the fact) and
When the high advantage state is ended by the first specific ending means, a first specific event executing means (for example, an upper limit game A function to execute the sixth special notification process when forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the number);
When the high advantage state is ended by the second specific end means, a second specific event execution means capable of causing a second specific event that can be beneficial to the player (for example, the upper limit is increased by the main controller 101 A function to execute the sixth special notification process when forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the number);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low. Since there are cases where the game ends based on the establishment of the first specific condition or the second specific condition in the high-advantage state, it is possible to prevent the advantage of the high-advantage state from being extremely increased. Considering that the player would want the high advantage state to continue for a long time, regardless of the remaining number of the high advantage state, if the high advantage state ends due to the first specific condition or the second specific condition, the game will not be played. Players may have the impression that the remaining high-advantage state has been exploited, and may lose their motivation to continue or replay the game. Therefore, when the high-advantage state ends based on the establishment of the first specific condition or the second specific condition, such a high-advantage state is forced to occur by allowing a specific event that can be beneficial to the player to occur. It is possible to eliminate the inconvenience when it can be terminated.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the specific event that occurs differs depending on whether the forced termination is caused by the first specified condition or the second specified condition. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to which specific condition the game will be forcibly terminated, and even the event of forcibly terminating the high-advantage state can be used in the game. Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the "first specific condition" and "second specific condition" should be replaced by "the first specific condition set as the end condition of the predetermined state (advantageous section) including the high advantageous state" and "the condition including the high advantageous state." It may be expressed as "a second specific condition which is a condition set as a condition for ending a predetermined state (advantageous section) and which is different from the first specific condition".

Moreover, each configuration indicated by the features GC1 to GC9 may be applied to the feature GC10 individually or in combination.

In this case, for example, in feature GC3, "the means for grasping the number of remaining games grasps the number of remaining games as the number of remaining games in the high advantage state,
The first specific end means determines that the number of executed games in a predetermined state (advantageous section) including the high advantage state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games regardless of the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means. Assuming that the first specific condition is established, the high advantageous state is ended and the state is shifted to the low advantageous state,
The second specific end means pays out games according to the game results of each game in a predetermined state (advantage zone) including the high advantage state, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. When the second specific condition is satisfied that the increase/decrease number, which is the difference between the number of paid out media and the number of used game media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, the high advantage state is terminated. and to shift to the low-advantage state,
The first specific event is more advantageous or more beneficial to the player than the second specific event." is applied to the feature GC10.

<Characteristic GD group>
Feature GD1. As the game state, a low-advantage state (normal section) and a high-advantage state (advantage section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set.
As a state included in the high-advantage state, a specific high-advantage state (e.g., attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than other states (e.g., challenge mode) in the high-advantage state is set;
Payout means (payout device 53) for paying out game media according to the result of each game;
In the specific high advantage state, a predetermined termination condition of the specific high advantage state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and the number management configuration , stores the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number until the remaining payout number or the increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or the increase number reaches the set number) is established in a predetermined remaining number area. Remaining number information storage means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
a remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number corresponding to the remaining number information stored by the remaining number information storage means (for example, a function of executing the section display second process by the main controller 101);
Normal end means for ending the specific high advantage state and transitioning to the low advantage state based on the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means A function that executes processing to end the advantageous section without satisfying the conditions),
The increase/decrease number, which is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the high advantage state and the number of used game media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number. irrespective of the remaining number information stored by the remaining number information storage means, the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state is terminated and the First specific ending means for transitioning to a low advantage state (execution of processing for forcibly terminating the advantageous interval based on the fact that the advantageous interval increase/decrease number ZM reaches the upper limit increase number in the second interval display processing by the main controller 101) function) and
increase processing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main controller 101) capable of executing the process of increasing the specific high advantage state based on the establishment of a predetermined increase condition;
expected increase/decrease number grasping means for grasping the expected increase/decrease number of game media that can be expected when the game increased by the increase process is completed (function for executing the remaining number management process by the main controller 101);
When the sum of the expected increase/decrease number and the increase/decrease number up to that point exceeds the upper limit increase number, the excess information corresponding to the excess amount is displayed in an excess area (extinction preparation game) different from the remaining area. Excess storage means (function for executing the processing of step S14407 by the main controller 101) stored in the number EJG);
A case where the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area becomes specific information corresponding to a specific number that triggers termination processing by the normal termination means, and the excess information is stored in the excess area. If there is, a specific storage means (function for executing redistribution processing by the main controller 101) for storing the remaining number corresponding to the excess information in the remaining number area as the remaining number information;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high-advantage state includes a specific high-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is even higher. In the included configuration, the specific high advantageous state ends based on the number of remaining specific high advantageous states, and the upper limit is the increase or decrease in the number of game media paid out in the high advantageous state that includes the specific high advantageous state. Since there are cases where the game ends based on the number of increments being reached, it is possible to prevent the advantage of a highly advantageous state, particularly a specific highly advantageous state, from being extremely increased. In a specific high advantage state, there are cases where a so-called extra process such as an increase process occurs based on the fulfillment of the increase condition, and when the increase process is performed, the game media that can be expected when the game for the increase process is consumed. If the expected increase/decrease number and the previous increase/decrease number exceed the upper limit increase number, the remaining number excess information corresponding to the excess amount is stored as the remaining number area where the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number is stored. are stored in different excess areas. By storing the excess information in an area different from the area in which the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number is stored in this way, the game characteristics using the excess amount (information stored in the excess area) can be easily realized, and the processing configuration can be simplified in order to improve the interest of the high-advantage state in which the upper limit increase number is defined.

In addition, when excess information is stored in such an excess area, depending on the progress of each game, even if the specific high advantage state stored in the remaining number area is consumed, the high advantage state It is conceivable that the number of increases/decreases in the medium does not reach the upper limit of the number of increases. Therefore, in such a case, the excess information stored in the excess area is stored again in the remaining number area as the remaining number information. By doing so, while suppressing the loss of the player due to the processing error as described above, even though the increase processing has been performed, the implementation of the specific high advantage state corresponding to the increased processing is performed. It is possible to preferably avoid the event of being restricted.

The "remaining number information" and "excess information" can also be expressed as, for example, "first information" and "second information". In this case, "remaining number information storage means", "excess information storage means", "remaining number area" and "excess area" are also referred to as "first information storage means", "second information storage means" and "first area". or “second region”, and other configurations may be appropriately modified. Such modifications are also applicable to corresponding locations in other features and other feature sets.

In addition, regarding the "specific storage means", when "the remaining number corresponding to the excess information is stored as the remaining number information in the remaining number area", "the excess amount stored as the remaining number information in the remaining number area" If the configuration is such that the information is erased from the excess information storage means, it can be understood more clearly that the configuration is such that the 'excess information' is temporarily stored in the 'excess area'. Regarding the ``specific storage means'', ``when the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area becomes the specific information corresponding to the specific number that triggers the termination process by the normal termination means, When the excess information is stored in the excess area, the remaining number corresponding to the excess information may be expressed as "means capable of executing a movement process for moving the remaining number corresponding to the excess information to the remaining number area as the remaining number information. Such modifications are also applicable to corresponding locations in other features and other feature groups.

Feature GD2. The gaming machine according to feature GD1, wherein the excess information stored in the excess area is deleted when the high advantage state is terminated by the first specific termination means.

According to the above configuration, the excess information stored in the excess area is erased when the upper limit increase number is reached, and the excess area to be erased is always used during the specific high advantage state. To prevent the occurrence of processing errors such as erasing when the upper limit increase number is not reached, and reduce the risk that the player suffers due to the error. becomes possible.

Feature GD3. The remaining number stored in the remaining number information storage means based on satisfaction of a second specific condition including that the number of games executed in the high advantage state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games. Second specific end means for ending the high advantage state including the specific high advantage state and transitioning to the low advantage state regardless of the information A function that executes processing for forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the AG reaching the upper limit number of games);
In the specific high advantageous state, it is possible to specify in advance that the second specific condition of the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state is satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. a second identifying means (a function of executing a remaining game number management process by the main control device 101);
with
The excess information stored in the excess area is deleted even when the high-advantage state is terminated by the second specific termination means,
Based on the fact that the second specifying means specifies that the second specifying condition is satisfied, it is specified that the upper limit number of games is exceeded among the remaining numbers corresponding to the excess information stored in the excess area. Determined information storage means for storing the remaining number corresponding to the number of excess games as determined information in a determined region different from the remaining number region and the excess region (function for executing lost game number movement processing by main controller 101) The gaming machine according to feature GD1 or feature GD2, characterized by comprising:

Since the increase/decrease number fluctuates depending on the result of the game, even if the excess information is stored as if the upper limit increase number will be reached, there are cases where the upper limit increase number is not reached. Assuming such a case, the excess information is stored again as the remaining number information. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games and is forcibly terminated, if it is specified in advance that the number of games will reach the upper limit number of games, Although the high-advantage state may end before, the possibility of exceeding the upper limit number of games and continuing the high-advantage state is low. In other words, it is considered that the number of games exceeding the maximum number of games will not be re-stored in the remaining number area depending on the game situation thereafter. Therefore, in the above configuration, the amount exceeding the upper limit number of games is stored in the fixed area as disappearance information, so that the remaining number area that stores the remaining number information that is always used in the high advantage state It is configured to use respective areas such as an excess area for temporarily storing excess information that may be exceeded and a determination area for storing determination information that is determined to be exceeded. In this way, by dividing and storing common information such as information regarding the remaining number during a specific highly advantageous state in different areas, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration during a highly advantageous state, prevent errors, and the like. It becomes possible.

It should be noted that the "determined information" can also be expressed as, for example, "third information". It is preferable to express it as "area" and modify the expression as appropriate for other configurations.

In addition, regarding the ``determined information storage means'', ``the remaining number corresponding to the number of games specified as exceeding the upper limit number of games is stored as definite information in a definite area different from the remaining number area and the excess area. ', 'the amount of excess information stored as definite information in the definite area is deleted from the excess information storage means', the 'excess information' is temporarily stored in the 'excess area' is more clearly understood. Regarding the ``determined information storage means'', ``the remaining number corresponding to the excess information stored in the excess area based on the second specification means specifying that the second specification condition is satisfied Among them, means capable of executing a movement process of moving the remaining number corresponding to the number of games specified as exceeding the upper limit number of games to a confirmation area different from the remaining number area and the excess area as confirmation information. can be expressed.

Feature GD4. When the high-advantage state ends, initialization means capable of executing initialization processing for initializing various information used in the high-advantage state function),
The feature GD3, wherein the remaining area and the excess area are subject to the initialization process by the initialization means, while the fixed area is not subject to the initialization process by the initialization means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area and the excess information stored in the excess area are initialized at the end of the high advantage state, while the confirmation information stored in the confirmation area is not initialized. Since it is not targeted, the confirmed information can be inherited until after the end of the high advantage state. In other words, as described in feature GD2, since the finalized information is information on the remaining number that cannot be used during the high-advantage state, even if it is not subject to initialization processing at the end of the high-advantage state, the initial It is considered that it does not contradict the significance of providing the heat treatment. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, the game progress in the high-advantage state and the low-advantage state is optimized, such as taking over the fixed information from the high-advantage state to the low-advantage state and using it for the game performance during the low-advantage state. can be achieved.

Feature GD5. When the second specifying means specifies that the second specifying condition is satisfied and the excess information is not stored in the excess area, the fixed information storage means stores the excess information in the remaining number area. Among the remaining numbers, the remaining number corresponding to the number of games specified as exceeding the upper limit number of games is stored as confirmation information in a confirmation area different from the remaining number area and the excess area. The gaming machine according to feature GD3 or feature GD4.

According to the above configuration, when it is predicted that the maximum number of games will be reached, if the excess information is not stored, the remaining number corresponding to the excess number of games from the remaining number information of the first information is used as the confirmed information. remembered. In other words, when it is predicted that the number of games will reach the maximum number of games, it may be predicted that the number of increases and decreases will reach the maximum number of increases before that, or it may not be predicted. The above arrangement provides for storage of deterministic information in situations where no prediction is made. With such a configuration, the existence of the definite area is more clarified, and the excess area that stores the excess information is a temporary storage area before storing the definite information in the definite area. This makes it possible to emphasize the advantage of temporary storage in the excess area described in feature GD1.

Feature GD6. The definite information stored in the definite area by the definite information storage means is based on the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area or based on the excess information stored in the excess area. The gaming machine according to feature GD5, characterized by comprising determination means capable of determining whether or not (a function of executing processing for determining whether or not there is a second excess flag by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a plurality of roots such as remaining number information in the remaining number area and excess information in the excess area exist as the roots of the confirmation information stored in the confirmation area, the roots of the confirmation information are determined by the determination means. Since it is possible to distinguish after the fact, for example, the confirmed information whose roots are the balance information and the confirmed information whose roots are the excess information are treated differently (different benefits are given, advantages are different, etc.) It is possible to realize a playability that utilizes the difference in roots, such as causing an event.

Feature GD7. A first process is executed based on the determination by the determining means that the confirmation information stored in the confirmation area is based on the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area. a first process executing means (a function of executing a sixth special notification process based on the total number of eliminated games TEG when the second excess flag is not set by the main controller 101);
By the determination means, the determination information stored in the determination area, based on the determination that it is based on the excess information stored in the excess area, a second process different from the first process a second process execution means for executing the second process (a function of executing a sixth special notification process based on the total number of eliminated games TEG when the second excess flag is set by the main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to feature GD6, characterized by comprising:

The above configuration is a specific configuration for clarifying the function of feature GD6.

Feature GD8. It is set so that the player is more likely to benefit when the first process is performed by the first process execution means than when the second process is performed by the second process execution means. The gaming machine according to feature GD7, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, when the excess information is temporarily stored and then stored as the fixed information, after the increase/decrease number is predicted to reach the upper limit increase number, it is predicted that the upper limit number of games will be reached. In the case where the remaining number information is stored as fixed information as it is without being stored as excess information, it is the case that the upper limit number of games is reached before the prediction that the upper limit increase number will be reached. This is the case when a prediction is made. In other words, in a high advantage state, especially a specific high advantage state, if you receive a lot of payouts in a small number of games, it is easy to predict that the number of remaining games will reach the upper limit increase number. The smaller the payout in the high advantage state), the more likely it is that the upper limit number of games will be reached before the upper limit increase number is reached. Moreover, if the prediction that the upper limit number of games will be reached is made before the prediction that the upper limit increase number will be reached, there is a high possibility that the upper limit number of games will be reached without reaching the upper limit increase number. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the process (first process) when the prediction that the upper limit number of games will be reached is performed before the prediction that the upper limit increase number will be reached is performed when the upper limit increase number is reached. By making it easier for the player to be more advantageous than the processing (second processing) when it is predicted that the upper limit number of games will be reached after the prediction of, the game paid out during the high advantage state It may be possible to compensate for differences in the number of media with differences in their advantages.

Feature GD9. Increasing means (function for executing processing to add the number of games by main controller 101) capable of executing processing for increasing the specific high advantage state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined increase condition in the specific high advantage state and,
A first increase notification means (function for executing additional notification processing by the main control unit 101 or the display control device 81) capable of executing an increase notification corresponding to the increase processing by a predetermined notification means and,
When the specific storage means stores the remaining number information in the remaining number area based on the excess information stored in the excess area, the increase notification can be performed by a predetermined notification means. A second increase notification means (function for executing the processing of step S14317 by the main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features GD1 to GD8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the increase condition is satisfied, the increase processing is performed and the increase notification is generated. If the remaining number information becomes specific information before reaching the upper limit increase number even though it is stored as information, the remaining number information is re-stored in the remaining number area and an increase notification is generated. By doing so, for example, when notification corresponding to the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area (for example, notification of the number of remaining games) is being performed, It is possible to resolve the inconsistency in reporting with a configuration that is relatively less likely to give a sense of discomfort.

Feature GD10. As game states, a low-advantage state (normal section) and a high-advantage state (for example, attack mode in the advantageous section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set.
Payout means (payout device 53) for paying out game media according to the result of each game;
In the high-advantage state, a predetermined termination condition of the high-advantage state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, or the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, Remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number until the remaining payout number or the increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or the increase number reaches the set number is established in a predetermined remaining number area. information storage means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
a remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number corresponding to the remaining number information stored by the remaining number information storage means (for example, a function of executing the section display second process by the main controller 101);
Normal end means for ending the high-advantage state and transitioning to the low-advantage state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means A function that executes processing to end the advantageous section without being established) and
The increase/decrease number, which is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in a predetermined state (advantage interval) including the high advantage state and the number of game media used in each game, is set in advance. The highly advantageous state is terminated based on the establishment of a first specific condition including reaching a predetermined upper limit increase number, regardless of the remaining number information stored by the remaining number information storage means. First specific end means for transitioning to the low-advantage state (processing for forcibly terminating the advantageous interval based on the fact that the advantageous interval increase/decrease number ZM reaches the upper limit increase number in the second interval display processing by the main controller 101) function) and
an increase processing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main controller 101) capable of executing the process of increasing the high advantage state based on the establishment of a predetermined increase condition;
expected increase/decrease number grasping means for grasping the expected increase/decrease number of game media that can be expected when the game increased by the increase process is completed (function for executing the remaining number management process by the main controller 101);
When the sum of the expected increase/decrease number and the increase/decrease number up to that point exceeds the upper limit increase number, the excess information corresponding to the excess amount is displayed in an excess area (extinction preparation game) different from the remaining area. Excess storage means (function for executing the processing of step S14407 by the main controller 101) stored in the number EJG);
with
wherein the excess information stored in the excess area is deleted when the high advantageous state is terminated by the first specific termination means;
A case where the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area becomes specific information corresponding to a specific number that triggers termination processing by the normal termination means, and the excess information is stored in the excess area. If there is, a specific storage means (function for executing redistribution processing by the main controller 101) for storing the remaining number corresponding to the excess information in the remaining number area as the remaining number information;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low. Since there are cases where the game ends when the number of increased or decreased game media paid out in a predetermined state including a high advantage state reaches the upper limit increase number, the degree of advantage in the high advantage state may be extremely increased. suppressed. In a high-advantage state, a so-called extra process such as an increase process may occur based on the fulfillment of the increase condition, and when the increase process is performed, the amount of game media that can be expected when the game corresponding to the increase process is consumed. If the expected increase/decrease number and the previous increase/decrease number exceed the upper limit increase number, the excess information corresponding to the excess amount is stored in the remaining number area where the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number is stored. Stored in different excess areas. By storing the excess information in an area different from the area in which the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number is stored in this way, the game characteristics using the excess amount (information stored in the excess area) can be easily realized, and the processing configuration can be simplified in order to improve the interest of the high-advantage state in which the upper limit increase number is defined. Moreover, the excess information stored in the excess area is configured to be erased when the upper limit increase number is reached and terminated. Since the remaining number area that is always used is a separate area, it prevents the occurrence of processing errors such as erasing when the upper limit increase number is not reached, and reduces the risk that the player suffers due to the error. It becomes possible to

In addition, when excess information is stored in such an excess area, depending on the progress of each game, even if the high advantage state stored in the remaining number area is consumed, the amount of game media increases or decreases. It is conceivable that the number does not reach the upper limit increase number. Therefore, in such a case, the excess information stored in the excess area is stored again in the remaining number area as the remaining number information. By doing so, while suppressing the loss of the player due to the processing error as described above, even though the increase processing has been performed, the implementation of the high advantage state is restricted accordingly. It is possible to preferably avoid the event of being harassed.

It should be noted that the features GD1 to GD9 may be applied individually or in combination to the feature GD10.

<Characteristic GE group>
Feature GE1. As the game state, a low-advantage state (normal section) and a high-advantage state (advantage section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set.
As a state included in the high-advantage state, a specific high-advantage state (e.g., attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than other states (e.g., challenge mode) in the high-advantage state is set;
Predetermined conditions for ending the specific high advantage state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and in the configuration of number management, the number of remaining payouts or increase a remaining number grasping means (advantageous interval remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the number becomes 0, or the payout number or the increase number reaches the set number) is established;
Normal termination means for terminating the specific high advantage state and transitioning to the low advantage state based on the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means. A function that executes processing to end the advantageous section without satisfying the conditions),
Remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means can be notified by a predetermined notifying means. function to execute processing for notification) and
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, when a predetermined specific condition (upper limit increase number of 2400) is established, the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state is terminated. specific termination means for transitioning to the low advantageous state (processing for forcibly terminating the advantageous interval based on the fact that the advantageous interval increase/decrease number ZM reaches the upper limit increase number in the second interval display processing by the main controller 101) functions to perform) and
When the high-advantage state is terminated by the specific termination means, the notification remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number information notified by the remaining number notification means (for example, the main controller 101 executes the processing of step S14803 function) and
Specific event execution means (for example, a function of executing the seventh special notification process by the main controller 101) that can cause a specific event that can be beneficial to the player based on the result of grasping by the remaining notification number grasping means )and,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high-advantage state includes a specific high-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is even higher. In the included configuration, the specific high advantageous state may be terminated based on the number of remaining specific high advantageous states, or may be terminated based on the establishment of a specific condition. Extremely increasing the advantage of the high-advantage state is suppressed. If a specific condition is met, the high advantage state will end regardless of the number of remaining special high advantage states, and if the remaining number is notified before the specific conditions are met and ended. However, there is a possibility that the player will have the impression that the reported remaining number has been intentionally deleted and that it has been exploited, and there is concern that the desire to play will decrease. On the other hand, if the high-advantage state is terminated after the reported remaining number is used up, the significance of providing a forced termination condition such as a specific condition cannot be secured at all, and the remaining number will be notified. Even if it were not, it would not meet the needs of players who would be highly interested in the persistence of high advantage conditions. Therefore, as in the above configuration, it is configured to terminate the high advantageous state when a specific condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not it is notified, and to create a configuration that causes a specific event according to the remaining number of the notified amount. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can avoid the player's desire to play and respond to the various needs of the player.

The "specific condition" may be expressed as "a specific condition set as a termination condition for the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state".

Feature GE2. Provided with payout means (payout device 53) for paying out game media according to the result of each game,
The specific condition is a predetermined increase/decrease number that is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the high advantage state and the number of game media used in each game. It is established based on reaching the upper limit increase number,
The gaming machine according to feature GE1, wherein the specific event executing means can present information that can be beneficial to the player as the specific event.

According to the above configuration, given the premise of the gaming machine that game media are paid out as a result of playing a game and an increase in game media is expected, the increase/decrease in the number of game media does not reach the upper limit increase. It can be said that it is the ultimate goal of a highly advantageous state. In other words, even if the end is made by the specific ending means regardless of the remaining number of the specific high advantage state in the high advantage state, if the increase/decrease number of the game media reaches the upper limit increase number, the target of the high advantage state and that the player would be fully satisfied even if the high-advantage state were terminated without using up the reported balance. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the specific event that is generated based on the remaining number of notifications is limited to the presentation of information that can be beneficial to the player, and the advantage level rises too much by generating such a specific event. It is possible to prevent

Feature GE3. The remaining number ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means corresponds to the number of games that can be executed in the specific high advantage state,
The gaming machine according to feature GE2, wherein the remaining number information reported by the remaining number reporting means corresponds to the number of games.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature GE2 is made clearer. In other words, the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means corresponds to the number of games remaining in the specific high advantage state. The high advantage state is forcibly ended regardless of the number of remaining games in the specific high advantage state. Then, the specific event executing means executes, as a specific event, presentation of information that can be beneficial to the player based on information corresponding to the number of remaining games notified at the time of forced termination. By clarifying in this way, the purpose of the game is to expect an increase in game media as a result of each game, and the configuration of the feature GE1 that compensates for the contradiction in the notification during the game with a specific event, It is more clearly understood that the balance of

Feature GE4. Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, a specific situation grasping means (executing the remaining number management processing by the main controller 101) capable of grasping that the specific condition is satisfied ex post facto function) and
Specific situation notification means (eighth special notification by main controller 101) capable of executing specific situation notification corresponding to the specific situation grasped by the specific situation grasping means by a predetermined notification means function to execute processing for
The gaming machine according to any one of features GE1 to GE3, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when a specific situation arises in which a forced termination condition such as a specific condition is likely to be satisfied after the fact, the specific situation notification is performed by the predetermined notification means, so that the player is notified of the specific situation. can be grasped, and it is possible to grasp that a specific event occurs when a specific condition is established based on the remaining number information notified by the remaining number notification means. Then, for example, if the configuration is such that the greater the remaining number corresponding to the notified remaining number information, the more advantageous specific event occurs, when the specific situation notification is performed, the player will It is conceivable that the user wishes to satisfy the specific condition without using up the remaining number corresponding to the number information as much as possible. By doing so, after the specific situation is established, the remaining number is not simply consumed until the specific condition is established, but the fun of the game is added until the specific condition is established, and the amusement of the game is improved.

Feature GE5. A payout means (payout device 53) for paying out game media according to the result of each game is provided,
The specific condition is a predetermined increase/decrease number that is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the high advantage state and the number of used game media used in each game. It is established based on reaching the upper limit increase number,
As a result of each game in the high advantage state, a first result in which a first number of game media can be paid out (for example, a strong cherry combination in which three medals are paid out) and a number larger than the first number are displayed. The gaming machine according to feature GE4 is provided with a second outcome in which a second number of game media can be paid out (for example, a bell combination in which nine medals are paid out).

According to the above configuration, the specific condition is satisfied when the number of game media increases or decreases during the high advantage state reaches the upper limit increase number. If the aim is to establish the above, it is considered that the game is played while expecting that the result of the game will be the second result with a large number of payouts. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest in the game after the specific situation occurs.

Feature GE6. When the high advantage state is ended by the specific end means, the specific event executing means is more advantageous for the player as the remaining number information reported by the remaining number reporting means corresponds to a larger remaining number. The gaming machine according to feature GE4 or feature GE5, characterized in that it has a configuration capable of causing a specific event.

According to the above configuration, it is advantageous to establish the specific condition as soon as possible after the specific situation is reached and the specific situation is notified. By doing so, the player's feeling of not wanting to end the high-advantage state can be switched to the completely opposite goal of wanting to quickly end the high-advantage state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably enhance the playability in a highly advantageous state in which a forced termination condition such as a specific condition is set.

Feature GE7. When the high advantage state is ended by the specific end means, the specific event execution means is more advantageous to the player as the remaining number information reported by the remaining number reporting means corresponds to a smaller remaining number. The gaming machine according to feature GE4 or feature GE5, characterized in that it has a configuration capable of causing a specific event.

According to the above configuration, it is advantageous to delay the establishment of the specific condition as much as possible after the specific situation is reached and the specific situation is notified. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the high-advantage state to the end, and it is possible to favorably enhance the playability in the high-advantage state in which forced termination conditions such as specific conditions are set.

Feature GE8. When the specific event execution means terminates the high advantage state by the specific termination means and the remaining number information by the remaining number notification means is notification corresponding to a predetermined special number, so The gaming machine according to any one of features GE4 to GE7, characterized in that it has a configuration capable of producing a specific event that is advantageous to the player as compared to a case where the game machine is not.

According to the above configuration, after the specific situation is reached and the specific situation notification is performed, if the specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the remaining number corresponding to the remaining number notification is a special number, it is more advantageous than in the other case. In other words, for example, if the special number is a sharp number, it is advantageous to forcibly terminate the program while the sharp number is being notified. By doing so, in the game from the specific situation until the specific condition is satisfied, the player can adjust the game operation so that the specific condition is satisfied with the special number as much as possible, or wish to do so. It can be considered that the game progresses through the game, and the playability under the specific situation can be greatly improved.

Feature GE9. Increasing means (function for executing processing to add the number of games by main controller 101) capable of executing processing for increasing the specific high advantage state based on the establishment of a predetermined increase condition in the specific high advantage state and,
Increase notification corresponding to the execution of the increase process can be performed by a predetermined notification means (function for executing additional notification processing by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81);
A specifying means (for example, , a function of executing the processing of step S13301 by the main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features GE1 to GE8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the increase processing is performed as the so-called extra processing for increasing the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state, it is determined whether or not the specific condition as the forced termination condition of the high advantageous state is satisfied by the increasing processing. identified. By doing so, if the high advantageous state is forcibly terminated anyway, the notification based on the increase processing is not performed, or the increase processing is not reflected in the notification of the remaining number information by the remaining number notification means. It is possible to prevent the player from being overjoyed by, for example, doing so, and it is possible to reduce as much as possible the chances of a specific event occurring at the time of forced termination by the specific termination means. Further, if it is assumed that a specific event occurs at the time of forcible termination by the specific termination means, if it is specified that the specific condition is satisfied by the increase processing as described above, it is possible that the specific event will occur due to the forced termination. It is also possible to inform the user to expect the game, and it is possible to break away from the game property of simply increasing the remaining number and use it to create a new game property.

Feature GE10. The gaming machine according to feature GE9, wherein the increase notification means can adjust the increase in the remaining number to be notified based on the increase processing, according to the identification result of the identification means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to adjust the increment to be notified based on the increase processing depending on whether the forced termination condition such as the specific condition is satisfied. Making the player happy by not announcing the increment that exceeds the remaining number that satisfies the condition, or determining the information on the increment to be notified in relation to the increment that causes the specific condition to occur, etc. It is possible to prevent the player from doing so, or to entertain the player by utilizing the increase in the balance of the undigested amount.

Feature GE11. The increase notification means is
A first means for executing the increase notification based on the fact that the increase processing has been performed (a function of executing processing for performing the addition notification as an immediate addition notification by the display control device 81);
Second means for executing the increase notification based on the fact that the remaining number information notified by the remaining number notification means has become predetermined information (executing the process of performing the addition notification as the subsequent addition notification by the display control device 81 function) and
with
Characteristic GE9 characterized in that it is possible to select which of the first means and the second means to perform the increase notification corresponding to the current increase process based on the identification result by the identification means. Or the gaming machine according to feature GE10.

According to the above configuration, an increase notification is performed based on the fact that the increase processing has been performed, so-called immediate ride notification, and an increase notification is performed based on the remaining number information by the remaining number notification means becoming predetermined information. In a configuration with a so-called post-additional notification, when it is specified that a specific condition is established ex post facto, immediate addition notification or post-additional notification is selected as the current addition notification (increase notification). By doing so, in a configuration in which the success or failure of the specific condition may be overturned by the subsequent game situation or the like, by postponing the increase notification, the player is made happy or not pleased. By doing so, it is possible to improve the fun of the game using the relationship with the remaining number information.

Feature GE12. Even if it is specified in advance that the specific condition is satisfied by the specifying means, the high advantage state may be terminated without the specific condition being satisfied depending on the subsequent game situation. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features GE9 to GE11.

According to the above configuration, even if it is specified that the specific condition will be satisfied in the future, the high advantage state may end without the specific condition being satisfied depending on the subsequent game situation. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which the increase processing is not performed during the increase processing, the player suffers a great disadvantage if the specific condition is not satisfied. On the other hand, as described in the feature GE9 and the like, it is configured to only specify whether or not the specific condition is satisfied in the future, and the increase processing itself is performed, and the configuration is adjusted on the notification side. If it is set as (if a specific event is caused by the amount that has been notified, or if it is not notified), while avoiding the inconvenience that the increased processing amount disappears, the specific condition is set after the fact It is possible to prevent the game from giving a sense of incongruity even if the game is not established.

Feature GE13. As game states, a low-advantage state (normal section) and a high-advantage state (attack mode, etc. in an advantageous section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set.
In the high-advantage state, a predetermined termination condition of the high-advantage state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, Remaining number grasping means (advantageous interval remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining payout number or the increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or the increase number reaches the set number) is established;
Normal end means for ending the high-advantage state and transitioning to the low-advantage state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means A function that executes processing to end the advantageous section without being established) and
Remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means can be notified by a predetermined notifying means. function to execute processing for notification) and
Regardless of the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means, when a predetermined specific condition (upper limit increase number of 2400) is met, the high advantage state is ended and the low advantage state is entered. and specific end means (a function of forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on the fact that the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM reaches the upper limit increase number in the section display second process by the main controller 101);
When the high-advantage state is terminated by the specific termination means, the notification remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number information notified by the remaining number notification means (for example, the main controller 101 executes the processing of step S14803 function) and
Specific event execution means (for example, a function of executing the seventh special notification process by the main controller 101) that can cause a specific event that can be beneficial to the player based on the result of grasping by the remaining notification number grasping means )and,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low. Since there are cases in which the process ends based on the establishment of a specific condition, the advantage of the high-advantage state is prevented from being extremely increased. When a specific condition is met, the game ends regardless of the number of remaining high-advantage states. , there is a possibility that the reported remaining number is intentionally deleted, giving the impression that it has been exploited, and there is a concern that the desire to play will decrease. On the other hand, if the high-advantage state is terminated after the notified remaining number is used up, the significance of providing a forced termination condition such as a specific condition is not guaranteed at all, and the remaining number is notified. Even if it were not, it would not meet the needs of players who would be highly interested in the persistence of high advantage conditions. Therefore, as in the above configuration, it is configured to terminate the high advantageous state when a specific condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not it is notified, and to create a configuration that causes a specific event according to the remaining number of the notified amount. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can avoid the player's desire to play and respond to the various needs of the player.

The "specific condition" may also be expressed as "a specific condition set as a condition for ending a predetermined state (advantageous section) including the highly advantageous state".

Moreover, each configuration shown in the features GE1 to GE12 may be applied to the feature GE13 individually or in combination.

In this case, for example, in the feature GE2, "a payout means (payout device 53) for paying out game media according to the result of each game is provided;
The specific condition is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in a predetermined state (advantage zone) including the high advantage state and the number of game media used in each game. It is established based on a certain increase/decrease number reaching a predetermined upper limit increase number,
The specific event executing means can present information that can be beneficial to the player as the specific event." It is the same when applying.

<Characteristic GF group>
Features GF1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main controller 101) capable of executing payout of game media in a number corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal game state and a first specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode etc.) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (for example, attack mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states (for example, challenge mode) in the first specific game state is set. and
In the normal game state, a first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery to determine whether to transition to the first specific game state (executing a lottery for transition to the challenge mode in the first specific role process by the main controller 101) function) and
The first specific transition means (main controller 101 A function that executes processing to shift to challenge mode in the winning result response processing by),
Second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery for determining whether or not to transition to the second specific game state (function for executing a lottery for transition to the attack mode in the first specific winning process by the main controller 101);
Second specific transition means (main controller 101 A function to execute processing for shifting to attack mode in the winning result response processing by),
In the second specific game state, a predetermined termination condition of the second specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and the number of games is managed). In the configuration of (1), the first grasping means for grasping the remaining number information corresponding to the number of remaining games until the remaining payout number or the increase number becomes 0, or the payout number or the increase number reaches the set number) is established ( Advantageous section remaining game number ZG),
a second grasping means (advantageous interval game number AG) for grasping execution information corresponding to the number of executed games in the first specific gaming state;
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, the normal end means for shifting the second specific game state to the normal game state (the normal end condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101 A function that executes the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment of
Based on the execution information ascertained by the second ascertaining means becoming information corresponding to a predetermined maximum number of games, regardless of the remaining number information ascertained by the first ascertaining means, First specific end means for shifting the first specific game state including the second specific game state to the normal game state (function for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second process by the main controller 101 )and,
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, a predicted increase or decrease in the number of game media to be increased or decreased in the second specific game state is calculated before the game corresponding to the remaining number information is executed. Predictable prediction means (function for executing remaining sheet management processing, first adjustment processing, second adjustment processing, etc. by main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the number corresponds to the lottery result, a first specific game state is provided in which a player is likely to be more advantageous than a normal game state. Since a more advantageous second specific game state is provided as a state included in the first specific game state, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed at. A game property premised on the state transition that is advantageous to the game is realized, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of interest.

These first specific game state and second specific game state are terminated based on the number of remaining games (remaining number information) until the end condition of the second specific game state, and the number of executions of the first specific game state is When the upper limit number of times is reached, it is set to end regardless of the remaining number of the second specific game state. This avoids inconveniences such as an increase in the number of game media exceeding the player's expectations and a player's difficulty in finishing the game.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the increase/decrease in the number of game media during the second specific game state is predicted based on the number of remaining games in the second specific game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to play the game while grasping how much more will be paid out in relation to the number of remaining games in the second specific game state. It helps to improve the game playability during the state, and it is possible to preferably improve the game playability.

Feature GF2. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main controller 101) capable of executing payout of game media in a number corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal game state and a first specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode etc.) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (for example, attack mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states (for example, challenge mode) in the first specific game state is set. and
In the normal game state, a first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery to determine whether to transition to the first specific game state (executing a lottery for transition to the challenge mode in the first specific role process by the main controller 101) function) and
The first specific transition means (main controller 101 A function that executes processing to shift to challenge mode in the winning result response processing by),
Second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery for determining whether or not to transition to the second specific game state (function for executing a lottery for transition to the attack mode in the first specific winning process by the main controller 101);
Second specific transition means (main controller 101 A function to execute processing for shifting to attack mode in the winning result response processing by),
In the second specific game state, a predetermined termination condition of the second specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and the number of games is managed). In the configuration of (1), the first grasping means for grasping the remaining number information corresponding to the number of remaining games until the remaining payout number or the increase number becomes 0, or the payout number or the increase number reaches the set number) is established ( Advantageous section remaining game number ZG),
a second grasping means (advantageous interval game number AG) for grasping execution information corresponding to the number of executed games in the first specific gaming state;
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, the normal end means for shifting the second specific game state to the normal game state (the normal end condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101 A function that executes the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment of
Based on the execution information ascertained by the second ascertaining means becoming information corresponding to a predetermined maximum number of games, regardless of the remaining number information ascertained by the first ascertaining means, First specific end means for shifting the first specific game state including the second specific game state to the normal game state (function for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second process by the main controller 101 )and,
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, a predicted increase or decrease in the number of game media to be increased or decreased in the second specific game state is calculated before the game corresponding to the remaining number information is executed. Predictable prediction means (function for executing remaining sheet management processing, first adjustment processing, second adjustment processing, etc. by main controller 101);
Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, correction means (first adjustment processing to third adjustment processing by the main controller 101, correction processing by the main controller 101, correction A function to execute the remaining number management processing after the remaining number management processing and the prediction condition change processing based on the
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the number corresponds to the lottery result, a first specific game state is provided in which a player is likely to be more advantageous than a normal game state. Since a more advantageous second specific game state is provided as a state included in the first specific game state, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed at. A game property premised on the state transition that is advantageous to the game is realized, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of interest.

These first specific game state and second specific game state are terminated based on the number of remaining games (remaining number information) until the end condition of the second specific game state, and the number of executions of the first specific game state is When the upper limit number of times is reached, it is set to end regardless of the remaining number of the second specific game state. This avoids inconveniences such as an increase in the number of game media exceeding the player's expectations and a player's difficulty in finishing the game.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the increase/decrease in the number of game media during the second specific game state is predicted based on the number of remaining games in the second specific game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to play the game while grasping how much more will be paid out in relation to the number of remaining games in the second specific game state. It helps to improve the playability during the state. However, the predicted increase/decrease number may differ greatly from the actual increase/decrease number depending on the lottery result of each game and the stop mode of each game. Therefore, by enabling the correction processing of the predicted increase/decrease number, it is possible to reduce the possibility of contradiction due to prediction error in the game using the predicted increase/decrease number, and to preferably improve the game playability. Become.

Feature GF3. The prediction means uses the maximum expected payout number that can be expected per game to predict the maximum value of the predicted increase/decrease number (maximum number corresponding to the maximum number in the first adjustment process by the main controller 101). A gaming machine according to feature GF1 or feature GF2, characterized by comprising a function of executing a prediction process using the increase/decrease number MM.

According to the above configuration, the predicted increase/decrease number becomes the maximum value, and the actual increase/decrease number does not exceed the maximum value. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience caused by exceeding.

Feature GF4. A predetermined payout result (for example, a bell) to be paid out of game media by the payout means is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means,
The payout means has a specific payout result in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific payout result with the highest winning probability in the state of stay among the predetermined payout results, and a specific payout result corresponding to the specific payout result is placed in the valid position. A specific number of game media is paid out based on the stoppage of the combination of symbols,
The prediction means is means capable of predicting the predicted increase/decrease number using the expected increase/decrease number of each game as the specific number (the maximum increase/decrease number MM corresponding to the main combination number in the first adjustment process by the main controller 101 is A gaming machine according to any one of features GF1 to GF3, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of making a prediction using the

According to the above configuration, a so-called main combination is used as the specific payout result with the highest winning probability, and prediction of increase/decrease is performed assuming that the main combination is won every game. Prediction In predicting the increase/decrease, for example, as in feature GF3, it is possible to make a prediction assuming that the payout result with the maximum increase/decrease number is won in each game. While it is impossible for the number of increases and decreases to be larger than expected, the winning probability of the payout result that is the maximum number is often set relatively low, and it is predicted that such a payout result will win every game. It may not be realistic. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to predict the largest increase or decrease in the range that can actually occur, increase the usefulness of the prediction result, and reduce the need for correction. It becomes possible.

Feature GF5. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a predetermined payout result (for example, a bell) to be paid out of game media by the payout means and a probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined payout result are higher than those in the normal game state. A transition result (for example, 1st BB) that enables transition to a higher special state is set,
The second expected increase/decrease number that can be expected per game during the special state is larger than the first expected increase/decrease number that can be expected per game during the second specific game state,
When the lottery result by the lottery means during the second specific game state is the transition result, the state before transition until the transition to the special state occurs and the transition to the specific game state after the end of the special state The gaming machine according to any one of features GF1 to GF4, wherein the third expected increase/decrease number expected per game in the post-transition state until the occurrence of is smaller than the first expected increase/decrease number.

According to the above configuration, in predicting the predicted increase/decrease number during the second specific game state, a special state is set in which the expected increase/decrease number increases, and the transition to such a special state is the second specific game state. The difference between the predicted increase/decrease number and the actual increase/decrease number can be large depending on how many times it occurs during the period. On the other hand, if the transition result that can cause the transition to the special state during the second specific game state is elected, the state before the transition until the transition to the special state occurs and after the end of the special state and the second specific The expected increase/decrease number in the post-transition state until the transition to the game state occurs is smaller than the expected increase/decrease number during the second specific game state. In other words, considering the expected increase/decrease number for the pre-transition state and post-transition state, the increase during the special state is offset by the decrease during the pre-transition state and post-transition state, and the prediction during the second specific game state The difference between the increase/decrease number and the actual increase/decrease number can be small.

Feature GF6. A first total increase/decrease number of game media increasing/decreasing in the special state calculated from the average value of the number of continuous games in the special state and the second expected increase/decrease number, and continued games in the pre-transition state and the post-transition state. The sum of the second total increase/decrease number of game media that increases/decreases in the pre-transition state and the post-transition state calculated from the average value of the numbers and the third expected increase/decrease number, and the special state and the pre-transition state and the average value of the number of games continued in the post-transition state, the fourth expected increase/decrease number that can be expected per game is set to be equal to or about the same as the first expected increase/decrease number. The gaming machine according to feature GF5, characterized by:

The above configuration is a specific configuration for more preferably exhibiting the effect of feature GF5.

Feature GF7. Correction means capable of executing correction processing of the predicted increase/decrease number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (function for executing the remaining number management processing based on the establishment of the correction condition by the main controller 101) with
The prediction means is configured to be able to predict the predicted increase/decrease number using an average value of the expected increase/decrease number that can be expected per game in the staying state,
The modifying means can execute the modifying process based on transition from the staying state to a different state or occurrence of a transition event that transition to the different state is permitted. The game machine according to any one of features GF1 to GF6, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the predicted increase/decrease number is predicted using the average value of the expected increase/decrease number in the staying state, and the predicted increase/decrease number is corrected based on the transition to a different state. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the effects of the feature GF1 and the like without going through complicated processing such as predicting the predicted increase/decrease number after predicting the state transition in advance.

Feature GF8. The prediction means is configured to be able to predict the predicted increase/decrease number including the first specific game state,
correction means (prediction condition correction processing by main controller 101: function of executing step S16109) capable of executing correction processing of the predicted increase/decrease number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
Based on the game state shifting to the first specific game state, or the game state shifts to the first specific game state, the state in which the mode notification regarding the operation mode by the stop operation means can be executed Start notification by specific notification means (8th display segment N8) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition including, and end notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the first specific game state Specific game state notification means (function for executing the first section display process and the second section display process by the main control device 101),
with
According to any one of features GF1 to GF7, the correction means can execute the correction processing based on the start of notification of the specific notification means by the specific gaming state notification means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, by providing the specific notification means, it becomes possible to clearly understand whether or not there is a transition to the first specific game state, and at least after the start condition is satisfied, the transition to the first specific game state It is possible to make it difficult to cause an event such as ending the game without knowing that the player is present. Then, the start condition of such a specific notification means includes a state in which the state notification regarding the operation mode by the stop operation means can be executed, and the result of winning may differ depending on the state notification. The increase/decrease in the number of game media in the state may differ greatly before and after the start condition is met. Therefore, if the above-mentioned correction processing is assumed to start the notification of the specific notification means, it is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of notification, so it is relatively easy to determine whether or not the correction processing should be performed. is possible.

Feature GF9. Correction means capable of executing correction processing of the predicted increase/decrease number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (function for executing remaining number management processing based on the establishment of the correction condition by the main controller 101) with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a predetermined payout result (for example, a bell) to be paid out of game media by the payout means and a probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined payout result are higher than those in the normal game state. A transition result (for example, 1st BB) that enables transition to a higher special state is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features GF1 to GF8, wherein the specific condition can be established based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being the transition result.

According to the above configuration, when winning is achieved as a result of transition to a special state in which the probability of obtaining a predetermined payout result is high, the specific condition is established and the predicted increase/decrease number is corrected. In this way, if the correction process is performed when the actual increase/decrease number is greater than the predicted increase/decrease number, or when it is considered certain that it will be, the prediction increase/decrease number is predicted in consideration of the transition result winning in advance. It is possible to reduce the discrepancy between the predicted increase/decrease number and the actual increase/decrease number without using complicated processing such as performing

Feature GF10. Correcting means capable of executing the process of correcting the predicted increase/decrease number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition (function of executing the remaining number management process based on the satisfaction of the correction condition by the main controller 101) with
A predetermined replay result is set as a lottery result by the lottery means, in which a replay that enables execution of the next game without requiring a new game medium is awarded,
As game states, a first re-game state (for example, normal game state, first RT state) and a second re-game state (for example, second RT state, 3rd RT state) are set,
any one of the characteristics GF1 to GF9 characterized in that the specific condition can be established based on the transition from a predetermined game state to the first replay state or the second replay state; The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first re-gaming state and the second re-gaming state with different probabilities of reaching the predetermined re-gaming state are set, it is possible to change from the predetermined game state to the first re-gaming state or the second re-gaming state. When a transition to a game state occurs, that is, when the winning probability of the replay result is different from the previous state, a specific condition is established and the predicted increase/decrease is corrected. Since the replay result permits execution of the next game without requiring new game media, the probability of the replay result greatly affects the total number of increases and decreases in the number of game media during the second specific game state. It is something that can affect In other words, if it is easy to win the replay result, the total number of increases and decreases can naturally increase. Therefore, as in the above configuration, if a configuration is adopted in which correction processing is performed when an event occurs in which the probability of the replay result is different, complicated processing such as taking into consideration the fluctuation of the replay result in advance is not required. Even so, it is possible to reduce the discrepancy between the predicted increase/decrease number and the actual increase/decrease number.

Feature GF11. Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the second specific game state, correction means capable of executing the correction process of the predicted increase/decrease number (remaining number of sheets based on the establishment of the correction condition by the main controller 101 function to execute management processing),
A predetermined replay result is set as a lottery result by the lottery means, in which a replay that enables execution of the next game without requiring a new game medium is awarded,
As the game state, a first re-game state (for example, normal game state, first RT state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined re-game result is different, and a second re-game state (for example, second RT) state, 3rd RT state) are set,
Expected increase/decrease that can be expected per game when the second specific game state is completed in the second replay state rather than when the second specific game state is completed in the first replay state. can be many,
Any one of features GF1 to GF10 characterized in that the specific condition can be established based on the occurrence of transition from a predetermined game state to the second replay state in the second specific game state. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first re-game state and the second re-game state with different probabilities of reaching the predetermined re-game state are set, the second specific game state is extinguished in the second re-game state. It is configured such that the number of expected increase/decrease increases when the game is played, and the game is assumed to be played mainly in the second replay state during the second specific game state. In other words, if for some reason the second specific game state is shifted from the second replay state to another game state, it is conceivable that there may be a difference between the predicted increase/decrease number by the prediction means and the actual increase/decrease number. . Therefore, when shifting to these other game states, the correction process is performed when returning to the second replay state, so that the difference between the predicted increase/decrease number and the actual increase/decrease number is reduced. Correction is possible.

In particular, in the above configuration, the correction process is performed when returning to the second re-game state, not when transitioning to another game state. There is no need to reflect in advance the difference between the number and the actual increase/decrease number in the correction process. In other words, if the configuration is such that correction processing is performed when returning to the second replay state, it is only necessary to correct the actual difference. It is possible to reduce the difference between

Feature GF12. Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the second specific game state, correction means capable of executing the correction process of the predicted increase/decrease number (remaining number of sheets based on the establishment of the correction condition by the main controller 101 function to execute management processing),
Any of the features GF1 to GF11, wherein the specific condition can be established based on a difference between the predicted increase/decrease number by the prediction means and the actual increase/decrease number becoming a predetermined special number. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, if there is a difference between the predicted increase/decrease number and the actual increase/decrease number, the correction process is performed, and there is no need to grasp the transition of the state, etc., and the difference can be corrected more simply. becomes possible.

Feature GF13. Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the second specific game state, correction means capable of executing the correction process of the predicted increase/decrease number (first adjustment process to third adjustment process by the main controller 101 functions to execute),
Increase means (main controller 101 with a function to execute game number addition processing by
The gaming machine according to any one of features GF1 to GF12, wherein the specific condition is established based on the establishment of the increase condition.

According to the above configuration, when the number of remaining games in the second specific game state is increased, that is, a so-called addition occurs, the specific condition is established and the predicted increase/decrease number is corrected. If an addition to the second specific game state occurs, the number of increases or decreases can be increased accordingly. It is possible to implement.

It should be noted that, for example, in a configuration in which a lottery result is provided that allows the transition to a state in which the probability of winning a minor role is high over a plurality of games, such as a so-called bonus state, can be digested. Winning a lottery result that allows transition to the above state during the specific game state can be said to be a result that leads to an increase in the remaining number of the second specific game state. It can be included in the condition being met.

Feature GF14. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main controller 101) capable of executing payout of game media in a number corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal game state and a specific game state (attack mode in an advantageous section, etc.) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
In the normal game state, transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the specific game state (function for executing a lottery for transition to the attack mode in the first specific winning process by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (attack mode in the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 function to execute the process to shift to
In the specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and the number management configuration The first grasping means for grasping the remaining number information corresponding to the number of remaining games until the number of remaining payouts or the number of increased numbers becomes 0 or the number of paid outs or the number of increased numbers reaches the set number of games) is established (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) and
a second grasping means (advantage zone game number AG) for grasping execution information corresponding to the number of games executed in a predetermined gaming state (advantageous section) including the specific gaming state;
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, the normal end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (the normal end condition is established in the section display second process by the main control device 101 A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the fact that
Based on the execution information ascertained by the second ascertaining means becoming information corresponding to a predetermined maximum number of games, regardless of the remaining number information ascertained by the first ascertaining means, A first specific end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (function for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101);
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, it is possible to predict the predicted increase/decrease number of game media that will increase or decrease in the specific game state before the game corresponding to the remaining number information is executed. Prediction means (function for executing remaining sheet management processing, first adjustment processing, second adjustment processing, etc. by main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a specific game state is provided in which a player tends to be more advantageous than a normal game state. In addition to the case of ending based on the number of remaining games (remaining number information) until the end condition of the specific game state is satisfied, if the number of executions of the specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times, the specific game state Since it is set to end regardless of the remaining number, the specific game state continues endlessly, resulting in an increase in game media that exceeds the designer's expectations, and the player is having a hard time finishing the game. inconvenience is avoided.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the increase/decrease number of game media during the specific game state is predicted based on the number of remaining games in the specific game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to play the game while grasping how much more payouts are to be made in relation to the number of remaining games in the specific game state. It helps to improve the playability, and it is possible to preferably improve the game playability.

Feature GF15. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101) capable of executing payout of game media in a number corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal game state and a specific game state (attack mode in an advantageous section, etc.) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
In the normal game state, transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the specific game state (function for executing a lottery for transition to the attack mode in the first specific winning process by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (attack mode in the winning result correspondence processing by the main controller 101 function to execute the process to shift to
In the specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and in the configuration of number management, The first grasping means for grasping the remaining number information corresponding to the number of remaining games until the number of remaining payouts or the number of increased numbers becomes 0 or the number of paid outs or the number of increased numbers reaches the set number of games) is established (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) and
a second grasping means (advantage zone game number AG) for grasping execution information corresponding to the number of games executed in a predetermined gaming state (advantageous section) including the specific gaming state;
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, the normal end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (the normal end condition is established in the section display second process by the main control device 101 A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the fact that
Based on the fact that the execution information ascertained by the second ascertaining means has become information corresponding to a predetermined maximum number of games, regardless of the remaining number information ascertained by the first ascertaining means, A first specific end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (function for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101);
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, it is possible to predict the predicted increase/decrease number of game media that will increase or decrease in the specific game state before the game corresponding to the remaining number information is executed. Prediction means (function for executing remaining sheet management processing, first adjustment processing, second adjustment processing, etc. by main controller 101);
Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, correction means (first adjustment processing to third adjustment processing by the main controller 101, correction processing by the main controller 101, correction A function to execute the remaining number management processing after the remaining number management processing and the prediction condition change processing based on the
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a specific game state is provided in which a player tends to be more advantageous than a normal game state. In addition to the case of ending based on the number of remaining games (remaining number information) until the end condition of the specific game state, if the number of executions of the specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times, the remaining number of the specific game state Since it is set to end regardless of the situation, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an increase in game media that exceeds the designer's expectations due to the endless continuation of the specific game state, and the player's difficulty in finishing the game. It is

Moreover, in the above configuration, the increase/decrease number of game media during the specific game state is predicted based on the number of remaining games in the specific game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to play the game while grasping how much more payouts are to be made in relation to the number of remaining games in the specific game state. Helps improve sexuality. However, the predicted increase/decrease number may differ greatly from the actual increase/decrease number depending on the lottery result of each game and the stop mode of each game. Therefore, by enabling the correction processing of the predicted increase/decrease number, it is possible to reduce the possibility of contradiction due to prediction error in the game using the predicted increase/decrease number, and to preferably improve the game playability. Become.

It should be noted that the features GF1 to GF13 may be applied individually or in combination to the features GF14 and GF15.

<Characteristic GG group>
Features GG1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including challenge mode etc.) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
In the normal game state, transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery for determining whether to transition to the specific game state (function for executing a lottery for transition to the challenge mode in the first specific winning process by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (challenge mode in the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 function to execute the process to shift to
Based on the game state shifting to the specific game state, or based on the game state shifting to the specific game state and a predetermined start condition being established, by specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) Specific game state notification means for starting notification and ending notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state (executing section display first processing and section display second processing by main controller 101 function) and
Advantageous determination means for determining whether or not to cause an advantageous event advantageous to the player in the specific game state (step S15904 and step S16004 in the sign setting process when the main controller 101 wins a duplicate target role in a CM) function) and
with
The specific game state notification means continues the notification by the specific notification means at least until the advantageous event occurs when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a corresponding result that causes the advantageous event. and
If the result of the advantageous determination is a non-corresponding result that the advantageous event does not occur, the extension means for performing the extension processing of the specific game state (precursor setting processing when a duplicate target role is won during CM by the main controller 101 , a gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S15908 or step S16008.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a specific game state is provided in which a player tends to be more advantageous than a normal game state. , or when the start condition is satisfied after that, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the notification by the specific notification means is also terminated. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state. The sense of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who sits on the game table after finishing the game can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game in the specific game state.

Moreover, in the specific game state, there is a case where an advantageous judgment is made as to whether or not an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player occurs, and even if an advantageous event occurs, the notification by the specific notification means is continued. Therefore, the effect of equalization of the game by the specific notification means is ensured while improving the game performance during the specific game state.

However, for example, when an advantageous determination is made just before the end of the specific game state, if the advantageous determination is a corresponding result that an advantageous event occurs, the notification by the specific notification means is continued, while the result of the advantageous determination is a non-corresponding result that an advantageous event does not occur, the notification by the specific notification means ends with the end of the specific game state. There is a possibility that an event that becomes completely obvious from the presence or absence of the continuation of the notification may occur.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the result of the advantageous determination is a non-corresponding result, although the advantageous event is not caused, the extension processing of the specific game state is performed. As a result, as described above, an advantageous determination is made just before the end of the specific gaming state, and even if it becomes a non-corresponding result, the notification by the specific notification means will not end by the amount of the above extension processing. be put off. By doing so, while obtaining the effect of equalizing the game by the specific notification means, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the result of the advantageous determination is completely understood, and the game property during the specific game state is preferably improved. It is possible to plan

In addition, "as a state included in the specific game state, set a special game state (for example, attack mode) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than other states (for example, challenge mode) in the specific game state" , the ``specific game state notification means'' is changed to ``based on the game state shifting to the specific game state, or when the game state shifts to the specific game state and the transition to the special game state is permitted. Specific game state notification means for starting notification by specific notification means based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition including an allowable condition, and ending notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state. Or, "Based on the fact that the game state transitions to the specific game state, or the game state shifts to the specific game state, the notification condition that the winning notification of winning the transition lottery to the special game state is performed Specific game state notification means for starting notification by specific notification means based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition including, and ending notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state You may

Features GG2. When the advantageous determination is made, the advantageous notification means (the display control device 81 for performing the effect during the precursor mode and the continuous effect) that can execute the advantageous notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination by the predetermined notification means function),
The gaming machine according to the feature GG1, wherein the extension means can execute the extension process based on the fact that the advantage notification means is given an advantage notification.

According to the above configuration, when an advantageous determination is made, an advantageous notification corresponding to the result is performed by the predetermined notification means, and a player who is concerned about the result of the advantageous determination is greatly interested in the advantageous notification. become a thing. Then, as described in the above feature GG1, even if the result of the advantageous determination is a non-corresponding result, the extension processing of the specific game state is performed, so that the result of the advantageous determination is determined from the presence or absence of the continuation of the notification of the specific notification means. Therefore, it becomes possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the above-mentioned advantageous notification.

In other words, in a configuration in which the result of an advantage determination is used as an advantage notification, if the result can be fully understood from whether or not the notification of the specific notification means is continued, the degree of attention to the advantage notification will be reduced. Not only can it not be enhanced, but the result of the advantageous judgment is understood to be a non-corresponding result, but the advantageous notification is performed, so that the humorousness of the advantageous notification stands out, and the game production is improved. It is feared that the indifference of In this regard, by applying the configuration of the feature GG1 to the configuration for performing such advantageous notification, as in the above configuration, it is possible to appropriately increase the interest in the game presentation.

Features GG3. The gaming machine according to feature GG2, wherein the extension means is capable of executing the extension processing based on the fact that the advantage notification means has given an advantage notification, regardless of the result of the advantage determination.

According to the above configuration, regardless of the result of the advantageous determination, the notification by the specific notification means is eventually continued. Therefore, the processing configuration of the extension process can be simplified by the amount that does not refer to the determination result of the advantageous determination. planned. On the other hand, since the occurrence of the advantageous notification is set as the execution condition for the extension processing, compared with the configuration in which the extension processing is uniformly performed when an advantageous determination is made, the advantage should not be excessively increased unnecessarily. is also possible.

Features GG4. The advantageous notification means can execute the advantageous notification over a predetermined number of games,
The gaming machine according to feature GG2 or feature GG3, wherein the extension means can execute the extension process according to the number of games for which the advantage notification is given by the advantage notification means.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the advantage notification by the advantage notification means is performed over a plurality of games, and the extension processing is performed according to the number of games in which the advantage notification is performed. By preventing the advantage of the specific game state from becoming excessively high, it is possible to keep the change in the advantage due to the extension process small. Therefore, to the extent that the significance of being non-winning (non-corresponding result) is secured in the advantageous judgment such as whether or not to cause an advantageous event (without increasing the advantage too much), the extension processing of the specific game state is performed. It is possible to configure

Features GG5. Grasping means for grasping the number of remaining games in the specific gaming state when the advantageous notification is started (step S15906, step S15907, step S16006, step S15906, step S16006, step function to execute the processing of S16007),
The gaming machine according to feature GG4, wherein the extension means can execute an extension process corresponding to the number of games obtained by subtracting the number of remaining games grasped by the grasping means from the predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, the specific game state is extended by the amount obtained by subtracting the number of remaining games in the specific game state when the advantage notification is started from the predetermined number of games in which the advantage notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to match the end of the advantageous notification with the end of the specific game state. For example, although the advantageous notification has ended, only the specific game state is extended. In addition, it is possible to eliminate unnecessary extension processing and eliminate the inconvenience that the advantage becomes too high when adjusting the performance. In other words, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the advantage degree becomes too high due to excessive demand for the performance effect.

Features GG6. As the advantageous notification, a first advantageous notification executed over a first predetermined number of games and a second advantageous notification executed over a second predetermined number of games different from the first predetermined number are set. has been
The advantageous notification means is selection means for selecting one advantageous notification from a plurality of types of advantageous notifications including the first advantageous notification and the second advantageous notification. ), and the advantageous notification selected by the selection means can be executed by the predetermined notification means,
GG2 to GG5, characterized in that the extension means can execute extension processing of the specific gaming state according to the number of games selected by the selection means for which the advantageous notification is performed. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the effect is diversified by setting a plurality of types of advantageous information, and even if a plurality of types are set, the extension process is performed according to the number of games corresponding to the plurality of types. Therefore, it is possible to accurately match the situation in which the advantageous notification is performed and the extension of the specific game state.

Features GG7. A first control device (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means, the advantage determination means and the extension means, and a second control device (display control device 81) having the advantage notification means,
The first control device is
notification execution lottery means for determining whether or not to execute the advantageous notification (function for executing lottery processing for the number of precursor games by the main controller 101);
an output means (a function of executing a process of outputting and setting an omen command by the main control device 101) capable of outputting the lottery result of the notification execution lottery means to the second control device;
The gaming machine according to any one of features GG2 to GG6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the first control device having the functions directly linked to the player's profit such as the lottery means, the advantage determination means, and the extension means, and the second control device having the effect function such as the advantage notification means are provided separately. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to divide the functions, prevent a local increase in the processing load, and concentrate the profit-related functions on the first control device side, thereby making it easier to deal with fraudulent acts. , it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player or a game hall suffers a disadvantage due to fraud. In addition, when applying the configuration in which the extension process is triggered by the advantageous notification to a game machine having such a plurality of control devices, as in the above configuration, the presence or absence of the execution of the advantageous notification is managed by the first control device side. If it is configured to output the information to the second control device, for example, it is not necessary to output some information by the advantage notification means from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to ensure the independence of the control device and the second control device, and to suitably realize the extension process while strengthening the anti-fraud measures.

Features GG8. Based on the occurrence of a predetermined extension condition, a second extension means capable of executing the extension processing (addition) of the specific game state (function of executing addition processing such as attack mode by the main control device 101) prepared,
When the extension process is performed by the second extension means, notification (additional notification) of the extension process is performed, and when the extension process is performed by the extension means, the extension process is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features GG1 to GG7, wherein the notification of is not executed.

According to the above configuration, when the extension processing is performed by the second extension means, a so-called additional notification is generated as a notification to that effect. Assuming such a configuration, when the extension processing is performed by the extension means based on the advantageous determination, the additional notification is not generated. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the continuation of the notification by the specific notification means is based on the fact that the result of the advantageous determination is the result of causing an advantageous event. becomes.

Feature GG9. As the specific game state, a high-advantage specific game state (first challenge mode) and a low-advantage specific game state (second challenge mode) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set,
Based on the fact that the extension process is performed by the extension means, the means (the main controller 101 executes the process of step S16008 that can make the specific game state for the extension the low-advantage specific game state function).

According to the above configuration, by setting the extension of the specific game state based on the extension process to the low-advantage specific game state, the advantage of the player unnecessarily rises in order to eliminate the inconvenience of the effect such as the extension process. It is possible to avoid doing so.

Feature GG10. The gaming machine according to feature GG9, wherein the advantage of the low-advantage specific game state is equal to or about the same as the advantage of the normal game state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to postpone the notification end timing of the specific notification means without substantially increasing the advantage.

Feature GG11. As the specific game state, a high-advantage specific game state (attack mode, etc.) and a low-advantage specific game state (challenge mode) are set so that the degree of advantage in the specific game state is relatively high or low,
The low-advantage specific gaming state is a state in which the winning probability or execution frequency of the transition lottery to the high-advantage specific gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state,
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a transition result (first BB, first BB, 2nd BB) is set,
Further, as a lottery result by the lottery means, a duplicate result (for example, strong cherry overlap 1) in which a predetermined specific result overlaps with the transition result and wins, and a duplicate result in which the specific result overlaps the transition result. A special result (specific role) including a non-overlapping result (for example, strong cherry) that does not win is set,
The lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, and transition means (main controller) for transitioning the game state to the transition state based on the fact that the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the valid position. 101 function to execute bonus state processing),
The advantageous determination means is configured to determine whether or not the transfer result is included as the special result as the advantageous determination when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result,
The extension means can execute the extension process based on the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means in the low-advantage specific gaming state being a determination result that the transition result is not included. The gaming machine according to any one of features GG1 to GG10, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the high-advantage specific game state in which the degree of advantage is relatively high in the specific game state, and the low-advantage probability and execution frequency of the lottery for transition to the high-advantage specific game state are higher than in the normal game state. In a configuration in which a specific game state (so-called chance zone) is provided, as a game flow, the normal game state shifts to a low-advantage specific game state, and the low-advantage specific game state transitions to a high-advantage specific game state. is assumed to occur. In such a configuration, players are interested in how to make a transition to a high-advantage specific game state during a low-advantage specific game state. The transition to may function as a priming to the high advantageous specific game state, and in the low advantageous specific game state, the transition to the transition state will occur along with the transition to the high advantageous specific game state Transition result In other words, it is thought that there will be great expectations for a special result and an advantageous judgment will be made, and the degree of attention will be increased for the effect when such an advantageous judgment is made. However, in the low-advantage specific game state, even if an advantageous decision is made as a special result, there is a possibility that the result of the advantageous decision can be completely understood depending on whether or not the notification by the specific notification means is continued. Therefore, when the advantageous determination is made during the low advantageous specific game state and the result does not include the transition result, the low advantageous specific game state is extended and the notification of the specific notification means is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suitably avoid the result from being completely understood by the notification.

Features GG12. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including challenge mode etc.) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
In the normal game state, a transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the specific game state (a function of executing a lottery for transition to the challenge mode in the first specific winning process by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (challenge mode in the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 function to execute the process to shift to
Based on the game state shifting to the specific game state, or based on the game state shifting to the specific game state and a predetermined start condition being established, by specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) Specific game state notification means for starting notification and ending notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state (executing section display first processing and section display second processing by main controller 101 function) and
Advantageous determination means for determining whether or not to cause an advantageous event advantageous to the player in the specific game state (in the sign setting process when the main controller 101 wins a duplicate target role during CM, step S15904 and step function to execute the processing of S16004);
with
The specific game state notification means continues the notification by the specific notification means at least until the advantageous event occurs when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a corresponding result that causes the advantageous event. and
If the result of the advantageous determination is a non-corresponding result that the advantageous event does not occur, the extension means (during the CM by the main controller 101) that performs an extension process for extending the notification continuation game of the specific notification means for a predetermined number of games A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processes of step S15908 and step S16008 in the sign setting process when a duplicate target combination is won.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a specific game state is provided in which a player tends to be more advantageous than a normal game state. , or when the start condition is satisfied after that, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the notification by the specific notification means is also terminated. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state. The sense of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who sits on the game table after finishing the game can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game in the specific game state.

Moreover, in the specific game state, there is a case where an advantageous judgment is made as to whether or not an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player occurs, and even if an advantageous event occurs, the notification by the specific notification means is continued. Therefore, the effect of equalization of the game by the specific notification means is ensured while improving the game performance during the specific game state.

However, for example, when an advantageous determination is made just before the end of the specific game state, if the advantageous determination is a response result that an advantageous event occurs, the notification by the specific notification means is continued, while the advantageous determination is advantageous If it is a non-corresponding result that the event does not occur, the notification by the specific notification means ends with the end of the specific game state. An event that becomes completely obvious from the presence or absence of the continuation of is likely to occur.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the result of the advantage determination is a non-corresponding result, an advantage event is not generated, but an extension process is performed to extend the notification continuation game of the specific notification means for a predetermined number of games. As a result, as described above, an advantageous determination is made just before the end of the specific gaming state, and even if it becomes a non-corresponding result, the notification by the specific notification means will not end by the amount of the above extension processing. be put off. By doing so, while obtaining the effect of equalizing the game by the specific notification means, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the result of the advantageous determination is completely understood, and the game property during the specific game state is preferably improved. It is possible to plan

In addition, "as a state included in the specific game state, set a special game state (for example, attack mode) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than other states (for example, challenge mode) in the specific game state" , the ``specific game state notification means'' is changed to ``based on the game state shifting to the specific game state, or when the game state shifts to the specific game state and the transition to the special game state is permitted. Specific game state notification means for starting notification by specific notification means based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition including an allowable condition, and ending notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state. Or, "Based on the fact that the game state transitions to the specific game state, or the game state shifts to the specific game state, the notification condition that the winning notification of winning the transition lottery to the special game state is performed Specific game state notification means for starting notification by specific notification means based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition including, and ending notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state You may

Note that the features GG1 to GG11 may be applied individually or in combination to the feature GG12.

<Characteristic GH group>
Feature GH1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) that are likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
In the normal game state, transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the specific game state (function for executing a lottery for transition to the challenge mode or attack mode in the first specific winning process by the main controller 101) and,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (challenge mode in the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 and a function to execute processing to shift to attack mode),
Based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition of the specific game state, the normal end means for shifting from the specific game state to the normal game state (the normal end condition is satisfied in the section display second process by the main controller 101 A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the fact that
Based on the game state shifting to the specific game state, or based on the game state shifting to the specific game state and a predetermined start condition being established, by specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) Specific game state notification means for starting notification and ending notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state (executing section display first processing and section display second processing by main controller 101 function) and
with
As the specific game state, a high-advantage specific game state (first challenge mode) and a low-advantage specific game state (second challenge mode) are set so that the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low. ,
The degree of advantage for the player is the same or about the same in the normal game state and the low-advantage specific game state,
Based on the fact that a predetermined first extension condition (additional condition) is established, a first extension means (executing the addition processing of the challenge mode by the main controller 101) capable of executing the extension processing of the high advantage specific gaming state function) and
A second extension condition different from the first extension condition (the affirmative determination in step S16006 by the main control device 101) is satisfied, based on which the extension process of the low-advantage specific gaming state can be executed. Extension means (function for executing the process of step S16008 by main controller 101);
with
The specific game state notification means is
It is possible to continue the notification by the specific notification means in the high advantageous specific game state extended by the first extension means,
A game machine characterized in that it is possible to continue the notification by the specific notification means in the low-advantage specific game state extended by the second extension means.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a specific game state is provided in which a player tends to be more advantageous than a normal game state. , or when the start condition is satisfied after that, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the notification by the specific notification means is also terminated. That is, if the presence or absence of notification of the specific notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state. The sense of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who sits on the game table after finishing the game can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible for all the players to equally enjoy the game in the specific game state.

However, by stipulating the notification by the specific notification means as described above, there may be a problem in the game, for example, whether or not the specific game state is continued is entertained. Specifically, when the specific notification means ends, the notification by the specific notification means ends, so even if the effect such as whether the specific game state continues or not is performed, it will eventually be completed by the notification of the specific notification means. I understand. On the other hand, if the specific game state is continued as long as the effect is being performed, the advantage of the specific game state may become unnecessarily high.

Therefore, as the specific game state, a high-advantage specific game state and a low-advantage specific game state are set so that the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high, and the advantage of the low-advantage specific game state is set normally. By setting to the same degree as the game state and extending the high-advantage specific game state and the case of extending the low-advantage specific game state, the specific notification means can be notified in any case of extension. It is possible to continue (extend) the specific game state without terminating it and not increasing the advantage of the specific game state too much.

It should be noted that ``in the normal game state and in the low-advantage specific game state, the degree of advantage for the player is the same or about the same'' means that ``the number of expected bonuses that can be expected per game in the normal game state. (The number of net increase) and the number of expected privilege grants that can be expected per game in the low-advantage specific game state are the same or about the same."

Feature GH2. The gaming machine according to GH1, wherein the specific game state is the low-advantage specific game state for the part to be extended by the second extending means, and the high-advantage specific game state for the rest.

According to the above configuration, the game played in the low-advantage specific game state is more limited, and the specific game state does not impair the impression that the player is in an advantageous state (high-advantage specific game state). It is possible to expect the effect of extending the game in which the notification of the specific notification means is performed while not increasing the advantage too much.

Feature GH3. The second extension means, based on the establishment of the second extension condition in the high-advantage specific game state, as an extension process of the low-advantage specific game state, from the high-advantage specific game state to the low-advantage specific game The gaming machine according to feature GH2, wherein the extension process is executed so as to shift to the state.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature GH2.

Feature GH4. The second extension means determines whether or not the second extension condition is satisfied based on the fact that the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (overlapping target combination). (a function of executing the processing of step S16006 by the main controller 101),
The establishment determination means determines that, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in a situation where the number of remaining games in the high-advantage specific gaming state is less than a predetermined specific number (prediction game number), the second While it can be determined that the extension condition has been established, if the number of remaining games in the high-advantage specific gaming state is equal to or greater than the specific number and the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result, the second extension condition. The gaming machine according to feature GH2 or feature GH3, wherein it is determined that is not established.

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won in the final stage when the number of remaining games in the high-advantage specific game state is less than the specific number, the low-advantage specific game state can be extended, while the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the specific number. In the case of , the extension processing of the low-advantage specific game state is not performed even if the special result is won. By doing so, even though the configuration is relatively simple, such as performing the extension process according to the result of the game, when the special result is won in a situation where there are still many remaining games in the high-advantage specific game state. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of being unintentionally set to a low-advantage specific game state. In other words, in the configuration that can execute the extension processing based on the special result winning, without using a complicated configuration such as changing the winning probability of special result winning according to the number of remaining games, the high advantageous specific game state It is possible to accurately perform the extension process in the final stage.

Feature GH5. A continuous effect execution means (a function of executing a continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a continuous effect that can be continued over a plurality of games by a predetermined effect means,
The second extending means, when the continuous effect by the continuous effect executing means is executed across the end game of the high advantageous specific game state, the low advantageous specific game assuming that the second extension condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features GH1 to GH4, characterized in that a state extension process can be executed.

According to the above configuration, when the continuous effect by the continuous effect executing means is executed across the end game of the high advantageous specific game state, the extension processing of the low advantageous specific game state is performed. As a result, although the high-advantage specific game state is shifted to the low-advantage specific game state, the continuous performance itself can be executed without straddling the end game of the specific game state. As a result, for example, in the case where the continuous performance is a performance related to the continuity of the specific game state, the notification of the specific notification means ends with the end of the specific game state, and the continuous performance is disabled by the end of the notification. It becomes possible to avoid becoming meaningful.

Feature GH6. Difference game number grasping means for grasping the difference number of games between the number of remaining games in the high-advantage specific gaming state and the number of games in which the continuous effect is continued by the continuous effect executing means (executing the processing of step S16007 by the main controller 101) function),
The second extending means extends the low-advantage specific game state so that the low-advantage specific game state is implemented after the high-advantage specific game state by the number of difference games ascertained by the difference game number-ascertainment means. The gaming machine according to feature GH5, characterized by being capable of executing processing.

According to the above configuration, the low-advantage specific game state is added by the amount of the continuous effect executed after the end of the high-advantage specific game state. It is possible to avoid the event that the specific game state ends before the continuous performance even though the extension process is performed.

Feature GH7. Based on the fact that the extension processing of the specific game state is performed, the extension notification execution means (display control device 81 for performing the additional notification effect by the display control device 81 that can execute the extension notification corresponding to the extension processing by the predetermined notification means function to perform processing) and
When the extension processing of the high-advantage specific game state is performed by the first extension means, while allowing the execution of the extension notification by the extension notification execution means, the low-advantage specific game is performed by the second extension means When the extension processing of the state is performed, means for limiting the execution of the extension notification by the extension notification execution means (function for executing the additional notification non-generating processing by the main control unit 101) is provided. Characterizing A game machine according to any one of features GH1 to GH6.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that a so-called additional notification effect occurs as an extension notification corresponding to the extension processing being performed, and when the extension processing of the highly advantageous specific game state is performed, the addition notification While the performance is generated, since the additional notification performance is prevented from occurring when the extension processing of the low-advantage specific game state is performed, the player does not understand that the extension processing of the low-advantage specific game state is performed. Hateful. By doing so, it is possible to give the impression that the phenomenon in which the notification by the specific notification means is continued is caused by the fact that the number of remaining games in the high-advantage specific game state still exists. It is possible to exhibit the effect of postponing the end of notification by the specific notification means more preferably.

<Characteristic GI group>
Features GI1. As the game state, a low expectation state (normal section) and a high expectation state (advantageous section) in which the degree of expectation for acquiring game media is relatively high and low are set.
Grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions of the high expectation state;
Based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number (1500), the specific end means (main controller) that terminates the high expectation state and shifts to the low expectation state 101 in the section display second processing, a function of executing the processing of ending the advantageous section when the forced termination condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising
As the high expectation state, a first high expectation state (ART such as attack mode) and a second high expectation state (bonus state) in which an increase in game media can be expected in each game, and a decrease in game media in each game can be expected. A third high expectation state (bonus carry-over state that occurs during attack mode, return state) is set,
Setting is made so that the third high-expectation state can exist between the first high-expectation state and the second high-expectation state when the transition from the first high-expectation state to the second high-expectation state occurs. Possible first setting means (function for executing processing to set bonus carryover state by main controller 101);
Setting is made so that when a transition from the second high-expectation state to the first high-expectation state occurs, the third high-expectation state can exist between the second high-expectation state and the first high-expectation state. Possible second setting means (function for executing processing for setting the game state after the bonus state by the main control device 101 to the normal game state);
During the third high expectation state set by the second setting means, it is determined by the first setting means whether or not a specific event in which the number of executions grasped by the grasping means is the upper limit number occurs. 3 specifying means that can be specified when setting the high expectation state (function for executing the processing of step S15810 by the main controller 101);
When the specifying means specifies that the specific event occurs, the second number of continuations (E) of the third high expectation state set by the second setting means is set by the first setting means. 3 third setting means capable of executing addition processing to be added to the first number of continuations (B) of the high expectation state (function of executing the processing of step S15812 by the main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high expectation state and a low expectation state in which the degree of expectation for acquiring game media is relatively high and low, and the high expectation state may be forcibly terminated when the number of executions reaches the upper limit. Therefore, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high expectation state is extremely increased. The high-expectation state includes a first high-expectation state and a second high-expectation state in which the game media can increase in each game, and a third high-expectation state in which the game media can decrease in each game. When transitioning from the first high expectation state to the second high expectation state, the third high expectation state intervenes between the first high expectation state and the second high expectation state, and further from the second high expectation state to the first high expectation state. When a transition to a state occurs, the third high-advantage state can intervene between the second high-expectation state and the first high-expectation state. In such a configuration, in a situation where the number of game media in the third high-expectation state may decrease, if the number of executions reaches the upper limit during the third high-expectation state and the high-expectation state is ended, the high-expectation state is ended. However, in the end, the number of game media will be reduced and the game will end with a slump.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in particular, it is premised on a configuration in which a transition such as the first high expectation state→the third high expectation state→the second high expectation state→the third high expectation state→the first high expectation state occurs. The number of continuations of the third high-expectation state is added to the number of continuations of the third high-expectation state on the front side, and the position (timing) at which the third high-expectation state can exist is made different. By doing so, the high expectation state that was supposed to end after the game media were finally reduced is changed so that the high expectation state ends without reducing the game media, and the number of game media increases. It is possible to prevent the satisfaction of the high-expectation state from being impaired. In this way, by performing the forced termination while utilizing the impression received by the player at the time of the forced termination, there is an effect of suppressing the increase in the advantage due to the forced termination of the high expectation state, and the high expectation state allows the player to It is possible to achieve both the effect of satisfying the sense of satisfaction.

In the above configuration, "remaining number grasping means (advantageous interval remaining game number ZG) for grasping the number of games remaining until a predetermined end condition of the high expectation state is satisfied, and the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Based on the number, normal end means for ending the high expectation state and transitioning to the low expectation state (in the second section display processing by the main controller 101, the advantageous section is ended without the forced termination condition being satisfied) function to execute the process), and the ``specific termination means'' is set to ``the remaining number based on the number of executions grasped by the grasping means reaching a predetermined upper limit number. Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the number grasping means, it may be expressed as "specific end means for ending the high expectation state and shifting to the low expectation state".

Feature GI2. When addition processing by the third setting means is not performed, the high expectation state is terminated by the specific end means in the third high expectation state between the second high expectation state and the first high expectation state. A second grasping means (function for executing the processing of step S15811 by the main controller 101) for grasping the number of continuations of the third high expectation state when the
The gaming machine according to the feature GI1, wherein the third setting means can execute the addition process using the number of continuations grasped by the second grasping means as the second number of continuations.

According to the above configuration, when the third high-expectation state before the second high-expectation state is completed by the first number of continuations and the second number of continuations, the high-expectation state is forcibly terminated in the ending game of the second high-expectation state. . In this way, by setting the forced termination at the end of the second high-expectation state in which an increase in the number of game media can be expected, the configuration is such that the forced termination is performed when the player's sense of satisfaction is at its peak. impression is improved.

Feature GI3. The third high-expectation state set by the second setting means shifts to the first high-expectation state based on a game lottery result becoming a predetermined specific result (first promotion replay). The gaming machine according to feature GI1 or feature GI2, wherein the configuration allows

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the number of continuations of the third high-expectation state that exists after the second high-expectation state changes depending on the lottery result on the gaming machine side, and the player can decide whether to continue the third high-expectation state. The range that can be involved in the number is limited. Therefore, for example, even if the operation mode is devised, there is a high possibility that the high expectation state will be forcibly terminated in a situation where the game media are reduced. If the feature GI1 is applied to such a configuration, it becomes possible for the game machine side to more preferably eliminate the dissatisfaction that the player cannot eliminate no matter how hard he or she tries.

Feature GI4. The first setting means sets the third high-expectation state based on the result of the game lottery becoming a transition result (first BB, second BB) corresponding to the transition to the second high-expectation state. is possible and
The game lottery result is the transition result, and the player performs a transition operation corresponding to the transition result. function to perform state processing) and
If the lottery result of the game is the transition result and the transition to the second high expectation state is not caused by the second transition means in the game, the transition result is transitioned to the second high expectation state. Reservation means that can be reserved until
The game machine according to any one of features GI1 to GI3, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the transition result that triggers the setting of the third high-expectation state on the front side is a result that is reserved until the transition to the second high-expectation state occurs, and the transition to the second high-expectation state is performed by the player. is caused by performing the transition operation, the number of games until the transition to the second high expectation state occurs will differ depending on whether the player performs the transition operation in the third high expectation state. . By ending the third high expectation state as early as possible and shifting to the second high expectation state, the number of game media decreased in the third high expectation state is reduced. In the expectation state, the number of game media decreases depending on the player's operation, and as a result, the number of game media when the high expectation state is forcibly terminated may also change. In this way, on the gaming machine side, the number of game media is not increased or decreased when the number of game media is forcibly terminated when the setting is such that the number of game media is not forcibly terminated while the value is decreasing. By adopting a configuration that can occur, it is possible to arouse the player's desire to play.

It should be noted that the above configuration can also be expressed as, for example, "the number of continuations of the third high expectation state set by the first setting means changes according to the game operation of the player". In this expression, the characteristic GI3 is expressed as "the number of continuations of the third high expectation state set by the second setting means does not change or is difficult to change depending on the game operation of the player".

Feature GI5. The third high-expectation state set by the second setting means shifts to the second high-expectation state based on a game lottery result becoming a predetermined specific result (first promotion replay). is an acceptable configuration, and
The lottery result of the game is the specified result, and the first transition means (RT by the main controller 101) for shifting to the first high expectation state based on the specific operation corresponding to the specified result being performed by the player. function to perform state processing) and
If the lottery result of the game is the specified result, and the first transition means does not cause a transition to the first high expectation state in the game, erasing means (in the main controller 101) capable of erasing the specified result A function that executes processing to clear the winning flag at the end of each game);
The gaming machine according to feature GI4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the third high expectation state on the front side, winning of the transition result is reserved, so whether or not the transition operation corresponding to the transition result is performed has a great influence on the number of continuations of the third high expectation state. On the other hand, in the third high expectation state after the second high expectation state, winning of the specific result is not reserved, so in the third high expectation state, the number of games that win the specific result is greatly related to the number of continuations. will do. With such a configuration, there is room for technical intervention by the player in the third high-expectation state before the second high-expectation state, and conversely, in the third high-expectation state after the second high-expectation state, there is room for technical intervention by the player. It becomes clear that there is little room for technical intervention. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property that further arouses the desire to play the game before the second high expectation state.

Feature GI6. By performing addition processing by the third setting means, in the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state, the high expectation state when the high expectation state is terminated by the specific end means The total number of acquired game media that can be expected in the above is the first branch point at which the game of the first number of continuations is executed, and the number of games of the first number of continuations and the second number of continuations is executed. The gaming machine according to feature GI4 or feature GI5, characterized in that it does not change or does not change easily until the second branch point.

According to the above configuration, while leaving room for technical intervention such as reducing the number of continuations of the third high-expectation state before the second high-expectation state as much as possible to reduce the decrease in game media, In the third high expectation state for the amount added by the third setting means, which is from the execution of one continuous game to the execution of the first continuous number and the second continuous number of games, as early as possible Even if the transition to the second high-expectation state succeeds, the total acquisition number at the forced termination of the high-expectation state is less likely to change. By doing so, it is possible to ensure the significance of adding the second continuation number by the third setting means while arousing the desire to play in the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state.

Feature GI7. In the third high-expectation state before the second high-expectation state, a specific effect execution means (by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific effect (prediction effect, continuous effect) by a predetermined effect means Equipped with a function to execute the processing for performing the production in the omen mode),
The gaming machine according to feature GI6, wherein the specific effect executing means can change the effect mode of the specific effect before and after the first branch point.

According to the above configuration, the player can clearly grasp that the first branch point has been reached by the change in the effect mode of the specific effect. In this way, the player can understand that it is not very meaningful to cause an early transition in subsequent games, and can switch his or her feelings, such as enjoying the specific effect. This makes it easier for an event such as forced termination to occur while the game media are increasing. It is possible to make it easy to digest until it becomes.

Feature GI8. The first setting means sets the effect continuation number of effects executed by a predetermined effect means in the third high expectation state until transition from the first high expectation state to the second high expectation state occurs. set as the first continuation number,
The third setting means sets the effect continuation number as a number obtained by adding the second continuation number to the first continuation number,
The game machine according to any one of features GI1 to GI7, wherein the transition from the third high expectation state to the second high expectation state can occur regardless of the number of continuous effects.

According to the above configuration, when the transition from the second high-expectation state to the first high-expectation state occurs and the third high-expectation state intervenes, the number of continuations set by the first setting means and the third setting means is the number of continuations in the effect, and regardless of the set number of continuations, the transition to the second high expectation state can occur. By doing so, the phenomenon of being forced to digest the number of continuations of the set third high expectation state does not occur, and while ensuring the degree of freedom of the game, it is simple to change the number of continuations of the effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to greatly change the image at the time of forced termination depending on the actual increase or decrease in game media.

Feature GI9. As the game state, a low expectation state (normal section) and a high expectation state (advantageous section) in which the degree of expectation for acquiring game media is relatively high and low are set.
Grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions of the high expectation state;
Based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number (1500), the specific end means (main controller) that terminates the high expectation state and shifts to the low expectation state 101 in the section display second processing, a function of executing the processing of ending the advantageous section when the forced termination condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising
As the high expectation state, a first high expectation state (ART such as attack mode) and a second high expectation state (bonus state) in which an increase in game media can be expected in each game, and a decrease in game media in each game can be expected. A third high expectation state (bonus carry-over state that occurs during attack mode, return state) is set,
Setting is made so that the third high-expectation state can exist between the first high-expectation state and the second high-expectation state when the transition from the first high-expectation state to the second high-expectation state occurs. Possible first setting means (function for executing processing to set bonus carryover state by main controller 101);
Setting is made so that when a transition from the second high-expectation state to the first high-expectation state occurs, the third high-expectation state can exist between the second high-expectation state and the first high-expectation state. Possible second setting means (function for executing processing for setting the game state after the bonus state by the main control device 101 to the normal game state);
During the third high expectation state set by the second setting means, it is determined by the first setting means whether or not a specific event in which the number of executions grasped by the grasping means is the upper limit number occurs. 3 specifying means that can be specified when setting the high expectation state (function for executing the processing of step S15810 by the main controller 101);
a third setting means (function for executing the process of step S15812 by the main controller 101) capable of executing a predetermined specific process when the specific event is specified by the specifying means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high expectation state and a low expectation state in which the degree of expectation for acquiring game media is relatively high and low, and the high expectation state may be forcibly terminated when the number of executions reaches the upper limit. Therefore, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high expectation state is extremely increased. The high-expectation state includes a first high-expectation state and a second high-expectation state in which the game media can increase in each game, and a third high-expectation state in which the game media can decrease in each game. When transitioning from the first high expectation state to the second high expectation state, the third high expectation state intervenes between the first high expectation state and the second high expectation state, and further from the second high expectation state to the first high expectation state. When a transition to a state occurs, the third high-advantage state can intervene between the second high-expectation state and the first high-expectation state. In such a configuration, in a situation where the number of game media in the third high-expectation state may decrease, if the high-expectation state ends when the number of executions reaches a specific number during the third high-expectation state, the high-expectation state ends. Ultimately, the number of game media is reduced and the game ends with a slump.

Therefore, in the above-described configuration, by specifying in advance such a specific event that causes the tail slump and performing a specific process based on the result of the identification, the event that causes the tail slump can be preferably eliminated. Also, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the tail has become slender.

<Characteristic GJ group>
Feature GJ1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101) capable of executing payout of game media in a number corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) that are likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
In the normal game state, a transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the specific game state (a function of executing a lottery for transition to the challenge mode in the first specific winning process by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (challenge mode in the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 and a function to execute processing to shift to attack mode),
The game state shifts to the specific game state, and based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start notification during the state, and the specific Specific game state notification means for ending the notification during the state by turning the specific notification means into the extinguished state based on the end of the game state (section display first processing to section display fourth processing by the main controller 101 functions to perform) and
a first grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions of the specific gaming state;
Based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number, the specific end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (the section by the main controller 101 a function of executing a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the display second process);
a second grasping means (number of games before start MG) for grasping the number of executions of the preliminary state (preliminary section) from the transition to the specific game state to the establishment of the start condition;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a specific game state is provided in which a player tends to be more advantageous than a normal game state. When the start condition is established after shifting to , the notification during the state is started, and when the specific game state ends, the notification during the state ends, so the player can clearly see from the notification during the state the situation in which it is easier to obtain benefits due to the mode notification. For example, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of disadvantages such as ending the game without knowing that the situation has occurred. Moreover, the specific game state can be forcibly terminated when the number of executions reaches the upper limit, and the game balance is optimized without increasing the advantage of the specific game state too much.

However, as described above, after the transition to the specific game state, since it is a configuration in which the notification during the state is started after the start condition is established, in the prior state before the notification during the state is started, The player has no way of knowing how many games remain until the upper limit number, and the player reaches the upper limit number immediately after the state notification is started, and after the state notification is started. , there may be inequality in profits with players who can play a considerable number of games in a specific game state.

Therefore, in the above configuration, since it is configured to be able to grasp the number of games in the pre-state until the start condition is satisfied after the transition to the specific game state, the player is notified of the result of grasping the upper limit number. It is possible to recognize the number of games up to. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the equality of games.

In the above configuration, "remaining number grasping means (advantageous interval remaining game number ZG) for grasping the number of remaining games until a predetermined end condition of the specific gaming state is satisfied, and the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Based on the number, the normal end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (in the second section display process by the main control device 101, the processing for ending the advantageous section without satisfying the forced end condition is executed function) and", the 'specific end means' is set to 'understand the remaining number based on the number of executions ascertained by the first ascertaining means has reached a predetermined upper limit number. It may be expressed as "specific end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state regardless of the remaining number grasped by the means".

In addition, ``as a state included in the specific game state, a special game state (for example, attack mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the specific game state (for example, challenge mode) is set.'' , the ``specific game state notification means'' is specified based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition including a condition that the game state shifts to the specific game state and the transition to the special game state is permitted. Specific game state notification means for starting notification by notification means and ending notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state; Transition to game state Based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition including the notification condition for notification of winning in the lottery, notification by the specific notification means is started, and based on the end of the specific game state It may be expressed as "specific game state notification means for ending the notification by the specific notification means".

Feature GJ2. Characteristic feature GJ1 characterized in that in the preliminary state, the number of game media used in each game tends to be larger than the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the preliminary state. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, even after the transition to the specific game state, in the preliminary state until the start condition is satisfied, subtracting the number of used game media from the number of game media paid out in each game results in a negative value, a so-called net increase. becomes negative. Then, in the prior state, the notification of the specific notification means by the specific game state notification means has not started, and the net increase is also negative, so that the start condition is satisfied after that and the mode notification is generated. Even so, there is a high possibility that the player will end the game without knowing it. In this respect, as in feature GJ1, the number of games in the pre-state until the start condition is satisfied is grasped. It is also possible to grasp that there is a shift to That is, it becomes possible to grasp the pre-state as well as the degree of advantage after the start condition is established, and it is possible to supplement the relationship between the specific game state and the specific game state informing means.

Feature GJ3. The predetermined start condition includes an increase condition that the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the specific game state tends to be greater than the number of used game media used in each game. The gaming machine according to feature GJ1 or feature GJ2, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the predetermined start condition includes an increase condition that subtracting the number of used game media from the number of game media paid out in each game results in a plus, that is, a so-called net increase is plus. Precisely because of such a configuration, the notification by the specific notification means is performed in a situation where a substantial benefit is obtained in the specific game state, and the relevance between the specific game state and the notification of the specific notification means is clarified. be.

On the other hand, it is often the case that the number of remaining games after the start condition is satisfied and the number of executions are grasped and notified, such as the notification of the number of remaining games in an advantageous state, and such notification includes a section where the net increase is negative. If this happens, the player will easily feel that the remaining number and the number of executions have been exploited by the negative section, so the notification of the number of remaining games in the above advantageous state includes the negative section. It would be common to try not to, and if so, the starting conditions would include the increasing conditions.

However, with such a configuration, it is not possible to grasp the relationship with the specific termination means that is forcibly terminated when the upper limit number is reached from the above notification. Since it is considered that the start condition is established after the start condition is satisfied, there is no way to know these in the prior state. Therefore, by applying the invention of feature GJ1 to such a gaming machine, it is possible to play a game while making the player understand information such as profit remaining in the previous state.

Feature GJ4. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function for executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
The predetermined start condition includes a notification condition that allows the mode notification by the mode notification means to be executed,
The specific game state notification means starts notification by the specific notification means assuming that the start condition is satisfied even if the notification condition and the increase condition are satisfied in different games. The game machine according to feature GJ3.

According to the above configuration, a mode notification is performed in which the winning result may differ, the notification condition under which the mode notification can be executed is included in the notification start condition of the specific notification means, and a plurality of conditions such as the notification condition and the start condition are included. is included in the start condition, the success or failure of the notification start condition is relaxed, and the diversification of games is expected. And, precisely because of such a configuration, the number of executions of the preliminary state is likely to change. , the phenomenon that the benefits obtained from the establishment of the start condition to the upper limit number are reduced are likely to occur.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "the specific game state notification means starts notification by the specific notification means assuming that the start condition is satisfied even if the increase condition is satisfied after the notification condition is satisfied. and after the increase condition is satisfied, the notification by the specific notification means is started assuming that the start condition is satisfied even if the notification condition is satisfied."

Feature GJ5. Remaining number grasping means (advantageous section remaining game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number of games until a predetermined end condition of the specific game state is satisfied in the specific game state;
Based on the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means, the normal end means for shifting from the specific game state to the normal game state (the normal end condition is satisfied in the section display second process by the main controller 101 A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the fact),
with
The specific end means, based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means in the specific gaming state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means Regardless of the presence or absence of the number, it is intended to shift from the specific game state to the normal game state,
The counting of the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means is started after the start condition is met, while the counting of the execution number ascertained by the first ascertaining means is started after the start condition is satisfied. The game machine according to any one of features GJ1 to GJ4, characterized in that the game is started before the condition is established.

If the feature GJ1 is applied to the gaming machine with the above configuration, the significance of counting the pre-states is further clarified.

It should be noted that ``the counting of the number of executions ascertained by the first ascertaining means is started before the start condition is satisfied'' is more specifically The counting of the number of executions is started before the start condition is met and from the transition to the specific game state."

Feature GJ6. Means capable of executing specific notification of the corresponding information corresponding to the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means (processing for notifying based on the number-of-games-before-start command by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features GJ1 to GJ5, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the number of executions of the preliminary state by the specific notification. As a result, it becomes possible to predict the degree of remaining benefits obtained in the specific game state in relation to the upper limit number, and it is possible to make use of this in selecting a gaming machine.

Feature GJ7. It is characterized by comprising a means (a function of executing the process of step S16106 by the main controller 101) capable of outputting the correspondence information corresponding to the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means to an external device. A gaming machine according to any one of features GJ1 to GJ6.

As an external device, for example, a hall computer or a data device in a game hall is assumed. It is possible to clearly grasp the remaining benefits of the specific game state, which cannot be grasped only by the notification of the specific notification means. Therefore, for example, when a game machine closes, a gaming machine with few remaining benefits of the specific game state is reset, and the like can be used as information for eliminating the disadvantage suffered by the player.

Feature GJ8. The difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the specific game state and the number of used game media used in each game reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number. Based on this, the second specific end means for shifting from the specific game state to the normal game state (in the second section display process by the main controller 101, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit increase number A gaming machine according to any one of features GJ1 to GJ7, characterized by comprising a function of executing processing.

According to the above configuration, after the transition to the specific game state, if the increase/decrease number, which is the difference between the number of paid out game media and the number of used game media, reaches the upper limit increase number, the game is forcibly terminated. It is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the advantage exceeds the content intended by the designer. In such a configuration, when the number of game media decreases in the pre-state and increases after the start condition is met, the decrease in the pre-state reaches the upper limit number after the start condition is met. As a result, the game situation in the pre-state greatly affects the benefit after the start condition is established. In this regard, since the number of executions of the pre-state is grasped as in the above feature GJ1, it is possible to perform notification according to the benefits after the above-mentioned starting condition is established, etc., based on the contents thereof.

When the above configuration is applied to the feature GJ1, the "specific termination means" of the feature GJ1 should be read as the "first specific termination means".

<Characteristic GK group>
Features GK1. As the game state, a low expectation state (normal section) and a high expectation state (advantageous section) in which the degree of expectation for acquiring game media is relatively high and low are set.
The increase/decrease number, which is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the high expectation state and the number of game media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number. specific end means for ending the high expectation state and transitioning to the low expectation state based on the fact (in the second section display processing by the main controller 101, the advantageous section is ended by reaching the upper limit increase number function to execute processing),
The high-expectation state includes a pre-high-expectation state (preliminary section such as challenge mode) in which a decrease in game media can be expected in each game, followed by a substantially high-expectation state in which an increase in game media can be expected in each game (attack mode, etc.). It is a configuration that can shift to the real increase section),
Grasping means (pre-start game number MG) for grasping the execution number of the pre-high expectation state;
Correspondence notification executing means (first game number command before start by display control device 81, second start A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high expectation state and a low expectation state in which the degree of expectation for acquisition of game media is relatively high and low. Regardless, it may be forcibly terminated, so it is suppressed that the advantage of the high expectation state is extremely increased. The high-expectation state is a state in which the game media can decrease in each game, and then transitions to a substantially high-expectation state in which the game media can increase in each game. , the increase from the transition to the substantially high expectation state to the upper limit increase number is added, and the gaming situation in the advance high expectation state greatly affects the benefits of the substantially high expectation state. In other words, the longer the period during which the game media decrease occurs, the greater the benefits afterward. It is possible to eliminate the frustration of the player that the transition to the substantially high expectation state does not occur. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above configuration, "remaining number grasping means (advantageous interval remaining game number ZG) for grasping the number of games remaining until a predetermined end condition of the high expectation state is satisfied, and the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Based on the number, normal end means for ending the high expectation state and transitioning to the low expectation state (in the second section display processing by the main controller 101, the advantageous section is ended without the forced termination condition being satisfied) function to execute processing), and the ``specific ending means'' is set to ``regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, according to the game result of each game in the high expectation state. Based on the fact that the number of increases or decreases, which is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game media payout and the number of game media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, the high expectation state is changed. It may be expressed as "a specific termination means for terminating and shifting to the low expectation state".

Feature GK2. The correspondence notification execution means is capable of executing, as the correspondence notification, upper limit notification of information (display of increasing expected number of sheets!!) regarding an upper limit that can be increased in the substantially high expectation state thereafter. The gaming machine described in feature GK1.

According to the above configuration, the response notification directly expresses the upper limit of the benefit that can be received in the subsequent high expectation state, and it is possible to preferably expect the effect of eliminating frustration in the advance high expectation state. If it is a direct expression, the purpose of the game is to acquire game media according to the result of each game and expect an increase in game media, so it is difficult to end the game in the state of high prior expectations. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to support the decision-making to continue the game.

Feature GK3. a second grasping means (advantageous interval game number AG) for grasping the number of executions of the high expectation state;
A second specific end of ending the high expectation state and transitioning to the low expectation state based on the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means reaching a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500). means (a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section when a forced termination condition is satisfied in the section display second process by the main controller 101);
with
The gaming machine according to feature GK1 or feature GK2, wherein the second specific termination means terminates the high expectation state even if the increase/decrease number does not reach the upper limit increase number.

According to the above configuration, when the number of games executed in the high expectation state reaches the upper limit number of games, the game is forcibly terminated even if the number of increase/decrease in game media does not reach the upper limit increase number. It is not the case that the larger the number, the greater the number of possible increases in the high-expectation state, and there is a trade-off with the number of executions in the high-expectation state. By doing so, in the advance high expectation state, up to which stage the number of increases that can be increased in the substantial high expectation state increases, and from which stage it becomes subject to forced termination by the second specific termination means and the upper limit is increased The game can be enjoyed while taking into consideration the content that the number of characters will not be reached. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the need for the correspondence notification regarding the number of executions of the prior high-expectation state grasped by the grasping means and the interest in the state notice.

Feature GK4. The correspondence notification execution means includes an upper limit notification means capable of, as the correspondence notification, upper limit notification of information (display of increasing expected number of sheets!!) regarding an upper limit that can be increased in the substantially high expectation state after that,
The upper limit notification means determines the number of used game media to be used in each game from the expected payout number of game media that can be expected to be paid out according to the game result of each game when the substantially high expectation state for the first number of games is executed. and the second number of games obtained by subtracting the first number of games from the upper limit number of games, and the number of game media used in each game when the pre-high expectation state of the second number of games is executed. The upper limit notification in the advance high expectation state can be executed until the branch game where the total of the actual decrease after subtracting the expected payout number of game media that can be expected to be paid out according to the game result is the upper limit increase number. The gaming machine according to feature GK3, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, in relation to the feature GK3, the upper limit notification is performed within a range that does not lie. By doing so, it is possible to increase the credibility of the upper limit notification and further enhance the effect of encouraging the continuation of the game by the upper limit notification.

Feature GK5. A substantial increase obtained by subtracting the number of game media used in each game from the expected number of game media payout that can be expected to be paid out according to the game result of each game when the substantially high expectation state for the first number of games is executed. and according to the game result of each game from the number of game media used in each game when the preliminary high expectation state of the second number of games obtained by subtracting the first number of games from the upper limit number of games is executed After the pre-existing high expectation state of the branching game, in which the sum of the actual decrease minus the expected payout amount of the game media that can be expected to be paid out and the actual increase amount is the upper limit increase amount, is shifted to the substantial high expectation state. The gaming machine according to feature GK3 or feature GK4, characterized in that the degree of expectation tends to be higher than before the branching game.

According to the above configuration, in relation to the characteristic GK3, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game even after the branch game. In other words, after the branching game, although the number of increases that can be substantially increased decreases, the probability of transition to a substantially high expectation state increases, so the increase in game media can be expected relatively easily, and the number of game media can be expected to increase relatively easily. The significance of playing games after the game is enhanced.

Feature GK6. In the preliminary high-expectation state after the branching game, a predetermined notification means is used to notify information (display of increasing odds of winning!) regarding that the probability of transition to the substantial high-expectation state is likely to increase. A gaming machine according to feature GK5, characterized in that it comprises executable means.

According to the above configuration, since it is notified that the state is likely to shift to a substantially high expectation state, even if the branch game is exceeded, the effect of eliminating frustration in the prior high expectation state is preferable. And with such a direct expression, from the point of view of gaining game media according to the result of each game and expecting an increase in game media, beyond the branch game It is possible to make it difficult to end the game in a state of prior high expectation even in a situation where the player is in the state of being in a state of high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to support the decision-making to continue the game.

Feature GK7. Any one of the features GK1 to GK6, characterized by comprising an initialization means (a function of executing a reset process by the main controller 101) capable of initializing at least the information of the increase/decrease by a predetermined operation. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, while creating a game like the feature GK1, for example, when there is almost no benefit of a substantially high expectation state, the player can receive sufficient benefit by playing the game. It is possible to eliminate the disadvantage of the player in such a situation.

It should be noted that the ``predetermined operation'' preferably has a configuration that does not allow the player to freely operate it, and ``an operation means (reset button) for performing the predetermined operation is provided, and the operation means is configured to be operated by the player. It is preferable to use a configuration in which it is provided in an impossible or difficult position, or a predetermined operation according to the lottery result of each game.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature AA group to feature GK group to each configuration of the feature AA group to feature GK group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a final stop after variably displaying the symbol row; A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine as a game machine, 32... Reel as a revolving body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker constituting an auxiliary effect part, 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (1)

a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal game state and a specific game state which is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
In the normal game state, a transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the specific game state;
A specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state;
Based on the game state transitions to the specific game state, or the game state transitions to the specific game state, start notification by the specific notification means based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the specific game a specific game state notification means for terminating the notification by the specific notification means based on the termination of the state;
Advantageous determination means for determining whether or not to cause an advantageous event advantageous to the player in the specific game state;
with
The specific game state notification means continues the notification by the specific notification means at least until the advantageous event occurs when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a corresponding result that causes the advantageous event. and
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising an extension means for performing an extension process of the specific game state when the result of the advantageous determination is a non-corresponding result that the advantageous event does not occur.

Images